Mylan Pharmaceuticals Inc.

Manufacturer Details

There are currently no manufacturer details available.

Mylan Pharmaceuticals Inc. Drugs

Cover-expert Sunscreen ...

Cover-expert Sunscreen Broad Spectrum Spf 15 No.5 Peach Beige

2.1 General Dosing Information

Dose range: 20 mg to 80 mg/day.

Fluvastatin sodium extended-release tablets can be administered orally as a single dose, with or without food.

Do not break, crush or chew fluvastatin sodium extended-release tablets prior to administration.

Do not take two fluvastatin 40 mg capsules at one time.

Since the maximal effect of a given dose is seen within 4 weeks, periodic lipid determinations should be performed at this time and dosage adjusted according to the patient’s response to therapy and established treatment guidelines.

For patients requiring LDL-C reduction to a goal of ≥ 25%, the recommended starting dose is 40 mg as one capsule in the evening, 80 mg as one fluvastatin sodium extended-release tablet administered as a single dose at any time of the day or 80 mg in divided doses of the 40 mg capsule given twice daily. For patients requiring LDL-C reduction to a goal of < 25% a starting dose of 20 mg may be used.

2.2 Adult Patients with Hypercholesterolemia (Heterozygous Familial and Nonfamilial) and Mixed Dyslipidemia

Adult patients can be started on either fluvastatin capsules or fluvastatin sodium extended-release tablets. The recommended starting dose for fluvastatin capsules is one 40 mg capsule in the evening, or one fluvastatin 40 mg capsule twice daily. Do not take two fluvastatin 40 mg capsules at one time.

The recommended starting dose for fluvastatin sodium extended-release tablets is one 80 mg tablet administered as a single dose at any time of the day.

2.3 Pediatric Patients (10 to 16 Years of Age) with Heterozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The recommended starting dose is one 20 mg fluvastatin capsule. Dose adjustments, up to a maximum daily dose administered either as fluvastatin capsules 40 mg twice daily or one fluvastatin sodium extended-release 80 mg tablet once daily should be made at 6 week intervals. Doses should be individualized according to the goal of therapy [see NCEP Pediatric Panel Guidelines and Clinical Studies (14)]1.
1 National Cholesterol Education Program (NCEP): Highlights of the Report of the Expert Panel on Blood Cholesterol Levels in Children and Adolescents. Pediatrics. 89(3):495-501. 1992.
2.4 Use with Cyclosporine

Do not exceed a dose of 20 mg BID fluvastatin in patients taking cyclosporine [see Drug Interactions (7.1)].

2.5 Use with Fluconazole

Do not exceed a dose of 20 mg BID fluvastatin in patients taking fluconazole [see Drug Interactions (7.2)].
Dexmethylphenidate Hydr...

Dexmethylphenidate Hydrochloride

Dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules are for oral administration once daily in the morning.

Dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules may be swallowed as whole capsules or alternatively may be administered by sprinkling the capsule contents on a small amount of applesauce (see specific instructions below). Dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules and/or their contents should not be crushed, chewed, or divided.

The capsules may be carefully opened and the beads sprinkled over a spoonful of applesauce. The mixture of drug and applesauce should be consumed immediately in its entirety. The drug and applesauce mixture should not be stored for future use.

Dosage should be individualized according to the needs and responses of the patient.

2.1 Patients New to Methylphenidate

The recommended starting dose of dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules for patients who are not currently taking dexmethylphenidate or racemic methylphenidate, or for patients who are on stimulants other than methylphenidate, is 5 mg/day for pediatric patients and 10 mg/day for adult patients.

Dosage may be adjusted in 5 mg increments for pediatric patients and in 10 mg increments for adult patients. In general, dosage adjustments may proceed at approximately weekly intervals. The patient should be observed for a sufficient duration at a given dose to ensure that a maximal benefit has been achieved before a dose increase is considered. In dose-response (fixed-dose) studies (pediatric from 10 to 30 mg/day and adult from 20 to 40 mg/day), all doses were effective vs. placebo. There was no clear finding, however, of greater average benefits for the higher doses compared to the lower doses. Adverse events and discontinuations, however, were dose related. Doses above 30 mg/day in pediatrics and 40 mg/day in adults have not been studied and are not recommended.

2.2 Patients Currently Using Methylphenidate

For patients currently using methylphenidate, the recommended starting dose of dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules is half the total daily dose of racemic methylphenidate. Patients currently using dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride tablets may be switched to the same daily dose of dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules.

2.3 Maintenance/Extended Treatment

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to indicate how long the patient with ADHD should be treated with dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules. It is generally agreed, however, that pharmacological treatment of ADHD may be needed for extended periods. Nevertheless, the physician who elects to use dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules for extended periods in patients with ADHD should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient with periods off medication to assess the patient’s functioning without pharmacotherapy. Improvement may be sustained when the drug is either temporarily or permanently discontinued.

2.4 Dose Reduction and Discontinuation

If paradoxical aggravation of symptoms or other adverse events occur, the dosage should be reduced, or, if necessary, the drug should be discontinued.

If improvement is not observed after appropriate dosage adjustment over a one month period, the drug should be discontinued.
Dexmethylphenidate Hydr...

Dexmethylphenidate Hydrochloride

Dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules are for oral administration once daily in the morning.

Dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules may be swallowed as whole capsules or alternatively may be administered by sprinkling the capsule contents on a small amount of applesauce (see specific instructions below). Dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules and/or their contents should not be crushed, chewed, or divided.

The capsules may be carefully opened and the beads sprinkled over a spoonful of applesauce. The mixture of drug and applesauce should be consumed immediately in its entirety. The drug and applesauce mixture should not be stored for future use.

Dosage should be individualized according to the needs and responses of the patient.

2.1 Patients New to Methylphenidate

The recommended starting dose of dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules for patients who are not currently taking dexmethylphenidate or racemic methylphenidate, or for patients who are on stimulants other than methylphenidate, is 5 mg/day for pediatric patients and 10 mg/day for adult patients.

Dosage may be adjusted in 5 mg increments for pediatric patients and in 10 mg increments for adult patients. In general, dosage adjustments may proceed at approximately weekly intervals. The patient should be observed for a sufficient duration at a given dose to ensure that a maximal benefit has been achieved before a dose increase is considered. In dose-response (fixed-dose) studies (pediatric from 10 to 30 mg/day and adult from 20 to 40 mg/day), all doses were effective vs. placebo. There was no clear finding, however, of greater average benefits for the higher doses compared to the lower doses. Adverse events and discontinuations, however, were dose related. Doses above 30 mg/day in pediatrics and 40 mg/day in adults have not been studied and are not recommended.

2.2 Patients Currently Using Methylphenidate

For patients currently using methylphenidate, the recommended starting dose of dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules is half the total daily dose of racemic methylphenidate. Patients currently using dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride tablets may be switched to the same daily dose of dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules.

2.3 Maintenance/Extended Treatment

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to indicate how long the patient with ADHD should be treated with dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules. It is generally agreed, however, that pharmacological treatment of ADHD may be needed for extended periods. Nevertheless, the physician who elects to use dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules for extended periods in patients with ADHD should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient with periods off medication to assess the patient’s functioning without pharmacotherapy. Improvement may be sustained when the drug is either temporarily or permanently discontinued.

2.4 Dose Reduction and Discontinuation

If paradoxical aggravation of symptoms or other adverse events occur, the dosage should be reduced, or, if necessary, the drug should be discontinued.

If improvement is not observed after appropriate dosage adjustment over a one month period, the drug should be discontinued.
Dexmethylphenidate Hydr...

Dexmethylphenidate Hydrochloride

Dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules are for oral administration once daily in the morning.

Dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules may be swallowed as whole capsules or alternatively may be administered by sprinkling the capsule contents on a small amount of applesauce (see specific instructions below). Dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules and/or their contents should not be crushed, chewed, or divided.

The capsules may be carefully opened and the beads sprinkled over a spoonful of applesauce. The mixture of drug and applesauce should be consumed immediately in its entirety. The drug and applesauce mixture should not be stored for future use.

Dosage should be individualized according to the needs and responses of the patient.

2.1 Patients New to Methylphenidate

The recommended starting dose of dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules for patients who are not currently taking dexmethylphenidate or racemic methylphenidate, or for patients who are on stimulants other than methylphenidate, is 5 mg/day for pediatric patients and 10 mg/day for adult patients.

Dosage may be adjusted in 5 mg increments for pediatric patients and in 10 mg increments for adult patients. In general, dosage adjustments may proceed at approximately weekly intervals. The patient should be observed for a sufficient duration at a given dose to ensure that a maximal benefit has been achieved before a dose increase is considered. In dose-response (fixed-dose) studies (pediatric from 10 to 30 mg/day and adult from 20 to 40 mg/day), all doses were effective vs. placebo. There was no clear finding, however, of greater average benefits for the higher doses compared to the lower doses. Adverse events and discontinuations, however, were dose related. Doses above 30 mg/day in pediatrics and 40 mg/day in adults have not been studied and are not recommended.

2.2 Patients Currently Using Methylphenidate

For patients currently using methylphenidate, the recommended starting dose of dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules is half the total daily dose of racemic methylphenidate. Patients currently using dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride tablets may be switched to the same daily dose of dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules.

2.3 Maintenance/Extended Treatment

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to indicate how long the patient with ADHD should be treated with dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules. It is generally agreed, however, that pharmacological treatment of ADHD may be needed for extended periods. Nevertheless, the physician who elects to use dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules for extended periods in patients with ADHD should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient with periods off medication to assess the patient’s functioning without pharmacotherapy. Improvement may be sustained when the drug is either temporarily or permanently discontinued.

2.4 Dose Reduction and Discontinuation

If paradoxical aggravation of symptoms or other adverse events occur, the dosage should be reduced, or, if necessary, the drug should be discontinued.

If improvement is not observed after appropriate dosage adjustment over a one month period, the drug should be discontinued.
Bexarotene

Bexarotene

The recommended initial dose of Bexarotene capsules is 300 mg/m2/day. (See Table 4.) Bexarotene capsules should be taken as a single oral daily dose with a meal. See CONTRAINDICATIONS: Pregnancy: Category X section for precautions to prevent pregnancy and birth defects in women of child-bearing potential.
Table 4. Bexarotene Capsule Initial Dose Calculation According to Body Surface Area
Initial Dose Level (300 mg/m2/day)

Body Surface Area (m2)

Total Daily Dose (mg/day)

Number of 75 mg Bexarotene Capsules

0.88 - 1.12

300

4

1.13 - 1.37

375

5

1.38 - 1.62

450

6

1.63 - 1.87

525

7

1.88 - 2.12

600

8

2.13 - 2.37

675

9

2.38 - 2.62

750

10

Dose Modification Guidelines

The 300 mg/m2/day dose level of Bexarotene capsules may be adjusted to 200 mg/m2/day then to 100 mg/m2/day, or temporarily suspended, if necessitated by toxicity. When toxicity is controlled, doses may be carefully readjusted upward. If there is no tumor response after 8 weeks of treatment and if the initial dose of 300 mg/m2/day is well tolerated, the dose may be escalated to 400 mg/m2/day with careful monitoring.

Duration of Therapy

In clinical trials in CTCL, Bexarotene capsules were administered for up to 97 weeks.

Bexarotene capsules should be continued as long as the patient is deriving benefit.
Amlodipine And Benazepr...

Amlodipine And Benazepril Hydrochloride

2.1 General Considerations

The recommended initial dose of amlodipine and benazepril hydrochloride capsules is one capsule of amlodipine 2.5 mg/benazepril 10 mg orally once-daily.

It is usually appropriate to begin therapy with amlodipine and benazepril hydrochloride capsules only after a patient has either (a) failed to achieve the desired antihypertensive effect with amlodipine or benazepril monotherapy, or (b) demonstrated inability to achieve adequate antihypertensive effect with amlodipine therapy without developing edema.

The antihypertensive effect of amlodipine and benazepril hydrochloride capsules is largely attained within 2 weeks. If blood pressure remains uncontrolled, the dose may be titrated up to amlodipine 10 mg/benazepril 40 mg once-daily. The dosing should be individualized and adjusted according to the patient’s clinical response.

Amlodipine is an effective treatment of hypertension in once-daily doses of 2.5 mg to 10 mg while benazepril is effective in doses of 10 mg to 80 mg. In clinical trials of amlodipine/benazepril combination therapy using amlodipine doses of 2.5 mg to 10 mg and benazepril doses of 10 mg to 40 mg, the antihypertensive effects increased with increasing dose of amlodipine in all patient groups, and the effects increased with increasing dose of benazepril in nonblack groups.

2.2 Dosage Adjustment in Renal Impairment

Renal Impairment

Amlodipine and benazepril hydrochloride capsules are not recommended in patients with creatinine clearance (CrCl) less than or equal to 30 mL/min. No dose adjustment of amlodipine and benazepril hydrochloride capsules is required in patients with CrCl greater than 30 mL/min/1.73m2 (serum creatinine roughly less than or equal to 3 mg/dL or 265 µmol/L) [see Warnings and Precautions (5.7), Use in Specific Populations (8.7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 Replacement Therapy

Amlodipine and benazepril hydrochloride capsules may be substituted for the titrated components.
Amlodipine Besylate And...

Amlodipine Besylate And Valsartan

2.1 General Considerations

Dose once daily. The dosage can be increased after 1 to 2 weeks of therapy to a maximum of one 10 mg/320 mg tablet once daily as needed to control blood pressure. The majority of the antihypertensive effect is attained within 2 weeks after initiation of therapy or a change in dose.

Amlodipine and valsartan tablets may be administered with or without food.

Amlodipine and valsartan tablets may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.

2.2 Add-on Therapy

A patient whose blood pressure is not adequately controlled with amlodipine (or another dihydropyridine calcium-channel blocker) alone or with valsartan (or another angiotensin II receptor blocker) alone may be switched to combination therapy with amlodipine and valsartan tablets.

A patient who experiences dose-limiting adverse reactions on either component alone may be switched to amlodipine and valsartan tablets containing a lower dose of that component in combination with the other to achieve similar blood pressure reductions. The clinical response to amlodipine and valsartan tablets should be subsequently evaluated and if blood pressure remains uncontrolled after 3 to 4 weeks of therapy, the dose may be titrated up to a maximum of 10 mg/320 mg.

2.3 Replacement Therapy

For convenience, patients receiving amlodipine and valsartan from separate tablets may instead wish to receive tablets of amlodipine and valsartan containing the same component doses.

2.4 Initial Therapy

A patient may be initiated on amlodipine and valsartan tablets if it is unlikely that control of blood pressure would be achieved with a single agent. The usual starting dose is amlodipine and valsartan 5 mg/160 mg once daily in patients who are not volume-depleted.
Gabapentin

Gabapentin

Levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets, USP

To achieve maximum contraceptive effectiveness, levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets must be taken exactly as directed at intervals not exceeding 24-hours.

Levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets are a monophasic preparation plus 7 inert tablets. The dosage of levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets is one tablet daily for 21 consecutive days per menstrual cycle plus 7 green inert tablets according to the prescribed schedule. It is recommended that levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets be taken at the same time each day, preferably after the evening meal or at bedtime. During the first cycle of medication, the patient should be instructed to take one white to off-white levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablet daily and then 7 green inert tablets for twenty-eight (28) consecutive days, beginning on day one (1) of her menstrual cycle. (The first day of menstruation is day one.) Withdrawal bleeding usually occurs within 3 days following the last white to off-white tablet. (If levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets are first taken later than the first day of the first menstrual cycle of medication or postpartum, contraceptive reliance should not be placed on levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets until after the first 7 consecutive days of administration. The possibility of ovulation and conception prior to initiation of medication should be considered.)

When switching from another oral contraceptive, levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets should be started on the first day of bleeding following the last active tablet taken of the previous oral contraceptive.

The patient begins her next and all subsequent 28-day courses of levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets on the same day of the week that she began her first course, following the same schedule. She begins taking her white to off-white tablets on the next day after ingestion of the last green tablet, regardless of whether or not a menstrual period has occurred or is still in progress.

Anytime a subsequent cycle of levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets is started later than the next day, the patient should be protected by another means of contraception until she has taken a tablet daily for seven consecutive days.

If spotting or breakthrough bleeding occurs, the patient is instructed to continue on the same regimen. This type of bleeding is usually transient and without significance, however, if the bleeding is persistent or prolonged, the patient is advised to consult her physician. Although the occurrence of pregnancy is highly unlikely if levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets are taken according to directions, if withdrawal bleeding does not occur, the possibility of pregnancy must be considered. If the patient has not adhered to the prescribed schedule (missed one or more active tablets or started taking them on a day later than she should have), the probability of pregnancy should be considered at the time of the first missed period and appropriate diagnostic measures taken before the medication is resumed. If the patient has adhered to the prescribed regimen and misses two consecutive periods, pregnancy should be ruled out before continuing the contraceptive regimen.

The risk of pregnancy increases with each active (white to off-white) tablet missed. For additional patient instructions regarding missed pills, see the "WHAT TO DO IF YOU MISS PILLS" section in the DETAILED PATIENT LABELING below. If breakthrough bleeding occurs following missed tablets, it will usually be transient and of no consequence. If the patient misses one or more green tablets, she is still protected against pregnancy provided she begins taking white to off-white tablets again on the proper day.

In the nonlactating mother, levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets may be initiated postpartum, for contraception. When the tablets are administered in the postpartum period, the increased risk of thromboembolic disease associated with the postpartum period must be considered. (See "CONTRAINDICATIONS," "WARNINGS," and PRECAUTIONS" concerning thromboembolic disease.) It is to be noted that early resumption of ovulation may occur if bromocriptine mesylate has been used for the prevention of lactation.
Foamy Med-i-san

Foamy Med-i-san

2.1 Recommendations for All Patients

Pioglitazone tablets should be taken once daily and can be taken without regard to meals.

The recommended starting dose for patients without congestive heart failure is 15 mg or 30 mg once daily.

The recommended starting dose for patients with congestive heart failure (NYHA Class I or II) is 15 mg once daily.

The dose can be titrated in increments of 15 mg up to a maximum of 45 mg once daily based on glycemic response as determined by HbA1c.

After initiation of pioglitazone tablets or with dose increase, monitor patients carefully for adverse reactions related to fluid retention such as weight gain, edema and signs and symptoms of congestive heart failure [see Boxed Warning and Warnings and Precautions (5.5)].

Liver tests (serum alanine and aspartate aminotransferases, alkaline phosphatase and total bilirubin) should be obtained prior to initiating pioglitazone tablets. Routine periodic monitoring of liver tests during treatment with pioglitazone tablets are not recommended in patients without liver disease. Patients who have liver test abnormalities prior to initiation of pioglitazone tablets or who are found to have abnormal liver tests while taking pioglitazone tablets should be managed as described under Warnings and Precautions [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.2 Concomitant Use with an Insulin Secretagogue or Insulin

If hypoglycemia occurs in a patient coadministered pioglitazone tablets and an insulin secretagogue (e.g., sulfonylurea), the dose of the insulin secretagogue should be reduced.

If hypoglycemia occurs in a patient coadministered pioglitazone tablets and insulin, the dose of insulin should be decreased by 10% to 25%. Further adjustments to the insulin dose should be individualized based on glycemic response.

2.3 Concomitant Use with Strong CYP2C8 Inhibitors

Coadministration of pioglitazone tablets and gemfibrozil, a strong CYP2C8 inhibitor, increases pioglitazone exposure approximately 3-fold. Therefore, the maximum recommended dose of pioglitazone tablets is 15 mg daily when used in combination with gemfibrozil or other strong CYP2C8 inhibitors [see Drug Interactions (7.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Cyclobenzaprine Hydroch...

Cyclobenzaprine Hydrochloride

Disulfiram should never be administered until the patient has abstained from alcohol for at least 12 hours.

Initial Dosage Schedule

In the first phase of treatment, a maximum of 500 mg daily is given in a single dose for 1 to 2 weeks. Although usually taken in the morning, disulfiram may be taken on retiring by patients who experience a sedative effect. Alternatively, to minimize, or eliminate, the sedative effect, dosage may be adjusted downward.

Maintenance Regimen

The average maintenance dose is 250 mg daily (range, 125 mg to 500 mg), it should not exceed 500 mg daily.

Note:Occasionally patients, while seemingly on adequate maintenance doses of disulfiram, report that they are able to drink alcoholic beverages with impunity and without any symptomatology. All appearances to the contrary, such patients must be presumed to be disposing of their tablets in some manner without actually taking them. Until such patients have been observed reliably taking their daily disulfiram tablets (preferably crushed and well mixed with liquid), it cannot be concluded that disulfiram is ineffective.

Duration of Therapy

The daily, uninterrupted administration of disulfiram must be continued until the patient is fully recovered socially and a basis for permanent self-control is established. Depending on the individual patient, maintenance therapy may be required for months or even years.

Trial with Alcohol

During early experience with disulfiram, it was thought advisable for each patient to have at least one supervised alcohol-drug reaction. More recently, the test reaction has been largely abandoned. Furthermore, such a test reaction should never be administered to a patient over 50 years of age. A clear, detailed and convincing description of the reaction is felt to be sufficient in most cases.

However, where a test reaction is deemed necessary, the suggested procedure is as follows:

After the first 1 to 2 weeks’ therapy with 500 mg daily, a drink of 15 mL (1/2 oz) of 100 proof whiskey, or equivalent, is taken slowly. This test dose of alcoholic beverage may be repeated once only, so that the total dose does not exceed 30 mL (1 oz) of whiskey. Once a reaction develops, no more alcohol should be consumed. Such tests should be carried out only when the patient is hospitalized, or comparable supervision and facilities, including oxygen, are available.

Management of Disulfiram-Alcohol Reaction

In severe reactions, whether caused by an excessive test dose or by the patient’s unsupervised ingestion of alcohol, supportive measures to restore blood pressure and treat shock should be instituted. Other recommendations include: oxygen, carbogen (95% oxygen and 5% carbon dioxide), vitamin C intravenously in massive doses (1 g) and ephedrine sulfate. Antihistamines have also been used intravenously. Potassium levels should be monitored, particularly in patients on digitalis, since hypokalemia has been reported.
Lamivudine

Lamivudine

2.1HIV Counseling and Testing

HIV counseling and testing should be offered to all patients before beginning treatment with lamivudine tablets and periodically during treatment because of the risk of emergence of resistant-HIV-1 and limitation of treatment options if lamivudine tablets are prescribed to treat chronic hepatitis B infection in a patient who has unrecognized HIV-1 infection or acquires HIV-1 infection during treatment [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].

2.2Dosage in Adult Patients

The recommended oral dosage of lamivudine tablets is 100 mg once daily.

2.3Dosage in Pediatric Patients

The recommended oral dosage of lamivudine tablets for pediatric patients aged 2 to 17 years is 3 mg per kg once daily up to a maximum daily dosage of 100 mg. The oral solution formulation should be prescribed for patients requiring a dosage less than 100 mg or if unable to swallow tablets.

2.4Dosage Adjustment in Adult Patients with Renal Impairment

Dosage recommendations for adult patients with reduced renal function are provided in Table 1 [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Table 1. Dosage of Lamivudine in Adult Patients with Renal Impairment
Creatinine Clearance (mL/min)

Recommended Dosage of Lamivudine

≥ 50

100 mg once daily

30 to 49

100 mg first dose, then 50 mg once daily

15 to 29

100 mg first dose, then 25 mg once daily

5 to 14

35 mg first dose, then 15 mg once daily

< 5

35 mg first dose, then 10 mg once daily

Following correction of the dosage for renal impairment, no additional dosage modification of lamivudine tablets is required after routine (4-hour) hemodialysis or peritoneal dialysis [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

There are insufficient data to recommend a specific dosage of lamivudine tablets in pediatric patients with renal impairment.

2.5Important Administration Instructions
• Lamivudine tablets may be administered with or without food. • The tablets and oral solution may be used interchangeably [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. • The oral solution should be used for doses less than 100 mg. • Lamivudine tablets should not be used with other medications that contain lamivudine or medications that contain emtricitabine [see Warnings and Precautions (5.4)].
2.6Assessing Patients During Treatment

Patients should be monitored regularly during treatment by a physician experienced in the management of chronic hepatitis B. During treatment, combinations of such events such as return of persistently elevated ALT, increasing levels of HBV DNA over time after an initial decline below assay limit, progression of clinical signs or symptoms of hepatic disease, and/or worsening of hepatic necroinflammatory findings may be considered as potentially reflecting loss of therapeutic response. Such observations should be taken into consideration when determining the advisability of continuing therapy with lamivudine tablets.

The optimal duration of treatment, the durability of HBeAg seroconversions occurring during treatment, and the relationship between treatment response and long-term outcomes such as hepatocellular carcinoma or decompensated cirrhosis are not known.
Oxybutynin Chloride

Oxybutynin Chloride

2.1 Recommended Dosing

Dosage of prednisolone sodium phosphate orally disintegrating tablets should be individualized according to the severity of the disease and the response of the patient. For pediatric patients, the recommended dosage should be governed by the same considerations rather than strict adherence to the ratio indicated by age or body weight.

Do not break or use partial prednisolone sodium phosphate orally disintegrating tablets. Use an appropriate formulation of prednisolone if indicated dose cannot be obtained using prednisolone sodium phosphate orally disintegrating tablets. This may become important in the treatment of conditions that require tapering doses that cannot be adequately accommodated by prednisolone sodium phosphate orally disintegrating tablets, e.g., tapering the dose below 10 mg.

The initial dose of prednisolone sodium phosphate orally disintegrating tablets may vary from 10 mg to 60 mg (prednisolone base) per day, depending on the specific disease entity being treated. In situations of less severity, lower doses will generally suffice while in selected patients higher initial doses may be required. The initial dosage should be maintained or adjusted until a satisfactory response is noted. If after a reasonable period of time, there is a lack of satisfactory clinical response, prednisolone sodium phosphate orally disintegrating tablets should be discontinued and the patient placed on other appropriate therapy. IT SHOULD BE EMPHASIZED THAT DOSAGE REQUIREMENTS ARE VARIABLE AND MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED ON THE BASIS OF THE DISEASE UNDER TREATMENT AND THE RESPONSE OF THE PATIENT. After a favorable response is noted, the proper maintenance dosage should be determined by decreasing the initial drug dosage in small decrements at appropriate time intervals until the lowest dosage that will maintain an adequate clinical response is reached. It should be kept in mind that constant monitoring is needed in regard to drug dosage. Included in the situations which may make dosage adjustments necessary are changes in clinical status secondary to remissions or exacerbations in the disease process, the patient’s individual drug responsiveness, and the effect of patient exposure to stressful situations not directly related to the disease entity under treatment; in this latter situation it may be necessary to increase the dosage of prednisolone sodium phosphate orally disintegrating tablets for a period of time consistent with the patient’s condition. If after long-term therapy the drug is to be stopped, it is recommended that it be withdrawn gradually rather than abruptly.

Prednisolone sodium phosphate orally disintegrating tablets are packaged in a bottle. For patients dispensed a bottle, they should be instructed not to remove the tablet from the bottle until just prior to dosing. The bottle should then be opened, and the orally disintegrating tablet placed on the tongue, where tablets may be swallowed whole as any conventional tablet, or allowed to dissolve in the mouth, with or without the assistance of water. Orally disintegrating tablet dosage forms are friable and are not intended to be cut, split or broken.

Multiple Sclerosis

In the treatment of acute exacerbations of multiple sclerosis, daily doses of 200 mg of prednisolone for a week followed by 80 mg every other day for one month have been shown to be effective.

Pediatric

In pediatric patients, the initial dose of prednisolone sodium phosphate orally disintegrating tablets may vary depending on the specific disease entity being treated. The range of initial doses is 0.14 to 2 mg/kg/day in three or four divided doses (4 to 60 mg/m2bsa/day).

Nephrotic Syndrome

The standard regimen used to treat nephrotic syndrome in pediatric patients is 60 mg/m2/day given in three divided doses for 4 weeks, followed by 4 weeks of single dose alternate-day therapy at 40 mg/m2/day.

Asthma

The National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute (NHLBI) recommended dosing for systemic prednisone, prednisolone or methylprednisolone in children whose asthma is uncontrolled by inhaled corticosteroids and long-acting bronchodilators is 1 to 2 mg/kg/day in single or divided doses.

It is further recommended that short course, or “burst” therapy, be continued until a child achieves a peak expiratory flow rate of 80% of his or her personal best or symptoms resolve. This usually requires 3 to 10 days of treatment, although it can take longer. There is no evidence that tapering the dose after improvement will prevent a relapse.

2.2 Recommended Monitoring

Blood pressure, body weight, routine laboratory studies, including serum potassium and fasting blood glucose, should be obtained at regular intervals during prolonged therapy. Appropriate diagnostic studies should be performed in patients with known or suspected peptic ulcer disease and in patients at risk for reactivation of latent tuberculosis infections.

2.3 Corticosteroid Comparison Chart

For the purpose of comparison, one 10 mg prednisolone sodium phosphate orally disintegrating tablet (13.4 mg prednisolone sodium phosphate) is equivalent to the following milligram dosage of the various glucocorticoids:

Betamethasone 1.75 mg

Paramethasone 4 mg

Cortisone 50 mg

Prednisolone 10 mg

Dexamethasone 1.75 mg

Prednisone 10 mg

Hydrocortisone 40 mg

Triamcinolone 8 mg

Methylprednisolone 8 mg

These dose relationships apply only to oral or intravenous administration of these compounds. When these substances or their derivatives are injected intramuscularly or into joint spaces, their relative properties may be greatly altered.
Glipizide

Glipizide

The usual dose of Triamterene and Hydrochlorothiazide Tablets 37.5 mg/25 mg is one or two tablets daily, given as a single dose, with appropriate monitoring of serum potassium (see WARNINGS). The usual dose of Triamterene and Hydrochlorothiazide Tablets 75 mg/50 mg is one tablet daily, with appropriate monitoring of serum potassium (see WARNINGS). There is no experience with the use of more than one 75 mg/50 mg (75 mg triamterene and 50 mg hydrochlorothiazide) tablet daily or more than two 37.5 mg/25 mg (37.5 mg triamterene and 25 mg hydrochlorothiazide) tablets daily. Clinical experience with the administration of two 37.5 mg/25 mg tablets daily in divided doses (rather than as a single dose) suggests an increased risk of electrolyte imbalance and renal dysfunction.

Patients receiving 50 mg of hydrochlorothiazide who become hypokalemic may be transferred to this 75 mg/50 mg product directly. Patients receiving 25 mg hydrochlorothiazide who become hypokalemic may be transferred to this 37.5 mg/25 mg product directly.

In patients requiring hydrochlorothiazide therapy and in whom hypokalemia cannot be risked, therapy may be initiated with 37.5 mg/25 mg of triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide. If an optimal blood pressure response is not obtained with 37.5 mg/25 mg of triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide, the dose should be increased to two 37.5 mg/25 mg tablets daily as a single dose, or one 75 mg/50 mg tablet daily. If blood pressure still is not controlled, another antihypertensive agent may be added (see PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions).

Clinical studies have shown that patients taking less bioavailable formulations of triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide in daily doses of 25 mg to 50 mg hydrochlorothiazide and 50 mg to 100 mg triamterene may be safely changed to one triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide 37.5 mg/25 mg tablet daily. All patients changed from less bioavailable formulations to this product should be monitored clinically and for serum potassium after the transfer.
Aceon

Aceon

Caution: Operating rooms should be provided with adequate ventilation to prevent the accumulation of anesthetic vapors.

Premedication: A premedication regimen, which may be employed depending upon the patient status, to avert excitement during induction, might include an anticholinergic, a tranquilizer, a muscle relaxant and a short-acting barbiturate.

Inspired Concentration: The delivered concentration of ISOTHESIA (isoflurane, USP) should be known. Isoflurane may be vaporized using a flow-through vaporizer specifically calibrated for isoflurane. Vaporizers delivering a saturated vapor which then is diluted (e.g. Verni-trol® vaporizer) also may be used. The delivered concentration from such a vaporizer may be calculated using the formula:

% isoflurane = 100 PVFV / FT(PA-PV)

Where: PA = Pressure of atmosphere PV = Vapor pressure of isoflurane FV = Flow of gas through vaporizer (mL/min) FT = Total gas flow used (mL/min)

Isoflurane contains no stabilizer. Nothing in the drug product alters calibration or operation of these vaporizers.

Induction:

Horses: Inspired concentrations of 3.0 to 5.0% isoflurane alone with oxygen following a barbiturate anesthetic induction are usually employed to induce surgical anesthesia in the horse.

Dogs: Inspired concentrations of 2.0 to 2.5% isoflurane alone with oxygen following a barbiturate anesthetic induction are usually employed to induce surgical anesthesia in the dog.

These concentrations can be expected to produce surgical anesthesia in 5 to 10 minutes.

Maintenance: The concentration of vapor necessary to maintain anesthesia is much less than that required to induce it.

Horses: Surgical levels of anesthesia in the horse may be sustained with a 1.5 to 1.8% concentration of isoflurane in oxygen.

Dogs: Surgical levels of anesthesia in the dog may be sustained with a 1.5 to 1.8% concentration of isoflurane in oxygen.

The level of blood pressure during maintenance is an inverse function of isoflurane concentration in the absence of other complicating problems. Excessive decreases, unless related to hypovolemia, may be due to depth of anesthesia and in such instances may be corrected by lightening the level of anesthesia.

Recovery from isoflurane anesthesia is typically uneventful.2
Nitetime Cold And Flu

Nitetime Cold And Flu

• take only as directed – see Liver warning • do not exceed 8 softgels per 24 hours
adults & children 12 yrs & over

2 softgels with water every 6 hrs

children 4 to under 12 yrs

ask a doctor

children under 4 yrs

do not use
• when using other Daytime or Nighttime products, carefully read each label to insure correct dosing
Equi-spectorant

Equi-spectorant

2.1 Important Dosing and Administration Information

In selecting a DIGITEK® (digoxin tablets) dosing regimen, it is important to consider factors that affect digoxin blood levels (e.g., body weight, age, renal function, concomitant drugs) since toxic levels of digoxin are only slightly higher than therapeutic levels. Dosing can be either initiated with a loading dose followed by maintenance dosing if rapid titration is desired or initiated with maintenance dosing without a loading dose.

Consider interruption or reduction in digoxin dose prior to electrical cardioversion [see Warnings and Precautions (5.4)].

Use digoxin solution to obtain the appropriate dose in infants, young pediatric patients or patients with very low body weight.

2.2 Loading Dosing Regimen in Adults and Pediatric Patients

For adults and pediatric patients if a loading dosage is to be given, administer half the total loading dose initially, then ¼ the loading dose every 6 to 8 hours twice, with careful assessment of clinical response and toxicity before each dose. The recommended loading dose is displayed in Table 1.
Table 1. Recommended DIGITEK® (digoxin tablets) Oral Loading Dose
Age

Total Oral Loading Dose (mcg/kg) Administer half the total loading dose initially, then¼ the loading dose every 6 to 8 hours twice

5 years to 10 years

20 to 45

Adults and pediatric patients over 10 years

10 to 15

mcg = micrograms

2.3 Maintenance Dosing in Adults and Pediatric Patients over 10 Years Old

The maintenance dose is based on lean body weight, renal function, age and concomitant products [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

The recommended starting maintenance dose in adults and pediatric patients over 10 years old with normal renal function is given in Table 2. Doses may be increased every 2 weeks according to clinical response, serum drug levels and toxicity.
Table 2. Recommended Starting DIGITEK® (digoxin tablets) Maintenance Dosage in Adults and Pediatric Patients over 10 Years Old
Age

Total Oral Maintenance Dose, mcg/kg/day (given once daily)

Adults and pediatric patients over 10 years

3.4 to 5.1

mcg = micrograms

Table 3 provides the recommended (once daily) maintenance dose for adults and pediatric patients over 10 years old (to be given once daily) according to lean body weight and renal function. The doses are based on studies in adult patients with heart failure. Alternatively, the maintenance dose may be estimated by the following formula (peak body stores lost each day through elimination):

Total Maintenance Dose = Loading Dose (i.e., Peak Body Stores) x % Daily Loss/100(% Daily Loss = 14 + Creatinine clearance/5)

Reduce the dose of DIGITEK® (digoxin tablets) in patients whose lean weight is an abnormally small fraction of their total body mass because of obesity or edema.
Table 3. Recommended Maintenance Dose (in micrograms given once daily) of DIGITEK® (digoxin tablets) in Pediatric Patients Over 10 Years Old and Adults by Lean Body Weight and by Renal Function* * Doses are rounded to the nearest dose possible using whole and/or half DIGITEK ® (digoxin tablets) tablets. Recommended doses approximately 30% lower than the calculated dose are designated with an *. Monitor digoxin levels in patients receiving these initial doses and increase dose if needed. † For adults, creatinine clearance was corrected to 70 kg body weight or 1.73 m 2 body surface area. If only serum creatinine concentrations (Scr) are available, a corrected Ccr may be estimated in men as (140 – Age)/Scr. For women, this result should be multiplied by 0.85. For pediatric patients, the modified Schwartz equation may be used. The formula is based on height in cm and Scr in mg/dL where k is a constant. Ccr is corrected to 1.73 m 2 body surface area. During the first year of life, the value of k is 0.33 for pre-term babies and 0.45 for term infants. The k is 0.55 for pediatric patients and adolescent girls and 0.7 for adolescent boys.GFR (mL/min/1.73 m 2) = (k x Height)/Scr ‡ The doses listed assume average body composition. § If no loading dose administered.
Corrected Creatinine Clearance†

Lean Body Weight‡

Numberof DaysBeforeSteadyStateAchieved§

kg

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

lb

88

110

132

154

176

198

220

10 mL/min

62.5*

125

125

187.5

187.5

187.5

250

19

20 mL/min

125

125

125

187.5

187.5

250

250

16

30 mL/min

125

125

187.5

187.5

250

250

312.5

14

40 mL/min

125

187.5

187.5

250

250

312.5

312.5

13

50 mL/min

125

187.5

187.5

250

250

312.5

312.5

12

60 mL/min

125

187.5

250

250

312.5

312.5

375

11

70 mL/min

187.5

187.5

250

250

312.5

375

375

10

80 mL/min

187.5

187.5

250

312.5

312.5

375

437.5

9

90 mL/min

187.5

250

250

312.5

375

437.5

437.5

8

100 mL/min

187.5

250

312.5

312.5

375

437.5

500

7

2.4 Maintenance Dosing in Pediatric Patients less than 10 Years Old

The starting maintenance dose for heart failure in pediatric patients less than 10 years old is based on lean body weight, renal function, age and concomitant products [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. The recommended starting maintenance dose for pediatric patients between 5 and 10 years old is given in Table 4. These recommendations assume the presence of normal renal function.
Table 4. Recommended Starting DIGITEK® (digoxin tablets) Oral Maintenance Dosage in Pediatric Patients between 5 and 10 Years Old
Age

Oral Maintenance Dose, mcg/kg/dose

5 years to 10 years

3.2 to 6.4 Twice daily

Table 5 provides average daily maintenance dose requirements for pediatric patients between 5 and 10 years old (to be given twice daily) with heart failure based on age, lean body weight and renal function.
Table 5. Recommended Maintenance Dose (in micrograms given twice daily) of DIGITEK® (digoxin tablets) in Pediatric Patients between 5 and 10 Years of Age* Based upon Lean Body Weight and Renal Function*, † * Recommended are doses to be given twice daily. † The doses are rounded to the nearest dose possible using whole and/or half digoxin tablets. Recommended doses approximately 30 percent lower than the calculated dose are designated with an *. Monitor digoxin levels in patients receiving these initial doses and increase dose if needed. ‡ The modified Schwartz equation may be used to estimate creatinine clearance. See footnote b under Table 3. § If no loading dose administered.
Corrected Creatinine Clearance‡

Lean Body Weight

Number ofDaysBeforeSteadyStateAchieved§

kg

20

30

40

50

60

lb

44

66

88

110

132

10 mL/min

-

62.5

62.5*

125

125

19

20 mL/min

62.5

62.5

125

125

125

16

30 mL/min

62.5

62.5*

125

125

187.5

14

40 mL/min

62.5

62.5*

125

187.5

187.5

13

50 mL/min

62.5

125

125

187.5

187.5

12

60 mL/min

62.5

125

125

187.5

250

11

70 mL/min

62.5

125

187.5

187.5

250

10

80 mL/min

62.5*

125

187.5

187.5

250

9

90 mL/min

62.5*

125

187.5

250

250

8

100 mL/min

62.5*

125

187.5

250

312.5

7

2.5 Monitoring to Assess Safety, Efficacy and Therapeutic Blood Levels

Monitor for signs and symptoms of digoxin toxicity and clinical response. Adjust dose based on toxicity, efficacy and blood levels.

Serum digoxin levels < 0.5 ng/mL have been associated with diminished efficacy, while levels above 2 ng/mL have been associated with increased toxicity without increased benefit.

Interpret the serum digoxin concentration in the overall clinical context, and do not use an isolated measurement of serum digoxin concentration as the basis for increasing or decreasing the DIGITEK® (digoxin tablets) dose. Serum digoxin concentrations may be falsely elevated by endogenous digoxin-like substances [see Drug Interactions (7.4)]. If the assay is sensitive to these substances, consider obtaining a baseline digoxin level before starting DIGITEK® (digoxin tablets) and correct post-treatment values by the reported baseline level.

Obtain serum digoxin concentrations just before the next scheduled DIGITEK® (digoxin tablets) dose or at least 6 hours after the last dose. The digoxin concentration is likely to be 10% to 25% lower when sampled right before the next dose (24 hours after dosing) compared to sampling 8 hours after dosing (using once-daily dosing). However, there will be only minor differences in digoxin concentrations using twice daily dosing whether sampling is done at 8 or 12 hours after a dose.

2.6 Switching from Intravenous Digoxin to Oral Digoxin

When switching from intravenous to oral digoxin formulations, make allowances for differences in bioavailability when calculating maintenance dosages (see Table 6).
Table 6. Comparison of the Systemic Availability and Equivalent Doses of Oral and Intravenous DIGITEK® (digoxin tablets)
Absolute Bioavailability

Equivalent Doses (mcg)

DIGITEK® (digoxin tablets)

60% to 80%

62.5

125

250

500

Digoxin Intravenous Injection

100%

50

100

200

400
Venlafaxine Hydrochlori...

Venlafaxine Hydrochloride

2.1 Screening for HLA-B*5701 Allele Prior to Starting Abacavir Tablets

Screen for the HLA-B*5701 allele prior to initiating therapy with abacavir tablets [see Boxed Warning, Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].

2.2 Recommended Dosage for Adult Patients

The recommended dosage of abacavir tablets for adults is 600 mg daily, administered orally as either 300 mg twice daily or 600 mg once daily, in combination with other antiretroviral agents.

2.3 Recommended Dosage for Pediatric Patients

The recommended dosage of abacavir oral solution in HIV-1-infected pediatric patients aged 3 months and older is 8 mg per kg orally twice daily (up to a maximum of 600 mg daily) in combination with other antiretroviral agents.

Abacavir is also available as a scored tablet for HIV-1-infected pediatric patients weighing greater than or equal to 14 kg for whom a solid dosage form is appropriate. Before prescribing abacavir tablets, children should be assessed for the ability to swallow tablets. If a child is unable to reliably swallow abacavir tablets, the oral solution formulation should be prescribed. The recommended oral dosage of abacavir tablets for HIV-1-infected pediatric patients is presented in Table 1.
Table 1. Dosing Recommendations for Abacavir Scored Tablets in Pediatric Patients
Weight

(kg)

Twice-daily Dosing Regimen

AM Dose

PM Dose

Total Daily Dose

14 to < 20

½ tablet (150 mg)

½ tablet (150 mg)

300 mg

≥ 20 to < 25

½ tablet (150 mg)

1 tablet (300 mg)

450 mg

≥ 25

1 tablet (300 mg)

1 tablet (300 mg)

600 mg

Additional pediatric use information for patients aged 3 months and above is approved for ViiV Healthcare Company’s ZIAGEN® (abacavir sulfate) tablets and oral solution. However, due to ViiV Healthcare Company’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that pediatric information.

2.4 Recommended Dosage for Patients with Hepatic Impairment

The recommended dose of abacavir tablets in patients with mild hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh Class A) is 200 mg twice daily. To enable dose reduction, abacavir oral solution (10 mL twice daily) should be used for the treatment of these patients. The safety, efficacy, and pharmacokinetic properties of abacavir have not been established in patients with moderate to severe hepatic impairment; therefore, abacavir tablets are contraindicated in these patients.
Dicyclomine Hydrochlori...

Dicyclomine Hydrochloride

DOSAGE MUST BE ADJUSTED TO INDIVIDUAL PATIENT NEEDS. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY.)

Adults

The only oral dose clearly shown to be effective is 160 mg per day (in 4 equally divided doses). Since this dose is associated with a significant incidence of side effects, it is prudent to begin with 80 mg per day (in 4 equally divided doses). Depending upon the patient's response during the first week of therapy, the dose should be increased to 160 mg per day unless side effects limit dosage escalation.

If efficacy is not achieved within 2 weeks or side effects require doses below 80 mg per day, the drug should be discontinued. Documented safety data are not available for doses above 80 mg daily for periods longer than 2 weeks.
Polyethylene Glycol 335...

Polyethylene Glycol 3350 And Electrolytes

The recommended dose for adults is 4 liters of polyethylene glycol 3350 and electrolytes for oral solution prior to gastrointestinal examination, as ingestion of this dose produces a satisfactory preparation in over 95% of patients. Ideally, the patient should fast for approximately 3 or 4 hours prior to polyethylene glycol 3350 and electrolytes for oral solution administration, but in no case should solid food be given for at least 2 hours before the solution is given.

Polyethylene glycol 3350 and electrolytes for oral solution is usually administered orally, but may be given via nasogastric tube to patients who are unwilling or unable to drink the solution. Oral administration is at a rate of 240 mL (8 oz.) every 10 minutes, until 4 liters are consumed or the rectal effluent is clear. Rapid drinking of each portion is preferred to drinking small amounts continuously. Nasogastric tube administration is at a rate of 20 to 30 mL per minute (1.2 to 1.8 liters per hour). The first bowel movement should occur approximately one hour after the start of polyethylene glycol 3350 and electrolytes for oral solution administration.

Various regimens have been used. One method is to schedule patients for examination in midmorning or later, allowing the patients 3 hours for drinking and an additional one hour period for complete bowel evacuation. Another method is to administer polyethylene glycol 3350 and electrolytes for oral solution on the evening before the examination, particularly if the patient is to have a barium enema.

Preparation of the solution

Polyethylene glycol 3350 and electrolytes for oral solution is prepared by filling the container to the 4 liter mark with water and shaking vigorously several times to insure that the ingredients are dissolved. Dissolution is facilitated by using lukewarm water. The solution is more palatable if chilled before administration. The reconstituted solution should be refrigerated and used within 48 hours. Discard any unused portion.
Hydralazine Hydrochlori...

Hydralazine Hydrochloride

Initiate therapy in gradually increasing dosages; adjust according to individual response. Start with 10 mg 4 times daily for the first 2 to 4 days, increase to 25 mg 4 times daily for the balance of the first week. For the second and subsequent weeks, increase dosage to 50 mg 4 times daily. For maintenance, adjust dosage to the lowest effective levels.

The incidence of toxic reactions, particularly the L.E. cell syndrome, is high in the group of patients receiving large doses of hydralazine hydrochloride tablets.

In a few resistant patients, up to 300 mg of hydralazine hydrochloride tablets daily may be required for a significant antihypertensive effect. In such cases, a lower dosage of hydralazine hydrochloride tablets combined with a thiazide and/or reserpine or a beta-blocker may be considered. However, when combining therapy, individual titration is essential to ensure the lowest possible therapeutic dose of each drug.
Medique Apap Extra Stre...

Medique Apap Extra Strength

2.1 General Instruction for Use

Swallow tablets whole. Do not crush, chew, or break tablets because this will increase the rate of guanfacine release. Do not administer with high fat meals, due to increased exposure.

2.2 Dose Selection

Take guanfacine extended-release tablets orally once daily, either in the morning or evening, at approximately the same time each day. Begin at a dose of 1 mg/day, and adjust in increments of no more than 1 mg/week.

In monotherapy clinical trials, there was dose-and exposure-related clinical improvement as well as risks for several clinically significant adverse reactions (hypotension, bradycardia, sedative events). To balance the exposure-related potential benefits and risks, the recommended target dose range depending on clinical response and tolerability for guanfacine extended-release tablets is 0.05 to 0.12 mg/kg/day (total daily dose between 1 mg to 7 mg). (See Table 1).
Table 1: Recommended Target Dose Range for Therapy with Guanfacine Extended-release Tablets Doses above 4 mg/day have not been evaluated in children (ages 6 to 12 years) and doses above 7 mg/day have not been evaluated in adolescents (ages 13 to 17 years)
Weight

Target dose range (0.05 -0.12 mg/kg/day)

25 to 33.9 kg

2 to 3 mg/day

34 to 41.4 kg

2 to 4 mg/day

41.5 to 49.4 kg

3 to 5 mg/day

49.5 to 58.4 kg

3 to 6 mg/day

58.5 to 91 kg

4 to 7 mg/day

> 91 kg

5 to 7 mg/day

In the adjunctive trial which evaluated guanfacine extended-release tablets treatment with psychostimulants, the majority of patients reached optimal doses in the 0.05 to 0.12 mg/kg/day range. Doses above 4 mg/day have not been studied in adjunctive trials.

2.3 Switching from Immediate-Release Guanfacine to Guanfacine Extended-release Tablets

If switching from immediate-release guanfacine, discontinue that treatment, and titrate with guanfacine extended-release tablets following above recommended schedule.

Do not substitute for immediate-release guanfacine tablets on a milligram-per-milligram basis, because of differing pharmacokinetic profiles. Guanfacine extended-release tablets has significantly reduced Cmax (60% lower), bioavailability (43% lower), and a delayed Tmax (3 hours later) compared to those of the same dose of immediate-release guanfacine [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.4 Maintenance Treatment

Pharmacological treatment of ADHD may be needed for extended periods. Healthcare providers should periodically re-evaluate the long-term use of guanfacine extended-release tablets, and adjust weight-based dosage as needed. The majority of children and adolescents reach optimal doses in the 0.05 to 0.12 mg/kg/day range. Doses above 4 mg/day have not been evaluated in children (ages 6 to 12 years) and above 7 mg/day have not been evaluated in adolescents (ages 13 to 17 years) [see Clinical Studies (14)].

2.5 Discontinuation of Treatment

Following discontinuation of guanfacine extended-release tablets, patients may experience increases in blood pressure and heart rate [see Adverse Reaction (6.1)]. Patients/caregivers should be instructed not to discontinue guanfacine extended-release tablets without consulting their health care provider. Monitor blood pressure and pulse when reducing the dose or discontinuing the drug. Taper the daily dose in decrements of no more than 1 mg every 3 to 7 days to avoid rebound hypertension.

2.6 Missed Doses

When reinitiating patients to the previous maintenance dose after two or more missed consecutive doses, consider titration based on patient tolerability.

2.7 Dosage Adjustment with Concomitant Use of Strong CYP3A4 Inhibitors or Inducers

Dosage adjustments for guanfacine extended-release tablets are recommended with concomitant use of strong CYP3A4 inhibitors (e.g., ketoconazole), or CYP3A4 inducers (e.g., carbamazepine) (Table 2) [see Drug Interactions (7)].
Table 2: Guanfacine Extended-release Tablets Dosage Adjustments for Patients Taking Concomitant CYP3A4 Inhibitors or Inducers
Clinical Scenarios

Starting guanfacine extended-release tablets while currently on a CYP3A4 modulator

Continuing guanfacine extended-release tablets while adding a CYP3A4 modulator

Continuing guanfacine extended-release tablets while stopping a CYP3A4 modulator

CYP3A4

Strong Inhibitors

Decrease guanfacine extended-release tablets dosage to half the recommended level. (see Table 1)

Decrease guanfacine extended-release tablets dosage to half the recommended level. (see Table 1)

Increase guanfacine extended-release tablets dosage to recommended level. (see Table 1)

CYP3A4

Strong Inducers

Consider increasing guanfacine extended-release tablets dosage up to double the recommended level. (see Table 1)

Consider increasing guanfacine extended-release tablets dosage up to double the recommended level over 1 to 2 weeks. (see Table 1)

Decrease guanfacine extended-release tablets dosage to recommended level over 1 to 2 weeks. (see Table 1)
Cefepime

Cefepime

Didanosine delayed-release capsules should be administered on an empty stomach. Didanosine delayed-release capsules should be swallowed intact.

2.1 Recommended Dosage (Adult and Pediatric Patients)

The recommended total daily dose is based on body weight and is administered as one capsule given on a once-daily schedule as outlined in Table 1.

The recommended total daily dose to be administered once daily to pediatric patients weighing at least 20 kg who can swallow capsules is based on body weight (kg), consistent with the recommended adult dosing guidelines (see Table 1). Please consult the complete prescribing information for didanosine pediatric powder for oral solution for dosage and administration of didanosine to pediatric patients weighing less than 20 kg or who can not swallow capsules.

Table 1: Recommended Dosage (Adult and Pediatric Patients)
Body Weight

Dose

20 kg to less than 25 kg

200 mg once daily

25 kg to less than 60 kg

250 mg once daily

at least 60 kg

400 mg once daily

2.2 Renal Impairment

Dosing recommendations for didanosine delayed-release capsules and didanosine pediatric powder for oral solution are different for patients with renal impairment. Please consult the complete prescribing information on administration of didanosine pediatric powder for oral solution to patients with renal impairment.

Adult Patients

In adult patients with impaired renal function, the dose of didanosine delayed-release capsules should be adjusted to compensate for the slower rate of elimination. The recommended doses and dosing intervals of didanosine delayed-release capsules in adult patients with renal insufficiency are presented in Table 2.
Table 2: Recommended Dosage in Patients with Renal Impairment by Body Weight* * Based on studies using a buffered formulation of didanosine. † Not suitable for use in patients less than 60 kg with CL cr less than 10 mL/min. An alternate formulation of didanosine should be used.
Creatinine Clearance (mL/min)

Dosage (mg)

at least 60 kg

less than 60 kg

at least 60

400 once daily

250 once daily

30 to 59

200 once daily

125 once daily

10 to 29

125 once daily

125 once daily

less than 10

125 once daily

†

Pediatric Patients

Urinary excretion is also a major route of elimination of didanosine in pediatric patients, therefore the clearance of didanosine may be altered in pediatric patients with renal impairment. Although there are insufficient data to recommend a specific dose adjustment of didanosine in this patient population, a reduction in the dose should be considered (see Table 2).

Patients Requiring Continuous Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis (CAPD) or Hemodialysis

For patients requiring CAPD or hemodialysis, follow dosing recommendations for patients with creatinine clearance of less than 10 mL/min, shown in Table 2. It is not necessary to administer a supplemental dose of didanosine following hemodialysis.

2.3 Dose Adjustment

Concomitant Therapy with Tenofovir Disoproxil Fumarate

In patients who are also taking tenofovir disoproxil fumarate, a dose reduction of didanosine delayed-release capsules to 250 mg (adults weighing at least 60 kg with creatinine clearance of at least 60 mL/min) or 200 mg (adults weighing less than 60 kg with creatinine clearance of at least 60 mL/min) once daily taken together with tenofovir disoproxil fumarate and a light meal (400 kcalories or less, 20% fat or less) or in the fasted state is recommended. The appropriate dose of didanosine delayed-release capsules coadministered with tenofovir disoproxil fumarate in patients with creatinine clearance of less than 60 mL/min has not been established [see Drug Interactions (7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Hepatic Impairment

No dose adjustment is required in patients with hepatic impairment [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Oxycodone Hydrochloride...

Oxycodone Hydrochloride

Oxycodone hydrochloride tablets are intended for the management of moderate to severe pain in patients who require treatment with an oral opioid analgesic. The dose should be individually adjusted according to severity of pain, patient response and patient size. If the pain increases in severity, if analgesia is not adequate, or if tolerance occurs, a gradual increase in dosage may be required.

Patients who have not been receiving opioid analgesics should be started on oxycodone hydrochloride tablets in a dosing range of 5 to 15 mg every 4 to 6 hours as needed for pain. The dose should be titrated based upon the individual patient's response to their initial dose of oxycodone hydrochloride tablets. Patients with chronic pain should have their dosage given on an around-the-clock basis to prevent the reoccurrence of pain rather than treating the pain after it has occurred. This dose can then be adjusted to an acceptable level of analgesia taking into account side effects experienced by the patient.

For control of severe chronic pain, oxycodone hydrochloride tablets should be administered on a regularly scheduled basis, every 4-6 hours, at the lowest dosage level that will achieve adequate analgesia.

As with any potent opioid, it is critical to adjust the dosing regimen for each patient individually, taking into account the patient's prior analgesic treatment experience. Although it is not possible to list every condition that is important to the selection of the initial dose of oxycodone hydrochloride tablets, attention should be given to: 1) the daily dose, potency, and characteristics of a pure agonist or mixed agonist/antagonist the patient has been taking previously, 2) the reliability of the relative potency estimate to calculate the dose of oxycodone needed, 3) the degree of opioid tolerance, 4) the general condition and medical status of the patient, and 5) the balance between pain control and adverse experiences.

Conversion From Fixed-Ratio Opioid/Acetaminophen, Opioid/Aspirin, or Opioid/Nonsteroidal Combination Drugs

When converting patients from fixed ratio opioid/non-opioid drug regimens a decision should be made whether or not to continue the non-opioid analgesic. If a decision is made to discontinue the use of non-opioid analgesic, it may be necessary to titrate the dose of oxycodone hydrochloride tablets in response to the level of analgesia and adverse effects afforded by the dosing regimen. If the non-opioid regimen is continued as a separate single entity agent, the starting dose oxycodone hydrochloride tablets should be based upon the most recent dose of opioid as a baseline for further titration of oxycodone. Incremental increases should be gauged according to side effects to an acceptable level of analgesia.

Patients Currently on Opioid Therapy

If a patient has been receiving opioid-containing medications prior to taking oxycodone hydrochloride tablets the potency of the prior opioid relative to oxycodone should be factored into the selection of the total daily dose (TDD) of oxycodone.

In converting patients from other opioids to oxycodone hydrochloride tablets close observation and adjustment of dosage based upon the patient's response to oxycodone hydrochloride tablets is imperative. Administration of supplemental analgesia for breakthrough or incident pain and titration of the total daily dose of oxycodone hydrochloride tablets may be necessary, especially in patients who have disease states that are changing rapidly.

Maintenance of Therapy

Continual re-evaluation of the patient receiving oxycodone hydrochloride tablets is important, with special attention to the maintenance of pain control and the relative incidence of side effects associated with therapy. If the level of pain increases, effort should be made to identify the source of increased pain, while adjusting the dose as described above to decrease the level of pain.

During chronic therapy, especially for non-cancer-related pain (or pain associated with other terminal illnesses), the continued need for the use of opioid analgesics should be re-assessed as appropriate.

Cessation of Therapy

When a patient no longer requires therapy with oxycodone hydrochloride tablets or other opioid analgesics for the treatment of their pain, it is important that therapy be gradually discontinued over time to prevent the development of an opioid abstinence syndrome (narcotic withdrawal). In general, therapy can be decreased by 25% to 50% per day with careful monitoring for signs and symptoms of withdrawal (see Drug Abuse and Dependence section for description of the signs and symptoms of withdrawal). If the patient develops these signs or symptoms, the dose should be raised to the previous level and titrated down more slowly, either by increasing the interval between decreases, decreasing the amount of change in dose, or both. It is not known at what dose of oxycodone hydrochloride tablets that treatment may be discontinued without risk of the opioid abstinence syndrome.
Latanoprost Solution

Latanoprost Solution

The recommended dosage is one drop (1.5 mcg) in the affected eye(s) once daily in the evening. If one dose is missed, treatment should continue with the next dose as normal.

The dosage of latanoprost ophthalmic solution should not exceed once daily; the combined use of two or more prostaglandins, or prostaglandin analogs including latanoprost ophthalmic solution is not recommended. It has been shown that administration of these prostaglandin drug products more than once daily may decrease the intraocular pressure lowering effect or cause paradoxical elevations in IOP.

Reduction of the intraocular pressure starts approximately 3 to 4 hours after administration and the maximum effect is reached after 8 to 12 hours.

Latanoprost ophthalmic solution may be used concomitantly with other topical ophthalmic drug products to lower intraocular pressure. If more than one topical ophthalmic drug is being used, the drugs should be administered at least five (5) minutes apart.
Oxycodone Hydrochloride...

Oxycodone Hydrochloride And Aspirin

Dosage should be adjusted according to the severity of the pain and the response of the patient. It may occasionally be necessary to exceed the usual dosage recommended below in cases of more severe pain or in those patients who have become tolerant to the analgesic effect of opioids. If pain is constant, the opioid analgesic should be given at regular intervals on an around-the-clock schedule. Oxycodone and aspirin tablets are given orally.

The usual dosage is one tablet every 6 hours as needed for pain. The maximum daily dose of aspirin should not exceed 4 grams or 12 tablets.

Cessation of Therapy

In patients treated with oxycodone and aspirin tablets for more than a few weeks who no longer require therapy, doses should be tapered gradually to prevent signs and symptoms of withdrawal in the physically dependent patient.
Clarifoam Ef

Clarifoam Ef

The usual recommended starting dose of candesartan cilexetil is 16 mg once daily when it is used as monotherapy in patients who are not volume depleted. Candesartan cilexetil tablets can be administered once or twice daily with total daily doses ranging from 8 mg to 32 mg. Patients requiring further reduction in blood pressure should be titrated to 32 mg. Doses larger than 32 mg do not appear to have a greater blood pressure lowering effect.

Hydrochlorothiazide is effective in doses of 12.5 mg to 50 mg once daily.

Use in Renal Impairment

Dosing recommendations for candesartan cilexetil and hydrochlorothiazide tablets in patients with creatinine clearance < 30 mg/min cannot be provided (see SPECIAL POPULATIONS: Renal Insufficiency).

Use in Moderate to Severe Hepatic Impairment

Candesartan cilexetil and hydrochlorothiazide tablets are not recommended for initiation because the appropriate starting dose, 8 mg, cannot be given (see SPECIAL POPULATIONS, Hepatic Insufficiency).

Replacement Therapy

The combination may be substituted for the titrated components.

Dose Titration by Clinical Effect

A patient whose blood pressure is not controlled on 25 mg of hydrochlorothiazide once daily can expect an incremental effect from candesartan cilexetil and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 16 mg/12.5 mg. A patient whose blood pressure is controlled on 25 mg of hydrochlorothiazide but is experiencing decreases in serum potassium can expect the same or incremental blood pressure effects from candesartan cilexetil and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 16 mg/12.5 mg and serum potassium may improve.

A patient whose blood pressure is not controlled on 32 mg of candesartan cilexetil can expect incremental blood pressure effects from candesartan cilexetil and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 32 mg/12.5 mg and then 32 mg/25 mg. The maximal antihypertensive effect of any dose of candesartan cilexetil and hydrochlorothiazide tablets can be expected within 4 weeks of initiating that dose.

Candesartan cilexetil and hydrochlorothiazide tablets may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.

Candesartan cilexetil and hydrochlorothiazide tablets may be administered with or without food.
Povidine Iodine Solutio...

Povidine Iodine Solution

2.1 Adult Hypertension

The recommended starting dose of valsartan tablets is 80 mg or 160 mg once daily when used as monotherapy in patients who are not volume-depleted. Patients requiring greater reductions may be started at the higher dose. Valsartan tablets may be used over a dose range of 80 mg to 320 mg daily, administered once a day.

The antihypertensive effect is substantially present within 2 weeks and maximal reduction is generally attained after 4 weeks. If additional antihypertensive effect is required over the starting dose range, the dose may be increased to a maximum of 320 mg or a diuretic may be added. Addition of a diuretic has a greater effect than dose increases beyond 80 mg.

No initial dosage adjustment is required for elderly patients, for patients with mild or moderate renal impairment, or for patients with mild or moderate liver insufficiency. Care should be exercised with dosing of valsartan tablets in patients with hepatic or severe renal impairment.

Valsartan tablets may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.

Valsartan tablets may be administered with or without food.

2.2 Pediatric Hypertension 6 to 16 Years of Age

For children who can swallow tablets, the usual recommended starting dose is 1.3 mg/kg once daily (up to 40 mg total). The dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. Doses higher than 2.7 mg/kg (up to 160 mg) once daily have not been studied in pediatric patients 6 to 16 years old.

For children who cannot swallow tablets, or children for whom the calculated dosage (mg/kg) does not correspond to the available tablet strengths of valsartan, the use of a suspension is recommended. Follow the suspension preparation instructions below (see Preparation of Suspension) to administer valsartan as a suspension. When the suspension is replaced by a tablet, the dose of valsartan may have to be increased. The exposure to valsartan with the suspension is 1.6 times greater than with the tablet.

No data are available in pediatric patients either undergoing dialysis or with a glomerular filtration rate < 30 mL/min/1.73 m2 [see Pediatric Use (8.4)].

Valsartan tablets are not recommended for patients < 6 years old [see Adverse Reactions (6.1), Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Preparation of Suspension (for 160 mL of a 4 mg/mL Suspension)

Add 80 mL of Ora-Plus®* oral suspending vehicle to an amber glass bottle containing eight valsartan 80 mg tablets, and shake for a minimum of 2 minutes. Allow the suspension to stand for a minimum of one hour. After the standing time, shake the suspension for a minimum of one additional minute. Add 80 mL of Ora-Sweet SF®* oral sweetening vehicle to the bottle and shake the suspension for at least 10 seconds to disperse the ingredients. The suspension is homogenous and can be stored for either up to 30 days at room temperature (below 30°C/86°F) or up to 75 days at refrigerated conditions (2° to 8°C/35° to 46°F) in the glass bottle with a child-resistant screw-cap closure. Shake the bottle well (at least 10 seconds) prior to dispensing the suspension.

*Ora-Sweet SF® and Ora-Plus® are registered trademarks of Paddock Laboratories, Inc.

2.3 Heart Failure

The recommended starting dose of valsartan tablets is 40 mg twice daily. Uptitration to 80 mg and 160 mg twice daily should be done to the highest dose, as tolerated by the patient. Consideration should be given to reducing the dose of concomitant diuretics. The maximum daily dose administered in clinical trials is 320 mg in divided doses.
Benzefoam

Benzefoam

Escitalopram tablets should be administered once daily, in the morning or evening, with or without food.

2.1 Major Depressive Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adolescents

The recommended dose of escitalopram tablets is 10 mg once daily. A flexible-dose trial of escitalopram tablets (10 to 20 mg/day) demonstrated the effectiveness of escitalopram tablets [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. If the dose is increased to 20 mg, this should occur after a minimum of 3 weeks.

Adults

The recommended dose of escitalopram tablets is 10 mg once daily. A fixed dose trial of escitalopram tablets demonstrated the effectiveness of both 10 mg and 20 mg of escitalopram tablets, but failed to demonstrate a greater benefit of 20 mg over 10 mg [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. If the dose is increased to 20 mg, this should occur after a minimum of one week.

Maintenance Treatment

It is generally agreed that acute episodes of major depressive disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacological therapy beyond response to the acute episode. Systematic evaluation of continuing escitalopram tablets 10 or 20 mg/day in adult patients with major depressive disorder who responded while taking escitalopram tablets during an 8-week, acute-treatment phase demonstrated a benefit of such maintenance treatment [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. Nevertheless, the physician who elects to use escitalopram tablets for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.2 Generalized Anxiety Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adults

The recommended starting dose of escitalopram tablets is 10 mg once daily. If the dose is increased to 20 mg, this should occur after a minimum of one week.

Maintenance Treatment

Generalized anxiety disorder is recognized as a chronic condition. The efficacy of escitalopram tablets in the treatment of GAD beyond 8 weeks has not been systematically studied. The physician who elects to use escitalopram tablets for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

2.3 Special Populations

10 mg/day is the recommended dose for most elderly patients and patients with hepatic impairment.

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with mild or moderate renal impairment. Escitalopram tablets should be used with caution in patients with severe renal impairment.

2.4 Discontinuation of Treatment with Escitalopram Tablets

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of escitalopram tablets and other SSRIs and SNRIs have been reported [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)]. Patients should be monitored for these symptoms when discontinuing treatment. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, then resuming the previously prescribed dose may be considered. Subsequently, the physician may continue decreasing the dose but at a more gradual rate.

2.5 Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with escitalopram tablets. Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping escitalopram tablets before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders [see Contraindications (4.1)].

2.6 Use of Escitalopram Tablets with Other MAOIs such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start escitalopram tablets in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered [see Contraindications (4.1)].

In some cases, a patient already receiving escitalopram tablets therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, escitalopram tablets should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with escitalopram tablets may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with escitalopram tablets is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].
Nitroglycerin Patch

Nitroglycerin Patch

The suggested starting dose is between 0.2 mg/hr and 0.4 mg/hr. Doses between 0.4 mg/hr and 0.8 mg/hr have shown continued effectiveness for 10 to 12 hours daily for at least one month (the longest period studied) of intermittent administration. Although the minimum nitrate-free interval has not been defined, data show that a nitrate-free interval of 10 to 12 hours is sufficient (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). Thus, an appropriate dosing schedule for nitroglycerin patches would include a daily patch-on period of 12 to 14 hours and a daily patch-off period of 10 to 12 hours.

Although some well controlled clinical trials using exercise tolerance testing have shown maintenance of effectiveness when patches are worn continuously, the large majority of such controlled trials have shown the development of tolerance (i.e., complete loss of effect) within the first 24 hours after therapy was initiated. Dose adjustment, even to levels much higher than generally used, did not restore efficacy.

PATIENT INSTRUCTIONS FOR APPLICATION OF SYSTEM

A patient leaflet is supplied with each carton.
Diltiazem Hydrochloride...

Diltiazem Hydrochloride

Oxybutynin chloride extended-release tablets must be swallowed whole with the aid of liquids, and must not be chewed, divided, or crushed.

Oxybutynin chloride extended-release tablets may be administered with or without food.

2.1 Adults

The recommended starting dose of oxybutynin chloride extended-release tablets is 5 mg or 10 mg once daily at approximately the same time each day. Dosage may be adjusted in 5 mg increments to achieve a balance of efficacy and tolerability (up to a maximum of 30 mg/day). In general, dosage adjustment may proceed at approximately weekly intervals.

2.2 Pediatric Patients Aged 6 Years of Age and Older

The recommended starting dose of oxybutynin chloride extended-release tablets is 5 mg once daily at approximately the same time each day. Dosage may be adjusted in 5 mg increments to achieve a balance of efficacy and tolerability (up to a maximum of 20 mg/day).
Fluocinolone Acetonide

Fluocinolone Acetonide

Omeprazole delayed-release capsules should be taken before eating. In the clinical trials, antacids were used concomitantly with omeprazole delayed-release capsules.

Patients should be informed that the omeprazole delayed-release capsules should be swallowed whole.

For patients unable to swallow an intact capsule, alternative administration options are available [see Dosage and Administration (2.8)].

2.1 Short-Term Treatment of Active Duodenal Ulcer

The recommended adult oral dose of omeprazole delayed-release capsules is 20 mg once daily. Most patients heal within 4 weeks. Some patients may require an additional 4 weeks of therapy.

2.2 H. pylori Eradication for the Reduction of the Risk of Duodenal Ulcer Recurrence

Triple Therapy (omeprazole/clarithromycin/amoxicillin)

The recommended adult oral regimen is omeprazole delayed-release capsules 20 mg, plus clarithromycin 500 mg, plus amoxicillin 1000 mg each given twice daily for 10 days. In patients with an ulcer present at the time of initiation of therapy, an additional 18 days of omeprazole delayed-release capsules 20 mg once daily is recommended for ulcer healing and symptom relief.

Dual Therapy (omeprazole/clarithromycin)

The recommended adult oral regimen is omeprazole delayed-release capsules 40 mg once daily plus clarithromycin 500 mg three times daily for 14 days. In patients with an ulcer present at the time of initiation of therapy, an additional 14 days of omeprazole delayed-release capsules 20 mg once daily is recommended for ulcer healing and symptom relief.

2.3 Gastric Ulcer

The recommended adult oral dose is 40 mg once daily for 4 to 8 weeks.

2.4 Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)

The recommended adult oral dose for the treatment of patients with symptomatic GERD and no esophageal lesions is 20 mg daily for up to 4 weeks. The recommended adult oral dose for the treatment of patients with erosive esophagitis and accompanying symptoms due to GERD is 20 mg daily for 4 to 8 weeks.

2.5 Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis

The recommended adult oral dose is 20 mg daily. Controlled studies do not extend beyond 12 months [see Clinical Studies (14.4)].

2.6 Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions

The dosage of omeprazole delayed-release capsules in patients with pathological hypersecretory conditions varies with the individual patient. The recommended adult oral starting dose is 60 mg once daily. Doses should be adjusted to individual patient needs and should continue for as long as clinically indicated. Doses up to 120 mg three times daily have been administered. Daily dosages of greater than 80 mg should be administered in divided doses. Some patients with Zollinger-Ellison syndrome have been treated continuously with omeprazole delayed-release capsules for more than 5 years.

2.7 Pediatric Patients

For the treatment of GERD and maintenance of healing of erosive esophagitis, the recommended daily dose for pediatric patients 2 to 16 years of age is as follows:

Patient Weight

Omeprazole Daily Dose

10 < 20 kg

10 mg

≥ 20 kg

20 mg

On a per kg basis, the doses of omeprazole delayed-release capsules required to heal erosive esophagitis in pediatric patients are greater than those for adults.

Alternative administrative options can be used for pediatric patients unable to swallow an intact capsule [see Dosage and Administration (2.8)].

2.8 Alternative Administration Options

Omeprazole is available as a delayed-release capsule.

For patients who have difficulty swallowing capsules, the contents of an omeprazole delayed-release capsule can be added to applesauce. One tablespoon of applesauce should be added to an empty bowl and the capsule should be opened. All of the pellets inside the capsule should be carefully emptied on the applesauce. The pellets should be mixed with the applesauce and then swallowed immediately with a glass of cool water to ensure complete swallowing of the pellets. The applesauce used should not be hot and should be soft enough to be swallowed without chewing. The pellets should not be chewed or crushed. The pellets/applesauce mixture should not be stored for future use.
Stavudine

Stavudine

The interval between doses of stavudine capsules should be 12 hours. Stavudine capsules may be taken with or without food.

2.1 Recommended Adult Dosage

The recommended adult dosage is based on body weight as follows:
• For patients weighing less than 60 kg: 30 mg every 12 hours. • For patients weighing at least 60 kg: 40 mg every 12 hours.
2.2 Recommended Pediatric Dosage
• For newborns from birth to 13 days old: 0.5 mg/kg given every 12 hours. • For pediatric patients at least 14 days old and weighing less than 30 kg: 1 mg/kg given every 12 hours. • For pediatric patients weighing at least 30 kg: use the recommended adult dosage.
2.3 Dosage Adjustment

Renal Impairment

Adult Patients

Stavudine capsules may be administered to adult patients with impaired renal function with an adjustment in dosage as shown in Table 1.
Table 1: Recommended Dosage Adjustment for Adult Patients with Renal Impairment * Administered after the completion of hemodialysis on dialysis days and at the same time of day on non-dialysis days.
Creatinine Clearance

(mL/min)

Recommended Stavudine Dose by Patient Weight

at least 60 kg

less than 60 kg

greater than 50

40 mg every 12 hours

30 mg every 12 hours

26 to 50

20 mg every 12 hours

15 mg every 12 hours

10 to 25

20 mg every 24 hours

15 mg every 24 hours

Hemodialysis

20 mg every 24 hours*

15 mg every 24 hours*

Pediatric Patients

Since urinary excretion is also a major route of elimination of stavudine in pediatric patients, the clearance of stavudine may be altered in children with renal impairment. There are insufficient data to recommend a specific dose adjustment of stavudine capsules in this patient population.
Lamotrigine

Lamotrigine

The dose of zaleplon capsules should be individualized. The recommended dose of zaleplon capsules for most non-elderly adults is 10 mg. For certain low weight individuals, 5 mg may be a sufficient dose. Although the risk of certain adverse events associated with the use of zaleplon capsules appears to be dose dependent, the 20 mg dose has been shown to be adequately tolerated and may be considered for the occasional patient who does not benefit from a trial of a lower dose. Doses above 20 mg have not been adequately evaluated and are not recommended.

Zaleplon capsules should be taken immediately before bedtime or after the patient has gone to bed and has experienced difficulty falling asleep (see PRECAUTIONS). Taking zaleplon capsules with or immediately after a heavy, high fat meal results in slower absorption and would be expected to reduce the effect of zaleplon on sleep latency (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics).

Special Populations

Elderly patients and debilitated patients appear to be more sensitive to the effects of hypnotics, and respond to 5 mg of zaleplon. The recommended dose for these patients is therefore 5 mg. Doses over 10 mg are not recommended.

Hepatic Insufficiency

Patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment should be treated with zaleplon capsules 5 mg because clearance is reduced in this population. Zaleplon capsules are not recommended for use in patients with severe hepatic impairment.

Renal Insufficiency

No dose adjustment is necessary in patients with mild to moderate renal impairment. Zaleplon capsules have not been adequately studied in patients with severe renal impairment.

An initial dose of 5 mg should be given to patients concomitantly taking cimetidine because zaleplon clearance is reduced in this population (see PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions).
Dimethicone Cloth

Dimethicone Cloth

Tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules 0.4 mg once daily is recommended as the dose for the treatment of the signs and symptoms of BPH. It should be administered approximately one-half hour following the same meal each day. Tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules should not be crushed, chewed or opened.

For those patients who fail to respond to the 0.4 mg dose after 2 to 4 weeks of dosing, the dose of tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules can be increased to 0.8 mg once daily. Tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules 0.4 mg should not be used in combination with strong inhibitors of CYP3A4 (e.g., ketoconazole) [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

If tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules administration is discontinued or interrupted for several days at either the 0.4 mg or 0.8 mg dose, therapy should be started again with the 0.4 mg once daily dose.
Ceftazidime And Dextros...

Ceftazidime And Dextrose

The recommended initial dose of guanfacine tablets when given alone or in combination with another antihypertensive drug is 1 mg daily given at bedtime to minimize somnolence. If after 3 to 4 weeks of therapy 1 mg does not give a satisfactory result, a dose of 2 mg may be given, although most of the effect of guanfacine is seen at 1 mg (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). Higher daily doses have been used, but adverse reactions increase significantly with doses above 3 mg/day.

The frequency of rebound hypertension is low, but it can occur. When rebound occurs, it does so after 2 to 4 days, which is delayed compared with clonidine hydrochloride. This is consistent with the longer half-life of guanfacine. In most cases, after abrupt withdrawal of guanfacine, blood pressure returns to pretreatment levels slowly (within 2 to 4 days) without ill effects.
Metoprolol Tartrate

Metoprolol Tartrate

Hypertension

The dosage of metoprolol tartrate tablets should be individualized. Metoprolol tartrate tablets should be taken with or immediately following meals.

The usual initial dosage of metoprolol tartrate tablets is 100 mg daily in single or divided doses, whether used alone or added to a diuretic. The dosage may be increased at weekly (or longer) intervals until optimum blood pressure reduction is achieved. In general, the maximum effect of any given dosage level will be apparent after one week of therapy. The effective dosage range of metoprolol tartrate tablets is 100 mg to 450 mg per day. Dosages above 450 mg per day have not been studied. While once daily dosing is effective and can maintain a reduction in blood pressure throughout the day, lower doses (especially 100 mg) may not maintain a full effect at the end of the 24-hour period, and larger or more frequent daily doses may be required. This can be evaluated by measuring blood pressure near the end of the dosing interval to determine whether satisfactory control is being maintained throughout the day. Beta1 selectivity diminishes as the dose of metoprolol is increased.

Angina Pectoris

The dosage of metoprolol tartrate tablets should be individualized. Metoprolol tartrate tablets should be taken with or immediately following meals.

The usual initial dosage of metoprolol tartrate tablets is 100 mg daily, given in two divided doses. The dosage may be gradually increased at weekly intervals until optimum clinical response has been obtained or there is pronounced slowing of the heart rate. The effective dosage range of metoprolol tartrate tablets is 100 mg to 400 mg per day. Dosages above 400 mg per day have not been studied. If treatment is to be discontinued, the dosage should be reduced gradually over a period of 1 to 2 weeks (see WARNINGS).

Myocardial Infarction

Early Treatment

During the early phase of definite or suspected acute myocardial infarction, treatment with metoprolol tartrate tablets can be initiated as soon as possible after the patient’s arrival in the hospital. Such treatment should be initiated in a coronary care or similar unit immediately after the patient’s hemodynamic condition has stabilized.

Treatment in this early phase should begin with the intravenous administration of three bolus injections of 5 mg of metoprolol tartrate each; the injections should be given at approximately 2 minute intervals. During the intravenous administration of metoprolol, blood pressure, heart rate, and electrocardiogram should be carefully monitored.

In patients who tolerate the full intravenous dose (15 mg), metoprolol tartrate tablets, 50 mg every 6 hours, should be initiated 15 minutes after the last intravenous dose and continued for 48 hours. Thereafter, patients should receive a maintenance dosage of 100 mg twice daily (see Late Treatment below).

Patients who appear not to tolerate the full intravenous dose should be started on metoprolol tartrate tablets either 25 mg or 50 mg every 6 hours (depending on the degree of intolerance) 15 minutes after the last intravenous dose or as soon as their clinical condition allows. In patients with severe intolerance, treatment with metoprolol should be discontinued (see WARNINGS).

Late Treatment

Patients with contraindications to treatment during the early phase of suspected or definite myocardial infarction, patients who appear not to tolerate the full early treatment, and patients in whom the physician wishes to delay therapy for any other reason should be started on metoprolol tartrate tablets, 100 mg twice daily, as soon as their clinical condition allows. Therapy should be continued for at least 3 months. Although the efficacy of metoprolol beyond 3 months has not been conclusively established, data from studies with other beta-blockers suggest that treatment should be continued for 1 to 3 years.
Nifedipine

Nifedipine

Dosage must be adjusted according to each patient's needs. Therapy for either hypertension or angina should be initiated with 30 or 60 mg once daily. Nifedipine extended-release tablets should be swallowed whole and should not be bitten or divided. In general, titration should proceed over a 7–14 day period so that the physician can fully assess the response to each dose level and monitor blood pressure before proceeding to higher doses. Since steady-state plasma levels are achieved on the second day of dosing, if symptoms so warrant, titration may proceed more rapidly provided the patient is assessed frequently. Titration to doses above 120 mg are not recommended.

Angina patients controlled on nifedipine immediate-release capsules alone or in combination with other antianginal medications may be safely switched to nifedipine extended-release tablets at the nearest equivalent total daily dose (e.g., 30 mg t.i.d. of nifedipine immediate-release capsules may be changed to 90 mg once daily of nifedipine extended-release tablets). Subsequent titration to higher or lower doses may be necessary and should be initiated as clinically warranted. Experience with doses greater than 90 mg in patients with angina is limited. Therefore, doses greater than 90 mg should be used with caution and only when clinically warranted.

No "rebound effect" has been observed upon discontinuation of nifedipine extended-release tablets. However, if discontinuation of nifedipine is necessary, sound clinical practice suggests that the dosage should be decreased gradually with close physician supervision.

Care should be taken when dispensing nifedipine extended-release to assure that the extended release dosage form has been prescribed.

Co-Administration with Other Antianginal Drugs

Sublingual nitroglycerin may be taken as required for the control of acute manifestations of angina, particularly during nifedipine titration. See PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions, for information on co-administration of nifedipine with beta blockers or long-acting nitrates.
Matzim La

Matzim La

The usual dosage of pentoxifylline in extended-release tablet form is one tablet (400 mg) three times a day with meals.

While the effect of pentoxifylline extended-release tablets may be seen within 2 to 4 weeks, it is recommended that treatment be continued for at least 8 weeks. Efficacy has been demonstrated in double-blind clinical studies of 6 months duration.

Digestive and central nervous system side effects are dose related. If patients develop these effects it is recommended that the dosage be lowered to one tablet twice a day (800 mg/day). If side effects persist at this lower dosage, the administration of pentoxifylline extended-release tablets should be discontinued.

In patients with severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance below 30 mL/min) reduce dose to 400 mg once a day.

Dosing information cannot be provided for patients with hepatic impairment.
Levetiracetam

Levetiracetam

2.1 General Dosing Considerations

Rash

There are suggestions, yet to be proven, that the risk of severe, potentially life threatening rash may be increased by (1) coadministration of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) with valproate, (2) exceeding the recommended initial dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible), or (3) exceeding the recommended dose escalation for lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible). However, cases have occurred in the absence of these factors [see Boxed Warning]. Therefore, it is important that the dosing recommendations be followed closely.

The risk of nonserious rash may be increased when the recommended initial dose and/or the rate of dose escalation of lamotrigine is exceeded and in patients with a history of allergy or rash to other AEDs.

It is recommended that lamotrigine not be restarted in patients who discontinued due to rash associated with prior treatment with lamotrigine, unless the potential benefits clearly outweigh the risks. If the decision is made to restart a patient who has discontinued lamotrigine, the need to restart with the initial dosing recommendations should be assessed. The greater the interval of time since the previous dose, the greater consideration should be given to restarting with the initial dosing recommendations. If a patient has discontinued lamotrigine for a period of more than 5 half-lives, it is recommended that initial dosing recommendations and guidelines be followed. The half-life of lamotrigine is affected by other concomitant medications [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Lamotrigine Added to Drugs Known to Induce or Inhibit Glucuronidation

Drugs other than those listed in the Clinical Pharmacology section [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)] have not been systematically evaluated in combination with lamotrigine. Because lamotrigine is metabolized predominantly by glucuronic acid conjugation, drugs that are known to induce or inhibit glucuronidation may affect the apparent clearance of lamotrigine and doses of lamotrigine may require adjustment based on clinical response.

Target Plasma Levels for Patients with Epilepsy or Bipolar Disorder

A therapeutic plasma concentration range has not been established for lamotrigine. Dosing of lamotrigine should be based on therapeutic response [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Women taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives

Starting Lamotrigine in Women taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives

Although estrogen-containing oral contraceptives have been shown to increase the clearance of lamotrigine [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], no adjustments to the recommended dose-escalation guidelines for lamotrigine should be necessary solely based on the use of estrogen-containing oral contraceptives. Therefore, dose escalation should follow the recommended guidelines for initiating adjunctive therapy with lamotrigine based on the concomitant AED or other concomitant medications (see Table 1 or Table 5). See below for adjustments to maintenance doses of lamotrigine in women taking estrogen-containing oral contraceptives.

Adjustments to the Maintenance Dose of Lamotrigine in Women taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives

(1) Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: For women not taking carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], the maintenance dose of lamotrigine will in most cases need to be increased, by as much as 2-fold over the recommended target maintenance dose, in order to maintain a consistent lamotrigine plasma level [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

(2) Starting Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: In women taking a stable dose of lamotrigine tablets and not taking carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], the maintenance dose will in most cases need to be increased by as much as 2-fold in order to maintain a consistent lamotrigine plasma level. The dose increases should begin at the same time that the oral contraceptive is introduced and continue, based on clinical response, no more rapidly than 50 to 100 mg/day every week. Dose increases should not exceed the recommended rate (see Table 1 or Table 5) unless lamotrigine plasma levels or clinical response support larger increases. Gradual transient increases in lamotrigine plasma levels may occur during the week of inactive hormonal preparation (“pill-free” week), and these increases will be greater if dose increases are made in the days before or during the week of inactive hormonal preparation. Increased lamotrigine plasma levels could result in additional adverse reactions, such as dizziness, ataxia and diplopia. If adverse reactions attributable to lamotrigine tablets consistently occur during the “pill-free” week, dose adjustments to the overall maintenance dose may be necessary. Dose adjustments limited to the “pill-free” week are not recommended. For women taking lamotrigine tablets in addition to carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], no adjustment to the dose of lamotrigine tablets should be necessary.

(3) Stopping Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: For women not taking carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], the maintenance dose of lamotrigine tablets will in most cases need to be decreased by as much as 50% in order to maintain a consistent lamotrigine plasma level. The decrease in dose of lamotrigine tablets should not exceed 25% of the total daily dose per week over a 2-week period, unless clinical response or lamotrigine plasma levels indicate otherwise [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. For women taking lamotrigine tablets in addition to carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], no adjustment to the dose of lamotrigine tablets should be necessary.

Women and Other Hormonal Contraceptive Preparations or Hormone Replacement Therapy

The effect of other hormonal contraceptive preparations or hormone replacement therapy on the pharmacokinetics of lamotrigine has not been systematically evaluated. It has been reported that ethinylestradiol, not progestogens, increased the clearance of lamotrigine up to 2-fold, and the progestin-only pills had no effect on lamotrigine plasma levels. Therefore, adjustments to the dosage of lamotrigine in the presence of progestogens alone will likely not be needed.

Patients with Hepatic Impairment

Experience in patients with hepatic impairment is limited. Based on a clinical pharmacology study in 24 patients with mild, moderate and severe liver impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], the following general recommendations can be made. No dosage adjustment is needed in patients with mild liver impairment. Initial, escalation, and maintenance doses should generally be reduced by approximately 25% in patients with moderate and severe liver impairment without ascites and 50% in patients with severe liver impairment with ascites. Escalation and maintenance doses may be adjusted according to clinical response.

Patients with Renal Impairment

Initial doses of lamotrigine should be based on patients' concomitant medications (see Tables 1 to 3 or Table 5); reduced maintenance doses may be effective for patients with significant renal impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Few patients with severe renal impairment have been evaluated during chronic treatment with lamotrigine. Because there is inadequate experience in this population, lamotrigine should be used with caution in these patients.

Discontinuation Strategy

Epilepsy

For patients receiving lamotrigine in combination with other AEDs, a reevaluation of all AEDs in the regimen should be considered if a change in seizure control or an appearance or worsening of adverse reactions is observed.

If a decision is made to discontinue therapy with lamotrigine, a step-wise reduction of dose over at least 2 weeks (approximately 50% per week) is recommended unless safety concerns require a more rapid withdrawal [see Warnings and Precautions (5.10)].

Discontinuing carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation should prolong the half-life of lamotrigine; discontinuing valproate should shorten the half-life of lamotrigine.

Bipolar Disorder

In the controlled clinical trials, there was no increase in the incidence, type, or severity of adverse reactions following abrupt termination of lamotrigine. In clinical trials in patients with bipolar disorder, two patients experienced seizures shortly after abrupt withdrawal of lamotrigine. However, there were confounding factors that may have contributed to the occurrence of seizures in these bipolar patients. Discontinuation of lamotrigine should involve a step-wise reduction of dose over at least 2 weeks (approximately 50% per week) unless safety concerns require a more rapid withdrawal [see Warnings and Precautions (5.10)].

2.2 Epilepsy – Adjunctive Therapy

This section provides specific dosing recommendations for patients greater than 12 years of age and patients 2 to 12 years of age. Within each of these age groups, specific dosing recommendations are provided depending upon concomitant AED or other concomitant medications (Table 1 for patients greater than 12 years of age and Table 2 for patients 2 to 12 years of age). A weight-based dosing guide for patients 2 to 12 years of age on concomitant valproate is provided in Table 3.

Patients Over 12 Years of Age

Recommended dosing guidelines are summarized in Table 1.
Table 1. Escalation Regimen for Lamotrigine in Patients Over 12 Years of Age with Epilepsy * Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. † These drugs induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Other drugs which have similar effects include estrogen-containing oral contraceptives [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Dosing recommendations for oral contraceptives can be found in General Dosing Considerations [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Patients on rifampin, or other drugs that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance, should follow the same dosing titration/maintenance regimen as that used with anticonvulsants that have this effect.
For Patients TAKINGValproate*

For Patients NOT TAKINGCarbamazepine,Phenytoin, Phenobarbital,Primidone† or Valproate*

For Patients TAKINGCarbamazepine,Phenytoin,Phenobarbital, orPrimidone† and NOTTAKING Valproate*

Weeks 1 and 2

25 mg every other day

25 mg every day

50 mg/day

Weeks 3 and 4

25 mg every day

50 mg/day

100 mg/day (in 2 divided doses)

Week 5 onwardsto maintenance

Increase by 25 to 50 mg/day every 1 to 2 weeks

Increase by 50 mg/day every 1 to 2 weeks

Increase by 100 mg/day every 1 to 2 weeks

Usual MaintenanceDose

100 to 200 mg/day with valproate alone 100 to 400 mg/day with valproate and other drugs that induce glucuronidation (in 1 or 2 divided doses)

225 to 375 mg/day (in 2 divided doses)

300 to 500 mg/day (in 2 divided doses)

Patients 2 to 12 Years of Age

Recommended dosing guidelines are summarized in Table 2.

Smaller starting doses and slower dose escalations than those used in clinical trials are recommended because of the suggestion that the risk of rash may be decreased by smaller starting doses and slower dose escalations. Therefore, maintenance doses will take longer to reach in clinical practice than in clinical trials. It may take several weeks to months to achieve an individualized maintenance dose. Maintenance doses in patients weighing less than 30 kg, regardless of age or concomitant AED, may need to be increased as much as 50%, based on clinical response.

The smallest available strength of lamotrigine chewable dispersible tablets is 2 mg and only whole tablets should be administered. If the calculated dose cannot be achieved using whole tablets, the dose should be rounded down to the nearest whole tablet [see How Supplied/Storage and Handling (16) and Medication Guide].
Table 2. Escalation Regimen for Lamotrigine in Patients 2 to 12 Years of Age with Epilepsy * Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. † These drugs induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Other drugs which have similar effects include estrogen-containing oral contraceptives [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Dosing recommendations for oral contraceptives can be found in General Dosing Considerations [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Patients on rifampin, or other drugs that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance, should follow the same dosing titration/maintenance regimen as that used with anticonvulsants that have this effect.
For Patients TAKING

Valproate*

For Patients NOT TAKINGCarbamazepine,Phenytoin, Phenobarbital,Primidone† or Valproate*

For Patients TAKINGCarbamazepine,Phenytoin,Phenobarbital orPrimidone† and NOT TAKING Valproate*

Weeks 1 and 2

0.15 mg/kg/day in 1 or 2 divided doses,rounded down to thenearest whole tablet (seeTable 3 for weight baseddosing guide).

0.3 mg/kg/day in 1 or 2 divided doses,rounded down to thenearest whole tablet.

0.6 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses,rounded down to thenearest whole tablet.

Weeks 3 and 4

0.3 mg/kg/day

in 1 or 2 divided doses,rounded down to thenearest whole tablet (see Table 3 for weight based dosing guide).

0.6 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses,rounded down to thenearest whole tablet.

1.2 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses,rounded down to thenearest whole tablet.

Week 5onwards to

maintenance

The dose should beincreased every 1 to 2 weeks as follows: calculate 0.3 mg/kg/day, round this amount down to the nearest whole tablet and add thisamount to the previouslyadministered daily dose.

The dose should be increased every 1 to 2 weeks as follows: calculate 0.6 mg/kg/day,

round this amount down to the nearest whole tablet and add this amount to the previously administered daily dose.

The dose should beincreased every 1 to 2 weeks as follows:calculate 1.2 mg/kg/day, round this amountdown to the nearestwhole tablet andadd this amount tothe previouslyadministered dailydose.

Usual

Maintenance

Dose

1 to 5 mg/kg/day (maximum 200 mg/day in 1 or 2 divided doses).1 to 3 mg/kg/day withvalproate alone.

4.5 to 7.5 mg/kg/day (maximum 300 mg/day in 2 divided doses).

5 to 15 mg/kg/day (maximum 400 mg/day in 2 divided doses).

Maintenance

dose in

patients less

than 30 kg

May need to be increasedby as much as 50%, basedon clinical response.

May need to be increased by as much as 50%, based on clinical response.

May need to beincreased by asmuch as 50%, basedon clinical response.

Note: Only whole tablets should be used for dosing.
Table 3. The Initial Weight-Based Dosing Guide for Patients 2 to 12 Years taking Valproate (Weeks 1 to 4) with Epilepsy
If the patient's weight is

Give this daily dose, using the most appropriate combination of lamotrigine 2 mg and 5 mg tablets

Greater than

And less than

Weeks 1 and 2

Weeks 3 and 4

6.7 kg

14 kg

2 mg every other day

2 mg every day

14.1 kg

27 kg

2 mg every day

4 mg every day

27.1 kg

34 kg

4 mg every day

8 mg every day

34.1 kg

40 kg

5 mg every day

10 mg every day

Usual Adjunctive Maintenance Dose for Epilepsy

The usual maintenance doses identified in Tables 1 and 2 are derived from dosing regimens employed in the placebo-controlled adjunctive studies in which the efficacy of lamotrigine was established. In patients receiving multidrug regimens employing carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital or primidone without valproate, maintenance doses of adjunctive lamotrigine as high as 700 mg/day have been used. In patients receiving valproate alone, maintenance doses of adjunctive lamotrigine as high as 200 mg/day have been used. The advantage of using doses above those recommended in Tables 1 through 4 has not been established in controlled trials.

2.3 Epilepsy – Conversion from Adjunctive Therapy to Monotherapy

The goal of the transition regimen is to effect the conversion to monotherapy with lamotrigine under conditions that ensure adequate seizure control while mitigating the risk of serious rash associated with the rapid titration of lamotrigine.

The recommended maintenance dose of lamotrigine as monotherapy is 500 mg/day given in two divided doses.

To avoid an increased risk of rash, the recommended initial dose and subsequent dose escalations of lamotrigine should not be exceeded [see Boxed Warning].

Conversion from Adjunctive Therapy with Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital or Primidone to Monotherapy with Lamotrigine

After achieving a dose of 500 mg/day of lamotrigine according to the guidelines in Table 1, the concomitant AED should be withdrawn by 20% decrements each week over a 4-week period. The regimen for the withdrawal of the concomitant AED is based on experience gained in the controlled monotherapy clinical trial.

Conversion from Adjunctive Therapy with Valproate to Monotherapy with Lamotrigine

The conversion regimen involves four steps outlined in Table 4.
Table 4. Conversion from Adjunctive Therapy with Valproate to Monotherapy with Lamotrigine in Patients ≥ 16 Years of Age with Epilepsy
Lamotrigine

Valproate

Step 1

Achieve a dose of 200 mg/day according toguidelines in Table 1 (if not already on

200 mg/day).

Maintain previous stable dose.

Step 2

Maintain at 200 mg/day.

Decrease to 500 mg/day bydecrements no greater than500 mg/day/week and thenmaintain the dose of 500 mg/day for one week.

Step 3

Increase to 300 mg/day and maintainfor one week.

Simultaneously decrease to250 mg/day and maintain forone week.

Step 4

Increase by 100 mg/day every week to achievemaintenance dose of 500 mg/day.

Discontinue.

Conversion from Adjunctive Therapy with AEDs Other than Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidone or Valproate to Monotherapy with Lamotrigine

No specific dosing guidelines can be provided for conversion to monotherapy with lamotrigine with AEDs other than carbamazepine, phenobarbital, phenytoin, primidone or valproate.

2.4 Bipolar Disorder

The goal of maintenance treatment with lamotrigine is to delay the time to occurrence of mood episodes (depression, mania, hypomania, mixed episodes) in patients treated for acute mood episodes with standard therapy. The target dose of lamotrigine is 200 mg/day (100 mg/day in patients taking valproate, which decreases the apparent clearance of lamotrigine and 400 mg/day in patients not taking valproate and taking either carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone or other drugs such as rifampin that increase the apparent clearance of lamotrigine). In the clinical trials, doses up to 400 mg/day as monotherapy were evaluated; however, no additional benefit was seen at 400 mg/day compared with 200 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. Accordingly, doses above 200 mg/day are not recommended. Treatment with lamotrigine is introduced, based on concurrent medications, according to the regimen outlined in Table 5. If other psychotropic medications are withdrawn following stabilization, the dose of lamotrigine should be adjusted. For patients discontinuing valproate, the dose of lamotrigine should be doubled over a 2-week period in equal weekly increments (see Table 6). For patients discontinuing carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation, the dose of lamotrigine should remain constant for the first week and then should be decreased by half over a 2-week period in equal weekly decrements (see Table 6). The dose of lamotrigine may then be further adjusted to the target dose (200 mg) as clinically indicated.

If other drugs are subsequently introduced, the dose of lamotrigine tablets may need to be adjusted. In particular, the introduction of valproate requires reduction in the dose of lamotrigine tablets [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

To avoid an increased risk of rash, the recommended initial dose and subsequent dose escalations of lamotrigine should not be exceeded [see Boxed Warning].
Table 5. Escalation Regimen for Lamotrigine for Patients with Bipolar Disorder * Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. † These drugs induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Other drugs which have similar effects include estrogen-containing oral contraceptives [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Dosing recommendations for oral contraceptives can be found in General Dosing Considerations [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Patients on rifampin, or other drugs that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance, should follow the same dosing titration/maintenance regimen as that used with anticonvulsants that have this effect.
For Patients TAKING Valproate*

For Patients NOT TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidone† or Valproate*

For Patients TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital or Primidone† and NOT TAKING Valproate*

Weeks 1 and 2

25 mg every other day

25 mg daily

50 mg daily

Weeks 3 and 4

25 mg daily

50 mg daily

100 mg daily, in divided doses

Week 5

50 mg daily

100 mg daily

200 mg daily, in divided doses

Week 6

100 mg daily

200 mg daily

300 mg daily, in divided doses

Week 7

100 mg daily

200 mg daily

up to 400 mg daily, in divided doses
Table 6. Dosage Adjustments to Lamotrigine for Patients with Bipolar Disorder Following Discontinuation of Psychotropic Medications * These drugs induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Other drugs which have similar effects include estrogen-containing oral contraceptives [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Dosing recommendations for oral contraceptives can be found in General Dosing Considerations [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Patients on rifampin, or other drugs that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance, should follow the same dosing titration/maintenance regimen as that used with anticonvulsants that have this effect. † Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Discontinuation of Psychotropic Drugs (excluding Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidone* or Valproate†)

After Discontinuation of Valproate†

After Discontinuation of Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital or Primidone*

Current dose of lamotrigine tablets (mg/day) 100

Current dose of lamotrigine tablets (mg/day) 400

Week 1

Maintain current dose of lamotrigine tablets

150

400

Week 2

Maintain current dose of lamotrigine tablets

200

300

Week 3 onward

Maintain current dose of lamotrigine tablets

200

200

The benefit of continuing treatment in patients who had been stabilized in an 8- to 16-week open-label phase with lamotrigine was established in two randomized, placebo-controlled clinical maintenance trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. However, the optimal duration of treatment with lamotrigine has not been established. Thus, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.5 Administration of Lamotrigine Tablets (Chewable, Dispersible)

Lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) may be swallowed whole, chewed, or dispersed in water or diluted fruit juice. If the tablets are chewed, consume a small amount of water or diluted fruit juice to aid in swallowing.

To disperse lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible), add the tablets to a small amount of liquid (1 teaspoon or enough to cover the medication). Approximately one minute later, when the tablets are completely dispersed, swirl the solution and consume the entire quantity immediately. No attempt should be made to administer partial quantities of the dispersed tablets.
Diltiazem Hydrochloride...

Diltiazem Hydrochloride

Hypertensive or anginal patients who are treated with other formulations of diltiazem can safely be switched to diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules (once-a-day dosage) at the nearest equivalent total daily dose. Subsequent titration to higher or lower doses may, however, be necessary and should be initiated as clinically indicated.

Studies have shown a slight increase in the rate of absorption of diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules (once-a-day dosage), when ingested with a high fat breakfast; therefore, administration in the morning on an empty stomach is recommended.

Patients should be cautioned that the diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules should not be opened, chewed or crushed and should be swallowed whole.

Dosage

Hypertension

Dosages must be adjusted to each patient's needs, starting with 180 mg or 240 mg once daily. Based on the antihypertensive effect, the dose may be adjusted as needed. Individual patients, particularly ≥ 60 years of age, may respond to a lower dose of 120 mg. The usual dosage range studied in clinical trials was 180 mg to 480 mg once daily.

Current clinical experience with the 540 mg dose is limited, the dose may be increased to 540 mg with little or no increased risk of adverse reactions. Doses should not exceed 540 mg once daily.

While a dose of diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules given once daily may produce an antihypertensive effect similar to the same total daily dose given in divided doses, individual dose adjustment may be needed.

Angina

Dosages for the treatment of angina should be adjusted to each patient's needs, starting with a dose of 120 mg once daily, which may be titrated to doses of up to 480 mg once daily. When necessary, titration may be carried out over a 7 to 14 day period.

Concomitant Use with Other Cardiovascular Agents

Sublingual Nitroglycerin

Sublingual nitroglycerin may be taken as required to abort acute anginal attacks during diltiazem therapy.

Prophylactic Nitrate Therapy

Diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules (once-a-day dosage) may be safely coadministered with short- and long-acting nitrates.

Beta-Blockers

(See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS.)

Antihypertensives

Diltiazem has an additive antihypertensive effect when used with other antihypertensive agents. Therefore, the dosage of diltiazem hydrochloride or the concomitant antihypertensives may need to be adjusted when adding one to the other.
Tacrolimus

Tacrolimus

2.1 Dosage in Adult Kidney, Liver, or Heart Transplant Patients

The initial oral dosage recommendations for adult patients with kidney, liver, or heart transplants along with recommendations for whole blood trough concentrations are shown in Table 1. The initial dose of tacrolimus capsules should be administered no sooner than 6 hours after transplantation in the liver and heart transplant patients. In kidney transplant patients, the initial dose of tacrolimus capsules may be administered within 24 hours of transplantation, but should be delayed until renal function has recovered. For blood concentration monitoring details see Dosage and Administration (2.6).
Table 1. Summary of Initial Oral Dosage Recommendations and Observed Whole Blood Trough Concentrations in Adults * In a second smaller trial, the initial dose of tacrolimus was 0.15 to 0.2 mg/kg/day and observed tacrolimus concentrations were 6 to 16 ng/mL during month 1 to 3 and 5 to 12 ng/mL during month 4 to 12 [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].
Patient Population

Recommended Tacrolimus Capsules Initial Oral Dosage

Note: daily doses should be administered as two divided doses, every 12 hours

Observed Tacrolimus Whole Blood Trough Concentrations

Adult kidney transplant patients

In combination with azathioprine

0.2 mg/kg/day

month 1 to 3: 7 to 20 ng/mL

month 4 to 12: 5 to 15 ng/mL

In combination with MMF/IL-2 receptor antagonist*

0.1 mg/kg/day

month 1 to 12: 4 to 11 ng/mL

Adult liver transplant patients

0.10 to 0.15 mg/kg/day

month 1 to 12: 5 to 20 ng/mL

Adult heart transplant patients

0.075 mg/kg/day

month 1 to 3: 10 to 20 ng/mL month ≥ 4: 5 to 15 ng/mL

Dosing should be titrated based on clinical assessments of rejection and tolerability. Lower tacrolimus dosages than the recommended initial dosage may be sufficient as maintenance therapy. Adjunct therapy with adrenal corticosteroids is recommended early post-transplant.

The data in kidney transplant patients indicate that the Black patients required a higher dose to attain comparable trough concentrations compared to Caucasian patients (Table 2).
Table 2. Comparative Dose and Trough Concentrations Based on Race
Time After Transplant

Caucasian n = 114

Black n = 56

Dose (mg/kg)

Trough Concentrations (ng/mL)

Dose (mg/kg)

Trough Concentrations (ng/mL)

Day 7

0.18

12

0.23

10.9

Month 1

0.17

12.8

0.26

12.9

Month 6

0.14

11.8

0.24

11.5

Month 12

0.13

10.1

0.19

11

Anaphylactic reactions have occurred with injectables containing castor oil derivatives, such as tacrolimus injection [see Warnings and Precautions (5.11)].

2.2 Dosage in Pediatric Liver Transplant Patients

The initial oral dosage recommendations for pediatric patients with liver transplants along with recommendations for whole blood trough concentrations are shown in Table 3. For blood concentration monitoring details see Dosage and Administration (2.6). If necessary, pediatric patients may start on an IV dose of 0.03 to 0.05 mg/kg/day.
Table 3. Summary of Initial Oral Dosage Recommendations and Observed Whole Blood Trough Concentrations in Children
Patient Population

Recommended Tacrolimus Capsules Initial Oral Dosage Note: daily doses should be administered as two divided doses, every 12 hours

Observed Tacrolimus Whole Blood Trough Concentrations

Pediatric liver transplant patients

0.15 to 0.20 mg/kg/day

Month 1 to 12: 5 to 20 ng/mL

Pediatric liver transplantation patients without pre-existing renal or hepatic dysfunction have required and tolerated higher doses than adults to achieve similar blood concentrations.

Experience in pediatric kidney and heart transplantation patients is limited.

2.3 Dosage Adjustment in Patients with Renal Impairment

Due to its potential for nephrotoxicity, consideration should be given to dosing tacrolimus capsules at the lower end of the therapeutic dosing range in patients who have received a liver or heart transplant and have pre-existing renal impairment. Further reductions in dose below the targeted range may be required.

In kidney transplant patients with post-operative oliguria, the initial dose of tacrolimus capsules should be administered no sooner than 6 hours and within 24 hours of transplantation, but may be delayed until renal function shows evidence of recovery.

2.4 Dosage Adjustments in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

Due to the reduced clearance and prolonged half-life, patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child Pugh ≥ 10) may require lower doses of tacrolimus capsules. Close monitoring of blood concentrations is warranted.

The use of tacrolimus capsules in liver transplant recipients experiencing post-transplant hepatic impairment may be associated with increased risk of developing renal insufficiency related to high whole blood concentrations of tacrolimus. These patients should be monitored closely and dosage adjustments should be considered. Some evidence suggests that lower doses should be used in these patients [see Dosage and Administration (2.1), Use in Specific Populations (8.7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.5 Administration Instructions

It is recommended that patients initiate oral therapy with tacrolimus capsules if possible.

Initial dosage and observed tacrolimus whole blood trough concentrations for adults are shown in Table 1 and for pediatrics in Table 3 [see Dosage and Administration (2.1, 2.2)]; for blood concentration monitoring details in kidney transplant patients [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)].

It is important to take tacrolimus capsules consistently every day either with or without food because the presence and composition of food decreases the bioavailability of tacrolimus capsules [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Patients should not eat grapefruit or drink grapefruit juice in combination with tacrolimus capsules [see Drug Interactions (7.2)].

Tacrolimus capsules should not be used simultaneously with cyclosporine. Tacrolimus capsules or cyclosporine should be discontinued at least 24 hours before initiating the other. In the presence of elevated tacrolimus capsules or cyclosporine concentrations, dosing with the other drug usually should be further delayed.

In patients unable to take oral tacrolimus capsules, therapy may be initiated with tacrolimus injection as a continuous IV infusion. If IV therapy is necessary, conversion from IV to oral tacrolimus capsules is recommended as soon as oral therapy can be tolerated. This usually occurs within 2 to 3 days. In patients receiving an IV infusion, the first dose of oral therapy should be given 8 to 12 hours after discontinuing the IV infusion.

2.6 Therapeutic Drug Monitoring

Monitoring of tacrolimus blood concentrations in conjunction with other laboratory and clinical parameters is considered an essential aid to patient management for the evaluation of rejection, toxicity, dose adjustments and compliance. Observed whole blood trough concentrations can be found in Table 1. Factors influencing frequency of monitoring include but are not limited to hepatic or renal dysfunction, the addition or discontinuation of potentially interacting drugs and the post-transplant time. Blood concentration monitoring is not a replacement for renal and liver function monitoring and tissue biopsies. Data from clinical trials show that tacrolimus whole blood concentrations were most variable during the first week post-transplantation.

The relative risks of toxicity and efficacy failure are related to tacrolimus whole blood trough concentrations. Therefore, monitoring of whole blood trough concentrations is recommended to assist in the clinical evaluation of toxicity and efficacy failure.

Methods commonly used for the assay of tacrolimus include high performance liquid chromatography with tandem mass spectrometric detection (HPLC/MS/MS) and immunoassays. Immunoassays may react with metabolites as well as parent compound. Therefore assay results obtained with immunoassays may have a positive bias relative to results of HPLC/MS. The bias may depend upon the specific assay and laboratory. Comparison of the concentrations in published literature to patient concentrations using the current assays must be made with detailed knowledge of the assay methods and biological matrices employed. Whole blood is the matrix of choice and specimens should be collected into tubes containing ethylene diamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA) anti-coagulant. Heparin anti-coagulation is not recommended because of the tendency to form clots on storage. Samples which are not analyzed immediately should be stored at room temperature or in a refrigerator and assayed within 7 days; see assay instructions for specifics. If samples are to be kept longer they should be deep frozen at -20° C. One study showed drug recovery > 90% for samples stored at -20° C for 6 months, with reduced recovery observed after 6 months.
Lithium Carbonate

Lithium Carbonate

Acute Mania

Optimal patient response can usually be established with 1800 mg/day in the following dosages:
* Can also be administered on 600 mg TID recommended dosing interval. Acute Mania Morning Afternoon Nighttime Lithium carbonate extended-release tablets* 3 tabs (900 mg) 3 tabs (900 mg)
Such doses will normally produce an effective serum lithium concentration ranging between 1 and 1.5 mEq/L. Dosage must be individualized according to serum concentrations and clinical response. Regular monitoring of the patient’s clinical state and of serum lithium concentrations is necessary. Serum concentrations should be determined twice per week during the acute phase and until the serum concentrations and clinical condition of the patient have been stabilized.

Long-term Control

Desirable serum lithium concentrations are 0.6 to 1.2 mEq/L which can usually be achieved with 900 to 1200 mg/day. Dosage will vary from one individual to another, but generally the following dosages will maintain this concentration:
* Can be administered on TID recommended dosing interval up to 1200 mg/day. Long-term Control Morning Afternoon Nighttime Lithium carbonate extended-release tablets* 2 tabs (600 mg) 2 tabs (600 mg)
Serum lithium concentrations in uncomplicated cases receiving maintenance therapy during remission should be monitored at least every 2 months. Patients abnormally sensitive to lithium may exhibit toxic signs at serum concentrations of 1 to1.5 mEq/L. Geriatric patients often respond to reduced dosage and may exhibit signs of toxicity at serum concentrations ordinarily tolerated by other patients. In general, dose selection for an elderly patient should be cautious, usually starting at the low end of the dosing range, reflecting the greater frequency of decreased hepatic, renal, or cardiac function, and of concomitant disease or other drug therapy.

Important Considerations
Blood samples for serum lithium determinations should be drawn immediately prior to the next dose when lithium concentrations are relatively stable (i.e., 8 to 12 hours after previous dose). Total reliance must not be placed on serum concentrations alone. Accurate patient evaluation requires both clinical and laboratory analysis. Lithium carbonate extended-release tablets must be swallowed whole and never chewed or crushed.
Hydrochlorothiazide

Hydrochlorothiazide

For Control of Hypertension

The adult initial dose of hydrochlorothiazide capsules is one capsule given once daily whether given alone or in combination with other antihypertensives. Total daily doses greater than 50 mg are not recommended.
Diclofenac Potassium

Diclofenac Potassium

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of diclofenac potassium tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use diclofenac potassium tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with diclofenac potassium tablets the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient’s needs.

For treatment of pain or primary dysmenorrhea the recommended dosage is 50 mg t.i.d. With experience, physicians may find that in some patients an initial dose of 100 mg of diclofenac potassium tablets, followed by 50 mg doses, will provide better relief.

For the relief of osteoarthritis the recommended dosage is 100 to 150 mg/day in divided doses, 50 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d.

For the relief of rheumatoid arthritis the recommended dosage is 150 to 200 mg/day in divided doses, 50 mg t.i.d. or q.i.d.

Different formulations of diclofenac [Voltaren®1 (diclofenac sodium enteric-coated tablets); Voltaren®-XR2 (diclofenac sodium extended-release tablets); Cataflam®3 (diclofenac potassium immediate-release tablets)] are not necessarily bioequivalent even if the milligram strength is the same.
1
Voltaren® is a registered trademark of Novartis
2
Voltaren®-XR is a registered trademark of Novartis
3
Cataflam® is a registered trademark of Novartis
Nabumetone

Nabumetone

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of nabumetone tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use nabumetone tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with nabumetone tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient’s needs.

Osteoarthritis and Rheumatoid Arthritis

The recommended starting dose is 1000 mg taken as a single dose with or without food. Some patients may obtain more symptomatic relief from 1500 mg to 2000 mg per day. Nabumetone tablets can be given in either a single or twice-daily dose. Dosages greater than 2000 mg per day have not been studied. The lowest effective dose should be used for chronic treatment (see WARNINGS: Renal Effects). Patients weighing under 50 kg may be less likely to require dosages beyond 1000 mg; therefore, after observing the response to initial therapy, the dose should be adjusted to meet individual patients’ requirements.
A3250-24 Spinal 24g Ger...

A3250-24 Spinal 24g Gertie Marx Spinal With Introducer

Patients with tinea (pityriasis) versicolor should apply Mentax® Cream, 1%, once daily for two weeks. Sufficient Mentax® Cream should be applied to cover affected areas and immediately surrounding skin of patients with tinea versicolor. If a patient shows no clinical improvement after the treatment period, the diagnosis and therapy should be reviewed.
Spironolactone And Hydr...

Spironolactone And Hydrochlorothiazide

Optimal dosage should be established by individual titration of the components (see BOXED WARNING).

Edema in Adults (Congestive Heart Failure, Hepatic Cirrhosis or Nephrotic Syndrome)

The usual maintenance dose of spironolactone and hydrochlorothiazide tablets is 100 mg each of spironolactone and hydrochlorothiazide daily, administered in a single dose or in divided doses, but may range from 25 mg to 200 mg of each component daily depending on the response to the initial titration. In some instances it may be desirable to administer separate tablets of either spironolactone or hydrochlorothiazide in addition to spironolactone and hydrochlorothiazide tablets in order to provide optimal individual therapy.

The onset of diuresis with spironolactone and hydrochlorothiazide tablets occurs promptly and, due to prolonged effect of the spironolactone component, persists for 2 to 3 days after spironolactone and hydrochlorothiazide tablets are discontinued.

Essential Hypertension

Although the dosage will vary depending on the results of titration of the individual ingredients, many patients will be found to have an optimal response to 50 mg to 100 mg each of spironolactone and hydrochlorothiazide daily, given in a single dose or in divided doses.

Concurrent potassium supplementation is not recommended when spironolactone and hydrochlorothiazide tablets are used in the long-term management of hypertension or in the treatment of most edematous conditions, since the spironolactone content of spironolactone and hydrochlorothiazide tablets is usually sufficient to minimize loss induced by the hydrochlorothiazide component.
Clorazepate Dipotassium...

Clorazepate Dipotassium

For the Symptomatic Relief of Anxiety

Clorazepate dipotassium tablets are administered orally in divided doses. The usual daily dose is 30 mg. The dose should be adjusted gradually within the range of 15 mg to 60 mg daily in accordance with the response of the patient. In elderly or debilitated patients it is advisable to initiate treatment at a daily dose of 7.5 mg to 15 mg.

Clorazepate dipotassium tablets may also be administered in a single dose daily at bedtime; the recommended initial dose is 15 mg. After the initial dose, the response of the patient may require adjustment of subsequent dosage. Lower doses may be indicated in the elderly patient. Drowsiness may occur at the initiation of treatment and with dosage increment.

For the Symptomatic Relief of Acute Alcohol Withdrawal

The following dosage schedule is recommended:

1st 24 hours     (Day 1)

30 mg initially; followed by 30 mg to 60 mg in divided doses.

2nd 24 hours     (Day 2)

45 mg to 90 mg in divided doses.

3rd 24 hours     (Day 3)

22.5 mg to 45 mg in divided doses

Day 4

15 mg to 30 mg in divided doses

Thereafter, gradually reduce the daily dose to 7.5 mg to 15 mg. Discontinue drug therapy as soon as patient’s condition is stable.

The maximum recommended total daily dose is 90 mg. Avoid excessive reductions in the total amount of drug administered on successive days.

As an Adjunct to Antiepileptic Drugs

In order to minimize drowsiness, the recommended initial dosages and dosage increments should not be exceeded.

Adults

The maximum recommended initial dose in patients over 12 years old is 7.5 mg three times a day. Dosage should be increased by no more than 7.5 mg every week and should not exceed 90 mg/day.

Children: (9 to 12 years)

The maximum recommended initial dose is 7.5 mg two times a day. Dosage should be increased by no more than 7.5 mg every week and should not exceed 60 mg/day.
Ipratropium Bromide And...

Ipratropium Bromide And Albuterol Sulfate Solution

The recommended dose of Ipratropium Bromide and Albuterol Sulfate is one 3 mL vial administered 4 times per day via nebulization with up to 2 additional 3 mL doses allowed per day, if needed. Safety and efficacy of additional doses or increased frequency of administration of Ipratropium Bromide and Albuterol Sulfate beyond these guidelines has not been studied and the safety and efficacy of extra doses of albuterol sulfate or ipratropium bromide in addition to the recommended doses of Ipratropium Bromide and Albuterol Sulfate have not been studied.

The use of Ipratropium Bromide and Albuterol Sulfate can be continued as medically indicated to control recurring bouts of bronchospasm. If a previously effective regimen fails to provide the usual relief, medical advice should be sought immediately, as this is often a sign of worsening COPD, which would require reassessment of therapy.

A Pari-LC-Plus™ nebulizer (with face mask or mouthpiece) connected to a PRONEB™ compressor was used to deliver Ipratropium Bromide and Albuterol Sulfate to each patient in one U.S. clinical study. The safety and efficacy of Ipratropium Bromide and Albuterol Sulfate delivered by other nebulizers and compressors have not been established.

Ipratropium Bromide and Albuterol Sulfate should be administered via jet nebulizer connected to an air compressor with an adequate air flow, equipped with a mouthpiece or suitable face mask.
Cystagon

Cystagon

For the management of nephropathic cystinosis, cysteamine therapy should be initiated promptly once the diagnosis is confirmed (i.e., increased white cell cystine).

New patients should be started on ¼ to 1/6 of the maintenance dose of CYSTAGON®. The dose should then be raised gradually over four to six weeks to avoid intolerance.

The recommended CYSTAGON® maintenance dose for children up to age 12 years is 1.30 grams/m2/day of the free base, given in four divided doses. Intact CYSTAGON® capsules should not be administered to children under the age of approximately six years due to the risk of aspiration. CYSTAGON® capsules may be administered to children under the age of approximately six years by sprinkling the capsule contents over food. Patients over age 12 and over 110 pounds weight should receive 2.0 grams/day, divided four times daily.

If a dose is missed, it should be taken as soon as possible. If it is within two hours of the next dose, skip the missed dose and go back to the regular dosing schedule. Do not double dose.

When CYSTAGON® is well tolerated, the goal of therapy is to keep leukocyte cystine levels below 1 nmol/½ cystine/mg protein five to six hours following administration of CYSTAGON®. Patients with poorer tolerability still receive significant benefit if white cell cystine levels are below 2 nmol/½ cystine/mg protein. The CYSTAGON® dose can be increased to a maximum of 1.95 grams/m2/day to achieve this level. The dose of 1.95 grams/m2/day has been associated with an increased rate of withdrawal from treatment due to intolerance and an increased incidence of adverse events.

Cystinotic patients taking cysteamine hydrochloride or phosphocysteamine solutions may be transferred to equimolar doses of CYSTAGON® capsules.

The recommended maintenance dose of 1.30 grams/m2/day can be approximated by administering CYSTAGON® according to the following table, which takes surface area as well as weight into consideration.
Weight inPounds mg of Cysteamine Free BaseEvery 6 Hours 0–10 100 11–20 150 21–30 200 31–40 250 41–50 300 51–70 350 71–90 400 91–110 450 > 110 500
Patients over age 12 and over 110 pounds should receive 2.0 grams/day given in four divided doses as a starting maintenance dose. This dose should be reached after 4 to 6 weeks of incremental dosage increases as stated above. The dose should be raised if the leukocyte cystine level remains > 2 nmol/½ cystine/mg/protein.

Leukocyte cystine measurements, taken 5 to 6 hours after dose administration, are recommended for new patients after the maintenance dose is achieved. Patients being transferred from cysteamine hydrochloride or phosphocysteamine solutions to capsules should have their white cell cystine levels measured in 2 weeks, and thereafter every 3 months to assess optimal dosage as described above.

If CYSTAGON® is poorly tolerated initially due to gastrointestinal tract symptoms or transient skin rashes, therapy should be temporarily stopped, then re-instituted at a lower dose and gradually increased to the proper dose.
Gabapentin

Gabapentin

2.1 Dosage in Adults

Use the lowest effective dose for the patient. The recommended initial dose is 5 mg for women and either 5 mg or 10 mg for men, taken only once per night immediately before bedtime with at least 7 to 8 hours remaining before the planned time of awakening. If the 5 mg dose is not effective, the dose can be increased to 10 mg. In some patients, the higher morning blood levels following use of the 10 mg dose increase the risk of next day impairment of driving and other activities that require full alertness [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)]. The total dose of zolpidem tartrate tablets should not exceed 10 mg once daily immediately before bedtime.

The recommended initial doses for women and men are different because zolpidem clearance is lower in women.

2.2 Special Populations

Elderly or debilitated patients may be especially sensitive to the effects of zolpidem tartrate. Patients with hepatic insufficiency do not clear the drug as rapidly as normal subjects. The recommended dose of zolpidem tartrate tablets in both of these patient populations is 5 mg once daily immediately before bedtime [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1) and Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].

2.3 Use with CNS Depressants

Dosage adjustment may be necessary when zolpidem tartrate tablets are combined with other CNS depressant drugs because of the potentially additive effects [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].

2.4 Administration

The effect of zolpidem tartrate tablets may be slowed by ingestion with or immediately after a meal.
Metformin Hydrochloride...

Metformin Hydrochloride

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of hyperglycemia in patients with type 2 diabetes with metformin hydrochloride tablets or any other pharmacologic agent. Dosage of metformin hydrochloride tablets must be individualized on the basis of both effectiveness and tolerance, while not exceeding the maximum recommended daily doses. The maximum recommended daily dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets is 2550 mg in adults and 2000 mg in pediatric patients (10 to 16 years of age).

Metformin hydrochloride tablets should be given in divided doses with meals. Metformin hydrochloride tablets should be started at a low dose, with gradual dose escalation, both to reduce gastrointestinal side effects and to permit identification of the minimum dose required for adequate glycemic control of the patient.

During treatment initiation and dose titration (see Recommended Dosing Schedule), fasting plasma glucose should be used to determine the therapeutic response to metformin hydrochloride tablets and identify the minimum effective dose for the patient. Thereafter, glycosylated hemoglobin should be measured at intervals of approximately 3 months. The therapeutic goal should be to decrease both fasting plasma glucose and glycosylated hemoglobin levels to normal or near normal by using the lowest effective dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets, either when used as monotherapy or in combination with sulfonylurea or insulin.

Monitoring of blood glucose and glycosylated hemoglobin will also permit detection of primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication, and secondary failure, i.e., loss of an adequate blood glucose lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness.

Short-term administration of metformin hydrochloride tablets may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually well controlled on diet alone.

Recommended Dosing Schedule

Adults

In general, clinically significant responses are not seen at doses below 1500 mg per day. However, a lower recommended starting dose and gradually increased dosage is advised to minimize gastrointestinal symptoms.

The usual starting dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets is 500 mg twice a day or 850 mg once a day, given with meals. Dosage increases should be made in increments of 500 mg weekly or 850 mg every 2 weeks, up to a total of 2000 mg per day, given in divided doses. Patients can also be titrated from 500 mg twice a day to 850 mg twice a day after 2 weeks. For those patients requiring additional glycemic control, metformin hydrochloride tablets may be given to a maximum daily dose of 2550 mg per day. Doses above 2000 mg may be better tolerated given three times a day with meals.

Pediatrics

The usual starting dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets is 500 mg twice a day, given with meals. Dosage increases should be made in increments of 500 mg weekly up to a maximum of 2000 mg per day, given in divided doses.

Transfer from Other Antidiabetic Therapy

When transferring patients from standard oral hypoglycemic agents other than chlorpropamide to metformin hydrochloride tablets, no transition period generally is necessary. When transferring patients from chlorpropamide, care should be exercised during the first 2 weeks because of the prolonged retention of chlorpropamide in the body, leading to overlapping drug effects and possible hypoglycemia.

Concomitant Metformin Hydrochloride Tablet and Oral Sulfonylurea Therapy in Adult Patients

If patients have not responded to 4 weeks of the maximum dose of metformin hydrochloride tablet monotherapy, consideration should be given to gradual addition of an oral sulfonylurea while continuing metformin hydrochloride tablets at the maximum dose, even if prior primary or secondary failure to a sulfonylurea has occurred. Clinical and pharmacokinetic drug-drug interaction data are currently available only for metformin plus glyburide (glibenclamide).

With concomitant metformin hydrochloride tablet and sulfonylurea therapy, the desired control of blood glucose may be obtained by adjusting the dose of each drug. In a clinical trial of patients with type 2 diabetes and prior failure on glyburide, patients started on metformin hydrochloride 500 mg tablets and glyburide 20 mg were titrated to 1000 mg/20 mg, 1500 mg/20 mg, 2000 mg/20 mg or 2500 mg/20 mg of metformin hydrochloride tablets and glyburide, respectively, to reach the goal of glycemic control as measured by FPG, HbA1c and plasma glucose response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Studies). However, attempts should be made to identify the minimum effective dose of each drug to achieve this goal. With concomitant metformin hydrochloride tablet and sulfonylurea therapy, the risk of hypoglycemia associated with sulfonylurea therapy continues and may be increased. Appropriate precautions should be taken. (See Package Insert of the respective sulfonylurea.)

If patients have not satisfactorily responded to 1 to 3 months of concomitant therapy with the maximum dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets and the maximum dose of an oral sulfonylurea, consider therapeutic alternatives including switching to insulin with or without metformin hydrochloride tablets.

Concomitant Metformin Hydrochloride Tablet and Insulin Therapy in Adult Patients

The current insulin dose should be continued upon initiation of metformin hydrochloride tablet therapy. Metformin hydrochloride tablet therapy should be initiated at 500 mg once daily in patients on insulin therapy. For patients not responding adequately, the dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets should be increased by 500 mg after approximately one week and by 500 mg every week thereafter until adequate glycemic control is achieved. The maximum recommended daily dose is 2500 mg for metformin hydrochloride tablets. It is recommended that the insulin dose be decreased by 10% to 25% when fasting plasma glucose concentrations decrease to less than 120 mg/dL in patients receiving concomitant insulin and metformin hydrochloride tablets. Further adjustment should be individualized based on glucose-lowering response.

Specific Patient Populations

Metformin hydrochloride tablets are not recommended for use in pregnancy. Metformin hydrochloride tablets are not recommended in patients below the age of 10 years.

The initial and maintenance dosing of metformin hydrochloride tablets should be conservative in patients with advanced age, due to the potential for decreased renal function in this population. Any dosage adjustment should be based on a careful assessment of renal function. Generally, elderly, debilitated, and malnourished patients should not be titrated to the maximum dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets.

Monitoring of renal function is necessary to aid in prevention of lactic acidosis, particularly in the elderly. (See WARNINGS.)
Morphine Sulfate Soluti...

Morphine Sulfate Solution

Ciprofloxacin tablets should be administered orally as described in the appropriate Dosage Guidelines tables.

2.1 Dosage in Adults

The determination of dosage and duration for any particular patient must take into consideration the severity and nature of the infection, the susceptibility of the causative microorganism, the integrity of the patient’s host-defense mechanisms, and the status of renal and hepatic function.
Table 1: Adult Dosage Guidelines * Generally ciprofloxacin should be continued for at least 2 days after the signs and symptoms of infection have disappeared, except for inhalational anthrax (post-exposure). † Used in conjunction with metronidazole. ‡ Begin drug administration as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure.
Infection

Dose

Frequency

Usual Durations*

Urinary Tract

250 mg to 500 mg

every 12 hours

7 to 14 days

Acute Uncomplicated Cystitis

250 mg

every 12 hours

3 days

Chronic Bacterial Prostatitis

500 mg

every 12 hours

28 days

Lower Respiratory Tract

500 mg to 750 mg

every 12 hours

7 to 14 days

Acute Sinusitis

500 mg

every 12 hours

10 days

Skin and Skin Structure

500 mg to 750 mg

every 12 hours

7 to 14 days

Bone and Joint

500 mg to 750 mg

every 12 hours

4 to 8 weeks

Complicated Intra–Abdominal†

500 mg

every 12 hours

7 to 14 days

Infectious Diarrhea

500 mg

every 12 hours

5 to 7 days

Typhoid Fever

500 mg

every 12 hours

10 days

Uncomplicated Urethral and Cervical Gonococcal Infections

250 mg

single dose

single dose

Inhalational Anthrax (Post-Exposure)‡

500 mg

every 12 hours

60 days

Plague‡

500 mg to 750 mg

every 12 hours

14 days

Conversion of IV to Oral Dosing in Adults

Patients whose therapy is started with ciprofloxacin IV may be switched to ciprofloxacin tablets or Oral Suspension when clinically indicated at the discretion of the physician (Table 2) [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Table 2: Equivalent AUC Dosing Regimens
Ciprofloxacin Oral Dosage

Equivalent Ciprofloxacin IV Dosage

250 mg Tablet every 12 hours

200 mg intravenous every 12 hours

500 mg Tablet every 12 hours

400 mg intravenous every 12 hours

750 mg Tablet every 12 hours

400 mg intravenous every 8 hours

2.2 Dosage in Pediatric Patients

Dosing and initial route of therapy (that is, IV or oral) for cUTI or pyelonephritis should be determined by the severity of the infection. Ciprofloxacin should be administered as described in Table 3.
Table 3: Pediatric Dosage Guidelines * The total duration of therapy for cUTI and pyelonephritis in the clinical trial was determined by the physician. The mean duration of treatment was 11 days (range 10 to 21 days). † Begin drug administration as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure. ‡ Begin drug administration as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to Y. pestis.
Infection

Dose

Frequency

Total Duration

Complicated Urinary Tract or Pyelonephritis (patients from 1 to 17 years of age)

10 mg/kg to 20 mg/kg (maximum 750 mg per dose; not to be exceeded even in patients weighing more than 51 kg)

Every 12 hours

10 to 21 days*

Inhalational Anthrax (Post-Exposure)†

15 mg/kg (maximum 500 mg per dose)

Every 12 hours

60 days

Plague†,‡

15 mg/kg (maximum 500 mg per dose)

Every 12 to 8 hours

10 to 21 days

2.3 Dosage Modifications in Patients with Renal Impairment

Ciprofloxacin is eliminated primarily by renal excretion; however, the drug is also metabolized and partially cleared through the biliary system of the liver and through the intestine. These alternative pathways of drug elimination appear to compensate for the reduced renal excretion in patients with renal impairment. Nonetheless, some modification of dosage is recommended, particularly for patients with severe renal dysfunction. Dosage guidelines for use in patients with renal impairment are shown in Table 4.
Table 4: Recommended Starting and Maintenance Doses for Adult Patients with Impaired Renal Function
Creatinine Clearance (mL/min)

Dose

> 50

See Usual Dosage.

30 to 50

250 mg to 500 mg every 12 hours

5 to 29

250 mg to 500 mg every 18 hours

Patients on hemodialysis or Peritoneal dialysis

250 mg to 500 mg every 24 hours (after dialysis)

When only the serum creatinine concentration is known, the following formulas may be used to estimate creatinine clearance:

The serum creatinine should represent a steady state of renal function.

In patients with severe infections and severe renal impairment, a unit dose of 750 mg may be administered at the intervals noted above. Patients should be carefully monitored.

Pediatric patients with moderate to severe renal insufficiency were excluded from the clinical trial of cUTI and pyelonephritis. No information is available on dosing adjustments necessary for pediatric patients with moderate to severe renal insufficiency (that is, creatinine clearance of < 50 mL/min/1.73m2).

2.4 Important Administration Instructions

With Multivalent Cations

Administer ciprofloxacin at least 2 hours before or 6 hours after magnesium/aluminum antacids; polymeric phosphate binders (for example, sevelamer, lanthanum carbonate) or sucralfate; Videx®‡ (didanosine) chewable/buffered tablets or pediatric powder for oral solution; other highly buffered drugs; or other products containing calcium, iron or zinc.

With Dairy Products

Concomitant administration of ciprofloxacin with dairy products (like milk or yogurt) or calcium-fortified juices alone should be avoided since decreased absorption is possible; however, ciprofloxacin may be taken with a meal that contains these products.

Hydration of Patients Receiving Ciprofloxacin

Assure adequate hydration of patients receiving ciprofloxacin to prevent the formation of highly concentrated urine. Crystalluria has been reported with quinolones.

Instruct the patient of the appropriate ciprofloxacin administration [see Patient Counseling Information (17)].
Bisoprolol Fumarate

Bisoprolol Fumarate

The dose of bisoprolol fumarate tablets must be individualized to the needs of the patient. The usual starting dose is 5 mg once daily. In some patients, 2.5 mg may be an appropriate starting dose (see WARNINGS: Bronchospastic Disease). If the antihypertensive effect of 5 mg is inadequate, the dose may be increased to 10 mg and then, if necessary, to 20 mg once daily.

Patients with Renal or Hepatic Impairment

In patients with hepatic impairment (hepatitis or cirrhosis) or renal dysfunction (creatinine clearance less than 40 mL/min), the initial daily dose should be 2.5 mg and caution should be used in dose titration. Since limited data suggest that bisoprolol fumarate is not dialyzable, drug replacement is not necessary in patients undergoing dialysis.

Geriatric Patients

It is not necessary to adjust the dose in the elderly, unless there is also significant renal or hepatic dysfunction (see above and PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).

Pediatric Patients

There is no pediatric experience with bisoprolol fumarate.
Irbesartan

Irbesartan

Irbesartan tablets may be administered with other antihypertensive agents and with or without food.

Hypertension

The recommended initial dose of irbesartan tablets is 150 mg once daily. Patients requiring further reduction in blood pressure should be titrated to 300 mg once daily.

A low dose of a diuretic may be added, if blood pressure is not controlled by irbesartan tablets alone. Hydrochlorothiazide has been shown to have an additive effect (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Studies). Patients not adequately treated by the maximum dose of 300 mg once daily are unlikely to derive additional benefit from a higher dose or twice daily dosing.

No dosage adjustment is necessary in elderly patients or in patients with hepatic impairment or mild to severe renal impairment.

Nephropathy in Type 2 Diabetic Patients

The recommended target maintenance dose is 300 mg once daily. There are no data on the clinical effects of lower doses of irbesartan tablets on diabetic nephropathy (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Studies).

Volume- and Salt-Depleted Patients

A lower initial dose of irbesartan tablets (75 mg) is recommended in patients with depletion of intravascular volume or salt (e.g., patients treated vigorously with diuretics or on hemodialysis) (see WARNINGS: Hypotension in Volume- or Salt-Depleted Patients).
Pravastatin Sodium

Pravastatin Sodium

2.1 General Dosing Information

The patient should be placed on a standard cholesterol-lowering diet before receiving pravastatin sodium tablets and should continue on this diet during treatment with pravastatin sodium tablets [see NCEP Treatment Guidelines for details on dietary therapy].

2.2 Adult Patients

The recommended starting dose is 40 mg once daily. If a daily dose of 40 mg does not achieve desired cholesterol levels, 80 mg once daily is recommended. In patients with significant renal impairment, a starting dose of 10 mg daily is recommended. Pravastatin sodium tablets can be administered orally as a single dose at any time of the day, with or without food. Since the maximal effect of a given dose is seen within 4 weeks, periodic lipid determinations should be performed at this time and dosage adjusted according to the patient’s response to therapy and established treatment guidelines.

2.3 Pediatric Patients

Children (Ages 8 to 13 Years, Inclusive)

The recommended dose is 20 mg once daily in children 8 to 13 years of age. Doses greater than 20 mg have not been studied in this patient population.

Adolescents (Ages 14 to 18 Years)

The recommended starting dose is 40 mg once daily in adolescents 14 to 18 years of age. Doses greater than 40 mg have not been studied in this patient population.

Children and adolescents treated with pravastatin should be reevaluated in adulthood and appropriate changes made to their cholesterol-lowering regimen to achieve adult goals for LDL-C [see Indications and Usage (1.2)].

2.4 Concomitant Lipid-Altering Therapy

Pravastatin sodium tablets may be used with bile acid resins. When administering a bile-acid-binding resin (e.g., cholestyramine, colestipol) and pravastatin, pravastatin sodium tablets should be given either 1 hour or more before or at least 4 hours following the resin. [See Clinical Pharmacology (12.3).]

2.5 Dosage in Patients Taking Cyclosporine

In patients taking immunosuppressive drugs such as cyclosporine concomitantly with pravastatin, therapy should begin with 10 mg of pravastatin sodium once-a-day at bedtime and titration to higher doses should be done with caution. Most patients treated with this combination received a maximum pravastatin sodium dose of 20 mg/day. In patients taking cyclosporine, therapy should be limited to 20 mg of pravastatin sodium once daily [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1) and Drug Interactions (7.1)].

2.6 Dosage in Patients Taking Clarithromycin

In patients taking clarithromycin, therapy should be limited to 40 mg of pravastatin sodium once daily [see Drug Interactions (7.2)].
Losartan Potassium And ...

Losartan Potassium And Hydrochlorothiazide

Hypertension

Dosing must be individualized. The usual starting dose of losartan is 50 mg once daily, with 25 mg recommended for patients with intravascular volume depletion (e.g., patients treated with diuretics) (see WARNINGS: Hypotension - Volume-depleted Patients) and patients with a history of hepatic impairment (see WARNINGS: Impaired Hepatic Function). Losartan can be administered once or twice daily at total daily doses of 25 mg to 100 mg. If the antihypertensive effect measured at trough using once-a-day dosing is inadequate, a twice-a-day regimen at the same total daily dose or an increase in dose may give a more satisfactory response.

Hydrochlorothiazide is effective in doses of 12.5 mg to 50 mg once daily and can be given at doses of 12.5 mg to 25 mg as losartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets.

To minimize dose-independent side effects, it is usually appropriate to begin combination therapy only after a patient has failed to achieve the desired effect with monotherapy.

The side effects (see WARNINGS) of losartan are generally rare and apparently independent of dose; those of hydrochlorothiazide are a mixture of dose dependent (primarily hypokalemia) and dose-independent phenomena (e.g., pancreatitis), the former much more common than the latter. Therapy with any combination of losartan and hydrochlorothiazide will be associated with both sets of dose-independent side effects.

Replacement Therapy

The combination may be substituted for the titrated components.

Dose Titration by Clinical Effect

A patient whose blood pressure is not adequately controlled with losartan monotherapy (see above) or hydrochlorothiazide alone may be switched to losartan and hydrochlorothiazide 50 mg/12.5 mg tablets (losartan 50 mg/hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg) once daily. If blood pressure remains uncontrolled after about 3 weeks of therapy, the dose may be increased to two tablets of losartan and hydrochlorothiazide 50 mg/12.5 mg once daily or one tablet of losartan and hydrochlorothiazide 100 mg/25 mg (losartan 100 mg/hydrochlorothiazide 25 mg) once daily. A patient whose blood pressure is not adequately controlled with losartan 100 mg monotherapy (see above) may be switched to losartan and hydrochlorothiazide 100 mg/12.5 mg once daily. If blood pressure remains uncontrolled after about 3 weeks of therapy, the dose may be increased to two tablets of losartan and hydrochlorothiazide 50 mg/12.5 mg once daily or one tablet of losartan and hydrochlorothiazide 100 mg/25 mg (losartan 100 mg/hydrochlorothiazide 25 mg) once daily.

A patient whose blood pressure is inadequately controlled by 25 mg once daily of hydrochlorothiazide, or is controlled but who experiences hypokalemia with this regimen, may be switched to losartan and hydrochlorothiazide 50 mg/12.5 mg tablets (losartan 50 mg/hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg) once daily, reducing the dose of hydrochlorothiazide without reducing the overall expected antihypertensive response. The clinical response to losartan and hydrochlorothiazide 50 mg/12.5 mg tablets should be subsequently evaluated, and if blood pressure remains uncontrolled after about 3 weeks of therapy, the dose may be increased to two tablets of losartan and hydrochlorothiazide 50 mg/12.5 mg once daily or one tablet of losartan and hydrochlorothiazide 100 mg/25 mg (losartan 100 mg/hydrochlorothiazide 25 mg) once daily.

The usual dose of losartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets is one tablet of losartan and hydrochlorothiazide 50 mg/12.5 mg once daily. More than two tablets of losartan and hydrochlorothiazide 50 mg/12.5 mg once daily or more than one tablet of losartan and hydrochlorothiazide 100 mg/25 mg once daily is not recommended. The maximal antihypertensive effect is attained about 3 weeks after initiation of therapy.

Use in Patients with Renal Impairment

The usual regimens of therapy with losartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets may be followed as long as the patient's creatinine clearance is > 30 mL/min. In patients with more severe renal impairment, loop diuretics are preferred to thiazides, so losartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets are not recommended.

Patients with Hepatic Impairment

Losartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets are not recommended for titration in patients with hepatic impairment (see WARNINGS: Impaired Hepatic Function) because the appropriate 25 mg starting dose of losartan cannot be given.

Severe Hypertension

The starting dose of losartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets for initial treatment of severe hypertension is one tablet of losartan and hydrochlorothiazide 50 mg/12.5 mg once daily (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects). For patients who do not respond adequately to losartan and hydrochlorothiazide 50 mg/12.5 mg after 2 to 4 weeks of therapy, the dosage may be increased to one tablet of losartan and hydrochlorothiazide 100 mg/25 mg once daily. The maximum dose is one tablet of losartan and hydrochlorothiazide 100 mg/25 mg once daily. Losartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets are not recommended as initial therapy in patients with hepatic impairment (see WARNINGS: Impaired Hepatic Function) because the appropriate 25 mg starting dose of losartan cannot be given. It is also not recommended for use as initial therapy in patients with intravascular volume depletion (e.g., patients treated with diuretics, see WARNINGS: Hypotension - Volume-depleted Patients).

Hypertensive Patients with Left Ventricular Hypertrophy

Treatment should be initiated with losartan potassium tablets 50 mg once daily. Hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg should be added or losartan and hydrochlorothiazide 50 mg/12.5 mg substituted if the blood pressure reduction is inadequate. If additional blood pressure reduction is needed, losartan potassium 100 mg and hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg or losartan and hydrochlorothiazide 100 mg/12.5 mg may be substituted, followed by losartan potassium 100 mg and hydrochlorothiazide 25 mg or losartan and hydrochlorothiazide 100 mg/25 mg. For further blood pressure reduction other antihypertensives should be added (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects: Losartan Potassium: Reduction in the Risk of Stroke).

Losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.

Losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets may be administered with or without food.
Captopril

Captopril

Captopril tablets should be taken one hour before meals. Dosage must be individualized.

Hypertension

Initiation of therapy requires consideration of recent antihypertensive drug treatment, the extent of blood pressure elevation, salt restriction, and other clinical circumstances. If possible, discontinue the patient's previous antihypertensive drug regimen for one week before starting captopril tablets.

The initial dose of captopril tablets is 25 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d. If satisfactory reduction of blood pressure has not been achieved after 1 or 2 weeks, the dose may be increased to 50 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d. Concomitant sodium restriction may be beneficial when captopril tablets are used alone.

The dose of captopril tablets in hypertension usually does not exceed 50 mg t.i.d. Therefore, if the blood pressure has not been satisfactorily controlled after 1 to 2 weeks at this dose, (and the patient is not already receiving a diuretic), a modest dose of a thiazide-type diuretic (e.g., hydrochlorothiazide, 25 mg daily), should be added. The diuretic dose may be increased at 1- to 2-week intervals until its highest usual antihypertensive dose is reached.

If captopril tablets are being started in a patient already receiving a diuretic, captopril therapy should be initiated under close medical supervision (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions regarding hypotension), with dosage and titration of captopril as noted above.

If further blood pressure reduction is required, the dose of captopril tablets may be increased to 100 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d. and then, if necessary, to 150 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d. (while continuing the diuretic). The usual dose range is 25 mg to 150 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d. A maximum daily dose of 450 mg captopril tablets should not be exceeded.

For patients with severe hypertension (e.g., accelerated or malignant hypertension), when temporary discontinuation of current antihypertensive therapy is not practical or desirable, or when prompt titration to more normotensive blood pressure levels is indicated, diuretic should be continued but other current antihypertensive medication stopped and captopril dosage promptly initiated at 25 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d., under close medical supervision.

When necessitated by the patient’s clinical condition, the daily dose of captopril tablets may be increased every 24 hours or less under continuous medical supervision until a satisfactory blood pressure response is obtained or the maximum dose of captopril tablets is reached. In this regimen, addition of a more potent diuretic, e.g., furosemide, may also be indicated.

Beta-blockers may also be used in conjunction with captopril therapy (see PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions), but the effects of the two drugs are less than additive.

Heart Failure

Initiation of therapy requires consideration of recent diuretic therapy and the possibility of severe salt/volume depletion. In patients with either normal or low blood pressure, who have been vigorously treated with diuretics and who may be hyponatremic and/or hypovolemic, a starting dose of 6.25 mg or 12.5 mg t.i.d. may minimize the magnitude or duration of the hypotensive effect (see WARNINGS: Hypotension); for these patients, titration to the usual daily dosage can then occur within the next several days.

For most patients the usual initial daily dosage is 25 mg t.i.d. After a dose of 50 mg t.i.d. is reached, further increases in dosage should be delayed, where possible, for at least 2 weeks to determine if a satisfactory response occurs. Most patients studied have had a satisfactory clinical improvement at 50 mg or 100 mg t.i.d. A maximum daily dose of 450 mg of captopril tablets should not be exceeded.

Captopril tablets should generally be used in conjunction with a diuretic and digitalis. Captopril therapy must be initiated under very close medical supervision.

Left Ventricular Dysfunction After Myocardial Infarction

The recommended dose for long-term use in patients following a myocardial infarction is a target maintenance dose of 50 mg t.i.d.

Therapy may be initiated as early as 3 days following a myocardial infarction. After a single dose of 6.25 mg, captopril therapy should be initiated at 12.5 mg t.i.d. Captopril tablets should then be increased to 25 mg t.i.d. during the next several days and to a target dose of 50 mg t.i.d. over the next several weeks as tolerated (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Captopril tablets may be used in patients treated with other post-myocardial infarction therapies, e.g., thrombolytics, aspirin, beta blockers.

Diabetic Nephropathy

The recommended dose of captopril tablets for long term use to treat diabetic nephropathy is 25 mg t.i.d.

Other antihypertensives such as diuretics, beta blockers, centrally acting agents or vasodilators may be used in conjunction with captopril tablets if additional therapy is required to further lower blood pressure.

Dosage Adjustment in Renal Impairment

Because captopril is excreted primarily by the kidneys, excretion rates are reduced in patients with impaired renal function. These patients will take longer to reach steady-state captopril levels and will reach higher steady-state levels for a given daily dose than patients with normal renal function. Therefore, these patients may respond to smaller or less frequent doses.

Accordingly, for patients with significant renal impairment, initial daily dosage of captopril tablets should be reduced, and smaller increments utilized for titration, which should be quite slow (1- to 2-week intervals). After the desired therapeutic effect has been achieved, the dose should be slowly back-titrated to determine the minimal effective dose. When concomitant diuretic therapy is required, a loop diuretic (e.g., furosemide), rather than a thiazide diuretic, is preferred in patients with severe renal impairment (see WARNINGS: Anaphylactoid Reactions During Membrane Exposure and PRECAUTIONS: Hemodialysis).
Gent-l-tip

Gent-l-tip

2.1 Dosing Information in Adults

The recommended starting dose of rizatriptan benzoate orally disintegrating tablets is either 5 mg or 10 mg for the acute treatment of migraines in adults. The 10 mg dose may provide a greater effect than the 5 mg dose, but may have a greater risk of adverse reactions [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Redosing in Adults

Although the effectiveness of a second dose or subsequent doses has not been established in placebo-controlled trials, if the migraine headache returns, a second dose may be administered 2 hours after the first dose. The maximum daily dose should not exceed 30 mg in any 24-hour period. The safety of treating, on average, more than four headaches in a 30-day period has not been established.

2.2 Dosing Information in Pediatric Patients (Age 6 to 17 Years)

Dosing in pediatric patients is based on the patient's body weight. The recommended dose of rizatriptan benzoate orally disintegrating tablets is 5 mg in patients weighing less than 40 kg (88 lb), and 10 mg in patients weighing 40 kg (88 lb) or more.

The efficacy and safety of treatment with more than one dose of rizatriptan benzoate orally disintegrating tablets within 24 hours in pediatric patients 6 to 17 years of age have not been established.

2.3 Administration of Rizatriptan Benzoate Orally Disintegrating Tablets

For rizatriptan benzoate orally disintegrating tablets, administration with liquid is not necessary. Orally disintegrating tablets are packaged in a bottle and patients should not remove the tablet from the bottle until just prior to dosing. The bottle should then be opened with dry hands and the orally disintegrating tablet placed on the tongue, where it will dissolve and be swallowed with the saliva.

2.4 Dosage Adjustment for Patients on Propranolol

Adult Patients

In adult patients taking propranolol, only the 5 mg dose of rizatriptan benzoate orally disintegrating tablets is recommended, up to a maximum of three doses in any 24-hour period (15 mg) [see Drug Interactions (7.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Pediatric Patients

For pediatric patients weighing ≥ 40 kg (88 lb) taking propranolol, only a single 5 mg dose of rizatriptan benzoate orally disintegrating tablets is recommended (maximum dose of 5 mg in a 24-hour period). Rizatriptan benzoate orally disintegrating tablets should not be prescribed to propranolol-treated pediatric patients who weigh less than 40 kg (88 lb) [see Drug Interactions (7.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Tolterodine Tartrate

Tolterodine Tartrate

The initial recommended dose of tolterodine tartrate tablets is 2 mg twice daily. The dose may be lowered to 1 mg twice daily based on individual response and tolerability. For patients with significantly reduced hepatic or renal function or who are currently taking drugs that are potent inhibitors of CYP3A4, the recommended dose of tolterodine tartrate tablets is 1 mg twice daily (see PRECAUTIONS: General, PRECAUTIONS: Reduced Hepatic and Renal Function, and PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions).
Losartan Potassium

Losartan Potassium

Adult Hypertensive Patients

Losartan potassium tablets may be administered with other antihypertensive agents, and with or without food.

Dosing must be individualized. The usual starting dose of losartan potassium tablets is 50 mg once daily, with 25 mg used in patients with possible depletion of intravascular volume (e.g., patients treated with diuretics) (see WARNINGS: Hypotension—Volume-depleted Patients) and patients with a history of hepatic impairment (see PRECAUTIONS: General). Losartan potassium tablets can be administered once or twice daily with total daily doses ranging from 25 mg to 100 mg.

If the antihypertensive effect measured at trough using once-a-day dosing is inadequate, a twice-a-day regimen at the same total daily dose or an increase in dose may give a more satisfactory response. The effect of losartan is substantially present within one week but in some studies the maximal effect occurred in 3 to 6 weeks (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects: Hypertension).

If blood pressure is not controlled by losartan potassium tablets alone, a low dose of a diuretic may be added. Hydrochlorothiazide has been shown to have an additive effect (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects: Hypertension).

No initial dosage adjustment is necessary for elderly patients or for patients with renal impairment, including patients on dialysis.

Pediatric Hypertensive Patients ≥ 6 Years of Age

The usual recommended starting dose is 0.7 mg/kg once daily (up to 50 mg total) administered as a tablet or a suspension (see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION: Preparation of Suspension). Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. Doses above 1.4 mg/kg (or in excess of 100 mg) daily have not been studied in pediatric patients. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics, Special Populations and Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects and WARNINGS: Hypotension—Volume-depleted Patients.)

Losartan potassium tablets are not recommended in pediatric patients < 6 years of age or in pediatric patients with glomerular filtration rate < 30 mL/min/1.73 m2 (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics, Special Populations, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects and PRECAUTIONS).

Preparation of Suspension (for 200 mL of a 2.5 mg/mL Suspension)

Add 10 mL of Purified Water USP to an 8 ounce (240 mL) amber polyethylene terephthalate (PET) bottle containing ten 50 mg losartan potassium tablets. Immediately shake for at least 2 minutes. Let the concentrate stand for one hour and then shake for one minute to disperse the tablet contents. Separately prepare a 50/50 volumetric mixture of Ora-Plus™*** and Ora-Sweet SF™***. Add 190 mL of the 50/50 Ora-Plus™/Ora-Sweet SF™ mixture to the tablet and water slurry in the PET bottle and shake for one minute to disperse the ingredients. The suspension should be refrigerated at 2°C to 8°C (36°F to 46°F) and can be stored for up to 4 weeks. Shake the suspension prior to each use and return promptly to the refrigerator.

Hypertensive Patients with Left Ventricular Hypertrophy

The usual starting dose is 50 mg of losartan potassium tablets once daily. Hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg daily should be added and/or the dose of losartan potassium tablets should be increased to 100 mg once daily followed by an increase in hydrochlorothiazide to 25 mg once daily based on blood pressure response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, Reduction in the Risk of Stroke).

Nephropathy in Type 2 Diabetic Patients

The usual starting dose is 50 mg once daily. The dose should be increased to 100 mg once daily based on blood pressure response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects: Nephropathy in Type 2 Diabetic Patients). Losartan potassium tablets may be administered with insulin and other commonly used hypoglycemic agents (e.g., sulfonylureas, glitazones and glucosidase inhibitors).
Perfect Choice

Perfect Choice

2.1 General Considerations

The usual starting dose is valsartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 160 mg/12.5 mg once daily. The dosage can be increased after 1 to 2 weeks of therapy to a maximum of one 320 mg/25 mg tablet once daily as needed to control blood pressure [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. Maximum antihypertensive effects are attained within 2 to 4 weeks after a change in dose.

2.2 Add-On Therapy

A patient whose blood pressure is not adequately controlled with valsartan (or another ARB) alone or hydrochlorothiazide alone may be switched to combination therapy with valsartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets.

A patient who experiences dose-limiting adverse reactions on either component alone may be switched to valsartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets containing a lower dose of that component in combination with the other to achieve similar blood pressure reductions. The clinical response to valsartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets should be subsequently evaluated and if blood pressure remains uncontrolled after 3 to 4 weeks of therapy, the dose may be titrated up to a maximum of 320 mg/25 mg.

2.3 Replacement Therapy

Valsartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets may be substituted for the titrated components.

2.4 Initial Therapy

Valsartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets are not recommended as initial therapy in patients with intravascular volume depletion [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

2.5 Use with Other Antihypertensive Drugs

Valsartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.
Petrolatum Jelly

Petrolatum Jelly

2.1 Asthma

Montelukast sodium oral granules should be taken once daily in the evening. The following doses are recommended:

For pediatric patients 2 to 5 years of age: one packet of 4 mg oral granules.

For pediatric patients 12 to 23 months of age: one packet of 4 mg oral granules.

Safety and effectiveness in pediatric patients less than 12 months of age with asthma have not been established.

There have been no clinical trials in patients with asthma to evaluate the relative efficacy of morning versus evening dosing. The pharmacokinetics of montelukast sodium oral granules are similar whether dosed in the morning or evening. Efficacy has been demonstrated for asthma when montelukast sodium oral granules were administered in the evening without regard to time of food ingestion.

2.3 Allergic Rhinitis

For allergic rhinitis, montelukast sodium oral granules should be taken once daily. Efficacy was demonstrated for seasonal allergic rhinitis when montelukast sodium oral granules were administered in the morning or the evening without regard to time of food ingestion. The time of administration may be individualized to suit patient needs.

The following doses for the treatment of symptoms of seasonal allergic rhinitis are recommended:

For pediatric patients 2 to 5 years of age: one packet of 4 mg oral granules.

Safety and effectiveness in pediatric patients younger than 2 years of age with seasonal allergic rhinitis have not been established.

The following doses for the treatment of symptoms of perennial allergic rhinitis are recommended:

For pediatric patients 2 to 5 years of age: one packet of 4 mg oral granules.

For pediatric patients 6 to 23 months of age: one packet of 4 mg oral granules.

Safety and effectiveness in pediatric patients younger than 6 months of age with perennial allergic rhinitis have not been established.

2.4 Asthma and Allergic Rhinitis

Patients with both asthma and allergic rhinitis should take only one montelukast sodium oral granules dose daily in the evening.

2.5 Instructions for Administration of Oral Granules

Montelukast sodium 4 mg oral granules can be administered either directly in the mouth, dissolved in one teaspoonful (5 mL) of cold or room temperature baby formula or breast milk, or mixed with a spoonful of cold or room temperature soft foods; based on stability studies, only applesauce, carrots, rice, or ice cream should be used. The packet should not be opened until ready to use. After opening the packet, the full dose (with or without mixing with baby formula, breast milk, or food) must be administered within 15 minutes. If mixed with baby formula, breast milk, or food, montelukast sodium oral granules must not be stored for future use. Discard any unused portion. Montelukast sodium oral granules are not intended to be dissolved in any liquid other than baby formula or breast milk for administration. However, liquids may be taken subsequent to administration. Montelukast sodium oral granules can be administered without regard to the time of meals.
Mirtazapine

Mirtazapine

Initial Treatment

The recommended starting dose for mirtazapine tablets is 15 mg/day, administered in a single dose, preferably in the evening prior to sleep. In the controlled clinical trials establishing the efficacy of mirtazapine in the treatment of major depressive disorder, the effective dose range was generally 15 to 45 mg/day. While the relationship between dose and satisfactory response in the treatment of major depressive disorder for mirtazapine has not been adequately explored, patients not responding to the initial 15 mg dose may benefit from dose increases up to a maximum of 45 mg/day. Mirtazapine has an elimination half-life of approximately 20 to 40 hours; therefore, dose changes should not be made at intervals of less than 1 to 2 weeks in order to allow sufficient time for evaluation of the therapeutic response to a given dose.

Elderly and Patients with Renal or Hepatic Impairment

The clearance of mirtazapine is reduced in elderly patients and in patients with moderate to severe renal or hepatic impairment. Consequently, the prescriber should be aware that plasma mirtazapine levels may be increased in these patient groups, compared to levels observed in younger adults without renal or hepatic impairment (see PRECAUTIONS and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Maintenance/Extended Treatment

It is generally agreed that acute episodes of depression require several months or longer of sustained pharmacological therapy beyond response to the acute episode. Systematic evaluation of mirtazapine tablets has demonstrated that its efficacy in major depressive disorder is maintained for periods of up to 40 weeks following 8 to 12 weeks of initial treatment at a dose of 15 to 45 mg/day (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). Based on these limited data, it is unknown whether or not the dose of mirtazapine needed for maintenance treatment is identical to the dose needed to achieve an initial response. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment.

Switching a Patient to or from a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with mirtazapine tablets. Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping mirtazapine tablets before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Use of Mirtazapine Tablets with Other MAOIs, such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start mirtazapine tablets in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

In some cases, a patient already receiving therapy with mirtazapine tablets may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, mirtazapine tablets should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with mirtazapine tablets may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue (see WARNINGS).

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with mirtazapine tablets is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use (see WARNINGS).

Discontinuation of Mirtazapine Treatment

Symptoms associated with the discontinuation or dose reduction of mirtazapine tablets have been reported. Patients should be monitored for these and other symptoms when discontinuing treatment or during dosage reduction. A gradual reduction in the dose over several weeks, rather than abrupt cessation, is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, dose titration should be managed on the basis of the patient’s clinical response (see PRECAUTIONS and ADVERSE REACTIONS).

Information for Patients

Patients should be advised that taking mirtazapine tablets can cause mild pupillary dilation, which in susceptible individuals can lead to an episode of angle-closure glaucoma. Preexisting glaucoma is almost always open-angle glaucoma because angle-closure glaucoma, when diagnosed, can be treated definitively with iridectomy. Open-angle glaucoma is not a risk factor for angle-closure glaucoma. Patients may wish to be examined to determine whether they are susceptible to angle-closure, and have a prophylactic procedure (e.g., iridectomy), if they are susceptible.
Rizatriptan Benzoate

Rizatriptan Benzoate

2.1 Dosing Information in Adults

The recommended starting dose of rizatriptan benzoate tablets is either 5 mg or 10 mg for the acute treatment of migraines in adults. The 10 mg dose may provide a greater effect than the 5 mg dose, but may have a greater risk of adverse reactions [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Redosing in Adults

Although the effectiveness of a second dose or subsequent doses has not been established in placebo-controlled trials, if the migraine headache returns, a second dose may be administered 2 hours after the first dose. The maximum daily dose should not exceed 30 mg in any 24-hour period. The safety of treating, on average, more than four headaches in a 30-day period has not been established.

2.2 Dosing Information in Pediatric Patients (Age 6 to 17 Years)

Information related to dosage of rizatriptan benzoate pediatric patients (6 to 17 years old) is approved for Merck & Co., Inc.’s Rizatriptan Benzoate Tablets. However, due to Merck & Co., Inc.’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that dosage information.

2.4 Dosage Adjustment for Patients on Propranolol

Adult Patients

In adult patients taking propranolol, only the 5 mg dose of rizatriptan benzoate tablets is recommended, up to a maximum of three doses in any 24-hour period (15 mg) [see Drug Interactions (7.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Pediatric Patients

Dosage adjustment information of rizatriptan benzoate for pediatric patients (6 to 17 years old) taking propranolol is approved for Merck & Co., Inc.’s Rizatriptan Benzoate Tablets. However, due to Merck & Co., Inc.’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that dosage adjustment information.
Liothyronine Sodium

Liothyronine Sodium

The dosage of thyroid hormones is determined by the indication and must in every case be individualized according to patient response and laboratory findings.

Liothyronine sodium tablets are intended for oral administration; once-a-day dosage is recommended. Although liothyronine sodium has a rapid cutoff, its metabolic effects persist for a few days following discontinuance.

Mild Hypothyroidism

Recommended starting dosage is 25 mcg daily. Daily dosage then may be increased by up to 25 mcg every 1 or 2 weeks. Usual maintenance dose is 25 mcg to 75 mcg daily.

The rapid onset and dissipation of action of liothyronine sodium (T3), as compared with levothyroxine sodium (T4), has led some clinicians to prefer its use in patients who might be more susceptible to the untoward effects of thyroid medication. However, the wide swings in serum T3 levels that follow its administration and the possibility of more pronounced cardiovascular side effects tend to counterbalance the stated advantages.

Liothyronine sodium tablets may be used in preference to levothyroxine (T4) during radioisotope scanning procedures, since induction of hypothyroidism in those cases is more abrupt and can be of shorter duration. It may also be preferred when impairment of peripheral conversion of T4 to T3 is suspected.

Myxedema

Recommended starting dosage is 5 mcg daily. This may be increased by 5 mcg to 10 mcg daily every 1 or 2 weeks. When 25 mcg daily is reached, dosage may be increased by 5 mcg to 25 mcg every 1 or 2 weeks until a satisfactory therapeutic response is attained. Usual maintenance dose is 50 mcg to 100 mcg daily.

Myxedema Coma

Myxedema coma is usually precipitated in the hypothyroid patient of long standing by intercurrent illness or drugs such as sedatives and anesthetics and should be considered a medical emergency.

Congenital Hypothyroidism

Recommended starting dosage is 5 mcg daily, with a 5 mcg increment every 3 to 4 days until the desired response is achieved. Infants a few months old may require only 20 mcg daily for maintenance. At one year, 50 mcg daily may be required. Above 3 years, full adult dosage may be necessary (see PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use).

Simple (non-toxic) Goiter

Recommended starting dosage is 5 mcg daily. This dosage may be increased by 5 mcg to 10 mcg daily every 1 or 2 weeks. When 25 mcg daily is reached, dosage may be increased every week or two by 12.5 mcg or 25 mcg. Usual maintenance dosage is 75 mcg daily.

In the elderly or in pediatric patients, therapy should be started with 5 mcg daily and increased only by 5 mcg increments at the recommended intervals.

When switching a patient to liothyronine sodium tablets from thyroid, L-thyroxine or thyroglobulin, discontinue the other medication, initiate liothyronine sodium at a low dosage, and increase gradually according to the patient's response. When selecting a starting dosage, bear in mind that this drug has a rapid onset of action, and that residual effects of the other thyroid preparation may persist for the first several weeks of therapy.

Thyroid Suppression Therapy

Administration of thyroid hormone in doses higher than those produced physiologically by the gland results in suppression of the production of endogenous hormone. This is the basis for the thyroid suppression test and is used as an aid in the diagnosis of patients with signs of mild hyperthyroidism in whom baseline laboratory tests appear normal or to demonstrate thyroid gland autonomy in patients with Graves’ ophthalmopathy.131 I uptake is determined before and after the administration of the exogenous hormone. A 50% or greater suppression of uptake indicates a normal thyroid-pituitary axis and thus rules out thyroid gland autonomy.

Liothyronine sodium tablets are given in doses of 75 to 100 mcg/day for 7 days, and radioactive iodine uptake is determined before and after administration of the hormone. If thyroid function is under normal control, the radioiodine uptake will drop significantly after treatment. Liothyronine sodium tablets should be administered cautiously to patients in whom there is a strong suspicion of thyroid gland autonomy, in view of the fact that the exogenous hormone effects will be additive to the endogenous source.
Desonide

Desonide

2.1 Dosing Information

The recommended dose of sumatriptan tablets is 25 mg, 50 mg, or 100 mg. Doses of 50 mg and 100 mg may provide a greater effect than the 25 mg dose, but doses of 100 mg may not provide a greater effect than the 50 mg dose. Higher doses may have a greater risk of adverse reactions [see Clinical Studies (14)].

If the migraine has not resolved by 2 hours after taking sumatriptan tablets, or returns after a transient improvement, a second dose may be administered at least 2 hours after the first dose. The maximum daily dose is 200 mg in a 24 hour period.

Use After Sumatriptan Succinate Injection

If the migraine returns following an initial treatment with sumatriptan succinate injection, additional single sumatriptan tablets (up to 100 mg/day) may be given with an interval of at least 2 hours between tablet doses.

The safety of treating an average of more than four headaches in a 30 day period has not been established.

2.2 Dosing in Patients With Hepatic Impairment

If treatment is deemed advisable in the presence of mild to moderate hepatic impairment, the maximum single dose should not exceed 50 mg [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Clonidine Patch

Clonidine Patch

Apply Clonidine Transdermal System once every 7 days to a hairless area of intact skin on the upper outer arm or chest. Each new application of Clonidine Transdermal System should be on a different skin site from the previous location. If the system loosens during 7-day wearing, the adhesive cover should be applied directly over the system to ensure good adhesion. There have been rare reports of the need for patch changes prior to 7 days to maintain blood pressure control.

To initiate therapy, Clonidine Transdermal System dosage should be titrated according to individual therapeutic requirements, starting with Clonidine Transdermal System 0.1 mg/day. If after one or two weeks the desired reduction in blood pressure is not achieved, increase the dosage by adding another Clonidine Transdermal System, 0.1 mg/day or changing to a larger system. An increase in dosage above two Clonidine Transdermal System 0.3 mg/day is usually not associated with additional efficacy.

When substituting Clonidine Transdermal System for oral clonidine or for other antihypertensive drugs, physicians should be aware that the antihypertensive effect of Clonidine Transdermal System may not commence until 2 to 3 days after initial application. Therefore, gradual reduction of prior drug dosage is advised. Some or all previous antihypertensive treatment may have to be continued, particularly in patients with more severe forms of hypertension.

Renal Impairment

Patients with renal impairment may benefit from a lower initial dose. Patients should be carefully monitored. Since only a minimal amount of clonidine is removed during routine hemodialysis, there is no need to give supplemental clonidine following dialysis.
Atenolol

Atenolol

Hypertension

The initial dose of atenolol is 50 mg given as one tablet a day either alone or added to diuretic therapy. The full effect of this dose will usually be seen within one to two weeks. If an optimal response is not achieved, the dosage should be increased to atenolol 100 mg given as one tablet a day. Increasing the dosage beyond 100 mg a day is unlikely to produce any further benefit.

Atenolol tablets may be used alone or concomitantly with other antihypertensive agents including thiazide-type diuretics, hydralazine, prazosin and alpha-methyldopa.

Angina Pectoris

The initial dose of atenolol is 50 mg given as one tablet a day. If an optimal response is not achieved within one week, the dosage should be increased to atenolol 100 mg given as one tablet a day. Some patients may require a dosage of 200 mg once a day for optimal effect.

Twenty-four hour control with once daily dosing is achieved by giving doses larger than necessary to achieve an immediate maximum effect. The maximum early effect on exercise tolerance occurs with doses of 50 mg to 100 mg, but at these doses the effect at 24 hours is attenuated, averaging about 50% to 75% of that observed with once a day oral doses of 200 mg.

Acute Myocardial Infarction

In patients with definite or suspected acute myocardial infarction, treatment with atenolol I.V. injection should be initiated as soon as possible after the patient’s arrival in the hospital and after eligibility is established. Such treatment should be initiated in a coronary care or similar unit immediately after the patient’s hemodynamic condition has stabilized. Treatment should begin with the intravenous administration of 5 mg atenolol over 5 minutes followed by another 5 mg intravenous injection 10 minutes later. Atenolol I.V. injection should be administered under carefully controlled conditions including monitoring of blood pressure, heart rate and electrocardiogram. Dilutions of atenolol I.V. injection in Dextrose Injection USP, Sodium Chloride Injection USP, or Sodium Chloride and Dextrose Injection may be used. These admixtures are stable for 48 hours if they are not used immediately.

In patients who tolerate the full intravenous dose (10 mg), atenolol tablets 50 mg should be initiated 10 minutes after the last intravenous dose followed by another 50 mg oral dose 12 hours later. Thereafter, atenolol tablets can be given orally either 100 mg once daily or 50 mg twice a day for a further 6 to 9 days or until discharge from the hospital. If bradycardia or hypotension requiring treatment or any other untoward effects occur, atenolol tablets should be discontinued. (See full prescribing information prior to initiating therapy with atenolol tablets.)

Data from other beta-blocker trials suggest that if there is any question concerning the use of I.V. beta-blocker or clinical estimate that there is a contraindication, the I.V. beta-blocker may be eliminated and patients fulfilling the safety criteria may be given atenolol tablets 50 mg twice daily or 100 mg once a day for at least 7 days (if the I.V. dosing is excluded).

Although the demonstration of efficacy of atenolol is based entirely on data from the first 7 postinfarction days, data from other beta-blocker trials suggest that treatment with beta blockers that are effective in the postinfarction setting may be continued for 1 to 3 years if there are no contraindications.

Atenolol tablets are an additional treatment to standard coronary care unit therapy.

Elderly Patients or Patients with Renal Impairment

Atenolol is excreted by the kidneys; consequently dosage should be adjusted in cases of severe impairment of renal function. In general, dose selection for an elderly patient should be cautious, usually starting at the low end of the dosing range, reflecting greater frequency of decreased hepatic, renal or cardiac function and of concomitant disease or other drug therapy. Evaluation of patients with hypertension or myocardial infarction should always include assessment of renal function. Atenolol excretion would be expected to decrease with advancing age.

No significant accumulation of atenolol occurs until creatinine clearance falls below 35 mL/min/1.73 m2. Accumulation of atenolol and prolongation of its half-life were studied in subjects with creatinine clearance between 5 and 105 mL/min. Peak plasma levels were significantly increased in subjects with creatinine clearances below 30 mL/min.

The following maximum oral dosages are recommended for elderly, renally-impaired patients and for patients with renal impairment due to other causes:
Creatinine Clearance (mL/min/1.73m2) Atenolol Elimination Half-Life (hrs) Maximum Dosage
15 to 35

16 to 27

50 mg daily

< 15

> 27

25 mg daily

Some renally-impaired or elderly patients being treated for hypertension may require a lower starting dose of atenolol: 25 mg given as one tablet a day. If this 25 mg dose is used, assessment of efficacy must be made carefully. This should include measurement of blood pressure just prior to the next dose ("trough" blood pressure) to ensure that the treatment effect is present for a full 24 hours.

Although a similar dosage reduction may be considered for elderly and/or renally-impaired patients being treated for indications other than hypertension, data are not available for these patient populations.

Patients on hemodialysis should be given 25 mg or 50 mg after each dialysis; this should be done under hospital supervision as marked falls in blood pressure can occur.

Cessation of Therapy in Patients with Angina Pectoris

If withdrawal of atenolol tablets therapy is planned, it should be achieved gradually and patients should be carefully observed and advised to limit physical activity to a minimum.
Fenofibrate

Fenofibrate

2.1 General Considerations

Patients should be placed on an appropriate lipid-lowering diet before receiving fenofibrate capsules, and should continue this diet during treatment with fenofibrate capsules. Fenofibrate capsules can be given without regard to meals.

Patients should be advised to swallow fenofibrate capsules whole. Do not open, crush, dissolve or chew capsules.

The initial treatment for dyslipidemia is dietary therapy specific for the type of lipoprotein abnormality. Excess body weight and excess alcoholic intake may be important factors in hypertriglyceridemia and should be addressed prior to any drug therapy. Physical exercise can be an important ancillary measure. Diseases contributory to hyperlipidemia, such as hypothyroidism or diabetes mellitus should be looked for and adequately treated. Estrogen therapy, thiazide diuretics and beta-blockers are sometimes associated with massive rises in plasma triglycerides, especially in subjects with familial hypertriglyceridemia. In such cases, discontinuation of the specific etiologic agent may obviate the need for specific drug therapy of hypertriglyceridemia.

Lipid levels should be monitored periodically and consideration should be given to reducing the dosage of fenofibrate if lipid levels fall significantly below the targeted range.

Therapy should be withdrawn in patients who do not have an adequate response after 2 months of treatment with the maximum recommended dose of 130 mg once daily.

2.2 Primary Hypercholesterolemia and Mixed Dyslipidemia

The initial dose of fenofibrate capsules is 130 mg per day.

2.3 Severe Hypertriglyceridemia

The initial dose is 43 mg to 130 mg per day. Dosage should be individualized according to patient response, and should be adjusted if necessary following repeat lipid determinations at 4 to 8 week intervals. The maximum dose is 130 mg per day.

2.4 Impaired Renal Function

Treatment with fenofibrate capsules should be initiated at a dose of 43 mg per day in patients having mild to moderately impaired renal function, and increased only after evaluation of the effects on renal function and lipid levels at this dose. The use of fenofibrate capsules should be avoided in patients with severe renal impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.5 Geriatric Patients

Dose selection for the elderly should be made on the basis of renal function [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Fluconazole

Fluconazole

Dosage and Administration in Adults

Single Dose

Vaginal Candidiasis

The recommended dosage of fluconazole tablets for vaginal candidiasis is 150 mg as a single oral dose.

Multiple Dose

SINCE ORAL ABSORPTION IS RAPID AND ALMOST COMPLETE, THE DAILY DOSE OF FLUCONAZOLE IS THE SAME FOR ORAL AND INTRAVENOUS ADMINISTRATION. In general, a loading dose of twice the daily dose is recommended on the first day of therapy to result in plasma concentrations close to steady-state by the second day of therapy.

The daily dose of fluconazole tablets for the treatment of infections other than vaginal candidiasis should be based on the infecting organism and the patient’s response to therapy. Treatment should be continued until clinical parameters or laboratory tests indicate that active fungal infection has subsided. An inadequate period of treatment may lead to recurrence of active infection. Patients with AIDS and cryptococcal meningitis or recurrent oropharyngeal candidiasis usually require maintenance therapy to prevent relapse.

Oropharyngeal Candidiasis

The recommended dosage of fluconazole tablets for oropharyngeal candidiasis is 200 mg on the first day, followed by 100 mg once daily. Clinical evidence of oropharyngeal candidiasis generally resolves within several days, but treatment should be continued for at least 2 weeks to decrease the likelihood of relapse.

Esophageal Candidiasis

The recommended dosage of fluconazole tablets for esophageal candidiasis is 200 mg on the first day, followed by 100 mg once daily. Doses up to 400 mg/day may be used, based on medical judgment of the patient’s response to therapy. Patients with esophageal candidiasis should be treated for a minimum of 3 weeks and for at least 2 weeks following resolution of symptoms.

Systemic Candida Infections

For systemic Candida infections including candidemia, disseminated candidiasis and pneumonia, optimal therapeutic dosage and duration of therapy have not been established. In open, noncomparative studies of small numbers of patients, doses of up to 400 mg daily have been used.

Urinary Tract Infections and Peritonitis

For the treatment of Candida urinary tract infections and peritonitis, daily doses of 50 mg to 200 mg have been used in open, noncomparative studies of small numbers of patients.

Cryptococcal Meningitis

The recommended dosage for treatment of acute cryptococcal meningitis is 400 mg on the first day, followed by 200 mg once daily. A dosage of 400 mg once daily may be used, based on medical judgment of the patient’s response to therapy. The recommended duration of treatment for initial therapy of cryptococcal meningitis is 10 to 12 weeks after the cerebrospinal fluid becomes culture negative. The recommended dosage of fluconazole tablets for suppression of relapse of cryptococcal meningitis in patients with AIDS is 200 mg once daily.

Prophylaxis in Patients Undergoing Bone Marrow Transplantation

The recommended fluconazole tablet daily dosage for the prevention of candidiasis in patients undergoing bone marrow transplantation is 400 mg, once daily. Patients who are anticipated to have severe granulocytopenia (less than 500 neutrophils per cu mm) should start fluconazole tablet prophylaxis several days before the anticipated onset of neutropenia and continue for 7 days after the neutrophil count rises above 1,000 cells per cu mm.

Dosage and Administration in Children

The following dose equivalency scheme should generally provide equivalent exposure in pediatric and adult patients:
* Some older children may have clearances similar to that of adults. Absolute doses exceeding 600 mg/day are not recommended.
Pediatric Patients

Adults

3 mg/kg

100 mg

6 mg/kg

200 mg

12* mg/kg

400 mg

Experience with fluconazole in neonates is limited to pharmacokinetic studies in premature newborns. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY.) Based on the prolonged half-life seen in premature newborns (gestational age 26 to 29 weeks), these children, in the first 2 weeks of life, should receive the same dosage (mg/kg) as in older children, but administered every 72 hours. After the first 2 weeks, these children should be dosed once daily. No information regarding fluconazole pharmacokinetics in full-term newborns is available.

Oropharyngeal Candidiasis

The recommended dosage of fluconazole for oropharyngeal candidiasis in children is 6 mg/kg on the first day, followed by 3 mg/kg once daily. Treatment should be administered for at least 2 weeks to decrease the likelihood of relapse.

Esophageal Candidiasis

For the treatment of esophageal candidiasis, the recommended dosage of fluconazole in children is 6 mg/kg on the first day, followed by 3 mg/kg once daily. Doses up to 12 mg/kg/day may be used based on medical judgment of the patient’s response to therapy. Patients with esophageal candidiasis should be treated for a minimum of 3 weeks and for at least 2 weeks following the resolution of symptoms.

Systemic Candida Infections

For the treatment of candidemia and disseminated Candida infections, daily doses of 6 to 12 mg/kg/day have been used in an open, noncomparative study of a small number of children.

Cryptococcal Meningitis

For the treatment of acute cryptococcal meningitis, the recommended dosage is 12 mg/kg on the first day, followed by 6 mg/kg once daily. A dosage of 12 mg/kg once daily may be used, based on medical judgment of the patient’s response to therapy. The recommended duration of treatment for initial therapy of cryptococcal meningitis is 10 to 12 weeks after the cerebrospinal fluid becomes culture negative. For suppression of relapse of cryptococcal meningitis in children with AIDS, the recommended dose of fluconazole is 6 mg/kg once daily.

Dosage In Patients with Impaired Renal Function

Fluconazole is cleared primarily by renal excretion as unchanged drug. There is no need to adjust single-dose therapy for vaginal candidiasis because of impaired renal function. In patients with impaired renal function who will receive multiple doses of fluconazole tablets, an initial loading dose of 50 mg to 400 mg should be given. After the loading dose, the daily dose (according to indication) should be based on the following table:

Creatinine Clearance (mL/min)

Percent of Recommended Dose

>50

100%

≤ 50 (no dialysis)

50%

Regular dialysis

100% after each dialysis

These are suggested dose adjustments based on pharmacokinetics following administration of multiple doses. Further adjustment may be needed depending upon clinical condition.

When serum creatinine is the only measure of renal function available, the following formula (based on sex, weight and age of the patient) should be used to estimate the creatinine clearance in adults:

Although the pharmacokinetics of fluconazole has not been studied in children with renal insufficiency, dosage reduction in children with renal insufficiency should parallel that recommended for adults. The following formula may be used to estimate creatinine clearance in children:

Administration: Fluconazole tablets can be taken with or without food.
Ipratropium Bromide And...

Ipratropium Bromide And Albuterol Sulfate Solution

The recommended dose of Ipratropium Bromide and Albuterol Sulfate Inhalation Solution is one 3 mL vial administered 4 times per day via nebulization with up to 2 additional 3 mL doses allowed per day, if needed. Safety and efficacy of additional doses or increased frequency of administration of Ipratropium Bromide and Albuterol Sulfate Inhalation Solution beyond these guidelines has not been studied and the safety and efficacy of extra doses of albuterol sulfate or ipratropium bromide in addition to the recommended doses of Ipratropium Bromide and Albuterol Sulfate Inhalation Solution have not been studied.

The use of Ipratropium Bromide and Albuterol Sulfate Inhalation Solution can be continued as medically indicated to control recurring bouts of bronchospasm. If a previously effective regimen fails to provide the usual relief, medical advice should be sought immediately, as this is often a sign of worsening COPD, which would require reassessment of therapy.

A Pari-LC-Plus™ nebulizer (with face mask or mouthpiece) connected to a PRONEB™ compressor was used to deliver Ipratropium Bromide and Albuterol Sulfate Inhalation Solution to each patient in one U.S. clinical study. The safety and efficacy of Ipratropium Bromide and Albuterol Sulfate Inhalation Solution delivered by other nebulizers and compressors have not been established.

Ipratropium Bromide and Albuterol Sulfate Inhalation Solution should be administered via jet nebulizer connected to an air compressor with an adequate air flow, equipped with a mouthpiece or suitable face mask.
Alert

Alert

Essential Hypertension

The dose of verapamil hydrochloride extended-release capsules should be individualized by titration. The usual daily dose of extended-release verapamil hydrochloride capsules in clinical trials has been 240 mg given by mouth once daily in the morning. However, initial doses of 120 mg a day may be warranted in patients who may have an increased response to verapamil (e.g., elderly, small people, etc.). Upward titration should be based on therapeutic efficacy and safety evaluated approximately 24 hours after dosing. The antihypertensive effects of verapamil hydrochloride extended-release capsules are evident within the first week of therapy.

If adequate response is not obtained with 120 mg of verapamil hydrochloride extended-release capsules, the dose may be titrated upward in the following manner:
• 180 mg in the morning, • 240 mg in the morning, • 360 mg in the morning, • 480 mg in the morning.
Verapamil extended-release capsules are for once a day administration. When switching from immediate-release verapamil to verapamil hydrochloride extended-release capsules, the same total daily dose of verapamil hydrochloride extended-release capsules can be used.

As with immediate-release verapamil, dosages of verapamil hydrochloride extended-release capsules should be individualized and titration may be needed in some patients.

Sprinkling the Capsule Contents on Food

Verapamil hydrochloride extended-release bead filled capsules may also be administered by carefully opening the capsule and sprinkling the beads on a spoonful of applesauce. The applesauce should be swallowed immediately without chewing and followed with a glass of cool water to ensure complete swallowing of the beads. The applesauce used should not be hot, and it should be soft enough to be swallowed without chewing. Any bead/applesauce mixture should be used immediately and not stored for future use. Subdividing the contents of a verapamil hydrochloride extended-release capsule is not recommended.
Sildenafil

Sildenafil

2.1 Sildenafil Tablets

The recommended dose of sildenafil tablets is 20 mg three times a day (TID). Administer sildenafil tablet doses 4 to 6 hours apart.

In the clinical trial no greater efficacy was achieved with the use of higher doses. Treatment with doses higher than 20 mg TID is not recommended.
Fluvastatin Sodium

Fluvastatin Sodium

2.1 General Dosing Information

Dose range: 20 mg to 80 mg/day.

Fluvastatin capsules can be administered orally as a single dose, with or without food.

Do not open fluvastatin capsules prior to administration.

Do not take two fluvastatin 40 mg capsules at one time.

Since the maximal effect of a given dose is seen within 4 weeks, periodic lipid determinations should be performed at this time and dosage adjusted according to the patient’s response to therapy and established treatment guidelines.

For patients requiring LDL-C reduction to a goal of ≥ 25%, the recommended starting dose is 40 mg as one capsule in the evening, or 80 mg in divided doses of the 40 mg capsule given twice daily. For patients requiring LDL-C reduction to a goal of < 25% a starting dose of 20 mg may be used.

2.2 Adult Patients with Hypercholesterolemia (Heterozygous Familial and Nonfamilial) and Mixed Dyslipidemia

Adult patients can be started on fluvastatin capsules. The recommended starting dose for fluvastatin capsules is one 40 mg capsule in the evening, or one fluvastatin 40 mg capsule twice daily. Do not take two fluvastatin 40 mg capsules at one time.

2.3 Pediatric Patients (10 to 16 Years of Age) with Heterozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The recommended starting dose is one 20 mg fluvastatin capsule. Dose adjustments, up to a maximum daily dose administered as fluvastatin capsules 40 mg twice daily should be made at 6 week intervals. Doses should be individualized according to the goal of therapy. [See NCEP Pediatric Panel Guidelines and Clinical Studies (14).]1

1National Cholesterol Education Program (NCEP): Highlights of the Report of the Expert Panel on Blood Cholesterol Levels in Children and Adolescents. Pediatrics. 89(3):495-501. 1992.

2.4 Use with Cyclosporine

Do not exceed a dose of 20 mg BID fluvastatin capsules in patients taking cyclosporine [see Drug Interactions (7.1)].

2.5 Use with Fluconazole

Do not exceed a dose of 20 mg BID fluvastatin capsules in patients taking fluconazole [see Drug Interactions (7.2)].
Lenzapatch

Lenzapatch

2.1 Administration Information

Administer gabapentin tablets orally with or without food.

Inform patients that, should they break the scored 600 mg or 800 mg gabapentin tablet in order to administer a half-tablet, they should take the unused half-tablet as the next dose. Half-tablets not used within 28 days of breaking the scored tablet should be discarded.

If the gabapentin tablets dose is reduced, discontinued, or substituted with an alternative medication, this should be done gradually over a minimum of 1 week (a longer period may be needed at the discretion of the prescriber).

2.2 Dosage for Postherpetic Neuralgia

In adults with postherpetic neuralgia, gabapentin tablets may be initiated on Day 1 as a single 300 mg dose, on Day 2 as 600 mg/day (300 mg two times a day), and on Day 3 as 900 mg/day (300 mg three times a day). The dose can subsequently be titrated up as needed for pain relief to a dose of 1800 mg/day (600 mg three times a day). In clinical studies, efficacy was demonstrated over a range of doses from 1800 mg/day to 3600 mg/day with comparable effects across the dose range; however, in these clinical studies, the additional benefit of using doses greater than 1800 mg/day was not demonstrated.

2.3 Dosage for Epilepsy with Partial Onset Seizures

Patients 12 Years of Age and Above

The starting dose is 300 mg three times a day. The recommended maintenance dose of gabapentin tablets is 300 mg to 600 mg three times a day. Dosages up to 2400 mg/day have been well tolerated in long-term clinical studies. Doses of 3600 mg/day have also been administered to a small number of patients for a relatively short duration, and have been well tolerated. Administer gabapentin tablets three times a day using 600 mg or 800 mg tablets. The maximum time between doses should not exceed 12 hours.

Pediatric Patients Age 3 to 11 Years

The starting dose range is 10 mg/kg/day to 15 mg/kg/day, given in three divided doses, and the recommended maintenance dose reached by upward titration over a period of approximately 3 days. The recommended maintenance dose of gabapentin tablets in patients 3 to 4 years of age is 40 mg/kg/day, given in three divided doses. The recommended maintenance dose of gabapentin tablets in patients 5 to 11 years of age is 25 mg/kg/day to 35 mg/kg/day, given in three divided doses. Gabapentin may be administered as the oral solution, capsule, or tablet, or using combinations of these formulations. Dosages up to 50 mg/kg/day have been well tolerated in a long-term clinical study. The maximum time interval between doses should not exceed 12 hours.

2.4 Dosage Adjustment in Patients with Renal Impairment

Dosage adjustment in patients 12 years of age and older with renal impairment or undergoing hemodialysis is recommended, as follows (see dosing recommendations above for effective doses in each indication):
Table 1. Gabapentin Tablets Dosage Based on Renal Function TID = Three times a day; BID = Two times a day; QD = Single daily dose * For patients with creatinine clearance < 15 mL/min, reduce daily dose in proportion to creatinine clearance (e.g., patients with a creatinine clearance of 7.5 mL/min should receive one-half the daily dose that patients with a creatinine clearance of 15 mL/min receive). † Patients on hemodialysis should receive maintenance doses based on estimates of creatinine clearance as indicated in the upper portion of the table and a supplemental post-hemodialysis dose administered after each 4 hours of hemodialysis as indicated in the lower portion of the table.
Renal Function

Creatinine Clearance

(mL/min)

Total Daily

Dose Range

(mg/day)

Dose Regimen

(mg)

≥ 60

900 to 3600

300 TID

400 TID

600 TID

800 TID

1200 TID

> 30 to 59

400 to 1400

200 BID

300 BID

400 BID

500 BID

700 BID

> 15 to 29

200 to 700

200 QD

300 QD

400 QD

500 QD

700 QD

15*

100 to 300

100 QD

125 QD

150 QD

200 QD

300 QD

Post-Hemodialysis Supplemental Dose (mg)†

Hemodialysis

125†

150†

200†

250†

350†

Creatinine clearance (CLCr) is difficult to measure in outpatients. In patients with stable renal function, creatinine clearance can be reasonably well estimated using the equation of Cockcroft and Gault:

The use of gabapentin tablets in patients less than 12 years of age with compromised renal function has not been studied.

2.5 Dosage in Elderly

Because elderly patients are more likely to have decreased renal function, care should be taken in dose selection, and dose should be adjusted based on creatinine clearance values in these patients.
Dicyclomine Hydrochlori...

Dicyclomine Hydrochloride Capsule Dicyclomine Hydrochloride

Dosage must be adjusted to individual patient needs.

2.1 Oral Dosage and Administration in Adults

The recommended initial dose is 20 mg 4 times a day.

After one week treatment with the initial dose, the dose may be increased to 40 mg 4 times a day unless side effects limit dosage escalation.

If efficacy is not achieved within 2 weeks or side effects require doses below 80 mg per day, the drug should be discontinued. Documented safety data are not available for doses above 80 mg daily for periods longer than 2 weeks.
Felodipine

Felodipine

The recommended starting dose is 5 mg once a day. Depending on the patient's response, the dosage can be decreased to 2.5 mg or increased to 10 mg once a day. These adjustments should occur generally at intervals of not less than 2 weeks. The recommended dosage range is 2.5 mg to 10 mg once daily. In clinical trials, doses above 10 mg daily showed an increased blood pressure response but a large increase in the rate of peripheral edema and other vasodilatory adverse events (see ADVERSE REACTIONS). Modification of the recommended dosage is usually not required in patients with renal impairment.

Felodipine extended-release tablets should regularly be taken either without food or with a light meal (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics and Metabolism). Felodipine extended-release tablets should be swallowed whole and not crushed or chewed.

Geriatric Use

Patients over 65 years of age are likely to develop higher plasma concentrations of felodipine (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). In general, dose selection for an elderly patient should be cautious, usually starting at the low end of the dosing range (2.5 mg daily). Elderly patients should have their blood pressure closely monitored during any dosage adjustment.

Patients with Impaired Liver Function

Patients with impaired liver function may have elevated plasma concentrations of felodipine and may respond to lower doses of felodipine extended-release tablets; therefore, patients should have their blood pressure monitored closely during dosage adjustment of felodipine extended-release tablets (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).
Atenolol And Chlorthali...

Atenolol And Chlorthalidone

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE).

Chlorthalidone is usually given at a dose of 25 mg daily; the usual initial dose of atenolol is 50 mg daily. Therefore, the initial dose should be one atenolol and chlorthalidone tablet 50 mg/25 mg given once a day. If an optimal response is not achieved, the dosage should be increased to one atenolol and chlorthalidone tablet 100 mg/25 mg given once a day.

When necessary, another antihypertensive agent may be added gradually beginning with 50% of the usual recommended starting dose to avoid an excessive fall in blood pressure.

Since atenolol is excreted via the kidneys, dosage should be adjusted in cases of severe impairment of renal function. No significant accumulation of atenolol occurs until creatinine clearance falls below 35 mL/min/1.73m2 (normal range is 100 to 150 mL/min/1.73m2); therefore, the following maximum dosages are recommended for patients with renal impairment.

Creatinine

Atenolol

Clearance

Elimination

Maximum

(mL/min/1.73m2 )

Half-life (hrs)

Dosage

15 to 35

16 to 27

50 mg daily

< 15

> 27

50 mg everyother day
Mucinex Fast-max Severe...

Mucinex Fast-max Severe Cold

2.1 How to Take Norethindrone and Ethinyl Estradiol Tablets (Chewable) and Ferrous Fumarate Tablets (Chewable)

To achieve maximum contraceptive effectiveness, norethindrone and ethinyl estradiol tablets (chewable) and ferrous fumarate tablets (chewable) must be taken exactly as directed. Chew and swallow one tablet without water at the same time every day. Tablets must be taken in the order directed on the blister pack. Tablets should not be skipped or taken at intervals exceeding 24 hours. For patient instructions for missed pills, see FDA-Approved Patient Labeling. Norethindrone and ethinyl estradiol tablets (chewable) and ferrous fumarate tablets (chewable) may be administered without regard to meals [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.2 How to Start Norethindrone and Ethinyl Estradiol Tablets (Chewable) and Ferrous Fumarate Tablets (Chewable)

Instruct the patient to begin taking norethindrone and ethinyl estradiol tablets (chewable) and ferrous fumarate tablets (chewable) on Day 1 of her menstrual cycle (that is, the first day of her menstrual bleeding). One dark yellow tablet should be taken daily for 24 consecutive days followed by one brown tablet daily for 4 consecutive days. [see FDA-Approved Patient Labeling]. Instruct the patient to use a non-hormonal contraceptive as back-up during the first 7 days if she starts taking norethindrone and ethinyl estradiol tablets (chewable) and ferrous fumarate tablets (chewable) other than on the first day of her menstrual cycle.

For postpartum women who do not breastfeed or after a second trimester abortion, norethindrone and ethinyl estradiol tablets (chewable) and ferrous fumarate tablets (chewable) may be started no earlier than 4 weeks postpartum. Recommend use of a non-hormonal back-up method for the first 7 days. When combined oral contraceptives (COCs) are used during the postpartum period, the increased risk of thromboembolic disease associated with the postpartum period must be considered. The possibility of ovulation and conception before starting COCs should also be considered.

If the patient is switching from a combination hormonal method such as:

      o Another pill

      o Vaginal ring

      o Patch
Instruct her to take the first dark yellow pill on the day she would have started a new cycle of her previous birth control pack (Day 1). If she previously used a vaginal ring or transdermal patch, she should start using norethindrone and ethinyl estradiol tablets (chewable) and ferrous fumarate tablets (chewable) on the day she would have restarted the ring or patch. Instruct the patient to use a non-hormonal back-up method such as a condom and spermicide for the first 7 days.
If the patient is switching from a progestin-only method such as:

      o Progestin-only pill

      o Implant

      o Intrauterine system

      o Injection
Instruct her to take the first dark yellow pill on the day she would have taken her next progestin-only pill or on the day of removal of her implant or intrauterine system or on the day when she would have had her next injection. Instruct the patient to use a non-hormonal back-up method such as a condom and spermicide for the first 7 days.
2.3 Advice in Case of Gastrointestinal Disturbances

In case of severe vomiting or diarrhea, absorption may not be complete and additional contraceptive measures should be taken. If vomiting or diarrhea occurs within 3 to 4 hours after taking a dark yellow tablet, this can be regarded as a missed tablet. [See FDA-Approved Patient Labeling.]
Pantoprazole Sodium

Pantoprazole Sodium

The dosage of nisoldipine extended-release tablets must be adjusted to each patient’s needs. Therapy usually should be initiated with 17 mg orally once daily, then increased by 8.5 mg per week or longer intervals, to attain adequate control of blood pressure. Usual maintenance dosage is 17 mg to 34 mg once daily. Blood pressure response increases over the 8.5 mg to 34 mg daily dose range but adverse event rates also increase. Doses beyond 34 mg once daily are not recommended. Nisoldipine extended-release tablets have been used safely with diuretics, ACE inhibitors, and beta-blocking agents. Patients over age 65, or patients with impaired liver function, are expected to develop higher plasma concentrations of nisoldipine. Their blood pressure should be monitored closely during any dosage adjustment. A starting dose not exceeding 8.5 mg daily is recommended in these patient groups. Nisoldipine extended-release tablets should be administered orally once daily. Nisoldipine extended-release tablets should be taken on an empty stomach (one hour before or 2 hours after a meal). Grapefruit products should be avoided before and after dosing. Nisoldipine extended-release tablets are an extended release dosage form and tablets should be swallowed whole, not bitten, divided or crushed.
Metoprolol Tartrate

Metoprolol Tartrate

Hypertension

Individualize the dosage of metoprolol tartrate tablets. Metoprolol tartrate tablets should be taken with or immediately following meals.

The usual initial dosage of metoprolol tartrate tablets is 100 mg daily in single or divided doses, whether used alone or added to a diuretic. Increase the dosage at weekly (or longer) intervals until optimum blood pressure reduction is achieved. In general, the maximum effect of any given dosage level will be apparent after one week of therapy. The effective dosage range of metoprolol tartrate tablets is 100 mg to 450 mg per day. Dosages above 450 mg per day have not been studied. While once daily dosing is effective and can maintain a reduction in blood pressure throughout the day, lower doses (especially 100 mg) may not maintain a full effect at the end of the 24-hour period, and larger or more frequent daily doses may be required. This can be evaluated by measuring blood pressure near the end of the dosing interval to determine whether satisfactory control is being maintained throughout the day. Beta1 selectivity diminishes as the dose of metoprolol tartrate tablets is increased.

Angina Pectoris

The dosage of metoprolol tartrate tablets should be individualized. Metoprolol tartrate tablets should be taken with or immediately following meals.

The usual initial dosage of metoprolol tartrate tablets is 100 mg daily, given in two divided doses. Gradually increase the dosage at weekly intervals until optimum clinical response has been obtained or there is pronounced slowing of the heart rate. The effective dosage range of metoprolol tartrate tablets is 100 mg to 400 mg per day. Dosages above 400 mg per day have not been studied. If treatment is to be discontinued, gradually decrease the dosage over a period of 1 to 2 weeks (see WARNINGS).

Myocardial Infarction

Early Treatment

During the early phase of definite or suspected acute myocardial infarction, initiate treatment with metoprolol tartrate tablets as soon as possible after the patient’s arrival in the hospital. Such treatment should be initiated in a coronary care or similar unit immediately after the patient’s hemodynamic condition has stabilized.

Begin treatment in this early phase with the intravenous administration of three bolus injections of 5 mg of metoprolol tartrate each; give the injections at approximately 2 minute intervals. During the intravenous administration of metoprolol, monitor blood pressure, heart rate, and electrocardiogram.

In patients who tolerate the full intravenous dose (15 mg), initiate metoprolol tartrate tablets, 50 mg every 6 hours, 15 minutes after the last intravenous dose and continue for 48 hours. Thereafter, the maintenance dosage is 100 mg twice daily (see Late Treatment below).

Start patients who appear not to tolerate the full intravenous dose on metoprolol tartrate tablets either 25 mg or 50 mg every 6 hours (depending on the degree of intolerance) 15 minutes after the last intravenous dose or as soon as their clinical condition allows. In patients with severe intolerance, discontinue metoprolol tartrate tablets (see WARNINGS).

Late Treatment

Start patients with contraindications to treatment during the early phase of suspected or definite myocardial infarction, patients who appear not to tolerate the full early treatment, and patients in whom the physician wishes to delay therapy for any other reason on metoprolol tartrate tablets, 100 mg twice daily, as soon as their clinical condition allows. Continue therapy for at least 3 months. Although the efficacy of metoprolol beyond 3 months has not been conclusively established, data from studies with other beta-blockers suggest that treatment should be continued for 1 to 3 years.

Special Populations

Pediatric Patients

No pediatric studies have been performed. The safety and efficacy of metoprolol in pediatric patients have not been established.

Renal Impairment

No dose adjustment of metoprolol tartrate tablets is required in patients with renal impairment.

Hepatic Impairment

Metoprolol blood levels are likely to increase substantially in patients with hepatic impairment. Therefore, metoprolol tartrate tablets should be initiated at low doses with cautious gradual dose titration according to clinical response.

Geriatric Patients (> 65 Years)

In general, use a low initial starting dose in elderly patients given their greater frequency of decreased hepatic, renal, or cardiac function, and of concomitant disease or other drug therapy.

Method of Administration

For oral treatment, the tablets should be swallowed unchewed with a glass of water. Metoprolol tartrate tablets should always be taken in standardized relation with meals. If the physician asks the patient to take metoprolol tartrate tablets either before breakfast or with breakfast, then the patient should continue taking metoprolol tartrate tablets with the same schedule during the course of therapy.
Clindamycin

Clindamycin

While the recommended usual adult dose is 15 mg before retiring, 7.5 mg may be sufficient for some patients, and others may need 30 mg. In transient insomnia, a 7.5 mg dose may be sufficient to improve sleep latency. In elderly or debilitated patients, it is recommended that therapy be initiated with 7.5 mg until individual responses are determined.
Triamcinolone Acetonide...

Triamcinolone Acetonide

2.1 Administration Information

Administer gabapentin capsules orally with or without food.

Gabapentin capsules should be swallowed whole with water.

If the gabapentin capsules dose is reduced, discontinued, or substituted with an alternative medication, this should be done gradually over a minimum of 1 week (a longer period may be needed at the discretion of the prescriber).

2.2 Dosage for Postherpetic Neuralgia

In adults with postherpetic neuralgia, gabapentin capsules may be initiated on Day 1 as a single 300 mg dose, on Day 2 as 600 mg/day (300 mg two times a day), and on Day 3 as 900 mg/day (300 mg three times a day). The dose can subsequently be titrated up as needed for pain relief to a dose of 1800 mg/day (600 mg three times a day). In clinical studies, efficacy was demonstrated over a range of doses from 1800 mg/day to 3600 mg/day with comparable effects across the dose range; however, in these clinical studies, the additional benefit of using doses greater than 1800 mg/day was not demonstrated.

2.3 Dosage for Epilepsy with Partial Onset Seizures

Patients 12 Years of Age and Above

The starting dose is 300 mg three times a day. The recommended maintenance dose of gabapentin capsules is 300 mg to 600 mg three times a day. Dosages up to 2400 mg/day have been well tolerated in long-term clinical studies. Doses of 3600 mg/day have also been administered to a small number of patients for a relatively short duration, and have been well tolerated. Administer gabapentin capsules three times a day using 300 mg or 400 mg capsules. The maximum time between doses should not exceed 12 hours.

Pediatric Patients Age 3 to 11 Years

The starting dose range is 10 mg/kg/day to 15 mg/kg/day, given in three divided doses, and the recommended maintenance dose reached by upward titration over a period of approximately 3 days. The recommended maintenance dose of gabapentin capsules in patients 3 to 4 years of age is 40 mg/kg/day, given in three divided doses. The recommended maintenance dose of gabapentin capsules in patients 5 to 11 years of age is 25 mg/kg/day to 35 mg/kg/day, given in three divided doses. Gabapentin may be administered as the oral solution, capsule, or tablet, or using combinations of these formulations. Dosages up to 50 mg/kg/day have been well tolerated in a long-term clinical study. The maximum time interval between doses should not exceed 12 hours.

2.4 Dosage Adjustment in Patients with Renal Impairment

Dosage adjustment in patients 12 years of age and older with renal impairment or undergoing hemodialysis is recommended, as follows (see dosing recommendations above for effective doses in each indication):
Table 1. Gabapentin Capsules Dosage Based on Renal Function TID = Three times a day; BID = Two times a day; QD = Single daily dose * For patients with creatinine clearance < 15 mL/min, reduce daily dose in proportion to creatinine clearance (e.g., patients with a creatinine clearance of 7.5 mL/min should receive one-half the daily dose that patients with a creatinine clearance of 15 mL/min receive). † Patients on hemodialysis should receive maintenance doses based on estimates of creatinine clearance as indicated in the upper portion of the table and a supplemental post-hemodialysis dose administered after each 4 hours of hemodialysis as indicated in the lower portion of the table.
Renal Function

Creatinine Clearance

(mL/min)

Total Daily

Dose Range

(mg/day)

Dose Regimen

(mg)

≥ 60

900 to 3600

300 TID

400 TID

600 TID

800 TID

1200 TID

> 30 to 59

400 to 1400

200 BID

300 BID

400 BID

500 BID

700 BID

> 15 to 29

200 to 700

200 QD

300 QD

400 QD

500 QD

700 QD

15*

100 to 300

100 QD

125 QD

150 QD

200 QD

300 QD

Post-Hemodialysis Supplemental Dose (mg)†

Hemodialysis

125†

150†

200†

250†

350†

Creatinine clearance (CLCr) is difficult to measure in outpatients. In patients with stable renal function, creatinine clearance can be reasonably well estimated using the equation of Cockcroft and Gault:

The use of gabapentin capsules in patients less than 12 years of age with compromised renal function has not been studied.

2.5 Dosage in Elderly

Because elderly patients are more likely to have decreased renal function, care should be taken in dose selection, and dose should be adjusted based on creatinine clearance values in these patients.
Clindamycin Hydrochlori...

Clindamycin Hydrochloride

If significant diarrhea occurs during therapy, this antibiotic should be discontinued (see WARNING box).

Adults

Serious infections - 150 mg to 300 mg every 6 hours. More severe infections - 300 mg to 450 mg every 6 hours.

Pediatric Patients

Serious infections - 8 to 16 mg/kg/day (4 to 8 mg/lb/day) divided into three or four equal doses. More severe infections - 16 to 20 mg/kg/day (8 to 10 mg/lb/day) divided into three or four equal doses.

To avoid the possibility of esophageal irritation, clindamycin hydrochloride capsules should be taken with a full glass of water.

Serious infections due to anaerobic bacteria are usually treated with clindamycin injection. However, in clinically appropriate circumstances, the physician may elect to initiate treatment or continue treatment with clindamycin hydrochloride capsules.

In cases of β-hemolytic streptococcal infections, treatment should continue for at least 10 days.
Cyclobenzaprine Hydroch...

Cyclobenzaprine Hydrochloride

2.1 Epilepsy

Divalproex sodium delayed-release capsules are administered orally. As divalproex sodium dosage is titrated upward, concentrations of clonazepam, diazepam, ethosuximide, lamotrigine, tolbutamide, phenobarbital, carbamazepine, and/or phenytoin may be affected [see Drug Interactions (7.2)].

Complex Partial Seizures

For adults and children 10 years of age or older.

Monotherapy (Initial Therapy)

Divalproex sodium delayed-release capsules have not been systematically studied as initial therapy. Patients should initiate therapy at 10 to 15 mg/kg/day. The dosage should be increased by 5 to 10 mg/kg/week to achieve optimal clinical response. Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 60 mg/kg/day. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50 to 100 mcg/mL). No recommendation regarding the safety of valproate for use at doses above 60 mg/kg/day can be made.

The probability of thrombocytopenia increases significantly at total trough valproate plasma concentrations above 110 mcg/mL in females and 135 mcg/mL in males. The benefit of improved seizure control with higher doses should be weighed against the possibility of a greater incidence of adverse reactions.

Conversion to Monotherapy

Patients should initiate therapy at 10 to 15 mg/kg/day. The dosage should be increased by 5 to 10 mg/kg/week to achieve optimal clinical response. Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 60 mg/kg/day. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50 to 100 mcg/mL). No recommendation regarding the safety of valproate for use at doses above 60 mg/kg/day can be made.

Concomitant antiepilepsy drug (AED) dosage can ordinarily be reduced by approximately 25% every 2 weeks. This reduction may be started at initiation of divalproex sodium therapy, or delayed by 1 to 2 weeks if there is a concern that seizures are likely to occur with a reduction. The speed and duration of withdrawal of the concomitant AED can be highly variable, and patients should be monitored closely during this period for increased seizure frequency.

Adjunctive Therapy

Divalproex sodium delayed-release capsules may be added to the patient's regimen at a dosage of 10 to 15 mg/kg/day. The dosage may be increased by 5 to 10 mg/kg/week to achieve optimal clinical response. Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 60 mg/kg/day. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50 to 100 mcg/mL). No recommendation regarding the safety of valproate for use at doses above 60 mg/kg/day can be made. If the total daily dose exceeds 250 mg, it should be given in divided doses.

In a study of adjunctive therapy for complex partial seizures in which patients were receiving either carbamazepine or phenytoin in addition to valproate, no adjustment of carbamazepine or phenytoin dosage was needed [see Clinical Studies (14)]. However, since valproate may interact with these or other concurrently administered AEDs as well as other drugs, periodic plasma concentration determinations of concomitant AEDs are recommended during the early course of therapy [see Drug Interactions (7)].

Simple and Complex Absence Seizures

The recommended initial dose is 15 mg/kg/day, increasing at one week intervals by 5 to 10 mg/kg/day until seizures are controlled or side effects preclude further increases. The maximum recommended dosage is 60 mg/kg/day. If the total daily dose exceeds 250 mg, it should be given in divided doses.

A good correlation has not been established between daily dose, serum concentrations, and therapeutic effect. However, therapeutic valproate serum concentrations for most patients with absence seizures are considered to range from 50 to 100 mcg/mL. Some patients may be controlled with lower or higher serum concentrations [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

As the divalproex sodium dosage is titrated upward, blood concentrations of phenobarbital and/or phenytoin may be affected [see Drug Interactions (7.2)].

Antiepilepsy drugs should not be abruptly discontinued in patients in whom the drug is administered to prevent major seizures because of the strong possibility of precipitating status epilepticus with attendant hypoxia and threat to life.

In epileptic patients previously receiving valproic acid therapy, divalproex sodium delayed-release capsules should be initiated at the same daily dose and dosing schedule. After the patient is stabilized on divalproex sodium delayed-release capsules, a dosing schedule of 2 or 3 times a day may be elected in selected patients.

2.2 General Dosing Advice

Dosing in Elderly Patients

Due to a decrease in unbound clearance of valproate and possibly a greater sensitivity to somnolence in the elderly, the starting dose should be reduced in these patients. Dosage should be increased more slowly and with regular monitoring for fluid and nutritional intake, dehydration, somnolence, and other adverse reactions. Dose reductions or discontinuation of valproate should be considered in patients with decreased food or fluid intake and in patients with excessive somnolence. The ultimate therapeutic dose should be achieved on the basis of both tolerability and clinical response [see Warnings and Precautions (5.14), Use in Specific Populations (8.5) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Dose Related Adverse Reactions

The frequency of adverse effects (particularly elevated liver enzymes and thrombocytopenia) may be dose related. The probability of thrombocytopenia appears to increase significantly at total valproate concentrations of ≥ 110 mcg/mL (females) or ≥ 135 mcg/mL (males) [see Warnings and Precautions (5.8)].The benefit of improved therapeutic effect with higher doses should be weighed against the possibility of a greater incidence of adverse reactions.

G.I. Irritation

Patients who experience G.I. irritation may benefit from administration of the drug with food or by slowly building up the dose from an initial low level.

Administration of Sprinkle Capsules

Divalproex sodium delayed-release capsules may be swallowed whole or may be administered by carefully opening the capsule and sprinkling the entire contents on a small amount (teaspoonful) of soft food such as applesauce or pudding. The drug/food mixture should be swallowed immediately (avoid chewing) and not stored for future use. Each capsule is oversized to allow ease of opening.
Ibuprofen

Ibuprofen

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of indomethacin and other treatment options before deciding to use indomethacin. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with indomethacin, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient’s needs.

Indomethacin is available as 25 mg capsules.

Adverse reactions appear to correlate with the size of the dose of indomethacin in most patients but not all. Therefore, every effort should be made to determine the smallest effective dosage for the individual patient.

Pediatric Use

Indomethacin ordinarily should not be prescribed for pediatric patients 14 years of age and under (see WARNINGS).

Adult Use

Dosage Recommendations for Active Stages of the Following:

1. Moderate to severe rheumatoid arthritis including acute flares of chronic disease; moderate to severe ankylosing spondylitis; and moderate to severe osteoarthritis.

Suggested Dosage: Indomethacin capsules 25 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d. If this is well tolerated, increase the daily dosage by 25 mg or by 50 mg, if required by continuing symptoms, at weekly intervals until a satisfactory response is obtained or until a total daily dose of 150 mg to 200 mg is reached. DOSES ABOVE THIS AMOUNT GENERALLY DO NOT INCREASE THE EFFECTIVENESS OF THE DRUG.

In patients who have persistent night pain and/or morning stiffness, the giving of a large portion, up to a maximum of 100 mg, of the total daily dose at bedtime may be helpful in affording relief. The total daily dose should not exceed 200 mg. In acute flares of chronic rheumatoid arthritis, it may be necessary to increase the dosage by 25 mg or, if required, by 50 mg daily.

If minor adverse effects develop as the dosage is increased, reduce the dosage rapidly to a tolerated dose and OBSERVE THE PATIENT CLOSELY.

If severe adverse reactions occur, STOP THE DRUG. After the acute phase of the disease is under control, an attempt to reduce the daily dose should be made repeatedly until the patient is receiving the smallest effective dose or the drug is discontinued.

Careful instructions to, and observations of, the individual patient are essential to the prevention of serious, irreversible, including fatal, adverse reactions.

As advancing years appear to increase the possibility of adverse reactions, indomethacin should be used with greater care in the elderly (see PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).

2. Acute painful shoulder (bursitis and/or tendinitis).

Initial Dose: 75 mg to 150 mg daily in 3 or 4 divided doses. The drug should be discontinued after the signs and symptoms of inflammation have been controlled for several days. The usual course of therapy is 7 to 14 days.

3. Acute gouty arthritis.

Suggested Dosage: Indomethacin capsules 50 mg t.i.d. until pain is tolerable. The dose should then be rapidly reduced to complete cessation of the drug. Definite relief of pain has been reported within 2 to 4 hours. Tenderness and heat usually subside in 24 to 36 hours, and swelling gradually disappears in 3 to 5 days.
Zolmitriptan

Zolmitriptan

2.1 Dosing Information

The recommended starting dose of zolmitriptan tablets is 1.25 mg or 2.5 mg. The 1.25 mg dose can be achieved by manually breaking the functionally-scored 2.5 mg tablet in half. The maximum recommended single dose of zolmitriptan tablets is 5 mg.

In controlled clinical trials, a greater proportion of patients had headache response following a 2.5 mg or 5 mg dose than following a 1 mg dose. There was little added benefit from the 5 mg dose compared to the 2.5 mg dose, but adverse reactions were more frequent with the 5 mg dose.

If the migraine has not resolved by 2 hours after taking zolmitriptan tablets, or returns after a transient improvement, a second dose may be administered at least 2 hours after the first dose. The maximum daily dose is 10 mg in any 24-hour period.

The safety of zolmitriptan tablets in the treatment of an average of more than three migraines in a 30-day period has not been established.

2.3 Dosing in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

The recommended dose of zolmitriptan tablets in patients with moderate to severe hepatic impairment is 1.25 mg (one-half of one 2.5 mg zolmitriptan tablet) because of increased zolmitriptan blood levels in these patients and elevation of blood pressure in some of these patients. Limit the total daily dose in patients with severe hepatic impairment to no more than 5 mg per day.

2.4 Dosing in Patients Taking Cimetidine

If zolmitriptan tablets are coadministered with cimetidine, limit the maximum single dose of zolmitriptan tablets to 2.5 mg, not to exceed 5 mg in any 24-hour period [see Drug Interactions (7.5), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Fenofibrate

Fenofibrate

2.1 General Considerations

Patients should be placed on an appropriate lipid-lowering diet before receiving fenofibrate tablets and should continue this diet during treatment with fenofibrate tablets. Fenofibrate tablets can be given without regard to meals.

The initial treatment for dyslipidemia is dietary therapy specific for the type of lipoprotein abnormality. Excess body weight and excess alcoholic intake may be important factors in hypertriglyceridemia and should be addressed prior to any drug therapy. Physical exercise can be an important ancillary measure. Diseases contributory to hyperlipidemia, such as hypothyroidism or diabetes mellitus should be looked for and adequately treated. Estrogen therapy, thiazide diuretics and beta-blockers, are sometimes associated with massive rises in plasma triglycerides, especially in subjects with familial hypertriglyceridemia. In such cases, discontinuation of the specific etiologic agent may obviate the need for specific drug therapy of hypertriglyceridemia.

Lipid levels should be monitored periodically and consideration should be given to reducing the dosage of fenofibrate tablets if lipid levels fall significantly below the targeted range.

Therapy should be withdrawn in patients who do not have an adequate response after 2 months of treatment with the maximum recommended dose of 145 mg once daily.

2.2 Primary Hypercholesterolemia or Mixed Dyslipidemia

The initial dose of fenofibrate tablets is 145 mg once daily.

2.3 Severe Hypertriglyceridemia

The initial dose is 48 mg to 145 mg per day. Dosage should be individualized according to patient response and should be adjusted if necessary following repeat lipid determinations at 4 to 8 week intervals. The maximum dose is 145 mg once daily.

2.4 Impaired Renal Function

Treatment with fenofibrate tablets should be initiated at a dose of 48 mg per day in patients having mild to moderately impaired renal function and increased only after evaluation of the effects on renal function and lipid levels at this dose. The use of fenofibrate tablets should be avoided in patients with severe renal impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.5 Geriatric Patients

Dose selection for the elderly should be made on the basis of renal function [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].
Ketorolac Tromethamine

Ketorolac Tromethamine

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of ketorolac tromethamine and other treatment options before deciding to use ketorolac tromethamine. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals. In adults, the combined duration of use of IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine and ketorolac tromethamine tablets is not to exceed 5 days. In adults, the use of ketorolac tromethamine tablets is only indicated as continuation therapy to IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine.

Transition from IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine (single- or multiple-dose) to multiple-dose ketorolac tromethamine tablets:

Patients age 17 to 64: 20 mg PO once followed by 10 mg q4 to 6 hours prn not >40 mg/day

Patients age ≥65, renally impaired, and/or weight <50 kg (110 lbs): 10 mg PO once followed by 10 mg q4 to 6 hours prn not >40 mg/day

Note:

Oral formulation should not be given as an initial dose

Use minimum effective dose for the individual patient

Do not shorten dosing interval of 4 to 6 hours

Total duration of treatment in adult patients: the combined duration of use of IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine and ketorolac tromethamine tablets is not to exceed 5 days.

The following table summarizes ketorolac tromethamine tablets dosing instructions in terms of age group:
Table 4 Summary of Dosing Instructions
Patient Population

Ketorolac Tromethamine Tablets (following IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine)

Age < 17 years

Oral not approved

Adult Age 17 to 64 years

20 mg once, then 10 mg q4 to 6hours prn not > 40 mg/day

Adult Age ≥ 65 years,renally impaired and/or weight <50 kg

10 mg once, then 10 mg q4 to 6hours prn not > 40 mg/day
Zolpidem Tartrate

Zolpidem Tartrate

2.1 Adults

The recommended starting dose for fluvoxamine maleate tablets in adult patients is 50 mg, administered as a single daily dose at bedtime. In the controlled clinical trials establishing the effectiveness of fluvoxamine maleate tablets in OCD, patients were titrated within a dose range of 100 to 300 mg/day. Consequently, the dose should be increased in 50 mg increments every 4 to 7 days, as tolerated, until maximum therapeutic benefit is achieved, not to exceed 300 mg per day. It is advisable that a total daily dose of more than 100 mg should be given in two divided doses. If the doses are not equal, the larger dose should be given at bedtime.

2.2 Pediatric Population (children and adolescents)

The recommended starting dose for fluvoxamine maleate tablets in pediatric populations (ages 8 to 17 years) is 25 mg, administered as a single daily dose at bedtime. In a controlled clinical trial establishing the effectiveness of fluvoxamine maleate tablets in OCD, pediatric patients (ages 8 to 17) were titrated within a dose range of 50 to 200 mg/day. Physicians should consider age and gender differences when dosing pediatric patients. The maximum dose in children up to age 11 should not exceed 200 mg/day. Therapeutic effect in female children may be achieved with lower doses. Dose adjustment in adolescents (up to the adult maximum dose of 300 mg) may be indicated to achieve therapeutic benefit. The dose should be increased in 25 mg increments every 4 to 7 days, as tolerated, until maximum therapeutic benefit is achieved. It is advisable that a total daily dose of more than 50 mg should be given in two divided doses. If the two divided doses are not equal, the larger dose should be given at bedtime.

2.3 Elderly or Hepatically Impaired Patients

Elderly patients and those with hepatic impairment have been observed to have a decreased clearance of fluvoxamine maleate. Consequently, it may be appropriate to modify the initial dose and the subsequent dose titration for these patient groups.

2.4 Pregnant Women During the Third Trimester

Neonates exposed to fluvoxamine maleate tablets and other SSRIs or SNRIs late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding and may be at risk for persistent pulmonary hypertension of the newborn (PPHN) [see Use in Specific Populations (8.1)]. When treating pregnant women with fluvoxamine maleate tablets during the third trimester, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and benefits of treatment.

2.5 Switching a Patient to or from a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with fluvoxamine maleate tablets. Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping fluvoxamine maleate tablets before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders [see Contraindications (4.2)].

2.6 Use of Fluvoxamine Maleate Tablets with Other MAOIs such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start fluvoxamine maleate tablets in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered [see Contraindications (4.2)].

In some cases, a patient already receiving fluvoxamine maleate tablets therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, fluvoxamine maleate tablets should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with fluvoxamine maleate tablets may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with fluvoxamine maleate tablets is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

2.7 Maintenance/Continuation Extended Treatment

It is generally agreed that obsessive compulsive disorder requires several months or longer of sustained pharmacologic therapy. The benefit of maintaining patients with OCD on fluvoxamine maleate tablets after achieving a response for an average duration of about 4 weeks in a 10-week single-blind phase during which patients were titrated to effect was demonstrated in a controlled trial [see Clinical Trials (14.2)]. The physician who elects to use fluvoxamine maleate tablets for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

2.8 Discontinuation of Treatment with Fluvoxamine Maleate Tablets

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of other SSRIs or SNRIs have been reported [see Warnings and Precautions (5.9)]. Patients should be monitored for these symptoms when discontinuing treatment. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, then resuming the previously prescribed dose may be considered. Subsequently, the physician may continue decreasing the dose but at a more gradual rate.
Acyclovir Capsule Acycl...

Acyclovir Capsule Acyclovir

Acute Treatment of Herpes Zoster

800 mg every 4 hours orally, 5 times daily for 7 to 10 days.

Genital Herpes

Treatment of Initial Genital Herpes

200 mg every 4 hours, 5 times daily for 10 days.

Chronic Suppressive Therapy for Recurrent Disease

400 mg 2 times daily for up to 12 months, followed by reevaluation. Alternative regimens have included doses ranging from 200 mg 3 times daily to 200 mg 5 times daily.

The frequency and severity of episodes of untreated genital herpes may change over time. After one year of therapy, the frequency and severity of the patient’s genital herpes infection should be reevaluated to assess the need for continuation of therapy with acyclovir.

Intermittent Therapy

200 mg every 4 hours, 5 times daily for 5 days. Therapy should be initiated at the earliest sign or symptom (prodrome) of recurrence.

Treatment of Chickenpox

Children (2 Years of Age and Older)

20 mg/kg per dose orally 4 times daily (80 mg/kg/day) for 5 days. Children over 40 kg should receive the adult dose for chickenpox.

Adults and Children Over 40 kg

800 mg 4 times daily for 5 days.

Intravenous acyclovir is indicated for the treatment of varicella-zoster infections in immunocompromised patients.

When therapy is indicated, it should be initiated at the earliest sign or symptom of chickenpox. There is no information about the efficacy of therapy initiated more than 24 hours after onset of signs and symptoms.

Patients with Acute or Chronic Renal Impairment

In patients with renal impairment, the dose of acyclovir tablets should be modified as shown in Table 3:
Table 3: Dosage Modification for Renal Impairment
Normal Dosage Regimen

CreatinineClearance(mL/min/1.73m2)

Adjusted Dosage Regimen

Dose (mg)

Dosing Interval

200 mg every 4 hours

> 100 to 10

200200

every 4 hours, 5x dailyevery 12 hours

400 mg every 12 hours

> 100 to 10

400200

every 12 hoursevery 12 hours

800 mg every 4 hours

> 2510 to 250 to 10

800800800

every 4 hours, 5x dailyevery 8 hoursevery 12 hours

Hemodialysis

For patients who require hemodialysis, the mean plasma half-life of acyclovir during hemodialysis is approximately 5 hours. This results in a 60% decrease in plasma concentrations following a 6 hour dialysis period. Therefore, the patient’s dosing schedule should be adjusted so that an additional dose is administered after each dialysis.

Peritoneal Dialysis

No supplemental dose appears to be necessary after adjustment of the dosing interval.

Bioequivalence of Dosage Forms

Acyclovir suspension was shown to be bioequivalent to acyclovir capsules (n = 20) and one acyclovir 800 mg tablet was shown to be bioequivalent to four 200 mg capsules (n = 24).
Hydroxychloroquine Sulf...

Hydroxychloroquine Sulfate

Dosage and Administration

One tablet of 200 mg of hydroxychloroquine sulfate is equivalent to 155 mg base.

Malaria

Suppression

In adults, 400 mg (= 310 mg base) on exactly the same day of each week. In infants and children, the weekly suppressive dosage is 5 mg, calculated as base, per kg of body weight, but should not exceed the adult dose regardless of weight.

If circumstances permit, suppressive therapy should begin 2 weeks prior to exposure. However, failing this, in adults an initial double (loading) dose of 800 mg (= 620 mg base), or in children 10 mg base/kg may be taken in two divided doses, 6 hours apart. The suppressive therapy should be continued for 8 weeks after leaving the endemic area.

Treatment Of The Acute Attack

In adults, an initial dose of 800 mg (= 620 mg base) followed by 400 mg (= 310 mg base) in 6 to 8 hours and 400 mg (= 310 mg base) on each of two consecutive days (total 2 g hydroxychloroquine sulfate or 1.55 g base). An alternative method, employing a single-dose of 800 mg (= 620 mg base), has also proved effective.

The dosage for adults may also be calculated on the basis of body weight; this method is preferred for infants and children. A total dose representing 25 mg of base per kg of body weight is administered in 3 days, as follows:

First dose: 10 mg base per kg (but not exceeding a single-dose of 620 mg base).

Second dose: 5 mg base per kg (but not exceeding a single-dose of 310 mg base) 6 hours after first dose.

Third dose: 5 mg base per kg 18 hours after second dose.

Fourth dose: 5 mg base per kg 24 hours after third dose.

For radical cure of vivax and malariae malaria concomitant therapy with an 8-aminoquinoline compound is necessary.
Ipratropium Bromide Sol...

Ipratropium Bromide Solution

The usual dosage of ipratropium bromide inhalation solution is 500 mcg (1 Unit-Dose Vial) administered three to four times a day by oral nebulization, with doses 6 to 8 hours apart. Ipratropium bromide inhalation solution unit-dose vials contain 500 mcg ipratropium bromide, USP anhydrous in 2.5 mL normal saline. Ipratropium bromide inhalation solution can be mixed in the nebulizer with albuterol or metaproterenol if used within one hour. Drug stability and safety of Ipratropium Bromide Inhalation Solution when mixed with other drugs in a nebulizer have not been established.
Albuterol Sulfate Solut...

Albuterol Sulfate Solution

Adults and Children 2 to 12 Years of Age

The usual dosage for adults and for children weighing at least 15 kg is 2.5 mg of albuterol (one vial) administered three to four times daily by nebulization. Children weighing < 15 kg who require < 2.5 mg/dose (i.e., less than a full vial) should use albuterol inhalation solution, 0.5% instead of albuterol inhalation solution, 0.083%. More frequent administration or higher doses are not recommended. To administer 2.5 mg of albuterol, administer the entire contents of one sterile unit dose vial (3 mL of 0.083% inhalation solution) by nebulization. The flow rate is regulated to suit the particular nebulizer so that albuterol inhalation solution will be delivered over approximately 5 to 15 minutes.

The use of albuterol sulfate inhalation solution can be continued as medically indicated to control recurring bouts of bronchospasm. During this time most patients gain optimum benefit from regular use of the inhalation solution.

If a previously effective dosage regimen fails to provide the usual relief, medical advice should be sought immediately, as this is often a sign of seriously worsening asthma which would require reassessment of therapy.
Bupropion Hydrochloride...

Bupropion Hydrochloride

DO NOT EXCEED RECOMMENDED DOSAGE.

Adults

The recommended initial dosage is two tablets four times daily (20 mg per day). Most patients will require this dosage until initial control has been achieved, after which the dosage may be reduced to meet individual requirements. Control may often be maintained with as little as 5 mg (two tablets) daily.

Clinical improvement of acute diarrhea is usually observed within 48 hours. If clinical improvement of chronic diarrhea after treatment with a maximum daily dose of 20 mg of diphenoxylate hydrochloride is not observed within 10 days, symptoms are unlikely to be controlled by further administration.

Children

Diphenoxylate hydrochloride and atropine sulfate tablets are not recommended in children under 2 years of age and should be used with special caution in young children (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS). The nutritional status and degree of dehydration must be considered. In children under 13 years of age, use oral solution. Do not use tablets for this age group.

KEEP THIS AND ALL MEDICATIONS OUT OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN.
Methotrexate

Methotrexate

Neoplastic Diseases

Oral administration in tablet form is often preferred when low doses are being administered since absorption is rapid and effective serum levels are obtained.

Choriocarcinoma and Similar Trophoblastic Diseases

Methotrexate is administered orally or intramuscularly in doses of 15 mg to 30 mg daily for a 5-day course. Such courses are usually repeated for 3 to 5 times as required, with rest periods of one or more weeks interposed between courses, until any manifesting toxic symptoms subside. The effectiveness of therapy is ordinarily evaluated by 24 hour quantitative analysis of urinary chorionic gonadotropin (hCG), which should return to normal or less than 50 IU/24 hr usually after the third or fourth course and usually be followed by a complete resolution of measurable lesions in 4 to 6 weeks. One to two courses of methotrexate after normalization of hCG is usually recommended. Before each course of the drug careful clinical assessment is essential. Cyclic combination therapy of methotrexate with other antitumor drugs has been reported as being useful.

Since hydatidiform mole may precede choriocarcinoma, prophylactic chemotherapy with methotrexate has been recommended.

Chorioadenoma destruens is considered to be an invasive form of hydatidiform mole. Methotrexate is administered in these disease states in doses similar to those recommended for choriocarcinoma.

Leukemia

Acute lymphoblastic leukemia in pediatric patients and young adolescents is the most responsive to present day chemotherapy. In young adults and older patients, clinical remission is more difficult to obtain and early relapse is more common.

Methotrexate alone or in combination with steroids was used initially for induction of remission in acute lymphoblastic leukemias. More recently corticosteroid therapy, in combination with other antileukemic drugs or in cyclic combinations with methotrexate included, has appeared to produce rapid and effective remissions. When used for induction, methotrexate in doses of 3.3 mg/m2 in combination with 60 mg/m2 of prednisone, given daily, produced remissions in 50% of patients treated, usually within a period of 4 to 6 weeks. Methotrexate in combination with other agents appears to be the drug of choice for securing maintenance of drug-induced remissions. When remission is achieved and supportive care has produced general clinical improvement, maintenance therapy is initiated, as follows: Methotrexate is administered 2 times weekly either by mouth or intramuscularly in total weekly doses of 30 mg/m2. It has also been given in doses of 2.5 mg/kg intravenously every 14 days. If and when relapse does occur, reinduction of remission can again usually be obtained by repeating the initial induction regimen.

A variety of combination chemotherapy regimens have been used for both induction and maintenance therapy in acute lymphoblastic leukemia. The physician should be familiar with the new advances in antileukemic therapy.

Lymphomas

In Burkitt’s tumor, Stages I-II, methotrexate has produced prolonged remissions in some cases. Recommended dosage is 10 to 25 mg/day orally for 4 to 8 days. In Stage III, methotrexate is commonly given concomitantly with other antitumor agents. Treatment in all stages usually consists of several courses of the drug interposed with 7 to 10 day rest periods. Lymphosarcomas in Stage III may respond to combined drug therapy with methotrexate given in doses of 0.625 to 2.5 mg/kg daily.

Mycosis Fungoides (cutaneous T cell lymphoma)

Therapy with methotrexate as a single agent appears to produce clinical responses in up to 50% of patients treated. Dosage in early stages is usually 5 mg to 50 mg once weekly. Dose reduction or cessation is guided by patient response and hematologic monitoring. Methotrexate has also been administered twice weekly in doses ranging from 15 mg to 37.5 mg in patients who have responded poorly to weekly therapy.

Psoriasis, Rheumatoid Arthritis, and Juvenile Rheumatoid Arthritis

Adult Rheumatoid Arthritis

Recommended Starting Dosage Schedules
1. Single oral doses of 7.5 mg once weekly. 2. Divided oral dosages of 2.5 mg at 12 hour intervals for three doses given as a course once weekly.
Polyarticular-Course Juvenile Rheumatoid Arthritis

The recommended starting dose is 10 mg/m2 given once weekly.

For either adult RA or polyarticular-course JRA dosages may be adjusted gradually to achieve an optimal response. Limited experience shows a significant increase in the incidence and severity of serious toxic reactions, especially bone marrow suppression, at doses greater than 20 mg/wk in adults. Although there is experience with doses up to 30 mg/m2/wk in children, there are too few published data to assess how doses over 20 mg/m2/wk might affect the risk of serious toxicity in children. Experience does suggest, however, that children receiving 20 to 30 mg/m2/wk (0.65 to 1.0 mg/kg/wk) may have better absorption and fewer gastrointestinal side effects if methotrexate is administered either intramuscularly or subcutaneously.

Therapeutic response usually begins within 3 to 6 weeks and the patient may continue to improve for another 12 weeks or more.

The optimal duration of therapy is unknown. Limited data available from long-term studies in adults indicate that the initial clinical improvement is maintained for at least 2 years with continued therapy. When methotrexate is discontinued, the arthritis usually worsens within 3 to 6 weeks.

The patient should be fully informed of the risks involved and should be under constant supervision of the physician. (See PRECAUTIONS: Information for Patients.) Assessment of hematologic, hepatic, renal, and pulmonary function should be made by history, physical examination, and laboratory tests before beginning, periodically during, and before reinstituting methotrexate therapy. (See PRECAUTIONS.) Appropriate steps should be taken to avoid conception during methotrexate therapy. (See PRECAUTIONS and CONTRAINDICATIONS.)

All schedules should be continually tailored to the individual patient. An initial test dose may be given prior to the regular dosing schedule to detect any extreme sensitivity to adverse effects. (See ADVERSE REACTIONS.) Maximal myelosuppression usually occurs in 7 to 10 days.

Psoriasis

Recommended Starting Dose Schedule
1. Weekly single oral, IM or IV dose schedule: 10 mg to 25 mg per week until adequate response is achieved. 2. Divided oral dose schedule: 2.5 mg at 12 hour intervals for three doses.
Dosages in each schedule may be gradually adjusted to achieve optimal clinical response; 30 mg/week should not ordinarily be exceeded.

Once optimal clinical response has been achieved, each dosage schedule should be reduced to the lowest possible amount of drug and to the longest possible rest period. The use of methotrexate may permit the return to conventional topical therapy, which should be encouraged.
Kids Irritated Eye Reli...

Kids Irritated Eye Relief

Buprenorphine hydrochloride sublingual tablets are administered sublingually as a single daily dose. Buprenorphine hydrochloride sublingual tablets contain no naloxone and are preferred for use only during induction. Following induction, buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual film or buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual tablets are preferred due to the presence of naloxone when clinical use includes unsupervised administration. The use of buprenorphine hydrochloride sublingual tablets for unsupervised administration should be limited to those patients who cannot tolerate buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual film or buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual tablets; for example, those patients who have been shown to be hypersensitive to naloxone.

Medication should be prescribed in consideration of the frequency of visits. Provision of multiple refills is not advised early in treatment or without appropriate patient follow-up visits.

2.1 Induction

Prior to induction, consideration should be given to the type of opioid dependence (i.e., long- or short-acting opioid), the time since last opioid use, and the degree or level of opioid dependence. To avoid precipitating withdrawal, induction with buprenorphine hydrochloride sublingual tablets should be undertaken when objective and clear signs of withdrawal are evident.

It is recommended that an adequate treatment dose, titrated to clinical effectiveness, should be achieved as rapidly as possible. In a one-month study, patients received 8 mg of buprenorphine hydrochloride sublingual tablets on Day 1 and 16 mg buprenorphine hydrochloride sublingual tablets on Day 2. From Day 3 onward, patients received either buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual tablets or buprenorphine hydrochloride sublingual tablets at the same buprenorphine dose as Day 2 based on their assigned treatment. Induction in the studies of buprenorphine solution was accomplished over 3 to 4 days, depending on the target dose. In some studies, gradual induction over several days led to a high rate of drop-out of buprenorphine patients during the induction period.

Patients taking heroin or other short-acting opioids

At treatment initiation, the dose of buprenorphine hydrochloride sublingual tablets should be administered at least 4 hours after the patient last used opioids or preferably when moderate objective signs of opioid withdrawal appear.

Patients on methadone or other long-acting opioids

There is little controlled experience with the transfer of methadone-maintained patients to buprenorphine. Available evidence suggests that withdrawal signs and symptoms are possible during induction onto buprenorphine. Withdrawal appears more likely in patients maintained on higher doses of methadone (> 30 mg) and when the first buprenorphine dose is administered shortly after the last methadone dose. Buprenorphine hydrochloride sublingual tablet dosing should be initiated preferably when moderate objective signs of opioid withdrawal appear.

2.2 Maintenance
• Buprenorphine and naloxone are preferred for maintenance treatment. • Where buprenorphine hydrochloride sublingual tablets are used in maintenance in patients who cannot tolerate the presence of naloxone, the dosage of buprenorphine should be progressively adjusted in increments/decrements of 2 mg or 4 mg buprenorphine to a level that holds the patient in treatment and suppresses opioid withdrawal signs and symptoms. • The maintenance dose is generally in the range of 4 mg to 24 mg buprenorphine per day depending on the individual patient. Doses higher than this have not been demonstrated to provide any clinical advantage.
2.3 Method of Administration

Buprenorphine hydrochloride sublingual tablets should be placed under the tongue until they are dissolved. For doses requiring the use of more than two tablets, patients are advised to either place all the tablets at once or alternatively (if they cannot fit in more than two tablets comfortably), place two tablets at a time under the tongue. Either way, the patients should continue to hold the tablets under the tongue until they dissolve; swallowing the tablets reduces the bioavailability of the drug. To ensure consistency in bioavailability, patients should follow the same manner of dosing with continued use of the product.

Proper administration technique should be demonstrated to the patient.

2.4 Clinical Supervision

Treatment should be initiated with supervised administration, progressing to unsupervised administration as the patient’s clinical stability permits. The use of buprenorphine hydrochloride sublingual tablets for unsupervised administration should be limited to those patients who cannot tolerate buprenorphine and naloxone, for example those patients with known hypersensitivity to naloxone. Buprenorphine and naloxone and buprenorphine hydrochloride are both subject to diversion and abuse. When determining the size of the prescription quantity for unsupervised administration, consider the patient’s level of stability, the security of his or her home situation, and other factors likely to affect the ability of the patient to manage supplies of take-home medication.

Ideally, patients should be seen at reasonable intervals (e.g., at least weekly during the first month of treatment) based upon the individual circumstances of the patient. Medication should be prescribed in consideration of the frequency of visits. Provision of multiple refills is not advised early in treatment or without appropriate patient follow-up visits. Periodic assessment is necessary to determine compliance with the dosing regimen, effectiveness of the treatment plan, and overall patient progress.

Once a stable dosage has been achieved and patient assessment (e.g., urine drug screening) does not indicate illicit drug use, less frequent follow-up visits may be appropriate. A once-monthly visit schedule may be reasonable for patients on a stable dosage of medication who are making progress toward their treatment objectives. Continuation or modification of pharmacotherapy should be based on the physician’s evaluation of treatment outcomes and objectives such as:
1. Absence of medication toxicity. 2. Absence of medical or behavioral adverse effects. 3. Responsible handling of medications by the patient. 4. Patient’s compliance with all elements of the treatment plan (including recovery-oriented activities, psychotherapy, and/or other psychosocial modalities). 5. Abstinence from illicit drug use (including problematic alcohol and/or benzodiazepine use).
If treatment goals are not being achieved, the physician should reevaluate the appropriateness of continuing the current treatment.

2.5 Patients with Hepatic Impairment

Severe Hepatic Impairment

Consider reducing the starting and titration incremental dose by half compared to patients with normal liver function, and monitor for signs and symptoms of toxicity or overdose caused by increased levels of buprenorphine.

Moderate Hepatic Impairment

Although no dose adjustment is necessary for patients with moderate hepatic impairment, buprenorphine hydrochloride sublingual tablets should be used with caution in these patients and prescribers should monitor patients for signs and symptoms of toxicity or overdose caused by increased levels of buprenorphine.

Mild Hepatic Impairment

No clinically significant differences in pharmacokinetic parameters were observed in subjects with mild hepatic impairment. No dose adjustment is needed in patients with mild hepatic impairment [see Warnings and Precautions (5.11)].

2.6 Unstable Patients

Physicians will need to decide when they cannot appropriately provide further management for particular patients. For example, some patients may be abusing or dependent on various drugs, or unresponsive to psychosocial intervention such that the physician does not feel that he/she has the expertise to manage the patient. In such cases, the physician may want to assess whether to refer the patient to a specialist or more intensive behavioral treatment environment. Decisions should be based on a treatment plan established and agreed upon with the patient at the beginning of treatment.

Patients who continue to misuse, abuse, or divert buprenorphine products or other opioids should be provided with, or referred to, more intensive and structured treatment.

2.7 Stopping Treatment

The decision to discontinue therapy with buprenorphine and naloxone or buprenorphine hydrochloride after a period of maintenance should be made as part of a comprehensive treatment plan. Both gradual and abrupt discontinuation of buprenorphine has been used, but the data are insufficient to determine the best method of dose taper at the end of treatment.
Etoposide

Etoposide

Etoposide Capsules

In small cell lung cancer, the recommended dose of etoposide capsules is two times the IV dose rounded to the nearest 50 mg (i.e., Two times 35 mg/m2/day for 4 days to 50 mg/m2/day for 5 days).

The dosage should be modified to take into account the myelosuppressive effects of other drugs in the combination or the effects of prior x-ray therapy or chemotherapy which may have compromised bone marrow reserve.

Stability

Etoposide capsules must be stored under refrigeration 2° to 8°C (36° to 46°F). The capsules are stable for 36 months under such refrigeration conditions.

Procedures for proper handling and disposal of anticancer drugs should be considered. Several guidelines on this subject have been published1-8. There is no general agreement that all of the procedures recommended in the guidelines are necessary or appropriate.
Equate Daytime

Equate Daytime

Amlodipine Besylate and Atorvastatin Calcium Tablets: Dosage of amlodipine besylate and atorvastatin calcium tablets must be individualized on the basis of both effectiveness and tolerance for each individual component in the treatment of hypertension/angina and hyperlipidemia. Select doses of amlodipine and atorvastatin independently.

Amlodipine besylate and atorvastatin calcium tablets may be substituted for their individually titrated components. Patients may be given the equivalent dose of amlodipine besylate and atorvastatin calcium tablets or a dose of amlodipine besylate and atorvastatin calcium tablets with increased amounts of amlodipine, atorvastatin, or both for additional antianginal effects, blood pressure lowering, or lipid-lowering effect.

Amlodipine besylate and atorvastatin calcium tablets may be used to provide additional therapy for patients already on one of its components. Amlodipine besylate and atorvastatin calcium tablets may be used to initiate treatment in patients with hyperlipidemia and either hypertension or angina.

Amlodipine: The usual initial antihypertensive oral dose of amlodipine is 5 mg once daily, and the maximum dose is 10 mg once daily.

Pediatric (age > 6 years), small adult, fragile, or elderly patients, or patients with hepatic insufficiency may be started on 2.5 mg once daily and this dose may be used when adding amlodipine to other antihypertensive therapy.

Adjust dosage according to blood pressure goals. In general, wait 7 to 14 days between titration steps. Titration may proceed more rapidly, however, if clinically warranted, provided the patient is assessed frequently.

Angina: The recommended dose of amlodipine for chronic stable or vasospastic angina is 5 mg to 10 mg, with the lower dose suggested in the elderly and in patients with hepatic insufficiency. Most patients will require 10 mg for adequate effect.

Coronary Artery Disease: The recommended dose range of amlodipine for patients with coronary artery disease is 5 mg to 10 mg once daily. In clinical studies, the majority of patients required 10 mg [see Clinical Studies (14.4)].

Pediatrics: The effective antihypertensive oral dose of amlodipine in pediatric patients ages 6 to 17 years is 2.5 mg to 5 mg once daily. Doses in excess of 5 mg daily have not been studied in pediatric patients [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3), Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Atorvastatin (Hyperlipidemia):Hyperlipidemia (Heterozygous Familial and Nonfamilial) and Mixed Dyslipidemia (Fredrickson Types IIa and IIb): The recommended starting dose of atorvastatin is 10 mg or 20 mg once daily. Patients who require a large reduction in LDL-C (more than 45%) may be started at 40 mg once daily. The dosage range of atorvastatin is 10 to 80 mg once daily. Atorvastatin can be administered as a single dose at any time of the day, with or without food. The starting dose and maintenance doses of atorvastatin should be individualized according to patient characteristics such as goal of therapy and response (see current NCEP Guidelines). After initiation and/or upon titration of atorvastatin, lipid levels should be analyzed within 2 to 4 weeks and dosage adjusted accordingly.

Homozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia: The dosage range of atorvastatin in patients with homozygous FH is 10 mg to 80 mg daily. Atorvastatin should be used as an adjunct to other lipid-lowering treatments (e.g., LDL apheresis) in these patients or if such treatments are unavailable.

Concomitant Lipid-Lowering Therapy: Atorvastatin may be used with bile acid resins. Monitor for signs of myopathy in patients receiving the combination of HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors (statins) and fibrates [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1), Drug Interactions (7)].

Patients with Renal Impairment: Renal disease does not affect the plasma concentrations nor LDL-C reduction of atorvastatin; thus, dosage adjustment in patients with renal dysfunction is not necessary [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Use with Cyclosporine, Clarithromycin, Itraconazole, or Certain Protease Inhibitors: In patients taking cyclosporine or the HIV protease inhibitors (tipranavir plus ritonavir) or the hepatitis C protease inhibitor (telaprevir), avoid therapy with atorvastatin. In patients with HIV taking lopinavir plus ritonavir, use the lowest necessary dose of atorvastatin. In patients taking clarithromycin, itraconazole, or in patients with HIV taking a combination of saquinavir plus ritonavir, darunavir plus ritonavir, fosamprenavir, or fosamprenavir plus ritonavir, limit therapy with atorvastatin to 20 mg, and make appropriate clinical assessment to ensure that the lowest dose necessary of atorvastatin is employed. In patients taking the HIV protease inhibitor nelfinavir or the hepatitis C protease inhibitor boceprevir, limit therapy with atorvastatin to 40 mg, and make appropriate clinical assessment to ensure that the lowest dose necessary of atorvastatin is employed [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1), Drug Interactions (7.13)].

Heterozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia in Pediatric Patients (10 to 17 Years of Age): The recommended starting dose of atorvastatin is 10 mg/day; the maximum recommended dose is 20 mg/day (doses greater than 20 mg have not been studied in this patient population). Doses should be individualized according to the recommended goal of therapy [see current NCEP Pediatric Panel Guidelines1, (References (15)), Clinical Pharmacology (12), and Indications and Usage (1.4)]. Adjustments should be made at intervals of 4 weeks or more.
Perindopril Erbumine

Perindopril Erbumine

Adults

Initiation of Therapy

The usual starting dosage of methyldopa tablets is 250 mg two to three times a day in the first 48 hours. The daily dosage then may be increased or decreased, preferably at intervals of not less than 2 days, until an adequate response is achieved. To minimize the sedation, start dosage increases in the evening. By adjustment of dosage, morning hypotension may be prevented without sacrificing control of afternoon blood pressure.

When methyldopa tablets are given to patients on other antihypertensives, the dose of these agents may need to be adjusted to effect a smooth transition. When methyldopa tablets are given with anti-hypertensives other than thiazides, the initial dosage of methyldopa tablets should be limited to 500 mg daily in divided doses; when methyldopa tablets are added to a thiazide, the dosage of thiazide need not be changed.

Maintenance of Therapy

The usual daily dosage of methyldopa tablets is 500 mg to 2 g in two to four doses. Although occasional patients have responded to higher doses, the maximum recommended daily dosage is 3 g. Once an effective dosage range is attained, a smooth blood pressure response occurs in most patients in 12 to 24 hours. Since methyldopa has a relatively short duration of action, withdrawal is followed by return of hypertension usually within 48 hours. This is not complicated by an overshoot of blood pressure.

Occasionally tolerance may occur, usually between the second and third month of therapy. Adding a diuretic or increasing the dosage of methyldopa frequently will restore effective control of blood pressure. A thiazide may be added at any time during methyldopa therapy and is recommended if therapy has not been started with a thiazide or if effective control of blood pressure cannot be maintained on 2 g of methyldopa daily.

Methyldopa is largely excreted by the kidney and patients with impaired renal function may respond to smaller doses. Syncope in older patients may be related to an increased sensitivity and advanced arteriosclerotic vascular disease. This may be avoided by lower doses.

Pediatric Patients

Initial dosage is based on 10 mg/kg of body weight daily in two to four doses. The daily dosage then is increased or decreased until an adequate response is achieved. The maximum dosage is 65 mg/kg or 3 g daily, whichever is less. (See PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use.)
Nasal Decongestant

Nasal Decongestant

2.1 Required Laboratory Testing Prior to Initiation and During Therapy

Prior to initiating treatment with clozapine orally disintegrating tablets, a baseline ANC must be obtained. The baseline ANC must be at least 1500/μL for the general population, and at least 1000/μL for patients with documented Benign Ethnic Neutropenia (BEN). To continue treatment, the ANC must be monitored regularly [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].

2.2 Important Administration Instructions

Clozapine orally disintegrating tablets should be immediately placed in the mouth after removing the tablet from the blister pack or bottle. The tablet disintegrates rapidly after placement in the mouth. The tablets can be allowed to disintegrate, or they may be chewed. They may be swallowed with saliva. No water is necessary for administration.

The orally disintegrating tablets in a blister pack should be left in the unopened blister until the time of use. Just prior to use, peel the foil from the blister and gently remove the orally disintegrating tablet. Do not push the tablets through the foil, because this could damage the tablet.

2.3 Dosing Information

The starting dose is 12.5 mg once daily or twice daily. The total daily dose can be increased in increments of 25 mg to 50 mg per day, if well-tolerated, to achieve a target dose of 300 mg to 450 mg per day (administered in divided doses) by the end of 2 weeks. Subsequently, the dose can be increased once weekly or twice weekly, in increments of up to 100 mg. The maximum dose is 900 mg per day. To minimize the risk of orthostatic hypotension, bradycardia, and syncope, it is necessary to use this low starting dose, gradual titration schedule, and divided dosages [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].

Clozapine orally disintegrating tablets can be taken with or without food [see Pharmacokinetics (12.3)].

2.4 Maintenance Treatment

Generally, patients responding to clozapine orally disintegrating tablets should continue maintenance treatment on their effective dose beyond the acute episode.

2.5 Discontinuation of Treatment

Method of treatment discontinuation will vary depending on the patient’s last ANC:
• See Tables 2 or 3 for appropriate ANC monitoring based on the level of neutropenia if abrupt treatment discontinuation is necessary because of moderate to severe neutropenia. • Reduce the dose gradually over a period of 1 to 2 weeks if termination of clozapine orally disintegrating tablets therapy is planned and there is no evidence of moderate to severe neutropenia. • For abrupt clozapine discontinuation for a reason unrelated to neutropenia, continuation of the existing ANC monitoring is recommended for general population patients until their ANC is ≥ 1500/μL and for BEN patients until their ANC is ≥ 1000/μL or above their baseline. • Additional ANC monitoring is required for any patient reporting onset of fever (temperature of 38.5°C or 101.3°F, or greater) during the 2 weeks after discontinuation [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)]. • Monitor all patients carefully for the recurrence of psychotic symptoms and symptoms related to cholinergic rebound such as profuse sweating, headache, nausea, vomiting, and diarrhea.
2.6 Re-Initiation of Treatment

When restarting clozapine orally disintegrating tablets in patients who have discontinued clozapine orally disintegrating tablets (i.e., 2 days or more since the last dose), re-initiate with 12.5 mg once daily or twice daily. This is necessary to minimize the risk of hypotension, bradycardia, and syncope [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].If that dose is well-tolerated, the dose may be increased to the previously therapeutic dose more quickly than recommended for initial treatment.

2.7 Dosage Adjustments with Concomitant Use of CYP1A2, CYP2D6, CYP3A4 Inhibitors or CYP1A2, CYP3A4 Inducers

Dose adjustments may be necessary in patients with concomitant use of: strong CYP1A2 inhibitors (e.g., fluvoxamine, ciprofloxacin, or enoxacin); moderate or weak CYP1A2 inhibitors (e.g., oral contraceptives, or caffeine); CYP2D6 or CYP3A4 inhibitors (e.g., cimetidine, escitalopram, erythromycin, paroxetine, bupropion, fluoxetine, quinidine, duloxetine, terbinafine, or sertraline); CYP3A4 inducers (e.g., phenytoin, carbamazepine, St. John’s wort, and rifampin); or CYP1A2 inducers (e.g., tobacco smoking) (Table 1) [see Drug Interactions (7)].
Table 1: Dose Adjustments in Patients Taking Concomitant Medications
Co-medications

Scenarios

Initiating clozapine orally disintegrating tablets while taking a co-medication

Adding a co-medication while taking clozapine orally disintegrating tablets

Discontinuing a co-medication while continuing clozapine orally disintegrating tablets

Strong CYP1A2 Inhibitors

Use one-third of the clozapine orally disintegrating tablets dose.

Increase clozapine orally disintegrating tablets dose based on clinical response.

Moderate or Weak CYP1A2 Inhibitors

Monitor for adverse reactions. Consider reducing the clozapine orally disintegrating tablets dose if necessary.

Monitor for lack of effectiveness. Consider increasing clozapine orally disintegrating tablets dose if necessary.

CYP2D6 or CYP3A4 Inhibitors

Strong CYP3A4 Inducers

Concomitant use is not recommended. However, if the inducer is necessary, it may be necessary to increase the clozapine orally disintegrating tablets dose. Monitor for decreased effectiveness.

Reduce clozapine orally disintegrating tablets dose based on clinical response.

Moderate or Weak CYP1A2 or CYP3A4 Inducers

Monitor for decreased effectiveness. Consider increasing the clozapine orally disintegrating tablets dose if necessary.

Monitor for adverse reactions. Consider reducing the clozapine orally disintegrating tablets dose if necessary.

2.8 Renal or Hepatic Impairment or CYP2D6 Poor Metabolizers

It may be necessary to reduce the clozapine orally disintegrating tablets dose in patients with significant renal or hepatic impairment, or in CYP2D6 poor metabolizers [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6, 8.7)].
Riluzole

Riluzole

The recommended dose for riluzole tablets is 50 mg every 12 hours. No increased benefit can be expected from higher daily doses, but adverse events are increased.

Riluzole tablets should be taken at least an hour before, or 2 hours after, a meal to avoid a food-related decrease in bioavailability.

Special Populations

Patients with Impaired Hepatic Function

see WARNINGS, PRECAUTIONS, CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY.
Fluorouracil

Fluorouracil

When Fluorouracil 5% Topical Cream is applied to a lesion, a response occurs with the following sequence: erythema, usually followed by vesiculation, desquamation, erosion and reepithelialization.

Fluorouracil 5% Topical Cream should be applied preferably with a nonmetal applicator or suitable glove. If Fluorouracil 5% Topical Cream is applied with the fingers, the hands should be washed immediately afterward.

Actinic or Solar Keratosis

Apply cream twice daily in an amount sufficient to cover the lesions. Medication should be continued until the inflammatory response reaches the erosion stage, at which time use of the drug should be terminated. The usual duration of therapy is from 2 to 4 weeks. Complete healing of the lesions may not be evident for 1 to 2 months following cessation of Fluorouracil 5% Topical Cream therapy.

Superficial Basal Cell Carcinomas

Only the 5% strength is recommended. Apply cream twice daily in an amount sufficient to cover the lesions. Treatment should be continued for at least 3 to 6 weeks. Therapy may be required for as long as 10 to 12 weeks before the lesions are obliterated. As in any neoplastic condition, the patient should be followed for a reasonable period of time to determine if a cure has been obtained.
Extra Strength Pain Rel...

Extra Strength Pain Relief Acetaminophen

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of fenoprofen calcium tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use fenoprofen calcium tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with fenoprofen calcium tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

Analgesia

For the treatment of mild to moderate pain, the recommended dosage is 200 mg given orally every 4 to 6 hours, as needed.

Rheumatoid Arthritis and Osteoarthritis

For the relief of signs and symptoms of rheumatoid arthritis or osteoarthritis the recommended dose is 400 mg to 600 mg given orally, 3 or 4 times a day. The dose should be tailored to the needs of the patient and may be increased or decreased depending on the severity of the symptoms. Dosage adjustments may be made after initiation of drug therapy or during exacerbations of the disease. Total daily dosage should not exceed 3200 mg.

Fenoprofen calcium tablets may be administered with meals or with milk. Although the total amount absorbed is not affected, peak blood levels are delayed and diminished.

Patients with rheumatoid arthritis generally seem to require larger doses of fenoprofen calcium tablets than do those with osteoarthritis. The smallest dose that yields acceptable control should be employed.

Although improvement may be seen in a few days in many patients, an additional 2 to 3 weeks may be required to gauge the full benefits of therapy.
Mometasone Furoate Solu...

Mometasone Furoate Solution

Use the lowest effective dose for the patient.

2.1 Dosage in Adults

The recommended starting dose is 1 mg. Dosing can be raised to 2 mg or 3 mg if clinically indicated. In some patients, the higher morning blood levels of eszopiclone tablets following use of the 2 mg or 3 mg dose increase the risk of next day impairment of driving and other activities that require full alertness [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)]. The total dose of eszopiclone tablets should not exceed 3 mg, once daily immediately before bedtime [see Warnings and Precautions (5.6)].

2.2 Geriatric or Debilitated Patients

The total dose of eszopiclone tablets should not exceed 2 mg in elderly or debilitated patients.

2.3 Patients with Severe Hepatic Impairment, or Taking Potent CYP3A4 Inhibitors

In patients with severe hepatic impairment, or in patients coadministered eszopiclone tablets with potent CYP3A4 inhibitors, the total dose of eszopiclone tablets should not exceed 2 mg [see Warnings and Precautions (5.7)].

2.4 Use with CNS Depressants

Dosage adjustments may be necessary when eszopiclone tablets are combined with other CNS depressant drugs because of the potentially additive effects [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].

2.5 Administration with Food

Taking eszopiclone tablets with or immediately after a heavy, high-fat meal results in slower absorption and would be expected to reduce the effect of eszopiclone tablets on sleep latency [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Verapamil Hydrochloride...

Verapamil Hydrochloride Pm

THE CONTENTS OF THE VERAPAMIL HYDROCHLORIDE EXTENDED-RELEASE CAPSULE (PM) SHOULD NOT BE CRUSHED OR CHEWED. VERAPAMIL HYDROCHLORIDE EXTENDED-RELEASE CAPSULES (PM) ARE TO BE SWALLOWED WHOLE OR THE ENTIRE CONTENTS OF THE CAPSULE SPRINKLED ONTO APPLESAUCE.

2.1 Essential Hypertension

Administer verapamil hydrochloride extended-release capsules (PM) once daily at bedtime. Clinical trials studied doses of 100 mg, 200 mg, 300 mg and 400 mg. The usual daily dose of verapamil hydrochloride extended-release capsules (PM) in clinical trials has been 200 mg given by mouth once daily at bedtime. In rare instances, initial doses of 100 mg a day may be warranted in patients who have an increased response to verapamil, [e.g., patients with impaired renal function, impaired hepatic function, elderly, low-weight patients, etc. (see Use in Specific Populations (8.5, 8.6, 8.7))]. Base upward titration on therapeutic efficacy and safety evaluated approximately 24 hours after dosing. The antihypertensive effects of verapamil hydrochloride extended-release capsules (PM) are evident within the first week of therapy.

If an adequate response is not obtained with 200 mg of verapamil hydrochloride extended-release capsules (PM), the dose may be titrated upward in the following manner:
a. 300 mg each evening b. 400 mg each evening (2 x 200 mg)
When verapamil hydrochloride extended-release capsules (PM) are administered at bedtime, office evaluation of blood pressure during morning and early afternoon hours is essentially a measure of peak effect. The usual evaluation of trough effect, which sometimes might be needed to evaluate the appropriateness of any given dose of verapamil hydrochloride extended-release capsules (PM), would be just prior to bedtime.

2.2 Sprinkling the Capsule Contents on Food

Verapamil hydrochloride extended-release capsules (PM) may also be administered by carefully opening the capsule and sprinkling the beads onto one tablespoonful of applesauce. Swallow the applesauce immediately without chewing and follow with a glass of cool water to ensure complete swallowing of the beads. The applesauce used should not be hot, and it should be soft enough to be swallowed without chewing. Use any bead/applesauce mixture immediately and do not store for future use. Absorption of the beads sprinkled onto other foods has not been tested. This method of administration may be beneficial for patients who have difficulty swallowing whole capsules. Subdividing the contents of a verapamil hydrochloride extended-release capsule (PM) is not recommended.
Levonorgestrel And Ethi...

Levonorgestrel And Ethinyl Estradiol

To achieve maximum contraceptive effectiveness, levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets, 0.15 mg/0.03 mg must be taken exactly as directed and at intervals not exceeding 24 hours.

The dosage of levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets is one white to off-white tablet daily for 21 consecutive days, followed by one green inert tablet daily for 7 consecutive days, according to prescribed schedule.

It is recommended that tablets be taken at the same time each day, preferably after the evening meal or at bedtime.

During the first cycle of medication, the patient is instructed to begin taking levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets on the first Sunday after the onset of menstruation. If menstruation begins on a Sunday, the first tablet (white to off-white) is taken that day. One white to off-white tablet should be taken daily for 21 consecutive days, followed by one green inert tablet daily for 7 consecutive days. Withdrawal bleeding should usually occur within three days following discontinuation of white to off-white tablets and may not have finished before the next pack is started. During the first cycle, contraceptive reliance should not be placed on levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets until a white to off-white tablet has been taken daily for 7 consecutive days and a nonhormonal back-up method of birth control should be used during those 7 days. The possibility of ovulation and conception prior to initiation of medication should be considered.

The patient begins her next and all subsequent 28-day courses of tablets on the same day of the week (Sunday) on which she began her first course, following the same schedule: 21 days on white to off-white tablets 7 days on green inert tablets. If in any cycle the patient starts tablets later than the proper day, she should protect herself by using another method of birth control until she has taken a white to off-white tablet daily for 7 consecutive days.

When the patient is switching from a 21-day regimen of tablets, she should wait 7 days after her last tablet before she starts levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets. She will probably experience withdrawal bleeding during that week. She should be sure that no more than 7 days pass after her previous 21-day regimen. When the patient is switching from a 28-day regimen of tablets, she should start her first pack of levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets on the day after her last tablet. She should not wait any days between packs. The patient may switch any day from a progestin-only pill and should begin levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets the next day. If switching from an implant or injection, the patient should start levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets on the day of implant removal or, if using an injection, the day the next injection would be due. In switching from a progestin-only pill, injection or implant, the patient should be advised to use a nonhormonal back-up method of birth control for the first 7 days of tablet-taking.

If spotting or breakthrough bleeding occurs, the patient is instructed to continue on the same regimen. This type of bleeding is usually transient and without significance; however, if the bleeding is persistent or prolonged, the patient is advised to consult her physician. Although the occurrence of pregnancy is highly unlikely if levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets is taken according to directions, if withdrawal bleeding does not occur, the possibility of pregnancy must be considered. If the patient has not adhered to the prescribed schedule (missed one or more tablets or started taking them on a day later than she should have), the probability of pregnancy should be considered at the time of the first missed period and appropriate diagnostic measures taken before the medication is resumed. If the patient has adhered to the prescribed regimen and misses two consecutive periods, pregnancy should be ruled out before continuing the contraceptive regimen.

For additional patient instructions regarding missed pills, see the "WHAT TO DO IF YOU MISS PILLS" section in the DETAILED PATIENT LABELING below.

Any time the patient misses two or more white to off-white tablets, she should also use another method of contraception until she has taken a white to off-white tablet daily for seven consecutive days. If the patient misses one or more green tablets, she is still protected against pregnancy provided she begins taking white to off-white tablets again on the proper day.

If breakthrough bleeding occurs following missed white to off-white tablets, it will usually be transient and of no consequence. While there is little likelihood of ovulation occurring if only one or two white to off-white tablets are missed, the possibility of ovulation increases with each successive day that scheduled white to off-white tablets are missed.

Levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets may be initiated no earlier than day 28 postpartum in the nonlactating mother or after a second-trimester abortion due to the increased risk for thromboembolism (see CONTRAINDICATIONS, WARNINGS, and PRECAUTIONS) concerning thromboembolic disease. The patient should be advised to use a nonhormonal back-up method for the first 7 days of tablet taking. However, if intercourse has already occurred, pregnancy should be excluded before the start of combined oral contraceptive use or the patient must wait for her first menstrual period.

In the case of first-trimester abortion, if the patient starts levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets immediately, additional contraceptive measures are not needed. It is to be noted that early resumption of ovulation may occur if Parlodel® (bromocriptine mesylate) has been used for the prevention of lactation.
Famciclovir

Famciclovir

Famciclovir tablets may be taken with or without food.

2.1 Dosing Recommendation in Immunocompetent Adult Patients

Herpes Labialis (Cold Sores)

The recommended dosage of famciclovir tablets for the treatment of recurrent herpes labialis is 1500 mg as a single dose. Therapy should be initiated at the first sign or symptom of herpes labialis (e.g., tingling, itching, burning, pain, or lesion).

Genital Herpes

Recurrent Episodes

The recommended dosage of famciclovir tablets for the treatment of recurrent episodes of genital herpes is 1000 mg twice daily for one day. Therapy should be initiated at the first sign or symptom of a recurrent episode (e.g., tingling, itching, burning, pain, or lesion).

Suppressive Therapy

The recommended dosage of famciclovir tablets for chronic suppressive therapy of recurrent episodes of genital herpes is 250 mg twice daily.

2.2 Dosing Recommendation in HIV-Infected Adult Patients

Recurrent Orolabial or Genital Herpes

The recommended dosage of famciclovir tablets for the treatment of recurrent orolabial or genital herpes in HIV-infected patients is 500 mg twice daily for 7 days. Therapy should be initiated at the first sign or symptom of a recurrent episode (e.g., tingling, itching, burning, pain, or lesion).

2.3 Dosing Recommendation in Patients with Renal Impairment

Dosage recommendations for adult patients with renal impairment are provided in Table 1 [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Table 1. Dosage Recommendations for Adult Patients with Renal Impairment * Hemodialysis
Indication and Normal Dosage Regimen

Creatinine Clearance

(mL/min.)

Adjusted Dosage Regimen Dose (mg)

Dosing Interval

Single-Day Dosing Regimens

Recurrent Genital Herpes

1000 mg every 12 hours for one day

≥ 60

1000

every 12 hours for one day

40 to 59

500

every 12 hours for one day

20 to 39

500

single dose

< 20

250

single dose

HD*

250

single dose following dialysis

Recurrent Herpes Labialis

1500 mg single dose

≥ 60

1500

single dose

40 to 59

750

single dose

20 to 39

500

single dose

< 20

250

single dose

HD*

250

single dose following dialysis

Multiple-Day Dosing Regimens

Suppression of Recurrent Genital Herpes

250 mg every 12 hours

≥ 40

250

every 12 hours

20 to 39

125

every 12 hours

< 20

125

every 24 hours

HD*

125

following each dialysis

Recurrent Orolabial or Genital Herpes in HIV-Infected Patients

500 mg every 12 hours

≥ 40

500

every 12 hours

20 to 39

500

every 24 hours

< 20

250

every 24 hours

HD*

250

following each dialysis
Entacapone

Entacapone

The recommended dose of Entacapone Tablets is one 200 mg tablet administered concomitantly with each levodopa and carbidopa dose to a maximum of 8 times daily (200 mg x 8 = 1,600 mg per day). Clinical experience with daily doses above 1,600 mg is limited.

Entacapone Tablets should always be administered in association with levodopa and carbidopa. Entacapone has no antiparkinsonian effect of its own.

In clinical studies, the majority of patients required a decrease in daily levodopa dose if their daily dose of levodopa had been greater than or equal to 800 mg or if patients had moderate or severe dyskinesia before beginning treatment.

To optimize an individual patient’s response, reductions in daily levodopa dose or extending the interval between doses may be necessary. In clinical studies, the average reduction in daily levodopa dose was about 25% in those patients requiring a levodopa dose reduction. (More than 58% of patients with levodopa doses above 800 mg daily required such a reduction.)

Entacapone Tablets can be combined with both the immediate and sustained-release formulations of levodopa and carbidopa.

Entacapone Tablets may be taken with or without food (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Patients With Impaired Hepatic Function

Patients with hepatic impairment should be treated with caution. The AUC and Cmax of entacapone approximately doubled in patients with documented liver disease, compared to controls. However, these studies were conducted with single-dose entacapone without levodopa and dopa decarboxylase inhibitor coadministration, and therefore the effects of liver disease on the kinetics of chronically administered entacapone have not been evaluated (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacokinetics of Entacapone).

Withdrawing Patients from Entacapone Tablets

Rapid withdrawal or abrupt reduction in the entacapone dose could lead to emergence of signs and symptoms of Parkinson’s disease (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Clinical Studies), and may lead to hyperpyrexia and confusion, a symptom complex resembling NMS (see PRECAUTIONS, Other Events Reported With Dopaminergic Therapy). This syndrome should be considered in the differential diagnosis for any patient who develops a high fever or severe rigidity. If a decision is made to discontinue treatment with Entacapone Tablets, patients should be monitored closely and other dopaminergic treatments should be adjusted as needed. Although tapering Entacapone Tablets have not been systematically evaluated, it seems prudent to withdraw patients slowly if the decision to discontinue treatment is made.
Oxybutynin Chloride

Oxybutynin Chloride

Oxybutynin Chloride Extended Release Tablets must be swallowed whole with the aid of liquids, and must not be chewed, divided, or crushed.

Oxybutynin Chloride Extended Release Tablets may be administered with or without food.

2.1 Adults

The recommended starting dose of Oxybutynin Chloride Extended Release Tablets are 5 or 10 mg once daily at approximately the same time each day. Dosage may be adjusted in 5-mg increments to achieve a balance of efficacy and tolerability (up to a maximum of 30 mg/day). In general, dosage adjustment may proceed at approximately weekly intervals.

2.2 Pediatric Patients Aged 6 Years of Age and Older

The recommended starting dose of Oxybutynin Chloride Extended Release Tablets are 5 mg once daily at approximately the same time each day. Dosage may be adjusted in 5-mg increments to achieve a balance of efficacy and tolerability (up to a maximum of 20 mg/day).
Micaved

Micaved

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

The recommended dose of paliperidone extended-release tablets for the treatment of schizophrenia in adults is 6 mg administered once daily. Initial dose titration is not required. Although it has not been systematically established that doses above 6 mg have additional benefit, there was a general trend for greater effects with higher doses. This must be weighed against the dose-related increase in adverse reactions. Thus, some patients may benefit from higher doses, up to 12 mg/day, and for some patients, a lower dose of 3 mg/day may be sufficient. Dose increases above 6 mg/day should be made only after clinical reassessment and generally should occur at intervals of more than 5 days. When dose increases are indicated, increments of 3 mg/day are recommended. The maximum recommended dose is 12 mg/day.

In a longer-term study, paliperidone extended-release tablets have been shown to be effective in delaying time to relapse in patients with schizophrenia who were stabilized on paliperidone extended-release tablets for 6 weeks [see Clinical Studies (14)]. Paliperidone extended-release tablets should be prescribed at the lowest effective dose for maintaining clinical stability and the physician should periodically re-evaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug in individual patients.

Adolescents (12 to 17 years of age)

The recommended starting dose of paliperidone extended-release tablets for the treatment of schizophrenia in adolescents 12 to 17 years of age is 3 mg administered once daily. Initial dose titration is not required. Dose increases, if considered necessary, should be made only after clinical reassessment and should occur at increments of 3 mg/day at intervals of more than 5 days. Prescribers should be mindful that, in the adolescent schizophrenia study, there was no clear enhancement to efficacy at the higher doses, i.e., 6 mg for subjects weighing less than 51 kg and 12 mg for subjects weighing 51 kg or greater, while adverse events were dose-related.

2.2 Schizoaffective Disorder

The recommended dose of paliperidone extended-release tablets for the treatment of schizoaffective disorder in adults is 6 mg administered once daily. Initial dose titration is not required. Some patients may benefit from lower or higher doses within the recommended dose range of 3 mg to 12 mg once daily. A general trend for greater effects was seen with higher doses. This trend must be weighed against dose-related increase in adverse reactions. Dosage adjustment, if indicated, should occur only after clinical reassessment. Dose increases, if indicated, generally should occur at intervals of more than 4 days. When dose increases are indicated, increments of 3 mg/day are recommended. The maximum recommended dose is 12 mg/day.

2.3 Administration Instructions

Paliperidone extended-release tablets can be taken with or without food.

Paliperidone extended-release tablets must be swallowed whole with the aid of liquids. Tablets should not be chewed, divided, or crushed. The medication is contained within a nonabsorbable shell designed to release the drug at a controlled rate. The tablet shell, along with insoluble core components, is eliminated from the body; patients should not be concerned if they occasionally notice in their stool something that looks like a tablet.

2.4 Use with Risperidone

Concomitant use of paliperidone extended-release tablets with risperidone has not been studied. Since paliperidone is the major active metabolite of risperidone, consideration should be given to the additive paliperidone exposure if risperidone is co-administered with paliperidone extended-release tablets.

2.5 Dosage in Special Populations

Renal Impairment

Dosing must be individualized according to the patient’s renal function status. For patients with mild renal impairment (creatinine clearance ≥ 50 mL/min to < 80 mL/min), the recommended initial dose of paliperidone extended-release tablets is 3 mg once daily. The dose may then be increased to a maximum of 6 mg once daily based on clinical response and tolerability. For patients with moderate to severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance ≥ 10 mL/min to < 50 mL/min), the recommended initial dose of paliperidone extended-release tablets is 1.5 mg once daily, which may be increased to a maximum of 3 mg once daily after clinical reassessment. As paliperidone extended-release tablets have not been studied in patients with creatinine clearance below 10 mL/min, use is not recommended in such patients. [See Clinical Pharmacology (12.3).]

Hepatic Impairment

For patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment, (Child-Pugh Classification A and B), no dose adjustment is recommended [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Paliperidone extended-release tabletshave not been studied in patients with severe hepatic impairment.

Elderly

Because elderly patients may have diminished renal function, dose adjustments may be required according to their renal function status. In general, recommended dosing for elderly patients with normal renal function is the same as for younger adult patients with normal renal function. For patients with moderate to severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance 10 mL/min to < 50 mL/min), the maximum recommended dose of paliperidone extended-release tablets is 3 mg once daily [see Renal Impairment above].
Glipizide

Glipizide

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of diabetes mellitus with glipizide tablets or any other hypoglycemic agent. In addition to the usual monitoring of urinary glucose, the patient’s blood glucose must also be monitored periodically to determine the minimum effective dose for the patient; to detect primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication; and to detect secondary failure, i.e., loss of an adequate blood-glucose-lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness. Glycosylated hemoglobin levels may also be of value in monitoring the patient’s response to therapy.

Short-term administration of glipizide tablets may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually controlled well on diet.

In general, glipizide tablets should be given approximately 30 minutes before a meal to achieve the greatest reduction in postprandial hyperglycemia.

Initial Dose

The recommended starting dose is 5 mg, given before breakfast. Geriatric patients or those with liver disease may be started on 2.5 mg.

Titration

Dosage adjustments should ordinarily be in increments of 2.5 mg to 5 mg, as determined by blood glucose response. At least several days should elapse between titration steps. If response to a single dose is not satisfactory, dividing that dose may prove effective. The maximum recommended once daily dose is 15 mg. Doses above 15 mg should ordinarily be divided and given before meals of adequate caloric content. The maximum recommended total daily dose is 40 mg.

Maintenance

Some patients may be effectively controlled on a once-a-day regimen, while others show better response with divided dosing. Total daily doses above 15 mg should ordinarily be divided. Total daily doses above 30 mg have been safely given on a b.i.d. basis to long-term patients.

In elderly patients, debilitated or malnourished patients, and patients with impaired renal or hepatic function, the initial and maintenance dosing should be conservative to avoid hypoglycemic reactions (see PRECAUTIONS section).

Patients Receiving Insulin

As with other sulfonylurea-class hypoglycemics, many stable non-insulin-dependent diabetic patients receiving insulin may be safely placed on glipizide tablets. When transferring patients from insulin to glipizide tablets, the following general guidelines should be considered:
For patients whose daily insulin requirement is 20 units or less, insulin may be discontinued and glipizide tablet therapy may begin at usual dosages. Several days should elapse between glipizide titration steps. For patients whose daily insulin requirement is greater than 20 units, the insulin dose should be reduced by 50% and glipizide tablet therapy may begin at usual dosages. Subsequent reductions in insulin dosage should depend on individual patient response. Several days should elapse between glipizide titration steps.
During the insulin withdrawal period, the patient should test urine samples for sugar and ketone bodies at least 3 times daily. Patients should be instructed to contact the prescriber immediately if these tests are abnormal. In some cases, especially when patient has been receiving greater than 40 units of insulin daily, it may be advisable to consider hospitalization during the transition period.

Patients Receiving Other Oral Hypoglycemic Agents

As with other sulfonylurea-class hypoglycemics, no transition period is necessary when transferring patients to glipizide tablets. Patients should be observed carefully (1 to 2 weeks) for hypoglycemia when being transferred from longer half-life sulfonylureas (e.g., chlorpropamide) to glipizide tablets due to potential overlapping of drug effect.

When colesevelam is coadministered with glipizide extended-release tablets, maximum plasma concentration and total exposure to glipizide is reduced. Therefore, glipizide tablets should be administered at least 4 hours prior to colesevelam.
Topotecan Hydrochloride...

Topotecan Hydrochloride

When estrogen is prescribed for a postmenopausal woman with a uterus, a progestin should also be initiated to reduce the risk of endometrial cancer. A woman without a uterus does not need progestin. Use of estrogen, alone or in combination with a progestin, should be with the lowest effective dose and for the shortest duration consistent with treatment goals and risks for the individual woman. Patients should be reevaluated periodically as clinically appropriate (e.g., 3-month to 6-month intervals) to determine if treatment is still necessary (see BOXED WARNINGS and WARNINGS). For women who have a uterus, adequate diagnostic measures, such as endometrial sampling, when indicated, should be undertaken to rule out malignancy in cases of undiagnosed persistent or recurring abnormal vaginal bleeding.

Patients should be started at the lowest dose for the indication.

1. For treatment of moderate to severe vasomotor symptoms, vulval and vaginal atrophy associated with the menopause, the lowest dose and regimen that will control symptoms should be chosen and medication should be discontinued as promptly as possible.

Attempts to discontinue or taper medication should be made at 3-month to 6-month intervals. The usual initial dosage range is 1 mg to 2 mg daily of estradiol adjusted as necessary to control presenting symptoms. The minimal effective dose for maintenance therapy should be determined by titration. Administration should be cyclic (e.g., 3 weeks on and 1 week off).

2. For treatment of female hypoestrogenism due to hypogonadism, castration or primary ovarian failure.

Treatment is usually initiated with a dose of 1 mg to 2 mg daily of estradiol, adjusted as necessary to control presenting symptoms; the minimal effective dose for maintenance therapy should be determined by titration.

3. For treatment of breast cancer, for palliation only, in appropriately selected women and men with metastatic disease.

Suggested dosage is 10 mg three times daily for a period of at least 3 months.

4. For treatment of advanced androgen-dependent carcinoma of the prostate, for palliation only.

Suggested dosage is 1 mg to 2 mg three times daily. The effectiveness of therapy can be judged by phosphatase determinations as well as by symptomatic improvement of the patient.

5. For prevention of osteoporosis.

When prescribing solely for the prevention of postmenopausal osteoporosis, therapy should be considered only for women at significant risk of osteoporosis and for whom non-estrogen medications are not considered to be appropriate.

The lowest effective dose of estradiol tablets has not been determined.
Benazepril Hydrochlorid...

Benazepril Hydrochloride

Although the occurrence of pregnancy is unlikely if levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets are taken according to directions, if withdrawal bleeding does not occur while taking green (inactive) tablets, the possibility of pregnancy must be considered. Appropriate diagnostic measures to rule out pregnancy should be taken at the time of any missed menstrual period. Levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets should be discontinued if pregnancy is confirmed.

The dosage of levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets are one white (active) tablet daily for 84 consecutive days, followed by 7 days of green (inert) tablets. To achieve maximum contraceptive effectiveness, levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets must be taken exactly as directed and at intervals not exceeding 24 hours. Ideally, the tablets should be taken at the same time of the day on each day of active treatment. The tablets should not be removed from the protective blister packaging to avoid damage to the product. The blister pack should be kept in the foil pouch until dispensed to the patient.

During the first cycle of medication, the patient is instructed to begin taking levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets on the first Sunday after the onset of menstruation. If menstruation begins on a Sunday, the first tablet (white) is taken that day. One white tablet should be taken daily for 84 consecutive days, followed by 7 days on which a green (inert) tablet is taken. Withdrawal bleeding should occur during the 7 days following discontinuation of white active tablets. During the first cycle, contraceptive reliance should not be placed on levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets until a white (active) tablet has been taken daily for 7 consecutive days and a non-hormonal back-up method of birth control (such as condoms or spermicide) should be used during those 7 days. The possibility of ovulation and conception prior to initiation of medication should be considered.

The patient begins her next and all subsequent 91-day courses of tablets without interruption on the same day of the week (Sunday) on which she began her first course, following the same schedule: 84 days on which white tablets are taken followed by 7 days on which green tablets are taken. If in any cycle the patient starts tablets later than the proper day, she should protect herself against pregnancy by using a non-hormonal back-up method of birth control until she has taken a white tablet daily for 7 consecutive days.

If spotting or breakthrough bleeding occurs, the patient is instructed to continue on the same regimen. This type of bleeding may be transient and without significance; however, if the bleeding is persistent or prolonged, the patient is advised to consult her healthcare provider.

For patient instructions regarding missed pills, see the "WHAT TO DO IF YOU MISS PILLS" section in the DETAILED PATIENT LABELING. Any time the patient misses two or more white tablets, she should also use another method of non-hormonal back-up contraception until she has taken a white tablet daily for seven consecutive days. If the patient misses one or more green tablets, she is still protected against pregnancy provided she begins taking white tablets again on the proper day. The possibility of ovulation increases with each successive day that scheduled white tablets are missed. The risk of pregnancy increases with each active (white) tablet missed.

In the nonlactating mother, levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets may be initiated no earlier than day 28 postpartum, for contraception due to the increased risk for thromboembolism. When the tablets are administered in the postpartum period, the increased risk of thromboembolic disease associated with the postpartum period must be considered (See CONTRAINDICATIONS, WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS concerning thromboembolic disease). The patient should be advised to use a nonhormonal back-up method for the first 7 days of tablet-taking. However, if intercourse has already occurred, the possibility of ovulation and conception prior to initiation of medication should be considered. Levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets may be initiated immediately after a first-trimester abortion; if the patient starts levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets immediately, additional contraceptive measures are not needed.
Voriconazole

Voriconazole

2.1 Instructions for Use in All Patients

Voriconazole for oral suspension should be taken at least one hour before or after a meal.

2.3 Recommended Dosing in Adults

Invasive aspergillosis and serious fungal infections due to Fusarium spp. and Scedosporium apiospermum

See Table 1. Therapy must be initiated with the specified loading dose regimen of intravenous voriconazole on Day 1 followed by the recommended maintenance dose regimen. Intravenous treatment should be continued for at least 7 days. Once the patient has clinically improved and can tolerate medication given by mouth, the oral tablet form or oral suspension form of voriconazole may be utilized. The recommended oral maintenance dose of 200 mg achieves a voriconazole exposure similar to 3 mg/kg IV; a 300 mg oral dose achieves an exposure similar to 4 mg/kg IV. Switching between the intravenous and oral formulations is appropriate because of the high bioavailability of the oral formulation in adults [see Clinical Pharmacology (12)].

Candidemia in non-neutropenic patients and other deep tissue Candida infections

See Table 1. Patients should be treated for at least 14 days following resolution of symptoms or following last positive culture, whichever is longer.

Esophageal Candidiasis

See Table 1. Patients should be treated for a minimum of 14 days and for at least 7 days following resolution of symptoms.
Table 1. Recommended Dosing Regimen * Increase dose when voriconazole is coadministered with phenytoin or efavirenz (7); Decrease dose in patients with hepatic impairment ( 2.7). † In healthy volunteer studies, the 200 mg oral q12h dose provided an exposure (AUC τ) similar to a 3 mg/kg IV q12h dose; the 300 mg oral q12h dose provided an exposure (AUC τ) similar to a 4 mg/kg IV q12h dose [see Clinical Pharmacology (12)]. ‡ Adult patients who weigh less than 40 kg should receive half of the oral maintenance dose. § In a clinical study of invasive aspergillosis, the median duration of IV voriconazole therapy was 10 days (range 2 to 85 days). The median duration of oral voriconazole therapy was 76 days (range 2 to 232 days) [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. ¶ In clinical trials, patients with candidemia received 3 mg/kg IV q12h as primary therapy, while patients with other deep tissue Candida infections received 4 mg/kg q12h as salvage therapy. Appropriate dose should be based on the severity and nature of the infection. # Not evaluated in patients with esophageal candidiasis.
Infection

Loading dose

Maintenance Dose*,†

IV

IV

Oral‡

Invasive Aspergillosis§

6 mg/kg q12h for the first 24 hours

4 mg/kg q12h

200 mg q12h

Candidemia in non-neutropenic patients and other deep tissue Candida infections

6 mg/kg q12h for the first 24 hours

3 to 4 mg/kg q12h¶

200 mg q12h

Esophageal Candidiasis

#

#

200 mg q12h

Scedosporiosis and Fusariosis

6 mg/kg q12h for the first

24 hours

4 mg/kg q12h

200 mg q12h

2.4 Dosage Adjustment

If patient response is inadequate, the oral maintenance dose may be increased from 200 mg every 12 hours (similar to 3 mg/kg IV q12h) to 300 mg every 12 hours (similar to 4 mg/kg IV q12h). For adult patients weighing less than 40 kg, the oral maintenance dose may be increased from 100 mg every 12 hours to 150 mg every 12 hours. If patient is unable to tolerate 300 mg orally every 12 hours, reduce the oral maintenance dose by 50 mg steps to a minimum of 200 mg every 12 hours (or to 100 mg every 12 hours for adult patients weighing less than 40 kg).

If patient is unable to tolerate 4 mg/kg IV q12h, reduce the intravenous maintenance dose to 3 mg/kg q12h.

The maintenance dose of voriconazole should be increased when coadministered with phenytoin or efavirenz [see Drug Interactions (7)].

The maintenance dose of voriconazole should be reduced in patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment, Child-Pugh Class A and B [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)]. There are no PK data to allow for dosage adjustment recommendations in patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh Class C). Duration of therapy should be based on the severity of the patient’s underlying disease, recovery from immunosuppression and clinical response.

Duration of therapy should be based on the severity of the patient’s underlying disease, recovery from immunosuppression and clinical response.

2.6 Oral Suspension

Reconstitution

Tap the bottle to release the powder. Add 46 mL of water to the bottle. Shake the closed bottle vigorously for about one minute. Remove child-resistant cap and push bottle adaptor into the neck of the bottle. Replace the cap. Write the date of expiration of the reconstituted suspension on the bottle label (the shelf life of the reconstituted suspension is 14 days at controlled room temperature 20° to 25°C (68° to 77°F).

Instructions for Use

Shake the closed bottle of reconstituted suspension for approximately 10 seconds before each use. The reconstituted oral suspension should only be administered using the oral dispenser supplied with each pack.

Incompatibilities

Voriconazole for oral suspension and the 40 mg/mL reconstituted oral suspension should not be mixed with any other medication or additional flavoring agent. It is not intended that the suspension be further diluted with water or other vehicles.

2.7 Use in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

In the clinical program, patients were included who had baseline liver function tests (ALT, AST) up to 5 times the upper limit of normal. No dose adjustment is necessary in patients with this degree of abnormal liver function, but continued monitoring of liver function tests for further elevations is recommended [see Warnings and Precautions (5.9)].

It is recommended that the standard loading dose regimens be used but that the maintenance dose be halved in patients with mild to moderate hepatic cirrhosis (Child-Pugh Class A and B) [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Voriconazole for oral suspension has not been studied in patients with severe hepatic cirrhosis (Child-Pugh Class C) or in patients with chronic hepatitis B or chronic hepatitis C disease. Voriconazole for oral suspension has been associated with elevations in liver function tests and clinical signs of liver damage, such as jaundice and should only be used in patients with severe hepatic impairment if the benefit outweighs the potential risk. Patients with hepatic insufficiency must be carefully monitored for drug toxicity.

2.8 Use in Patients with Renal Impairment

The pharmacokinetics of orally administered voriconazole for oral suspension are not significantly affected by renal impairment. Therefore, no adjustment is necessary for oral dosing in patients with mild to severe renal impairment [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

In patients with moderate or severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance < 50 mL/min), accumulation of the intravenous vehicle, SBECD, occurs. Oral voriconazole should be administered to these patients, unless an assessment of the benefit/risk to the patient justifies the use of intravenous voriconazole. Serum creatinine levels should be closely monitored in these patients, and, if increases occur, consideration should be given to changing to oral voriconazole therapy [see Warnings and Precautions (5.10)].

Voriconazole is hemodialyzed with clearance of 121 mL/min. The intravenous vehicle, SBECD, is hemodialyzed with clearance of 55 mL/min. A 4-hour hemodialysis session does not remove a sufficient amount of voriconazole to warrant dose adjustment.
Valacyclovir Hydrochlor...

Valacyclovir Hydrochloride

• Valacyclovir tablets may be given without regard to meals. • Valacyclovir oral suspension (25 mg/mL or 50 mg/mL) may be prepared extemporaneously from 500 mg valacyclovir tablets for use in pediatric patients for whom a solid dosage form is not appropriate [see Dosage and Administration (2.3)].
2.1 Adult Dosing Recommendations

Cold Sores (Herpes Labialis)

The recommended dosage of valacyclovir tablets for treatment of cold sores is 2 grams twice daily for 1 day taken 12 hours apart. Therapy should be initiated at the earliest symptom of a cold sore (e.g., tingling, itching or burning).

Genital Herpes

Initial Episode

The recommended dosage of valacyclovir tablets for treatment of initial genital herpes is 1 gram twice daily for 10 days. Therapy was most effective when administered within 48 hours of the onset of signs and symptoms.

Recurrent Episodes

The recommended dosage of valacyclovir tablets for treatment of recurrent genital herpes is 500 mg twice daily for 3 days. Initiate treatment at the first sign or symptom of an episode.

Suppressive Therapy

The recommended dosage of valacyclovir tablets for chronic suppressive therapy of recurrent genital herpes is 1 gram once daily in patients with normal immune function. In patients with a history of nine or fewer recurrences per year, an alternative dose is 500 mg once daily.

In HIV-infected patients with a CD4+ cell count ≥ 100 cells/mm3, the recommended dosage of valacyclovir tablets for chronic suppressive therapy of recurrent genital herpes is 500 mg twice daily.

Reduction of Transmission

The recommended dosage of valacyclovir tablets for reduction of transmission of genital herpes in patients with a history of nine or fewer recurrences per year is 500 mg once daily for the source partner.

Herpes Zoster

The recommended dosage of valacyclovir tablets for treatment of herpes zoster is 1 gram 3 times daily for 7 days. Therapy should be initiated at the earliest sign or symptom of herpes zoster and is most effective when started within 48 hours of the onset of rash.

2.2 Pediatric Dosing Recommendations

Cold Sores (Herpes Labialis)

The recommended dosage of valacyclovir tablets for the treatment of cold sores in pediatric patients ≥ 12 years of age is 2 grams twice daily for 1 day taken 12 hours apart. Therapy should be initiated at the earliest symptom of a cold sore (e.g., tingling, itching or burning).

Chickenpox

The recommended dosage of valacyclovir tablets for treatment of chickenpox in immunocompetent pediatric patients 2 to < 18 years of age is 20 mg/kg administered three times daily for 5 days. The total dose should not exceed 1 gram 3 times daily. Therapy should be initiated at the earliest sign or symptom [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3), Clinical Studies (14.4)].

2.3 Extemporaneous Preparation of Oral Suspension

Ingredients and Preparation per USP-NF

Valacyclovir tablets 500 mg, cherry flavor, and Suspension Structured Vehicle USP-NF (SSV). Valacyclovir oral suspension (25 mg/mL or 50 mg/mL) should be prepared in lots of 100 mL.

Prepare Suspension at Time of Dispensing as Follows
• Prepare SSV according to the USP-NF. • Using a pestle and mortar, grind the required number of valacyclovir 500 mg tablets until a fine powder is produced (five valacyclovir tablets for 25 mg/mL suspension; ten valacyclovir tablets for 50 mg/mL suspension). • Gradually add approximately 5 mL aliquots of SSV to the mortar and triturate the powder until a paste has been produced. Ensure that the powder has been adequately wetted. • Continue to add approximately 5 mL aliquots of SSV to the mortar, mixing thoroughly between additions, until a concentrated suspension is produced, to a minimum total quantity of 20 mL SSV and a maximum total quantity of 40 mL SSV for both the 25 mg/mL and 50 mg/mL suspensions. • Transfer the mixture to a suitable 100 mL measuring flask. • Transfer the cherry flavor* to the mortar and dissolve in approximately 5 mL of SSV. Once dissolved, add to the measuring flask. • Rinse the mortar at least three times with approximately 5 mL aliquots of SSV, transferring the rinsing to the measuring flask between additions. • Make the suspension to volume (100 mL) with SSV and shake thoroughly to mix. • Transfer the suspension to an amber glass medicine bottle with a child-resistant closure. • The prepared suspension should be labeled with the following information “Shake well before using. Store suspension between 2° to 8°C (36° to 46°F) in a refrigerator. Discard after 28 days.”
*The amount of cherry flavor added is as instructed by the suppliers of the cherry flavor.

2.4 Patients with Renal Impairment

Dosage recommendations for adult patients with reduced renal function are provided in Table 1 [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5, 8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Data are not available for the use of valacyclovir tablets in pediatric patients with a creatinine clearance < 50 mL/min/1.73 m2.
Table 1. Valacyclovir Dosage Recommendations for Adults with Renal Impairment
Indications

Normal Dosage Regimen(Creatinine Clearance ≥ 50 mL/min)

Creatinine Clearance (mL/min)

30 to 49

10 to 29

< 10

Cold sores (Herpes labialis) Do not exceed 1 day of treatment.

Two 2 gram doses taken 12 hours apart

Two 1 gram doses taken 12 hours apart

Two 500 mg doses taken 12 hours apart

500 mg single dose

Genital herpes:    Initial episode

1 gram every

12 hours

no reduction

1 gram every

24 hours

500 mg every

24 hours

Genital herpes:    Recurrent episode

500 mg every

12 hours

no reduction

500 mg every

24 hours

500 mg every

24 hours

Genital herpes:     Suppressive Therapy

      Immunocompetent patients

1 gram every 24 hours

no reduction

500 mg every 24 hours

500 mg every 24 hours

      Alternate dose for immunocompetent patients with ≤ 9 recurrences/year

500 mg every 24 hours

no reduction

500 mg every 48 hours

500 mg every 48 hours

      HIV-infected patients

500 mg every 12 hours

no reduction

500 mg every 24 hours

500 mg every 24 hours

Herpes zoster

1 gram every

8 hours

1 gram every

12 hours

1 gram every

24 hours

500 mg every

24 hours

Hemodialysis

Patients requiring hemodialysis should receive the recommended dose of valacyclovir tablets after hemodialysis. During hemodialysis, the half-life of acyclovir after administration of valacyclovir tablets is approximately 4 hours. About one third of acyclovir in the body is removed by dialysis during a 4 hour hemodialysis session.

Peritoneal Dialysis

There is no information specific to administration of valacyclovir tablets in patients receiving peritoneal dialysis. The effect of chronic ambulatory peritoneal dialysis (CAPD) and continuous arteriovenous hemofiltration/dialysis (CAVHD) on acyclovir pharmacokinetics has been studied. The removal of acyclovir after CAPD and CAVHD is less pronounced than with hemodialysis, and the pharmacokinetic parameters closely resemble those observed in patients with end-stage renal disease (ESRD) not receiving hemodialysis. Therefore, supplemental doses of valacyclovir tablets should not be required following CAPD or CAVHD.
Albuterol Sulfate Solut...

Albuterol Sulfate Solution

The usual starting dosage for patients 2 to 12 years of age is 1.25 mg or 0.63 mg of Albuterol Sulfate Inhalation Solution administered 3 or 4 times daily, as needed, by nebulization. More frequent administration is not recommended.

To administer 1.25 mg or 0.63 mg of albuterol, use the entire contents of one unit-dose vial (3 mL of 1.25 mg or 0.63 mg inhalation solution) by nebulization. Adjust nebulizer flow rate to deliver Albuterol Sulfate Inhalation Solution over 5 to 15 minutes.

The use of Albuterol Sulfate Inhalation Solution can be continued as medically indicated to control recurring bouts of brochospasm. During this time most patients gain optimum benefit from regular use of the inhalation solution.

Patients 6 to 12 years of age with more severe asthma (baseline FEV1 less than 60% predicted), weight > 40 kg, or patients 11 to 12 years of age may achieve a better initial response with the 1.25 mg dose.

Albuterol Sulfate Inhalation Solution has not been studied in the setting of acute attacks of bronchospasm. A 2.5 mg dose of albuterol provided by a higher concentration product (2.5 mg albuterol per 3 mL) may be more appropriate for treating acute exacerbations, particularly in children 6 years old and above.

If a previously effective dosage regimen fails to provide the usual relief, medical advice should be sought immediately, as this is often a sign of seriously worsening asthma which would require reassessment of therapy.

The drug compatibility (physical and chemical), clinical efficacy and safety of Albuterol Sulfate Inhalation Solution, when mixed with other drugs in a nebulizer have not been established.

The safety and efficacy of Albuterol Sulfate Inhalation Solution has been established in clinical trials when administered using the Pari LC Plus™ nebulizer and Pari PRONEB™ compressor. The safety and efficacy of Albuterol Sulfate Inhalation Solution when administered with other nebulizer systems have not been established.

Albuterol Sulfate Inhalation Solution should be administered via jet nebulizer connected to an air compressor with adequate air flow, equipped with a mouthpiece or suitable face mask.
Nicardipine Hydrochlori...

Nicardipine Hydrochloride

Angina

The dose should be individually titrated for each patient beginning with 20 mg 3 times daily. Doses in the range of 20 mg to 40 mg 3 times a day have been shown to be effective. At least 3 days should be allowed before increasing the nicardipine hydrochloride dose to ensure achievement of steady-state plasma drug concentrations.

Concomitant Use With Other Antianginal Agents
1. Sublingual NTG may be taken as required to abort acute anginal attacks during nicardipine therapy. 2. Prophylactic Nitrate Therapy–Nicardipine may be safely coadministered with short- and long-acting nitrates. 3. Beta-blockers–(See PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions.)
Hypertension

The dose of nicardipine hydrochloride should be individually adjusted according to the blood pressure response beginning with 20 mg 3 times daily. The effective doses in clinical trials have ranged from 20 mg to 40 mg 3 times daily. The maximum blood pressure lowering effect occurs approximately 1 to 2 hours after dosing. To assess the adequacy of blood pressure response, the blood pressure should be measured at trough (8 hours after dosing). Because of the prominent peak effects of nicardipine, blood pressure should be measured 1 to 2 hours after dosing, particularly during initiation of therapy. (See PRECAUTIONS, Blood Pressure; INDICATIONS AND USAGE; CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Effects in Hypertension.) At least 3 days should be allowed before increasing the nicardipine dose to ensure achievement of steady-state plasma drug concentrations.

Concomitant Use With Other Antihypertensive Agents, Beta-blockers

(See PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions.)

Special Patient Populations

Renal Insufficiency

Although there is no evidence that nicardipine impairs renal function, careful dose titration beginning with 20 mg TID is advised. (See PRECAUTIONS.)

Hepatic Insufficiency

Nicardipine should be administered cautiously in patients with severely impaired hepatic function. A suggested starting dose of 20 mg twice a day is advised with individual titration based on clinical findings maintaining the twice a day schedule. (See PRECAUTIONS.)

Congestive Heart Failure

Caution is advised when titrating nicardipine dosage in patients with congestive heart failure. (See WARNINGS.)
Oxycodone And Acetamino...

Oxycodone And Acetaminophen

2.1 Initial Dosing

Fentanyl transdermal system should be prescribed only by healthcare professionals who are knowledgeable in the use of potent opioids for the management of chronic pain.

Due to the risk of respiratory depression, fentanyl transdermal system is only indicated for use in patients who are already opioid-tolerant. Discontinue or taper all other extended-release opioids when beginning fentanyl transdermal system therapy. As fentanyl transdermal system is only for use in opioid-tolerant patients, do not begin any patient on fentanyl transdermal system as the first opioid.

Patients considered opioid-tolerant are those who are taking at least 60 mg of morphine daily, or at least 30 mg of oral oxycodone daily, or at least 8 mg of oral hydromorphone daily or an equianalgesic dose of another opioid for a week or longer.

Initiate the dosing regimen for each patient individually, taking into account the patient's prior analgesic treatment experience and risk factors for addiction, abuse, and misuse [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)]. Monitor patients closely for respiratory depression, especially within the first 24 to 72 hours of initiating therapy with fentanyl transdermal system when serum concentrations from the initial patch will peak [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

The recommended starting dose when converting from other opioids to fentanyl transdermal system is intended to minimize the potential for overdosing patients with the first dose.

Discontinue all other around-the-clock opioid drugs when fentanyl transdermal system therapy is initiated.

While there are useful tables of opioid equivalents readily available, there is substantial interpatient variability in the relative potency of different opioid drugs and products. As such, it is preferable to underestimate a patient’s 24-hour fentanyl requirements and provide rescue medication (i.e., immediate-release opioid) than to overestimate the 24-hour fentanyl requirements which could result in adverse reactions. In a fentanyl transdermal system clinical trial, patients were converted from their prior opioid to fentanyl transdermal system using Table 1 as a guide for the initial fentanyl transdermal system dose.

Consider the following when using the information in Table 1:
• This is not a table of equianalgesic doses. • The conversion doses in this table are only for the conversion from one of the listed oral or parenteral opioid analgesics to fentanyl transdermal system. • The table cannot be used to convert from fentanyl transdermal system to another opioid. Doing so will result in an overestimation of the dose of the new opioid and may result in fatal overdose.
To convert patients from oral or parenteral opioids to fentanyl transdermal system, use Table 1. Do not use Table 1 to convert from fentanyl transdermal system to other therapies because this conversion to fentanyl transdermal system is conservative and will overestimate the dose of the new agent.
Table 1*: DOSE CONVERSION TO FENTANYL TRANSDERMAL SYSTEM Alternatively, for adult and pediatric patients taking opioids or doses not listed in Table 1, use the conversion methodology outlined above with Table 2. * Table 1 should not be used to convert from fentanyl transdermal system to other therapies because this conversion to fentanyl transdermal system is conservative. Use of Table 1 for conversion to other analgesic therapies can overestimate the dose of the new agent. Overdosage of the new analgesic agent is possible [see Dosage and Administration (2.3)].
Current Analgesic

Daily Dosage (mg/day)

Oral morphine

60 to 134

135 to 224

225 to 314

315 to 404

Intramuscular or Intravenous morphine

10 to 22

23 to 37

38 to 52

53 to 67

Oral oxycodone

30 to 67

67.5 to 112

112.5 to 157

157.5 to 202

Oral codeine

150 to 447

Oral hydromorphone

8 to 17

17.1 to 28

28.1 to 39

39.1 to 51

Intravenous hydromorphone

1.5 to 3.4

3.5 to 5.6

5.7 to 7.9

8 to 10

Intramuscular meperidine

75 to 165

166 to 278

279 to 390

391 to 503

Oral methadone

20 to 44

45 to 74

75 to 104

105 to 134

⇓

⇓

⇓

⇓

Recommended Fentanyl Transdermal System Dose

25 mcg/hour

50 mcg/hour

75 mcg/hour

100 mcg/hour

Alternatively, for adult and pediatric patients taking opioids or doses not listed in Table 1, use the following methodology:
1. Calculate the previous 24-hour analgesic requirement. 2. Convert this amount to the equianalgesic oral morphine dose using a reliable reference.
Refer to Table 2 for the range of 24-hour oral morphine doses that are recommended for conversion to each fentanyl transdermal system dose. Use this table to find the calculated 24-hour morphine dose and the corresponding fentanyl transdermal system dose. Initiate fentanyl transdermal system treatment using the recommended dose and titrate patients upwards (no more frequently than 3 days after the initial dose and every 6 days thereafter) until analgesic efficacy is attained.
3. Do not use Table 2 to convert from fentanyl transdermal system to other therapies because this conversion to fentanyl transdermal system is conservative and will overestimate the dose of the new agent. Table 2*: RECOMMENDED INITIAL FENTANYL TRANSDERMAL SYSTEM DOSE BASED UPON DAILY ORAL MORPHINE DOSE NOTE: In clinical trials, these ranges of daily oral morphine doses were used as a basis for conversion to fentanyl transdermal system. * Table 2 should not be used to convert from fentanyl transdermal system to other therapies because this conversion to fentanyl transdermal system is conservative. Use of Table 2 for conversion to other analgesic therapies can overestimate the dose of the new agent. Overdosage of the new analgesic agent is possible [see Dosage and Administration (2.5)].
Oral 24 hour

Morphine

(mg/day)

Fentanyl Transdermal System

Dose

(mcg/hour)

60 to 134

25

135 to 224

50

225 to 314

75

315 to 404

100

405 to 494

125

495 to 584

150

585 to 674

175

675 to 764

200

765 to 854

225

855 to 944

250

945 to 1034

275

1035 to 1124

300

For delivery rates in excess of 100 mcg/hour, multiple systems may be used.

For patients that may be more sensitive to the effects of opioids, additional intermediate strengths may be considered during conversion from prior opioids or titrating the dose of the fentanyl transdermal system. For example, rather than converting or titrating to a 50 mcg/hr system, a 37.5 mcg/hr system is available. Similarly a 62.5 mcg/hr system is available for use as an intermediate strength between the 50 mcg/hr and the 75 mcg/hr system, and an 87.5 mcg/hr system is available as an intermediate strength between the 75 mcg/hr system and the 100 mcg/hr system.

The additional intermediate strengths, 32.5 mcg/hr, 62.5 mcg/hr and 87.5 mcg/hr, were not used in the clinical studies.

Hepatic Impairment

Avoid the use of fentanyl transdermal system in patients with severe hepatic impairment. In patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment, start with one half of the usual dosage of fentanyl transdermal system. Closely monitor for signs of sedation and respiratory depression, including at each dosage increase [see Warnings and Precautions (5.14), Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Renal Impairment

Avoid the use of fentanyl transdermal system in patients with severe renal impairment. In patients with mild to moderate renal impairment, start with one half of the usual dosage of fentanyl transdermal system. Closely monitor for signs of sedation and respiratory depression, including at each dosage increase [see Warnings and Precautions (5.15), Use in Specific Populations (8.7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.2 Titration and Maintenance of Therapy

Individually titrate fentanyl transdermal system to a dose that provides adequate analgesia and minimizes adverse reactions. Continually reevaluate patients receiving fentanyl transdermal system to assess the maintenance of pain control and the relative incidence of adverse reactions, as well as monitoring for the development of addiction, abuse, or misuse. Frequent communication is important among the prescriber, other members of the healthcare team, the patient, and the caregiver/family during periods of changing analgesic requirements, including initial titration. During chronic therapy, periodically reassess the continued need for opioid analgesics.

The dosing interval for fentanyl transdermal system is 72 hours. Do not increase the fentanyl transdermal system dose for the first time until at least 3 days after the initial application. Titrate the dose based on the daily dose of supplemental opioid analgesics required by the patient on the second or third day of the initial application.

It may take up to 6 days for fentanyl levels to reach equilibrium on a new dose [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Therefore, evaluate patients for further titration after no less than two 3‑day applications before any further increase in dosage is made.

Base dosage increments on the daily dosage of supplementary opioids, using the ratio of 45 mg/24 hours of oral morphine to a 12 mcg/hour increase in fentanyl transdermal system dose.

If unacceptable opioid-related adverse reactions are observed, the subsequent doses may be reduced. Adjust the dose to obtain an appropriate balance between management of pain and opioid-related adverse reactions.

A small proportion of adult patients may not achieve adequate analgesia using a 72-hour dosing interval and may require systems to be applied at 48 hours rather than at 72 hours, only if adequate pain control cannot be achieved using a 72-hour regimen. An increase in the fentanyl transdermal system dose should be evaluated before changing dosing intervals in order to maintain patients on a 72-hour regimen.

Dosing intervals less than every 72 hours were not studied in children and adolescents and are not recommended.

2.3 Administration of Fentanyl Transdermal System

Fentanyl transdermal system patches are for transdermal use, only.

Proper handling of fentanyl transdermal system is necessary in order to prevent serious adverse outcomes, including death, associated with accidental secondary exposure to fentanyl transdermal system [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].

Application and Handling Instructions
• Patients should apply fentanyl transdermal system to intact, non-irritated, and non-irradiated skin on a flat surface such as the chest, back, flank, or upper arm. In young children and persons with cognitive impairment, adhesion should be monitored and the upper back is the preferred location to minimize the potential of inappropriate patch removal. Hair at the application site may be clipped (not shaved) prior to system application. If the site of fentanyl transdermal system application must be cleansed prior to application of the patch, do so with clear water. Do not use soaps, oils, lotions, alcohol, or any other agents that might irritate the skin or alter its characteristics. Allow the skin to dry completely prior to patch application. • Patients should apply fentanyl transdermal system immediately upon removal from the sealed package. The patch must not be altered (i.e., cut) in any way prior to application. Fentanyl transdermal system should not be used if the pouch seal is broken or if the patch is cut or damaged. • The transdermal system is pressed firmly in place with the palm of the hand for 30 seconds, making sure the contact is complete, especially around the edges. • Each fentanyl transdermal system patch may be worn continuously for 72 hours. The next patch is applied to a different skin site after removal of the previous transdermal system. • If problems with adhesion of the fentanyl transdermal system patch occur, the edges of the patch may be taped with first aid tape. If problems with adhesion persist, the patch may be overlayed with a transparent adhesive film dressing (i.e., BIOCLUSIVE® or Askina®Derm). • If the patch falls off before 72 hours, dispose of it by folding in half and flushing down the toilet. A new patch may be applied to a different skin site. • Patients (or caregivers who apply fentanyl transdermal system) should wash their hands immediately with soap and water after applying fentanyl transdermal system. • Contact with unwashed or unclothed application sites can result in secondary exposure to fentanyl transdermal system and should be avoided. Examples of accidental exposure include transfer of a fentanyl transdermal system patch from an adult’s body to a child while hugging, sharing the same bed as the patient, accidental sitting on a patch and possible accidental exposure of a caregiver’s skin to the medication in the patch while applying or removing the patch. • Instruct patients, family members, and caregivers to keep patches in a secure location out of the reach of children and of others for whom fentanyl transdermal system was not prescribed.
Avoidance of Heat

Instruct patients to avoid exposing the fentanyl transdermal system application site and surrounding area to direct external heat sources, such as heating pads or electric blankets, heat or tanning lamps, sunbathing, hot baths, saunas, hot tubs, and heated water beds, while wearing the system [see Warnings and Precautions (5.11)].

2.4 Disposal Instructions

Failure to properly dispose of fentanyl transdermal system has resulted in accidental exposures and deaths [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].

Patients should dispose of used patches immediately upon removal by folding the adhesive side of the patch to itself, then flushing down the toilet.

Unused patches should be removed from their pouches, the protective liners removed, the patches folded so that the adhesive side of the patch adheres to itself, and immediately flushed down the toilet.

Patients should dispose of any patches remaining from a prescription as soon as they are no longer needed.

2.5 Discontinuation of Fentanyl Transdermal System

Significant amounts of fentanyl continue to be absorbed from the skin for 24 hours or more after the patch is removed [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

To convert patients to another opioid, remove fentanyl transdermal system and titrate the dose of the new analgesic based upon the patient’s report of pain until adequate analgesia has been attained. Upon system removal, 17 hours or more are required for a 50% decrease in serum fentanyl concentrations. Withdrawal symptoms are possible in some patients after conversion or dose adjustment [see Warnings and Precautions (5.17)].

Do not use Tables 1 and 2 to convert from fentanyl transdermal system to other therapies to avoid overestimating the dose of the new agent resulting in overdose of the new analgesic and possibly death.

When discontinuing fentanyl transdermal system and not converting to another opioid, use a gradual downward titration, such as halving the dose every 6 days, in order to reduce the possibility of withdrawal symptoms [see Warnings and Precautions (5.17)]. It is not known at what dose level fentanyl transdermal system may be discontinued without producing the signs and symptoms of opioid withdrawal.
Equaline Heartburn Reli...

Equaline Heartburn Relief

2.1 General Dosing Recommendations
• Ropinirole extended-release tablets are taken once daily, with or without food [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. • Tablets must be swallowed whole and must not be chewed, crushed, or divided. • If a significant interruption in therapy with ropinirole extended-release tablets has occurred, retitration of therapy may be warranted.
2.2 Dosing for Parkinson’s Disease

The starting dose is 2 mg taken once daily for 1 to 2 weeks, followed by increases of 2 mg/day at one week or longer intervals as appropriate, based on therapeutic response and tolerability. The maximum recommended dose of ropinirole extended-release tablets is 24 mg/day.

In clinical trials, dosage was initiated at 2 mg/day and gradually titrated based on individual patient therapeutic response and tolerability. Doses greater than 24 mg/day have not been studied in clinical trials. Patients should be assessed for therapeutic response and tolerability at a minimal interval of one week or longer after each dose increment. Monitor patients during dose titration because too rapid a rate of titration may lead to dose selection that may not provide additional benefit, but that may increase the risk of adverse reactions [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. Due to the flexible dosing design used in clinical trials, specific dose-response information could not be determined.

Ropinirole extended-release tablets should be discontinued gradually over a 7-day period.

Renal Impairment

No dose adjustment is necessary in patients with moderate renal impairment (creatinine clearance of 30 to 50 mL/min). The recommended initial dose of ropinirole extended-release tablets for patients with end-stage renal disease on hemodialysis is 2 mg once daily. Further dose escalations should be based on tolerability and need for efficacy. The recommended maximum total daily dose is 18 mg/day in patients receiving regular dialysis. Supplemental doses after dialysis are not required. The use of ropinirole extended-release tablets in patients with severe renal impairment without regular dialysis has not been studied.

2.3 Switching from Immediate-release Ropinirole Tablets to Ropinirole Extended-release Tablets

Patients may be switched directly from immediate-release ropinirole to ropinirole extended-release tablets. The initial dose of ropinirole extended-release tablets should most closely match the total daily dose of the immediate-release formulation of ropinirole, as shown in Table 1.
Table 1: Conversion from Immediate-release Ropinirole to Extended-release Ropinirole
Immediate-release Ropinirole

Tablets

Total Daily Dose (mg)

Ropinirole

Extended-release Tablets

Total Daily Dose (mg)

0.75 to 2.25

2

3 to 4.5

4

6

6

7.5 to 9

8

12

12

15

16

18

18

21

20

24

24

Following conversion to ropinirole extended-release tablets, the dose may be adjusted depending on therapeutic response and tolerability [see Dosage and Administration (2.2)].

2.4 Effect of Gastrointestinal Transit Time on Medication Release

Ropinirole extended-release tablets are designed to release medication over a 24-hour period. If rapid gastrointestinal transit occurs, there may be risk of incomplete release of medication and medication residue being passed in the stool.
Traumeel

Traumeel

Carbidopa and levodopa extended-release tablets contain carbidopa and levodopa in a 1:4 ratio as either the 50 mg/200 mg tablet or the 25 mg/100 mg tablet. The daily dosage of carbidopa and levodopa extended-release tablets must be determined by careful titration. Patients should be monitored closely during the dose adjustment period, particularly with regard to appearance or worsening of involuntary movements, dyskinesias or nausea. Carbidopa and levodopa extended-release tablets should not be chewed or crushed.

Standard drugs for Parkinson’s disease, other than levodopa without a decarboxylase inhibitor, may be used concomitantly while carbidopa and levodopa extended-release tablets are being administered, although their dosage may have to be adjusted.

Since carbidopa prevents the reversal of levodopa effects caused by pyridoxine, carbidopa and levodopa extended-release tablets can be given to patients receiving supplemental pyridoxine (vitamin B6).

Initial Dosage

Patients Currently Treated with Conventional Carbidopa-Levodopa Preparations

Studies show that peripheral dopa-decarboxylase is saturated by the bioavailable carbidopa at doses of 70 mg a day and greater. Because the bioavailabilities of carbidopa and levodopa in carbidopa and levodopa immediate-release tablets and carbidopa and levodopa extended-release tablets are different, appropriate adjustments should be made, as shown in Table 2.
Table 2: Approximate Bioavailabilities at Steady-State* * This table is only a guide to bioavailabilities since other factors such as food, drugs, and inter-patient variabilities may affect the bioavailability of carbidopa and levodopa. † The extent of availability of levodopa from carbidopa and levodopa extended-release tablets was about 70% to 75% relative to intravenous levodopa or standard carbidopa and levodopa immediate-release tablets in the elderly. ‡ The extent of availability of levodopa from carbidopa and levodopa immediate-release tablets was 99% relative to intravenous levodopa in the healthy elderly.
Tablet

Amount of Levodopa (mg) in Each Tablet

Approximate Bioavailability

Approximate Amount of Bioavailable Levodopa (mg) in Each Tablet

Carbidopa and LevodopaExtended-release Tablets50 mg/200 mg

200

0.70 to 0.75†

140 to 150

Carbidopa and LevodopaImmediate-release Tablets25 mg/100 mg

100

0.99‡

99

Dosage with carbidopa and levodopa extended-release tablets should be substituted at an amount that provides approximately 10% more levodopa per day, although this may need to be increased to a dosage that provides up to 30% more levodopa per day depending on clinical response (see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION: Titration with Carbidopa and Levodopa Extended-release Tablets). The interval between doses of carbidopa and levodopa extended-release tablets should be 4 to 8 hours during the waking day (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacodynamics).

A guideline for initiation of carbidopa and levodopa extended-release tablets is shown in Table 3.
Table 3: Guidelines for Initial Conversion from Carbidopa and Levodopa Immediate-release Tablets to Carbidopa and Levodopa Extended-release Tablets * For dosing ranges not shown in the table see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION: Initial Dosage: Patients Currently Treated with Conventional Carbidopa and Levodopa Preparations.
Carbidopa and Levodopa Immediate-release Tablets

Carbidopa and Levodopa Extended-release Tablets

Total Daily Dose* Levodopa (mg)

Suggested Dosage Regimen

300–400

200 mg b.i.d.

500–600

300 mg b.i.d. or200 mg t.i.d.

700–800

A total of 800 mg in 3 or more divided doses (e.g., 300 mg a.m., 300 mg early p.m. and 200 mg later p.m.)

900–1000

A total of 1000 mg in 3 or more divided doses (e.g., 400 mg a.m., 400 mg early p.m., and 200 mg later p.m.)

Patients Currently Treated with Levodopa Without a Decarboxylase Inhibitor

Levodopa must be discontinued at least 12 hours before therapy with carbidopa and levodopa extended-release tablets is started. Carbidopa and levodopa extended-release tablets should be substituted at a dosage that will provide approximately 25% of the previous levodopa dosage. In patients with mild to moderate disease, the initial dose is usually one tablet of 50 mg/200 mg carbidopa and levodopa extended-release tablets b.i.d.

Patients Not Receiving Levodopa

In patients with mild to moderate disease, the initial recommended dose is one tablet of 50 mg/200 mg carbidopa and levodopa extended-release tablets b.i.d. Initial dosage should not be given at intervals of less than 6 hours.

Titration with Carbidopa and Levodopa Extended-release Tablets

Following initiation of therapy, doses and dosing intervals may be increased or decreased depending upon therapeutic response. Most patients have been adequately treated with doses of carbidopa and levodopa extended-release tablets that provide 400 mg to 1600 mg of levodopa per day, administered as divided doses at intervals ranging from 4 to 8 hours during the waking day. Higher doses of carbidopa and levodopa extended-release tablets (2400 mg or more of levodopa per day) and shorter intervals (less than 4 hours) have been used, but are not usually recommended.

When doses of carbidopa and levodopa extended-release tablets are given at intervals of less than 4 hours, and/or if the divided doses are not equal, it is recommended that the smaller doses be given at the end of the day.

An interval of at least 3 days between dosage adjustments is recommended.

Maintenance

Because Parkinson's disease is progressive, periodic clinical evaluations are recommended; adjustment of the dosage regimen of carbidopa and levodopa extended-release tablets may be required.

Addition of Other Antiparkinson Medications

Anticholinergic agents, dopamine agonists, and amantadine can be given with carbidopa and levodopa extended-release tablets. Dosage adjustment of carbidopa and levodopa extended-release tablets may be necessary when these agents are added.

A dose of carbidopa and levodopa immediate-release tablets 25 mg/100 mg or 10 mg/100 mg (one half or a whole tablet) can be added to the dosage regimen of carbidopa and levodopa extended-release tablets in selected patients with advanced disease who need additional immediate-release levodopa for a brief time during daytime hours.

Interruption of Therapy

Sporadic cases of hyperpyrexia and confusion have been associated with dose reductions and withdrawal of carbidopa and levodopa immediate-release tablets or carbidopa and levodopa extended-release tablets.

Patients should be observed carefully if abrupt reduction or discontinuation of carbidopa and levodopa extended-release tablets is required, especially if the patient is receiving neuroleptics (see WARNINGS).

If general anesthesia is required, carbidopa and levodopa extended-release tablets may be continued as long as the patient is permitted to take oral medication. If therapy is interrupted temporarily, the patient should be observed for symptoms resembling NMS, and the usual dosage should be administered as soon as the patient is able to take oral medication.
Mycophenolate Mofetil C...

Mycophenolate Mofetil Capsule Mycophenolate Mofetil

Renal Transplantation

Adults

A dose of 1 g administered orally twice a day (daily dose of 2 g) is recommended for use in renal transplant patients. Although a dose of 1.5 g administered twice daily (daily dose of 3 g) was used in clinical trials and was shown to be safe and effective, no efficacy advantage could be established for renal transplant patients. Patients receiving 2 g/day of mycophenolate mofetil demonstrated an overall better safety profile than did patients receiving 3 g/day of mycophenolate mofetil.

Pediatrics (3 Months to 18 years of Age)

The recommended dose of mycophenolate mofetil oral suspension is 600 mg/m2 administered twice daily (up to a maximum daily dose of 2 g/10 mL oral suspension). Patients with a body surface area of 1.25 m2 to 1.5 m2 may be dosed with mycophenolate mofetil capsules at a dose of 750 mg twice daily (1.5 g daily dose). Patients with a body surface area > 1.5 m2 may be dosed with mycophenolate mofetil capsules or tablets at a dose of 1 g twice daily (2 g daily dose).

Cardiac Transplantation

Adults

A dose of 1.5 g bid oral (daily dose of 3 g) is recommended for use in adult cardiac transplant patients.

Hepatic Transplantation

Adults

A dose of 1.5 g bid oral (daily dose of 3 g) is recommended for use in adult hepatic transplant patients.

Mycophenolate Mofetil Capsules and Tablets

The initial oral dose of mycophenolate mofetil should be given as soon as possible following renal, cardiac or hepatic transplantation. Food had no effect on MPA AUC, but has been shown to decrease MPA Cmax by 40%. Therefore, it is recommended that mycophenolate mofetil be administered on an empty stomach. However, in stable renal transplant patients, mycophenolate mofetil may be administered with food if necessary.

Patients should be instructed to take a missed dose as soon as they remember, except if it is near the next scheduled dose, and then continue to take mycophenolate mofetil at the usual times.

Patients with Hepatic Impairment

No dose adjustments are recommended for renal patients with severe hepatic parenchymal disease. However, it is not known whether dose adjustments are needed for hepatic disease with other etiologies (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics).

No data are available for cardiac transplant patients with severe hepatic parenchymal disease.

Geriatrics

The recommended oral dose of 1 g bid for renal transplant patients, 1.5 g bid for cardiac transplant patients, and 1.5 g bid administered orally in hepatic transplant patients is appropriate for elderly patients (see PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).

Dosage Adjustments

In renal transplant patients with severe chronic renal impairment (GFR < 25 mL/min/1.73 m2) outside the immediate posttransplant period, doses of mycophenolate mofetil greater than 1 g administered twice a day should be avoided. These patients should also be carefully observed. No dose adjustments are needed in renal transplant patients experiencing delayed graft function postoperatively (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics and PRECAUTIONS: Patients with Renal Impairment).

No data are available for cardiac or hepatic transplant patients with severe chronic renal impairment. Mycophenolate mofetil may be used for cardiac or hepatic transplant patients with severe chronic renal impairment if the potential benefits outweigh the potential risks.

If neutropenia develops (ANC < 1.3 x 103/µL), dosing with mycophenolate mofetil should be interrupted or the dose reduced, appropriate diagnostic tests performed, and the patient managed appropriately (see WARNINGS: Neutropenia, ADVERSE REACTIONS, and PRECAUTIONS: Laboratory Tests).
Ringers

Ringers

To achieve maximum contraceptive effectiveness, norethindrone tablets must be taken exactly as directed. One tablet is taken every day, at the same time. Administration is continuous, with no interruption between pill packs. See Detailed Patient Labeling for detailed instruction.
Carbidopa

Carbidopa

Carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets should be used as a substitute for patients already stabilized on equivalent doses of carbidopa/levodopa and entacapone. However, some patients who have been stabilized on a given dose of carbidopa/levodopa may be treated with carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets if a decision has been made to add entacapone (see below). Therapy should be individualized and adjusted according to the desired therapeutic response.

2.1 Dosing Information

The optimum daily dosage of carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets must be determined by careful titration in each patient.

Clinical experience with daily doses above 1,600 mg of entacapone is limited. The maximum recommended daily dose of carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets depends on the strength used. The maximum number of tablets to be used in a 24-hour period is less with the highest strength (carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets, 50 mg per 200 mg per 200 mg) than with lower strengths (see Table 1). Studies show that peripheral dopa decarboxylase is saturated by carbidopa at approximately 70 mg per day to 100 mg per day. Patients receiving less than this amount of carbidopa are more likely to experience nausea and vomiting.
Table 1: Maximum Recommended Dose of Carbidopa, Levodopa and Entacapone Tablets in a 24-hour Period
Carbidopa, Levodopa and Entacapone Tablets Dosage Strength

Maximum Number of Tablets in a 24-hour Period

12.5 mg per 50 mg per 200 mg,

18.75 mg per 75 mg per 200 mg,

25 mg per 100 mg per 200 mg,

31.25 mg per 125 mg per 200 mg,

37.5 mg per 150 mg per 200 mg

8

50 mg per 200 mg per 200 mg

6

2.2 Converting Patients from Carbidopa, Levodopa, and Entacapone to Carbidopa, Levodopa and Entacapone Tablets

Patients currently treated with entacapone 200 mg with each dose of non-extended release carbidopa/levodopa tablet, can switch to the corresponding strength of carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets containing the same amounts of levodopa and carbidopa. For example, patients receiving one tablet of carbidopa/levodopa 25 mg/100 mg and one tablet of entacapone 200 mg at each administration can switch to a single carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablet (containing 25 mg of carbidopa, 100 mg of levodopa and 200 mg of entacapone).

2.3 Converting Patients from Carbidopa and Levodopa Products to Carbidopa, Levodopa and Entacapone Tablets

There is no experience in transferring patients currently treated with extended release formulations of carbidopa/levodopa, or carbidopa/levodopa products that are not combined in a 1:4 ratio of carbidopa to levodopa.

Patients with a history of moderate or severe dyskinesias or taking more than 600 mg of the levodopa component per day are likely to require a reduction in their daily levodopa dose when entacapone is added. Because dose adjustment of the individual carbidopa or levodopa component is not possible with fixed-dose products, initially titrate patients to a dose that is tolerated and that meets their individual therapeutic need using a separate carbidopa/levodopa tablet (1:4 ratio) plus an entacapone tablet. Once the patient’s individual dose of carbidopa/levodopa plus entacapone dose has been established using two separate tablets; switch the patient to a corresponding single tablet of carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone.

When less levodopa is required, reduce the total daily dosage of carbidopa/levodopa either by decreasing the strength of carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets at each administration or by decreasing the frequency of administration by extending the time between doses.

2.4 Concomitant Use with Other Anti-Parkinson’s Disease Drugs

Anticholinergic agents, dopamine agonists, monoamine oxidase (MAO) - B inhibitors, amantadine, and other standard drugs for Parkinson's disease may be used concomitantly while carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets are being administered; however, dosage adjustments of the concomitant medication or carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets may be required.

2.5 Decrease or Interruption of Dosing

Avoid interruption of carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets dosing because hyperpyrexia has been reported in patients who suddenly discontinue or reduce their use of levodopa [see Warnings and Precautions (5.7)].

2.6 Important Administration Instructions

Do not split, crush or chew carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets. Administer only one tablet at each dosing interval. All strengths of carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets contain 200 mg of entacapone. Combining multiple tablets or portions of tablets to achieve a higher levodopa dose may lead to an overdose of entacapone.

Administer carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets with or without food. However, a high-fat, high-calorie meal may delay the absorption of levodopa by about 2 hours [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Daytime Sinus Pain And ...

Daytime Sinus Pain And Congestion Relief

If terazosin capsule administration is discontinued for several days, therapy should be reinstituted using the initial dosing regimen.

Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia

Initial Dose

1 mg at bedtime is the starting dose for all patients, and this dose should not be exceeded as an initial dose. Patients should be closely followed during initial administration in order to minimize the risk of severe hypotensive response.

Subsequent Doses

The dose should be increased in a stepwise fashion to 2 mg, 5 mg, or 10 mg once daily to achieve the desired improvement of symptoms and/or flow rates. Doses of 10 mg once daily are generally required for the clinical response. Therefore, treatment with 10 mg for a minimum of 4 to 6 weeks may be required to assess whether a beneficial response has been achieved. Some patients may not achieve a clinical response despite appropriate titration. Although some additional patients responded at a 20 mg daily dose, there was an insufficient number of patients studied to draw definitive conclusions about this dose. There are insufficient data to support the use of higher doses for those patients who show inadequate or no response to 20 mg daily. If terazosin capsule administration is discontinued for several days or longer, therapy should be reinstituted using the initial dosing regimen.

Use With Other Drugs

Caution should be observed when terazosin capsules are administered concomitantly with other antihypertensive agents, especially the calcium channel blocker verapamil, to avoid the possibility of developing significant hypotension. When using terazosin capsules and other antihypertensive agents concomitantly, dosage reduction and retitration of either agent may be necessary (see PRECAUTIONS). Hypotension has been reported when terazosin capsules have been used with phosphodiesterase-5 (PDE-5) inhibitors.

Hypertension

The dose of terazosin capsules and the dose interval (12 or 24 hours) should be adjusted according to the patient's individual blood pressure response. The following is a guide to its administration:

Initial Dose

1 mg at bedtime is the starting dose for all patients, and this dose should not be exceeded. This initial dosing regimen should be strictly observed to minimize the potential for severe hypotensive effects.

Subsequent Doses

The dose may be slowly increased to achieve the desired blood pressure response. The usual recommended dose range is 1 mg to 5 mg administered once a day; however, some patients may benefit from doses as high as 20 mg per day. Doses over 20 mg do not appear to provide further blood pressure effect and doses over 40 mg have not been studied. Blood pressure should be monitored at the end of the dosing interval to be sure control is maintained throughout the interval. It may also be helpful to measure blood pressure 2 to 3 hours after dosing to see if the maximum and minimum responses are similar, and to evaluate symptoms such as dizziness or palpitations which can result from excessive hypotensive response. If response is substantially diminished at 24 hours an increased dose or use of a twice daily regimen can be considered. If terazosin capsule administration is discontinued for several days or longer, therapy should be reinstituted using the initial dosing regimen. In clinical trials, except for the initial dose, the dose was given in the morning.

Use With Other Drugs

(see above)
Clindamycin Phosphate A...

Clindamycin Phosphate And Benzoyl Peroxide Kit

Clindamycin Phosphate and Benzoyl Peroxide Gel, 1%/5% should be applied twice daily, morning and evening, or as directed by a physician, to affected areas after the skin is gently washed, rinsed with warm water and patted dry.
Good Sense Pain Relief

Good Sense Pain Relief

2.1 Adults – Treatment of HIV-1 Infection

Oral Dosing

The recommended oral dose of zidovudine tablets is 300 mg twice daily in combination with other antiretroviral agents.

2.2 Pediatric Patients (Aged 4 Weeks to Less Than 18 Years)

Healthcare professionals should pay special attention to accurate calculation of the dose of zidovudine tablets, transcription of the medication order, dispensing information, and dosing instructions to minimize risk for medication dosing errors.

Prescribers should calculate the appropriate dose of zidovudine tablets for each child based on body weight (kg) and should not exceed the recommended adult dose.

Before prescribing zidovudine tablets, children should be assessed for the ability to swallow tablets. If a child is unable to reliably swallow a zidovudine tablet, the zidovudine syrup formulation should be prescribed.

The recommended oral dosage in pediatric patients aged 4 weeks to less than 18 years and weighing greater than or equal to 4 kg is provided in Table 1. Zidovudine syrup should be used to provide accurate dosage when whole tablets are not appropriate.
Table 1: Recommended Pediatric Oral Dosage of Zidovudine Tablets
Body Weight (kg)

Total Daily Dose

Dosage Regimen and Dose

Twice Daily

Three Times Daily

4 to < 9

24 mg/kg/day

12 mg/kg

8 mg/kg

≥ 9 to < 30

18 mg/kg/day

9 mg/kg

6 mg/kg

≥ 30

600 mg/day

300 mg

200 mg

Alternatively, dosing for zidovudine tablets can be based on body surface area (BSA) for each child. The recommended oral dose of zidovudine tablets is 480 mg per m2 per day in divided doses (240 mg per m2 twice daily or 160 mg per m2 three times daily). In some cases the dose calculated by mg per kg will not be the same as that calculated by BSA.

2.3 Prevention of Maternal-Fetal HIV-1 Transmission

The recommended dosage regimen for administration to pregnant women (greater than 14 weeks of pregnancy) and their neonates is:

Maternal Dosing

100 mg orally 5 times per day until the start of labor [see Clinical Studies (14.3)]. During labor and delivery, intravenous zidovudine should be administered at 2 mg per kg (total body weight) over 1 hour followed by a continuous intravenous infusion of 1 mg per kg per hour (total body weight) until clamping of the umbilical cord.

Neonatal Dosing

Start neonatal dosing within 12 hours after birth and continue through 6 weeks of age. Neonates unable to receive oral dosing may be administered zidovudine intravenously. See Table 2.
Table 2. Recommended Neonatal Dosages of Zidovudine
Route

Total Daily Dose

Dose and Dosage Regimen

Oral

8 mg/kg/day

2 mg/kg every 6 hours

Intravenous

6 mg/kg/day

1.5 mg/kg infused over 30 minutes, every 6 hours

2.4 Patients with Severe Anemia and/or Neutropenia

Significant anemia (hemoglobin less than 7.5 g per dL or reduction greater than 25% of baseline) and/or significant neutropenia (granulocyte count less than 750 cells per mm3 or reduction greater than 50% from baseline) may require a dose interruption until evidence of marrow recovery is observed [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)]. In patients who develop significant anemia, dose interruption does not necessarily eliminate the need for transfusion. If marrow recovery occurs following dose interruption, resumption in dose may be appropriate using adjunctive measures such as epoetin alfa at recommended doses, depending on hematologic indices such as serum erythropoietin level and patient tolerance.

2.5 Patients with Renal Impairment

In patients maintained on hemodialysis or peritoneal dialysis or with creatinine clearance (CrCl) by Cockcroft-Gault less than 15 mL per min, the recommended oral dosage is 100 mg every 6 to 8 hours [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.6 Patients with Hepatic Impairment

There are insufficient data to recommend dose adjustment of zidovudine tablets in patients with impaired hepatic function or liver cirrhosis. Frequent monitoring of hematologic toxicities is advised [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7)].
Verapamil Hydrochloride...

Verapamil Hydrochloride

Essential Hypertension

The dose of verapamil hydrochloride extended-release tablets should be individualized by titration and the drug should be administered with food. Initiate therapy with 180 mg of verapamil hydrochloride extended-release tablets given in the morning. Lower initial doses of 120 mg a day may be warranted in patients who may have an increased response to verapamil (e.g., the elderly or small people). Upward titration should be based on therapeutic efficacy and safety evaluated weekly and approximately 24 hours after the previous dose. The antihypertensive effects of verapamil hydrochloride extended-release tablets are evident within the first week of therapy.

If adequate response is not obtained with 180 mg of verapamil hydrochloride extended-release tablets, the dose may be titrated upward in the following manner:
1. 240 mg each morning, 2. 180 mg each morning plus 180 mg each evening; or 240 mg each morning plus 120 mg each evening, 3. 240 mg every 12 hours.
When switching from verapamil hydrochloride immediate-release tablets to verapamil hydrochloride extended-release tablets, the total daily dose in milligrams may remain the same.
Loratadine

Loratadine

adults and children 6 years and over

1 tablet daily; not more than 1 tablet in 24 hours

children under 6 years of age

ask a doctor

consumers with liver of kidney disease

ask a doctor
Lansoprazole

Lansoprazole

Lansoprazole is available as a capsule, and is available in 15 mg and 30 mg strengths. Directions for use specific to the route and available methods of administration for this dosage form are presented below. Lansoprazole delayed-release capsules should be taken before eating. Lansoprazole delayed-release capsules SHOULD NOT BE CRUSHED OR CHEWED. In the clinical trials, antacids were used concomitantly with lansoprazole delayed-release capsules.

2.1 Recommended Dose
* Please refer to amoxicillin and clarithromycin full prescribing information for CONTRAINDICATIONS and WARNINGS, and for information regarding dosing in elderly and renally-impaired patients. † Controlled studies did not extend beyond indicated duration. ‡ For patients who do not heal with lansoprazole delayed-release capsules for 8 weeks (5% to 10%), it may be helpful to give an additional 8 weeks of treatment. If there is a recurrence of erosive esophagitis, an additional 8 week course of lansoprazole delayed-release capsules may be considered. § The lansoprazole delayed-release capsule dose was increased (up to 30 mg twice daily) in some pediatric patients after 2 or more weeks of treatment if they remained symptomatic. For pediatric patients unable to swallow an intact capsule please see Administration Options. ¶ Controlled studies did not extend beyond 12 months. # Varies with individual patient. Recommended adult starting dose is 60 mg once daily. Doses should be adjusted to individual patient needs and should continue for as long as clinically indicated. Dosages up to 90 mg twice daily have been administered. Daily dose of greater than 120 mg should be administered in divided doses. Some patients with Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome have been treated continuously with lansoprazole delayed-release capsules for more than 4 years.
Indication

Recommended Dose

Frequency

Duodenal Ulcers

     Short-Term Treatment

15 mg

Once daily for 4 weeks

     Maintenance of Healed

15 mg

Once daily

H. pylori Eradication to Reduce the Risk of Duodenal Ulcer Recurrence*

     Triple Therapy:

         Lansoprazole

30 mg

Twice daily (q12h) for 10 or 14 days

         Amoxicillin

1 gram

Twice daily (q12h) for 10 or 14 days

         Clarithromycin

500 mg

Twice daily (q12h) for 10 or 14 days

     Dual Therapy:

         Lansoprazole

30 mg

Three times daily (q8h) for 14 days

         Amoxicillin

1 gram

Three times daily (q8h) for 14 days

Benign Gastric Ulcer

     Short-Term Treatment

30 mg

Once daily for up to 8 weeks

NSAID-Associated Gastric Ulcer

     Healing

30 mg

Once daily for 8 weeks†

     Risk Reduction

15 mg

Once daily for up to 12 weeks†

Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)

     Short-Term Treatment of Symptomatic GERD

15 mg

Once daily for up to 8 weeks

     Short-Term Treatment of Erosive Esophagitis

30 mg

Once daily for up to 8 weeks‡

Pediatric

(1 to 11 Years of Age)

Short-Term Treatment of Symptomatic GERD and Short-Term Treatment of Erosive Esophagitis

     ≤ 30 kg

15 mg

Once daily for up to 12 weeks§

     > 30 kg

30 mg

Once daily for up to 12 weeks§

(12 to 17 Years of Age)

Short-Term Treatment of Symptomatic GERD

     Nonerosive GERD

15 mg

Once daily for up to 8 weeks

     Erosive Esophagitis

30 mg

Once daily for up to 8 weeks

Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis

15 mg

Once daily¶

Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions Including Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome

60 mg

Once daily#

Patients should be instructed that if a dose is missed, it should be taken as soon as possible. However, if the next scheduled dose is due, the patient should not take the missed dose, and should be instructed to take the next dose on time. Patients should be instructed not to take two doses at one time to make up for a missed dose.

2.2 Special Populations

Renal impairment patients and geriatric patients do not require dosage adjustment. However, consider dose adjustment in patients with severe liver impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5, 8.6 and 8.7)].

2.3 Important Administration Information

Administration Options

Lansoprazole Delayed-release Capsules – Oral Administration
• Lansoprazole delayed-release capsules should be swallowed whole. • Alternatively, for patients who have difficulty swallowing capsules, lansoprazole delayed-release capsules can be opened and administered as follows: o Open capsule. o Sprinkle intact pellets on one tablespoon of either applesauce, ENSURE pudding, cottage cheese, yogurt or strained pears. o Swallow immediately. • Lansoprazole delayed-release capsules may also be emptied into a small volume of either apple juice, orange juice or tomato juice and administered as follows: o Open capsule. o Sprinkle intact pellets into a small volume of either apple juice, orange juice or tomato juice (60 mL – approximately 2 ounces). o Mix briefly. o Swallow immediately. o To ensure complete delivery of the dose, the glass should be rinsed with two or more volumes of juice and the contents swallowed immediately.
Lansoprazole Delayed-release Capsules – Nasogastric Tube (≥ 16 French) Administration
• For patients who have a nasogastric tube in place, lansoprazole delayed-release capsules can be administered as follows: o Open capsule. o Mix intact pellets into 40 mL of apple juice. DO NOT USE OTHER LIQUIDS. o Inject through the nasogastric tube into the stomach. o Flush with additional apple juice to clear the tube.
USE IN OTHER FOODS AND LIQUIDS HAS NOT BEEN STUDIED CLINICALLY AND IS THEREFORE NOT RECOMMENDED.
Acyclovir Ointment

Acyclovir Ointment

Apply sufficient quantity to adequately cover all lesions every 3 hours, 6 times per day for 7 days. The dose size per application will vary depending upon the total lesion area but should approximate a one-half inch ribbon of ointment per 4 square inches of surface area. A finger cot or rubber glove should be used when applying acyclovir ointment to prevent autoinoculation of other body sites and transmission of infection to other persons. Therapy should be initiated as early as possible following onset of signs and symptoms.
Sodium Chloride

Sodium Chloride

There is currently no dosage information available for this product. We apologize for any inconvenience.
In Control Nicotine

In Control Nicotine

Initial Treatment

Dosage for Adults

Major Depressive Disorder and Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder

Sertraline tablet treatment should be administered at a dose of 50 mg once daily.

Panic Disorder, Posttraumatic Stress Disorder and Social Anxiety Disorder

Sertraline tablet treatment should be initiated with a dose of 25 mg once daily. After one week, the dose should be increased to 50 mg once daily.

While a relationship between dose and effect has not been established for major depressive disorder, OCD, panic disorder, PTSD, or social anxiety disorder, patients were dosed in a range of 50 to 200 mg/day in the clinical trials demonstrating the effectiveness of sertraline hydrochloride tablets for the treatment of these indications. Consequently, a dose of 50 mg, administered once daily, is recommended as the initial therapeutic dose. Patients not responding to a 50 mg dose may benefit from dose increases up to a maximum of 200 mg/day. Given the 24 hour elimination half-life of sertraline, dose changes should not occur at intervals of less than one week.

Premenstrual Dysphoric Disorder

Sertraline tablet treatment should be initiated with a dose of 50 mg/day, either daily throughout the menstrual cycle or limited to the luteal phase of the menstrual cycle, depending on physician assessment.

While a relationship between dose and effect has not been established for PMDD, patients were dosed in the range of 50 to 150 mg/day with dose increases at the onset of each new menstrual cycle (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Trials). Patients not responding to a 50 mg/day dose may benefit from dose increases (at 50 mg increments/menstrual cycle) up to 150 mg/day when dosing daily throughout the menstrual cycle, or 100 mg/day when dosing during the luteal phase of the menstrual cycle. If a 100 mg/day dose has been established with luteal phase dosing, a 50 mg/day titration step for 3 days should be utilized at the beginning of each luteal phase dosing period.

Sertraline hydrochloride tablets should be administered once daily, either in the morning or evening.

Dosage for Pediatric Population (Children and Adolescents)

Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder

Sertraline tablet treatment should be initiated with a dose of 25 mg once daily in children (ages 6 to 12) and at a dose of 50 mg once daily in adolescents (ages 13 to 17).

While a relationship between dose and effect has not been established for OCD, patients were dosed in a range of 25 to 200 mg/day in the clinical trials demonstrating the effectiveness of sertraline for pediatric patients (6 to 17 years) with OCD. Patients not responding to an initial dose of 25 or 50 mg/day may benefit from dose increases up to a maximum of 200 mg/day. For children with OCD, their generally lower body weights compared to adults should be taken into consideration in advancing the dose, in order to avoid excess dosing. Given the 24 hour elimination half-life of sertraline, dose changes should not occur at intervals of less than one week.

Sertraline hydrochloride tablets should be administered once daily, either in the morning or evening.

Maintenance/Continuation/Extended Treatment

Major Depressive Disorder

It is generally agreed that acute episodes of major depressive disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacologic therapy beyond response to the acute episode. Systematic evaluation of sertraline hydrochloride tablets has demonstrated that its antidepressant efficacy is maintained for periods of up to 44 weeks following 8 weeks of initial treatment at a dose of 50 to 200 mg/day (mean dose of 70 mg/day) (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Trials). It is not known whether the dose of sertraline hydrochloride tablets needed for maintenance treatment is identical to the dose needed to achieve an initial response. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Posttraumatic Stress Disorder

It is generally agreed that PTSD requires several months or longer of sustained pharmacological therapy beyond response to initial treatment. Systematic evaluation of sertraline has demonstrated that its efficacy in PTSD is maintained for periods of up to 28 weeks following 24 weeks of treatment at a dose of 50 to 200 mg/day (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Trials). It is not known whether the dose of sertraline hydrochloride tablets needed for maintenance treatment is identical to the dose needed to achieve an initial response. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Social Anxiety Disorder

Social anxiety disorder is a chronic condition that may require several months or longer of sustained pharmacological therapy beyond response to initial treatment. Systematic evaluation of sertraline has demonstrated that its efficacy in social anxiety disorder is maintained for periods of up to 24 weeks following 20 weeks of treatment at a dose of 50 to 200 mg/day (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Trials). Dosage adjustments should be made to maintain patients on the lowest effective dose and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for long-term treatment.

Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder and Panic Disorder

It is generally agreed that OCD and panic disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacological therapy beyond response to initial treatment. Systematic evaluation of continuing sertraline hydrochloride tablets for periods of up to 28 weeks in patients with OCD and panic disorder who have responded while taking sertraline hydrochloride tablets during initial treatment phases of 24 to 52 weeks of treatment at a dose range of 50 to 200 mg/day has demonstrated a benefit of such maintenance treatment (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Trials). It is not known whether the dose of sertraline hydrochloride tablets needed for maintenance treatment is identical to the dose needed to achieve an initial response. Nevertheless, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Premenstrual Dysphoric Disorder

The effectiveness of sertraline in long-term use, that is, for more than three menstrual cycles, has not been systematically evaluated in controlled trials. However, as women commonly report that symptoms worsen with age until relieved by the onset of menopause, it is reasonable to consider continuation of a responding patient. Dosage adjustments, which may include changes between dosage regimens (e.g., daily throughout the menstrual cycle vs. during the luteal phase of the menstrual cycle), may be needed to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

Switching Patients to or from a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with sertraline hydrochloride tablets. Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping sertraline hydrochloride tablets before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Use of Sertraline Hydrochloride Tablets with other MAOIs such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start sertraline hydrochloride tablets in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

In some cases, a patient already receiving sertraline tablet therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, sertraline hydrochloride tablets should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with sertraline hydrochloride tablets may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue (see WARNINGS).

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with sertraline hydrochloride tablets is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use (see WARNINGS).

Special Populations

Dosage for Hepatically Impaired Patients

The use of sertraline in patients with liver disease should be approached with caution. The effects of sertraline in patients with moderate and severe hepatic impairment have not been studied. If sertraline is administered to patients with liver impairment, a lower or less frequent dose should be used (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY and PRECAUTIONS).

Treatment of Pregnant Women During the Third Trimester

Neonates exposed to sertraline and other SSRIs or SNRIs, late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support and tube feeding (see PRECAUTIONS). When treating pregnant women with sertraline during the third trimester, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and benefits of treatment.

Discontinuation of Treatment with Sertraline Hydrochloride Tablets

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of sertraline hydrochloride tablets and other SSRIs and SNRIs, have been reported (see PRECAUTIONS). Patients should be monitored for these symptoms when discontinuing treatment. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, then resuming the previously prescribed dose may be considered. Subsequently, the physician may continue decreasing the dose but at a more gradual rate.
Ciprofloxacin

Ciprofloxacin

2.1 Dosage

Ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets and ciprofloxacin immediate-release tablets are not interchangeable. Ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets should be administered orally once daily (Table 1).
Table 1: Dosage Guidelines
Indication

Dose

Frequency

Usual Duration

Uncomplicated Urinary Tract Infection (Acute Cystitis)

500 mg

every 24 hours

3 Days

Complicated Urinary Tract Infection and Acute Uncomplicated Pyelonephritis

1000 mg

every 24 hours

7 to 14 Days

Patients whose therapy is started with ciprofloxacin IV for UTIs may be switched to ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets when clinically indicated at the discretion of the physician.

2.2 Administration
• Ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets should be taken whole and not split, crushed, or chewed. • Ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets should be administered at least 2 hours before or 6 hours after antacids containing magnesium or aluminum, polymeric phosphate binders (for example, sevelamer, lanthanum carbonate), as well as sucralfate, VIDEX ®‡ (didanosine) chewable/buffered tablets or pediatric powder, other highly buffered drugs, metal cations such as iron, and multivitamin preparations with zinc [see Drug Interactions (7)]. • Concomitant administration of ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets with dairy products (like milk or yogurt) or with calcium-fortified products alone should be avoided since decreased absorption is possible. A 2 hour window between substantial calcium intake (greater than 800 mg) and dosing with ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets is recommended [see Patient Counseling Information (17)]. • Adequate hydration of patients receiving ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets should be maintained to prevent the formation of highly concentrated urine. Crystalluria has been reported with quinolones [see Warnings and Precautions (5.12), Adverse Reactions (6.1) and Patient Counseling Information (17)].
2.3 Impaired Renal Function
• In patients with cUTI and acute uncomplicated pyelonephritis with a creatinine clearance of ≤ 30 mL/min, the dose of ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets should be reduced from 1000 mg to 500 mg daily. The use of ciprofloxacin 1000 mg extended-release tablets is not recommended in this patient population. • For patients on hemodialysis or peritoneal dialysis, administer ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets after the dialysis procedure is completed (maximum dose should be ciprofloxacin 500 mg extended-release tablets every 24 hours). The use of ciprofloxacin 1000 mg extended-release tablets is not recommended in this patient population [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. • For patients on continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis (CAPD), the maximum dose should be 500 mg every 24 hours.
Carbidopa And Levodopa

Carbidopa And Levodopa

Instructions for Use/Handling Carbidopa and Levodopa Orally Disintegrating Tablets

Just prior to administration, GENTLY remove the tablet from the bottle with dry hands. IMMEDIATELY place the carbidopa and levodopa orally disintegrating tablet on top of the tongue where it will dissolve in seconds, then swallow with saliva. Administration with liquid is not necessary.

The optimum daily dosage of carbidopa and levodopa orally disintegrating tablets must be determined by careful titration in each patient. Carbidopa and levodopa orally disintegrating tablets are available in a 1:4 ratio of carbidopa to levodopa (carbidopa and levodopa orally disintegrating tablets 25 mg/100 mg) as well as 1:10 ratio (carbidopa and levodopa orally disintegrating tablets 25 mg/250 mg and carbidopa and levodopa orally disintegrating tablets 10 mg/100 mg). Tablets of the two ratios may be given separately or combined as needed to provide the optimum dosage.

Studies show that peripheral dopa decarboxylase is saturated by carbidopa at approximately 70 mg to 100 mg a day. Patients receiving less than this amount of carbidopa are more likely to experience nausea and vomiting.

Usual Initial Dosage

Dosage is best initiated with one carbidopa and levodopa orally disintegrating tablet 25 mg/100 mg 3 times a day. This dosage schedule provides 75 mg of carbidopa per day. Dosage may be increased by one tablet every day or every other day, as necessary, until a dosage of eight carbidopa and levodopa orally disintegrating tablets 25 mg/100 mg a day is reached.

If carbidopa and levodopa orally disintegrating tablets 10 mg/100 mg are used, dosage may be initiated with one tablet 3 or 4 times a day. However, this will not provide an adequate amount of carbidopa for many patients. Dosage may be increased by one tablet every day or every other day until a total of eight tablets (two tablets q.i.d.) is reached.

How to Transfer Patients from Levodopa

Levodopa must be discontinued at least twelve hours before starting carbidopa and levodopa orally disintegrating tablets. A daily dosage of carbidopa and levodopa orally disintegrating tablets should be chosen that will provide approximately 25 percent of the previous levodopa dosage. Patients who are taking less than 1500 mg of levodopa a day should be started on one carbidopa and levodopa orally disintegrating tablet 25 mg/100 mg 3 or 4 times a day. The suggested starting dosage for most patients taking more than 1500 mg of levodopa is one carbidopa and levodopa orally disintegrating tablet 25 mg/250 mg 3 or 4 times a day.

Maintenance

Therapy should be individualized and adjusted according to the desired therapeutic response. At least 70 mg to 100 mg of carbidopa per day should be provided. When a greater proportion of carbidopa is required, one carbidopa and levodopa orally disintegrating tablet 25 mg/100 mg may be substituted for each carbidopa and levodopa orally disintegrating tablet 10 mg/100 mg. When more levodopa is required, carbidopa and levodopa orally disintegrating 25 mg/250 mg tablets should be substituted for carbidopa and levodopa orally disintegrating 25 mg/100 mg tablets or carbidopa and levodopa orally disintegrating 10 mg/100 mg tablets. If necessary, the dosage of carbidopa and levodopa orally disintegrating tablet 25 mg/250 mg tablets may be increased by one-half or one tablet every day or every other day to a maximum of eight tablets a day. Experience with total daily dosages of carbidopa greater than 200 mg is limited.

Because both therapeutic and adverse responses occur more rapidly with carbidopa and levodopa orally disintegrating tablets than with levodopa alone, patients should be monitored closely during the dose adjustment period. Specifically, involuntary movements will occur more rapidly with carbidopa and levodopa orally disintegrating tablets than with levodopa. The occurrence of involuntary movements may require dosage reduction. Blepharospasm may be a useful early sign of excess dosage in some patients.

Addition of Other Antiparkinsonian Medications

Standard drugs for Parkinson's disease, other than levodopa without a decarboxylase inhibitor, may be used concomitantly while carbidopa and levodopa orally disintegrating tablets are being administered, although dosage adjustments may be required.

Interruption of Therapy

Sporadic cases of a symptom complex resembling Neuroleptic Malignant Syndrome (NMS) have been associated with dose reductions and withdrawal of carbidopa and levodopa. Patients should be observed carefully if abrupt reduction or discontinuation of carbidopa and levodopa orally disintegrating tablets is required, especially if the patient is receiving neuroleptics. (See WARNINGS.)

If general anesthesia is required, carbidopa and levodopa orally disintegrating tablets may be continued as long as the patient is permitted to take fluids and medication by mouth. If therapy is interrupted temporarily, the patient should be observed for symptoms resembling NMS, and the usual daily dosage may be administered as soon as the patient is able to take oral medication.
Amlodipine Besylate

Amlodipine Besylate

2.1 Adults

The usual initial antihypertensive oral dose of amlodipine besylate tablets is 5 mg once daily, and the maximum dose is 10 mg once daily.

Small, fragile, or elderly patients, or patients with hepatic insufficiency may be started on 2.5 mg once daily and this dose may be used when adding amlodipine besylate tablets to other antihypertensive therapy.

Adjust dosage according to blood pressure goals. In general, wait 7 to 14 days between titration steps. Titrate more rapidly, however, if clinically warranted, provided the patient is assessed frequently.

Angina

The recommended dose for chronic stable or vasospastic angina is 5 mg to 10 mg, with the lower dose suggested in the elderly and in patients with hepatic insufficiency. Most patients will require 10 mg for adequate effect.

Coronary Artery Disease

The recommended dose range for patients with coronary artery disease is 5 mg to 10 mg once daily. In clinical studies, the majority of patients required 10 mg [see Clinical Studies (14.4)].

2.2 Children

The effective antihypertensive oral dose in pediatric patients ages 6 to 17 years is 2.5 mg to 5 mg once daily. Doses in excess of 5 mg daily have not been studied in pediatric patients [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.4), Clinical Studies (14.1)].
Alendronate Sodium

Alendronate Sodium

2.1 Treatment of Osteoporosis in Postmenopausal Women

The recommended dosage is:
• one 70 mg tablet once weekly or • one 10 mg tablet once daily
2.2 Prevention of Osteoporosis in Postmenopausal Women

The recommended dosage is:
• one 35 mg tablet once weekly or • one 5 mg tablet once daily
2.3 Treatment to Increase Bone Mass in Men with Osteoporosis

The recommended dosage is:
• one 70 mg tablet once weekly or • one 10 mg tablet once daily
2.4 Treatment of Glucocorticoid-Induced Osteoporosis

The recommended dosage is one 5 mg tablet once daily, except for postmenopausal women not receiving estrogen, for whom the recommended dosage is one 10 mg tablet once daily.

2.5 Treatment of Paget's Disease of Bone

The recommended treatment regimen is 40 mg once a day for 6 months.

Re-treatment of Paget’s Disease

Re-treatment with alendronate sodium tablets may be considered, following a 6-month post-treatment evaluation period in patients who have relapsed, based on increases in serum alkaline phosphatase, which should be measured periodically. Re-treatment may also be considered in those who failed to normalize their serum alkaline phosphatase.

2.6 Important Administration Instructions

Instruct patients to do the following:
• Take alendronate sodium tablets at least one-half hour before the first food, beverage, or medication of the day with plain water only [see Patient Counseling Information (17.2)]. Other beverages (including mineral water), food, and some medications are likely to reduce the absorption of alendronate sodium tablets [see Drug Interactions (7.1)]. Waiting less than 30 minutes, or taking alendronate sodium tablets with food, beverages (other than plain water) or other medications will lessen the effect of alendronate sodium by decreasing its absorption into the body. • Take alendronate sodium tablets upon arising for the day. To facilitate delivery to the stomach and thus reduce the potential for esophageal irritation, an alendronate sodium tablet should be swallowed with a full glass of water (6 to 8 oz). Patients should not lie down for at least 30 minutes and until after their first food of the day. Alendronate sodium tablets should not be taken at bedtime or before arising for the day. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of esophageal adverse experiences [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1) and Patient Counseling Information (17.2)].
2.7 Recommendations for Calcium and Vitamin D Supplementation

Instruct patients to take supplemental calcium if dietary intake is inadequate [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)]. Patients at increased risk for vitamin D insufficiency (e.g., over the age of 70 years, nursing home-bound, or chronically ill) may need vitamin D supplementation. Patients with gastrointestinal malabsorption syndromes may require higher doses of vitamin D supplementation and measurement of 25-hydroxyvitamin D should be considered.

Patients treated with glucocorticoids should receive adequate amounts of calcium and vitamin D.

2.8 Administration Instructions for Missed Doses

If a once-weekly dose of alendronate sodium tablets are missed, instruct patients to take one dose on the morning after they remember. They should not take two doses on the same day but should return to taking one dose once a week, as originally scheduled on their chosen day.
Tamoxifen Citrate

Tamoxifen Citrate

For patients with breast cancer, the recommended daily dose is 20 mg to 40 mg. Dosages greater than 20 mg per day should be given in divided doses (morning and evening).

In three single agent adjuvant studies in women, one 10 mg tamoxifen citrate tablet was administered two (ECOG and NATO) or three (Toronto) times a day for 2 years. In the NSABP B-14 adjuvant study in women with node-negative breast cancer, one 10 mg tamoxifen citrate tablet was given twice a day for at least 5 years. Results of the B-14 study suggest that continuation of therapy beyond 5 years does not provide additional benefit (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). In the EBCTCG 1995 overview, the reduction in recurrence and mortality was greater in those studies that used tamoxifen for about 5 years than in those that used tamoxifen for a shorter period of therapy. There was no indication that doses greater than 20 mg per day were more effective. Current data from clinical trials support 5 years of adjuvant tamoxifen therapy for patients with breast cancer.

Ductal Carcinoma in Situ (DCIS)

The recommended dose is tamoxifen citrate tablet 20 mg daily for 5 years.

Reduction in Breast Cancer Incidence in High Risk Women

The recommended dose is tamoxifen citrate tablets 20 mg daily for 5 years. There are no data to support the use of tamoxifen other than for 5 years (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Studies: Reduction in Breast Cancer Incidence in High Risk Women).
Tolterodine Tartrate

Tolterodine Tartrate

2.1 Dosing Information

The recommended dose of tolterodine tartrate extended-release capsules is 4 mg once daily with water and swallowed whole. The dose may be lowered to 2 mg daily based on individual response and tolerability; however, limited efficacy data are available for tolterodine tartrate extended-release capsules 2 mg [see Clinical Studies (14)].

2.2 Dosage Adjustment in Specific Populations

For patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh Class A or B) or severe renal impairment (CCr 10 to 30 mL/min), the recommended dose of tolterodine tartrate extended-release capsules is 2 mg once daily. Tolterodine tartrate extended-release capsules are not recommended for use in patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh Class C). Patients with CCr < 10 mL/min have not been studied and use of tolterodine tartrate extended-release capsules in this population is not recommended [see Warnings and Precautions (5.6), Use in Specific Populations (8.6, 8.7)].

2.3 Dosage Adjustment in Presence of Concomitant Drugs

For patients who are taking drugs that are potent inhibitors of CYP3A4 [e.g., ketoconazole, clarithromycin, ritonavir], the recommended dose of tolterodine tartrate extended-release capsules is 2 mg once daily [see Drug Interactions (7.2)].
Glyburide

Glyburide

Patients should be retitrated when transferred from non-micronized glyburide tablets or other oral hypoglycemic agents.

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of diabetes mellitus with glyburide tablets (micronized). In addition to the usual monitoring of urinary glucose, the patient’s blood glucose must also be monitored periodically to determine the minimum effective dose for the patient; to detect primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication; and to detect secondary failure, i.e., loss of adequate blood glucose-lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness. Glycosylated hemoglobin levels may also be of value in monitoring the patient’s response to therapy.

Short-term administration of glyburide tablets (micronized) may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually controlled well on diet.

Usual Starting Dose

The suggested starting dose of glyburide tablets (micronized) is 1.5 mg to 3 mg daily, administered with breakfast or the first main meal. Those patients who may be more sensitive to hypoglycemic drugs should be started at 0.75 mg daily. (See PRECAUTIONS Section for patients at increased risk.) Failure to follow an appropriate dosage regimen may precipitate hypoglycemia. Patients who do not adhere to their prescribed dietary and drug regimen are more prone to exhibit unsatisfactory response to therapy.

Transfer from Other Hypoglycemic Therapy; Patients Receiving Other Oral Antidiabetic Therapy

Patients should be retitrated when transferred from non-micronized glyburide tablets or other oral hypoglycemic agents. The initial daily dose should be 1.5 mg to 3 mg. When transferring patients from oral hypoglycemic agents other than chlorpropamide to micronized glyburide tablets, no transition period and no initial or priming dose are necessary. When transferring patients from chlorpropamide, particular care should be exercised during the first 2 weeks because the prolonged retention of chlorpropamide in the body and subsequent overlapping drug effects may provoke hypoglycemia.

Patients Receiving Insulin

Some type 2 diabetic patients being treated with insulin may respond satisfactorily to glyburide tablets (micronized). If the insulin dose is less than 20 units daily, substitution of glyburide tablets (micronized) 1.5 mg to 3 mg as a single daily dose may be tried. If the insulin dose is between 20 and 40 units daily, the patient may be placed directly on glyburide tablets (micronized) 3 mg daily as a single dose. If the insulin dose is more than 40 units daily, a transition period is required for conversion to micronized glyburide tablets. In these patients, insulin dosage is decreased by 50% and glyburide tablets (micronized) 3 mg daily is started. Please refer to Titration to Maintenance Dose for further explanation.

Patients Receiving Colesevelam

When colesevelam is coadministered with glyburide tablets (micronized), maximum plasma concentration and total exposure to glyburide is reduced. Therefore, micronized glyburide tablets should be administered at least 4 hours prior to colesevelam.

Titration to Maintenance Dose

The usual maintenance dose is in the range of 0.75 mg to 12 mg daily, which may be given as a single dose or in divided doses (see Dosage Interval). Dosage increases should be made in increments of no more than 1.5 mg at weekly intervals based upon the patient’s blood glucose response.

No exact dosage relationship exists between micronized glyburide tablets and the other oral hypoglycemic agents, including non-micronized glyburide tablets. Although patients may be transferred from the maximum dose of other sulfonylureas, the maximum starting dose of 3 mg of glyburide tablets (micronized) should be observed. A maintenance dose of 3 mg of glyburide tablets (micronized) provide approximately the same degree of blood glucose control as 250 mg to 375 mg chlorpropamide, 250 mg to 375 mg tolazamide, 5 mg of non-micronized glyburide, 500 mg to 750 mg acetohexamide, or 1000 mg to 1500 mg tolbutamide.

When transferring patients receiving more than 40 units of insulin daily, they may be started on a daily dose of glyburide tablets (micronized) 3 mg concomitantly with a 50% reduction in insulin dose. Progressive withdrawal of insulin and increase of glyburide tablets (micronized) in increments of 0.75 mg to 1.5 mg every 2 to 10 days is then carried out. During this conversion period when both insulin and glyburide tablets (micronized) are being used, hypoglycemia may occur. During insulin withdrawal, patients should test their urine for glucose and acetone at least 3 times daily and report results to their physician. The appearance of persistent acetonuria with glycosuria indicates that the patient is a type 1 diabetic who requires insulin therapy.

Concomitant Glyburide and Metformin Therapy

Glyburide tablets (micronized) should be added gradually to the dosing regimen of patients who have not responded to the maximum dose of metformin monotherapy after 4 weeks (see Usual Starting Dose and Titration to Maintenance Dose). Refer to metformin package insert.

With concomitant glyburide and metformin therapy, the desired control of blood glucose may be obtained by adjusting the dose of each drug. However, attempts should be made to identify the optimal dose of each drug needed to achieve this goal. With concomitant glyburide and metformin therapy, the risk of hypoglycemia associated with sulfonylurea therapy continues and may be increased. Appropriate precautions should be taken (see PRECAUTIONS).

Maximum Dose

Daily doses of more than 12 mg are not recommended.

Dosage Interval

Once-a-day therapy is usually satisfactory. Some patients, particularly those receiving more than 6 mg daily, may have a more satisfactory response with twice-a-day dosage.

Specific Patient Populations

Glyburide tablets (micronized) are not recommended for use in pregnancy or for use in pediatric patients.

In elderly patients, debilitated or malnourished patients, and patients with impaired renal or hepatic function, the initial and maintenance dosing should be conservative to avoid hypoglycemic reactions. (See PRECAUTIONS.)
Up

Up

There is currently no dosage information available for this product. We apologize for any inconvenience.
Methamphetamine Hydroch...

Methamphetamine Hydrochloride

Methamphetamine hydrochloride tablets are given orally.

Methamphetamine should be administered at the lowest effective dosage, and dosage should be individually adjusted. Late evening medication should be avoided because of the resulting insomnia.

Attention Deficit Disorder with Hyperactivity

For treatment of children 6 years or older with a behavioral syndrome characterized by moderate to severe distractibility, short attention span, hyperactivity, emotional lability and impulsivity: an initial dose of 5 mg methamphetamine hydrochloride tablets once or twice a day is recommended. Daily dosage may be raised in increments of 5 mg at weekly intervals until an optimum clinical response is achieved. The usual effective dose is 20 to 25 mg daily. The total daily dose may be given in two divided doses daily.

Where possible, drug administration should be interrupted occasionally to determine if there is a recurrence of behavioral symptoms sufficient to require continued therapy.

For Obesity

One 5 mg tablet should be taken one-half hour before each meal. Treatment should not exceed a few weeks in duration. Methamphetamine is not recommended for use as an anorectic agent in children under 12 years of age.
Mycophenolic Acid

Mycophenolic Acid

2.1 Dosage in Adult Kidney Transplant Patients

The recommended dose of mycophenolic acid delayed-release tablets is 720 mg administered twice daily (1440 mg total daily dose).

2.2 Dosage in Pediatric Kidney Transplant Patients

The recommended dose of mycophenolic acid delayed-release tablets in conversion (at least 6 months post-transplant) pediatric patients age 5 years and older is 400 mg/m2 body surface area (BSA) administered twice daily (up to a maximum dose of 720 mg administered twice daily).

2.3 Administration

Mycophenolic acid delayed-release tablets should be taken on an empty stomach, one hour before or 2 hours after food intake [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Mycophenolic acid delayed-release tablets should not be crushed, chewed, or cut prior to ingesting. The tablets should be swallowed whole in order to maintain the integrity of the enteric coating. Pediatric patients with a BSA of 1.19 to 1.58 m2 may be dosed either with three mycophenolic acid delayed-release 180 mg tablets, or one 180 mg tablet plus one 360 mg tablet twice daily (1080 mg daily dose). Patients with a BSA of > 1.58 m2 may be dosed either with four mycophenolic acid delayed-release 180 mg tablets, or two mycophenolic acid delayed-release 360 mg tablets twice daily (1440 mg daily dose). Pediatric doses for patients with BSA < 1.19 m2 cannot be accurately administered using currently available formulations of mycophenolic acid delayed-release tablets.
Tizanidine

Tizanidine

2.1 Dosing Information

Tizanidine tablets may be prescribed with or without food. Once the formulation has been selected and the decision to take with or without food has been made, this regimen should not be altered.

Food has complex effects on tizanidine pharmacokinetics, which differ with the different formulations. Tizanidine capsules and tizanidine tablets are bioequivalent to each other under fasting conditions (more than 3 hours after a meal), but not under fed conditions (within 30 minutes of a meal). These pharmacokinetic differences may result in clinically significant differences when switching administration of tablet and capsules and when switching administration between the fed or fasted state. These changes may result in increased adverse events, or delayed or more rapid onset of activity, depending upon the nature of the switch. For this reason, the prescriber should be thoroughly familiar with the changes in kinetics associated with these different conditions [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

The recommended starting dose is 2 mg. Because the effect of tizanidine peaks at approximately 1 to 2 hours post-dose and dissipates between 3 to 6 hours post-dose, treatment can be repeated at 6 to 8 hour intervals, as needed, to a maximum of three doses in 24 hours.

Dosage can be gradually increased by 2 mg to 4 mg at each dose, with 1 to 4 days between dosage increases, until a satisfactory reduction of muscle tone is achieved. The total daily dose should not exceed 36 mg. Single doses greater than 16 mg have not been studied.

2.2 Dosing in Patients with Renal Impairment

Tizanidine tablets should be used with caution in patients with renal insufficiency (creatinine clearance < 25 mL/min), as clearance is reduced by more than 50%. In these patients, during titration, the individual doses should be reduced. If higher doses are required, individual doses rather than dosing frequency should be increased [see Warnings and Precautions (5.7)].

2.3 Dosing in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

Tizanidine tablets should be used with caution in patients with any hepatic impairment. In these patients, during titration, the individual doses should be reduced. If higher doses are required, individual doses rather than dosing frequency should be increased. Monitoring of aminotransferase levels is recommended for baseline and one month after maximum dose is achieved, or if hepatic injury is suspected [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7)].

2.4 Drug Discontinuation

If therapy needs to be discontinued, particularly in patients who have been receiving high doses (20 mg to 36 mg daily) for long periods (9 weeks or more) or who may be on concomitant treatment with narcotics, the dose should be decreased slowly (2 mg to 4 mg per day) to minimize the risk of withdrawal and rebound hypertension, tachycardia, and hypertonia [see Drug Abuse and Dependence (9.3)].
Glimepiride

Glimepiride

2.1 Recommended Dosing

Glimepiride tablets should be administered with breakfast or the first main meal of the day.

The recommended starting dose of glimepiride tablets is 1 mg or 2 mg once daily. Patients at increased risk for hypoglycemia (e.g., the elderly or patients with renal impairment) should be started on 1 mg once daily [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1) and Use in Specific Populations (8.5, 8.6)].

After reaching a daily dose of 2 mg, further dose increases can be made in increments of 1 mg or 2 mg based upon the patient’s glycemic response. Uptitration should not occur more frequently than every 1 to 2 weeks. A conservative titration scheme is recommended for patients at increased risk for hypoglycemia [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1) and Use in Specific Populations (8.5, 8.6)].

The maximum recommended dose is 8 mg once daily.

Patients being transferred to glimepiride tablets from longer half-life sulfonylureas (e.g., chlorpropamide) may have overlapping drug effect for 1 to 2 weeks and should be appropriately monitored for hypoglycemia.

When colesevelam is coadministered with glimepiride, maximum plasma concentration and total exposure to glimepiride is reduced. Therefore, glimepiride tablets should be administered at least 4 hours prior to colesevelam.
Sprintec

Sprintec

Take one tablet by mouth at the same time every day. The dosage of levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets and ethinyl estradiol tablets are one white tablet containing levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol daily for 84 consecutive days, followed by one light peach ethinyl estradiol tablet for 7 days. To achieve maximum contraceptive effectiveness, levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets and ethinyl estradiol tablets must be taken exactly as directed and at intervals not exceeding 24 hours.

Instruct the patient to begin taking levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets and ethinyl estradiol tablets on the first Sunday after the onset of menstruation. If menstruation begins on a Sunday, the first white tablet is taken that day. One white tablet should be taken daily for 84 consecutive days, followed by one light peach tablet for 7 consecutive days. A non-hormonal back-up method of contraception (such as condoms or spermicide) should be used until a white tablet has been taken daily for 7 consecutive days. A scheduled period should occur during the 7 days that the light peach tablets are taken.

Begin the next and all subsequent 91-day cycles without interruption on the same day of the week (Sunday) on which the patient began her first dose of levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets and ethinyl estradiol tablets, following the same schedule: 84 days taking a white tablet followed by 7 days taking a light peach tablet. If the patient does not immediately start her next pill pack, she should protect herself from pregnancy by using a non-hormonal back-up method of contraception until she has taken a white tablet daily for 7 consecutive days.

If unscheduled spotting or bleeding occurs, instruct the patient to continue on the same regimen. If the bleeding is persistent or prolonged, advise the patient to consult her healthcare provider.

For patient instructions regarding missed pills, see FDA-Approved Patient Labeling.

For postpartum women who are not breastfeeding, start levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets and ethinyl estradiol tablets no earlier than four to six weeks postpartum due to increased risk of thromboembolism. If the patient starts on levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets and ethinyl estradiol tablets postpartum and has not yet had a period, evaluate for possible pregnancy, and instruct her to use an additional method of contraception until she has taken a white tablet for 7 consecutive days.
Doxycycline Hyclate

Doxycycline Hyclate

2.1 Acute Coronary Syndrome

Clopidogrel tablets can be administered with or without food [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
• For patients with non-ST-elevation ACS (UA/NSTEMI), initiate clopidogrel tablets with a single 300 mg oral loading dose and then continue at 75 mg once daily. Initiate aspirin (75 mg to 325 mg once daily) and continue in combination with clopidogrel tablets [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. • For patients with STEMI, the recommended dose of clopidogrel tablets is 75 mg once daily orally, administered in combination with aspirin (75 mg to 325 mg once daily), with or without thrombolytics. Clopidogrel tablets may be initiated with or without a loading dose [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].
2.2 Recent MI, Recent Stroke, or Established Peripheral Arterial Disease

The recommended daily dose of clopidogrel tablets is 75 mg once daily orally, with or without food [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 CYP2C19 Poor Metabolizers

CYP2C19 poor metabolizer status is associated with diminished antiplatelet response to clopidogrel. Although a higher dose regimen in poor metabolizers increases antiplatelet response [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.5)], an appropriate dose regimen for this patient population has not been established.

2.4 Use with Proton Pump Inhibitors (PPI)

Avoid using omeprazole or esomeprazole with clopidogrel tablets. Omeprazole and esomeprazole significantly reduce the antiplatelet activity of clopidogrel. When concomitant administration of a PPI is required, consider using another acid-reducing agent with minimal or no CYP2C19 inhibitory effect on the formation of clopidogrel active metabolite [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1), Drug Interactions (7.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Paroxetine Hydrochlorid...

Paroxetine Hydrochloride

Major Depressive Disorder

Usual Initial Dosage

Paroxetine extended-release tablets should be administered as a single daily dose, usually in the morning, with or without food. The recommended initial dose is 25 mg/day. Patients were dosed in a range of 25 mg to 62.5 mg/day in the clinical trials demonstrating the effectiveness of paroxetine extended-release tablets in the treatment of major depressive disorder. As with all drugs effective in the treatment of major depressive disorder, the full effect may be delayed. Some patients not responding to a 25 mg dose may benefit from dose increases, in 12.5 mg/day increments, up to a maximum of 62.5 mg/day. Dose changes should occur at intervals of at least one week.

Patients should be cautioned that paroxetine extended-release tablets should not be chewed or crushed and should be swallowed whole.

Maintenance Therapy

There is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the patient treated with paroxetine extended-release tablets should remain on it. It is generally agreed that acute episodes of major depressive disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacologic therapy. Whether the dose of an antidepressant needed to induce remission is identical to the dose needed to maintain and/or sustain euthymia is unknown.

Systematic evaluation of the efficacy of immediate-release paroxetine hydrochloride has shown that efficacy is maintained for periods of up to one year with doses that averaged about 30 mg, which corresponds to a 37.5 mg dose of paroxetine extended-release tablets, based on relative bioavailability considerations (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Panic Disorder

Usual Initial Dosage

Paroxetine extended-release tablets should be administered as a single daily dose, usually in the morning. Patients should be started on 12.5 mg/day. Dose changes should occur in 12.5 mg/day increments and at intervals of at least one week. Patients were dosed in a range of 12.5 to 75 mg/day in the clinical trials demonstrating the effectiveness of paroxetine extended-release tablets. The maximum dosage should not exceed 75 mg/day.

Patients should be cautioned that paroxetine extended-release tablets should not be chewed or crushed and should be swallowed whole.

Maintenance Therapy

Long-term maintenance of efficacy with the immediate-release formulation of paroxetine was demonstrated in a 3 month relapse prevention trial. In this trial, patients with panic disorder assigned to immediate-release paroxetine demonstrated a lower relapse rate compared to patients on placebo. Panic disorder is a chronic condition and it is reasonable to consider continuation for a responding patient. Dosage adjustments should be made to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

Social Anxiety Disorder

Usual Initial Dosage

Paroxetine extended-release tablets should be administered as a single daily dose, usually in the morning, with or without food. The recommended initial dose is 12.5 mg/day. Patients were dosed in a range of 12.5 mg to 37.5 mg/day in the clinical trial demonstrating the effectiveness of paroxetine extended-release tablets in the treatment of social anxiety disorder. If the dose is increased, this should occur at intervals of at least one week, in increments of 12.5 mg/day, up to a maximum of 37.5 mg/day.

Patients should be cautioned that paroxetine extended-release tablets should not be chewed or crushed and should be swallowed whole.

Maintenance Therapy

There is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the patient treated with paroxetine extended-release tablets should remain on it. Although the efficacy of paroxetine extended-release tablets beyond 12 weeks of dosing has not been demonstrated in controlled clinical trials, social anxiety disorder is recognized as a chronic condition and it is reasonable to consider continuation of treatment for a responding patient. Dosage adjustments should be made to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

Premenstrual Dysphoric Disorder

Usual Initial Dosage

Paroxetine extended-release tablets should be administered as a single daily dose, usually in the morning, with or without food. Paroxetine extended-release tablets may be administered either daily throughout the menstrual cycle or limited to the luteal phase of the menstrual cycle, depending on physician assessment. The recommended initial dose is 12.5 mg/day. In clinical trials, both 12.5 mg/day and 25 mg/day were shown to be effective. Dose changes should occur at intervals of at least one week.

Patients should be cautioned that paroxetine extended-release tablets should not be chewed or crushed and should be swallowed whole.

Maintenance/Continuation Therapy

The effectiveness of paroxetine extended-release tablets for a period exceeding three menstrual cycles has not been systematically evaluated in controlled trials. However, women commonly report that symptoms worsen with age until relieved by the onset of menopause. Therefore, it is reasonable to consider continuation of a responding patient. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

Special Populations

Treatment of Pregnant Women During the Third Trimester

Neonates exposed to paroxetine extended-release tablets and other SSRIs or SNRIs, late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support and tube feeding (see WARNINGS: Usage in Pregnancy). When treating pregnant women with paroxetine during the third trimester, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and benefits of treatment.

Dosage for Elderly or Debilitated Patients and Patients with Severe Renal or Hepatic Impairment

The recommended initial dose of paroxetine extended-release tablets is 12.5 mg/day for elderly patients, debilitated patients and/or patients with severe renal or hepatic impairment. Increases may be made if indicated. Dosage should not exceed 50 mg/day.

Switching a Patient to or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with paroxetine extended-release tablets. Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping paroxetine extended-release tablets before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Use of Paroxetine Extended-release Tablets with Other MAOIs Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start paroxetine extended-release tablets in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

In some cases, a patient already receiving therapy with paroxetine extended-release tablets may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, paroxetine extended-release tablets should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with paroxetine extended-release tablets may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue (see WARNINGS).

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with paroxetine extended-release tablets is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use (see WARNINGS).

Discontinuation of Treatment with Paroxetine Extended-release Tablets

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of immediate-release paroxetine hydrochloride or paroxetine extended-release tablets have been reported (see PRECAUTIONS: General: Discontinuation of Treatment with Paroxetine Extended-release Tablets). Patients should be monitored for these symptoms when discontinuing treatment, regardless of the indication for which paroxetine extended-release tablets are being prescribed. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, then resuming the previously prescribed dose may be considered. Subsequently, the physician may continue decreasing the dose but at a more gradual rate.
Nitrofurantoin

Nitrofurantoin

Nitrofurantoin macrocrystals capsules should be given with food to improve drug absorption and, in some patients, tolerance.

Adults: 50 mg to 100 mg four times a day – the lower dosage level is recommended for uncomplicated urinary tract infections.

Pediatric Patients: 5 to 7 mg/kg of body weight per 24 hours, given in four divided doses (contraindicated under one month of age).

Therapy should be continued for one week or for at least 3 days after sterility of the urine is obtained. Continued infection indicates the need for reevaluation.

For long-term suppressive therapy in adults, a reduction of dosage to 50 mg to 100 mg at bedtime may be adequate. For long-term suppressive therapy in pediatric patients, doses as low as 1 mg/kg per 24 hours, given in a single dose or in two divided doses, may be adequate. SEE WARNINGS SECTION REGARDING RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH LONG-TERM THERAPY.
Nadolol

Nadolol

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED. NADOLOL TABLETS MAY BE ADMINISTERED WITHOUT REGARD TO MEALS.

Angina Pectoris

The usual initial dose is 40 mg nadolol once daily. Dosage may be gradually increased in 40 mg to 80 mg increments at 3 to 7 day intervals until optimum clinical response is obtained or there is pronounced slowing of the heart rate. The usual maintenance dose is 40 mg or 80 mg administered once daily. Doses up to 160 mg or 240 mg administered once daily may be needed.

The usefulness and safety in angina pectoris of dosages exceeding 240 mg per day have not been established. If treatment is to be discontinued, reduce the dosage gradually over a period of 1 to 2 weeks (see WARNINGS).

Hypertension

The usual initial dose is 40 mg nadolol once daily, whether it is used alone or in addition to diuretic therapy. Dosage may be gradually increased in 40 mg to 80 mg increments until optimum blood pressure reduction is achieved. The usual maintenance dose is 40 mg or 80 mg administered once daily. Doses up to 240 mg or 320 mg administered once daily may be needed.

Dosage Adjustment in Renal Failure

Absorbed nadolol is excreted principally by the kidneys and, although nonrenal elimination does occur, dosage adjustments are necessary in patients with renal impairment. The following dose intervals are recommended:
Creatinine Clearance (mL/min/1.73m2) Dosage Interval (hours)
> 50

24

31 to 50

24 to 36

10 to 30

24 to 48

< 10

40 to 60
Meclofenamate Sodium

Meclofenamate Sodium

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of meclofenamate sodium capsules and other treatment options before deciding to use meclofenamate sodium capsules. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with meclofenamate sodium capsules, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

Usual Dosage

For Mild to Moderate Pain

The recommended dose is 50 mg every 4 to 6 hours. Doses of 100 mg may be needed in some patients for optimal pain relief (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). However, the daily dose should not exceed 400 mg (see ADVERSE REACTIONS).

For excessive menstrual blood loss and primary dysmenorrheal

The recommended dose of meclofenamate sodium is 100 mg 3 times a day, for up to 6 days, starting at the onset of menstrual flow.

For rheumatoid arthritis and osteoarthritis (including acute exacerbations of chronic disease)

The dosage is 200 mg to 400 mg per day, administered in three or four equal doses.

Therapy should be initiated at the lower dosage, then increased as necessary to improve clinical response. The dosage should be individually adjusted for each patient, depending on the severity of the symptoms and the clinical response. The daily dosage should not exceed 400 mg per day. The smallest dosage of meclofenamate sodium that yields clinical control should be employed.

Although improvement may be seen in some patients in a few days, 2 to 3 weeks of treatment may be required to obtain the optimum therapeutic benefit.

After a satisfactory response has been achieved, the dosage should be adjusted as required. A lower dosage may suffice for long-term administration.

If gastrointestinal complaints occur (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS), meclofenamate sodium may be administered with meals or with milk (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY for a description of food effects). If intolerance occurs, the dosage may need to be reduced. Therapy should be terminated if any severe adverse reactions occur.
Paroxetine

Paroxetine

Major Depressive Disorder

Usual Initial Dosage

Paroxetine tablets should be administered as a single daily dose with or without food, usually in the morning. The recommended initial dose is 20 mg/day. Patients were dosed in a range of 20 to 50 mg/day in the clinical trials demonstrating the effectiveness of paroxetine tablets in the treatment of major depressive disorder. As with all drugs effective in the treatment of major depressive disorder, the full effect may be delayed. Some patients not responding to a 20 mg dose may benefit from dose increases, in 10 mg/day increments, up to a maximum of 50 mg/day. Dose changes should occur at intervals of at least one week.

Maintenance Therapy

There is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the patient treated with paroxetine tablets should remain on it. It is generally agreed that acute episodes of major depressive disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacologic therapy. Whether the dose needed to induce remission is identical to the dose needed to maintain and/or sustain euthymia is unknown.

Systematic evaluation of the efficacy of paroxetine tablets has shown that efficacy is maintained for periods of up to one year with doses that averaged about 30 mg.

Obsessive Compulsive Disorder

Usual Initial Dosage

Paroxetine tablets should be administered as a single daily dose with or without food, usually in the morning. The recommended dose of paroxetine tablets in the treatment of OCD is 40 mg daily. Patients should be started on 20 mg/day and the dose can be increased in 10 mg/day increments. Dose changes should occur at intervals of at least one week. Patients were dosed in a range of 20 to 60 mg/day in the clinical trials demonstrating the effectiveness of paroxetine tablets in the treatment of OCD. The maximum dosage should not exceed 60 mg/day.

Maintenance Therapy

Long-term maintenance of efficacy was demonstrated in a 6-month relapse prevention trial. In this trial, patients with OCD assigned to paroxetine demonstrated a lower relapse rate compared to patients on placebo (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Trials). OCD is a chronic condition, and it is reasonable to consider continuation for a responding patient. Dosage adjustments should be made to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage, and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

Panic Disorder

Usual Initial Dosage

Paroxetine tablets should be administered as a single daily dose with or without food, usually in the morning. The target dose of paroxetine tablets in the treatment of panic disorder is 40 mg/day. Patients should be started on 10 mg/day. Dose changes should occur in 10 mg/day increments and at intervals of at least one week. Patients were dosed in a range of 10 to 60 mg/day in the clinical trials demonstrating the effectiveness of paroxetine tablets. The maximum dosage should not exceed 60 mg/day.

Maintenance Therapy

Long-term maintenance of efficacy was demonstrated in a 3 month relapse prevention trial. In this trial, patients with panic disorder assigned to paroxetine demonstrated a lower relapse rate compared to patients on placebo (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Trials). Panic disorder is a chronic condition, and it is reasonable to consider continuation for a responding patient. Dosage adjustments should be made to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage, and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

Social Anxiety Disorder

Usual Initial Dosage

Paroxetine tablets should be administered as a single daily dose with or without food, usually in the morning. The recommended and initial dosage is 20 mg/day. In clinical trials the effectiveness of paroxetine tablets was demonstrated in patients dosed in a range of 20 to 60 mg/day. While the safety of paroxetine tablets has been evaluated in patients with social anxiety disorder at doses up to 60 mg/day, available information does not suggest any additional benefit for doses above 20 mg/day (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Trials).

Maintenance Therapy

There is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the patient treated with paroxetine tablets should remain on it. Although the efficacy of paroxetine tablets beyond 12 weeks of dosing has not been demonstrated in controlled clinical trials, social anxiety disorder is recognized as a chronic condition, and it is reasonable to consider continuation of treatment for a responding patient. Dosage adjustments should be made to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage, and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

Generalized Anxiety Disorder

Usual Initial Dosage

Paroxetine tablets should be administered as a single daily dose with or without food, usually in the morning. In clinical trials the effectiveness of paroxetine tablets was demonstrated in patients dosed in a range of 20 to 50 mg/day. The recommended starting dosage and the established effective dosage is 20 mg/day. There is not sufficient evidence to suggest a greater benefit to doses higher than 20 mg/day. Dose changes should occur in 10 mg/day increments and at intervals of at least one week.

Maintenance Therapy

Systematic evaluation of continuing paroxetine tablets for periods of up to 24 weeks in patients with Generalized Anxiety Disorder who had responded while taking paroxetine tablets during an 8 week acute treatment phase has demonstrated a benefit of such maintenance (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Trials). Nevertheless, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Special Populations

Treatment of Pregnant Women During the Third Trimester

Neonates exposed to paroxetine tablets and other SSRIs or SNRIs, late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding (see WARNINGS: Usage in Pregnancy). When treating pregnant women with paroxetine during the third trimester, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and benefits of treatment.

Dosage for Elderly or Debilitated Patients, and Patients With Severe Renal or Hepatic Impairment

The recommended initial dose is 10 mg/day for elderly patients, debilitated patients, and/or patients with severe renal or hepatic impairment. Increases may be made if indicated. Dosage should not exceed 40 mg/day.

Switching a Patient to or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with paroxetine tablets. Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping paroxetine tablets before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Use of Paroxetine Tablets with Other MAOIs Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start paroxetine tablets in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

In some cases, a patient already receiving therapy with paroxetine tablets may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, paroxetine tablets should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with paroxetine tablets may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue (see WARNINGS).

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with paroxetine tablets is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use (see WARNINGS).

Discontinuation of Treatment with Paroxetine Tablets

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of paroxetine tablets have been reported (see PRECAUTIONS: Discontinuation of Treatment with Paroxetine Hydrochloride). Patients should be monitored for these symptoms when discontinuing treatment, regardless of the indication for which paroxetine tablets is being prescribed. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, then resuming the previously prescribed dose may be considered. Subsequently, the physician may continue decreasing the dose but at a more gradual rate.
Avita

Avita

AVITA® Gel should be applied once a day, in the evening, to the skin where acne lesions appear, using enough to cover the entire affected area lightly. Application may cause a transient feeling of warmth or slight stinging. In cases where it has been necessary to temporarily discontinue therapy or reduce the frequency of application, therapy may be resumed or frequency of application increased when the patients become able to tolerate the treatment. Alterations of dose frequency should be closely monitored by careful observation of the clinical therapeutic response and skin tolerance. Efficacy has not been established for less than once-daily dosing frequencies.

During the early weeks of therapy, an apparent increase in number and exacerbation of inflammatory acne lesions may occur. This is due, in part, to the action of the medication on deep, previously unseen lesions and should not be considered a reason to discontinue therapy. Therapeutic results should be noticed after two to three weeks, but more than six weeks of therapy may be required before definite beneficial effects are seen. Patients treated with AVITA® Gel may use cosmetics, but the areas to be treated should be cleansed thoroughly before the medication is applied (see Precautions Section).
Chewable Aspirin

Chewable Aspirin

THE USUAL DOSAGE AND FREQUENCY OF ADMINISTRATION OF DOXYCYCLINE DIFFERS FROM THAT OF THE OTHER TETRACYCLINES. EXCEEDING THE RECOMMENDED DOSAGE MAY RESULT IN AN INCREASED INCIDENCE OF SIDE EFFECTS.

Adults

The usual dose of oral doxycycline is 200 mg on the first day of treatment (administered 100 mg every 12 hours or 50 mg every 6 hours) followed by a maintenance dose of 100 mg/day. The maintenance dose may be administered as a single dose or as 50 mg every 12 hours. In the management of more severe infections (particularly chronic infections of the urinary tract), 100 mg every 12 hours is recommended.

For Pediatric Patients Above 8 Years of Age

The recommended dosage schedule for pediatric patients weighing 100 pounds or less is 2 mg/lb of body weight divided into two doses on the first day of treatment, followed by 1 mg/lb of body weight given as a single daily dose or divided into two doses, on subsequent days. For more severe infections up to 2 mg/lb of body weight may be used. For pediatric patients over 100 pounds the usual adult dose should be used.

Uncomplicated Gonococcal Infections in Adults (except anorectal infections in men)

100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for 7 days. As an alternate single visit dose, administer 300 mg stat followed in one hour by a second 300 mg dose.

Acute Epididymo-Orchitis caused by N. gonorrhoeae

100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for at least 10 days.

Primary and Secondary Syphilis

300 mg a day in divided doses for at least 10 days.

Uncomplicated Urethral, Endocervical or Rectal Infection in Adults Caused by Chlamydia trachomatis

100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for at least 7 days.

Nongonococcal Urethritis Caused by C. trachomatis and U. urealyticum

100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for at least 7 days.

Acute Epididymo-Orchitis Caused by C. trachomatis

100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for at least 10 days.

Inhalational Anthrax (post-exposure)

Adults

100 mg of doxycycline, by mouth, twice a day for 60 days.

Children

weighing less than 100 pounds (45 kg): 1 mg/lb (2.2 mg/kg) of body weight, by mouth, twice a day for 60 days. Children weighing 100 pounds or more should receive the adult dose.

When used in streptococcal infections, therapy should be continued for 10 days.

Administration of adequate amounts of fluid along with capsule and tablet forms of drugs in the tetracycline class is recommended to wash down the drugs and reduce the risk of esophageal irritation and ulceration. (See ADVERSE REACTIONS.) If gastric irritation occurs, doxycycline may be given with food. Ingestion of a high fat meal has been shown to delay the time to peak plasma concentrations by an average of one hour and 20 minutes. However, in the same study, food enhanced the average peak concentration by 7.5% and the area under the curve by 5.7%.
Lisinopril

Lisinopril

2.1 Hypertension

Initial Therapy in Adults

The recommended initial dose is 10 mg once a day. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. The usual dosage range is 20 mg to 40 mg per day administered in a single daily dose. Doses up to 80 mg have been used but do not appear to give greater effect.

Use with Diuretics in Adults

If blood pressure is not controlled with lisinopril tablets alone, a low dose of a diuretic may be added (e.g., hydrochlorothiazide, 12.5 mg). After the addition of a diuretic, it may be possible to reduce the dose of lisinopril tablets.

The recommended starting dose in adult patients with hypertension taking diuretics is 5 mg once per day.

Pediatric Patients 6 Years of Age and Older with Hypertension

For pediatric patients with glomerular filtration rate > 30 mL/min/1.73m2, the recommended starting dose is 0.07 mg per kg once daily (up to 5 mg total). Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response up to a maximum of 0.61 mg per kg (up to 40 mg) once daily. Doses above 0.61 mg per kg (or in excess of 40 mg) have not been studied in pediatric patients [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Lisinopril tablets are not recommended in pediatric patients < 6 years or in pediatric patients with glomerular filtration rate < 30 mL/min/1.73m2 [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4) and Clinical Studies (14.1)].

2.2 Heart Failure

The recommended starting dose for lisinopril tablets, when used with diuretics and (usually) digitalis as adjunctive therapy for systolic heart failure, is 5 mg once daily. The recommended starting dose in these patients with hyponatremia (serum sodium < 130 mEq/L) is 2.5 mg once daily. Increase as tolerated to a maximum of 40 mg once daily.

Diuretic dose may need to be adjusted to help minimize hypovolemia, which may contribute to hypotension [see Warnings and Precautions (5.4) and Drug Interactions (7.1)]. The appearance of hypotension after the initial dose of lisinopril tablets does not preclude subsequent careful dose titration with the drug, following effective management of the hypotension.

2.3 Reduction of Mortality in Acute Myocardial Infarction

In hemodynamically stable patients within 24 hours of the onset of symptoms of acute myocardial infarction, give lisinopril tablets 5 mg orally, followed by 5 mg after 24 hours, 10 mg after 48 hours and then 10 mg once daily. Dosing should continue for at least 6 weeks.

Initiate therapy with 2.5 mg in patients with a low systolic blood pressure (≤ 120 mmHg and > 100 mmHg) during the first 3 days after the infarct [see Warnings and Precautions (5.4)]. If hypotension occurs (systolic blood pressure ≤ 100 mmHg) a daily maintenance dose of 5 mg may be given with temporary reductions to 2.5 mg if needed. If prolonged hypotension occurs (systolic blood pressure < 90 mmHg for more than one hour) lisinopril tablets should be withdrawn.

2.4 Dose in Patients with Renal Impairment

No dose adjustment of lisinopril tablets is required in patients with creatinine clearance > 30 mL/min. In patients with creatinine clearance ≥ 10 mL/min and ≤ 30 mL/min, reduce the initial dose of lisinopril tablets to half of the usual recommended dose i.e., hypertension, 5 mg; systolic heart failure, 2.5 mg and acute MI, 2.5 mg. Up titrate as tolerated to a maximum of 40 mg daily. For patients on hemodialysis or creatinine clearance < 10 mL/min, the recommended initial dose is 2.5 mg once daily [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Acaifusion Lip Balm Bro...

Acaifusion Lip Balm Broad Spectrum Spf 30 Supergoop

Dosage must be adjusted according to each patient’s needs. Therapy for either hypertension or angina should be initiated with 30 mg or 60 mg once daily. Nifedipine extended-release tablets should be swallowed whole and should not be bitten or divided. In general, titration should proceed over a 7 to 14 day period so that the physician can fully assess the response to each dose level and monitor blood pressure before proceeding to higher doses. Since steady-state plasma levels are achieved on the second day of dosing, titration may proceed more rapidly, if symptoms so warrant, provided the patient is assessed frequently. Titration to doses above 120 mg are not recommended.

Angina patients controlled on nifedipine capsules alone or in combination with other antianginal medications may be safely switched to nifedipine extended-release tablets at the nearest equivalent total daily dose (e.g., 30 mg t.i.d. of nifedipine capsules may be changed to 90 mg once daily of nifedipine extended-release tablets). Subsequent titration to higher or lower doses may be necessary and should be initiated as clinically warranted. Experience with doses greater than 90 mg in patients with angina is limited. Therefore, doses greater than 90 mg should be used with caution and only when clinically warranted.

Avoid co-administration of nifedipine with grapefruit juice (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY and PRECAUTIONS: Other Interactions).

No “rebound effect” has been observed upon discontinuation of nifedipine extended-release tablets. However, if discontinuation of nifedipine is necessary, sound clinical practice suggests that the dosage should be decreased gradually with close physician supervision.

Care should be taken when dispensing nifedipine extended-release tablets to assure that the extended-release dosage form has been prescribed.

Co-Administration with Other Antianginal Drugs

Sublingual nitroglycerin may be taken as required for the control of acute manifestations of angina, particularly during nifedipine titration. See PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions, for information on co-administration of nifedipine with beta blockers or long-acting nitrates.
Etidronate Disodium

Etidronate Disodium

Etidronate disodium tablets should be taken as a single, oral dose. As with other bisphosphonates, it is recommended that etidronate disodium tablets should be swallowed with a full glass of water (6 to 8 oz). Patients should not lie down after taking the medication. However, should gastrointestinal discomfort occur, the dose may be divided. To maximize absorption, patients should avoid taking the following items within 2 hours of dosing:
• Food, especially food high in calcium, such as milk or milk products. • Vitamins with mineral supplements or antacids which are high in metals such as calcium, iron, magnesium, or aluminum.
Paget’s Disease

Initial Treatment Regimens

5 to 10 mg/kg/day, not to exceed 6 months or 11 to 20 mg/kg/day, not to exceed 3 months.

The recommended initial dose is 5 mg/kg/day for a period not to exceed 6 months. Doses above 10 mg/kg/day should be reserved for when 1) lower doses are ineffective or 2) there is an overriding need to suppress rapid bone turnover (especially when irreversible neurologic damage is possible) or reduce elevated cardiac output. Doses in excess of 20 mg/kg/day are not recommended.

Retreatment Guidelines

Retreatment should be initiated only after 1) an etidronate disodium-free period of at least 90 days and 2) there is biochemical, symptomatic or other evidence of active disease process. It is advisable to monitor patients every 3 to 6 months although some patients may go drug free for extended periods. Retreatment regimens are the same as for initial treatment. For most patients the original dose will be adequate for retreatment. If not, consideration should be given to increasing the dose within the recommended guidelines.

Heterotopic Ossification

The following treatment regimens have been shown to be effective:
• Total Hip Replacement Patients: 20 mg/kg/day for 1 month before and 3 months after surgery (4 months total). • Spinal Cord Injured Patients: 20 mg/kg/day for 2 weeks followed by 10 mg/kg/day for 10 weeks (12 weeks total). Etidronate disodium therapy should begin as soon as medically feasible following the injury, preferably prior to evidence of heterotopic ossification.
Retreatment has not been studied.
Galantamine Hydrobromid...

Galantamine Hydrobromide

2.1 Galantamine Hydrobromide Extended-release Capsules

Galantamine hydrobromide extended-release capsules should be administered once daily in the morning, preferably with food.

The recommended starting dosage of galantamine hydrobromide extended-release capsules is 8 mg/day. The dosage should be increased to the initial maintenance dose of 16 mg/day after a minimum of 4 weeks. A further increase to 24 mg/day should be attempted after a minimum of 4 weeks at 16 mg/day. Dosage increases should be based upon assessment of clinical benefit and tolerability of the previous dose.

The dosage of galantamine hydrobromide extended-release capsules shown to be effective in a controlled clinical trial is 16 to 24 mg/day.

Patients currently being treated with galantamine hydrobromide tablets or oral solution can convert to galantamine hydrobromide extended-release capsules by taking their last dose of galantamine hydrobromide tablets or oral solution in the evening and starting galantamine hydrobromide extended-release capsules once daily treatment the next morning. Converting from galantamine hydrobromide tablets to galantamine hydrobromide extended-release capsules should occur at the same total daily dosage.

Patients and caregivers should be advised to ensure adequate fluid intake during treatment. If therapy has been interrupted for more than three days, the patient should be restarted at the lowest dosage and the dosage escalated to the current dose.

The abrupt withdrawal of galantamine hydrobromide extended-release capsules and galantamine hydrobromide tablets in those patients who had been receiving dosages in the effective range was not associated with an increased frequency of adverse events in comparison with those continuing to receive the same dosages of that drug. The beneficial effects of galantamine hydrobromide extended-release capsules and galantamine hydrobromide tablets are lost, however, when the drug is discontinued.

2.3 Dosage in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

In patients with moderate hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh score of 7 to 9), the dosage should generally not exceed 16 mg/day. The use of galantamine tablets in patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh score of 10 to 15) is not recommended [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.4 Dosage in Patients with Renal Impairment

In patients with creatinine clearance of 9 to 59 mL/min, the dosage should generally not exceed 16 mg/day. In patients with creatinine clearance < 9 mL/min, the use of galantamine tablets is not recommended [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Meropenem

Meropenem

As individual monotherapy, quinapril is an effective treatment of hypertension in once-daily doses of 10 mg to 80 mg and hydrochlorothiazide is effective in doses of 12.5 mg to 50 mg. In clinical trials of quinapril/hydrochlorothiazide combination therapy using quinapril doses of 2.5 mg to 40 mg and hydrochlorothiazide doses of 6.25 mg to 25 mg, the antihypertensive effects increased with increasing dose of either component.

The side effects (see WARNINGS) of quinapril are generally rare and apparently independent of dose; those of hydrochlorothiazide are a mixture of dose-dependent phenomena (primarily hypokalemia) and dose-independent phenomena (e.g., pancreatitis), the former much more common than the latter. Therapy with any combination of quinapril and hydrochlorothiazide will be associated with both sets of dose-independent side effects, but regimens that combine low doses of hydrochlorothiazide with quinapril produce minimal effects on serum potassium. In clinical trials of quinapril and hydrochlorothiazide tablets, the average change in serum potassium was near zero in subjects who received HCTZ 6.25 mg in the combination, and the average subject who received 10 mg to 40 mg/12.5 mg to 25 mg experienced a milder reduction in serum potassium than that experienced by the average subject receiving the same dose of hydrochlorothiazide monotherapy.

To minimize dose-independent side effects, it is usually appropriate to begin combination therapy only after a patient has failed to achieve the desired effect with monotherapy.

Therapy Guided by Clinical Effect

Patients whose blood pressures are not adequately controlled with quinapril monotherapy may instead be given quinapril and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 10 mg/12.5 mg or 20 mg/12.5 mg. Further increases of either or both components could depend on clinical response. The hydrochlorothiazide dose should generally not be increased until 2 to 3 weeks have elapsed. Patients whose blood pressures are adequately controlled with 25 mg of daily hydrochlorothiazide, but who experience significant potassium loss with this regimen, may achieve blood pressure control with less electrolyte disturbance if they are switched to quinapril and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 10 mg/12.5 mg or 20 mg/12.5 mg.

Replacement Therapy

For convenience, patients who are adequately treated with 20 mg of quinapril and 25 mg of hydrochlorothiazide and experience no significant electrolyte disturbances may instead wish to receive quinapril and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 20 mg/25 mg.

Use in Renal Impairment

Regimens of therapy with quinapril and hydrochlorothiazide tablets need not take account of renal function as long as the patient’s creatinine clearance is > 30 mL/min/1.73 m2 (serum creatinine roughly ≤ 3 mg/dL or 265 µmol/L). In patients with more severe renal impairment, loop diuretics are preferred to thiazides. Therefore, quinapril and hydrochlorothiazide tablets are not recommended for use in these patients.
Ondansetron Hydrochlori...

Ondansetron Hydrochloride

2.1 General Dosing Recommendations

Ropinirole tablets can be taken with or without food [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

If a significant interruption in therapy with ropinirole tablets has occurred, retitration of therapy may be warranted.

2.2 Dosing for Parkinson’s Disease

The recommended starting dose for Parkinson’s disease is 0.25 mg three times daily. Based on individual patient therapeutic response and tolerability, if necessary, the dose should then be titrated with weekly increments as described in Table 1. After Week 4, if necessary, the daily dose may be increased by 1.5 mg/day on a weekly basis up to a dose of 9 mg/day, and then by up to 3 mg/day weekly up to a maximum recommended total daily dose of 24 mg/day (8 mg three times daily). Doses greater than 24 mg/day have not been tested in clinical trials.
Table 1. Ascending-dose Schedule of Ropinirole Tablets for Parkinson’s Disease
Week

Dosage

Total Daily Dose

1

0.25 mg three times daily

0.75 mg

2

0.5 mg three times daily

1.5 mg

3

0.75 mg three times daily

2.25 mg

4

1 mg three times daily

3 mg

Ropinirole tablets should be discontinued gradually over a 7-day period in patients with Parkinson’s disease. The frequency of administration should be reduced from three times daily to twice daily for 4 days. For the remaining 3 days, the frequency should be reduced to once daily prior to complete withdrawal of ropinirole tablets.

Renal Impairment

No dose adjustment is necessary in patients with moderate renal impairment (creatinine clearance of 30 to 50 mL/min). The recommended initial dose of ropinirole for patients with end-stage renal disease on hemodialysis is 0.25 mg three times a day. Further dose escalations should be based on tolerability and need for efficacy. The recommended maximum total daily dose is 18 mg/day in patients receiving regular dialysis. Supplemental doses after dialysis are not required. The use of ropinirole tablets in patients with severe renal impairment without regular dialysis has not been studied.

2.3 Dosing for Restless Legs Syndrome

The recommended adult starting dose for RLS is 0.25 mg once daily 1 to 3 hours before bedtime. After 2 days, if necessary, the dose can be increased to 0.5 mg once daily, and to 1 mg once daily at the end of the first week of dosing, then as shown in Table 2 as needed to achieve efficacy. Titration should be based on individual patient therapeutic response and tolerability, up to a maximum recommended dose of 4 mg daily. For RLS, the safety and effectiveness of doses greater than 4 mg once daily have not been established.
Table 2. Dose Titration Schedule of Ropinirole Tablets for Restless Legs Syndrome
Day/Week

Dose to be taken once daily, 1 to 3 hours before bedtime

Days 1 and 2

0.25 mg

Days 3 to 7

0.5 mg

Week 2

1 mg

Week 3

1.5 mg

Week 4

2 mg

Week 5

2.5 mg

Week 6

3 mg

Week 7

4 mg

In clinical trials of patients treated for RLS with doses up to 4 mg once daily, ropinirole tablets were discontinued without a taper.

Renal Impairment

No dose adjustment is necessary in patients with moderate renal impairment (creatinine clearance of 30 to 50 mL/min). The recommended initial dose of ropinirole for patients with end-stage renal disease on hemodialysis is 0.25 mg once daily. Further dose escalations should be based on tolerability and need for efficacy. The recommended maximum total daily dose is 3 mg/day in patients receiving regular dialysis. Supplemental doses after dialysis are not required. The use of ropinirole tablets in patients with severe renal impairment without regular dialysis has not been studied.
Citalopram

Citalopram

Citalopram tablets should be administered once daily, in the morning or evening, with or without food.

Initial Treatment

Citalopram tablets (citalopram hydrobromide) should be administered at an initial dose of 20 mg once daily, with an increase to a maximum dose of 40 mg/day at an interval of no less than one week. Doses above 40 mg/day are not recommended due to the risk of QT prolongation. Additionally, the only study pertinent to dose response for effectiveness did not demonstrate an advantage for the 60 mg/day dose over the 40 mg/day dose.

Special Populations

20 mg/day is the maximum recommended dose for patients who are greater than 60 years of age, patients with hepatic impairment, and for CYP2C19 poor metabolizers or those patients taking cimetidine or another CYP2C19 inhibitor (see WARNINGS).

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with mild or moderate renal impairment. Citalopram tablets should be used with caution in patients with severe renal impairment.

Treatment of Pregnant Women During the Third Trimester

Neonates exposed to citalopram and other SSRIs or SNRIs, late in the third trimester, have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding (see PRECAUTIONS). When treating pregnant women with citalopram during the third trimester, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and benefits of treatment.

Maintenance Treatment

It is generally agreed that acute episodes of depression require several months or longer of sustained pharmacologic therapy. Systematic evaluation of citalopram tablets in two studies has shown that its antidepressant efficacy is maintained for periods of up to 24 weeks following 6 or 8 weeks of initial treatment (32 weeks total). In one study, patients were assigned randomly to placebo or to the same dose of citalopram tablets (20 to 60 mg/day) during maintenance treatment as they had received during the acute stabilization phase, while in the other study, patients were assigned randomly to continuation of citalopram tablets 20 or 40 mg/day, or placebo, for maintenance treatment. In the latter study, the rates of relapse to depression were similar for the two dose groups (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Trials). Based on these limited data, it is not known whether the dose of citalopram needed to maintain euthymia is identical to the dose needed to induce remission. If adverse reactions are bothersome, a decrease in dose to 20 mg/day can be considered.

Discontinuation of Treatment with Citalopram Tablets

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of citalopram tablets and other SSRIs and SNRIs have been reported (see PRECAUTIONS). Patients should be monitored for these symptoms when discontinuing treatment. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, then resuming the previously prescribed dose may be considered. Subsequently, the physician may continue decreasing the dose but at a more gradual rate.

Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with citalopram tablets. Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping citalopram tablets before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Use of Citalopram Tablets with Other MAOIs, Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start citalopram tablets in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

In some cases, a patient already receiving citalopram therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, citalopram tablets should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with citalopram tablets may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue (see WARNINGS).

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with citalopram tablets is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use (see WARNINGS).
Hgh Vitality

Hgh Vitality

The usual dose of triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide capsules is one or two capsules given once daily, with appropriate monitoring of serum potassium and of the clinical effect. (See WARNINGS, Hyperkalemia.)
Finasteride

Finasteride

Finasteride tablets may be administered with or without meals.

2.1 Monotherapy

The recommended dose of finasteride tablets is one tablet (5 mg) taken once a day [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

2.2 Combination with Alpha-Blocker

The recommended dose of finasteride tablets is one tablet (5 mg) taken once a day in combination with the alpha-blocker doxazosin [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].
Verapamil Hydrochloride...

Verapamil Hydrochloride

The dose of verapamil hydrochloride tablets must be individualized by titration. The usefulness and safety of dosages exceeding 480 mg/day have not been established; therefore, this daily dosage should not be exceeded. Since the half-life of verapamil increases during chronic dosing, maximum response may be delayed.

Angina

Clinical trials show that the usual dose is 80 mg to 120 mg 3 times a day. However, 40 mg 3 times a day may be warranted in patients who may have an increased response to verapamil hydrochloride tablets (e.g., decreased hepatic function, elderly, etc.). Upward titration should be based on therapeutic efficacy and safety evaluated approximately 8 hours after dosing. Dosage may be increased at daily (e.g., patients with unstable angina) or weekly intervals until optimum clinical response is obtained.

Arrhythmias

The dosage in digitalized patients with chronic atrial fibrillation (see PRECAUTIONS) ranges from 240 to 320 mg/day in divided (t.i.d. or q.i.d.) doses. The dosage for prophylaxis of PSVT (non-digitalized patients) ranges from 240 to 480 mg/day in divided (t.i.d. or q.i.d.) doses. In general, maximum effects for any given dosage will be apparent during the first 48 hours of therapy.

Essential hypertension

Dose should be individualized by titration. The usual initial monotherapy dose in clinical trials was 80 mg 3 times a day (240 mg/day). Daily dosages of 360 mg and 480 mg have been used but there is no evidence that dosages beyond 360 mg provided added effect. Consideration should be given to beginning titration at 40 mg 3 times per day in patients who might respond to lower doses, such as the elderly or people of small stature. The antihypertensive effects of verapamil are evident within the first week of therapy. Upward titration should be based on therapeutic efficacy, assessed at the end of the dosing interval.
Telmisartan And Hydroch...

Telmisartan And Hydrochlorothiazide

The usual starting dose of telmisartan is 40 mg once a day; blood pressure response is dose related over the range of 20 mg to 80 mg. Patients with depletion of intravascular volume should have the condition corrected or telmisartan tablets should be initiated under close medical supervision (see WARNINGS: Hypotension in Volume-Depleted Patients). Patients with biliary obstructive disorders or hepatic insufficiency should have treatment started under close medical supervision (see PRECAUTIONS).

Hydrochlorothiazide is effective in doses of 12.5 mg to 50 mg once daily.

To minimize dose-independent side effects, it is usually appropriate to begin combination therapy only after a patient has failed to achieve the desired effect with monotherapy. The side effects (see WARNINGS) of telmisartan are generally rare and apparently independent of dose; those of hydrochlorothiazide are a mixture of dose-dependent phenomena (primarily hypokalemia) and dose-independent phenomena (e.g., pancreatitis), the former much more common than the latter. Therapy with any combination of telmisartan and hydrochlorothiazide will be associated with both sets of dose-independent side effects.

Telmisartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.

Telmisartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets may be administered with or without food.

Replacement Therapy

The combination may be substituted for the titrated components.

Dose Titration by Clinical Effect

Telmisartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets are available as tablets containing either telmisartan 40 mg and hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg, or telmisartan 80 mg and hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg or 25 mg. A patient whose blood pressure is not adequately controlled with telmisartan monotherapy 80 mg (see above) may be switched to telmisartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets, telmisartan 80 mg and hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg once daily, and finally titrated up to 160 mg/25 mg, if necessary.

A patient whose blood pressure is inadequately controlled by 25 mg once daily of hydrochlorothiazide may be switched to telmisartan and hydrochlorothiazide (telmisartan 80 mg and hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg or telmisartan 80 mg and hydrochlorothiazide 25 mg) tablets once daily. The clinical response to telmisartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets should be subsequently evaluated and if blood pressure remains uncontrolled after 2 to 4 weeks of therapy, the dose may be titrated up to 160 mg/25 mg, if necessary. Those patients controlled by 25 mg hydrochlorothiazide but who experience hypokalemia with this regimen, may be switched to telmisartan and hydrochlorothiazide (telmisartan 80 mg and hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg) tablets once daily, reducing the dose of hydrochlorothiazide without reducing the overall expected antihypertensive response.

Patients with Renal Impairment

The usual regimens of therapy with telmisartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets may be followed as long as the patient’s creatinine clearance is > 30 mL/min. In patients with more severe renal impairment, loop diuretics are preferred to thiazides, so telmisartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets are not recommended.

Patients with Hepatic Impairment

Telmisartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets are not recommended for patients with severe hepatic impairment. Patients with biliary obstructive disorders or hepatic insufficiency should have treatment started under close medical supervision using the 40 mg/12.5 mg combination (see PRECAUTIONS).
Olanzapine

Olanzapine

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Dose Selection

Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 mg to 10 mg initially, with a target dose of 10 mg/day within several days. Further dosage adjustments, if indicated, should generally occur at intervals of not less than one week, since steady-state for olanzapine would not be achieved for approximately one week in the typical patient. When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 5 mg QD are recommended.

Efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a dose range of 10 to 15 mg/day in clinical trials. However, doses above 10 mg/day were not demonstrated to be more efficacious than the 10 mg/day dose. An increase to a dose greater than the target dose of 10 mg/day (i.e., to a dose of 15 mg/day or greater) is recommended only after clinical assessment. Olanzapine is not indicated for use in doses above 20 mg/day.

Dosing in Special Populations

The recommended starting dose is 5 mg in patients who are debilitated, who have a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, who otherwise exhibit a combination of factors that may result in slower metabolism of olanzapine (e.g., nonsmoking female patients ≥ 65 years of age) or who may be more pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine [see Warnings and Precautions (5.14), Drug Interactions (7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients.

Maintenance Treatment

The effectiveness of oral olanzapine, 10 mg/day to 20 mg/day, in maintaining treatment response in schizophrenic patients who had been stable on olanzapine tablets for approximately 8 weeks and were then followed for relapse has been demonstrated in a placebo-controlled trial [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. The physician who elects to use olanzapine tablets for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

Adolescents

Dose Selection

Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals with a recommended starting dose of 2.5 mg or 5 mg, with a target dose of 10 mg/day. Efficacy in adolescents with schizophrenia was demonstrated based on a flexible dose range of 2.5 to 20 mg/day in clinical trials, with a mean modal dose of 12.5 mg/day (mean dose of 11.1 mg/day). When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 2.5 mg or 5 mg are recommended. The safety and effectiveness of doses above 20 mg/day have not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Maintenance Treatment

The efficacy of olanzapine tablets for the maintenance treatment of schizophrenia in the adolescent population has not been systematically evaluated; however, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of olanzapine pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and adolescent patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.2 Bipolar I Disorder (Manic or Mixed Episodes)

Adults

Dose Selection for Monotherapy

Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals, generally beginning with 10 mg or 15 mg. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should generally occur at intervals of not less than 24 hours, reflecting the procedures in the placebo-controlled trials. When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 5 mg QD are recommended.

Short-term (3 to 4 weeks) antimanic efficacy was demonstrated in a dose range of 5 mg to 20 mg/day in clinical trials. The safety of doses above 20 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Maintenance Monotherapy

The benefit of maintaining bipolar I patients on monotherapy with oral olanzapine at a dose of 5 to 20 mg/day, after achieving a responder status for an average duration of 2 weeks, was demonstrated in a controlled trial [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. The physician who elects to use olanzapine tablets for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

Dose Selection for Adjunctive Treatment

When administered as adjunctive treatment to lithium or valproate, oral olanzapine dosing should generally begin with 10 mg once-a-day without regard to meals.

Antimanic efficacy was demonstrated in a dose range of 5 mg to 20 mg/day in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. The safety of doses above 20 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials.

Adolescents

Dose Selection

Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals with a recommended starting dose of 2.5 mg or 5 mg, with a target dose of 10 mg/day. Efficacy in adolescents with bipolar I disorder (manic or mixed episodes) was demonstrated based on a flexible dose range of 2.5 to 20 mg/day in clinical trials, with a mean modal dose of 10.7 mg/day (mean dose of 8.9 mg/day). When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 2.5 mg or 5 mg are recommended.

The safety and effectiveness of doses above 20 mg/day have not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Maintenance Treatment

The efficacy of olanzapine tablets for the maintenance treatment of bipolar I disorder in the adolescent population has not been evaluated; however, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of olanzapine pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and adolescent patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.5 Olanzapine and Fluoxetine in Combination: Depressive Episodes Associated with Bipolar I Disorder

When using olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination, also refer to the Clinical Studies section of the package insert for Symbyax**.

Adults

Oral olanzapine should be administered in combination with fluoxetine once daily in the evening, without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 mg of oral olanzapine and 20 mg of fluoxetine. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, can be made according to efficacy and tolerability within dose ranges of oral olanzapine 5 mg to 12.5 mg and fluoxetine 20 mg to 50 mg. Antidepressant efficacy was demonstrated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination in adult patients with a dose range of olanzapine 6 mg to 12 mg and fluoxetine 25 mg to 50 mg. Safety of coadministration of doses above 18 mg olanzapine with 75 mg fluoxetine has not been evaluated in clinical studies.

Children and Adolescents (10 to 17 Years of Age)

Dosage and Administration information for pediatric patients (10 to 17 years) is approved for Eli Lilly and Company’s olanzapine tablets. However, due to Eli Lilly and Company’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that pediatric information.

Safety and efficacy of olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination was determined in clinical trials supporting approval of Symbyax** (fixed dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine). Symbyax** is dosed between 3 mg/25 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day and 12 mg/50 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day. The following table demonstrates the appropriate individual component doses of olanzapine and fluoxetine versus Symbyax**. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should be made with the individual components according to efficacy and tolerability.
Table 1. Approximate Dose Correspondence Between Symbyax *** and the Combination of Olanzapine and Fluoxetine * Symbyax ** (olanzapine/fluoxetine HCl) is a fixed dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine.
For Symbyax** (mg/day)

Use in Combination

Olanzapine(mg/day)

Fluoxetine (mg/day)

3 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine

6 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine

12 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine

6 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine

12 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine

2.5

5

10 + 2.5

5

10 + 2.5

20

20

20

40+10

40+10

While there is no body of evidence to answer the question of how long a patient treated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination should remain on it, it is generally accepted that bipolar I disorder, including the depressive episodes associated with bipolar I disorder, is a chronic illness requiring chronic treatment. The physician should periodically reexamine the need for continued pharmacotherapy.

Olanzapine monotherapy is not indicated for the treatment of depressive episodes associated with bipolar I disorder.

2.7 Olanzapine and Fluoxetine in Combination: Dosing in Special Populations

The starting dose of oral olanzapine 2.5 mg to 5 mg with fluoxetine 20 mg should be used for patients with a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, patients with hepatic impairment or patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow the metabolism of olanzapine or fluoxetine in combination (female gender, geriatric age, nonsmoking status) or those patients who may be pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine. Dosing modification may be necessary in patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow metabolism. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients. Olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination have not been systematically studied in patients over 65 years of age or in patients < 10 years of age [see Warnings and Precautions (5.14), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Balsalazide Disodium

Balsalazide Disodium

2.1 Adult Dose

For treatment of active ulcerative colitis in adult patients, the usual dose is three 750 mg balsalazide disodium capsules to be taken 3 times a day (6.75 g per day) for up to 8 weeks. Some patients in the adult clinical trials required treatment for up to 12 weeks.

2.3 Administration Alternatives

Balsalazide disodium capsules may also be administered by carefully opening the capsule and sprinkling the capsule contents on applesauce. The entire drug/applesauce mixture should be swallowed immediately; the contents may be chewed, if necessary, since contents of balsalazide disodium capsules are NOT coated beads/granules. Patients should be instructed not to store any drug/applesauce mixture for future use.

If the capsules are opened for sprinkling, color variation of the powder inside the capsules ranges from orange to yellow and is expected due to color variation of the active pharmaceutical ingredient.

Teeth and/or tongue staining may occur in some patients who use balsalazide in sprinkle form with food.
Chlorthalidone

Chlorthalidone

Therapy should be initiated with the lowest possible dose. This dose should be titrated according to individual patient response to gain maximal therapeutic benefit while maintaining lowest dosage possible. A single dose given in the morning with food is recommended; divided daily doses are unnecessary.

Hypertension

Initiation: Therapy, in most patients, should be initiated with a single daily dose of 25 mg. If the response is insufficient after a suitable trial, the dosage may be increased to a single daily dose of 50 mg. If additional control is required, the dosage of chlorthalidone may be increased to 100 mg once daily or a second antihypertensive drug (step 2 therapy) may be added. Dosage above 100 mg daily usually does not increase effectiveness. Increases in serum uric acid and decreases in serum potassium are dose-related over the 25 to 100 mg/day range.

Maintenance: Maintenance doses may be lower than initial doses and should be adjusted according to individual patient response. Effectiveness is well sustained during continued use.

Edema

Initiation: Adults, initially 50 to 100 mg daily, or 100 mg on alternate days. Some patients may require 150 to 200 mg at these intervals or up to 200 mg daily. Dosages above this level, however, do not usually produce a greater response.

Maintenance: Maintenance doses may often be lower than initial doses and should be adjusted according to individual patient response. Effectiveness is well sustained during continued use.
Fenofibrate

Fenofibrate

2.1 General Considerations

Patients should be placed on an appropriate lipid-lowering diet before receiving fenofibrate tablets, and should continue this diet during treatment with fenofibrate tablets. Fenofibrate tablets should be given with meals, thereby optimizing the bioavailability of the medication.

The initial treatment for dyslipidemia is dietary therapy specific for the type of lipoprotein abnormality. Excess body weight and excess alcoholic intake may be important factors in hypertriglyceridemia and should be addressed prior to any drug therapy. Physical exercise can be an important ancillary measure. Diseases contributory to hyperlipidemia, such as hypothyroidism or diabetes mellitus should be looked for and adequately treated. Estrogen therapy, thiazide diuretics and beta-blockers, are sometimes associated with massive rises in plasma triglycerides, especially in subjects with familial hypertriglyceridemia. In such cases, discontinuation of the specific etiologic agent may obviate the need for specific drug therapy of hypertriglyceridemia.

Lipid levels should be monitored periodically and consideration should be given to reducing the dosage of fenofibrate tablets if lipid levels fall significantly below the targeted range.

Therapy should be withdrawn in patients who do not have an adequate response after 2 months of treatment with the maximum recommended dose of 160 mg once daily.

2.2 Primary Hypercholesterolemia or Mixed Dyslipidemia

The initial dose of fenofibrate tablets is 160 mg once daily.

2.3 Severe Hypertriglyceridemia

The initial dose is 54 mg to 160 mg per day. Dosage should be individualized according to patient response, and should be adjusted if necessary following repeat lipid determinations at 4 to 8 week intervals. The maximum dose is 160 mg once daily.

2.4 Impaired Renal Function

Treatment with fenofibrate tablets should be initiated at a dose of 54 mg per day in patients having mild to moderately impaired renal function, and increased only after evaluation of the effects on renal function and lipid levels at this dose. The use of fenofibrate tablets should be avoided in patients with severe renal impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.5 Geriatric Patients

Dose selection for the elderly should be made on the basis of renal function [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].
Repaglinide

Repaglinide

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of type 2 diabetes with repaglinide tablets.

The patient's blood glucose should be monitored periodically to determine the minimum effective dose for the patient; to detect primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication; and to detect secondary failure, i.e., loss of an adequate blood glucose-lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness. Glycosylated hemoglobin levels are of value in monitoring the patient's longer term response to therapy.

Short-term administration of repaglinide tablets may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually well controlled on diet.

Repaglinide tablets doses are usually taken within 15 minutes of the meal but time may vary from immediately preceding the meal to as long as 30 minutes before the meal.

Starting Dose

For patients not previously treated or whose HbA1c is < 8%, the starting dose should be 0.5 mg with each meal. For patients previously treated with blood glucose-lowering drugs and whose HbA1c is ≥ 8%, the initial dose is 1 mg or 2 mg with each meal preprandially (see previous paragraph).

Dose Adjustment

Dosing adjustments should be determined by blood glucose response, usually fasting blood glucose. Postprandial glucose levels testing may be clinically helpful in patients whose pre-meal blood glucose levels are satisfactory but whose overall glycemic control (HbA1c) is inadequate. The preprandial dose should be doubled up to 4 mg with each meal until satisfactory blood glucose response is achieved. At least one week should elapse to assess response after each dose adjustment.

The recommended dose range is 0.5 mg to 4 mg taken with meals. Repaglinide may be dosed preprandially 2, 3, or 4 times a day in response to changes in the patient’s meal pattern. The maximum recommended daily dose is 16 mg.

Patient Management

Long-term efficacy should be monitored by measurement of HbA1c levels approximately every 3 months. Failure to follow an appropriate dosage regimen may precipitate hypoglycemia or hyperglycemia. Patients who do not adhere to their prescribed dietary and drug regimen are more prone to exhibit unsatisfactory response to therapy including hypoglycemia. When hypoglycemia occurs in patients taking a combination of repaglinide tablets and a thiazolidinedione or repaglinide tablets and metformin, the dose of repaglinide tablets should be reduced.

Patients Receiving Other Oral Hypoglycemic Agents

When repaglinide tablets are used to replace therapy with other oral hypoglycemic agents, repaglinide tablets may be started on the day after the final dose is given. Patients should then be observed carefully for hypoglycemia due to potential overlapping of drug effects. When transferred from longer half-life sulfonylurea agents (e.g., chlorpropamide) to repaglinide, close monitoring may be indicated for up to one week or longer.

Combination Therapy

If repaglinide monotherapy does not result in adequate glycemic control, metformin or a thiazolidinedione may be added. If metformin or thiazolidinedione monotherapy does not provide adequate control, repaglinide may be added. The starting dose and dose adjustments for repaglinide combination therapy is the same as for repaglinide monotherapy. The dose of each drug should be carefully adjusted to determine the minimal dose required to achieve the desired pharmacologic effect. Failure to do so could result in an increase in the incidence of hypoglycemic episodes. Appropriate monitoring of FPG and HbA1c measurements should be used to ensure that the patient is not subjected to excessive drug exposure or increased probability of secondary drug failure.
Adenosine

Adenosine

To achieve maximum contraceptive effectiveness, norethindrone acetate and ethinyl estradiol tablets and ferrous fumarate tablets should be taken exactly as directed and at intervals not exceeding 24 hours. Norethindrone acetate and ethinyl estradiol tablets and ferrous fumarate tablets may be administered without regard to meals.

Norethindrone acetate and ethinyl estradiol tablets and ferrous fumarate tablets provide a regimen consisting of 24 white active tablets of norethindrone acetate and ethinyl estradiol and 4 brown non-hormonal (placebo) tablets of ferrous fumarate. The ferrous fumarate tablets do not serve any therapeutic purpose.

During the first cycle of use:

The possibility of ovulation and conception prior to initiation of medication should be considered. The patient is instructed to begin taking norethindrone acetate and ethinyl estradiol tablets and ferrous fumarate tablets on either Day 1 of menstruation (Day 1 Start) or the first Sunday after the onset of menstruation (Sunday Start). If menstruation begins on a Sunday, the first tablet (white) is taken that day. One white tablet should be taken daily for 24 consecutive days followed by one brown tablet daily for 4 consecutive days. Withdrawal bleeding should usually occur within three days following discontinuation of white tablets and may not have finished before the next pack is started. During the first cycle with a Sunday start, contraceptive reliance should not be placed on norethindrone acetate and ethinyl estradiol tablets and ferrous fumarate tablets until a white tablet has been taken daily for 7 consecutive days and a non-hormonal back-up method of birth control (such as condoms or spermicide) should be used during those 7 days. The patient begins her next and all subsequent 28-day courses of tablets on the same day of the week on which she began her first course, following the same schedule: 24 days on white tablets - 4 days on brown tablets. If in any cycle the patient starts tablets later than the proper day, she should protect herself against pregnancy by using a non-hormonal back-up method of birth control until she has taken a white tablet daily for 7 consecutive days.

Switching from another hormonal method of contraception:

When the patient is switching to norethindrone acetate and ethinyl estradiol tablets and ferrous fumarate tablets after completing a 21-day regimen of oral contraceptive tablets, transdermal patches, or a vaginal ring, she should wait 7 days after her last tablet, patch, or ring before she starts norethindrone acetate and ethinyl estradiol tablets and ferrous fumarate tablets. She will probably experience withdrawal bleeding during that week. She should be sure that no more than 7 days pass after her previous 21-day regimen. When the patient is switching to norethindrone acetate and ethinyl estradiol tablets and ferrous fumarate tablets after completing a 28-day regimen of oral contraceptive tablets, she should start her first pack of norethindrone acetate and ethinyl estradiol tablets and ferrous fumarate tablets on the day after her last tablet. She should not wait any days between packs. The patient may switch any day from a progestin-only pill and should begin norethindrone acetate and ethinyl estradiol tablets and ferrous fumarate tablets the next day. If switching from an implant or injection, the patient should start norethindrone acetate and ethinyl estradiol tablets and ferrous fumarate tablets on the day of implant removal or, if using an injection, the day the next injection would be due.

If spotting or breakthrough bleeding occurs:

The patient is instructed to continue on the same regimen. This type of bleeding is usually transient and without significance; however, if the bleeding is persistent or prolonged, the patient is advised to consult her healthcare provider. Although pregnancy is unlikely if norethindrone acetate and ethinyl estradiol tablets and ferrous fumarate tablets is taken according to directions, if withdrawal bleeding does not occur, the possibility of pregnancy must be considered. If the patient has not adhered to the prescribed schedule (missed one or more tablets or started taking them on a day later than she should have), the probability of pregnancy should be considered at the time of the first missed period and appropriate diagnostic measures taken. If the patient has adhered to the prescribed regimen and misses two consecutive periods, pregnancy should be ruled out. Hormonal contraceptives should be discontinued if pregnancy is confirmed.

For additional patient instructions regarding missed pills:

See the "WHAT TO DO IF YOU MISS PILLS" section in the DETAILED PATIENT LABELING. Any time the patient misses two or more white tablets, she should also use another method of non-hormonal back-up contraception until she has taken a white tablet daily for seven consecutive days. If the patient misses one or more brown tablets, she is still protected against pregnancy provided she begins taking the active white tablets again on the proper day. If breakthrough bleeding occurs following missed white tablets, it will usually be transient and of no consequence. The possibility of ovulation increases with each successive day that scheduled white tablets are missed. Therefore, the risk of pregnancy increases with each active (white) tablet missed.

Use after pregnancy, abortion or miscarriage:

Norethindrone acetate and ethinyl estradiol tablets and ferrous fumarate tablets should be initiated no earlier than 28 days postpartum in the nonlactating mother due to the increased risk for thromboembolism. When the tablets are administered in the postpartum period, the increased risk of thromboembolic disease associated with the postpartum period must be considered (see CONTRAINDICATIONS, WARNINGS, and PRECAUTIONS concerning thromboembolic disease). The patient should be advised to use a non-hormonal back-up method for the first 7 days of tablet taking. However, if intercourse has already occurred, the possibility of ovulation and conception prior to initiation of medication should be considered.

Norethindrone acetate and ethinyl estradiol tablets and ferrous fumarate tablets may be initiated after a first-trimester abortion or miscarriage; if the patient starts norethindrone acetate and ethinyl estradiol tablets and ferrous fumarate tablets immediately, additional contraceptive measures are not needed.

For additional patient instructions regarding complete dosing instructions, see the "HOW TO TAKE THE PILL" section in the DETAILED PATIENT LABELING.
Modafinil

Modafinil

2.1 Dosage in Narcolepsy and Obstructive Sleep Apnea (OSA)

The recommended dosage of modafinil tablets for patients with narcolepsy or OSA is 200 mg taken orally once a day as a single dose in the morning.

Doses up to 400 mg/day, given as a single dose, have been well tolerated, but there is no consistent evidence that this dose confers additional benefit beyond that of the 200 mg/day dose [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3) and Clinical Studies (14.1, 14.2)].

2.2 Dosage in Shift Work Disorder (SWD)

The recommended dosage of modafinil tablets for patients with SWD is 200 mg taken orally once a day as a single dose approximately 1 hour prior to the start of their work shift.

2.3 Dosage Modifications in Patients with Severe Hepatic Impairment

In patients with severe hepatic impairment, the dosage of modafinil tablets should be reduced to one-half of that recommended for patients with normal hepatic function [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.4 Use in Geriatric Patients

Consideration should be given to the use of lower doses and close monitoring in geriatric patients [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].
Spironolactone

Spironolactone

Primary Hyperaldosteronism

Spironolactone tablets may be employed as an initial diagnostic measure to provide presumptive evidence of primary hyperaldosteronism while patients are on normal diets.

Long Test

Spironolactone tablets are administered at a daily dosage of 400 mg for 3 to 4 weeks. Correction of hypokalemia and of hypertension provides presumptive evidence for the diagnosis of primary hyperaldosteronism.

Short Test

Spironolactone tablets are administered at a daily dosage of 400 mg for 4 days. If serum potassium increases during spironolactone tablet administration but drops when spironolactone tablets are discontinued, a presumptive diagnosis of primary hyperaldosteronism should be considered.

After the diagnosis of hyperaldosteronism has been established by more definitive testing procedures, spironolactone tablets may be administered in doses of 100 mg to 400 mg daily in preparation for surgery. For patients who are considered unsuitable for surgery, spironolactone tablets may be employed for long-term maintenance therapy at the lowest effective dosage determined for the individual patient.

Edema in Adults (Congestive Heart Failure, Hepatic Cirrhosis or Nephrotic Syndrome)

An initial daily dosage of 100 mg of spironolactone tablets administered in either single or divided doses is recommended, but may range from 25 mg to 200 mg daily. When given as the sole agent for diuresis, spironolactone tablets should be continued for at least 5 days at the initial dosage level, after which it may be adjusted to the optimal therapeutic or maintenance level administered in either single or divided daily doses. If, after 5 days, an adequate diuretic response to spironolactone tablets has not occurred, a second diuretic that acts more proximally in the renal tubule may be added to the regimen. Because of the additive effect of spironolactone tablets when administered concurrently with such diuretics, an enhanced diuresis usually begins on the first day of combined treatment; combined therapy is indicated when more rapid diuresis is desired. The dosage of spironolactone tablets should remain unchanged when other diuretic therapy is added.

Essential Hypertension

For adults, an initial daily dosage of 50 mg to 100 mg of spironolactone tablets administered in either single or divided doses is recommended. Spironolactone tablets may also be given with diuretics that act more proximally in the renal tubule or with other antihypertensive agents. Treatment with spironolactone tablets should be continued for at least 2 weeks, since the maximum response may not occur before this time. Subsequently, dosage should be adjusted according to the response of the patient.

Hypokalemia

Spironolactone tablets in a dosage ranging from 25 mg to 100 mg daily is useful in treating a diuretic-induced hypokalemia, when oral potassium supplements or other potassium-sparing regimens are considered inappropriate.

Severe Heart Failure in Conjunction with Standard Therapy (NYHA Class III to IV)

Treatment should be initiated with spironolactone tablets 25 mg once daily if the patient's serum potassium is ≤ 5 mEq/L and the patient's serum creatinine is ≤ 2.5 mg/dL. Patients who tolerate 25 mg once daily may have their dosage increased to 50 mg once daily as clinically indicated. Patients who do not tolerate 25 mg once daily may have their dosage reduced to 25 mg every other day. See WARNINGS: Hyperkalemia in Patients with Severe Heart Failure for advice on monitoring serum potassium and serum creatinine.
Cimetidine

Cimetidine

Duodenal Ulcer

Active Duodenal Ulcer

Clinical studies have indicated that suppression of nocturnal acid is the most important factor in duodenal ulcer healing (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Antisecretory Activity: Acid Secretion). This is supported by recent clinical trials (see CLINICAL TRIALS: Duodenal Ulcer: Active Duodenal Ulcer). Therefore, there is no apparent rationale, except for familiarity with use, for treating with anything other than a once daily at bedtime dosage regimen.

In a U.S. dose-ranging study of 400 mg at bedtime, 800 mg at bedtime and 1600 mg at bedtime, a continuous dose-response relationship for ulcer healing was demonstrated.

However, 800 mg at bedtime is the dose of choice for most patients, as it provides a high healing rate (the difference between 800 mg at bedtime and 1600 mg at bedtime being small), maximal pain relief, a decreased potential for drug interactions (see PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions) and maximal patient convenience. Patients unhealed at 4 weeks, or those with persistent symptoms, have been shown to benefit from 2 to 4 weeks of continued therapy.

It has been shown that patients who both have an endoscopically demonstrated ulcer larger than 1 cm and are also heavy smokers (i.e., smoke one pack of cigarettes or more per day) are more difficult to heal. There is some evidence which suggests that more rapid healing can be achieved in this subpopulation with 1600 mg of cimetidine tablets at bedtime. While early pain relief with either 800 mg at bedtime or 1600 mg at bedtime is equivalent in all patients, 1600 mg at bedtime provides an appropriate alternative when it is important to ensure healing within 4 weeks for this subpopulation. Alternatively, approximately 94% of all patients will also heal in 8 weeks with 800 mg of cimetidine tablets at bedtime

Other regimens of cimetidine tablets in the United States which have been shown to be effective are: 300 mg 4 times daily, with meals and at bedtime, the original regimen with which U.S. physicians have the most experience, and 400 mg twice daily, in the morning and at bedtime (see CLINICAL TRIALS: Duodenal Ulcer: Active Duodenal Ulcer).

Concomitant antacids should be given as needed for relief of pain. However, simultaneous administration of cimetidine tablets and antacids is not recommended, since antacids have been reported to interfere with the absorption of cimetidine.

While healing with cimetidine tablets often occurs during the first week or two, treatment should be continued for 4 to 6 weeks unless healing has been demonstrated by endoscopic examination.

Maintenance Therapy for Duodenal Ulcer

In those patients requiring maintenance therapy, the recommended adult oral dose is 400 mg at bedtime.

Active Benign Gastric Ulcer

The recommended adult oral dosage for short-term treatment of active benign gastric ulcer is 800 mg at bedtime, or 300 mg 4 times a day with meals and at bedtime. Controlled clinical studies were limited to 6 weeks of treatment (see CLINICAL TRIALS). A dose of 800 mg at bedtime is the preferred regimen for most patients based upon convenience and reduced potential for drug interactions. Symptomatic response to cimetidine tablets does not preclude the presence of a gastric malignancy. It is important to follow gastric ulcer patients to assure rapid progress to complete healing.

Erosive Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)

The recommended adult oral dosage for the treatment of erosive esophagitis that has been diagnosed by endoscopy is 1600 mg daily in divided doses (800 mg twice daily or 400 mg 4 times daily) for 12 weeks. The use of cimetidine tablets beyond 12 weeks has not been established.

Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions (such as Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome)

Recommended adult oral dosage: 300 mg 4 times a day with meals and at bedtime. In some patients it may be necessary to administer higher doses more frequently. Doses should be adjusted to individual patient needs, but should not usually exceed 2400 mg per day and should continue as long as clinically indicated.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Impaired Renal Function

Patients with severely impaired renal function have been treated with cimetidine tablets. However, such usage has been very limited. On the basis of this experience the recommended dosage is 300 mg every 12 hours orally. Should the patient’s condition require, the frequency of dosing may be increased to every 8 hours or even further with caution. In severe renal failure, accumulation may occur and the lowest frequency of dosing compatible with an adequate patient response should be used. When liver impairment is also present, further reductions in dosage may be necessary. Hemodialysis reduces the level of circulating cimetidine. Ideally, the dosage schedule should be adjusted so that the timing of a scheduled dose coincides with the end of hemodialysis.
Lite Nfoamy Eucalyptus ...

Lite Nfoamy Eucalyptus Mint Sanitizing Handwash

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of diclofenac sodium delayed-release tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use diclofenac sodium delayed-release tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with diclofenac sodium delayed-release tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient’s needs.

For the relief of osteoarthritis, the recommended dosage is 100 to 150 mg/day in divided doses (50 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d., or 75 mg b.i.d.).

For the relief of rheumatoid arthritis, the recommended dosage is 150 to 200 mg/day in divided doses (50 mg t.i.d. or q.i.d., or 75 mg b.i.d.).

For the relief of ankylosing spondylitis, the recommended dosage is 100 to 125 mg/day, administered as 25 mg q.i.d., with an extra 25 mg dose at bedtime if necessary.

Different formulations of diclofenac (diclofenac sodium enteric-coated tablets; diclofenac sodium extended-release tablets; diclofenac potassium immediate-release tablets) are not necessarily bioequivalent even if the milligram strength is the same.
Ibandronate Sodium

Ibandronate Sodium

2.1 Dosage Information

The dose of ibandronate sodium tablets is one 150 mg tablet taken once monthly on the same date each month.

2.2 Important Administration Instructions

Instruct patients to do the following:
• Take ibandronate sodium tablets at least 60 minutes before the first food or drink (other than water) of the day or before taking any oral medication or supplementation, including calcium, antacids, or vitamins to maximize absorption and clinical benefit (see Drug Interactions [7.1]). Avoid the use of water with supplements including mineral water because they may have a higher concentration of calcium. • Swallow ibandronate sodium tablets whole with a full glass of plain water (6 to 8 oz) while standing or sitting in an upright position to reduce the potential for esophageal irritation. Avoid lying down for 60 minutes after taking ibandronate sodium tablets (see Warnings and Precautions [5.1]). Do not chew or suck the tablet because of a potential for oropharyngeal ulceration. • Do not eat, drink anything except plain water, or take other medications for at least 60 minutes after taking ibandronate sodium tablets.
2.3 Recommendations for Calcium and Vitamin D Supplementation

Instruct patients to take supplemental calcium and vitamin D if their dietary intake is inadequate. Avoid the use of calcium supplements within 60 minutes of ibandronate sodium tablet administration because coadministration of ibandronate sodium tablets and calcium may interfere with the absorption of ibandronate sodium (see Drug Interactions [7.1]).

2.4 Administration Instructions for Missed Once-Monthly Doses

If the once-monthly dose is missed, instruct patients to do the following:
• If the next scheduled ibandronate day is more than 7 days away, take one ibandronate 150 mg tablet in the morning following the date that it is remembered. • If the next scheduled ibandronate day is only 1 to 7 days away, wait until the subsequent month’s scheduled ibandronate day to take their tablet.
For subsequent monthly doses for both of the above scenarios, instruct patients to return to their original schedule by taking one ibandronate 150 mg tablet every month on their previous chosen day.
Meclizine Hydrochloride...

Meclizine Hydrochloride

Motion Sickness

The initial dose of 25 mg to 50 mg of meclizine hydrochloride tablets should be taken one hour prior to travel for protection against motion sickness. Thereafter, the dose may be repeated every 24 hours for the duration of the journey.
Cabergoline

Cabergoline

The recommended dosage of cabergoline tablets for initiation of therapy is 0.25 mg twice a week. Dosage may be increased by 0.25 mg twice weekly up to a dosage of 1 mg twice a week according to the patient’s serum prolactin level. Before initiating treatment, cardiovascular evaluation should be performed and echocardiography should be considered to assess for valvular disease.

Dosage increases should not occur more rapidly than every 4 weeks, so that the physician can assess the patient's response to each dosage level. If the patient does not respond adequately, and no additional benefit is observed with higher doses, the lowest dose that achieved maximal response should be used and other therapeutic approaches considered. Patients receiving long-term treatment with cabergoline should undergo periodic assessment of their cardiac status and echocardiography should be considered.

After a normal serum prolactin level has been maintained for 6 months, cabergoline may be discontinued, with periodic monitoring of the serum prolactin level to determine whether or when treatment with cabergoline should be reinstituted. The durability of efficacy beyond 24 months of therapy with cabergoline has not been established.
Methylphenidate Hydroch...

Methylphenidate Hydrochloride

Patients should be placed on an appropriate lipid-lowering diet before receiving fenofibrate capsules and should continue this diet during treatment with fenofibrate capsules. Fenofibrate capsules should be given with meals, thereby optimizing the bioavailability of the medication.

For the treatment of adult patients with primary hypercholesterolemia or mixed hyperlipidemia, the initial dose of fenofibrate capsules is 200 mg per day.

For adult patients with hypertriglyceridemia, the initial dose is 67 to 200 mg per day.

Dosage should be individualized according to patient response and should be adjusted if necessary following repeat lipid determinations at 4 to 8 week intervals. The maximum dose is 200 mg per day.

Treatment with fenofibrate capsules should be initiated at a dose of 67 mg/day in patients having impaired renal function and increased only after evaluation of the effects on renal function and lipid levels at this dose. In the elderly, the initial dose should likewise be limited to 67 mg/day.

Lipid levels should be monitored periodically and consideration should be given to reducing the dosage of fenofibrate capsules if lipid levels fall significantly below the targeted range.
Montelukast Sodium

Montelukast Sodium

2.1 Recommended Dosage

Adults

The recommended initial dose for patients not receiving a diuretic is 10 mg once a day. The usual maintenance dosage range is 20 mg to 40 mg per day administered as a single dose or in two equally divided doses. A dose of 80 mg gives an increased response, but experience with this dose is limited. The divided regimen was more effective in controlling trough (pre-dosing) blood pressure than the same dose given as a once-daily regimen.

Use with Diuretics in Adults

The recommended starting dose of benazepril hydrochloride tablets in a patient on a diuretic is 5 mg once daily. If blood pressure is not controlled with benazepril hydrochloride tablets alone, a low dose of diuretic may be added.

Pediatric Patients 6 Years of Age and Older

The recommended starting dose for pediatric patients is 0.2 mg/kg once per day. Titrate as needed to 0.6 mg/kg once per day. Doses above 0.6 mg/kg (or in excess of 40 mg daily) have not been studied in pediatric patients.

Benazepril hydrochloride tablets are not recommended in pediatric patients less than 6 years of age or in pediatric patients with GFR less than 30 mL/min/1.73m² [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)].

2.2 Dose Adjustment for Renal Impairment

For adults with a GFR < 30 mL/min/1.73 m2 (serum creatinine > 3 mg/dL), the recommended initial dose is 5 mg benazepril hydrochloride tablets once daily. Dosage may be titrated upward until blood pressure is controlled or to a maximum total daily dose of 40 mg. Benazepril hydrochloride tablets can also worsen renal function [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].

2.3 Preparation of Suspension (for 150 mL of a 2 mg/mL Suspension)

Add 75 mL of Ora-Plus®* oral suspending vehicle to an amber polyethylene terephthalate (PET) bottle containing fifteen benazepril hydrochloride 20 mg tablets, and shake for at least two minutes. Allow the suspension to stand for a minimum of 1 hour. After the standing time, shake the suspension for a minimum of one additional minute. Add 75 mL of Ora-Sweet®* oral syrup vehicle to the bottle and shake the suspension to disperse the ingredients. The suspension should be refrigerated at 2° to 8°C (36° to 46°F) and can be stored for up to 30 days in the PET bottle with a child-resistant screw-cap closure. Shake the suspension before each use.

*Ora-Plus® and Ora-Sweet® are registered trademarks of Paddock Laboratories, Inc. Ora Plus® contains carrageenan, citric acid, methylparaben, microcrystalline cellulose, carboxymethylcellulose sodium, potassium sorbate, simethicone, sodium phosphate monobasic, xanthan gum, and water. Ora-Sweet® contains citric acid, berry citrus flavorant, glycerin, methylparaben, potassium sorbate, sodium phosphate monobasic, sorbitol, sucrose, and water.
Bromocriptine Mesylate

Bromocriptine Mesylate

General

It is recommended that bromocriptine mesylate tablets and capsules be taken with food. Patients should be evaluated frequently during dose escalation to determine the lowest dosage that produces a therapeutic response.

Hyperprolactinemic Indications

The initial dosage of bromocriptine mesylate tablets in adults is one-half to one 2.5 mg scored tablet daily. An additional 2.5 mg tablet may be added to the treatment regimen as tolerated every 2 to 7 days until an optimal therapeutic response is achieved. The therapeutic dosage ranged from 2.5 to 15 mg daily in adults studied clinically.

Based on limited data in children of age 11 to 15, (see Pediatric Use) the initial dose is one-half to one 2.5 mg scored tablet daily. Dosing may need to be increased as tolerated until a therapeutic response is achieved. The therapeutic dosage ranged from 2.5 to 10 mg daily in children with prolactin-secreting pituitary adenomas.

In order to reduce the likelihood of prolonged exposure to bromocriptine mesylate tablets or capsules should an unsuspected pregnancy occur, a mechanical contraceptive should be used in conjunction with bromocriptine therapy until normal ovulatory menstrual cycles have been restored. Contraception may then be discontinued in patients desiring pregnancy.

Thereafter, if menstruation does not occur within 3 days of the expected date, bromocriptine therapy should be discontinued and a pregnancy test performed.

Acromegaly

Virtually all acromegalic patients receiving therapeutic benefit from bromocriptine mesylate tablets and capsules also have reductions in circulating levels of growth hormone. Therefore, periodic assessment of circulating levels of growth hormone will, in most cases, serve as a guide in determining the therapeutic potential of bromocriptine. If, after a brief trial with bromocriptine therapy, no significant reduction in growth hormone levels has taken place, careful assessment of the clinical features of the disease should be made, and if no change has occurred, dosage adjustment or discontinuation of therapy should be considered.

The initial recommended dosage is one-half to one 2.5 mg bromocriptine mesylate tablet on retiring (with food) for 3 days. An additional one-half to one bromocriptine mesylate tablet should be added to the treatment regimen as tolerated every 3 to 7 days until the patient obtains optimal therapeutic benefit. Patients should be reevaluated monthly and the dosage adjusted based on reductions of growth hormone or clinical response. The usual optimal therapeutic dosage range of bromocriptine mesylate tablets and capsules varies from 20 to 30 mg/day in most patients. The maximal dosage should not exceed 100 mg/day.

Patients treated with pituitary irradiation should be withdrawn from bromocriptine therapy on a yearly basis to assess both the clinical effects of radiation on the disease process as well as the effects of bromocriptine therapy. Usually a 4 to 8 week withdrawal period is adequate for this purpose. Recurrence of the signs/symptoms or increases in growth hormone indicate the disease process is still active and further courses of bromocriptine should be considered.

Parkinson’s Disease

The basic principle of bromocriptine mesylate therapy is to initiate treatment at a low dosage and, on an individual basis, increase the daily dosage slowly until a maximum therapeutic response is achieved. The dosage of levodopa during this introductory period should be maintained, if possible. The initial dose of bromocriptine is one-half of a 2.5 mg tablet twice daily with meals. Assessments are advised at 2 week intervals during dosage titration to ensure that the lowest dosage producing an optimal therapeutic response is not exceeded. If necessary, the dosage may be increased every 14 to 28 days by 2.5 mg/day with meals. Should it be advisable to reduce the dosage of levodopa because of adverse reactions, the daily dosage of bromocriptine, if increased, should be accomplished gradually in small (2.5 mg) increments.

The safety of bromocriptine mesylate tablets and capsules has not been demonstrated in dosages exceeding 100 mg/day
Carbidopa And Levodopa

Carbidopa And Levodopa

The optimum daily dosage of carbidopa and levodopa tablets must be determined by careful titration in each patient. Carbidopa and levodopa tablets are available in a 1:4 ratio of carbidopa to levodopa (carbidopa and levodopa tablets 25 mg/100 mg) as well as 1:10 ratio (carbidopa and levodopa tablets 25 mg/250 mg and carbidopa and levodopa tablets 10 mg/100 mg). Tablets of the two ratios may be given separately or combined as needed to provide the optimum dosage.

Studies show that peripheral dopa decarboxylase is saturated by carbidopa at approximately 70 mg to 100 mg a day. Patients receiving less than this amount of carbidopa are more likely to experience nausea and vomiting.

Usual Initial Dosage

Dosage is best initiated with one tablet of carbidopa and levodopa 25 mg/100 mg 3 times a day. This dosage schedule provides 75 mg of carbidopa per day. Dosage may be increased by one tablet every day or every other day, as necessary, until a dosage of eight tablets of carbidopa and levodopa 25 mg/100 mg a day is reached.

If carbidopa and levodopa 10 mg/100 mg is used, dosage may be initiated with one tablet 3 or 4 times a day. However, this will not provide an adequate amount of carbidopa for many patients. Dosage may be increased by one tablet every day or every other day until a total of eight tablets (two tablets q.i.d.) is reached.

How to Transfer Patients from Levodopa

Levodopa must be discontinued at least 12 hours before starting carbidopa and levodopa tablets. A daily dosage of carbidopa and levodopa should be chosen that will provide approximately 25% of the previous levodopa dosage. Patients who are taking less than 1500 mg of levodopa a day should be started on one tablet of carbidopa and levodopa 25 mg/100 mg 3 or 4 times a day. The suggested starting dosage for most patients taking more than 1500 mg of levodopa is one tablet of carbidopa and levodopa 25 mg/250 mg 3 or 4 times a day.

Maintenance

Therapy should be individualized and adjusted according to the desired therapeutic response. At least 70 mg to 100 mg of carbidopa per day should be provided. When a greater proportion of carbidopa is required, one tablet of carbidopa and levodopa 25 mg/100 mg may be substituted for each tablet of carbidopa and levodopa 10 mg/100 mg. When more levodopa is required, carbidopa and levodopa 25 mg/250 mg should be substituted for carbidopa and levodopa 25 mg/100 mg or carbidopa and levodopa 10 mg/100 mg. If necessary, the dosage of carbidopa and levodopa 25 mg/250 mg may be increased by one-half or one tablet every day or every other day to a maximum of eight tablets a day. Experience with total daily dosages of carbidopa greater than 200 mg is limited.

Because both therapeutic and adverse responses occur more rapidly with carbidopa and levodopa than with levodopa alone, patients should be monitored closely during the dose adjustment period. Specifically, involuntary movements will occur more rapidly with carbidopa and levodopa than with levodopa. The occurrence of involuntary movements may require dosage reduction. Blepharospasm may be a useful early sign of excess dosage in some patients.

Addition of Other Antiparkinsonian Medications

Standard drugs for Parkinson's disease, other than levodopa without a decarboxylase inhibitor, may be used concomitantly while carbidopa and levodopa tablets are being administered, although dosage adjustments may be required.

Interruption of Therapy

Sporadic cases of a symptom complex resembling Neuroleptic Malignant Syndrome (NMS) have been associated with dose reductions and withdrawal of carbidopa and levodopa. Patients should be observed carefully if abrupt reduction or discontinuation of carbidopa and levodopa is required, especially if the patient is receiving neuroleptics. (See WARNINGS.)

If general anesthesia is required, carbidopa and levodopa tablets may be continued as long as the patient is permitted to take fluids and medication by mouth. If therapy is interrupted temporarily, the patient should be observed for symptoms resembling NMS and the usual daily dosage may be administered as soon as the patient is able to take oral medication.
Budesonide

Budesonide

2.1 Mild to Moderate Active Crohn’s Disease

The recommended adult dosage for the treatment of mild to moderate active Crohn's disease involving the ileum and/or the ascending colon is 9 mg orally taken once daily in the morning for up to 8 weeks. Repeated 8 week courses of budesonide capsules (enteric coated) can be given for recurring episodes of active disease.

2.2 Maintenance of Clinical Remission of Mild to Moderate Crohn’s Disease

Following an 8 week course(s) of treatment for active disease and once the patient’s symptoms are controlled (CDAI less than 150), budesonide capsules (enteric coated) 6 mg orally is recommended once daily for maintenance of clinical remission up to 3 months. If symptom control is still maintained at 3 months an attempt to taper to complete cessation is recommended. Continued treatment with budesonide capsules (enteric coated) 6 mg for more than 3 months has not been shown to provide substantial clinical benefit.

Patients with mild to moderate active Crohn’s disease involving the ileum and/or ascending colon have been switched from oral prednisolone to budesonide capsules (enteric coated) with no reported episodes of adrenal insufficiency. Since prednisolone should not be stopped abruptly, tapering should begin concomitantly with initiating budesonide capsule (enteric coated) treatment.

2.3 CYP3A4 inhibitors

If concomitant administration with ketoconazole, or any other CYP3A4 inhibitor, is indicated, patients should be closely monitored for increased signs and/or symptoms of hypercorticism. Grapefruit juice, which is known to inhibit CYP3A4, should also be avoided when taking budesonide capsules (enteric coated). In these cases, reduction in the dose of budesonide capsules (enteric coated) should be considered [see Drug Interactions (7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Ondansetron

Ondansetron

Hypertension

In patients who are currently being treated with a diuretic, symptomatic hypotension occasionally may occur following the initial dose of enalapril maleate tablets. The diuretic should, if possible, be discontinued for 2 to 3 days before beginning therapy with enalapril maleate tablets to reduce the likelihood of hypotension. (See WARNINGS.) If the patient's blood pressure is not controlled with enalapril maleate tablets alone, diuretic therapy may be resumed.

If the diuretic cannot be discontinued an initial dose of 2.5 mg should be used under medical supervision for at least 2 hours and until blood pressure has stabilized for at least an additional hour. (See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions.)

The recommended initial dose in patients not on diuretics is 5 mg once a day. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. The usual dosage range is 10 mg to 40 mg per day administered in a single dose or two divided doses. In some patients treated once daily, the antihypertensive effect may diminish toward the end of the dosing interval. In such patients, an increase in dosage or twice daily administration should be considered. If blood pressure is not controlled with enalapril maleate tablets alone, a diuretic may be added. Concomitant administration of enalapril maleate tablets with potassium supplements, potassium salt substitutes, or potassium-sparing diuretics may lead to increases of serum potassium (see PRECAUTIONS).

Dosage Adjustment in Hypertensive Patients with Renal Impairment

The usual dose of enalapril maleate tablets is recommended for patients with a creatinine clearance > 30 mL/min (serum creatinine of up to approximately 3 mg/dL). For patients with creatinine clearance ≤ 30 mL/min (serum creatinine ≥ 3 mg/dL), the first dose is 2.5 mg once daily. The dosage may be titrated upward until blood pressure is controlled or to a maximum of 40 mg daily.
* See WARNINGS: Anaphylactoid Reactions During Membrane Exposure. † Dosage on nondialysis days should be adjusted depending on the blood pressure response.
Renal Status

Creatinine-Clearance mL/min

Initial Dose mg/day

Normal Renal Function

> 80 mL/min

5 mg

Mild Impairment

≤ 80 > 30 mL/min

5 mg

Moderate to Severe Impairment

≤ 30 mL/min

2.5 mg

Dialysis Patients*

—

2.5 mg on dialysis days†

Heart Failure

Enalapril maleate tablets are indicated for the treatment of symptomatic heart failure, usually in combination with diuretics and digitalis. In the placebo-controlled studies that demonstrated improved survival, patients were titrated as tolerated up to 40 mg, administered in two divided doses.

The recommended initial dose is 2.5 mg. The recommended dosing range is 2.5 mg to 20 mg given twice a day. Doses should be titrated upward, as tolerated, over a period of a few days or weeks. The maximum daily dose administered in clinical trials was 40 mg in divided doses.

After the initial dose of enalapril maleate tablets, the patient should be observed under medical supervision for at least 2 hours and until blood pressure has stabilized for at least an additional hour. (See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions.) If possible, the dose of any concomitant diuretic should be reduced which may diminish the likelihood of hypotension. The appearance of hypotension after the initial dose of enalapril maleate tablets does not preclude subsequent careful dose titration with the drug, following effective management of the hypotension.

Asymptomatic Left Ventricular Dysfunction

In the trial that demonstrated efficacy, patients were started on 2.5 mg twice daily and were titrated as tolerated to the targeted daily dose of 20 mg (in divided doses).

After the initial dose of enalapril maleate tablets, the patient should be observed under medical supervision for at least 2 hours and until blood pressure has stabilized for at least an additional hour. (See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions.) If possible, the dose of any concomitant diuretic should be reduced which may diminish the likelihood of hypotension. The appearance of hypotension after the initial dose of enalapril maleate tablets does not preclude subsequent careful dose titration with the drug, following effective management of the hypotension.

Dosage Adjustment in Patients with Heart Failure and Renal Impairment or Hyponatremia

In patients with heart failure who have hyponatremia (serum sodium less than 130 mEq/L) or with serum creatinine greater than 1.6 mg/dL, therapy should be initiated at 2.5 mg daily under close medical supervision. (See DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION: Heart Failure, WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions.) The dose may be increased to 2.5 mg b.i.d., then 5 mg b.i.d. and higher as needed, usually at intervals of 4 days or more if at the time of dosage adjustment there is not excessive hypotension or significant deterioration of renal function. The maximum daily dose is 40 mg.

Pediatric Hypertensive Patients

The usual recommended starting dose is 0.08 mg/kg (up to 5 mg) once daily. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. Doses above 0.58 mg/kg (or in excess of 40 mg) have not been studied in pediatric patients (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Pharmacology in Pediatric Patients).

Enalapril maleate tablets are not recommended in neonates and in pediatric patients with glomerular filtration rate <30 mL/min/1.73 m2, as no data are available.

Preparation of Suspension (for 200 mL of a 1 mg/mL suspension)

Add 50 mL of Bicitra®† to a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) bottle containing ten 20 mg tablets of enalapril maleate and shake for at least 2 minutes. Let concentrate stand for 60 minutes. Following the 60 minute hold time, shake the concentrate for an additional minute. Add 150 mL of Ora-Sweet SF™† to the concentrate in the PET bottle and shake the suspension to disperse the ingredients. The suspension should be refrigerated at 2° to 8°C (36° to 46°F) and can be stored for up to 30 days. Shake the suspension before each use.
Pravastatin Sodium

Pravastatin Sodium

2.1 General Instructions for Use

To minimize the risk of seizure, increase the dose gradually [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)]. Increases in dose should not exceed 100 mg/day in a 3-day period. Bupropion hydrochloride tablets, USP should be swallowed whole and not crushed, divided, or chewed. Bupropion hydrochloride tablets, USP may be taken with or without food.

The recommended starting dose is 200 mg/day, given as 100 mg twice daily. After 3 days of dosing, the dose may be increased to 300 mg/day, given as 100 mg 3 times daily, with at least 6 hours between successive doses. Dosing above 300 mg/day may be accomplished using the 75 mg or 100 mg tablets.

A maximum of 450 mg/day, given in divided doses of not more than 150 mg each, may be considered for patients who show no clinical improvement after several weeks of treatment at 300 mg/day. Administer the 100 mg tablet 4 times daily to not exceed the limit of 150 mg in a single dose.

It is generally agreed that acute episodes of depression require several months or longer of antidepressant drug treatment beyond the response in the acute episode. It is unknown whether the dose of bupropion hydrochloride tablets, USP needed for maintenance treatment is identical to the dose that provided an initial response. Periodically reassess the need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment.

2.2 Dose Adjustment in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

In patients with moderate to severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh score: 7 to 15), the maximum dose of bupropion hydrochloride tablets, USP is 75 mg/day. In patients with mild hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh score: 5 to 6), consider reducing the dose and/or frequency of dosing [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 Dose Adjustment in Patients with Renal Impairment

Consider reducing the dose and/or frequency of bupropion hydrochloride tablets, USP in patients with renal impairment (Glomerular Filtration Rate < 90 mL/min) [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.4 Switching a Patient to or from a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Antidepressant

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat depression and initiation of therapy with bupropion hydrochloride tablets, USP. Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping bupropion hydrochloride tablets, USP before starting an MAOI antidepressant [see Contraindications (4) and Drug Interactions (7.6)].

2.5 Use of Bupropion Hydrochloride Tablets with Reversible MAOIs such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start bupropion hydrochloride tablets, USP in a patient who is being treated with a reversible MAOI such as linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. Drug interactions can increase the risk of hypertensive reactions. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, non-pharmacological interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered [see Contraindications (4) and Drug Interactions (7.6)].

In some cases, a patient already receiving therapy with bupropion hydrochloride tablets, USP may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of hypertensive reactions in a particular patient, bupropion hydrochloride tablets, USP should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with bupropion hydrochloride tablets, USP may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue.

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with bupropion hydrochloride tablets, USP is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of a drug interaction with such use [see Contraindications (4) and Drug Interactions (7.6)].
Nizatidine

Nizatidine

Active Duodenal Ulcer

The recommended oral dosage for adults is 300 mg once daily at bedtime. An alternative dosage regimen is 150 mg twice daily.

Maintenance of Healed Duodenal Ulcer

The recommended oral dosage for adults is 150 mg once daily at bedtime.

Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease

The recommended oral dosage in adults for the treatment of erosions, ulcerations, and associated heartburn is 150 mg twice daily.

Active Benign Gastric Ulcer

The recommended oral dosage is 300 mg given either as 150 mg twice daily or 300 mg once daily at bedtime. Prior to treatment, care should be taken to exclude the possibility of malignant gastric ulceration.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients With Moderate to Severe Renal Insufficiency

The dose for patients with renal dysfunction should be reduced as follows:
Active Duodenal Ulcer, GERD and Benign Gastric Ulcer Ccr Dose
20–50 mL/min

150 mg daily

< 20 mL/min

150 mg every other day
Maintenance Therapy Ccr Dose
20–50 mL/min

150 mg every other day

< 20 mL/min

150 mg every 3 days

Some elderly patients may have creatinine clearances of less than 50 mL/min, and, based on pharmacokinetic data in patients with renal impairment, the dose for such patients should be reduced accordingly. The clinical effects of this dosage reduction in patients with renal failure have not been evaluated.
Lingerie De Peau Bb Inv...

Lingerie De Peau Bb Invisible Skin-fusion Multi-perfecting Makeup With Sunscreen Broad Spectrum Spf 30 Light

2.1 Recommendations for All Patients

Pioglitazone and metformin hydrochloride tablets should be taken with meals to reduce the gastrointestinal side effects associated with metformin.

If therapy with a combination tablet containing pioglitazone and metformin is considered appropriate the recommended starting dose is:
• 15 mg/500 mg twice daily or 15 mg/850 mg once daily and gradually titrated, as needed, after assessing adequacy of therapeutic response and tolerability, • for patients with New York Heart Association (NYHA) Class I or Class II congestive heart failure: 15 mg/500 mg or 15 mg/850 mg once daily and gradually titrated, as needed, after assessing adequacy of therapeutic response and tolerability, • for patients inadequately controlled on metformin monotherapy: 15 mg/500 mg twice daily or 15 mg/850 mg once or twice daily (depending on the dose of metformin already being taken) and gradually titrated, as needed, after assessing adequacy of therapeutic response and tolerability, • for patients inadequately controlled on pioglitazone monotherapy: 15 mg/500 mg twice daily or 15 mg/850 mg once daily and gradually titrated, as needed, after assessing adequacy of therapeutic response and tolerability, • for patients who are changing from combination therapy of pioglitazone plus metformin as separate tablets: pioglitazone and metformin hydrochloride tablets should be taken at doses that are as close as possible to the dose of pioglitazone and metformin already being taken.
Pioglitazone and metformin hydrochloride tablets may be titrated up to a maximum daily dose of 45 mg of pioglitazone and 2550 mg of metformin.

Metformin doses above 2000 mg may be better tolerated given three times a day.

After initiation of pioglitazone and metformin hydrochloride tablets or with dose increase, monitor patients carefully for adverse reactions related to fluid retention such as weight gain, edema, and signs and symptoms of congestive heart failure [see Boxed Warning and Warnings and Precautions (5.1)]. Liver tests (serum alanine and aspartate aminotransferases, alkaline phosphatase, and total bilirubin) should be obtained prior to initiating pioglitazone and metformin hydrochloride tablets. Routine periodic monitoring of liver tests during treatment with pioglitazone and metformin hydrochloride tablets is not recommended in patients without liver disease. Patients who have liver test abnormalities prior to initiation of pioglitazone and metformin hydrochloride tablets or who are found to have abnormal liver tests while taking pioglitazone and metformin hydrochloride tablets should be managed as described under Warnings and Precautions [see Warnings and Precautions (5.5) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.2 Concomitant Use with an Insulin Secretagogue or Insulin

If hypoglycemia occurs in a patient coadministered pioglitazone and metformin hydrochloride tablets and an insulin secretagogue (e.g., sulfonylurea), the dose of the insulin secretagogue should be reduced.

If hypoglycemia occurs in a patient coadministered pioglitazone and metformin hydrochloride tablets and insulin, the dose of insulin should be decreased by 10% to 25%. Further adjustments to the insulin dose should be individualized based on glycemic response.

2.3 Concomitant Use with Strong CYP2C8 Inhibitors

Coadministration of pioglitazone (one of the ingredients in pioglitazone and metformin hydrochloride tablets) and gemfibrozil, a strong CYP2C8 inhibitor, increases pioglitazone exposure approximately 3-fold. Therefore, the maximum recommended dose of pioglitazone and metformin hydrochloride tablets is 15 mg/850 mg daily when used in combination with gemfibrozil or other strong CYP2C8 inhibitors [see Drug Interactions (7.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Tolazamide

Tolazamide

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of diabetes mellitus with tolazamide tablets or any other hypoglycemic agent. In addition to the usual monitoring of urinary glucose, the patient’s blood glucose must also be monitored periodically to determine the minimum effective dose for the patient; to detect primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication; and to detect secondary failure, i.e., loss of an adequate blood glucose-lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness. Glycosylated hemoglobin levels may also be of value in monitoring the patient’s response to therapy.

Short-term administration of tolazamide may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually controlled well on diet.

Usual Starting Dose

The usual starting dose of tolazamide tablets for the mild to moderately severe type II diabetic patient is 100 mg to 250 mg daily administered with breakfast or the first main meal. Generally, if the fasting blood glucose is less than 200 mg/dL the starting dose is 100 mg/day as a single daily dose. If the fasting blood glucose value is greater than 200 mg/dL, the starting dose is 250 mg/day as a single dose. If the patient is malnourished, underweight, elderly, or not eating properly, the initial therapy should be 100 mg once a day. Failure to follow an appropriate dosage regimen may precipitate hypoglycemia. Patients who do not adhere to their prescribed dietary regimen are more prone to exhibit unsatisfactory response to drug therapy.

Transfer from other Hypoglycemic Therapy

Patients Receiving Other Oral Antidiabetic Therapy

Transfer of patients from other oral antidiabetes regimens to tolazamide should be done conservatively. When transferring patients from oral hypoglycemic agents other than chlorpropamide to tolazamide, no transition period or initial or priming dose is necessary. When transferring from chlorpropamide, particular care should be exercised to avoid hypoglycemia.

Tolbutamide

If receiving less than 1 gm/day, begin at 100 mg of tolazamide per day. If receiving 1 gm or more per day, initiate at 250 mg of tolazamide per day as a single dose.

Chlorpropamide

250 mg of chlorpropamide may be considered to provide approximately the same degree of blood glucose control as 250 mg of tolazamide. The patient should be observed carefully for hypoglycemia during the transition period from chlorpropamide to tolazamide (1 to 2 weeks) due to the prolonged retention of chlorpropamide in the body and the possibility of a subsequent overlapping drug effect.

Acetohexamide

100 mg of tolazamide may be considered to provide approximately the same degree of blood glucose control as 250 mg of acetohexamide.

Patients Receiving Insulin

Some type II diabetic patients who have been treated only with insulin may respond satisfactorily to therapy with tolazamide. If the patient’s previous insulin dosage has been less than 20 units, substitution of 100 mg of tolazamide per day as a single daily dose may be tried. If the previous insulin dosage was less than 40 units, but more than 20 units, the patient should be placed directly on 250 mg of tolazamide per day as a single dose. If the previous insulin dosage was greater than 40 units, the insulin dosage should be decreased by 50% and 250 mg of tolazamide per day started. The dosage of tolazamide should be adjusted weekly (or more often in the group previously requiring more than 40 units of insulin).

During this conversion period when both insulin and tolazamide are being used, hypoglycemia may rarely occur. During insulin withdrawal, patients should test their urine for glucose and acetone at least 3 times daily and report results to their physician. The appearance of persistent acetonuria with glycosuria indicates that the patient is a type I diabetic who requires insulin therapy.

Maximum Dose

Daily doses of greater than 1000 mg are not recommended. Patients will generally have no further response to doses larger than this.

Usual Maintenance Dose

The usual maintenance dose is in the range of 100 to 1000 mg/day with the average maintenance dose being 250 to 500 mg/day. Following initiation of therapy, dosage adjustment is made in increments of 100 mg to 250 mg at weekly intervals based on the patient’s blood glucose response.

Dosage Interval

Once a day therapy is usually satisfactory. Doses up to 500 mg/day should be given as a single dose in the morning. 500 mg once daily is as effective as 250 mg twice daily. When a dose of more than 500 mg/day is required, the dose may be divided and given twice daily.

In elderly patients, debilitated or malnourished patients, and patients with impaired renal or hepatic function, the initial and maintenance dosing should be conservative to avoid hypoglycemic reactions (see PRECAUTIONS section).
Doxycycline

Doxycycline

THE USUAL DOSAGE AND FREQUENCY OF ADMINISTRATION OF DOXYCYCLINE TABLETS DIFFERS FROM THAT OF THE OTHER TETRACYCLINES. EXCEEDING THE RECOMMENDED DOSAGE MAY RESULT IN AN INCREASED INCIDENCE OF SIDE EFFECTS.

Adults

The usual dose of oral doxycycline tablets is 200 mg on the first day of treatment (administered 100 mg every 12 hours or 50 mg every 6 hours) followed by a maintenance dose of 100 mg/day. The maintenance dose may be administered as a single dose or as 50 mg every 12 hours. In the management of more severe infections (particularly chronic infections of the urinary tract), 100 mg every 12 hours is recommended.

For Pediatric Patients Above 8 Years of Age

The recommended dosage schedule for pediatric patients weighing 100 pounds or less is 2 mg/lb of body weight divided into two doses on the first day of treatment, followed by 1 mg/lb of body weight given as a single daily dose or divided into two doses, on subsequent days. For more severe infections up to 2 mg/lb of body weight may be used. For pediatric patients over 100 pounds the usual adult dose should be used.

Uncomplicated Gonococcal Infections in Adults (Except Anorectal Infections in Men): 100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for 7 days. As an alternate single visit dose, administer 300 mg stat followed in one hour by a second 300 mg dose.

Acute Epididymo-Orchitis Caused by N. Gonorrhoeae: 100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for at least 10 days.

Primary and Secondary Syphilis: 300 mg a day in divided doses for at least 10 days.

Uncomplicated Urethral, Endocervical, or Rectal Infection in Adults Caused by Chlamydia Trachomatis: 100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for at least 7 days.

Nongonococcal Urethritis Caused by C. Trachomatis and U. Urealyticum: 100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for at least 7 days.

Acute Epididymo-Orchitis Caused by C. Trachomatis: 100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for at least 10 days.

Inhalational Anthrax (Postexposure)

Adults: 100 mg of doxycycline tablets, by mouth, twice a day for 60 days.

Children: Weighing less than 100 pounds (45 kg): 1 mg/lb (2.2 mg/kg) of body weight, by mouth, twice a day for 60 days. Children weighing 100 pounds or more should receive the adult dose.

When used in streptococcal infections, therapy should be continued for 10 days.

Administration of adequate amounts of fluid along with capsule and tablet forms of drugs in the tetracycline class is recommended to wash down the drugs and reduce the risk of esophageal irritation and ulceration. (See ADVERSE REACTIONS.) If gastric irritation occurs, doxycycline tablets may be given with food. Ingestion of a high fat meal has been shown to delay the time to peak plasma concentrations by an average of one hour and 20 minutes. However, in the same study, food enhanced the average peak concentration by 7.5% and the area under the curve by 5.7%.
Chestal For Children

Chestal For Children

2.1 General Dosing Considerations

Pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets are taken orally, with or without food.

If a significant interruption in therapy with pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets has occurred, re-titration of therapy may be warranted.

2.2 Dosing for Parkinson's Disease

In all clinical studies, dosage was initiated at a subtherapeutic level to avoid intolerable adverse effects and orthostatic hypotension. Pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets should be titrated gradually in all patients. The dose should be increased to achieve a maximum therapeutic effect, balanced against the principal side effects of dyskinesia, hallucinations, somnolence, and dry mouth.

Dosing in Patients with Normal Renal Function

Initial Treatment

Doses should be increased gradually from a starting dose of 0.375 mg/day given in three divided doses and should not be increased more frequently than every 5 to 7 days. A suggested ascending dosage schedule that was used in clinical studies is shown in Table 1.
Table 1: Ascending Dosage Schedule of Pramipexole Dihydrochloride Tablets for Parkinson’s Disease
Week

Dosage (mg)

Total Daily Dose (mg)

1

0.125 three times a day

0.375

2

0.25 three times a day

0.75

3

0.5 three times a day

1.50

4

0.75 three times a day

2.25

5

1 three times a day

3

6

1.25 three times a day

3.75

7

1.5 three times a day

4.50

Maintenance Treatment

Pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets were effective and well tolerated over a dosage range of 1.5 to 4.5 mg/day administered in equally divided doses 3 times per day with or without concomitant levodopa (approximately 800 mg/day).

In a fixed-dose study in early Parkinson's disease patients, doses of 3 mg, 4.5 mg, and 6 mg per day of pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets were not shown to provide any significant benefit beyond that achieved at a daily dose of 1.5 mg/day. However, in the same fixed-dose study, the following adverse events were dose related: postural hypotension, nausea, constipation, somnolence, and amnesia. The frequency of these events was generally 2-fold greater than placebo for pramipexole doses greater than 3 mg/day. The incidence of somnolence reported with pramipexole at a dose of 1.5 mg/day was comparable to placebo.

When pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets are used in combination with levodopa, a reduction of the levodopa dosage should be considered. In a controlled study in advanced Parkinson's disease, the dosage of levodopa was reduced by an average of 27% from baseline.

Dosing in Patients with Renal Impairment

The recommended dosing of pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets in Parkinson’s disease patients with renal impairment is provided in Table 2.
Table 2 Dosing of Pramipexole Dihydrochloride Tablets in Parkinson’s Disease Patients with Renal Impairment
Renal Status

Starting Dose (mg)

Maximum Dose (mg)

Normal to Mild Impairment (creatinine Cl > 50 mL/min)

0.125 three times a day

1.5 three times a day

Moderate Impairment (creatinine Cl = 30 to 50 mL/min)

0.125 twice a day

0.75 three times a day

Severe Impairment (creatinine Cl = 15 to < 30 mL/min)

0.125 once a day

1.5 once a day

Very Severe Impairment (creatinine Cl < 15 mL/min and hemodialysis patients)

The use of pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets has not been adequately studied in this group of patients.

Discontinuation of Treatment

Pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets may be tapered off at a rate of 0.75 mg per day until the daily dose has been reduced to 0.75 mg. Thereafter, the dose may be reduced by 0.375 mg per day.
Paroxetine

Paroxetine

Serum concentrations should be monitored in changing from extended phenytoin sodium capsules, USP, to prompt phenytoin sodium capsules, USP, and from the sodium salt to the free acid form.

PHENYTEK® CAPSULES (extended phenytoin sodium capsules, USP) are formulated with the sodium salt of phenytoin. Because there is approximately an 8% increase in drug content with the free acid form over that of the sodium salt, dosage adjustments and serum level monitoring may be necessary when switching from a product formulated with the free acid to a product formulated with the sodium salt and vice versa.

General

Dosage should be individualized to provide maximum benefit. In some cases, serum blood level determinations may be necessary for optimal dosage adjustments — the clinically effective serum level is usually 10 to 20 mcg/mL. With recommended dosage, a period of 7 to 10 days may be required to achieve steady-state blood levels with phenytoin and changes in dosage (increase or decrease) should not be carried out at intervals shorter than 7 to 10 days.

Adult Dosage

Divided Daily Dosage

Patients who have received no previous treatment may be started on one 100 mg extended phenytoin sodium capsule three times daily and the dosage then adjusted to suit individual requirements. For most adults, the satisfactory maintenance dosage will be one 100 mg capsule three to four times a day. An increase up to one 200 mg PHENYTEK® three times a day may be made, if necessary.

Once-a-Day Dosage

In adults, if seizure control is established with divided doses of three 100 mg extended phenytoin sodium capsules daily, once-a-day dosage with 300 mg PHENYTEK® may be considered. Studies comparing divided doses of 300 mg with a single daily dose of this quantity indicated absorption, peak plasma levels, biologic half-life, difference between peak and minimum values, and urinary recovery were equivalent. Once-a-day dosage offers a convenience to the individual patient or to nursing personnel for institutionalized patients and is intended to be used only for patients requiring this amount of drug daily. A major problem in motivating noncompliant patients may also be lessened when the patient can take this drug once-a-day. However, patients should be cautioned not to miss a dose, inadvertently.

Only extended phenytoin sodium capsules are recommended for once-a-day dosing. Inherent differences in dissolution characteristics and resultant absorption rates of phenytoin due to different manufacturing procedures and/or dosage forms preclude such recommendation for other phenytoin products. When a change in the dosage form or brand is prescribed, careful monitoring of phenytoin serum levels should be carried out.

Loading Dose

Some authorities have advocated use of an oral loading dose of phenytoin in adults who require rapid steady-state serum levels and where intravenous administration is not desirable. This dosing regimen should be reserved for patients in a clinic or hospital setting where phenytoin serum levels can be closely monitored. Patients with a history of renal or liver disease should not receive the oral loading regimen.

Initially, one gram of extended phenytoin sodium capsules is divided into three doses (400 mg, 300 mg, 300 mg) and administered at 2 hour intervals. Normal maintenance dosage is then instituted 24 hours after the loading dose, with frequent serum level determinations.

Dosing in Special Populations

Patients with Renal or Hepatic Disease

Due to an increased fraction of unbound phenytoin in patients with renal or hepatic disease, or in those with hypoalbuminemia, the interpretation of total phenytoin plasma concentrations should be made with caution. Unbound phenytoin concentrations may be more useful in these patient populations.

Elderly Patients

Phenytoin clearance is decreased slightly in elderly patients and lower or less frequent dosing may be required.

Pediatric

Initially, 5 mg/kg/day in two or three equally divided doses, with subsequent dosage individualized to a maximum of 300 mg daily. A recommended daily maintenance dosage is usually 4 to 8 mg/kg. Children over 6 years old and adolescents may require the minimum adult dose (300 mg/day).
Losartan Potassium

Losartan Potassium

Generally, when estrogen is prescribed for a postmenopausal woman with a uterus, a progestin should also be considered to reduce the risk of endometrial cancer. A woman without a uterus does not need a progestin. In some cases, however, hysterectomized women with a history of endometriosis may need a progestin [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2, 5.14)].

Use of estrogen-alone, or in combination with a progestin, should be with the lowest effective dose and for the shortest duration consistent with treatment goals and risks for the individual woman. Postmenopausal women should be re-evaluated periodically as clinically appropriate to determine if treatment is still necessary.

2.1 Treatment of Moderate to Severe Vasomotor Symptoms due to Menopause

Start therapy with 0.025 mg per day applied to the skin once weekly. Therapy should be started at the lowest effective dose and the shortest duration consistent with the treatment goals. Attempts to taper or discontinue the medication should be made at 3 to 6 month intervals.

2.2 Treatment of Moderate to Severe Symptoms of Vulvar and Vaginal Atrophy due to Menopause

Start therapy with 0.025 mg per day applied to the skin once weekly. Therapy should be started at the lowest effective dose and the shortest duration consistent with the treatment goals. Attempts to taper or discontinue the medication should be made at 3 to 6 month intervals.

2.3 Treatment of Hypoestrogenism due to Hypogonadism, Castration, or Primary Ovarian Failure

Start therapy with 0.025 mg per day applied to the skin once weekly. The dose should be adjusted as necessary to control symptoms. Clinical responses (relief of symptoms) at the lowest effective dose should be the guide for establishing administration of the estradiol transdermal system continuous delivery (once-weekly), especially in women with an intact uterus.

2.4 Prevention of Postmenopausal Osteoporosis

Start therapy with 0.025 mg per day applied to the skin once weekly.

2.5 Application of the Estradiol Transdermal System Continuous Delivery (Once-Weekly)

Site Selection
• The adhesive side of estradiol transdermal system continuous delivery (once-weekly) should be placed on a clean, dry area of the lower abdomen or the upper quadrant of the buttock. • Estradiol transdermal system continuous delivery (once-weekly) should not be applied to or near the breasts. • The sites of application must be rotated, with an interval of at least one week allowed between applications to the same site. • The area selected should not be oily, damaged, or irritated. The waistline should be avoided, since tight clothing may rub the transdermal system off. • Application to areas where sitting would dislodge estradiol transdermal system continuous delivery (once-weekly) should also be avoided.
Application
• Estradiol transdermal system continuous delivery (once-weekly) should be applied immediately after opening the pouch and removing the protective liner. • Estradiol transdermal system continuous delivery (once-weekly) should be pressed firmly in place with the fingers for at least 10 seconds, making sure there is good contact, especially around the edges. • If the system lifts, apply pressure to maintain adhesion. • In the event that a system should fall off reapply it to a different location. If the system cannot be reapplied, a new system should be applied for the remainder of the 7 day dosing interval. • Only one system should be worn at any one time during the 7 day dosing interval. • Swimming, bathing, or using a sauna while using estradiol transdermal system continuous delivery (once-weekly) has not been studied, and these activities may decrease the adhesion of the system and the delivery of estradiol.
2.6 Removal of the Estradiol Transdermal System Continuous Delivery (Once-Weekly)
• Removal of estradiol transdermal system continuous delivery (once-weekly) should be done carefully and slowly to avoid irritation of the skin. • Should any adhesive remain on the skin after removal of the estradiol transdermal system continuous delivery (once-weekly), allow the area to dry for 15 minutes. Then gently rubbing the area with an oil-based cream or lotion should remove the adhesive residue. • Used patches still contain some active hormones. Each patch should be carefully folded in half so that it sticks to itself before throwing it away.
Levocarnitine

Levocarnitine

Levocarnitine tablets.

Adults: The recommended oral dosage for adults is 990 mg two or three times a day using the 330 mg tablets, depending on clinical response.

Infants and children: The recommended oral dosage for infants and children is between 50 and 100 mg/kg/day in divided doses, with a maximum of 3 g/day. Dosage should begin at 50 mg/kg/day. The exact dosage will depend on clinical response.

Monitoring should include periodic blood chemistries, vital signs, plasma carnitine concentrations and overall clinical condition.
Lovastatin

Lovastatin

The patient should be placed on a standard cholesterol lowering diet before receiving lovastatin tablets and should continue on this diet during treatment with lovastatin tablets (see NCEP Treatment Guidelines for details on dietary therapy). Lovastatin tablets should be given with meals.

Adult Patients

The usual recommended starting dose is 20 mg once a day given with the evening meal. The recommended dosing range of lovastatin tablets is 10 to 80 mg/day in single or two divided doses; the maximum recommended dose is 80 mg/day. Doses should be individualized according to the recommended goal of therapy (see NCEP Guidelines and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). Patients requiring reductions in LDL-C of 20% or more to achieve their goal (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE) should be started on 20 mg/day of lovastatin. A starting dose of 10 mg of lovastatin tablets is may be considered for patients requiring smaller reductions. Adjustments should be made at intervals of 4 weeks or more.

Cholesterol levels should be monitored periodically and consideration should be given to reducing the dosage of lovastatin tablets if cholesterol levels fall significantly below the targeted range.

Dosage in Patients taking Danazol, Diltiazem, Dronedarone or Verapamil:

In patients taking danazol, diltiazem, dronedarone or verapamil concomitantly with lovastatin tablets, therapy should begin with 10 mg of lovastatin tablets and should not exceed 20 mg/day (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics, WARNINGS: Myopathy/Rhabdomyolysis, PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions: Other Drug Interactions).

Dosage in Patients taking Amiodarone

In patients taking amiodarone concomitantly with lovastatin tablets, the dose should not exceed 40 mg/day (see WARNINGS: Myopathy/Rhabdomyolysis and PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions: Other Drug Interactions).

Adolescent Patients (10 to 17 years of age) with Heterozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The recommended dosing range of lovastatin tablets is 10 to 40 mg/day; the maximum recommended dose is 40 mg/day. Doses should be individualized according to the recommended goal of therapy (see NCEP Pediatric Panel Guidelines3, CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY and INDICATIONS AND USAGE). Patients requiring reductions in LDL-C of 20% or more to achieve their goal should be started on 20 mg/day of lovastatin tablets. A starting dose of 10 mg of lovastatin tablets may be considered for patients requiring smaller reductions. Adjustments should be made at intervals of 4 weeks or more.
3 National Cholesterol Education Program (NCEP): Highlights of the Report of the Expert Panel on Blood Cholesterol Levels in Children and Adolescents. Pediatrics. 89(3):495–501. 1992.
Concomitant Lipid-Lowering Therapy

Lovastatin is effective alone or when used concomitantly with bile-acid sequestrants (see WARNINGS: Myopathy/Rhabdomyolysis and PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions).

Dosage in Patients with Renal Insufficiency

In patients with severe renal insufficiency (creatinine clearance < 30 mL/min), dosage increases above 20 mg/day should be carefully considered and, if deemed necessary, implemented cautiously (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY and WARNINGS: Myopathy/Rhabdomyolysis).
Galantamine

Galantamine

2.2 Galantamine Tablets

The dosage of galantamine tablets shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials is 16 to 32 mg/day given as twice daily dosing. As the dosage of 32 mg/day is less well tolerated than lower dosages and does not provide increased effectiveness, the recommended dosage range is 16 to 24 mg/day given twice daily. The dosage of 24 mg/day did not provide a statistically significant greater clinical benefit than 16 mg/day. It is possible, however, that a daily dosage of 24 mg of galantamine tablets might provide additional benefit for some patients.

The recommended starting dosage of galantamine tablets is 4 mg twice a day (8 mg/day). The dosage should be increased to the initial maintenance dosage of 8 mg twice a day (16 mg/day) after a minimum of 4 weeks. A further increase to 12 mg twice a day (24 mg/day) should be attempted after a minimum of 4 weeks at 8 mg twice a day (16 mg/day).

Dosage increases should be based upon assessment of clinical benefit and tolerability of the previous dose.

Galantamine tablets should be administered twice a day, preferably with morning and evening meals.

Patients and caregivers should be advised to ensure adequate fluid intake during treatment. If therapy has been interrupted for more than 3 days, the patient should be restarted at the lowest dosage and the dosage escalated to the current dose.

The abrupt withdrawal of galantamine tablets in those patients who had been receiving dosages in the effective range was not associated with an increased frequency of adverse events in comparison with those continuing to receive the same dosages of that drug. The beneficial effects of galantamine tablets are lost, however, when the drug is discontinued.

2.3 Dosage in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

In patients with moderate hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh score of 7 to 9), the dosage should generally not exceed 16 mg/day. The use of galantamine tablets in patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh score of 10 to 15) is not recommended [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.4 Dosage in Patients with Renal Impairment

In patients with creatinine clearance of 9 to 59 mL/min, the dosage should generally not exceed 16 mg/day. In patients with creatinine clearance < 9 mL/min, the use of galantamine tablets is not recommended [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Secret Paris Invisible ...

Secret Paris Invisible Romantic Rose

Use lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with treatment goals for the individual patient.

These doses can be given without regard to timing of meals.

2.1 Osteoarthritis

For relief of the signs and symptoms of OA the recommended oral dose is 200 mg per day administered as a single dose or as 100 mg twice daily.

2.2 Rheumatoid Arthritis

For relief of the signs and symptoms of RA the recommended oral dose is 100 mg to 200 mg twice daily.

2.3 Juvenile Rheumatoid Arthritis

For the relief of the signs and symptoms of JRA the recommended oral dose for pediatric patients (age 2 years and older) is based on weight. For patients ≥ 10 kg to ≤ 25 kg the recommended dose is 50 mg twice daily. For patients > 25 kg the recommended dose is 100 mg twice daily.

For patients who have difficulty swallowing capsules, the contents of a celecoxib capsule can be added to applesauce. The entire capsule contents are carefully emptied onto a level teaspoon of cool or room temperature applesauce and ingested immediately with water. The sprinkled capsule contents on applesauce are stable for up to 6 hours under refrigerated conditions (2 to 8°C/ 35 to 45°F).

2.4 Ankylosing Spondylitis

For the management of the signs and symptoms of AS, the recommended dose of celecoxib capsules is 200 mg daily in single (once per day) or divided (twice per day) doses. If no effect is observed after 6 weeks, a trial of 400 mg daily may be worthwhile. If no effect is observed after 6 weeks on 400 mg daily, a response is not likely and consideration should be given to alternate treatment options.

2.5 Management of Acute Pain and Treatment of Primary Dysmenorrhea

The recommended dose of celecoxib capsules is 400 mg initially, followed by an additional 200 mg dose if needed on the first day. On subsequent days, the recommended dose is 200 mg twice daily as needed.

2.6 Special Populations

Hepatic Insufficiency

The daily recommended dose of celecoxib capsules in patients with moderate hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh Class B) should be reduced by 50%. The use of celecoxib in patients with severe hepatic impairment is not recommended [see Warnings and Precautions (5.5), Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Poor Metabolizers of CYP2C9 Substrates

Patients who are known or suspected to be poor CYP2C9 metabolizers based on genotype or previous history/experience with other CYP2C9 substrates (such as warfarin, phenytoin) should be administered celecoxib with caution. Consider starting treatment at half the lowest recommended dose in poor metabolizers (i.e., CYP2C9*3/*3). Consider using alternative management in JRA patients who are poor metabolizers [see Use in Specific Populations (8.8), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.5)].
Acebutolol Hydrochlorid...

Acebutolol Hydrochloride

Hypertension

The initial dosage of acebutolol hydrochloride capsules in uncomplicated mild-to-moderate hypertension is 400 mg. This can be given as a single daily dose, but in occasional patients twice daily dosing may be required for adequate 24-hour blood-pressure control. An optimal response is usually achieved with dosages of 400 to 800 mg/day, although some patients have been maintained on as little as 200 mg/day. Patients with more severe hypertension or who have demonstrated inadequate control may respond to a total of 1200 mg daily (administered b.i.d.), or to the addition of a second antihypertensive agent. Beta-1 selectivity diminishes as dosage is increased.

Ventricular Arrhythmia

The usual initial dosage of acebutolol hydrochloride capsules is 400 mg daily given as 200 mg b.i.d. Dosage should be increased gradually until an optimal clinical response is obtained, generally at 600 to 1200 mg/day. If treatment is to be discontinued, the dosage should be reduced gradually over a period of about 2 weeks.

Use in Older Patients

Older patients have an approximately 2-fold increase in bioavailability and may require lower maintenance doses. Doses above 800 mg/day should be avoided in the elderly.
Minoxidil For Men

Minoxidil For Men

Generally, when estrogen is prescribed for a postmenopausal woman with a uterus, a progestin should be considered to reduce the risk of endometrial cancer. A woman without a uterus does not need a progestin. In some cases, however, hysterectomized women with a history of endometriosis may need a progestin [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2, 5.14)].

Use of estrogen-alone or in combination with a progestin, should be with the lowest effective dose and the shortest duration consistent with treatment goals and risks for the individual woman. Postmenopausal women should be reevaluated periodically as clinically appropriate to determine whether treatment is still necessary.

The adhesive side of estradiol transdermal system (twice-weekly) should be placed on a clean, dry area of the trunk of the body (including the abdomen or buttocks). Estradiol transdermal system (twice-weekly) should not be applied to the breasts.

Estradiol transdermal system (twice-weekly) should be replaced twice weekly. The sites of application must be rotated, with an interval of at least 1 week allowed between applications to a particular site. The area selected should not be oily, damaged, or irritated. The waistline should be avoided, since tight clothing may rub the system off. The system should be applied immediately after opening the pouch and removing the oversized protective liner. The system should be pressed firmly in place with the palm of the hand for about 10 seconds, making sure there is good contact, especially around the edges. In the event that a system should fall off, the same system may be reapplied. If the same system cannot be reapplied, a new system should be applied to another location. In either case, the original treatment schedule should be continued. If a woman has forgotten to apply a patch, she should apply a new patch as soon as possible. The new patch should be applied on the original treatment schedule. The interruption of treatment in women taking estradiol transdermal system (twice-weekly) might increase the likelihood of breakthrough bleeding, spotting and recurrence of symptoms.

2.1 Moderate to Severe Vasomotor Symptoms

Start therapy with estradiol transdermal system (twice-weekly) 0.0375 mg per day applied to the skin twice weekly. Dosage adjustment should be guided by the clinical response. In women not currently taking oral estrogens or in women switching from another estradiol transdermal therapy, treatment with estradiol transdermal system (twice-weekly) may be initiated at once. In women who are currently taking oral estrogens, treatment with estradiol transdermal system (twice-weekly) should be initiated 1 week after withdrawal of oral hormone therapy, or sooner if menopausal symptoms reappear in less than 1 week. Attempts to taper or discontinue the medication should be made at 3 to 6 month intervals.

Estradiol transdermal system (twice-weekly) may be given continuously in patients who do not have an intact uterus. In those patients with an intact uterus, estradiol transdermal system (twice-weekly) may be given on a cyclic schedule (for example, 3 weeks on drug followed by 1 week off drug).

2.2 Moderate to Severe Symptoms of Vulvar and Vaginal Atrophy

Start therapy with estradiol transdermal system (twice-weekly) 0.0375 mg per day applied to the skin twice weekly. Dosage adjustment should be guided by the clinical response. Attempts to taper or discontinue the medication should be made at 3 to 6 month intervals.

In women not currently taking oral estrogens or in women switching from another estradiol transdermal therapy, treatment with estradiol transdermal system (twice-weekly) may be initiated at once. In women who are currently taking oral estrogens, treatment with estradiol transdermal system (twice-weekly) should be initiated 1 week after withdrawal of oral hormone therapy, or sooner if menopausal symptoms reappear in less than 1 week.

Estradiol transdermal system (twice-weekly) may be given continuously in patients who do not have an intact uterus. In those patients with an intact uterus, estradiol transdermal system (twice-weekly) may be given on a cyclic schedule (for example, 3 weeks on drug followed by 1 week off drug).

2.3 Hypoestrogenism Due to Hypogonadism, Castration, or Primary Ovarian Failure

2.4 Prevention of Postmenopausal Osteoporosis

Start therapy with estradiol transdermal system (twice-weekly) 0.025 mg per day applied to the skin twice weekly.

In women not currently taking oral estrogens or in women switching from another estradiol transdermal therapy, treatment with estradiol transdermal system (twice-weekly) may be initiated at once. In women who are currently taking oral estrogens, treatment with estradiol transdermal system (twice-weekly) should be initiated 1 week after withdrawal of oral hormone therapy, or sooner if menopausal symptoms reappear in less than 1 week.

Estradiol transdermal system (twice-weekly) may be given continuously in patients who do not have an intact uterus. In those patients with an intact uterus, estradiol transdermal system (twice-weekly) may be given on a cyclic schedule (for example, 3 weeks on drug followed by 1 week off drug).
Ciprofloxacin

Ciprofloxacin

Premenstrual Dysphoric Disorder

Initial Treatment

The recommended dose of fluoxetine capsules for the treatment of PMDD is 20 mg/day given continuously (every day of the menstrual cycle) or intermittently (defined as starting a daily dose 14 days prior to the anticipated onset of menstruation through the first full day of menses and repeating with each new cycle). The dosing regimen should be determined by the physician based on individual patient characteristics. In a study comparing continuous dosing of fluoxetine capsules 20 and 60 mg/day to placebo, both doses were proven to be effective, but there was no statistically significant added benefit for the 60 mg/day compared with the 20 mg/day dose. Fluoxetine capsule doses above 60 mg/day have not been systematically studied in patients with PMDD. The maximum fluoxetine capsule dose should not exceed 80 mg/day.

As with many other medications, a lower or less frequent dosage should be considered in patients with hepatic impairment. A lower or less frequent dosage should also be considered for patients with concurrent disease or on multiple concomitant medications. Dosage adjustments for renal impairment are not routinely necessary (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Liver Disease and Renal Disease, and PRECAUTIONS: Use in Patients with Concomitant Illness).

Maintenance/Continuation Treatment

Systematic evaluation of fluoxetine capsules has shown that its efficacy in PMDD is maintained for periods of up to 6 months at a dose of 20 mg/day given continuously and up to 3 months at a dose of 20 mg/day given intermittently, (see CLINICAL TRIALS). Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

Special Populations

Treatment of Pregnant Women During the Third Trimester

Neonates exposed to fluoxetine and other SSRIs or SNRIs, late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding (see PRECAUTIONS). When treating pregnant women with fluoxetine capsules during the third trimester, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and benefits of treatment. The physician may consider tapering fluoxetine capsules in the third trimester.

Discontinuation of Treatment with Fluoxetine Capsules

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of fluoxetine capsules and other SSRIs and SNRIs, have been reported (see PRECAUTIONS). Patients should be monitored for these symptoms when discontinuing treatment. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, then resuming the previously prescribed dose may be considered. Subsequently, the physician may continue decreasing the dose but at a more gradual rate. Plasma fluoxetine and norfluoxetine concentration decrease gradually at the conclusion of therapy which may minimize the risk of discontinuation symptoms with this drug.
Voriconazole

Voriconazole

2.1 Instructions for Use in All Patients

Voriconazole tablets should be taken at least one hour before or after a meal.

2.3 Recommended Dosing in Adults

Invasive Aspergillosis and Serious Fungal Infections Due to Fusarium spp. and Scedosporium apiospermum

See Table 1. Therapy must be initiated with the specified loading dose regimen of intravenous voriconazole on Day 1 followed by the recommended maintenance dose regimen. Intravenous treatment should be continued for at least 7 days. Once the patient has clinically improved and can tolerate medication given by mouth, the oral tablet form or oral suspension form of voriconazole may be utilized. The recommended oral maintenance dose of 200 mg achieves a voriconazole exposure similar to 3 mg/kg IV; a 300 mg oral dose achieves an exposure similar to 4 mg/kg IV. Switching between the intravenous and oral formulations is appropriate because of the high bioavailability of the oral formulation in adults [see Clinical Pharmacology (12)].

Candidemia in Non-neutropenic Patients and Other Deep Tissue Candida Infections

See Table 1. Patients should be treated for at least 14 days following resolution of symptoms or following last positive culture, whichever is longer.

Esophageal Candidiasis

See Table 1. Patients should be treated for a minimum of 14 days and for at least 7 days following resolution of symptoms.
Table 1. Recommended Dosing Regimen * Increase dose when voriconazole is coadministered with phenytoin or efavirenz ( 7); Decrease dose in patients with hepatic impairment ( 2.7). † In healthy volunteer studies, the 200 mg oral q12h dose provided an exposure (AUC τ) similar to a 3 mg/kg IV q12h dose; the 300 mg oral q12h dose provided an exposure (AUC τ) similar to a 4 mg/kg IV q12h dose [ see Clinical Pharmacology (12)]. ‡ Adult patients who weigh less than 40 kg should receive half of the oral maintenance dose. § In a clinical study of invasive aspergillosis, the median duration of IV voriconazole therapy was 10 days (range 2 to 85 days). The median duration of oral voriconazole therapy was 76 days (range 2 to 232 days) [ see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. ¶ In clinical trials, patients with candidemia received 3 mg/kg IV q12h as primary therapy, while patients with other deep tissue Candida infections received 4 mg/kg q12h as salvage therapy. Appropriate dose should be based on the severity and nature of the infection. # Not evaluated in patients with esophageal candidiasis.
Infection

Loading dose

Maintenance Dose*†

IV

IV

Oral‡

Invasive Aspergillosis§

6 mg/kg q12h for the first 24 hours

4 mg/kg q12h

200 mg q12h

Candidemia in nonneutropenic patients and other deep tissue Candida infections

6 mg/kg q12h for the first 24 hours

3 to 4 mg/kg q12h¶

200 mg q12h

Esophageal Candidiasis

#

#

200 mg q12h

Scedosporiosis and

Fusariosis

6 mg/kg q12h for the first 24 hours

4 mg/kg q12h

200 mg q12h

2.4 Dosage Adjustment

If patient response is inadequate, the oral maintenance dose may be increased from 200 mg every 12 hours (similar to 3 mg/kg IV q12h) to 300 mg every 12 hours (similar to 4 mg/kg IV q12h). For adult patients weighing less than 40 kg, the oral maintenance dose may be increased from 100 mg every 12 hours to 150 mg every 12 hours. If patient is unable to tolerate 300 mg orally every 12 hours, reduce the oral maintenance dose by 50 mg steps to a minimum of 200 mg every 12 hours (or to 100 mg every 12 hours for adult patients weighing less than 40 kg).

If patient is unable to tolerate 4 mg/kg IV q12h, reduce the intravenous maintenance dose to 3 mg/kg q12h.

The maintenance dose of voriconazole should be increased when coadministered with phenytoin or efavirenz [see Drug Interactions (7)].

The maintenance dose of voriconazole should be reduced in patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment, Child-Pugh Class A and B [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)]. There are no PK data to allow for dosage adjustment recommendations in patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh Class C).

Duration of therapy should be based on the severity of the patient’s underlying disease, recovery from immunosuppression, and clinical response.

2.7 Use in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

In the clinical program, patients were included who had baseline liver function tests (ALT, AST) up to 5 times the upper limit of normal. No dose adjustment is necessary in patients with this degree of abnormal liver function, but continued monitoring of liver function tests for further elevations is recommended [see Warnings and Precautions (5.9)].

It is recommended that the standard loading dose regimens be used but that the maintenance dose be halved in patients with mild to moderate hepatic cirrhosis (Child-Pugh Class A and B) [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Voriconazole tablets have not been studied in patients with severe hepatic cirrhosis (Child-Pugh Class C) or in patients with chronic hepatitis B or chronic hepatitis C disease. Voriconazole tablets have been associated with elevations in liver function tests and clinical signs of liver damage, such as jaundice, and should only be used in patients with severe hepatic impairment if the benefit outweighs the potential risk. Patients with hepatic insufficiency must be carefully monitored for drug toxicity.

2.8 Use in Patients with Renal Impairment

The pharmacokinetics of orally administered voriconazole tablets are not significantly affected by renal impairment. Therefore, no adjustment is necessary for oral dosing in patients with mild to severe renal impairment [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

In patients with moderate or severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance < 50 mL/min), accumulation of the intravenous vehicle, SBECD, occurs. Oral voriconazole should be administered to these patients, unless an assessment of the benefit/risk to the patient justifies the use of intravenous voriconazole. Serum creatinine levels should be closely monitored in these patients, and, if increases occur, consideration should be given to changing to oral voriconazole therapy [see Warnings and Precautions (5.10)].

Voriconazole is hemodialyzed with clearance of 121 mL/min. The intravenous vehicle, SBECD, is hemodialyzed with clearance of 55 mL/min. A 4-hour hemodialysis session does not remove a sufficient amount of voriconazole to warrant dose adjustment.
Baclofen

Baclofen

The determination of optimal dosage requires individual titration. Start therapy at a low dosage and increase gradually until optimum effect is achieved (usually between 40 mg to 80 mg daily).

The following dosage titration schedule is suggested:
• 5 mg t.i.d. for 3 days • 10 mg t.i.d. for 3 days • 15 mg t.i.d. for 3 days • 20 mg t.i.d. for 3 days
Thereafter additional increases may be necessary but the total daily dose should not exceed a maximum of 80 mg daily (20 mg q.i.d.).

The lowest dose compatible with an optimal response is recommended. If benefits are not evident after a reasonable trial period, patients should be slowly withdrawn from the drug (see WARNINGS: Abrupt Drug Withdrawal).
Olanzapine

Olanzapine

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Dose Selection

Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 mg to 10 mg initially, with a target dose of 10 mg/day within several days. Further dosage adjustments, if indicated, should generally occur at intervals of not less than one week, since steady state for olanzapine would not be achieved for approximately one week in the typical patient. When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 5 mg QD are recommended.

Efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a dose range of 10 to 15 mg/day in clinical trials. However, doses above 10 mg/day were not demonstrated to be more efficacious than the 10 mg/day dose. An increase to a dose greater than the target dose of 10 mg/day (i.e., to a dose of 15 mg/day or greater) is recommended only after clinical assessment. Olanzapine is not indicated for use in doses above 20 mg/day.

Dosing in Special Populations

The recommended starting dose is 5 mg in patients who are debilitated, who have a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, who otherwise exhibit a combination of factors that may result in slower metabolism of olanzapine (e.g., nonsmoking female patients ≥ 65 years of age), or who may be more pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine [see Warnings and Precautions (5.12), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients.

Maintenance Treatment

The effectiveness of oral olanzapine, 10 mg/day to 20 mg/day, in maintaining treatment response in schizophrenic patients who had been stable on olanzapine for approximately 8 weeks and were then followed for relapse has been demonstrated in a placebo-controlled trial [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. The physician who elects to use olanzapine for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

Adolescents

Dose Selection

Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals with a recommended starting dose of 2.5 mg or 5 mg, with a target dose of 10 mg/day. Efficacy in adolescents with schizophrenia was demonstrated based on a flexible dose range of 2.5 to 20 mg/day in clinical trials, with a mean modal dose of 12.5 mg/day (mean dose of 11.1 mg/day). When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 2.5 mg or 5 mg are recommended.

The safety and effectiveness of doses above 20 mg/day have not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Maintenance Treatment

The efficacy of olanzapine orally disintegrating tablets for the maintenance treatment of schizophrenia in the adolescent population has not been systematically evaluated; however, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of olanzapine pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and adolescent patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.2 Bipolar I Disorder (Manic or Mixed Episodes)

Adults

Dose Selection for Monotherapy

Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals, generally beginning with 10 mg or 15 mg. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should generally occur at intervals of not less than 24 hours, reflecting the procedures in the placebo-controlled trials. When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 5 mg QD are recommended.

Short-term (3 to 4 weeks) antimanic efficacy was demonstrated in a dose range of 5 mg to 20 mg/day in clinical trials. The safety of doses above 20 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Maintenance Monotherapy

The benefit of maintaining bipolar I patients on monotherapy with oral olanzapine at a dose of 5 to 20 mg/day, after achieving a responder status for an average duration of 2 weeks, was demonstrated in a controlled trial [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. The physician who elects to use olanzapine for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

Dose Selection for Adjunctive Treatment

When administered as adjunctive treatment to lithium or valproate, oral olanzapine dosing should generally begin with 10 mg once-a-day without regard to meals.

Antimanic efficacy was demonstrated in a dose range of 5 mg to 20 mg/day in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. The safety of doses above 20 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials.

Adolescents

Dose Selection

Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals with a recommended starting dose of 2.5 mg or 5 mg, with a target dose of 10 mg/day. Efficacy in adolescents with bipolar I disorder (manic or mixed episodes) was demonstrated based on a flexible dose range of 2.5 to 20 mg/day in clinical trials, with a mean modal dose of 10.7 mg/day (mean dose of 8.9 mg/day). When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 2.5 mg or 5 mg are recommended.

The safety and effectiveness of doses above 20 mg/day have not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Maintenance Treatment

The efficacy of olanzapine orally disintegrating tablets for the maintenance treatment of bipolar I disorder in the adolescent population has not been evaluated; however, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of olanzapine pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and adolescent patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.3 Administration of Olanzapine Orally Disintegrating Tablets

Immediately upon opening the bottle, using dry hands, remove tablet and place entire olanzapine orally disintegrating tablet in the mouth. Tablet disintegration occurs rapidly in saliva so it can be easily swallowed with or without liquid.

2.5 Olanzapine and Fluoxetine in Combination: Depressive Episodes Associated with Bipolar I Disorder

When using olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination, also refer to the Clinical Studies section of the package insert for Symbyax.

Adults

Oral olanzapine should be administered in combination with fluoxetine once daily in the evening, without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 mg of oral olanzapine and 20 mg of fluoxetine. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, can be made according to efficacy and tolerability within dose ranges of oral olanzapine 5 mg to 12.5 mg and fluoxetine 20 mg to 50 mg. Antidepressant efficacy was demonstrated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination in adult patients with a dose range of olanzapine 6 mg to 12 mg and fluoxetine 25 mg to 50 mg. Safety of co-administration of doses above 18 mg olanzapine with 75 mg fluoxetine has not been evaluated in clinical studies.

Children and Adolescents (10 to 17 Years of Age)

Dosage and Administration information for pediatric patients (10 to 17 years) is approved for Eli Lilly and Company’s olanzapine tablets and olanzapine orally disintegrating tablets. However, due to Eli Lilly and Company’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that pediatric information.

Safety and efficacy of olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination was determined in clinical trials supporting approval of Symbyax (fixed-dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine). Symbyax is dosed between 3 mg/25 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day and 12 mg/50 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day. The following table demonstrates the appropriate individual component doses of olanzapine and fluoxetine versus Symbyax. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should be made with the individual components according to efficacy and tolerability.
Table 1: Approximate Dose Correspondence Between Symbyax* and the Combination of Olanzapine and Fluoxetine * Symbyax (olanzapine/fluoxetine HCl) is a fixed-dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine.
For Symbyax (mg/day)

Use in Combination

Olanzapine (mg/day)

Fluoxetine (mg/day)

3 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine

2.5

20

6 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine

5

20

12 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine

10 + 2.5

20

6 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine

5

40 + 10

12 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine

10 + 2.5

40 + 10

While there is no body of evidence to answer the question of how long a patient treated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination should remain on it, it is generally accepted that bipolar I disorder, including the depressive episodes associated with bipolar I disorder, is a chronic illness requiring chronic treatment. The physician should periodically reexamine the need for continued pharmacotherapy.

Olanzapine monotherapy is not indicated for the treatment of depressive episodes associated with bipolar I disorder.

2.7 Olanzapine and Fluoxetine in Combination: Dosing in Special Populations

The starting dose of oral olanzapine 2.5 mg to 5 mg with fluoxetine 20 mg should be used for patients with a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, patients with hepatic impairment, or patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow the metabolism of olanzapine or fluoxetine in combination (female gender, geriatric age, nonsmoking status), or those patients who may be pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine. Dosing modification may be necessary in patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow metabolism. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients. Olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination have not been systematically studied in patients over 65 years of age or in patients under 10 years of age [see Warnings and Precautions (5.12), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Donepezil Hydrochloride...

Donepezil Hydrochloride

Donepezil hydrochloride tablets should be taken in the evening, just prior to retiring.

Donepezil hydrochloride tablets can be taken with or without food.

2.1 Mild to Moderate Alzheimer’s Disease

The dosages of donepezil hydrochloride tablets shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials are 5 mg and 10 mg administered once per day.

The higher dose of 10 mg did not provide a statistically significantly greater clinical benefit than 5 mg. There is a suggestion, however, based upon order of group mean scores and dose trend analyses of data from these clinical trials, that a daily dose of 10 mg of donepezil hydrochloride tablets might provide additional benefit for some patients. Accordingly, whether or not to employ a dose of 10 mg is a matter of prescriber and patient preference.

2.2 Moderate to Severe Alzheimer’s Disease

Donepezil hydrochloride tablets have been shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials at a dose of 10 mg administered once daily.

2.3 Titration

The recommended starting dose of donepezil hydrochloride tablets is 5 mg once daily. Evidence from the controlled trials in mild to moderate Alzheimer’s disease indicates that the 10 mg dose, with a one week titration, is likely to be associated with a higher incidence of cholinergic adverse events compared to the 5 mg dose. In open-label trials using a 6 week titration, the type and frequency of these same adverse events were similar between the 5 mg and 10 mg dose groups. Therefore, because donepezil hydrochloride steady state is achieved about 15 days after it is started and because the incidence of untoward effects may be influenced by the rate of dose escalation, a dose of 10 mg should not be administered until patients have been on a daily dose of 5 mg for 4 to 6 weeks.
Alprazolam

Alprazolam

Alprazolam extended-release tablets may be administered once daily, preferably in the morning. The tablets should be taken intact; they should not be chewed, crushed, or broken.

The suggested total daily dose ranges between 3 to 6 mg/day. Dosage should be individualized for maximum beneficial effect. While the suggested total daily dosages given will meet the needs of most patients, there will be some patients who require doses greater than 6 mg/day. In such cases, dosage should be increased cautiously to avoid adverse effects.

Dosing in Special Populations

In elderly patients, in patients with advanced liver disease, or in patients with debilitating disease, the usual starting dose of alprazolam extended-release tablets is 0.5 mg once daily. This may be gradually increased if needed and tolerated (see Dose Titration). The elderly may be especially sensitive to the effects of benzodiazepines.

Dose Titration

Treatment with alprazolam extended-release tablets may be initiated with a dose of 0.5 mg to 1 mg once daily. Depending on the response, the dose may be increased at intervals of 3 to 4 days in increments of no more than 1 mg/day. Slower titration to the dose levels may be advisable to allow full expression of the pharmacodynamic effect of alprazolam extended-release tablets.

Generally, therapy should be initiated at a low dose to minimize the risk of adverse responses in patients especially sensitive to the drug. Dose should be advanced until an acceptable therapeutic response (i.e., a substantial reduction in or total elimination of panic attacks) is achieved, intolerance occurs, or the maximum recommended dose is attained.

Dose Maintenance

In controlled trials conducted to establish the efficacy of alprazolam extended-release tablets in panic disorder, doses in the range of 1 to 10 mg/day were used. Most patients showed efficacy in the dose range of 3 to 6 mg/day. Occasional patients required as much as 10 mg/day to achieve a successful response.

The necessary duration of treatment for panic disorder patients responding to alprazolam extended-release tablets is unknown. However, periodic reassessment is advised. After a period of extended freedom from attacks, a carefully supervised tapered discontinuation may be attempted, but there is evidence that this may often be difficult to accomplish without recurrence of symptoms and/or the manifestation of withdrawal phenomena.

Dose Reduction

Because of the danger of withdrawal, abrupt discontinuation of treatment should be avoided (see WARNINGS, PRECAUTIONS, DRUG ABUSE AND DEPENDENCE).

In all patients, dosage should be reduced gradually when discontinuing therapy or when decreasing the daily dosage. Although there are no systematically collected data to support a specific discontinuation schedule, it is suggested that the daily dosage be decreased by no more than 0.5 mg every 3 days. Some patients may require an even slower dosage reduction.

In any case, reduction of dose must be undertaken under close supervision and must be gradual. If significant withdrawal symptoms develop, the previous dosing schedule should be reinstituted and, only after stabilization, should a less rapid schedule of discontinuation be attempted. In a controlled post-marketing discontinuation study of panic disorder patients which compared this recommended taper schedule with a slower taper schedule, no difference was observed between the groups in the proportion of patients who tapered to zero dose; however, the slower schedule was associated with a reduction in symptoms associated with a withdrawal syndrome. It is suggested that the dose be reduced by no more than 0.5 mg every 3 days, with the understanding that some patients may benefit from an even more gradual discontinuation. Some patients may prove resistant to all discontinuation regimens.

Switch from Alprazolam Immediate-release Tablets to Alprazolam Extended-Release Tablets

Patients who are currently being treated with divided doses of alprazolam immediate-release tablets, for example 3 to 4 times a day, may be switched to alprazolam extended-release tablets at the same total daily dose taken once daily. If the therapeutic response after switching is inadequate, the dosage may be titrated as outlined above.
Amlodipine Besylateator...

Amlodipine Besylateatorvastatin Calcium

Amlodipine besylate and atorvastatin calcium tablets

Dosage of amlodipine besylate and atorvastatin calcium tablets must be individualized on the basis of both effectiveness and tolerance for each individual component in the treatment of hypertension/angina and hyperlipidemia. Select doses of amlodipine and atorvastatin independently.

Amlodipine besylate and atorvastatin calcium tablets may be substituted for its individually titrated components. Patients may be given the equivalent dose of amlodipine besylate and atorvastatin calcium tablets or a dose of amlodipine besylate and atorvastatin calcium tablets with increased amounts of amlodipine, atorvastatin, or both for additional antianginal effects, blood pressure lowering, or lipid-lowering effect.

Amlodipine besylate and atorvastatin calcium tablets may be used to provide additional therapy for patients already on one of its components. Amlodipine besylate and atorvastatin calcium tablets may be used to initiate treatment in patients with hyperlipidemia and either hypertension or angina.

Amlodipine

The usual initial antihypertensive oral dose of amlodipine is 5 mg once daily, and the maximum dose is 10 mg once daily.

Pediatric (age > 6 years), small adult, fragile, or elderly patients, or patients with hepatic insufficiency may be started on 2.5 mg once daily and this dose may be used when adding amlodipine to other antihypertensive therapy.

Adjust dosage according to blood pressure goals. In general, wait 7 to 14 days between titration steps. Titration may proceed more rapidly, however, if clinically warranted, provided the patient is assessed frequently.

Angina: The recommended dose of amlodipine for chronic stable or vasospastic angina is 5–10 mg, with the lower dose suggested in the elderly and in patients with hepatic insufficiency. Most patients will require 10 mg for adequate effect.

Coronary artery disease: The recommended dose range of amlodipine for patients with coronary artery disease is 5–10 mg once daily. In clinical studies, the majority of patients required 10 mg [see Clinical Studies (14.4)].

Pediatrics: The effective antihypertensive oral dose of amlodipine in pediatric patients ages 6–17 years is 2.5 mg to 5 mg once daily. Doses in excess of 5 mg daily have not been studied in pediatric patients [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3), Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Atorvastatin (Hyperlipidemia)

Hyperlipidemia (Heterozygous Familial and Nonfamilial) and Mixed Dyslipidemia (Fredrickson Types IIa and IIb): The recommended starting dose of atorvastatin is 10 or 20 mg once daily. Patients who require a large reduction in LDL-C (more than 45%) may be started at 40 mg once daily. The dosage range of atorvastatin is 10 to 80 mg once daily. Atorvastatin can be administered as a single dose at any time of the day, with or without food. The starting dose and maintenance doses of atorvastatin should be individualized according to patient characteristics such as goal of therapy and response (see current NCEP Guidelines). After initiation and/or upon titration of atorvastatin, lipid levels should be analyzed within 2 to 4 weeks and dosage adjusted accordingly.

Homozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia: The dosage range of atorvastatin in patients with homozygous FH is 10 to 80 mg daily. Atorvastatin should be used as an adjunct to other lipid-lowering treatments (e.g., LDL apheresis) in these patients or if such treatments are unavailable.

Concomitant Lipid-Lowering Therapy: Atorvastatin may be used with bile acid resins. Monitor for signs of myopathy in patients receiving the combination of HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors (statins) and fibrates [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1), Drug Interactions (7)].

Patients with Renal Impairment: Renal disease does not affect the plasma concentrations nor LDL-C reduction of atorvastatin; thus, dosage adjustment in patients with renal dysfunction is not necessary [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Use with Cyclosporine, Clarithromycin, Itraconazole, or Certain Protease Inhibitors: In patients taking cyclosporine or the HIV protease inhibitors (tipranavir plus ritonavir) or the hepatitis C protease inhibitor (telaprevir), avoid therapy with atorvastatin. In patients with HIV taking lopinavir plus ritonavir, use the lowest necessary dose of atorvastatin. In patients taking clarithromycin, itraconazole, or in patients with HIV taking a combination of saquinavir plus ritonavir, darunavir plus ritonavir, fosamprenavir, or fosamprenavir plus ritonavir, limit therapy with atorvastatin to 20 mg, and make appropriate clinical assessment to ensure that the lowest dose necessary of atorvastatin is employed. In patients taking the HIV protease inhibitor nelfinavir or the hepatitis C protease inhibitor boceprevir, limit therapy with atorvastatin to 40 mg, and make appropriate clinical assessment to ensure that the lowest dose necessary of atorvastatin is employed [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1), Drug Interactions (7.13)].

Heterozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia in Pediatric Patients (10–17 years of age): The recommended starting dose of atorvastatin is 10 mg/day; the maximum recommended dose is 20 mg/day (doses greater than 20 mg have not been studied in this patient population). Doses should be individualized according to the recommended goal of therapy [see current NCEP Pediatric Panel Guidelines 1, (References (15), Clinical Pharmacology (12), and Indications and Usage (1.4)]. Adjustments should be made at intervals of 4 weeks or more.
Chlorothiazide

Chlorothiazide

Therapy should be individualized according to patient response. Use the smallest dosage necessary to achieve the required response.

Adults

For Edema

The usual adult dosage is 0.5 g to 1 g once or twice a day. Many patients with edema respond to intermittent therapy, i.e., administration on alternate days or on three to five days each week. With an intermittent schedule, excessive response and the resulting undesirable electrolyte imbalance are less likely to occur.

For Control of Hypertension

The usual adult starting dosage is 0.5 g or 1 g a day as a single or divided dose. Dosage is increased or decreased according to blood pressure response. Rarely some patients may require up to 2 g a day in divided doses.

Infants and Children

For Diuresis and For Control of Hypertension

The usual pediatric dosage is 5 to 10 mg per pound (10 to 20 mg/kg) per day in single or two divided doses, not to exceed 375 mg per day in infants up to 2 years of age or 1 g per day in children 2 to 12 years of age. In infants less than 6 months of age, doses up to 15 mg per pound (30 mg/kg) per day in two divided doses may be required. (See PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use.)
Chlorpropamide

Chlorpropamide

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of type 2 diabetes with chlorpropamide or any other hypoglycemic agent. The patient’s blood glucose must be monitored periodically to determine the minimum effective dose for the patient; to detect primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication; and to detect secondary failure, i.e., loss of an adequate blood glucose lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness. Glycosylated hemoglobin levels may also be of value in monitoring the patient’s response to therapy.

Short-term administration of chlorpropamide may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually controlled well on diet.

The total daily dosage is generally taken at a single time each morning with breakfast. Occasionally cases of gastrointestinal intolerance may be relieved by dividing the daily dosage. A LOADING OR PRIMING DOSE IS NOT NECESSARY AND SHOULD NOT BE USED.

Initial Therapy
1. The mild to moderately severe, middle-aged, stable type 2 diabetes patient should be started on 250 mg daily. In elderly patients, debilitated or malnourished patients, and patients with impaired renal or hepatic function, the initial and maintenance dosing should be conservative to avoid hypoglycemic reactions (see PRECAUTIONS). Older patients should be started on smaller amounts of chlorpropamide, in the range of 100 mg to 125 mg daily. 2. No transition period is necessary when transferring patients from other oral hypoglycemic agents to chlorpropamide. The other agent may be discontinued abruptly and chlorpropamide started at once. In prescribing chlorpropamide, due consideration must be given to its greater potency.
Many mild to moderately severe, middle-aged, stable type 2 diabetes patients receiving insulin can be placed directly on the oral drug and their insulin abruptly discontinued. For patients requiring more than 40 units of insulin daily, therapy with chlorpropamide may be initiated with a 50% reduction in insulin for the first few days, with subsequent further reductions dependent upon the response.

During the initial period of therapy with chlorpropamide, hypoglycemic reactions may occasionally occur, particularly during the transition from insulin to the oral drug. Hypoglycemia within 24 hours after withdrawal of the intermediate or long-acting types of insulin will usually prove to be the result of insulin carry-over and not primarily due to the effect of chlorpropamide.

During the insulin withdrawal period, the patient should self-monitor glucose levels at least 3 times daily. If they are abnormal, the physician should be notified immediately. In some cases, it may be advisable to consider hospitalization during the transition period.

Five to 7 days after the initial therapy, the blood level of chlorpropamide reaches a plateau. Dosage may subsequently be adjusted upward or downward by increments of not more than 50 mg to 125 mg at intervals of 3 to 5 days to obtain optimal control. More frequent adjustments are usually undesirable.

Maintenance Therapy

Most moderately severe, middle-aged, stable type 2 diabetes patients are controlled by approximately 250 mg daily. Many investigators have found that some milder diabetics do well on daily doses of 100 mg or less. Many of the more severe diabetics may require 500 mg daily for adequate control. PATIENTS WHO DO NOT RESPOND COMPLETELY TO 500 MG DAILY WILL USUALLY NOT RESPOND TO HIGHER DOSES. MAINTENANCE DOSES ABOVE 750 MG DAILY SHOULD BE AVOIDED.
Bisoprolol Fumarate And...

Bisoprolol Fumarate And Hydrochlorothiazide

Bisoprolol is an effective treatment of hypertension in once daily doses of 2.5 mg to 40 mg, while hydrochlorothiazide is effective in doses of 12.5 mg to 50 mg. In clinical trials of bisoprolol/hydrochlorothiazide combination therapy using bisoprolol doses of 2.5 mg to 20 mg and hydrochlorothiazide doses of 6.25 mg to 25 mg, the antihypertensive effects increased with increasing doses of either component.

The adverse effects (see WARNINGS) of bisoprolol are a mixture of dose-dependent phenomena (primarily bradycardia, diarrhea, asthenia and fatigue) and dose-independent phenomena (e.g., occasional rash); those of hydrochlorothiazide are a mixture of dose-dependent phenomena (primarily hypokalemia) and dose-independent phenomena (e.g., possibly pancreatitis); the dose-dependent phenomena for each being much more common than the dose-independent phenomena. The latter consist of those few that are truly idiosyncratic in nature or those that occur with such low frequency that a dose relationship may be difficult to discern. Therapy with a combination of bisoprolol and hydrochlorothiazide will be associated with both sets of dose-independent adverse effects, and to minimize these, it may be appropriate to begin combination therapy only after a patient has failed to achieve the desired effect with monotherapy. On the other hand, regimens that combine low doses of bisoprolol and hydrochlorothiazide should produce minimal dose-dependent adverse effects, e.g., bradycardia, diarrhea, asthenia and fatigue, and minimal dose-dependent adverse metabolic effects, i.e., decreases in serum potassium (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Therapy Guided by Clinical Effect

A patient whose blood pressure is not adequately controlled with 2.5 mg to 20 mg bisoprolol daily may instead be given bisoprolol fumarate and hydrochlorothiazide tablets. Patients whose blood pressures are adequately controlled with 50 mg of hydrochlorothiazide daily, but who experience significant potassium loss with this regimen, may achieve similar blood pressure control without electrolyte disturbance if they are switched to bisoprolol fumarate and hydrochlorothiazide tablets.

Initial Therapy

Antihypertensive therapy may be initiated with the lowest dose of bisoprolol fumarate and hydrochlorothiazide tablets, one 2.5 mg/6.25 mg tablet once daily. Subsequent titration (14 day intervals) may be carried out with bisoprolol fumarate and hydrochlorothiazide tablets up to the maximum recommended dose 20 mg/12.5 mg (two 10 mg/6.25 mg tablets) once daily, as appropriate.

Replacement Therapy

The combination may be substituted for the titrated individual components.

Cessation of Therapy

If withdrawal of bisoprolol fumarate and hydrochlorothiazide tablet therapy is planned, it should be achieved gradually over a period of about 2 weeks. Patients should be carefully observed.

Patients with Renal or Hepatic Impairment

As noted in the WARNINGS section, caution must be used in dosing/titrating patients with hepatic impairment or renal dysfunction. Since there is no indication that hydrochlorothiazide is dialyzable, and limited data suggest that bisoprolol is not dialyzable, drug replacement is not necessary in patients undergoing dialysis.

Geriatric Patients

Dosage adjustment on the basis of age is not usually necessary, unless there is also significant renal or hepatic dysfunction (see above and WARNINGS section).

Pediatric Patients

There is no pediatric experience with bisoprolol fumarate and hydrochlorothiazide tablets.
Amiloride Hydrochloride...

Amiloride Hydrochloride And Hydrochlorothiazide

Amiloride hydrochloride and hydrochlorothiazide tablets should be administered with food.

The usual starting dosage is 1 tablet a day. The dosage may be increased to 2 tablets a day, if necessary. More than 2 tablets of amiloride hydrochloride and hydrochlorothiazide daily usually are not needed and there is no controlled experience with such doses. Hydrochlorothiazide can be given at doses of 12.5 mg to 50 mg per day when used alone. Patients usually do not require doses of hydrochlorothiazide in excess of 50 mg daily when combined with other antihypertensive agents.

The daily dose is usually given as a single dose but may be given in divided doses. Once an initial diuresis has been achieved, dosage adjustment may be necessary. Maintenance therapy may be on an intermittent basis.
Alprazolam

Alprazolam

Dosage should be individualized for maximum beneficial effect. While the usual daily dosages given below will meet the needs of most patients, there will be some who require doses greater than 4 mg/day. In such cases, dosage should be increased cautiously to avoid adverse effects.

Anxiety Disorders and Transient Symptoms of Anxiety

Treatment for patients with anxiety should be initiated with a dose of 0.25 mg to 0.5 mg given three times daily. The dose may be increased to achieve a maximum therapeutic effect, at intervals of 3 to 4 days, to a maximum daily dose of 4 mg, given in divided doses. The lowest possible effective dose should be employed and the need for continued treatment reassessed frequently. The risk of dependence may increase with dose and duration of treatment.

In all patients, dosage should be reduced gradually when discontinuing therapy or when decreasing the daily dosage. Although there are no systematically collected data to support a specific discontinuation schedule, it is suggested that the daily dosage be decreased by no more than 0.5 mg every 3 days. Some patients may require an even slower dosage reduction.

Panic Disorder

The successful treatment of many panic disorder patients has required the use of alprazolam at doses greater than 4 mg daily. In controlled trials conducted to establish the efficacy of alprazolam in panic disorder, doses in the range of 1 mg to 10 mg daily were used. The mean dosage employed was approximately 5 mg to 6 mg daily. Among the approximately 1,700 patients participating in the panic disorder development program, about 300 received alprazolam in dosages of greater than 7 mg/day, including approximately 100 patients who received maximum dosages of greater than 9 mg/day. Occasional patients required as much as 10 mg a day to achieve a successful response.

Dose Titration

Treatment may be initiated with a dose of 0.5 mg three times daily. Depending on the response, the dose may be increased at intervals of 3 to 4 days in increments of no more than 1 mg per day. Slower titration to the dose levels greater than 4 mg/day may be advisable to allow full expression of the pharmacodynamic effect of alprazolam. To lessen the possibility of interdose symptoms, the times of administration should be distributed as evenly as possible throughout the waking hours, that is, on a three or four times per day schedule.

Generally, therapy should be initiated at a low dose to minimize the risk of adverse responses in patients especially sensitive to the drug. Dose should be advanced until an acceptable therapeutic response (i.e., a substantial reduction in or total elimination of panic attacks) is achieved, intolerance occurs, or the maximum recommended dose is attained.

Dose Maintenance

For patients receiving doses greater than 4 mg/day, periodic reassessment and consideration of dosage reduction is advised. In a controlled post-marketing dose-response study, patients treated with doses of alprazolam greater than 4 mg/day for 3 months were able to taper to 50% of their total maintenance dose without apparent loss of clinical benefit. Because of the danger of withdrawal, abrupt discontinuation of treatment should be avoided. (See WARNINGS, PRECAUTIONS, DRUG ABUSE AND DEPENDENCE.)

The necessary duration of treatment for panic disorder patients responding to alprazolam is unknown. After a period of extended freedom from attacks, a carefully supervised tapered discontinuation may be attempted, but there is evidence that this may often be difficult to accomplish without recurrence of symptoms and/or the manifestation of withdrawal phenomena.

Dose Reduction

Because of the danger of withdrawal, abrupt discontinuation of treatment should be avoided (see WARNINGS, PRECAUTIONS, DRUG ABUSE AND DEPENDENCE).

In all patients, dosage should be reduced gradually when discontinuing therapy or when decreasing the daily dosage. Although there are no systematically collected data to support a specific discontinuation schedule, it is suggested that the daily dosage be decreased by no more than 0.5 mg every 3 days. Some patients may require an even slower dosage reduction.

In any case, reduction of dose must be undertaken under close supervision and must be gradual. If significant withdrawal symptoms develop, the previous dosing schedule should be reinstituted and, only after stabilization, should a less rapid schedule of discontinuation be attempted. In a controlled post-marketing discontinuation study of panic disorder patients which compared this recommended taper schedule with a slower taper schedule, no difference was observed between the groups in the proportion of patients who tapered to zero dose; however, the slower schedule was associated with a reduction in symptoms associated with a withdrawal syndrome. It is suggested that the dose be reduced by no more than 0.5 mg every 3 days, with the understanding that some patients may benefit from an even more gradual discontinuation. Some patients may prove resistant to all discontinuation regimens.

Dosing in Special Populations

In elderly patients, in patients with advanced liver disease or in patients with debilitating disease, the usual starting dose is 0.25 mg, given two or three times daily. This may be gradually increased if needed and tolerated. The elderly may be especially sensitive to the effects of benzodiazepines. If side effects occur at the recommended starting dose, the dose may be lowered.
Albuterol

Albuterol

The following dosages of albuterol tablets are expressed in terms of albuterol base.

Usual Dosage

Adults and Children Over 12 Years of Age

The usual starting dosage for adults and children 12 years and older is 2 or 4 mg three or four times a day.

Children 6 to 12 Years of Age

The usual starting dosage for children 6 to 12 years of age is 2 mg three or four times a day.

Dosage Adjustment

Adults and Children Over 12 Years of Age

For adults and children 12 years and older, a dosage above 4 mg four times a day should be used only when the patient fails to respond. If a favorable response does not occur with the 4 mg initial dosage, it should be cautiously increased stepwise up to a maximum of 8 mg four times a day as tolerated.

Children 6 to 12 Years of Age Who Fail to Respond to the Initial Starting Dosage of 2 mg Four Times a Day

For children from 6 to 12 years of age who fail to respond to the initial starting dosage of 2 mg four times a day, the dosage may be cautiously increased stepwise, but not to exceed 24 mg/day (given in divided doses).

Elderly Patients and Those Sensitive to Beta-adrenergic Stimulators

An initial dosage of 2 mg three or four times a day is recommended for elderly patients and for those with a history of unusual sensitivity to beta-adrenergic stimulators. If adequate bronchodilation is not obtained, dosage may be increased gradually to as much as 8 mg three or four times a day.

The total daily dose should not exceed 32 mg in adults and children 12 years and older.
Oxycodone And Acetamino...

Oxycodone And Acetaminophen

Dosage should be adjusted according to the severity of the pain and the response of the patient. It may occasionally be necessary to exceed the usual dosage recommended below in cases of more severe pain or in those patients who have become tolerant to the analgesic effect of opioids. If pain is constant, the opioid analgesic should be given at regular intervals on an around-the-clock schedule. Oxycodone and acetaminophen tablets are given orally.

The total daily dose of acetaminophen should not exceed 4 grams.
Strength Usual Adult Dosage Maximal Daily Dose Oxycodone and Acetaminophen Tablets, 2.5 mg/325 mg 1 or 2 tablets every 6 hours as needed for pain. 12 Tablets Oxycodone and Acetaminophen Tablets, 5 mg/325 mg 1 tablet every 6 hours as needed for pain. 12 Tablets Oxycodone and Acetaminophen Tablets, 7.5 mg/325 mg 1 tablet every 6 hours as needed for pain. 8 Tablets Oxycodone and Acetaminophen Tablets, 10 mg/325 mg 1 tablet every 6 hours as needed for pain. 6 Tablets
Cessation of Therapy

In patients treated with oxycodone and acetaminophen tablets for more than a few weeks who no longer require therapy, doses should be tapered gradually to prevent signs and symptoms of withdrawal in the physically dependent patient.
Clonidine Hydrochloride...

Clonidine Hydrochloride

Adults

The dose of clonidine hydrochloride tablets must be adjusted according to the patient's individual blood pressure response. The following is a general guide to its administration.

Initial Dose

0.1 mg tablet twice daily (morning and bedtime). Elderly patients may benefit from a lower initial dose.

Maintenance Dose

Further increments of 0.1 mg per day may be made at weekly intervals if necessary until the desired response is achieved. Taking the larger portion of the oral daily dose at bedtime may minimize transient adjustment effects of dry mouth and drowsiness. The therapeutic doses most commonly employed have ranged from 0.2 mg to 0.6 mg per day given in divided doses. Studies have indicated that 2.4 mg is the maximum effective daily dose, but doses as high as this have rarely been employed.

Renal Impairment

Patients with renal impairment may benefit from a lower initial dose. Patients should be carefully monitored. Since only a minimal amount of clonidine is removed during routine hemodialysis, there is no need to give supplemental clonidine following dialysis.
Minocycline Hydrochlori...

Minocycline Hydrochloride

The recommended dosage of minocycline hydrochloride extended-release tablets is approximately 1 mg/kg once daily for 12 weeks. Higher doses have not shown to be of additional benefit in the treatment of inflammatory lesions of acne, and may be associated with more acute vestibular side effects.

The following table shows tablet strength and body weight to achieve approximately 1 mg/kg.
Table 1: Dosing Table for Minocycline Hydrochloride Extended-release Tablets
Patient's Weight (lbs)

Patient's Weight (kg)

Tablet Strength (mg)

Actual mg/kg Dose

99 to 109

45 to 49

45

1 to 0.92

110 to 131

50 to 59

55

1.10 to 0.93

132 to 157

60 to 71

65

1.08 to 0.92

158 to 186

72 to 84

80

1.11 to 0.95

187 to 212

85 to 96

90

1.06 to 0.94

213 to 243

97 to 110

105

1.08 to 0.95

244 to 276

111 to 125

115

1.04 to 0.92

277 to 300

126 to 136

135

1.07 to 0.99

Minocycline hydrochloride extended-release tablets may be taken with or without food [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Ingestion of food along with minocycline hydrochloride extended-release tablets may help reduce the risk of esophageal irritation and ulceration.

In patients with renal impairment, the total dosage should be decreased by either reducing the recommended individual doses and/or by extending the time intervals between doses [see Warnings and Precautions (5.4)].
Cetirizine Hydrochlorid...

Cetirizine Hydrochloride

adults and children 6 years and over

1 to 2 tablets once daily depending upon severity of symptoms; do not take more than 2 tablets in 24 hours.

adults 65 years and over

1 tablet once a day; do not take more than 1 tablet in 24 hours

children under 6 years of age

ask a doctor

consumers with liver or kidney disease

ask a doctor
Fexofenadine Hydrochlor...

Fexofenadine Hydrochloride

adults and children 12 years of age and over

take two 30 mg tablets with water every 12 hours; do not take more than 4 tablets in 24 hours

children 6 to under 12 years of age

take one 30 mg tablet with water every 12 hours; do not take more than 2 tablets in 24 hours

children under 6 years of age

do not use

adults 65 years of age and older

ask a doctor

consumers with kidney disease

ask a doctor
Levetiracetam

Levetiracetam

Dosage should be adjusted according to each patient’s needs. It is recommended that nifedipine extended-release tablets be administered orally once daily on an empty stomach. Nifedipine extended-release tablets are an extended-release dosage form and tablets should be swallowed whole, not bitten or divided. In general, titration should proceed over a 7 to 14 day period starting with 30 mg once daily. Upward titration should be based on therapeutic efficacy and safety. The usual maintenance dose is 30 mg to 60 mg once daily. Titration to doses above 90 mg daily is not recommended.

If discontinuation of nifedipine extended-release tablets is necessary, sound clinical practice suggests that the dosage should be decreased gradually with close physician supervision.

Coadministration of nifedipine with grapefruit juice is to be avoided (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY and PRECAUTIONS).

Care should be taken when dispensing nifedipine extended-release tablets to assure that the extended-release dosage form has been prescribed.
Doxazosin

Doxazosin

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED. The initial dosage of doxazosin tablets in patients with hypertension and/or BPH is 1 mg given once daily in the a.m. or p.m. This starting dose is intended to minimize the frequency of postural hypotension and first dose syncope associated with doxazosin tablets. Postural effects are most likely to occur between 2 and 6 hours after a dose. Therefore, blood pressure measurements should be taken during this time period after the first dose and with each increase in dose. If doxazosin tablet administration is discontinued for several days, therapy should be restarted using the initial dosing regimen.

Concomitant administration of doxazosin tablets with a PDE-5 inhibitor can result in additive blood pressure lowering effects and symptomatic hypotension; therefore, PDE-5 inhibitor therapy should be initiated at the lowest dose in patients taking doxazosin tablets.

Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia 1 mg to 8 mg Once Daily

The initial dosage of doxazosin tablets is 1 mg, given once daily in the a.m. or p.m. Depending on the individual patient's urodynamics and BPH symptomatology, dosage may then be increased to 2 mg and thereafter to 4 mg and 8 mg once daily, the maximum recommended dose for BPH. The recommended titration interval is 1 to 2 weeks. Blood pressure should be evaluated routinely in these patients.

Hypertension 1 mg to 16 mg Once Daily

The initial dosage of doxazosin tablets is 1 mg given once daily. Depending on the individual patient's standing blood pressure response (based on measurements taken at 2 to 6 hours post-dose and 24 hours post-dose), dosage may then be increased to 2 mg and thereafter if necessary to 4 mg, 8 mg and 16 mg to achieve the desired reduction in blood pressure. Increases in dose beyond 4 mg increase the likelihood of excessive postural effects including syncope, postural dizziness/vertigo and postural hypotension. At a titrated dose of 16 mg once daily, the frequency of postural effects is about 12% compared to 3% for placebo.
Atovaquone And Proguani...

Atovaquone And Proguanil Hydrochloride

The daily dose should be taken at the same time each day with food or a milky drink. In the event of vomiting within one hour after dosing, a repeat dose should be taken.

Atovaquone and proguanil hydrochloride tablets may be crushed and mixed with condensed milk just prior to administration to patients who may have difficulty swallowing tablets.

2.1Prevention of Malaria

Start prophylactic treatment with atovaquone and proguanil hydrochloride tablets 1 or 2 days before entering a malaria-endemic area and continue daily during the stay and for 7 days after return.

Adults

One atovaquone and proguanil hydrochloride tablet (adult strength = 250 mg atovaquone/100 mg proguanil hydrochloride) per day.

Pediatric Patients

The dosage for prevention of malaria in pediatric patients is based upon body weight (Table 1).
Table 1. Dosage for Prevention of Malaria in Pediatric Patients
Weight (kg)

Atovaquone/ Proguanil HCl Total Daily Dose

Dosage Regimen

11 to 20

62.5 mg/25 mg

One atovaquone and proguanil hydrochloride pediatric tablet daily

21 to 30

125 mg/50 mg

Two atovaquone and proguanil hydrochloride pediatric tablets as a single daily dose

31 to 40

187.5 mg/75 mg

Three atovaquone and proguanil hydrochloride pediatric tablets as a single daily dose

> 40

250 mg/100 mg

One atovaquone and proguanil hydrochloride tablet (adult strength) as a single daily dose

2.2Treatment of Acute Malaria

Adults

Four atovaquone and proguanil hydrochloride tablets (adult strength; total daily dose 1 g atovaquone/400 mg proguanil hydrochloride) as a single daily dose for 3 consecutive days.

Pediatric Patients

The dosage for treatment of acute malaria in pediatric patients is based upon body weight (Table 2).
Table 2. Dosage for Treatment of Acute Malaria in Pediatric Patients
Weight (kg)

Atovaquone/ Proguanil HCl Total Daily Dose

Dosage Regimen

5 to 8

125 mg/50 mg

Two atovaquone and proguanil hydrochloride pediatric tablets daily for 3 consecutive days

9 to 10

187.5 mg/75 mg

Three atovaquone and proguanil hydrochloride pediatric tablets daily for 3 consecutive days

11 to 20

250 mg/100 mg

One atovaquone and proguanil hydrochloride tablet (adult strength) daily for 3 consecutive days

21 to 30

500 mg/200 mg

Two atovaquone and proguanil hydrochloride tablets (adult strength) as a single daily dose for 3 consecutive days

31 to 40

750 mg/300 mg

Three atovaquone and proguanil hydrochloride tablets (adult strength) as a single daily dose for 3 consecutive days

> 40

1 g/400 mg

Four atovaquone and proguanil hydrochloride tablets (adult strength) as a single daily dose for 3 consecutive days

2.3Renal Impairment

Do not use atovaquone and proguanil hydrochloride tablets for malaria prophylaxis in patients with severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance < 30 mL/min) [see Contraindications (4.2)]. Use with caution for the treatment of malaria in patients with severe renal impairment, only if the benefits of the 3-day treatment regimen outweigh the potential risks associated with increased drug exposure. No dosage adjustments are needed in patients with mild (creatinine clearance 50 to 80 mL/min) or moderate (creatinine clearance 30 to 50 mL/min) renal impairment. [See Clinical Pharmacology (12.3).]
Fluphenazine Hydrochlor...

Fluphenazine Hydrochloride

Depending on the severity and duration of symptoms, total daily dosage for adult psychotic patients may range initially from 2.5 mg to 10 mg and should be divided and given at 6 to 8 hour intervals.

The smallest amount that will produce the desired results must be carefully determined for each individual, since optimal dosage levels of this potent drug vary from patient to patient. In general, the oral dose has been found to be approximately 2 to 3 times the parenteral dose of fluphenazine. Treatment is best instituted with a low initial dosage, which may be increased, if necessary, until the desired clinical effects are achieved. Therapeutic effect is often achieved with doses under 20 mg daily. Patients remaining severely disturbed or inadequately controlled may require upward titration of dosage. Daily doses up to 40 mg may be necessary; controlled clinical studies have not been performed to demonstrate safety of prolonged administration of such doses.

When symptoms are controlled, dosage can generally be reduced gradually to daily maintenance doses of 1 mg to 5 mg, often given as a single daily dose. Continued treatment is needed to achieve maximum therapeutic benefits; further adjustments in dosage may be necessary during the course of therapy to meet the patient’s requirements.

For psychotic patients who have been stabilized on a fixed daily dosage of orally administered fluphenazine hydrochloride dosage forms, conversion to the long-acting fluphenazine decanoate may be indicated (see package insert for conversion information).

For geriatric patients, the suggested starting dose is 1 mg to 2.5 mg daily, adjusted according to the response of the patient.
Indapamide

Indapamide

Hypertension

The adult starting indapamide dose for hypertension is 1.25 mg as a single daily dose taken in the morning. If the response to 1.25 mg is not satisfactory after 4 weeks, the daily dose may be increased to 2.5 mg taken once daily. If the response to 2.5 mg is not satisfactory after 4 weeks, the daily dose may be increased to 5 mg taken once daily, but adding another antihypertensive should be considered.

Edema of Congestive Heart Failure

The adult starting indapamide dose for edema of congestive heart failure is 2.5 mg as a single daily dose taken in the morning. If the response to 2.5 mg is not satisfactory after one week, the daily dose may be increased to 5 mg taken once daily.

If the antihypertensive response to indapamide is insufficient, indapamide may be combined with other antihypertensive drugs, with careful monitoring of blood pressure. It is recommended that the usual dose of other agents be reduced by 50% during initial combination therapy. As the blood pressure response becomes evident, further dosage adjustments may be necessary.

In general, doses of 5 mg and larger have not appeared to provide additional effects on blood pressure or heart failure, but are associated with a greater degree of hypokalemia. There is minimal clinical trial experience in patients with doses greater than 5 mg once a day.
Thiothixene

Thiothixene

Dosage of thiothixene capsules should be individually adjusted depending on the chronicity and severity of the symptoms of schizophrenia. In general, small doses should be used initially and gradually increased to the optimal effective level, based on patient response.

Some patients have been successfully maintained on once a day thiothixene capsule therapy.

The use of thiothixene capsules in children under 12 years of age is not recommended because safe conditions for its use have not been established.

In milder conditions, an initial dose of 2 mg three times daily is recommended. If indicated, a subsequent increase to 15 mg/day total daily dose is often effective.

In more severe conditions, an initial dose of 5 mg twice daily is recommended.

The usual optimal dose is 20 mg to 30 mg daily. If indicated, an increase to 60 mg/day total daily dose is often effective. Exceeding a total daily dose of 60 mg rarely increases the beneficial response.
Allocord

Allocord

The recommended starting dose of memantine hydrochloride tablets is 5 mg once daily. The dose should be increased in 5 mg increments to 10 mg/day (5 mg twice daily), 15 mg/day (5 mg and 10 mg as separate doses), and 20 mg/day (10 mg twice daily). The minimum recommended interval between dose increases is one week. The dosage shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials is 20 mg/day.

Memantine hydrochloride tablets can be taken with or without food. If a patient misses a single dose of memantine hydrochloride tablets, that patient should not double up on the next dose. The next dose should be taken as scheduled. If a patient fails to take memantine hydrochloride tablets for several days, dosing may need to be resumed at lower doses and retitrated as described above.

Special Populations: Renal Impairment: A target dose of 5 mg twice daily is recommended in patients with severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance of 5 to 29 mL/min based on the Cockroft-Gault equation).

Hepatic Impairment: Memantine hydrochloride tablets should be administered with caution to patients with severe hepatic impairment [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Re20 Light Wrinkle Bb

Re20 Light Wrinkle Bb

Dose once daily. The dosage may then be increased after 2 to 3 weeks as needed to help achieve blood pressure goals. The maximum recommended dose is 20 mg/25 mg.

Switch Therapy

A patient whose blood pressure is not adequately controlled with benazapril alone or with hydrochlorothiazide alone may be switched to combination therapy with benazepril hydrochloride and hydrochlorothiazide tablets. The usual recommended starting dose is 10 mg/12.5 mg once daily to control blood pressure.

Replacement Therapy

The combination may be substituted for the titrated individual components.
Levothyroxine Sodium

Levothyroxine Sodium

General Principles

The goal of replacement therapy is to achieve and maintain a clinical and biochemical euthyroid state. The goal of suppressive therapy is to inhibit growth and/or function of abnormal thyroid tissue. The dose of levothyroxine sodium tablets that is adequate to achieve these goals depends on a variety of factors including the patient’s age, body weight, cardiovascular status, concomitant medical conditions, including pregnancy, concomitant medications, and the specific nature of the condition being treated (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS). Hence, the following recommendations serve only as dosing guidelines. Dosing must be individualized and adjustments made based on periodic assessment of the patient’s clinical response and laboratory parameters (see PRECAUTIONS: Laboratory Tests).

Levothyroxine sodium tablets should be taken in the morning on an empty stomach, at least one-half hour before any food is eaten. Levothyroxine sodium tablets should be taken at least 4 hours apart from drugs that are known to interfere with its absorption (see PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions).

Due to the long half-life of levothyroxine, the peak therapeutic effect at a given dose of levothyroxine sodium may not be attained for 4 to 6 weeks.

Caution should be exercised when administering levothyroxine sodium tablets to patients with underlying cardiovascular disease, to the elderly, and to those with concomitant adrenal insufficiency (see PRECAUTIONS).

Specific Patient Populations

Hypothyroidism in Adults and in Children in Whom Growth and Puberty are Complete

(see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS: Laboratory Tests)

Therapy may begin at full replacement doses in otherwise healthy individuals less than 50 years old and in those older than 50 years who have been recently treated for hyperthyroidism or who have been hypothyroid for only a short time (such as a few months). The average full replacement dose of levothyroxine sodium is approximately 1.7 mcg/kg/day (e.g., 100 to 125 mcg/day for a 70 kg adult). Older patients may require less than 1 mcg/kg/day. Levothyroxine sodium doses greater than 200 mcg/day are seldom required. An inadequate response to daily doses ≥ 300 mcg/day is rare and may indicate poor compliance, malabsorption, and/or drug interactions.

For most patients older than 50 years or for patients under 50 years of age with underlying cardiac disease, an initial starting dose of 25 to 50 mcg/day of levothyroxine sodium is recommended, with gradual increments in dose at 6 to 8 week intervals, as needed. The recommended starting dose of levothyroxine sodium in elderly patients with cardiac disease is 12.5 to 25 mcg/day, with gradual dose increments at 4 to 6 week intervals. The levothyroxine sodium dose is generally adjusted in 12.5 mcg to 25 mcg increments until the patient with primary hypothyroidism is clinically euthyroid and the serum TSH has normalized.

In patients with severe hypothyroidism, the recommended initial levothyroxine sodium dose is 12.5 to 25 mcg/day with increases of 25 mcg/day every 2 to 4 weeks, accompanied by clinical and laboratory assessment, until the TSH level is normalized.

In patients with secondary (pituitary) or tertiary (hypothalamic) hypothyroidism, the levothyroxine sodium dose should be titrated until the patient is clinically euthyroid and the serum free-T4 level is restored to the upper half of the normal range.

Pediatric Dosage - Congenital or Acquired Hypothyroidism

(see PRECAUTIONS: Laboratory Tests)

General Principles

In general, levothyroxine therapy should be instituted at full replacement doses as soon as possible. Delays in diagnosis and institution of therapy may have deleterious effects on the child’s intellectual and physical growth and development.

Undertreatment and overtreatment should be avoided (see PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use).

Levothyroxine sodium tablets may be administered to infants and children who cannot swallow intact tablets by crushing the tablet and suspending the freshly crushed tablet in a small amount (5 to 10 mL or 1 to 2 teaspoons) of water. This suspension can be administered by spoon or by dropper. DO NOT STORE THE SUSPENSION. Foods that decrease absorption of levothyroxine, such as soybean infant formula, should not be used for administering levothyroxine sodium tablets (see PRECAUTIONS: Drug-Food Interactions).

Newborns

The recommended starting dose of levothyroxine sodium in newborn infants is 10 to 15 mcg/kg/day. A lower starting dose (e.g., 25 mcg/day) should be considered in infants at risk for cardiac failure, and the dose should be increased in 4 to 6 weeks as needed based on clinical and laboratory response to treatment. In infants with very low (< 5 mcg/dL) or undetectable serum T4 concentrations, the recommended initial starting dose is 50 mcg/day of levothyroxine sodium.

Infants and Children

Levothyroxine therapy is usually initiated at full replacement doses, with the recommended dose per body weight decreasing with age (see Table 3). However, in children with chronic or severe hypothyroidism, an initial dose of 25 mcg/day of levothyroxine sodium is recommended with increments of 25 mcg every 2 to 4 weeks until the desired effect is achieved.

Hyperactivity in an older child can be minimized if the starting dose is one-fourth of the recommended full replacement dose, and the dose is then increased on a weekly basis by an amount equal to one-fourth the full recommended replacement dose until the full recommended replacement dose is reached.
Table 3: Levothyroxine Sodium Dosing Guidelines for Pediatric Hypothyroidism * The dose should be adjusted based on clinical response and laboratory parameters (see PRECAUTIONS: Laboratory Tests and PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use).
AGE

Daily Dose Per Kg Body Weight*

0 to 3 months

10 to 15 mcg/kg/day

3 to 6 months

8 to 10 mcg/kg/day

6 to 12 months

6 to 8 mcg/kg/day

1 to 5 years

5 to 6 mcg/kg/day

6 to 12 years

4 to 5 mcg/kg/day

> 12 years but growth and puberty incomplete

2 to 3 mcg/kg/day

Growth and puberty complete

1.7 mcg/kg/day

Pregnancy

Pregnancy may increase levothyroxine requirements (see PRECAUTIONS: Pregnancy).

Subclinical Hypothyroidism

If this condition is treated, a lower levothyroxine sodium dose (e.g., 1 mcg/kg/day) than that used for full replacement may be adequate to normalize the serum TSH level. Patients who are not treated should be monitored yearly for changes in clinical status and thyroid laboratory parameters.

TSH Suppression in Well Differentiated Thyroid Cancer and Thyroid Nodules

The target level for TSH suppression in these conditions has not been established with controlled studies. In addition, the efficacy of TSH suppression for benign nodular disease is controversial. Therefore, the dose of levothyroxine sodium tablets used for TSH suppression should be individualized based on the specific disease and the patient being treated.

In the treatment of well differentiated (papillary and follicular) thyroid cancer, levothyroxine is used as an adjunct to surgery and radioiodine therapy. Generally, TSH is suppressed to < 0.1 mU/L, and this usually requires a levothyroxine sodium dose of greater than 2 mcg/kg/day. However, in patients with high risk tumors, the target level for TSH suppression may be < 0.01 mU/L.

In the treatment of benign nodules and nontoxic multinodular goiter, TSH is generally suppressed to a higher target (e.g., 0.1 to 0.5 mU/L for nodules and 0.5 to 1.0 mU/L for multinodular goiter) than that used for the treatment of thyroid cancer. Levothyroxine sodium is contraindicated if the serum TSH is already suppressed due to the risk of precipitating overt thyrotoxicosis (see CONTRAINDICATIONS, WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS).

Myxedema Coma

Myxedema coma is a life-threatening emergency characterized by poor circulation and hypometabolism, and may result in unpredictable absorption of levothyroxine sodium from the gastrointestinal tract. Therefore, oral thyroid hormone drug products are not recommended to treat this condition. Thyroid hormone products formulated for intravenous administration should be administered.
Chlordiazepoxide And Am...

Chlordiazepoxide And Amitriptyline Hydrochloride

Optimum dosage varies with the severity of the symptoms and the response of the individual patient. When a satisfactory response is obtained, dosage should be reduced to the smallest amount needed to maintain the remission. The larger portion of the total daily dose may be taken at bedtime. In some patients, a single dose at bedtime may be sufficient. In general, lower dosages are recommended for elderly patients.

Chlordiazepoxide and Amitriptyline Hydrochloride Tablets, USP 10 mg/25 mg are recommended in an initial dosage of 3 or 4 tablets daily in divided doses; this may be increased to 6 tablets daily as required. Some patients respond to smaller doses and can be maintained on 2 tablets daily.

Chlordiazepoxide and Amitriptyline Hydrochloride Tablets, USP 5 mg/12.5 mg in an initial dosage of 3 or 4 tablets daily in divided doses may be satisfactory in patients who do not tolerate higher doses.
Amitriptyline Hydrochlo...

Amitriptyline Hydrochloride

Oral Dosage

Dosage should be initiated at a low level and increased gradually, noting carefully the clinical response and any evidence of intolerance.

Initial Dosage for Adults

For outpatients 75 mg of amitriptyline HCl a day in divided doses is usually satisfactory. If necessary, this may be increased to a total of 150 mg per day. Increases are made preferably in the late afternoon and/or bedtime doses. A sedative effect may be apparent before the antidepressant effect is noted, but an adequate therapeutic effect may take as long as 30 days to develop.

An alternate method of initiating therapy in outpatients is to begin with 50 mg to 100 mg amitriptyline HCl at bedtime. This may be increased by 25 mg or 50 mg as necessary in the bedtime dose to a total of 150 mg per day.

Hospitalized patients may require 100 mg a day initially. This can be increased gradually to 200 mg a day if necessary. A small number of hospitalized patients may need as much as 300 mg a day.

Adolescent and Elderly Patients

In general, lower dosages are recommended for these patients. 10 mg three times a day with 20 mg at bedtime may be satisfactory in adolescent and elderly patients who do not tolerate higher dosages.

Maintenance

The usual maintenance dosage of amitriptyline HCl is 50 mg to 100 mg per day. In some patients 40 mg per day is sufficient. For maintenance therapy the total daily dosage may be given in a single dose preferably at bedtime. When satisfactory improvement has been reached, dosage should be reduced to the lowest amount that will maintain a relief of symptoms. It is appropriate to continue maintenance therapy 3 months or longer, to lessen the possibility of relapse.

Pediatric Use

In view of the lack of experience with the use of this drug in pediatric patients, it is not recommended at the present time for patients under 12 years of age.

Plasma Levels

Because of the wide variation in the absorption and distribution of tricyclic antidepressants in body fluids, it is difficult to directly correlate plasma levels and therapeutic effect. However, determination of plasma levels may be useful in identifying patients who appear to have toxic effects and may have excessively high levels, or those in whom lack of absorption or noncompliance is suspected. Because of increased intestinal transit time and decreased hepatic metabolism in elderly patients, plasma levels are generally higher for a given oral dose of amitriptyline hydrochloride than in younger patients. Elderly patients should be monitored carefully and quantitative serum levels obtained as clinically appropriate. Adjustments in dosage should be made according to the patient’s clinical response and not on the basis of plasma levels.**
Bromfenac

Bromfenac

2.1 Recommended Dosing

One drop of bromfenac ophthalmic solution should be applied to the affected eye two times daily beginning 24 hours after cataract surgery and continuing through the first 2 weeks of the postoperative period.

2.2 Use with Other Topical Ophthalmic Medications

Bromfenac ophthalmic solution may be administered in conjunction with other topical ophthalmic medications such as alpha-agonists, beta-blockers, carbonic anhydrase inhibitors, cycloplegics, and mydriatics. Drops should be administered at least 5 minutes apart.
Metoprolol Tartrate And...

Metoprolol Tartrate And Hydrochlorothiazide

Dosage should be determined by individual titration (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE).

Hydrochlorothiazide is usually given at a dosage of 12.5 mg to 50 mg per day. The usual initial dosage of metoprolol tartrate tablets is 100 mg daily in single or divided doses. Dosage may be increased gradually until optimum blood pressure control is achieved. The effective dosage range is 100 mg to 450 mg per day. While once daily dosing is effective and can maintain a reduction in blood pressure throughout the day, lower doses (especially 100 mg) may not maintain a full effect at the end of the 24-hour period, and larger or more frequent daily doses may be required. This can be evaluated by measuring blood pressure near the end of the dosing interval to determine whether satisfactory control is being maintained throughout the day. Beta1 selectivity diminishes as dosage of metoprolol tartrate tablets is increased.

The following dosage schedule may be used to administer from 100 mg to 200 mg of metoprolol tartrate per day and from 25 mg to 50 mg of hydrochlorothiazide per day:
Metoprolol Tartrate and Hydrochlorothiazide Dosage:
Tablets of 50/25

2 tablets per day in single or divided doses

Tablets of 100/25

1 to 2 tablets per day in single or divided doses

Tablets of 100/50

1 tablet per day in single or divided doses

Dosing regimens that exceed 50 mg of hydrochlorothiazide per day are not recommended. When necessary, another antihypertensive agent may be added gradually, beginning with 50% of the usual recommended starting dose to avoid an excessive fall in blood pressure.
Irbesartan And Hydrochl...

Irbesartan And Hydrochlorothiazide

2.1 General Considerations

The side effects of irbesartan are generally rare and apparently independent of dose; those of hydrochlorothiazide are a mixture of dose dependent (primarily hypokalemia) and dose-independent phenomena (e.g., pancreatitis), the former much more common than the latter. [See Adverse Reactions (6).]

Maximum antihypertensive effects are attained within 2 to 4 weeks after a change in dose.

Irbesartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets may be administered with or without food.

Irbesartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.

Renal Impairment

The usual regimens of therapy with irbesartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets may be followed as long as the patient's creatinine clearance is > 30 mL/min. In patients with more severe renal impairment, loop diuretics are preferred to thiazides, so irbesartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets are not recommended.

Hepatic Impairment

No dosage adjustment is necessary in patients with hepatic impairment.

2.2 Add-On Therapy

In patients not controlled on monotherapy with irbesartan or hydrochlorothiazide, the recommended doses of irbesartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets, in order of increasing mean effect, are (irbesartan-hydrochlorothiazide) 150 mg/12.5 mg, 300 mg/12.5 mg, and 300 mg/25 mg. The largest incremental effect will likely be in the transition from monotherapy to 150 mg/12.5 mg. [See Clinical Studies (14.2).]

2.3 Replacement Therapy

Irbesartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets may be substituted for the titrated components.

2.4 Initial Therapy

The usual starting dose is irbesartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 150 mg/12.5 mg once daily. The dosage can be increased after 1 to 2 weeks of therapy to a maximum of 300 mg/25 mg once daily as needed to control blood pressure [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. Irbesartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets are not recommended as initial therapy in patients with intravascular volume depletion [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].
Sulindac

Sulindac

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of sulindac tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use sulindac tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with sulindac tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient’s needs.

Sulindac tablets should be administered orally twice a day with food. The maximum dosage is 400 mg per day. Dosages above 400 mg per day are not recommended.

In osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, and ankylosing spondylitis, the recommended starting dosage is 150 mg twice a day. The dosage may be lowered or raised depending on the response.

A prompt response (within one week) can be expected in about one-half of patients with osteoarthritis, ankylosing spondylitis, and rheumatoid arthritis. Others may require longer to respond.

In acute painful shoulder (acute subacromial bursitis/supraspinatus tendinitis) and acute gouty arthritis, the recommended dosage is 200 mg twice a day. After a satisfactory response has been achieved, the dosage may be reduced according to the response. In acute painful shoulder, therapy for 7 to 14 days is usually adequate. In acute gouty arthritis, therapy for 7 days is usually adequate.
Letrozole

Letrozole

2.1 Recommended Dose

The recommended dose of letrozole tablets is one 2.5 mg tablet administered once a day, without regard to meals.

2.2 Use in Adjuvant Treatment of Early Breast Cancer

In the adjuvant setting, the optimal duration of treatment with letrozole tablets is unknown. The planned duration of treatment in the study was 5 years with 73% of the patients having completed adjuvant therapy. Treatment should be discontinued at relapse [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

2.3 Use in Extended Adjuvant Treatment of Early Breast Cancer

In the extended adjuvant setting, the optimal treatment duration with letrozole tablets is not known. The planned duration of treatment in the study was 5 years. In the final updated analysis, conducted at a median follow-up of 62 months, the median treatment duration was 60 months. Seventy-one percent of patients were treated for at least 3 years and 58% of patients completed least 4.5 years of extended adjuvant treatment. The treatment should be discontinued at tumor relapse [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

2.4 Use in First and Second-Line Treatment of Advanced Breast Cancer

In patients with advanced disease, treatment with letrozole tablets should continue until tumor progression is evident [see Clinical Studies (14.4, 14.5)].

2.5 Use in Hepatic Impairment

No dosage adjustment is recommended for patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment, although letrozole blood concentrations were modestly increased in subjects with moderate hepatic impairment due to cirrhosis. The dose of letrozole in patients with cirrhosis and severe hepatic dysfunction should be reduced by 50% [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)]. The recommended dose of letrozole tablets for such patients is 2.5 mg administered every other day. The effect of hepatic impairment on letrozole tablets exposure in noncirrhotic cancer patients with elevated bilirubin levels has not been determined.

2.6 Use in Renal Impairment

No dosage adjustment is required for patients with renal impairment if creatinine clearance is ≥ 10 mL/min [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Risedronate Sodium

Risedronate Sodium

2.1 Treatment of Postmenopausal Osteoporosis

[See Indications and Usage (1.1).]

The recommended regimen is:
• one 75 mg tablet orally, taken on two consecutive days for a total of two tablets each month or • one 150 mg tablet orally, taken once-a-month
2.2 Prevention of Postmenopausal Osteoporosis

[See Indications and Usage (1.1).]

The recommended regimen is:
• one 75 mg tablet orally, taken on two consecutive days for a total of two tablets each month may be considered or • one 150 mg tablet orally, taken once-a-month may be considered
2.6 Important Administration Instructions

Instruct patients to do the following:
• Take risedronate sodium tablets at least 30 minutes before the first food or drink of the day other than water, and before taking any oral medication or supplementation, including calcium, antacids, or vitamins to maximize absorption and clinical benefit, [ see Drug Interactions (7.1)]. Avoid the use of water with supplements, including mineral water, because they may have a higher concentration of calcium. • Swallow risedronate sodium tablets whole with a full glass of plain water (6 to 8 ounces). Avoid lying down for 30 minutes after taking the medication [ see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)]. Do not chew or suck the tablet because of a potential for oropharyngeal ulceration. • Do not eat or drink anything except plain water, or take other medications for at least 30 minutes after taking risedronate sodium tablets.
2.7 Recommendations for Calcium and Vitamin D Supplementation

Instruct patients to take supplemental calcium and vitamin D if their dietary intake is inadequate; and to take calcium supplements, antacids, magnesium-based supplements or laxatives, and iron preparations at a different time of the day as they interfere with the absorption of risedronate sodium tablets.

2.8 Administration Instructions for Missed Doses

Instruct patients about missing risedronate sodium tablet doses as follows:
• If one or both tablets of risedronate sodium 75 mg on two consecutive days per month are missed, and the next month’s scheduled doses are more than 7 days away: • If both tablets are missed, take one risedronate sodium 75 mg tablet in the morning after the day it is remembered and then the other tablet on the next consecutive morning. • If only one risedronate sodium 75 mg tablet is missed, take the missed tablet in the morning after the day it is remembered. • Return to taking their risedronate sodium 75 mg tablets on two consecutive days per month as originally scheduled. • Do not take more than two 75 mg tablets within 7 days. • If one or both tablets of risedronate sodium 75 mg on two consecutive days per month are missed, and the next month's scheduled doses are within 7 days: • Wait until their next month’s scheduled doses and then continue taking risedronate sodium 75 mg tablets on two consecutive days per month as originally scheduled. • If the dose of risedronate sodium 150 mg once-a-month is missed, and the next month’s scheduled dose is more than 7 days away: • Take the missed tablet in the morning after the day it is remembered and then return to taking their risedronate sodium 150 mg tablet once-a-month as originally scheduled. • Do not take more than one 150 mg tablet within 7 days. • If the dose of risedronate sodium 150 mg once-a-month is missed, and the next month's scheduled dose is within 7 days: • Wait until their next month’s scheduled dose and then continue taking risedronate sodium 150 mg tablet once-a-month as originally scheduled.
Haloperidol

Haloperidol

There is considerable variation from patient to patient in the amount of medication required for treatment. As with all antipsychotic drugs, dosage should be individualized according to the needs and response of each patient. Dosage adjustments, either upward or downward, should be carried out as rapidly as practicable to achieve optimum therapeutic control.

To determine the initial dosage, consideration should be given to the patient’s age, severity of illness, previous response to other antipsychotic drugs, and any concomitant medication or disease state. Children, debilitated or geriatric patients, as well as those with a history of adverse reactions to antipsychotic drugs, may require less haloperidol. The optimal response in such patients is usually obtained with more gradual dosage adjustments and at lower dosage levels, as recommended below.

Clinical experience suggests the following recommendations:

Oral Administration

Inital Dosage Range

Adults

Moderate Symptomatology - 0.5 mg to 2 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d.

Severe Symptomatology - 3 mg to 5 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d.

To achieve prompt control, higher doses may be required in some cases.

Geriatric or Debilitated Patients - 0.5 mg to 2 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d.

Chronic or Resistant Patients - 3 mg to 5 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d.

Patients who remain severely disturbed or inadequately controlled may require dosage adjustment. Daily dosages up to 100 mg may be necessary in some cases to achieve an optimal response. Infrequently haloperidol has been used in doses above 100 mg for severely resistant patients; however the limited clinical usage has not demonstrated the safety of prolonged administration of such doses.

Children

The following recommendations apply to children between the ages of 3 and 12 years (weight range 15 kg to 40 kg). Haloperidol is not intended for children under 3 years old. Therapy should begin at the lowest dose possible (0.5 mg per day). If required, the dose should be increased by an increment of 0.5 mg at 5 to 7 day intervals until the desired therapeutic effect is obtained. (See chart below.)

The total dose may be divided, to be given b.i.d. or t.i.d.

Psychotic Disorders - 0.05 mg/kg/day to 0.15 mg/kg/day

Nonpsychotic Behavior Disorders and Tourette's Disorder - 0.05 mg/kg/day to 0.075 mg/kg/day

Severely disturbed psychotic children may require higher doses. In severely disturbed, non-psychotic children or in hyperactive children with accompanying conduct disorders, who have failed to respond to psychotherapy or medications other than antipsychotics, it should be noted that since these behaviors may be short lived, short term administration of haloperidol may suffice. There is no evidence establishing a maximum effective dosage. There is little evidence that behavior improvement is further enhanced in dosages beyond 6 mg per day.

Maintenance Dosage

Upon achieving a satisfactory therapeutic response, dosage should then be gradually reduced to the lowest effective maintenance level.

Switchover Procedure

The oral form should supplant the injectable as soon as practicable. In the absence of bioavailability studies establishing bioequivalence between these two dosage forms the following guidelines for dosage are suggested. For an initial approximation of the total daily dose required, the parenteral dose administered in the preceding 24 hours may be used. Since this dose is only an initial estimate, it is recommended that careful monitoring of clinical signs and symptoms, including clinical efficacy, sedation, and adverse effects, be carried out periodically for the first several days following the initiation of switchover. In this way, dosage adjustments, either upward or downward, can be quickly accomplished. Depending on the patient’s clinical status, the first oral dose should be given within 12 to 24 hours following the last parenteral dose.
Furosemide

Furosemide

Edema

Therapy should be individualized according to patient response to gain maximal therapeutic response and to determine the minimal dose needed to maintain that response.

Adults

The usual initial dose of furosemide is 20 mg to 80 mg given as a single dose. Ordinarily a prompt diuresis ensues. If needed, the same dose can be administered 6 to 8 hours later or the dose may be increased. The dose may be raised by 20 mg to 40 mg and given not sooner than 6 to 8 hours after the previous dose until the desired diuretic effect has been obtained. The individually determined single dose should then be given once or twice daily (e.g., at 8 am and 2 pm). The dose of furosemide may be carefully titrated up to 600 mg/day in patients with clinically severe edematous states.

Edema may be most efficiently and safely mobilized by giving furosemide on 2 to 4 consecutive days each week.

When doses exceeding 80 mg/day are given for prolonged periods, careful clinical observation and laboratory monitoring are particularly advisable. (See PRECAUTIONS: Laboratory Tests.)

Geriatric Patients

In general, dose selection for the elderly patient should be cautious, usually starting at the low end of the dosing range (see PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).

Pediatric Patients

The usual initial dose of oral furosemide in pediatric patients is 2 mg/kg body weight, given as a single dose. If the diuretic response is not satisfactory after the initial dose, dosage may be increased by 1 or 2 mg/kg no sooner than 6 to 8 hours after the previous dose. Doses greater than 6 mg/kg body weight are not recommended. For maintenance therapy in pediatric patients, the dose should be adjusted to the minimum effective level.

Hypertension

Therapy should be individualized according to the patient's response to gain maximal therapeutic response and to determine the minimal dose needed to maintain the therapeutic response.

Adults

The usual initial dose of furosemide for hypertension is 80 mg, usually divided into 40 mg twice a day. Dosage should then be adjusted according to response. If response is not satisfactory, add other antihypertensive agents.

Changes in blood pressure must be carefully monitored when furosemide is used with other antihypertensive drugs, especially during initial therapy. To prevent excessive drop in blood pressure, the dosage of other agents should be reduced by at least 50 percent when furosemide is added to the regimen. As the blood pressure falls under the potentiating effect of furosemide, a further reduction in dosage or even discontinuation of other antihypertensive drugs may be necessary.

Geriatric Patients

In general, dose selection and dose adjustment for the elderly patient should be cautious, usually starting at the low end of the dosing range (see PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).
Doxepin Hydrochloride

Doxepin Hydrochloride

For most patients with illness of mild to moderate severity, a starting daily dose of 75 mg is recommended. Dosage may subsequently be increased or decreased at appropriate intervals and according to individual response. The usual optimum dose range is 75 mg/day to 150 mg/day.

In more severely ill patients higher doses may be required with subsequent gradual increase to 300 mg/day if necessary. Additional therapeutic effect is rarely to be obtained by exceeding a dose of 300 mg/day.

In patients with very mild symptomatology or emotional symptoms accompanying organic disease, lower doses may suffice. Some of these patients have been controlled on doses as low as 25 to 50 mg/day.

The total daily dosage of doxepin (as the hydrochloride) may be given on a divided or once a day dosage schedule. If the once a day schedule is employed, the maximum recommended dose is 150 mg/day. This dose may be given at bedtime. The 150 mg capsule strength is intended for maintenance therapy only and is not recommended for initiation of treatment.

Antianxiety effect is apparent before the antidepressant effect. Optimal antidepressant effect may not be evident for 2 to 3 weeks.
Flurbiprofen

Flurbiprofen

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of flurbiprofen and other treatment options before deciding to use flurbiprofen. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with flurbiprofen, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient’s needs.

For relief of the signs and symptoms of rheumatoid arthritis or osteoarthritis, the recommended starting dose of flurbiprofen is 200 mg to 300 mg per day, divided for administration two, three, or four times a day. The largest recommended single dose in a multiple-dose daily regimen is 100 mg.
Maxzide-25

Maxzide-25

The usual dose of MAXZIDE-25 MG is one or two tablets daily, given as a single dose, with appropriate monitoring of serum potassium (see WARNINGS). The usual dose of MAXZIDE is one tablet daily, with appropriate monitoring of serum potassium (see WARNINGS). There is no experience with the use of more than one MAXZIDE tablet daily or more than two MAXZIDE-25 MG tablets daily. Clinical experience with the administration of two MAXZIDE-25 MG tablets daily in divided doses (rather than as a single dose) suggests an increased risk of electrolyte imbalance and renal dysfunction.

Patients receiving 50 mg of hydrochlorothiazide who become hypokalemic may be transferred to MAXZIDE (triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide) directly. Patients receiving 25 mg hydrochlorothiazide who become hypokalemic may be transferred to MAXZIDE-25 MG (37.5 mg triamterene/25 mg hydrochlorothiazide) directly.

In patients requiring hydrochlorothiazide therapy and in whom hypokalemia cannot be risked therapy may be initiated with MAXZIDE-25 MG. If an optimal blood pressure response is not obtained with MAXZIDE-25 MG, the dose should be increased to two MAXZIDE-25 MG tablets daily as a single dose, or one MAXZIDE tablet daily. If blood pressure still is not controlled, another antihypertensive agent may be added (see PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions).

Clinical studies have shown that patients taking less bioavailable formulations of triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide in daily doses of 25 mg to 50 mg hydrochlorothiazide and 50 mg to 100 mg triamterene may be safely changed to one MAXZIDE-25 MG tablet daily. All patients changed from less bioavailable formulations to MAXZIDE should be monitored clinically and for serum potassium after the transfer.
Tolmetin Sodium

Tolmetin Sodium

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of tolmetin and other treatment options before deciding to use tolmetin sodium. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with tolmetin sodium, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

For the relief of rheumatoid arthritis or osteoarthritis, the recommended starting dose for adults is 400 mg three times daily (1200 mg daily), preferably including a dose on arising and a dose at bedtime. To achieve optimal therapeutic effect the dose should be adjusted according to the patient's response after 1 or 2 weeks. Control is usually achieved at doses of 600 mg to 1800 mg daily in divided doses (generally t.i.d.). Doses larger than 1800 mg/day have not been studied and are not recommended.

For the relief of juvenile rheumatoid arthritis, the recommended starting dose for pediatric patients (2 years and older) is 20 mg/kg/day in divided doses (t.i.d. or q.i.d.). When control has been achieved, the usual dose ranges from 15 to 30 mg/kg/day. Doses higher than 30 mg/kg/day have not been studied, and, therefore, are not recommended.

A therapeutic response to tolmetin sodium can be expected in a few days to a week. Progressive improvement can be anticipated during succeeding weeks of therapy. If gastrointestinal symptoms occur, tolmetin can be administered with antacids other than sodium bicarbonate. Tolmetin sodium bioavailability and pharmacokinetics are not significantly affected by acute or chronic administration of magnesium and aluminum hydroxides; however, bioavailability is affected by food or milk (see PRECAUTIONS: Drug-Food Interaction).
Indomethacin

Indomethacin

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of indomethacin and other treatment options before deciding to use indomethacin. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with indomethacin, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient’s needs.

Indomethacin is available as 25 mg and 50 mg capsules.

Adverse reactions appear to correlate with the size of the dose of indomethacin in most patients but not all. Therefore, every effort should be made to determine the smallest effective dosage for the individual patient.

Pediatric Use

Indomethacin ordinarily should not be prescribed for pediatric patients 14 years of age and under (see WARNINGS).

Adult Use

Dosage Recommendations for Active Stages of the Following:

1. Moderate to severe rheumatoid arthritis including acute flares of chronic disease; moderate to severe ankylosing spondylitis; and moderate to severe osteoarthritis.

Suggested Dosage: Indomethacin capsules 25 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d. If this is well tolerated, increase the daily dosage by 25 mg or by 50 mg, if required by continuing symptoms, at weekly intervals until a satisfactory response is obtained or until a total daily dose of 150 mg to 200 mg is reached. DOSES ABOVE THIS AMOUNT GENERALLY DO NOT INCREASE THE EFFECTIVENESS OF THE DRUG.

In patients who have persistent night pain and/or morning stiffness, the giving of a large portion, up to a maximum of 100 mg, of the total daily dose at bedtime may be helpful in affording relief. The total daily dose should not exceed 200 mg. In acute flares of chronic rheumatoid arthritis, it may be necessary to increase the dosage by 25 mg or, if required, by 50 mg daily.

If minor adverse effects develop as the dosage is increased, reduce the dosage rapidly to a tolerated dose and OBSERVE THE PATIENT CLOSELY.

If severe adverse reactions occur, STOP THE DRUG. After the acute phase of the disease is under control, an attempt to reduce the daily dose should be made repeatedly until the patient is receiving the smallest effective dose or the drug is discontinued.

Careful instructions to, and observations of, the individual patient are essential to the prevention of serious, irreversible, including fatal, adverse reactions.

As advancing years appear to increase the possibility of adverse reactions, indomethacin should be used with greater care in the elderly (see PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).

2. Acute painful shoulder (bursitis and/or tendinitis).

Initial Dose: 75 mg to 150 mg daily in 3 or 4 divided doses. The drug should be discontinued after the signs and symptoms of inflammation have been controlled for several days. The usual course of therapy is 7 to 14 days.

3. Acute gouty arthritis.

Suggested Dosage: Indomethacin capsules 50 mg t.i.d. until pain is tolerable. The dose should then be rapidly reduced to complete cessation of the drug. Definite relief of pain has been reported within 2 to 4 hours. Tenderness and heat usually subside in 24 to 36 hours, and swelling gradually disappears in 3 to 5 days.
Perphenazine And Amitri...

Perphenazine And Amitriptyline Hydrochloride

Since dosage for children has not been established, this product is not recommended for use in children.

The total daily dose of perphenazine and amitriptyline hydrochloride tablets should not exceed 16 mg of perphenazine and 200 mg of amitriptyline hydrochloride.

Initial Dosage

In psychoneurotic patients when anxiety and depression are of such a degree as to warrant combined therapy, one tablet of the 2 mg/25 mg or 4 mg/25 mg three or four times a day or one tablet of the 4 mg/50 mg combination twice a day is recommended.

In more severely ill patients with schizophrenia, the 4 mg/25 mg combination is recommended in an initial dose of two tablets three times a day. If necessary, a fourth dose may be given at bedtime.

In elderly patients and adolescents, and some other patients in whom anxiety tends to predominate, perphenazine and amitriptyline hydrochloride tablet 4 mg/10 mg combination may be administered three or four times a day initially, then adjusted as required for subsequent adequate therapy.

Maintenance Dosage

Depending on the condition being treated, therapeutic response may take from a few days to a few weeks or even longer. After a satisfactory response is noted, dosage should be reduced to the smallest amount necessary to obtain relief from the symptoms for which this product is being administered. A useful maintenance dosage is one tablet of the 2 mg/25 mg or 4 mg/25 mg combination two to four times a day or one tablet of the 4 mg/50 mg combination twice a day. Perphenazine and amitriptyline hydrochloride tablets, 2 mg/10 mg and 4 mg/10 mg can be used to increase flexibility in adjusting maintenance dosage to the lowest amount consistent with relief of symptoms. In some patients, maintenance dosage is required for many months.
Glipizide And Metformin...

Glipizide And Metformin Hydrochloride

General Considerations

Dosage of glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets must be individualized on the basis of both effectiveness and tolerance while not exceeding the maximum recommended daily dose of 20 mg glipizide/2000 mg metformin. Glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets should be given with meals and should be initiated at a low dose, with gradual dose escalation as described below, in order to avoid hypoglycemia (largely due to glipizide), reduce GI side effects (largely due to metformin), and permit determination of the minimum effective dose for adequate control of blood glucose for the individual patient.

With initial treatment and during dose titration, appropriate blood glucose monitoring should be used to determine the therapeutic response to glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets and to identify the minimum effective dose for the patient. Thereafter, HbA1c should be measured at intervals of approximately 3 months to assess the effectiveness of therapy. The therapeutic goal in all patients with type 2 diabetes is to decrease FPG, PPG, and HbA1c to normal or as near normal as possible. Ideally, the response to therapy should be evaluated using HbA1c, which is a better indicator of long-term glycemic control than FPG alone.

No studies have been performed specifically examining the safety and efficacy of switching to glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablet therapy in patients taking concomitant glipizide (or other sulfonylurea) plus metformin. Changes in glycemic control may occur in such patients, with either hyperglycemia or hypoglycemia possible. Any change in therapy of type 2 diabetes should be undertaken with care and appropriate monitoring.

When colesevelam is coadministered with glipizide extended-release tablets, maximum plasma concentration and total exposure to glipizide is reduced. Therefore, glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets should be administered at least 4 hours prior to colesevelam.

Glipizide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets in Patients with Inadequate Glycemic Control on Diet and Exercise Alone

For patients with type 2 diabetes whose hyperglycemia cannot be satisfactorily managed with diet and exercise alone, the recommended starting dose of glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets is 2.5 mg/250 mg once a day with a meal. For patients whose FPG is 280 to 320 mg/dL a starting dose of glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets is 2.5 mg/500 mg twice daily should be considered. The efficacy of glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets in patients whose FPG exceeds 320 mg/dL has not been established. Dosage increases to achieve adequate glycemic control should be made in increments of one tablet per day every 2 weeks up to maximum of 10 mg/1000 mg or 10 mg/2000 mg glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets per day given in divided doses. In clinical trials of glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets as initial therapy, there was no experience with total daily doses > 10 mg/2000 mg per day.

Glipizide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets in Patients with Inadequate Glycemic Control on a Sulfonylurea and/or Metformin

For patients not adequately controlled on either glipizide (or another sulfonylurea) or metformin alone, the recommended starting dose of glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets is 2.5 mg/500 mg or 5 mg/500 mg twice daily with the morning and evening meals. In order to avoid hypoglycemia, the starting dose of glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets should not exceed the daily doses of glipizide or metformin already being taken. The daily dose should be titrated in increments of no more than 5 mg/500 mg up to the minimum effective dose to achieve adequate control of blood glucose or to a maximum dose of 20 mg/2000 mg per day.

Patients previously treated with combination therapy of glipizide (or another sulfonylurea) plus metformin may be switched to glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets 2.5 mg/500 mg or 5 mg/500 mg; the starting dose should not exceed the daily dose of glipizide (or equivalent dose of another sulfonylurea) and metformin already being taken. The decision to switch to the nearest equivalent dose or to titrate should be based on clinical judgment. Patients should be monitored closely for signs and symptoms of hypoglycemia following such a switch and the dose of glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets should be titrated as described above to achieve adequate control of blood glucose.

Specific Patient Populations

Glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets are not recommended for use during pregnancy or for use in pediatric patients. The initial and maintenance dosing of glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets should be conservative in patients with advanced age, due to the potential for decreased renal function in this population. Any dosage adjustment requires a careful assessment of renal function. Generally, elderly, debilitated, and malnourished patients should not be titrated to the maximum dose of glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets to avoid the risk of hypoglycemia. Monitoring of renal function is necessary to aid in prevention of metformin-associated lactic acidosis, particularly in the elderly (see WARNINGS).
Tolbutamide

Tolbutamide

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of diabetes mellitus with tolbutamide tablets or any other hypoglycemic agent. In addition to the usual monitoring of urinary glucose, the patient's blood glucose must also be monitored periodically to determine the minimum effective dose for the patient; to detect primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication; and to detect secondary failure, i.e., loss of an adequate blood glucose lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness. Glycosylated hemoglobin levels may also be of value in monitoring the patient's response to therapy.

Short-term administration of tolbutamide tablets may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually controlled well on diet.

Usual Starting Dose

The usual starting dose is 1 to 2 grams daily. This may be increased or decreased, depending on individual patient response. Failure to follow an appropriate dosage regimen may precipitate hypoglycemia. Patients who do not adhere to their prescribed dietary regimens are more prone to exhibit unsatisfactory response to drug therapy.

Transfer from Other Hypoglycemic Therapy

Patients Receiving Other Antidiabetic Therapy

Transfer of patients from other oral antidiabetes regimens to tolbutamide tablets should be done conservatively. When transferring patients from oral hypoglycemic agents other than chlorpropamide to tolbutamide, no transition period and no initial or priming doses are necessary. When transferring patients from chlorpropamide, however, particular care should be exercised during the first 2 weeks because of the prolonged retention of chlorpropamide, in the body and the possibility that subsequent overlapping drug effects might provoke hypoglycemia.

Patients Receiving Insulin

Patients requiring 20 units or less of insulin daily may be placed directly on tolbutamide tablets and insulin abruptly discontinued. Patients whose insulin requirement is between 20 and 40 units daily may be started on therapy with tolbutamide tablets with a concurrent 30% to 50% reduction in insulin dose, with further daily reduction of the insulin when response to tolbutamide tablets is observed. In patients requiring more than 40 units of insulin daily, therapy with tolbutamide tablets may be initiated in conjunction with a 20% reduction in insulin dose the first day, with further careful reduction of insulin as response is observed. Occasionally, conversion to tolbutamide tablets in the hospital may be advisable in candidates who require more than 40 units of insulin daily. During this conversion period when both insulin and tolbutamide tablets are being used hypoglycemia may rarely occur. During insulin withdrawal, patients should test their urine for glucose and acetone at least 3 times daily and report results to their physician. The appearance of persistent acetonuria with glycosuria indicates that the patient is type I diabetic who requires insulin therapy.

Maximum Dose

Daily doses of greater than 3 grams are not recommended.

Usual Maintenance Dose

The maintenance dose is in the range of 0.25 to 3 grams daily. Maintenance doses above 2 grams are seldom required.

Dosage Interval

The total daily dose may be taken either in the morning or in divided doses through the day. While either schedule is usually effective, the divided dose system is preferred by some clinicians from the standpoint of digestive tolerance.

In elderly patients, debilitated or malnourished patients, and patients with impaired renal or hepatic function, the initial and maintenance dosing should be conservative to avoid hypoglycemic reactions (see PRECAUTIONS).
Loperamide Hydrochlorid...

Loperamide Hydrochloride

(1 capsule = 2 mg): Patients should receive appropriate fluid and electrolyte replacement as needed.

Acute Diarrhea

Adults

The recommended initial dose is 4 mg (two capsules) followed by 2 mg (one capsule) after each unformed stool. Daily dose should not exceed 16 mg (eight capsules). Clinical improvement is usually observed within 48 hours.

Children

In children 2 to 5 years of age (20 kg or less), the non-prescription liquid formulation of loperamide should be used; for ages 6 to 12, either loperamide hydrochloride capsules or the non-prescription liquid formulation of loperamide may be used. For children 2 to 12 years of age, the following schedule for capsules or liquid will usually fulfill initial dosage requirements:

Recommended First Day Dosage Schedule

Two to five years:

1 mg t.i.d. (3 mg daily dose)(13 to 20 kg)

Six to eight years:

2 mg b.i.d. (4 mg daily dose)(20 to 30 kg)

Eight to twelve years:

2 mg t.i.d. (6 mg daily dose)(greater than 30 kg)

Recommended Subsequent Daily Dosage

Following the first treatment day, it is recommended that subsequent loperamide hydrochloride doses (1 mg/10 kg body weight) be administered only after a loose stool. Total daily dosage should not exceed recommended dosages for the first day.

Chronic Diarrhea

Children

Although loperamide hydrochloride capsule has been studied in a limited number of children with chronic diarrhea; the therapeutic dose for the treatment of chronic diarrhea in a pediatric population has not been established.

Adults

The recommended initial dose is 4 mg (two capsules) followed by 2 mg (one capsule) after each unformed stool until diarrhea is controlled, after which the dosage of loperamide hydrochloride capsules should be reduced to meet individual requirements. When the optimal daily dosage has been established, this amount may then be administered as a single-dose or in divided doses.

The average daily maintenance dosage in clinical trials was 4 to 8 mg (two to four capsules). A dosage of 16 mg (eight capsules) was rarely exceeded. If clinical improvement is not observed after treatment with 16 mg per day for at least 10 days, symptoms are unlikely to be controlled by further administration. Loperamide hydrochloride capsule administration may be continued if diarrhea cannot be adequately controlled with diet or specific treatment.

Children Under 2 Years

The use of loperamide hydrochloride capsule in children under 2 years is not recommended. There have been rare reports of paralytic ileus associated with abdominal distention. Most of these reports occurred in the setting of acute dysentery, overdose, and with very young children less than 2 years of age.

Elderly

No formal pharmacokinetic studies were conducted in elderly subjects. However, there were no major differences reported in the drug disposition in elderly patients with diarrhea relative to young patients. No dosage adjustment is required for the elderly.

Renal Impairment

No pharmacokinetic data are available in patients with renal impairment. Since the metabolites and the unchanged drug are mainly excreted in the feces, no dosage adjustment is required for patients with renal impairment (see PRECAUTIONS).

Hepatic Impairment

Although no pharmacokinetic data are available in patients with hepatic impairment, loperamide hydrochloride capsule should be used with caution in such patients because of reduced first pass metabolism (see PRECAUTIONS).
Diazepam

Diazepam

Dosage should be individualized for maximum beneficial effect. While the usual daily dosages given below will meet the needs of most patients, there will be some who may require higher doses. In such cases dosage should be increased cautiously to avoid adverse effects.

ADULTS:

USUAL DAILY DOSE:

Management of Anxiety Disorders and Relief of Symptoms of Anxiety

Depending upon severity of symptoms—2 mg to 10 mg, 2 to 4 times daily

Symptomatic Relief in Acute Alcohol Withdrawal

10 mg, 3 or 4 times during the first 24 hours, reducing to 5 mg, 3 or 4 times daily as needed

Adjunctively for Relief of Skeletal Muscle Spasm

2 mg to 10 mg, 3 or 4 times daily

Adjunctively in Convulsive Disorders

2 mg to 10 mg, 2 to 4 times daily

Geriatric Patients, or in the presence of debilitating disease

2 mg to 2.5 mg, 1 or 2 times daily initially; increase gradually as needed and tolerated

PEDIATRIC PATIENTS:

Because of varied responses to CNS-acting drugs, initiate therapy with lowest dose and increase as required. Not for use in pediatric patients under 6 months

1 mg to 2.5 mg, 3 or 4 times daily initially; increase gradually as needed and tolerated
Natural 17 Anti-dandruf...

Natural 17 Anti-dandruff

The tablet blister pack has been designed to make oral contraceptive dosing as easy and as convenient as possible. The tablets are arranged in three rows of seven tablets each, with the days of the week appearing on the tablet blister above the first row of tablets.

Note: Each blister card has been preprinted with the days of the week, starting with Sunday, to facilitate a Sunday-Start regimen. Six different day label strips have been provided with the Detailed Patient & Brief Summary Patient Package Insert in order to accommodate a Day-1 Start regimen. If the patient is using the Day-1 Start regimen, she should place the self-adhesive day label strip that corresponds to her starting day over the preprinted days.

Important: The patient should be instructed to use an additional method of protection until after the first week of administration in the initial cycle when utilizing the Sunday-Start regimen.

The possibility of ovulation and conception prior to initiation of use should be considered.

Dosage and Administration for 21-Day Dosage Regimen

To achieve maximum contraceptive effectiveness, norethindrone acetate and ethinyl estradiol tablets, USP must be taken exactly as directed and at intervals not exceeding 24 hours. Norethindrone acetate and ethinyl estradiol tablets, USP provides the patient with a convenient tablet schedule of "3 weeks on - 1 week off." Two dosage regimens are described, one of which may be more convenient or suitable than the other for an individual patient. For the initial cycle of therapy, the patient begins her tablets according to the Day-1 Start or Sunday-Start regimen. With either regimen, the patient takes one tablet daily for 21 consecutive days followed by one week of no tablets.

A. Sunday-Start Regimen: The patient begins taking tablets from the top row on the first Sunday after menstrual flow begins. When menstrual flow begins on Sunday, the first tablet is taken on the same day. The last tablet in the blister pack will then be taken on a Saturday, followed by no tablets for a week (7 days). For all subsequent cycles, the patient then begins a new 21-tablet regimen on the eighth day, Sunday, after taking her last tablet. Following this regimen of 21 days on – 7 days off, the patient will start all subsequent cycles on a Sunday.

B. Day-1 Start Regimen: The first day of menstrual flow is Day 1. The patient places the self-adhesive day label strip that corresponds to her starting day over the preprinted days on the blister pack. She starts taking one tablet daily, beginning with the first tablet in the top row. The patient completes her 21-tablet regimen when she has taken the last tablet in the blister pack. She will then take no tablets for a week (7 days). For all subsequent cycles, the patient begins a new 21-tablet regimen on the eighth day after taking her last tablet, again starting with the first tablet in the top row after placing the appropriate day label strip over the preprinted days on the blister pack. Following this regimen of 21 days on – 7 days off, the patient will start all subsequent cycles on the same day of the week as the first course. Likewise, the interval of no tablets will always start on the same day of the week.

Tablets should be taken regularly with a meal or at bedtime. It should be stressed that efficacy of medication depends on strict adherence to the dosage schedule.

Special Notes on Administration

Menstruation usually begins two or three days, but may begin as late as the fourth or fifth day, after discontinuing medication. If spotting occurs while on the usual regimen of one tablet daily, the patient should continue medication without interruption.

If a patient forgets to take one or more tablets, the following is suggested:

One tablet is missed
take tablet as soon as remembered take next tablet at the regular time
Two consecutive tablets are missed (week 1 or week 2)
take two tablets as soon as remembered take two tablets the next day use another birth control method for seven days following the missed tablets
Two consecutive tablets are missed (week 3)

Sunday-Start Regimen:
take one tablet daily until Sunday discard remaining tablets start new pack of tablets immediately (Sunday) use another birth control method for seven days following the missed tablets
Day-1 Start Regimen:
discard remaining tablets start new pack of tablets that same day use another birth control method for seven days following the missed tablets
Three (or more) consecutive tablets are missed

Sunday-Start Regimen:
take one tablet daily until Sunday discard remaining tablets start new pack of tablets immediately (Sunday) use another birth control method for seven days following the missed tablets
Day-1 Start Regimen:
discard remaining tablets start new pack of tablets that same day use another birth control method for seven days following the missed tablets
The possibility of ovulation occurring increases with each successive day that scheduled tablets are missed. While there is little likelihood of ovulation occurring if only one tablet is missed, the possibility of spotting or bleeding is increased. This is particularly likely to occur if two or more consecutive tablets are missed.

In the rare case of bleeding which resembles menstruation, the patient should be advised to discontinue medication and then begin taking tablets from a new blister pack on the next Sunday or the first day (Day 1) depending on her regimen. Persistent bleeding which is not controlled by this method indicates the need for reexamination of the patient, at which time nonfunctional causes should be considered.

Use of Oral Contraceptives in the Event of a Missed Menstrual Period

1. If the patient has not adhered to the prescribed dosage regimen, the possibility of pregnancy should be considered after the first missed period and oral contraceptives should be withheld until pregnancy has been ruled out.

2. If the patient has adhered to the prescribed regimen and misses two consecutive periods, pregnancy should be ruled out before continuing the contraceptive regimen.

After several months on treatment, bleeding may be reduced to a point of virtual absence. This reduced flow may occur as a result of medication, in which event it is not indicative of pregnancy.
Nisoldipine

Nisoldipine

The dosage of nisoldipine extended-release tablets must be adjusted to each patient's needs. Therapy usually should be initiated with 20 mg orally once daily, then increased by 10 mg per week or longer intervals, to attain adequate control of blood pressure. Usual maintenance dosage is 20 to 40 mg once daily. Blood pressure response increases over the 10 to 60 mg daily dose range but adverse event rates also increase. Doses beyond 60 mg once daily are not recommended. Nisoldipine extended-release tablets have been used safely with diuretics, ACE inhibitors, and beta-blocking agents. Patients over age 65, or patients with impaired liver function are expected to develop higher plasma concentrations of nisoldipine. Their blood pressure should be monitored closely during any dosage adjustment. A starting dose not exceeding 10 mg daily is recommended in these patient groups. Nisoldipine extended-release tablets should be administered orally once daily. Administration with a high fat meal can lead to excessive peak drug concentration and should be avoided. Grapefruit products should be avoided before and after dosing. Nisoldipine is an extended release dosage form and tablets should be swallowed whole, not bitten, divided or crushed.
Loxapine

Loxapine

Loxapine capsules are administered, usually in divided doses, 2 to 4 times a day. Daily dosage (in terms of base equivalents) should be adjusted to the individual patient's needs as assessed by the severity of symptoms and previous history of response to antipsychotic drugs.

Oral Administration

Initial dosage of 10 mg twice daily is recommended, although in severely disturbed patients initial dosage up to a total of 50 mg daily may be desirable. Dosage should then be increased fairly rapidly over the first 7 to 10 days until there is effective control of symptoms of schizophrenia. The usual therapeutic and maintenance range is 60 mg to 100 mg daily. However, as with other drugs used to treat schizophrenia, some patients respond to lower dosage and others require higher dosage for optimal benefit. Daily dosage higher than 250 mg is not recommended.

Maintenance Therapy

For maintenance therapy, dosage should be reduced to the lowest level compatible with symptom control; many patients have been maintained satisfactorily at dosages in the range of 20 mg to 60 mg daily.
Methyclothiazide

Methyclothiazide

Methyclothiazide tablets are administered orally. Therapy should be individualized according to patient response. This therapy should be titrated to gain maximal therapeutic response as well as the minimal dose possible to maintain that therapeutic response.

For edematous conditions

The usual adult dose ranges from 2.5 mg to 10 mg once daily. Maximum effective single-dose is 10 mg; larger single doses do not accomplish greater diuresis, and are not recommended.

For the treatment of hypertension

The usual adult dose ranges from 2.5 mg to 5 mg once daily.

If control of blood pressure is not satisfactory after 8 to 12 weeks of therapy with 5 mg once daily, another antihypertensive drug should be added. Increasing the dosage of methyclothiazide tablets will usually not result in further lowering of blood pressure.

Methyclothiazide tablets may be either employed alone for mild to moderate hypertension or concurrently with other antihypertensive drugs in the management of more severe forms of hypertension. Combined therapy may provide adequate control of hypertension with lower dosage of the component drugs and fewer or less severe side effects.

When other antihypertensive agents are to be added to the regimen, this should be accomplished gradually. Ganglionic blocking agents should be given at only half the usual dose since their effect is potentiated by pretreatment with methyclothiazide tablets.
Methyldopa And Hydrochl...

Methyldopa And Hydrochlorothiazide

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED, AS DETERMINED BY TITRATION OF THE INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS (see boxed WARNING). Once the patient has been successfully titrated, methyldopa and hydrochlorothiazide tablets may be substituted if the previously determined titrated doses are the same as in the combination. The usual starting dosage is one 250 mg/15 mg tablet of methyldopa and hydrochlorothiazide two or three times a day or one 250 mg/25 mg tablet of methyldopa and hydrochlorothiazide two times a day. Alternatively, one 500 mg/30 mg tablet of methyldopa and hydrochlorothiazide or a 500 mg/50 mg tablet of methyldopa and hydrochlorothiazide once daily may be used. Hydrochlorothiazide doses greater than 50 mg daily should be avoided.

Hydrochlorothiazide can be given at doses of 12.5 mg to 50 mg per day when used alone. The usual daily dosage of methyldopa is 500 mg to 2 g. To minimize the sedation associated with methyldopa, start dosage increases in the evening. The maximum recommended daily dose of methyldopa is 3 g.

Occasionally tolerance to methyldopa may occur, usually between the second and third month of therapy. Additional separate doses of methyldopa or replacement of methyldopa and hydrochlorothiazide tablets with single entity agents is necessary until the new effective dose ratio is reestablished by titration.

If methyldopa and hydrochlorothiazide does not adequately control blood pressure, additional doses of other agents may be given. When methyldopa and hydrochlorothiazide is given with antihypertensives other than thiazides, the initial dosage of methyldopa should be limited to 500 mg daily in divided doses and the dose of these other agents may need to be adjusted to effect a smooth transition.

Since both components, methyldopa and hydrochlorothiazide, have a relatively short duration of action, withdrawal is followed by return of hypertension usually within 48 hours. This is not complicated by an overshoot of blood pressure.

Since methyldopa is largely excreted by the kidney, patients with impaired renal function may respond to smaller doses. Syncope in older patients may be related to an increased sensitivity and advanced arteriosclerotic vascular disease. This may be avoided by lower doses.
Prochlorperazine Maleat...

Prochlorperazine Maleate

(For children’s dosage and administration, see below.) Dosage should be increased more gradually in debilitated or emaciated patients.

Elderly Patients

In general, dosages in the lower range are sufficient for most elderly patients. Since they appear to be more susceptible to hypotension and neuromuscular reactions, such patients should be observed closely. Dosage should be tailored to the individual, response carefully monitored and dosage adjusted accordingly. Dosage should be increased more gradually in elderly patients.

1. To Control Severe Nausea and Vomiting

Adjust dosage to the response of the individual. Begin with the lowest recommended dosage.

Oral Dosage - Tablets

Usually one 5 mg or 10 mg tablet 3 or 4 times daily. Daily dosages above 40 mg should be used only in resistant cases.

2. In Adult Psychiatric Disorders

Adjust dosage to the response of the individual and according to the severity of the condition. Begin with the lowest recommended dose. Although response ordinarily is seen within a day or 2, longer treatment is usually required before maximal improvement is seen.

Oral Dosage

Non-Psychotic Anxiety

Usual dosage is 5 mg 3 or 4 times daily. Do not administer in doses of more than 20 mg per day or for longer than 12 weeks.

Psychotic Disorders including Schizophrenia

In relatively mild conditions, as seen in private psychiatric practice or in outpatient clinics, dosage is 5 mg or 10 mg 3 or 4 times daily.

In moderate to severe conditions, for hospitalized or adequately supervised patients, usual starting dosage is 10 mg 3 or 4 times daily. Increase dosage gradually until symptoms are controlled or side effects become bothersome. When dosage is increased by small increments every 2 or 3 days, side effects either do not occur or are easily controlled. Some patients respond satisfactorily on 50 mg to 75 mg daily.

In more severe disturbances, optimum dosage is usually 100 mg to 150 mg daily.
Midodrine Hydrochloride...

Midodrine Hydrochloride

The recommended dose of midodrine hydrochloride tablets is 10 mg, 3 times daily. Dosing should take place during the daytime hours when the patient needs to be upright, pursuing the activities of daily life. A suggested dosing schedule of approximately 4-hour intervals is as follows: shortly before or upon arising in the morning, midday, and late afternoon (not later than 6 P.M.). Doses may be given in 3-hour intervals, if required, to control symptoms, but not more frequently. Single doses as high as 20 mg have been given to patients, but severe and persistent systolic supine hypertension occurs at a high rate (about 45%) at this dose. In order to reduce the potential for supine hypertension during sleep, midodrine hydrochloride tablets should not be given after the evening meal or less than 4 hours before bedtime. Total daily doses greater than 30 mg have been tolerated by some patients, but their safety and usefulness have not been studied systematically or established. Because of the risk of supine hypertension, midodrine hydrochloride tablets should be continued only in patients who appear to attain symptomatic improvement during initial treatment.

The supine and standing blood pressure should be monitored regularly, and the administration of midodrine hydrochloride tablets should be stopped if supine blood pressure increases excessively.

Because desglymidodrine is excreted renally, dosing in patients with abnormal renal function should be cautious; although this has not been systematically studied, it is recommended that treatment of these patients be initiated using 2.5 mg doses.

Dosing in children has not been adequately studied.

Blood levels of midodrine and desglymidodrine were similar when comparing levels in patients 65 or older vs. younger than 65 and when comparing males vs. females, suggesting dose modifications for these groups are not necessary.
Doxycycline Hyclate

Doxycycline Hyclate

THE USUAL DOSAGE AND FREQUENCY OF ADMINISTRATION OF DOXYCYCLINE DIFFERS FROM THAT OF THE OTHER TETRACYCLINES. EXCEEDING THE RECOMMENDED DOSAGE MAY RESULT IN AN INCREASED INCIDENCE OF SIDE EFFECTS.

Adults

The usual dose of oral doxycycline is 200 mg on the first day of treatment (administered 100 mg every 12 hours) followed by a maintenance dose of 100 mg/day.

In the management of more severe infections (particularly chronic infections of the urinary tract), 100 mg every 12 hours is recommended.

For Children Above 8 Years of Age

The recommended dosage schedule for children weighing 100 pounds or less is 2 mg/lb of body weight divided into two doses on the first day of treatment, followed by 1 mg/lb of body weight given as a single daily dose or divided into two doses, on subsequent days. For more severe infections, up to 2 mg/lb of body weight may be used. For children over 100 lb the usual adult dose should be used.

The therapeutic antibacterial serum activity will usually persist for 24 hours following recommended dosage.

When used in streptococcal infections, therapy should be continued for 10 days.

Administration of adequate amounts of fluid along with capsule and tablet forms of drugs in the tetracycline class is recommended to wash down the drugs and reduce the risk of esophageal irritation and ulceration. (See ADVERSE REACTIONS.)

If gastric irritation occurs, it is recommended that doxycycline be given with food or milk. The absorption of doxycycline is not markedly influenced by simultaneous ingestion of food or milk.

Studies to date have indicated that administration of doxycycline at the usual recommended doses does not lead to excessive accumulation of doxycycline in patients with renal impairment.

Uncomplicated Gonococcal Infections in Adults (except anorectal infections in men)

100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for 7 days. As an alternate single visit dose, administer 300 mg stat followed in one hour by a second 300 mg dose. The dose may be administered with food, including milk or carbonated beverage, as required.

Uncomplicated Urethral, Endocervical, or Rectal Infection in Adults Caused by Chlamydia trachomatis

100 mg, by mouth twice a day for 7 days.

Nongonococcal Urethritis (NGU) Caused by C. trachomatis or U. urealyticum

100 mg by mouth, twice a day for 7 days.

Syphilis – Early

Patients who are allergic to penicillin should be treated with doxycycline 100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for 2 weeks.

Syphilis of More Than One Year’s Duration

Patients who are allergic to penicillin should be treated with doxycycline 100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for 4 weeks.

Acute Epididymo-orchitis Caused by N. gonorrhoeae

100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for at least 10 days.

Acute Epididymo-orchitis Caused by C. trachomatis

100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for at least 10 days.

For Prophylaxis of Malaria

For adults, the recommended dose is 100 mg daily. For children over 8 years of age, the recommended dose is 2 mg/kg given once daily up to the adult dose. Prophylaxis should begin 1 to 2 days before travel to the malarious area. Prophylaxis should be continued daily during travel in the malarious area and for 4 weeks after the traveler leaves the malarious area.

Inhalational Anthrax (post-exposure)

Adults

100 mg of doxycycline, by mouth, twice a day for 60 days.

Children

Weighing less than 100 lb (45 kg); 1 mg/lb (2.2 mg/kg) of body weight by mouth, twice a day for 60 days. Children weighing 100 lb or more should receive the adult dose.
Lorazepam

Lorazepam

Lorazepam tablets are administered orally. For optimal results, dose, frequency of administration, and duration of therapy should be individualized according to patient response. To facilitate this, 0.5 mg, 1 mg, and 2 mg tablets are available.

The usual range is 2 to 6 mg/day given in divided doses, the largest dose being taken before bedtime, but the daily dosage may vary from 1 to 10 mg/day.

For anxiety, most patients require an initial dose of 2 to 3 mg/day given b.i.d. or t.i.d.

For insomnia due to anxiety or transient situational stress, a single daily dose of 2 mg to 4 mg may be given, usually at bedtime.

For elderly or debilitated patients, an initial dosage of 1 to 2 mg/day in divided doses is recommended, to be adjusted as needed and tolerated.

The dosage of lorazepam tablets should be increased gradually when needed to help avoid adverse effects. When higher dosage is indicated, the evening dose should be increased before the daytime doses.
Timolol Maleate

Timolol Maleate

Hypertension

The usual initial dosage of timolol maleate is 10 mg twice a day, whether used alone or added to diuretic therapy. Dosage may be increased or decreased depending on heart rate and blood pressure response. The usual total maintenance dosage is 20 to 40 mg per day. Increases in dosage to a maximum of 60 mg per day divided into two doses may be necessary. There should be an interval of at least 7 days between increases in dosages.

Timolol maleate tablets may be used with a thiazide diuretic or with other antihypertensive agents. Patients should be observed carefully during initiation of such concomitant therapy.

Myocardial Infarction

The recommended dosage for long-term prophylactic use in patients who have survived the acute phase of a myocardial infarction is 10 mg given twice daily (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Migraine

The usual initial dosage of timolol maleate is 10 mg twice a day. During maintenance therapy the 20 mg daily dosage may be administered as a single dose. Total daily dosage may be increased to a maximum of 30 mg, given in divided doses, or decreased to 10 mg once per day, depending on clinical response and tolerability. If a satisfactory response is not obtained after 6 to 8 weeks use of the maximum daily dosage, therapy with timolol should be discontinued.
Hydroxyzine Hydrochlori...

Hydroxyzine Hydrochloride

For symptomatic relief of anxiety and tension associated with psychoneurosis and as an adjunct in organic disease states in which anxiety is manifested: Adults, 50 mg to 100 mg q.i.d.; children under 6 years, 50 mg daily in divided doses; children over 6 years, 50 mg to 100 mg daily in divided doses.

For use in the management of pruritus due to allergic conditions such as chronic urticaria and atopic and contact dermatoses and in histamine-mediated pruritus: adults, 25 mg t.i.d. or q.i.d.; children under 6 years, 50 mg daily in divided doses; children over 6 years, 50 mg to 100 mg daily in divided doses.

As a sedative when used as a premedication and following general anesthesia: 50 mg to 100 mg in adults and 0.6 mg/kg of body weight in children.

When treatment is initiated by the intramuscular route of administration, subsequent doses may be administered orally.

As with all potent medication, the dosage should be adjusted according to the patient's response to therapy.
Metolazone

Metolazone

Effective dosage of metolazone tablets should be individualized according to indication and patient response. A single daily dose is recommended. Therapy with metolazone tablets should be titrated to gain an initial therapeutic response and to determine the minimal dose possible to maintain the desired therapeutic response.

Usual Single Daily Dosage Schedules

Suitable initial dosages will usually fall in the ranges given.

Edema of cardiac failure:
Metolazone tablets 5 to 20 mg once daily.
Edema of renal disease:
Metolazone tablets 5 to 20 mg once daily.
Mild to moderate essential hypertension:
Metolazone tablets 2.5 to 5 mg once daily. New patients- If considered desirable to switch patients currently on Zaroxolyn ® tablets and other formulations of metolazone that share its slow and incomplete bioavailability to Mykrox ®, the dose should be determined by titration starting at one tablet (0.5 mg) once daily and increasing to two tablets (1 mg) once daily if needed.
Treatment of Edematous States

The time interval required for the initial dosage to produce an effect may vary. Diuresis and saluresis usually begin within one hour and persist for 24 hours or longer. When a desired therapeutic effect has been obtained, it may be advisable to reduce the dose if possible. The daily dose depends on the severity of the patient's condition, sodium intake, and responsiveness. A decision to change the daily dose should be based on the results of thorough clinical and laboratory evaluations. If antihypertensive drugs or diuretics are given concurrently with metolazone tablets, more careful dosage adjustment may be necessary. For patients who tend to experience paroxysmal nocturnal dyspnea, it may be advisable to employ a larger dose to ensure prolongation of diuresis and saluresis for a full 24-hour period.

Treatment of Hypertension

The time interval required for the initial dosage regimen to show effect may vary from three or four days to three to six weeks in the treatment of elevated blood pressure. Doses should be adjusted at appropriate intervals to achieve maximum therapeutic effect.
Sotalol Hydrochloride

Sotalol Hydrochloride

Dosing and Administration in Adults
• Therapy with sotalol hydrochloride tablets (AF) must be initiated (and, if necessary, titrated) in a setting that provides continuous electrocardiographic (ECG) monitoring and in the presence of personnel trained in the management of serious ventricular arrhythmias. Patients should continue to be monitored in this way for a minimum of 3 days on the maintenance dose. In addition, patients should not be discharged within 12 hours of electrical or pharmacological conversion to normal sinus rhythm. • The QT interval is used to determine patient eligibility for sotalol hydrochloride tablet (AF) treatment and for monitoring safety during treatment. The baseline QT interval must be ≤ 450 msec in order for a patient to be started on sotalol hydrochloride tablet (AF) therapy. During initiation and titration, the QT interval should be monitored 2 to 4 hours after each dose. If the QT interval prolongs to 500 msec or greater, the dose must be reduced or the drug discontinued. • The dose of sotalol hydrochloride tablets (AF) must be individualized according to calculated creatinine clearance. In patients with a creatinine clearance > 60 mL/min sotalol hydrochloride tablets (AF) are administered twice daily (BID) while in those with a creatinine clearance between 40 and 60 mL/min, the dose is administered once daily (QD). In patients with a creatinine clearance less than 40 mL/min sotalol hydrochloride tablets (AF) are contraindicated. The recommended initial dose of sotalol hydrochloride tablets (AF) is 80 mg and is initiated as shown in the dosing algorithm described below. The 80 mg dose can be titrated upward to 120 mg during initial hospitalization or after discharge on 80 mg in the event of recurrence, by rehospitalization and repeating the same steps used during the initiation of therapy (see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION: Upward Titration of Dose). • Patients with atrial fibrillation should be anticoagulated according to usual medical practice. Hypokalemia should be corrected before initiation of sotalol hydrochloride tablet (AF) therapy (see WARNINGS: Ventricular Arrhythmia). • Patients to be discharged on sotalol hydrochloride tablet (AF) therapy from an in-patient setting should have an adequate supply of sotalol hydrochloride tablets (AF), to allow uninterrupted therapy until the patient can fill a sotalol hydrochloride tablets (AF) prescription.
Initiation of Sotalol Hydrochloride Tablet (AF) Therapy

Step 1. Electrocardiographic assessment: Prior to administration of the first dose, the QT interval must be determined using an average of five beats. If the baseline QT is greater than 450 msec (JT ≥ 330 msec if QRS over 100 msec), sotalol hydrochloride tablets (AF) are contraindicated.

Step 2. Calculation of creatinine clearance: Prior to the administration of the first dose, the patient's creatinine clearance should be calculated using the following formula:

creatinine clearance (male) =

(140-age) × body weight in kg

72 × serum creatinine (mg/dL)

creatinine clearance (female) =

(140-age) × body weight in kg × 0.85

72 × serum creatinine (mg/dL)

When serum creatinine is given in µmol/L, divide the value by 88.4 (1 mg/dL = 88.4 µmol/L).

Step 3. Starting Dose: The starting dose of sotalol hydrochloride tablets (AF) is 80 mg twice daily (BID) if the creatinine clearance is > 60 mL/min, and 80 mg once daily (QD) if the creatinine clearance is 40 to 60 mL/min. If the creatinine clearance is < 40 mL/min sotalol hydrochloride tablets (AF) are contraindicated.

Step 4. Administer the appropriate daily dose of sotalol hydrochloride tablets (AF) and begin continuous ECG monitoring with QT interval measurements 2 to 4 hours after each dose.

Step 5. If the 80 mg dose level is tolerated and the QT interval remains < 500 msec after at least 3 days (after 5 or 6 doses if patient receiving QD dosing), the patient can be discharged. Alternatively, during hospitalization, the dose can be increased to 120 mg BID and the patient followed for 3 days on this dose (followed for 5 or 6 doses if patient receiving QD doses).

The steps described above are summarized in the following diagram:

Upward Titration of Dose

If the 80 mg dose level (given BID or QD depending upon the creatinine clearance) does not reduce the frequency of relapses of AFIB/AFL and is tolerated without excessive QT interval prolongation (i.e., ≥ 520 msec), the dose level may be increased to 120 mg (BID or QD depending upon the creatinine clearance). As proarrhythmic events can occur not only at initiation of therapy, but also with each upward dosage adjustment, Steps 2 through 5 used during initiation of sotalol hydrochloride tablets (AF) therapy should be followed when increasing the dose level. In the U.S. multicenter dose-response study, the 120 mg dose (BID or QD) was found to be the most effective in prolonging the time to ECG documented symptomatic recurrence of AFIB/AFL. If the 120 mg dose does not reduce the frequency of early relapse of AFIB/AFL and is tolerated without excessive QT interval prolongation (≥ 520 msec), an increase to 160 mg (BID or QD depending upon the creatinine clearance), can be considered. Steps 2 through 5 used during the initiation of therapy should be used again to introduce such an increase.

Maintenance of Sotalol Hydrochloride Tablet (AF) Therapy

Renal function and QT should be reevaluated regularly if medically warranted. If QT is 520 msec or greater (JT 430 msec or greater if QRS is > 100 msec), the dose of sotalol hydrochloride tablet (AF) therapy should be reduced and patients should be carefully monitored until QT returns to less than 520 msec. If the QT interval is ≥ 520 msec while on the lowest maintenance dose level (80 mg) the drug should be discontinued. If renal function deteriorates, reduce the daily dose in half by administering the drug once daily as described in Initiation of Sotalol Hydrochloride Tablet (AF) Therapy, Step 3.

Special Considerations

The maximum recommended dose in patients with a calculated creatinine clearance greater than 60 mL/min is 160 mg BID, doses greater than 160 mg BID have been associated with an increased incidence of Torsades de pointes and are not recommended.

A patient who misses a dose should NOT double the next dose. The next dose should be taken at the usual time.

Dosing and Administration in Children

As in adults the following precautionary measures should be considered when initiating sotalol treatment in children: initiation of treatment in the hospital after appropriate clinical assessment; individualized regimen as appropriate; gradual increase of doses if required; careful assessment of therapeutic response and tolerability; and frequent monitoring of the QTc interval and heart rate.

For Children Aged About 2 Years and Greater

For children aged about 2 years and greater, with normal renal function, doses normalized for body surface area are appropriate for both initial and incremental dosing. Since the Class III potency in children (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY) is not very different from that in adults, reaching plasma concentrations that occur within the adult dose range is an appropriate guide. From pediatric pharmacokinetic data the following is recommended.

For initiation of treatment, 30 mg/m2 three times a day (90 mg/m2 total daily dose) is approximately equivalent to the initial 160 mg total daily dose for adults. Subsequent titration to a maximum of 60 mg/m2 (approximately equivalent to the 360 mg total daily dose for adults) can then occur. Titration should be guided by clinical response, heart rate and QTc, with increased dosing being preferably carried out in-hospital. At least 36 hours should be allowed between dose increments to attain steady-state plasma concentrations of sotalol in patients with age-adjusted normal renal function.

For Children Aged About 2 Years or Younger

For children aged about 2 years or younger the above pediatric dosage should be reduced by a factor that depends heavily upon age, as shown in the following graph, age plotted on a logarithmic scale in months.

For a child aged 20 months, the dosing suggested for children with normal renal function aged 2 years or greater should be multiplied by about 0.97; the initial starting dose would be (30 × 0.97) = 29.1 mg/m2, administered 3 times daily. For a child aged one month, the starting dose should be multiplied by 0.68; the initial starting dose would be (30 × 0.68) = 20 mg/m2, administered 3 times daily. For a child aged about one week, the initial starting dose should be multiplied by 0.3; the starting dose would be (30 × 0.3) = 9 mg/m2. Similar calculations should be made for increased doses as titration proceeds. Since the half-life of sotalol decreases with decreasing age (below about 2 years), time to steady-state will also increase. Thus, in neonates the time to steady-state may be as long as a week or longer.

In all children, individualization of dosage is required. As in adults sotalol hydrochloride tablets (AF) should be used with particular caution in children if the QTc is greater than 500 msec on therapy and serious consideration should be given to reducing the dose or discontinuing therapy when QTc exceeds 550 msec.

The use of sotalol hydrochloride tablets (AF) in children with renal impairment has not been investigated. Sotalol elimination is predominantly via the kidney in the unchanged form. Use of sotalol hydrochloride tablets (AF) in any age group with decreased renal function should be at lower doses or at increased intervals between doses. Monitoring of heart rate and QTc is more important and it will take much longer to reach steady-state with any dose and/or frequency of administration.

Transfer to Sotalol Hydrochloride Tablets (AF) from Sotalol Hydrochloride Tablets

Patients with a history of symptomatic AFIB/AFL who are currently receiving sotalol hydrochloride tablets for the maintenance of normal sinus should be transferred to sotalol hydrochloride tablets (AF) because of the significant differences in labeling (i.e., patient package insert, dosing administration, and safety information).

Transfer to Sotalol Hydrochloride Tablets (AF) from Other Antiarrhythmic Agents

Before starting sotalol hydrochloride tablets (AF), previous antiarrhythmic therapy should generally be withdrawn under careful monitoring for a minimum of 2 to 3 plasma half-lives if the patient's clinical condition permits (see PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions). Treatment has been initiated in some patients receiving I.V. lidocaine without ill effect. After discontinuation of amiodarone, sotalol hydrochloride tablets (AF) should not be initiated until the QT interval is normalized (see WARNINGS).

Preparation of Extemporaneous Oral Solution

Sotalol Hydrochloride (AF) Syrup 5 mg/mL can be compounded using Simple Syrup containing 0.1% sodium benzoate (Syrup, NF) available from Humco Laboratories as follows:
1. Measure 120 mL of Simple Syrup. 2. Transfer the syrup to a 6-ounce amber plastic (polyethylene terephthalate [PET]) prescription bottle. NOTE: An oversized bottle is used to allow for a headspace, so that there will be more effective mixing during shaking of the bottle. 3. Add five (5) sotalol hydrochloride (AF) 120 mg tablets to the bottle. These tablets are added intact; it is not necessary to crush the tablets. NOTE: The addition of the tablets can also be done first. The tablets can also be crushed if preferred. If the tablets are crushed, care should be taken to transfer the entire quantity of tablet powder into the bottle containing the syrup. 4. Shake the bottle to wet the entire surface of the tablets. If the tablets have been crushed, shake the bottle until the endpoint is achieved. 5. Allow the tablets to hydrate for approximately 2 hours. 6. After at least 2 hours have elapsed, shake the bottle intermittently over the course of at least another 2 hours until the tablets are completely disintegrated. NOTE: The tablets can be allowed to hydrate overnight to simplify the disintegration process.
The endpoint is achieved when a dispersion of fine particles in the syrup is obtained.

This compounding procedure results in a solution containing 5 mg/mL of sotalol hydrochloride. The fine solid particles are the water-insoluble inactive ingredients of the tablets.

This extemporaneously prepared oral solution of sotalol hydrochloride (with suspended inactive particles) must be shaken well prior to administration. This is to ensure that the amount of inactive solid particles per dose remains constant throughout the duration of use.

Stability studies indicate that the suspension is stable when stored at 20° to 25°C/68° to 77°F [see USP Controlled Room Temperature] and ambient humidity for three (3) months.
Severe Cold And Flu Rel...

Severe Cold And Flu Relief

2.1 General Considerations

Patients should be placed on an appropriate lipid-lowering diet before receiving fenofibric acid delayed-release capsules, and should continue this diet during treatment. Fenofibric acid delayed-release capsules can be taken without regard to meals. Patients should be advised to swallow fenofibric acid delayed-release capsules whole. Do not open, crush, dissolve, or chew capsules. Serum lipids should be monitored periodically.

2.2 Severe Hypertriglyceridemia

The initial dose of fenofibric acid delayed-release capsules is 45 mg to 135 mg once daily. Dosage should be individualized according to patient response, and should be adjusted if necessary following repeat lipid determinations at 4 to 8 week intervals. The maximum dose is 135 mg once daily.

2.3 Primary Hypercholesterolemia or Mixed Dyslipidemia

The dose of fenofibric acid delayed-release capsules is 135 mg once daily.

2.4 Impaired Renal Function

Treatment with fenofibric acid delayed-release capsules should be initiated at a dose of 45 mg once daily in patients with mild to moderate renal impairment and should only be increased after evaluation of the effects on renal function and lipid levels at this dose. The use of fenofibric acid delayed-release capsules should be avoided in patients with severely impaired renal function [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.5 Geriatric Patients

Dose selection for the elderly should be made on the basis of renal function [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].
Thioridazine Hydrochlor...

Thioridazine Hydrochloride

Since thioridazine hydrochloride tablets are associated with a dose related prolongation of the QTc interval, which is a potentially life threatening event, its use should be reserved for schizophrenic patients who fail to respond adequately to treatment with other antipsychotic drugs. Dosage must be individualized and the smallest effective dosage should be determined for each patient (see INDICATIONS and WARNINGS).

Adults

The usual starting dose for adult schizophrenic patients is 50 mg to 100 mg three times a day, with a gradual increment to a maximum of 800 mg daily if necessary. Once effective control of symptoms has been achieved, the dosage may be reduced gradually to determine the minimum maintenance dose. The total daily dosage ranges from 200 mg to 800 mg, divided into two to four doses.

Pediatric Patients

For pediatric patients with schizophrenia who are unresponsive to other agents, the recommended initial dose is 0.5 mg/kg/day given in divided doses. Dosage may be increased gradually until optimum therapeutic effect is obtained or the maximum dose of 3 mg/kg/day has been reached.
Probenecid

Probenecid

Gout

Therapy with probenecid should not be started until an acute gouty attack has subsided. However, if an acute attack is precipitated during therapy, probenecid may be continued without changing the dosage, and full therapeutic dosage of colchicine, or other appropriate therapy, should be given to control the acute attack.

The recommended adult dosage is 250 mg (1/2 probenecid tablet), twice a day for one week, followed by 500 mg (1 tablet) twice a day thereafter.

Some degree of renal impairment may be present in patients with gout. A daily dosage of 1000 mg may be adequate. However, if necessary, the daily dosage may be increased by 500 mg increments every 4 weeks within tolerance (and usually not above 2000 mg per day) if symptoms of gouty arthritis are not controlled or the 24 hour uric acid excretion is not above 700 mg. As noted, probenecid may not be effective in chronic renal insufficiency particularly when the glomerular filtration rate is 30 mL/minute or less.

Gastric intolerance may be indicative of overdosage, and may be corrected by decreasing the dosage.

As uric acid tends to crystallize out of an acid urine, a liberal fluid intake is recommended, as well as sufficient sodium bicarbonate (3 to 7.5 g daily), or potassium citrate (7.5 g daily) to maintain an alkaline urine (see PRECAUTIONS).

Alkalization of the urine is recommended until the serum urate level returns to normal limits and tophaceous deposits disappear, i.e., during the period when urinary excretion of uric acid is at a high level. Thereafter, alkalization of the urine and the usual restriction of purine-producing foods may be somewhat relaxed.

Probenecid should be continued at the dosage that will maintain normal serum urate levels. When acute attacks have been absent for 6 months or more and serum urate levels remain within normal limits, the daily dosage may be decreased by 500 mg every 6 months. The maintenance dosage should not be reduced to the point where serum urate levels tend to rise.

Probenecid and Penicillin Therapy (General)

Adults

The recommended dosage is 2000 mg (4 tablets of probenecid) daily in divided doses. This dosage should be reduced in older patients in whom renal impairment may be present.

Children

2–14 years of age:

Initial dose: 25 mg/kg body weight (or 0.7 g/square meter body surface).

Maintenance Dose: 40 mg/kg body weight (or 1.2 g/square meter body surface) per day, divided into 4 doses.

For children weighing more than 50 kg (110 lb) the adult dosage is recommended.

Probenecid is contraindicated in children under 2 years of age.

The PSP excretion test may be used to determine the effectiveness of probenecid in retarding penicillin excretion and maintaining therapeutic levels. The renal clearance of PSP is reduced to about one-fifth the normal rate when dosage of probenecid is adequate.

Penicillin Therapy (Gonorrhea)*

In uncomplicated gonococcal infections in men and women (urethral, cervical, rectal), 1 g of probenecid should be given orally with 4.8 million units of aqueous procaine penicillin G1 (given IM), or 3 g of amoxicillin2 (given orally), or 3.5 g of ampicillin2 (given orally).

For further guidance, see CDC recommendations for definition of regimens of choice, alternative regimens, treatment of hypersensitive patients, and other aspects of therapy.

*Recommended by the Center for Disease Control, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Public Health Service (Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report Supplement, Volume 34, Number 4S, October 18, 1985).
1 See package circulars of manufacturers for detailed information about CONTRAINDICATIONS, WARNINGS, PRECAUTIONS, and ADVERSE REACTIONS.
Famciclovir

Famciclovir

Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets are an extended-release product intended for once-a-day oral administration. Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets should be swallowed whole and should not be crushed or chewed.

2.1 Mania

Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets are administered orally. The recommended initial dose is 25 mg/kg/day given once daily. The dose should be increased as rapidly as possible to achieve the lowest therapeutic dose which produces the desired clinical effect or the desired range of plasma concentrations. In a placebo-controlled clinical trial of acute mania or mixed type, patients were dosed to a clinical response with a trough plasma concentration between 85 and 125 mcg/mL. The maximum recommended dosage is 60 mg/kg/day.

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to guide a clinician in the longer term management of a patient who improves during divalproex sodium extended-release tablet treatment of an acute manic episode. While it is generally agreed that pharmacological treatment beyond an acute response in mania is desirable, both for maintenance of the initial response and for prevention of new manic episodes, there are no data to support the benefits of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets in such longer-term treatment (i.e., beyond 3 weeks).

2.2 Epilepsy

Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets are administered orally, and must be swallowed whole. As divalproex sodium extended-release tablets dosage is titrated upward, concentrations of clonazepam, diazepam, ethosuximide, lamotrigine, tolbutamide, phenobarbital, carbamazepine, and/or phenytoin may be affected [see Drug Interactions (7.2)].

Complex Partial Seizures

For adults and children 10 years of age or older.

Monotherapy (Initial Therapy)

Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets have not been systematically studied as initial therapy. Patients should initiate therapy at 10 to 15 mg/kg/day. The dosage should be increased by 5 to 10 mg/kg/week to achieve optimal clinical response. Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 60 mg/kg/day. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50 to 100 mcg/mL). No recommendation regarding the safety of valproate for use at doses above 60 mg/kg/day can be made.

The probability of thrombocytopenia increases significantly at total trough valproate plasma concentrations above 110 mcg/mL in females and 135 mcg/mL in males. The benefit of improved seizure control with higher doses should be weighed against the possibility of a greater incidence of adverse reactions.

Conversion to Monotherapy

Patients should initiate therapy at 10 to 15 mg/kg/day. The dosage should be increased by 5 to 10 mg/kg/week to achieve optimal clinical response. Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 60 mg/kg/day. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50 to 100 mcg/mL). No recommendation regarding the safety of valproate for use at doses above 60 mg/kg/day can be made.

Concomitant antiepilepsy drug (AED) dosage can ordinarily be reduced by approximately 25% every 2 weeks. This reduction may be started at initiation of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets therapy, or delayed by 1 to 2 weeks if there is a concern that seizures are likely to occur with a reduction. The speed and duration of withdrawal of the concomitant AED can be highly variable, and patients should be monitored closely during this period for increased seizure frequency.

Adjunctive Therapy

Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets may be added to the patient's regimen at a dosage of 10 to 15 mg/kg/day. The dosage may be increased by 5 to 10 mg/kg/week to achieve optimal clinical response. Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 60 mg/kg/day. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50 to 100 mcg/mL). No recommendation regarding the safety of valproate for use at doses above 60 mg/kg/day can be made.

In a study of adjunctive therapy for complex partial seizures in which patients were receiving either carbamazepine or phenytoin in addition to valproate, no adjustment of carbamazepine or phenytoin dosage was needed [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. However, since valproate may interact with these or other concurrently administered AEDs as well as other drugs, periodic plasma concentration determinations of concomitant AEDs are recommended during the early course of therapy [see Drug Interactions (7)].

Simple and Complex Absence Seizures

The recommended initial dose is 15 mg/kg/day, increasing at one week intervals by 5 to 10 mg/kg/day until seizures are controlled or side effects preclude further increases. The maximum recommended dosage is 60 mg/kg/day.

A good correlation has not been established between daily dose, serum concentrations, and therapeutic effect. However, therapeutic valproate serum concentration for most patients with absence seizures is considered to range from 50 to 100 mcg/mL. Some patients may be controlled with lower or higher serum concentrations [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

As divalproex sodium extended-release tablets dosage is titrated upward, blood concentrations of phenobarbital and/or phenytoin may be affected [see Drug Interactions (7.2)].

Antiepilepsy drugs should not be abruptly discontinued in patients in whom the drug is administered to prevent major seizures because of the strong possibility of precipitating status epilepticus with attendant hypoxia and threat to life.

2.3 Migraine

Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets are indicated for prophylaxis of migraine headaches in adults.

The recommended starting dose is 500 mg once daily for one week, thereafter increasing to 1000 mg once daily. Although doses other than 1000 mg once daily of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets have not been evaluated in patients with migraine, the effective dose range of divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets in these patients is 500 to 1000 mg/day. As with other valproate products, doses of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets should be individualized and dose adjustment may be necessary. If a patient requires smaller dose adjustments than that available with divalproex sodium extended-release tablets, divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets should be used instead.

2.4 Conversion from Divalproex Sodium Delayed-release Tablets to Divalproex Sodium Extended-release Tablets

In adult patients and pediatric patients 10 years of age or older with epilepsy previously receiving divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets, divalproex sodium extended-release tablets should be administered once daily using a dose 8% to 20% higher than the total daily dose of divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets (Table 1). For patients whose divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets total daily dose cannot be directly converted to divalproex sodium extended-release tablets, consideration may be given at the clinician’s discretion to increase the patient’s divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets total daily dose to the next higher dosage before converting to the appropriate total daily dose of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets.
Table 1. Dose Conversion * These total daily doses of divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets cannot be directly converted to an 8% to 20% higher total daily dose of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets because the required dosing strengths of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets are not available. Consideration may be given at the clinician’s discretion to increase the patient’s divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets total daily dose to the next higher dosage before converting to the appropriate total daily dose of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets.
Divalproex Sodium Delayed-release Tablets Total Daily Dose (mg)

Divalproex Sodium Extended-release Tablets (mg)

500* to 625

750

750* to 875

1000

1000* to 1125

1250

1250 to 1375

1500

1500 to 1625

1750

1750

2000

1875 to 2000

2250

2125 to 2250

2500

2375

2750

2500 to 2750

3000

2875

3250

3000 to 3125

3500

There is insufficient data to allow a conversion factor recommendation for patients with divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets doses above 3125 mg/day. Plasma valproate Cmin concentrations for divalproex sodium extended-release tablets on average are equivalent to divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets, but may vary across patients after conversion. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50 to 100 mcg/mL) [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.2)].

2.5 General Dosing Advice

Dosing in Elderly Patients

Due to a decrease in unbound clearance of valproate and possibly a greater sensitivity to somnolence in the elderly, the starting dose should be reduced in these patients. Starting doses in the elderly lower than 250 mg can only be achieved by the use of divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets. Dosage should be increased more slowly and with regular monitoring for fluid and nutritional intake, dehydration, somnolence, and other adverse reactions. Dose reductions or discontinuation of valproate should be considered in patients with decreased food or fluid intake and in patients with excessive somnolence. The ultimate therapeutic dose should be achieved on the basis of both tolerability and clinical response [see Warnings and Precautions (5.14), Use in Specific Populations (8.5) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Dose-Related Adverse Reactions

The frequency of adverse effects (particularly elevated liver enzymes and thrombocytopenia) may be dose-related. The probability of thrombocytopenia appears to increase significantly at total valproate concentrations of ≥ 110 mcg/mL (females) or ≥ 135 mcg/mL (males) [see Warnings and Precautions (5.8)]. The benefit of improved therapeutic effect with higher doses should be weighed against the possibility of a greater incidence of adverse reactions.

G.I. Irritation

Patients who experience G.I. irritation may benefit from administration of the drug with food or by slowly building up the dose from an initial low level.

Compliance

Patients should be informed to take divalproex sodium extended-release tablets every day as prescribed. If a dose is missed it should be taken as soon as possible, unless it is almost time for the next dose. If a dose is skipped, the patient should not double the next dose.
Selegiline Hydrochlorid...

Selegiline Hydrochloride

Selegiline hydrochloride tablets are intended for administration to Parkinsonian patients receiving levodopa/carbidopa therapy who demonstrate a deteriorating response to this treatment. The recommended regimen for the administration of selegiline hydrochloride tablets are 10 mg per day administered as divided doses of 5 mg each taken at breakfast and lunch. There is no evidence that additional benefit will be obtained from the administration of higher doses. Moreover, higher doses should ordinarily be avoided because of the increased risk of side effects.

After 2 to 3 days of selegiline hydrochloride tablet treatment, an attempt may be made to reduce the dose of levodopa/carbidopa. A reduction of 10% to 30% was achieved with the typical participant in the domestic placebo-controlled trials who was assigned to selegiline hydrochloride tablet treatment. Further reductions of levodopa/carbidopa may be possible during continued selegiline hydrochloride tablet therapy.
Gammaplex

Gammaplex

2.1 Required Laboratory Testing Prior to Initiation and During Therapy

Prior to initiating treatment with clozapine tablets, a baseline ANC must be obtained. The baseline ANC must be at least 1500/μL for the general population, and at least 1000/μL for patients with documented Benign Ethnic Neutropenia (BEN). To continue treatment, the ANC must be monitored regularly [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].

2.2 Dosing Information

The starting dose is 12.5 mg once daily or twice daily. The total daily dose can be increased in increments of 25 mg to 50 mg per day, if well-tolerated, to achieve a target dose of 300 mg to 450 mg per day (administered in divided doses) by the end of 2 weeks. Subsequently, the dose can be increased once weekly or twice weekly, in increments of up to 100 mg. The maximum dose is 900 mg per day. To minimize the risk of orthostatic hypotension, bradycardia, and syncope, it is necessary to use this low starting dose, gradual titration schedule, and divided dosages [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].

Clozapine tablets can be taken with or without food [see Pharmacokinetics (12.3)].

2.3 Maintenance Treatment

Generally, patients responding to clozapine tablets should continue maintenance treatment on their effective dose beyond the acute episode.

2.4 Discontinuation of Treatment

Method of treatment discontinuation will vary depending on the patient’s last ANC:
• See Tables 2 or 3 for appropriate ANC monitoring based on the level of neutropenia if abrupt treatment discontinuation is necessary because of moderate to severe neutropenia. • Reduce the dose gradually over a period of 1 to 2 weeks if termination of clozapine therapy is planned and there is no evidence of moderate to severe neutropenia. • For abrupt clozapine discontinuation for a reason unrelated to neutropenia, continuation of the existing ANC monitoring is recommended for general population patients until their ANC is ≥ 1500/μL and for BEN patients until their ANC is ≥ 1000/μL or above their baseline. • Additional ANC monitoring is required for any patient reporting onset of fever (temperature of 38.5°C or 101.3°F, or greater) during the 2 weeks after discontinuation [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)]. • Monitor all patients carefully for the recurrence of psychotic symptoms and symptoms related to cholinergic rebound such as profuse sweating, headache, nausea, vomiting, and diarrhea.
2.5 Re-Initiation of Treatment

When restarting clozapine tablets in patients who have discontinued clozapine tablets (i.e., 2 days or more since the last dose), re-initiate with 12.5 mg once daily or twice daily. This is necessary to minimize the risk of hypotension, bradycardia, and syncope [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)]. If that dose is well-tolerated, the dose may be increased to the previously therapeutic dose more quickly than recommended for initial treatment.

2.6 Dosage Adjustments with Concomitant Use of CYP1A2, CYP2D6, CYP3A4 Inhibitors or CYP1A2, CYP3A4 Inducers

Dose adjustments may be necessary in patients with concomitant use of: strong CYP1A2 inhibitors (e.g., fluvoxamine, ciprofloxacin, or enoxacin); moderate or weak CYP1A2 inhibitors (e.g., oral contraceptives, or caffeine); CYP2D6 or CYP3A4 inhibitors (e.g., cimetidine, escitalopram, erythromycin, paroxetine, bupropion, fluoxetine, quinidine, duloxetine, terbinafine, or sertraline); CYP3A4 inducers (e.g., phenytoin, carbamazepine, St. John’s wort, and rifampin); or CYP1A2 inducers (e.g., tobacco smoking) (Table 1) [see Drug Interactions (7)].
Table 1. Dose Adjustment in Patients Taking Concomitant Medications
Co-medications

Scenarios

Initiating clozapine tablets while taking a co-medication

Adding a co-medication while taking clozapine tablets

Discontinuing a co-medication while continuing clozapine tablets

Strong CYP1A2 Inhibitors

Use one-third of the clozapine tablet dose.

Increase clozapine tablet dose based on clinical response.

Moderate or Weak

CYP1A2 Inhibitors

Monitor for adverse reactions. Consider reducing the clozapine tablet dose if necessary.

Monitor for lack of effectiveness. Consider increasing clozapine tablet dose if necessary.

CYP2D6 or CYP3A4 Inhibitors

Strong CYP3A4 Inducers

Concomitant use is not recommended. However, if the inducer is necessary, it may be necessary to increase the clozapine tablet dose. Monitor for decreased effectiveness.

Reduce clozapine tablet dose based on clinical response.

Moderate or weak CYP1A2 or CYP3A4 Inducers

Monitor for decreased effectiveness. Consider increasing the clozapine tablet dose if necessary.

Monitor for adverse reactions. Consider reducing the clozapine tablet dose if necessary.

2.7 Renal or Hepatic Impairment or CYP2D6 Poor Metabolizers

It may be necessary to reduce the clozapine tablet dose in patients with significant renal or hepatic impairment, or in CYP2D6 poor metabolizers [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6, 8.7)].
Diltiazem Hydrochloride...

Diltiazem Hydrochloride

Exertional Angina Pectoris Due to Atherosclerotic Coronary Artery Disease or Angina Pectoris at Rest Due to Coronary Artery Spasm

Dosage must be adjusted to each patient's needs. Starting with 30 mg 4 times daily, before meals and at bedtime, dosage should be increased gradually (given in divided doses 3 or 4 times daily) at one-to two-day intervals until optimum response is obtained. Although individual patients may respond to any dosage level, the average optimum dosage range appears to be 180 to 360 mg/day. There are no available data concerning dosage requirements in patients with impaired renal or hepatic function. If the drug must be used in such patients, titration should be carried out with particular caution.

Concomitant Use with Other Cardiovascular Agents

1. Sublingual NTG may be taken as required to abort acute anginal attacks during diltiazem therapy.

2. Prophylactic Nitrate Therapy: Diltiazem may be safely coadministered with short- and long-acting nitrates, but there have been no controlled studies to evaluate the antianginal effectiveness of this combination.

3. Beta-blockers (See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS.)

Swallow diltiazem hydrochloride tablets whole, do not split, crush, or chew the tablets.
Penicillin G Potassium

Penicillin G Potassium

Carvedilol tablets should be taken with food to slow the rate of absorption and reduce the incidence of orthostatic effects.

2.2 Left Ventricular Dysfunction Following Myocardial Infarction

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED AND MONITORED DURING UP-TITRATION. Treatment with carvedilol tablets may be started as an inpatient or outpatient and should be started after the patient is hemodynamically stable and fluid retention has been minimized. It is recommended that carvedilol tablets be started at 6.25 mg twice daily and increased after 3 to 10 days, based on tolerability, to 12.5 mg twice daily, then again to the target dose of 25 mg twice daily. A lower starting dose may be used (3.125 mg twice daily) and/or the rate of up-titration may be slowed if clinically indicated (e.g., due to low blood pressure or heart rate, or fluid retention). Patients should be maintained on lower doses if higher doses are not tolerated. The recommended dosing regimen need not be altered in patients who received treatment with an IV or oral β-blocker during the acute phase of the myocardial infarction.

2.3 Hypertension

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED. The recommended starting dose of carvedilol tablets is 6.25 mg twice daily. If this dose is tolerated, using standing systolic pressure measured about one hour after dosing as a guide, the dose should be maintained for 7 to 14 days, and then increased to 12.5 mg twice daily if needed, based on trough blood pressure, again using standing systolic pressure one hour after dosing as a guide for tolerance. This dose should also be maintained for 7 to 14 days and can then be adjusted upward to 25 mg twice daily if tolerated and needed. The full antihypertensive effect of carvedilol is seen within 7 to 14 days. Total daily dose should not exceed 50 mg.

Concomitant administration with a diuretic can be expected to produce additive effects and exaggerate the orthostatic component of carvedilol action.

2.4 Hepatic Impairment

Carvedilol tablets should not be given to patients with severe hepatic impairment [see Contraindications (4)].
Diltiazem Hydrochloride...

Diltiazem Hydrochloride

Dosages must be adjusted to each patient's needs, starting with 60 to 120 mg twice daily. Maximum antihypertensive effect is usually observed by 14 days of chronic therapy; therefore, dosage adjustments should be scheduled accordingly. Although individual patients may respond to lower doses, the usual optimum dosage range in clinical trials was 240 to 360 mg/day.

Diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules have an additive antihypertensive effect when used with other antihypertensive agents. Therefore, the dosage of diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules or the concomitant antihypertensives may need to be adjusted when adding one to the other. See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS regarding use with beta-blockers.
Levonorgestrel And Ethi...

Levonorgestrel And Ethinyl Estradiol

To achieve maximum contraceptive effectiveness, levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets must be taken exactly as directed and at intervals not exceeding 24 hours. The dosage of levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablet is one light yellow tablet daily for 21 consecutive days, followed by one brown inert tablet daily for 7 consecutive days, according to the prescribed schedule. It is recommended that levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets be taken at the same time each day.

During The First Cycle Of Use

The possibility of ovulation and conception prior to initiation of medication should be considered. The patient should be instructed to begin taking levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets on either the first Sunday after the onset of menstruation (Sunday Start) or on Day 1 of menstruation (Day 1 Start).

Sunday start

The patient is instructed to begin taking levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets on the first Sunday after the onset of menstruation. If menstruation begins on a Sunday, the first tablet (light yellow) is taken that day. One light yellow tablet should be taken daily for 21 consecutive days, followed by one brown inert tablet daily for 7 consecutive days. Withdrawal bleeding should usually occur within 3 days following discontinuation of light yellow tablets and may not have finished before the next pack is started. During the first cycle, contraceptive reliance should not be placed on levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets until a light yellow tablet has been taken daily for 7 consecutive days, and a nonhormonal back-up method of birth control should be used during those 7 days.

Day 1 start

During the first cycle of medication, the patient is instructed to begin taking levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets during the first 24 hours of her period (day one of her menstrual cycle). One light yellow tablet should be taken daily for 21 consecutive days, followed by one brown inert tablet daily for 7 consecutive days. Withdrawal bleeding should usually occur within 3 days following discontinuation of light yellow tablets and may not have finished before the next pack is started. If medication is begun on day one of the menstrual cycle, no back-up contraception is necessary. If levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets are started later than day one of the first menstrual cycle or postpartum, contraceptive reliance should not be placed on levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets until after the first 7 consecutive days of administration, and a nonhormonal back-up method of birth control should be used during those 7 days.

After the first cycle of use

The patient begins her next and all subsequent courses of tablets on the day after taking her last brown tablet. She should follow the same dosing schedule: 21 days on light yellow tablets followed by 7 days on brown tablets. If in any cycle the patient starts tablets later than the proper day, she should protect herself against pregnancy by using a nonhormonal back-up method of birth control until she has taken a light yellow tablet daily for 7 consecutive days.

Switching from another hormonal method of contraception

When the patient is switching from a 21-day regimen of tablets, she should wait 7 days after her last tablet before she starts levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets. She will probably experience withdrawal bleeding during that week. She should be sure that no more than 7 days pass after her previous 21-day regimen. When the patient is switching from a 28-day regimen of tablets, she should start her first pack of levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets on the day after her last tablet. She should not wait any days between packs. The patient may switch any day from a progestin-only pill and should begin levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets the next day. If switching from an implant or injection, the patient should start levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets on the day of implant removal or, if using an injection, the day the next injection would be due. In switching from a progestin-only pill, injection, or implant, the patient should be advised to use a nonhormonal back-up method of birth control for the first 7 days of tablet-taking.

If spotting or breakthrough bleeding occurs

If spotting or breakthrough bleeding occur, the patient is instructed to continue on the same regimen. This type of bleeding is usually transient and without significance; however, if the bleeding is persistent or prolonged, the patient is advised to consult her physician.

Risk of pregnancy if tablets are missed

While there is little likelihood of ovulation occurring if only one or two light yellow tablets are missed, the possibility of ovulation increases with each successive day that scheduled light yellow tablets are missed. Although the occurrence of pregnancy is unlikely if levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets is taken according to directions, if withdrawal bleeding does not occur, the possibility of pregnancy must be considered. If the patient has not adhered to the prescribed schedule (missed one or more tablets or started taking them on a day later than she should have), the probability of pregnancy should be considered at the time of the first missed period and appropriate diagnostic measures taken. If the patient has adhered to the prescribed regimen and misses two consecutive periods, pregnancy should be ruled out.

The risk of pregnancy increases with each active (light yellow) tablet missed. For additional patient instructions regarding missed tablets, see the WHAT TO DO IF YOU MISS PILLS section in the DETAILED PATIENT LABELING below.

Use after pregnancy, abortion or miscarriage

Levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets may be initiated no earlier than day 28 postpartum in the nonlactating mother or after a second trimester abortion due to the increased risk for thromboembolism (see CONTRAINDICATIONS, WARNINGS, and PRECAUTIONS concerning thromboembolic disease). The patient should be advised to use a non-hormonal back-up method for the first 7 days of tablet taking.

Levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets may be initiated immediately after a first trimester abortion or miscarriage. If the patient starts levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets immediately, back-up contraception is not needed.
Risperidone

Risperidone

Table 1. Recommended Daily Dosage by Indication
Initial Dose

Titration (Increments)

Target Dose

Effective Dose Range

Schizophrenia-adults (2.1)

2 mg

1 mg to 2 mg

4 mg to 8 mg

4 mg to 16 mg

Schizophrenia- adolescents (2.1)

0.5 mg

0.5 mg to 1 mg

3 mg

1 mg to 6 mg

Bipolar mania- adults (2.2)

2 mg to 3 mg

1 mg

1 mg to 6 mg

1 mg to 6 mg

Bipolar mania- children and adolescents (2.2)

0.5 mg

0.5 mg to 1 mg

1 mg to 2.5 mg

1 mg to 6 mg

Irritability in autistic disorder (2.3)

0.25 mg can increase to 0.5 mg by Day 4: (body weight less than 20 kg)

0.5 mg can increase to 1 mg by Day 4: (body weight greater than or equal to 20 kg)

After Day 4, at intervals of > 2 weeks: 0.25 mg (body weight less than 20 kg)

0.5 mg (body weight greater than or equal to 20 kg)

0.5 mg: (body weight less than 20 kg)

1 mg: (body weight greater than or equal to 20 kg)

0.5 mg to 3 mg

Severe Renal and Hepatic Impairment in Adults: Use a lower starting dose of 0.5 mg twice daily. May increase to dosages above 1.5 mg twice daily at intervals of one week or longer.

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Usual Initial Dose

Risperidone orally disintegrating tablets can be administered once or twice daily. Initial dosing is 2 mg per day. May increase the dose at intervals of 24 hours or greater, in increments of 1 mg to 2 mg per day, as tolerated, to a recommended dose of 4 mg to 8 mg per day. In some patients, slower titration may be appropriate. Efficacy has been demonstrated in a range of 4 mg to 16 mg per day. However, doses above 6 mg per day for twice daily dosing were not demonstrated to be more efficacious than lower doses, were associated with more extrapyramidal symptoms and other adverse effects and are generally not recommended. In a single study supporting once daily dosing, the efficacy results were generally stronger for 8 mg than for 4 mg. The safety of doses above 16 mg per day has not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Adolescents

The initial dose is 0.5 mg once daily, administered as a single daily dose in the morning or evening. The dose may be adjusted at intervals of 24 hours or greater, in increments of 0.5 mg or 1 mg per day, as tolerated, to a recommended dose of 3 mg per day. Although efficacy has been demonstrated in studies of adolescent patients with schizophrenia at doses between 1 mg to 6 mg per day, no additional benefit was observed above 3 mg per day and higher doses were associated with more adverse events. Doses higher than 6 mg per day have not been studied.

Patients experiencing persistent somnolence may benefit from administering half the daily dose twice daily.

Maintenance Therapy

While it is unknown how long a patient with schizophrenia should remain on risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, the effectiveness of risperidone 2 mg per day to 8 mg per day at delaying relapse was demonstrated in a controlled trial in adult patients who had been clinically stable for at least 4 weeks and were then followed for a period of 1 to 2 years [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. Both adult and adolescent patients who respond acutely should generally be maintained on their effective dose beyond the acute episode. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Reinitiation of Treatment in Patients Previously Discontinued

Although there are no data to specifically address reinitiation of treatment, it is recommended that after an interval off risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, the initial titration schedule should be followed.

Switching From Other Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching schizophrenic patients from other antipsychotics to risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, or treating patients with concomitant antipsychotics.

2.2 Bipolar Mania

Usual Dose

Adults

The initial dose range is 2 mg to 3 mg per day. The dose may be adjusted at intervals of 24 hours or greater, in increments of 1 mg per day. The effective dose range is 1 mg to 6 mg per day, as studied in the short-term, placebo-controlled trials. In these trials, short-term (3 week) anti-manic efficacy was demonstrated in a flexible dosage range of 1 mg to 6 mg per day [see Clinical Studies (14.2, 14.3)]. Risperidone orally disintegrating tablet doses higher than 6 mg per day were not studied.

Pediatrics

The initial dose is 0.5 mg once daily, administered as a single daily dose in the morning or evening. The dose may be adjusted at intervals of 24 hours or greater, in increments of 0.5 mg or 1 mg per day, as tolerated, to the recommended target dose of 1 mg to 2.5 mg per day. Although efficacy has been demonstrated in studies of pediatric patients with bipolar mania at doses between 0.5 mg and 6 mg per day, no additional benefit was observed above 2.5 mg per day and higher doses were associated with more adverse events. Doses higher than 6 mg per day have not been studied.

Patients experiencing persistent somnolence may benefit from administering half the daily dose twice daily.

Maintenance Therapy

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to guide a clinician in the longer term management of a patient who improves during treatment of an acute manic episode with risperidone orally disintegrating tablets. While it is generally agreed that pharmacological treatment beyond an acute response in mania is desirable, both for maintenance of the initial response and for prevention of new manic episodes, there are no systematically obtained data to support the use of risperidone orally disintegrating tablets in such longer term treatment (i.e., beyond 3 weeks). The physician who elects to use risperidone orally disintegrating tablets for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term risks and benefits of the drug for the individual patient.

2.3 Irritability Associated with Autistic Disorder – Pediatrics (Children and Adolescents)

The dosage of risperidone orally disintegrating tablets should be individualized according to the response and tolerability of the patient. The total daily dose of risperidone orally disintegrating tablets can be administered once daily or half the total daily dose can be administered twice daily.

For patients with body weight less than 20 kg, initiate dosing at 0.25 mg per day. For patients with body weight greater than or equal to 20 kg, initiate dosing at 0.5 mg per day. After a minimum of 4 days, the dose may be increased to the recommended dose of 0.5 mg per day for patients less than 20 kg and 1 mg per day for patients greater than or equal to 20 kg. Maintain this dose for a minimum of 14 days. In patients not achieving sufficient clinical response, the dose may be increased at intervals of 2 weeks or greater, in increments of 0.25 mg per day for patients less than 20 kg, or increments of 0.5 mg per day for patients greater than or equal to 20 kg. The effective dose range is 0.5 mg to 3 mg per day. No dosing data are available for children who weigh less than 15 kg.

Once sufficient clinical response has been achieved and maintained, consider gradually lowering the dose to achieve the optimal balance of efficacy and safety. The physician who elects to use risperidone orally disintegrating tablets for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term risks and benefits of the drug for the individual patient.

Patients experiencing persistent somnolence may benefit from a once-daily dose administered at bedtime or administering half the daily dose twice daily or a reduction of the dose.

2.4 Dosing in Patients with Severe Renal or Hepatic Impairment

For patients with severe renal impairment (CLcr < 30 mL/min) or hepatic impairment (10 to 15 points on Child Pugh System), the initial starting dose is 0.5 mg twice daily. The dose may be increased in increments of 0.5 mg or less, administered twice daily. For doses above 1.5 mg twice daily, increase in intervals of one week or greater [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6 and 8.7)].

2.5 Dose Adjustments for Specific Drug Interactions

When risperidone orally disintegrating tablets are coadministered with enzyme inducers (e.g., carbamazepine), the dose of risperidone should be increased up to double the patient’s usual dose. It may be necessary to decrease the risperidone dose when enzyme inducers such as carbamazepine are discontinued [see Drug Interactions (7.1)]. Similar effect may be expected with coadministration of risperidone orally disintegrating tablets with other enzyme inducers (e.g., phenytoin, rifampin and phenobarbital).

When fluoxetine or paroxetine is coadministered with risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, the dose of risperidone should be reduced. The risperidone dose should not exceed 8 mg per day in adults when coadministered with these drugs. When initiating therapy, risperidone orally disintegrating tablets should be titrated slowly. It may be necessary to increase the risperidone dose when enzyme inhibitors such as fluoxetine or paroxetine are discontinued [see Drug Interactions (7.1)].

2.7 Directions for Use of Risperidone Orally Disintegrating Tablets

Tablet Accessing

Risperidone Orally Disintegrating Tablets 0.25 mg, 0.5 mg, 1 mg, 2 mg, 3 mg and 4 mg

Risperidone orally disintegrating tablets 0.5 mg is supplied in bottles containing 28 and 30 tablets, and risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, 0.25 mg, 1 mg, 2 mg, 3 mg and 4 mg are supplied in bottles containing 28 tablets.

Tablet Administration

Using dry hands, remove the tablet from the bottle and immediately place the entire risperidone orally disintegrating tablet on the tongue. The risperidone orally disintegrating tablet should be consumed immediately. Risperidone orally disintegrating tablets disintegrate in the mouth within seconds and can be swallowed subsequently with or without liquid. Patients should not attempt to split or to chew the tablet.
Propranolol Hydrochlori...

Propranolol Hydrochloride

General

Propranolol hydrochloride extended-release capsules provide propranolol hydrochloride in a sustained-release capsule for administration once daily. If patients are switched from propranolol hydrochloride tablets to propranolol hydrochloride extended-release capsules, care should be taken to assure that the desired therapeutic effect is maintained. Propranolol hydrochloride extended-release capsules should not be considered a simple mg-for-mg substitute for propranolol hydrochloride tablets. Propranolol hydrochloride extended-release capsules have different kinetics and produces lower blood levels. Retitration may be necessary, especially to maintain effectiveness at the end of the 24-hour dosing interval.

Hypertension

The usual initial dosage is 80 mg propranolol hydrochloride extended-release capsules once daily, whether used alone or added to a diuretic. The dosage may be increased to 120 mg once daily or higher until adequate blood pressure control is achieved. The usual maintenance dosage is 120 mg to 160 mg once daily. In some instances a dosage of 640 mg may be required. The time needed for full hypertensive response to a given dosage is variable and may range from a few days to several weeks.

Angina Pectoris

Starting with 80 mg propranolol hydrochloride extended-release capsules once daily, dosage should be gradually increased at 3- to 7-day intervals until optimal response is obtained. Although individual patients may respond at any dosage level, the average optimal dosage appears to be 160 mg once daily. In angina pectoris, the value and safety of dosage exceeding 320 mg per day have not been established.

If treatment is to be discontinued, reduce dosage gradually over a period of a few weeks (see WARNINGS).

Migraine

The initial oral dose is 80 mg propranolol hydrochloride extended-release capsules once daily. The usual effective dose range is 160 mg to 240 mg once daily. The dosage may be increased gradually to achieve optimal migraine prophylaxis. If a satisfactory response is not obtained within 4 to 6 weeks after reaching the maximal dose, propranolol hydrochloride extended-release capsules therapy should be discontinued. It may be advisable to withdraw the drug gradually over a period of several weeks depending on the patient's age, comorbidity and dose of propranolol hydrochloride extended-release capsules.

Hypertrophic Subaortic Stenosis

The usual dosage is 80 mg to 160 mg propranolol hydrochloride extended-release capsules once daily.
Testosterone Cypionate

Testosterone Cypionate

For most patients, the recommended dose of cyclobenzaprine hydrochloride tablets is 5 mg three times a day. Based on individual patient response, the dose may be increased to 10 mg three times a day. Use of cyclobenzaprine hydrochloride tablets for periods longer than 2 or 3 weeks is not recommended (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE).

Less frequent dosing should be considered for hepatically impaired or elderly patients (see PRECAUTIONS: Impaired Hepatic Function, and Use in the Elderly).
Flulaval Quadrivalent 2...

Flulaval Quadrivalent 20132014

2.1 General Considerations

Telmisartan is an effective treatment of hypertension in once daily doses of 20 mg to 80 mg while amlodipine is effective in doses of 2.5 mg to 10 mg.

Dosage must be individualized and may be increased after at least 2 weeks. Most of the antihypertensive effect is apparent within 2 weeks and maximal reduction is generally attained after 4 weeks. The maximum recommended dose of telmisartan and amlodipine tablets is 80 mg/10 mg once daily.

The adverse reactions of telmisartan are uncommon and independent of dose; those of amlodipine are a mixture of dose-dependent phenomena (primarily peripheral edema) and dose-independent phenomena, the former much more common than the latter [see Adverse Reactions (6.1)].

Telmisartan and amlodipine tablets may be taken with or without food.

2.2 Replacement Therapy

Patients receiving amlodipine and telmisartan from separate tablets may instead receive telmisartan and amlodipine tablets containing the same component doses once daily. When substituting for individual components, increase the dose of telmisartan and amlodipine tablets if blood pressure control has not been satisfactory.

2.3 Add-on Therapy for Patients with Hypertension Not Adequately Controlled on Antihypertensive Monotherapy

Telmisartan and amlodipine tablets may be used to provide additional blood pressure lowering for patients not adequately controlled with amlodipine (or another dihydropyridine calcium channel blocker) alone or with telmisartan (or another angiotensin receptor blocker) alone.

Patients treated with 10 mg amlodipine who experience any dose-limiting adverse reactions such as edema, may be switched to telmisartan and amlodipine 40 mg/5 mg tablets once daily, reducing the dose of amlodipine without reducing the overall expected antihypertensive response [see Adverse Reactions (6.1)].

2.4 Initial Therapy

A patient may be initiated on telmisartan and amlodipine tablets if it is unlikely that control of blood pressure would be achieved with a single agent. The usual starting dose of telmisartan and amlodipine tablets is 40 mg/5 mg once daily. Patients requiring larger blood pressure reductions may be started on telmisartan and amlodipine tablets 80 mg/5 mg once daily.

Initial therapy with telmisartan and amlodipine tablets is not recommended in patients ≥ 75 years old or with hepatic impairment [see Dosage and Administration (2.5), Warnings and Precautions (5.4), and Use in Specific Populations (8.5, 8.6)].

Correct imbalances of intravascular volume- or salt-depletion, before initiating therapy with telmisartan and amlodipine tablets [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

2.5 Dosing in Specific Populations

Renal Impairment

No initial dosage adjustment is required for patients with mild or moderate renal impairment. Titrate slowly in patients with severe renal impairment.

Hepatic Impairment

In most patients, initiate amlodipine therapy at 2.5 mg. Titrate slowly in patients with hepatic impairment.

Patients 75 Years of Age and Older

In most patients, initiate amlodipine therapy at 2.5 mg. Titrate slowly in patients 75 years of age and older.
Phenytoin

Phenytoin

When given in equal doses, phenytoin chewable tablets yield higher plasma levels than Dilantin Kapseals®*. For this reason serum concentrations should be monitored and care should be taken when switching a patient from the sodium salt to the free acid form.

Dilantin Kapseals®* is formulated with the sodium salt of phenytoin. The free acid form of phenytoin is used in Dilantin-125® Suspensions* and phenytoin chewable tablets. Because there is approximately an 8% increase in drug content with the free acid form over that of the sodium salt, dosage adjustments and serum level monitoring may be necessary when switching from a product formulated with the free acid to a product formulated with the sodium salt and vice versa.

General

Not for once-a-day dosing.

Dosage should be individualized to provide maximum benefit. In some cases, serum blood level determinations may be necessary for optimal dosage adjustments - the clinically effective serum level is usually 10 to 20 mcg/mL. With recommended dosage, a period of 7 to 10 days may be required to achieve steady-state blood levels with phenytoin and changes in dosage (increase or decrease) should not be carried out at intervals shorter than 7 to 10 days.

Phenytoin chewable tablets can be either chewed thoroughly before being swallowed or swallowed whole.

Adult Dosage

Patients who have received no previous treatment may be started on two phenytoin chewable tablets 3 times daily, and the dose is then adjusted to suit individual requirements. For most adults, the satisfactory maintenance dosage will be six to eight phenytoin chewable tablets daily; an increase to twelve phenytoin chewable tablets daily may be made, if necessary.

Dosing in Special Populations

Patients with Renal or Hepatic Disease

Due to an increased fraction of unbound phenytoin in patients with renal or hepatic disease, or in those with hypoalbuminemia, the interpretation of total phenytoin plasma concentrations should be made with caution. Unbound phenytoin concentrations may be more useful in these patient populations.

Elderly Patients

Phenytoin clearance is decreased slightly in elderly patients and lower or less frequent dosing may be required.

Pediatric

Initially, 5 mg/kg/day in two or three equally divided doses, with subsequent dosage individualized to a maximum 300 mg daily. A recommended daily maintenance dosage is usually 4 to 8 mg/kg. Children over 6 years old and adolescents may require the minimum adult dose (300 mg/day). If the daily dosage cannot be divided equally, the larger dose should be given before retiring.
Ducord

Ducord

2.1 Healing of Erosive or Ulcerative GERD in Adults

The recommended adult oral dose is one rabeprazole sodium 20 mg delayed-release tablet to be taken once daily for 4 to 8 weeks [see Indications and Usage (1.1)]. For those patients who have not healed after 8 weeks of treatment, an additional 8 week course of rabeprazole sodium delayed-release tablets may be considered.

2.2 Maintenance of Healing of Erosive or Ulcerative GERD in Adults

The recommended adult oral dose is one rabeprazole sodium 20 mg delayed-release tablet to be taken once daily. Controlled studies do not extend beyond 12 months [see Indications and Usage (1.2)].

2.3 Treatment of Symptomatic GERD in Adults

The recommended adult oral dose is one rabeprazole sodium 20 mg delayed-release tablet to be taken once daily for 4 weeks [see Indications and Usage (1.3)]. If symptoms do not resolve completely after 4 weeks, an additional course of treatment may be considered.

2.4 Healing of Duodenal Ulcers in Adults

The recommended adult oral dose is one rabeprazole sodium 20 mg delayed-release tablet to be taken once daily after the morning meal for a period up to 4 weeks [see Indications and Usage (1.5)]. Most patients with duodenal ulcer heal within 4 weeks. A few patients may require additional therapy to achieve healing.

2.5 Helicobacter pylori Eradication to Reduce the Risk of Duodenal Ulcer Recurrence in Adults
Table 1: Three Drug Regimen* All three medications should be taken twice daily with the morning and evening meals. * It is important that patients comply with the full 7-day regimen [see Clinical Studies (14.5)].
Rabeprazole Sodium Delayed-Release Tablet

20 mg

Twice Daily for 7 Days

Amoxicillin

1000 mg

Twice Daily for 7 Days

Clarithromycin

500 mg

Twice Daily for 7 Days

2.6 Treatment of Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions, Including Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome in Adults

The dosage of rabeprazole sodium delayed-release tablets in patients with pathologic hypersecretory conditions varies with the individual patient. The recommended adult oral starting dose is 60 mg once daily. Doses should be adjusted to individual patient needs and should continue for as long as clinically indicated. Some patients may require divided doses. Doses up to 100 mg QD and 60 mg BID have been administered. Some patients with Zollinger-Ellison syndrome have been treated continuously with rabeprazole sodium delayed-release tablets for up to one year.

2.7 Short-Term Treatment of Symptomatic GERD in Adolescent Patients 12 Years of Age and Older

The recommended oral dose for adolescents 12 years of age and older is one 20 mg delayed-release tablet once daily for up to 8 weeks [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4) and Clinical Studies (14.7)].

2.9 Elderly, Renal, and Hepatic Impaired Patients

No dosage adjustment is necessary in elderly patients, in patients with renal disease, or in patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment. Administration of rabeprazole to patients with mild to moderate liver impairment resulted in increased exposure and decreased elimination. Due to the lack of clinical data on rabeprazole in patients with severe hepatic impairment, caution should be exercised in those patients.

2.10 Administration Recommendations
Table 2: Administration Recommendations
Formulation

Population

Instructions

Delayed-Release Tablet

Adults and adolescents 12 years of age and older

Swallow tablets whole. Do not chew, crush, or split tablets.

Tablets can be taken with or without food.
Famotidine

Famotidine

Duodenal Ulcer

Acute Therapy

The recommended adult oral dosage for active duodenal ulcer is 40 mg once a day at bedtime. Most patients heal within 4 weeks; there is rarely reason to use famotidine tablets at full dosage for longer than 6 to 8 weeks. A regimen of 20 mg b.i.d. is also effective.

Maintenance Therapy

The recommended adult oral dose is 20 mg once a day at bedtime.

Benign Gastric Ulcer

Acute Therapy

The recommended adult oral dosage for active benign gastric ulcer is 40 mg once a day at bedtime.

Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)

The recommended oral dosage for treatment of adult patients with symptoms of GERD is 20 mg b.i.d. for up to 6 weeks. The recommended oral dosage for the treatment of adult patients with esophagitis including erosions and ulcerations and accompanying symptoms due to GERD is 20 mg or 40 mg b.i.d. for up to 12 weeks (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY IN ADULTS: Clinical Studies).

Dosage for Pediatric Patients < 1 Year of Age

Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)

(See PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Patients < 1 Year of Age.)

The studies described in PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Patients < 1 Year of Age suggest the following starting doses in pediatric patients < 1 year of age: Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD) - 0.5 mg/kg/dose of famotidine oral suspension for the treatment of GERD for up to 8 weeks once daily in patients < 3 months of age and 0.5 mg/kg/dose twice daily in patients 3 months to < 1 year of age. Patients should also be receiving conservative measures (e.g., thickened feedings). The use of intravenous famotidine in pediatric patients < 1 year of age with GERD has not been adequately studied.

Dosage for Pediatric Patients 1 to 16 Years of Age

(See PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Patients 1 to 16 Years of Age.)

The studies described in PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Patients 1 to 16 Years of Age suggest the following starting doses in pediatric patients 1 to 16 years of age:
Peptic ulcer - 0.5 mg/kg/day p.o. at bedtime or divided b.i.d. up to 40 mg/day. Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease with or without esophagitis including erosions and ulcerations - 1 mg/kg/day p.o. divided b.i.d. up to 40 mg b.i.d.
While published uncontrolled studies suggest effectiveness of famotidine in the treatment of gastroesophageal reflux disease and peptic ulcer, data in pediatric patients are insufficient to establish percent response with dose and duration of therapy. Therefore, treatment duration (initially based on adult duration recommendations) and dose should be individualized based on clinical response and/or pH determination (gastric or esophageal) and endoscopy. Published uncontrolled clinical studies in pediatric patients 1 to 16 years of age have employed doses up to 1 mg/kg/day for peptic ulcer and 2 mg/kg/day for GERD with or without esophagitis including erosions and ulcerations.

Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions (e.g., Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome, Multiple Endocrine Adenomas)

The dosage of famotidine tablets in patients with pathological hypersecretory conditions varies with the individual patient. The recommended adult oral starting dose for pathological hypersecretory conditions is 20 mg q6h. In some patients, a higher starting dose may be required. Doses should be adjusted to individual patient needs and should continue as long as clinically indicated. Doses up to 160 mg q6h have been administered to some adult patients with severe Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome.

Concomitant Use of Antacids

Antacids may be given concomitantly if needed.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Moderate or Severe Renal Insufficiency

In adult patients with moderate (creatinine clearance < 50 mL/min) or severe (creatinine clearance < 10 mL/min) renal insufficiency, the elimination half-life of famotidine is increased. For patients with severe renal insufficiency, it may exceed 20 hours, reaching approximately 24 hours in anuric patients. Since CNS adverse effects have been reported in patients with moderate and severe renal insufficiency, to avoid excess accumulation of the drug in patients with moderate or severe renal insufficiency, the dose of famotidine tablets may be reduced to half the dose or the dosing interval may be prolonged to 36 to 48 hours as indicated by the patient's clinical response.

Based on the comparison of pharmacokinetic parameters for famotidine tablets in adults and pediatric patients, dosage adjustment in pediatric patients with moderate or severe renal insufficiency should be considered.

HOW SUPPLIED

Famotidine Tablets, USP are available containing either 20 mg or 40 mg of famotidine, USP.

The 20 mg tablets are yellow film-coated, round, unscored tablets debossed with M over F1 on one side of the tablet and blank on the other side. They are available as follows:

NDC 0378-3020-01bottles of 100 tablets

NDC 0378-3020-05bottles of 500 tablets

The 40 mg tablets are green film-coated, round, unscored tablets debossed with M over F2 on one side of the tablet and blank on the other side. They are available as follows:

NDC 0378-3040-01bottles of 100 tablets

Store at 20° to 25°C (68° to 77°F). [See USP Controlled Room Temperature.]

Dispense in a tight, light-resistant container as defined in the USP using a child-resistant closure.

Mylan Pharmaceuticals Inc.Morgantown, WV 26505 U.S.A.

REVISED MAY 2014FAMO:R10
Metoprolol Succinate

Metoprolol Succinate

Metoprolol succinate is an extended-release tablet intended for once daily administration. For treatment of hypertension and angina, when switching from immediate-release metoprolol to metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets, use the same total daily dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. Individualize the dosage of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. Titration may be needed in some patients.

Metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets are scored and can be divided; however, do not crush or chew the whole or half tablet.

2.1 Hypertension

Adults

The usual initial dosage is 25 mg to 100 mg daily in a single dose. The dosage may be increased at weekly (or longer) intervals until optimum blood pressure reduction is achieved. In general, the maximum effect of any given dosage level will be apparent after one week of therapy. Dosages above 400 mg per day have not been studied.

Pediatric Hypertensive Patients ≥ 6 Years of Age

A pediatric clinical hypertension study in patients 6 to 16 years of age did not meet its primary endpoint (dose-response for reduction in SBP); however some other endpoints demonstrated effectiveness [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)]. If selected for treatment, the recommended starting dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets is 1 mg/kg once daily, but the maximum initial dose should not exceed 50 mg once daily. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. Doses above 2 mg/kg (or in excess of 200 mg) once daily have not been studied in pediatric patients [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets are not recommended in pediatric patients < 6 years of age [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)].

2.2 Angina Pectoris

Individualize the dosage of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. The usual initial dosage is 100 mg daily, given in a single dose. Gradually increase the dosage at weekly intervals until optimum clinical response has been obtained or there is a pronounced slowing of the heart rate. Dosages above 400 mg per day have not been studied. If treatment is to be discontinued, reduce the dosage gradually over a period of 1 to 2 weeks [see Warnings and Precautions (5)].

2.3 Heart Failure

Dosage must be individualized and closely monitored during up-titration. Prior to initiation of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets, stabilize the dose of other heart failure drug therapy. The recommended starting dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets is 25 mg once daily for 2 weeks in patients with NYHA Class II heart failure and 12.5 mg once daily in patients with more severe heart failure. Double the dose every 2 weeks to the highest dosage level tolerated by the patient or up to 200 mg of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. Initial difficulty with titration should not preclude later attempts to introduce metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. If patients experience symptomatic bradycardia, reduce the dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. If transient worsening of heart failure occurs, consider treating with increased doses of diuretics, lowering the dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets or temporarily discontinuing it. The dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets should not be increased until symptoms of worsening heart failure have been stabilized.
Meloxicam

Meloxicam

2.1 General Instructions

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of meloxicam tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use meloxicam tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals [see Warnings and Precautions (5.4)].

After observing the response to initial therapy with meloxicam tablets, adjust the dose to suit an individual patient's needs.

In adults, the maximum recommended daily oral dose of meloxicam tablets is 15 mg regardless of formulation. In patients with hemodialysis, a maximum daily dosage of 7.5 mg is recommended [see Warnings and Precautions (5.6), Use in Specific Populations (8.7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Meloxicam oral suspension 7.5 mg/5 mL or 15 mg/10 mL may be substituted for meloxicam tablets 7.5 mg or 15 mg, respectively.

Meloxicam tablets may be taken without regard to timing of meals.

2.2 Osteoarthritis

For the relief of the signs and symptoms of osteoarthritis the recommended starting and maintenance oral dose of meloxicam tablets is 7.5 mg once daily. Some patients may receive additional benefit by increasing the dose to 15 mg once daily.

2.3 Rheumatoid Arthritis

For the relief of the signs and symptoms of rheumatoid arthritis, the recommended starting and maintenance oral dose of meloxicam tablets is 7.5 mg once daily. Some patients may receive additional benefit by increasing the dose to 15 mg once daily.

2.4 Juvenile Rheumatoid Arthritis (JRA) Pauciarticular and Polyarticular Course

To improve dosing accuracy in smaller weight children, the use of the meloxicam oral suspension is recommended. For the treatment of juvenile rheumatoid arthritis, the recommended oral dose of meloxicam is 0.125 mg/kg once daily up to a maximum of 7.5 mg. There was no additional benefit demonstrated by increasing the dose above 0.125 mg/kg once daily in these clinical trials.
Extra Strength Rapid Re...

Extra Strength Rapid Release Acetaminophen Pm

The usual dosage of Ipratropium Bromide Inhalation Solution is 500 mcg (1 Unit-Dose Vial) administered three to four times a day by oral nebulization, with doses 6 to 8 hours apart. Ipratropium Bromide Inhalation Solution Unit-Dose Vials contain 500 mcg ipratropium bromide, USP anhydrous in 2.5 mL normal saline. Ipratropium Bromide Inhalation Solution can be mixed in the nebulizer with albuterol or metaproterenol if used within one hour. Drug stability and safety of Ipratropium Bromide Inhalation Solution when mixed with other drugs in a nebulizer have not been established.
Moxifloxacin Hydrochlor...

Moxifloxacin Hydrochloride

2.1 Major Depressive Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adult

Initiate fluoxetine tablets 20 mg/day orally in the morning. Consider a dose increase after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. Administer doses above 20 mg/day once daily in the morning or twice daily (i.e., morning and noon).The maximum fluoxetine dose should not exceed 80 mg/day.

In controlled trials used to support the efficacy of fluoxetine, patients were administered morning doses ranging from 20 to 80 mg/day. Studies comparing fluoxetine 20, 40, and 60 mg/day to placebo indicate that 20 mg/day is sufficient to obtain a satisfactory response in Major Depressive Disorder in most cases [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Pediatric (Children and Adolescents)

Initiate fluoxetine tablets 10 or 20 mg/day. After one week at 10 mg/day, increase the dose to 20 mg/day. However, due to higher plasma levels in lower weight children, the starting and target dose in this group may be 10 mg/day. Consider a dose increase to 20 mg/day after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. In the short-term (8 to 9 week) controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of Major Depressive Disorder, patients were administered fluoxetine doses of 10 to 20 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

All Patients

As with other drugs effective in the treatment of Major Depressive Disorder, the full effect may be delayed until 4 weeks of treatment or longer.

Periodically reassess to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Switching Patients to a Tricyclic Antidepressant (TCA)

Dosage of a TCA may need to be reduced, and plasma TCA concentrations may need to be monitored temporarily when fluoxetine is coadministered or has been recently discontinued [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2) and Drug Interactions (7.7)].

2.2 Obsessive Compulsive Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adult

Initiate fluoxetine tablets 20 mg/day, orally in the morning. Consider a dose increase after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. The full therapeutic effect may be delayed until 5 weeks of treatment or longer. Administer doses above 20 mg/day once daily in the morning or twice daily (i.e., morning and noon). A dose range of 20 to 60 mg/day is recommended; however, doses of up to 80 mg/day have been well tolerated in open studies of OCD. The maximum fluoxetine dose should not exceed 80 mg/day.

In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of OCD, patients were administered fixed daily doses of 20 mg, 40 mg or 60 mg of fluoxetine or placebo [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. In one of these studies, no dose-response relationship for effectiveness was demonstrated.

Pediatric (Children and Adolescents)

In adolescents and higher weight children, initiate treatment with a dose of 10 mg/day. After 2 weeks, increase the dose to 20 mg/day. Consider additional dose increases after several more weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. A dose range of 20 to 60 mg/day is recommended.

In lower weight children, initiate treatment with a dose of 10 mg/day. Consider additional dose increases after several more weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. A dose range of 20 to 30 mg/day is recommended. Experience with daily doses greater than 20 mg is very minimal, and there is no experience with doses greater than 60 mg.

In the controlled clinical trial of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of OCD, patients were administered fluoxetine doses in the range of 10 to 60 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Periodically reassess to determine the need for treatment.

2.3 Bulimia Nervosa

Initial Treatment

Administer fluoxetine tablets 60 mg/day in the morning. For some patients it may be advisable to titrate up to this target dose over several days. Fluoxetine doses above 60 mg/day have not been systematically studied in patients with bulimia. In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of Bulimia Nervosa, patients were administered fixed daily fluoxetine doses of 20 mg or 60 mg, or placebo [see Clinical Studies (14.3)]. Only the 60 mg dose was statistically significantly superior to placebo in reducing the frequency of binge-eating and vomiting.

Periodically reassess to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.4 Panic Disorder

Initial Treatment

Initiate treatment with fluoxetine tablets 10 mg/day. After one week, increase the dose to 20 mg/day. Consider a dose increase after several weeks if no clinical improvement is observed. Fluoxetine doses above 60 mg/day have not been systematically evaluated in patients with Panic Disorder. In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of Panic Disorder, patients were administered fluoxetine doses in the range of 10 to 60 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.4)]. The most frequently administered dose in the two flexible-dose clinical trials was 20 mg/day.

Periodically reassess to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.5 Fluoxetine and Olanzapine in Combination: Depressive Episodes Associated with Bipolar I Disorder

When using fluoxetine and olanzapine in combination, also refer to the Clinical Studies section of the package insert for Symbyax®.

Adult

Administer fluoxetine in combination with oral olanzapine once daily in the evening, without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 mg of oral olanzapine and 20 mg of fluoxetine. Make dosage adjustments, if indicated, according to efficacy and tolerability within dose ranges of fluoxetine 20 mg to 50 mg and oral olanzapine 5 mg to 12.5 mg. Antidepressant efficacy was demonstrated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination with a dose range of olanzapine 6 mg to 12 mg and fluoxetine 25 mg to 50 mg. Safety of coadministration of doses above 18 mg olanzapine with 75 mg fluoxetine has not been evaluated in clinical studies. Periodically re-examine the need for continued pharmacotherapy.

Safety and efficacy of fluoxetine in combination with olanzapine was determined in clinical trials supporting approval of Symbyax® (fixed-dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine). Symbyax® is dosed between 3 mg/25 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day and 12 mg/50 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day. The following table demonstrates the appropriate individual component doses of fluoxetine and olanzapine vs. Symbyax®. Adjust dosage, if indicated, with the individual components according to efficacy and tolerability.
Table 1: Approximate Dose Correspondence Between Symbyax®* and the Combination of Fluoxetine and Olanzapine * Symbyax ® (olanzapine/fluoxetine hydrochloride) is a fixed-dose combination of fluoxetine and olanzapine.
For Symbyax®

(mg/day)

Use in Combination

Olanzapine

(mg/day)

Fluoxetine

(mg/day)

3 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine

2.5

20

6 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine

5

20

12 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine

10 + 2.5

20

6 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine

5

40 + 10

12 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine

10 + 2.5

40 + 10

Fluoxetine tablet monotherapy is not indicated for the treatment of depressive episodes associated with Bipolar I Disorder.

2.7 Dosing in Specific Populations

Treatment of Pregnant Women

When treating pregnant women with fluoxetine tablets, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and potential benefits of treatment. Neonates exposed to SSRIs or SNRIs late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding [see Use in Specific Populations (8.1)].

Geriatric

Consider a lower or less frequent dosage for the elderly [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].

Hepatic Impairment

As with many other medications, use a lower or less frequent dosage in patients with hepatic impairment [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.4) and Use in Specific Populations (8.6)].

Concomitant Illness

Patients with concurrent disease or on multiple concomitant medications may require dosage adjustments [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.4) and Warnings and Precautions (5.11)].

Fluoxetine and Olanzapine in Combination

Use a starting dose of oral olanzapine 2.5 mg to 5 mg with fluoxetine 20 mg for patients with a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, patients with hepatic impairment, or patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow the metabolism of olanzapine or fluoxetine in combination (female gender, geriatric age, nonsmoking status), or those patients who may be pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine. Titrate slowly and adjust dosage as needed in patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow metabolism. Fluoxetine and olanzapine in combination have not been systematically studied in patients over 65 years of age or in patients less than 10 years of age [see Warnings and Precautions (5.16) and Drug Interactions (7.7)].

2.8 Discontinuation of Treatment

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of fluoxetine, SNRIs, and SSRIs, have been reported [see Warnings and Precautions (5.15)].

2.9 Switching a Patient to or from a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with fluoxetine tablets. Conversely, at least 5 weeks should be allowed after stopping fluoxetine tablets before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders [see Contraindications (4.1)].

2.10 Use of Fluoxetine Tablets with Other MAOIs such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start fluoxetine tablets in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered [see Contraindications (4.1)].

In some cases, a patient already receiving fluoxetine tablet therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, fluoxetine tablets should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 5 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with fluoxetine tablets may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with fluoxetine tablets is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].
Desloratadine

Desloratadine

Desloratadine tablets may be taken without regard to meals.

2.1 Adults and Adolescents 12 Years of Age and Over

The recommended dose of desloratadine tablets is one 5 mg tablet once daily.

2.5 Adults with Hepatic or Renal Impairment

In adult patients with liver or renal impairment, a starting dose of one 5 mg tablet every other day is recommended based on pharmacokinetic data. Dosing recommendation for children with liver or renal impairment cannot be made due to lack of data [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Eprosartan Mesylate

Eprosartan Mesylate

The usual recommended starting dose of eprosartan mesylate tablets is 600 mg once daily when used as monotherapy in patients who are not volume-depleted (see WARNINGS: Hypotension in Volume- and/or Salt-depleted Patients). Eprosartan mesylate tablets can be administered once or twice daily with total daily doses ranging from 400 mg to 800 mg. There is limited experience with doses beyond 800 mg/day.

If the antihypertensive effect measured at trough using once-daily dosing is inadequate, a twice-a-day regimen at the same total daily dose or an increase in dose may give a more satisfactory response. Achievement of maximum blood pressure reduction in most patients may take 2 to 3 weeks.

Eprosartan mesylate tablets may be used in combination with other antihypertensive agents such as thiazide diuretics or calcium channel blockers if additional blood-pressure-lowering effect is required. Discontinuation of treatment with eprosartan does not lead to a rapid rebound increase in blood pressure.

Elderly, Hepatically Impaired or Renally Impaired Patients: No initial dosing adjustment is generally necessary for elderly or hepatically impaired patients or those with renal impairment. No initial dosing adjustment is generally necessary in patients with moderate and severe renal impairment, with maximum dose not exceeding 600 mg daily.

Eprosartan mesylate tablets may be taken with or without food.
Irbesartan And Hydrochl...

Irbesartan And Hydrochlorothiazide

2.1 Dosage in Adult Patients

The dose of moxifloxacin hydrochloride tablets is 400 mg (orally) once every 24 hours. The duration of therapy depends on the type of infection as described in Table 1.
Table 1. Dosage and Duration of Therapy in Adult Patients * Due to the designated pathogens [see Indications and Usage (1)]. † Sequential therapy (intravenous to oral) may be instituted at the discretion of the physician ‡ Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to Yersinia pestis.
Type of Infection*

Dose

Every 24

hours

Duration†

(days)

Acute Bacterial Sinusitis (1.1)

400 mg

10

Acute Bacterial Exacerbation of Chronic Bronchitis (1.2)

400 mg

5

Community Acquired Pneumonia (1.3)

400 mg

7 to 14

Uncomplicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections (SSSI ) (1.4)

400 mg

7

Complicated SSSI (1.5)

400 mg

7 to 21

Complicated Intra-Abdominal Infections (1.6)

400 mg

5 to 14

Plague (1.7)‡

400 mg

10 to 14

Conversion of Intravenous to Oral Dosing in Adults

Intravenous formulation is indicated when it offers a route of administration advantageous to the patient (for example, patient cannot tolerate an oral dosage form). When switching from intravenous to oral formulation, no dosage adjustment is necessary. Patients whose therapy is started with moxifloxacin hydrochloride injection may be switched to moxifloxacin hydrochloride tablets when clinically indicated at the discretion of the physician.

2.2 Important Administration Instructions

Moxifloxacin Hydrochloride Tablets

With Multivalent Cations

Administer moxifloxacin hydrochloride tablets at least 4 hours before or 8 hours after products containing magnesium, aluminum, iron or zinc, including antacids, sucralfate, multivitamins and didanosine buffered tablets for oral suspension or the pediatric powder for oral solution [see Drug Interactions (7.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

With Food

Moxifloxacin hydrochloride tablets can be taken with or without food, drink fluids liberally.
Allopurinol

Allopurinol

The dosage of allopurinol to accomplish full control of gout and to lower serum uric acid to normal or near-normal levels varies with the severity of the disease. The average is 200 to 300 mg/day for patients with mild gout and 400 to 600 mg/day for those with moderately severe tophaceous gout. The appropriate dosage may be administered in divided doses or as a single equivalent dose with the 300 mg tablet. Dosage requirements in excess of 300 mg should be administered in divided doses. The minimal effective dosage is 100 to 200 mg daily and the maximal recommended dosage is 800 mg daily. To reduce the possibility of flare-up of acute gouty attacks, it is recommended that the patient start with a low dose of allopurinol (100 mg daily) and increase at weekly intervals by 100 mg until a serum uric acid level of 6 mg/dL or less is attained but without exceeding the maximal recommended dosage.

Normal serum urate levels are usually achieved in 1 to 3 weeks. The upper limit of normal is about 7 mg/dL for men and postmenopausal women and 6 mg/dL for premenopausal women. Too much reliance should not be placed on a single uric acid determination since, for technical reasons, estimation of uric acid may be difficult. By selecting the appropriate dosage and, in certain patients, using uricosuric agents concurrently, it is possible to reduce serum uric acid to normal or, if desired, to as low as 2 to 3 mg/dL and keep it there indefinitely.

While adjusting the dosage of allopurinol in patients who are being treated with colchicine and/or anti-inflammatory agents, it is wise to continue the latter therapy until serum uric acid has been normalized and there has been freedom from acute gouty attacks for several months.

In transferring a patient from a uricosuric agent to allopurinol, the dose of the uricosuric agent should be gradually reduced over a period of several weeks and the dose of allopurinol gradually increased to the required dose needed to maintain a normal serum uric acid level.

It should also be noted that allopurinol is generally better tolerated if taken following meals. A fluid intake sufficient to yield a daily urinary output of at least 2 liters and the maintenance of a neutral or, preferably, slightly alkaline urine are desirable.

Since allopurinol and its metabolites are primarily eliminated only by the kidney, accumulation of the drug can occur in renal failure, and the dose of allopurinol should consequently be reduced. With a creatinine clearance of 10 to 20 mL/min, a daily dosage of 200 mg of allopurinol is suitable. When the creatine clearance is less than 10 mL/min, the daily dosage should not exceed 100 mg. With extreme renal impairment (creatinine clearance less than 3 mL/min) the interval between doses may also need to be lengthened.

The correct size and frequency of dosage for maintaining the serum uric acid just within the normal range is best determined by using the serum uric acid level as an index.

For the prevention of uric acid nephropathy during the vigorous therapy of neoplastic disease, treatment with 600 to 800 mg daily for 2 or 3 days is advisable together with a high fluid intake. Otherwise similar considerations to the above recommendations for treating patients with gout govern the regulation of dosage for maintenance purposes in secondary hyperuricemia.

The dose of allopurinol recommended for management of recurrent calcium oxalate stones in hyperuricosuric patients is 200 to 300 mg/day in divided doses or as the single equivalent. This dose may be adjusted up or down depending upon the resultant control of the hyperuricosuria based upon subsequent 24 hour urinary urate determinations. Clinical experience suggests that patients with recurrent calcium oxalate stones may also benefit from dietary changes such as the reduction of animal protein, sodium, refined sugars, oxalate-rich foods, and excessive calcium intake, as well as an increase in oral fluids and dietary fiber.

Children, 6 to 10 years of age, with secondary hyperuricemia associated with malignancies may be given 300 mg allopurinol daily while those under 6 years are generally given 150 mg daily. The response is evaluated after approximately 48 hours of therapy and a dosage adjustment is made if necessary.
Telmisartan

Telmisartan

Maintenance Therapy

Once a complete hematologic remission is obtained, maintenance therapy is considered essential. Maintenance doses will vary from patient to patient. The usual daily maintenance dose of mercaptopurine tablets is 1.5 to 2.5 mg/kg/day as a single dose. It is to be emphasized that in pediatric patients with acute lymphatic leukemia in remission, superior results have been obtained when mercaptopurine tablets have been combined with other agents (most frequently with methotrexate) for remission maintenance. Mercaptopurine tablets should rarely be relied upon as a single agent for the maintenance of remissions induced in acute leukemia.

Procedures for proper handling and disposal of anticancer drugs should be considered. Several guidelines on this subject have been published.1–8 There is no general agreement that all of the procedures recommended in the guidelines are necessary or appropriate.

Dosage with Concomitant Allopurinol

When allopurinol and mercaptopurine are administered concomitantly, the dose of mercaptopurine must be reduced to one-third to one-quarter of the usual dose to avoid severe toxicity.

Dosage in TPMT-deficient Patients

Patients with inherited little or no thiopurine S-methyltransferase (TPMT) activity are at increased risk for severe mercaptopurine toxicity from conventional doses of mercaptopurine and generally require substantial dose reduction. The optimal starting dose for homozygous deficient patients has not been established. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS.)

Most patients with heterozygous TPMT deficiency tolerated recommended mercaptopurine doses, but some require dose reduction. Genotypic and phenotypic testing of TPMT status are available. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS.)

Dosage in Renal and Hepatic Impairment

It is probably advisable to start with lower dosages in patients with impaired renal function, due to slower elimination of the drug and metabolites and a greater cumulative effect. Consideration should be given to reducing the dosage in patients with impaired hepatic function.
Norethindrone Acetate A...

Norethindrone Acetate And Ethinyl Estradiol

The tablet blister pack has been designed to make oral contraceptive dosing as easy and as convenient as possible. The tablets are arranged in four rows of seven tablets each, with the days of the week appearing on the tablet blister above the first row of tablets.

Note: Each blister card has been preprinted with the days of the week, starting with Sunday, to facilitate a Sunday-Start regimen. Six different day label strips have been provided with the Detailed Patient & Brief Summary Patient Package Insert in order to accommodate a Day-1 Start regimen. If the patient is using the Day-1 Start regimen, she should place the self-adhesive day label strip that corresponds to her starting day over the preprinted days.

Important: The patient should be instructed to use an additional method of protection until after the first week of administration in the initial cycle when utilizing the Sunday-Start regimen.

The possibility of ovulation and conception prior to initiation of use should be considered.

Dosage and Administration for 28-Day Dosage Regimen

To achieve maximum contraceptive effectiveness, norethindrone acetate and ethinyl estradiol tablets, USP and ferrous fumarate tablets should be taken exactly as directed and at intervals not exceeding 24 hours.

Norethindrone acetate and ethinyl estradiol tablets, USP and ferrous fumarate tablets provides a continuous administration regimen consisting of 21 white to off-white tablets of norethindrone acetate and ethinyl estradiol tablets and 7 brown non-hormone containing tablets of ferrous fumarate. The ferrous fumarate tablets are present to facilitate ease of drug administration via a 28-day regimen and do not serve any therapeutic purpose. There is no need for the patient to count days between cycles because there are no "off-tablet days."

A. Sunday-Start Regimen: The patient begins taking the first white to off-white tablet from the top row of the blister (labeled Sunday) on the first Sunday after menstrual flow begins. When menstrual flow begins on Sunday, the first white to off-white tablet is taken on the same day. The patient takes one white to off-white tablet daily for 21 days. The last white to off-white tablet in the blister pack will be taken on a Saturday. Upon completion of all 21 white to off-white tablets, and without interruption, the patient takes one brown tablet daily for 7 days. Upon completion of this first course of tablets, the patient begins a second course of 28-day tablets, without interruption, the next day (Sunday), starting with the Sunday white to off-white tablet in the top row. Adhering to this regimen of one white to off-white tablet daily for 21 days, followed without interruption by one brown tablet daily for 7 days, the patient will start all subsequent cycles on a Sunday.

B. Day-1 Start Regimen: The first day of menstrual flow is Day 1. The patient places the self-adhesive day label strip that corresponds to her starting day over the preprinted days on the blister card. She starts taking one white to off-white tablet daily, beginning with the first white to off-white tablet in the top row. After the last white to off-white tablet (at the end of the third row) has been taken, the patient will then take the brown tablets for a week (7 days). For all subsequent cycles, the patient begins a new 28 tablet regimen on the eighth day after taking her last white to off-white tablet, again starting with the first tablet in the top row after placing the appropriate day label strip over the preprinted days on the tablet blister. Following this regimen of 21 white to off-white tablets and 7 brown tablets, the patient will start all subsequent cycles on the same day of the week as the first course.

Tablets should be taken regularly with a meal or at bedtime. It should be stressed that efficacy of medication depends on strict adherence to the dosage schedule.

Special Notes on Administration

Menstruation usually begins two or three days, but may begin as late as the fourth or fifth day, after the brown tablets have been started. In any event, the next course of tablets should be started without interruption. If spotting occurs while the patient is taking white to off-white tablets, continue medication without interruption.

If the patient forgets to take one or more white to off-white tablets, the following is suggested:

One tablet is missed
take tablet as soon as remembered take next tablet at the regular time
Two consecutive tablets are missed (week 1 or week 2)
take two tablets as soon as remembered take two tablets the next day use another birth control method for seven days following the missed tablets
Two consecutive tablets are missed (week 3)

Sunday-Start Regimen:
take one tablet daily until Sunday discard remaining tablets start new pack of tablets immediately (Sunday) use another birth control method for seven days following the missed tablets
Day-1 Start Regimen:
discard remaining tablets start new pack of tablets that same day use another birth control method for seven days following the missed tablets
Three (or more) consecutive tablets are missed

Sunday-Start Regimen:
take one tablet daily until Sunday discard remaining tablets start new pack of tablets immediately (Sunday) use another birth control method for seven days following the missed tablets
Day-1 Start Regimen:
discard remaining tablets start new pack of tablets that same day use another birth control method for seven days following the missed tablets
The possibility of ovulation occurring increases with each successive day that scheduled white to off-white tablets are missed. While there is little likelihood of ovulation occurring if only one white to off-white tablet is missed, the possibility of spotting or bleeding is increased. This is particularly likely to occur if two or more consecutive white to off-white tablets are missed.

If the patient forgets to take any of the seven brown tablets in week four, those brown tablets that were missed are discarded and one brown tablet is taken each day until the pack is empty. A back-up birth control method is not required during this time. A new pack of tablets should be started no later than the eighth day after the last white to off-white tablet was taken.

In the rare case of bleeding which resembles menstruation, the patient should be advised to discontinue medication and then begin taking tablets from a new tablet blister pack on the next Sunday or the first day (Day-1), depending on her regimen. Persistent bleeding which is not controlled by this method indicates the need for reexamination of the patient, at which time nonfunctional causes should be considered.

Use of Oral Contraceptives in the Event of a Missed Menstrual Period
If the patient has not adhered to the prescribed dosage regimen, the possibility of pregnancy should be considered after the first missed period and oral contraceptives should be withheld until pregnancy has been ruled out. If the patient has adhered to the prescribed regimen and misses two consecutive periods, pregnancy should be ruled out before continuing the contraceptive regimen.
After several months on treatment, bleeding may be reduced to a point of virtual absence. This reduced flow may occur as a result of medication, in which event it is not indicative of pregnancy.
Xulane

Xulane

To achieve maximum contraceptive effectiveness, Xulane must be used exactly as directed.

Complete instructions to facilitate patient counseling on proper system usage may be found in the FDA-Approved Patient Labeling.

2.1How to Use Xulane

The Xulane transdermal system uses a 28-day (4-week) cycle. A new patch is applied each week for 3 weeks (21 total days). Week 4 is patch-free. Withdrawal bleeding is expected during this time.

Every new patch should be applied on the same day of the week. This day is known as the “Patch Change Day.” For example, if the first patch is applied on a Monday, all subsequent patches should be applied on a Monday. Only one patch should be worn at a time.

Do not cut, damage or alter the Xulane patch in any way. If the Xulane patch is cut, damaged or altered in size, contraceptive efficacy may be impaired.

On the day after Week 4 ends, a new 4-week cycle is started by applying a new patch. Under no circumstances should there be more than a 7-day patch-free interval between dosing cycles.

2.2 How to Start Using Xulane

The woman has two options for starting the patch and she should choose the option that is right for her:
• First Day Start—The woman should apply her first patch during the first 24 hours of her menstrual period. • Sunday Start—The woman should apply her first patch on the first Sunday after her menstrual period begins. With this option, a non-hormonal backup method of birth control, such as a condom and spermicide or diaphragm and spermicide, is needed for the first 7 days of the first cycle only. If her period starts on a Sunday, the first patch should be applied that day, and no backup contraception is needed. • When Switching From the Pill or Vaginal Contraceptive Ring to the Patch—If the woman is switching from the pill or vaginal contraceptive ring to Xulane, she should complete her current pill cycle or vaginal ring cycle and apply the first Xulane patch on the day she would normally start her next pill or insert her next vaginal ring. If she does not get her period within a week after taking the last active pill or removing the last vaginal ring, she should check with her healthcare professional to be sure that she is not pregnant, but she may go ahead and start Xulane for contraception. If the patch is applied more than a week after taking the last active pill or removal of the last vaginal ring, she should use a non-hormonal contraceptive concurrently for the first 7 days of patch use.
Use after Childbirth

Start contraceptive therapy with Xulane in women who elect not to breastfeed no sooner than 4 weeks after childbirth due to increased risk of thromboembolism. If a woman begins using Xulane postpartum, and has not yet had a period, consider the possibility of ovulation and conception occurring prior to use of Xulane, and instruct her to use an additional method of contraception, such as a condom and spermicide or diaphragm and spermicide, for the first 7 days. [See Warnings and Precautions (5.1) and Pregnancy (8.1).]

Use after Abortion or Miscarriage

After an abortion or miscarriage that occurs in the first trimester, Xulane may be started immediately. An additional method of contraception is not needed if Xulane is started immediately. If use of Xulane is not started within 5 days following a first trimester abortion, the woman should follow the instructions for a woman starting Xulane for the first time. In the meantime she should be advised to use a non-hormonal contraceptive method. Ovulation may occur within 10 days of an abortion or miscarriage.

Start Xulane no earlier than 4 weeks after a second trimester abortion or miscarriage, due to the increased risk of thromboembolic disease. [See Contraindications (4) and Warnings and Precautions (5.1).]

2.3How to Apply Xulane

CHOOSING A PLACE ON THE BODY TO PUT THE PATCH
• The patch may be placed on the upper outer arm, abdomen, buttock or back in a place where it won’t be rubbed by tight clothing. For example, it should not be placed under the waistband of clothing. • The patch should not be placed on the breasts, on cut or irritated skin, or on the same location as the previous patch.
Before applying the patch:
• The woman should make sure the skin is clean and dry. • She should not use lotions, creams, oils, powders, or make-up at the patch site. It may cause the patch to fail to stick properly or to become loose.
HOW TO APPLY THE PATCH
• The woman should tear open the pouch at the top edge and one side edge. She should peel open the foil pouch. She should gently remove the contents of the foil pouch and discard the additional pieces of film above and below the patch. • The woman should peel away half of the clear plastic. She should avoid touching the sticky surface with her fingers. • The woman should apply the sticky side of the patch on the skin she has cleaned and dried. She should then remove the other half of the clear plastic and attach the entire patch to her skin. • The woman should press firmly on the patch with the palm of her hand for 10 seconds, making sure that the whole patch adheres to her skin. • She should run her fingers over the entire surface area to smooth out any “wrinkles” around the outer edges of the patch.
• The woman should check her patch every day to make sure all edges are sticking correctly.

WHEN TO CHANGE THE XULANE PATCH
• The patch works for 7 days (one week). The woman should apply a new patch on the same day each week (her Patch Change Day) for 3 weeks in a row. She must make sure she has removed her old patch prior to applying the new patch. • During Week 4, she DOES NOT wear a patch. She must make sure she removes her old patch. (Her period should begin during this week.) • Following Week 4, she repeats the cycle of three weekly applications followed by a patch-free week.
WHAT IF THE PATCH BECOMES LOOSE OR FALLS OFF?

The patch must stick securely to the skin to work properly. If the Xulane patch becomes partially or completely detached and remains detached, insufficient drug delivery occurs. The woman should not try to reapply a patch if it is no longer sticky, if it has become stuck to itself or another surface, or if it has other material stuck to it.

If a patch edge lifts up:
• The woman should press down firmly on the patch with the palm of her hand for 10 seconds, making sure that the whole patch adheres to her skin. She should run her fingers over the entire surface area to smooth out any “wrinkles” around the edges of the patch. • If her patch does not stick completely, she should remove it and apply a replacement patch. • She should not tape or wrap the patch to her skin or reapply a patch that is partially adhered to clothing.
If the patch has been off or partially off:
• For less than 1 Day, she should try to reapply it. If the patch does not adhere completely, she should apply a new patch immediately. (No backup contraception is needed and her Patch Change Day will stay the same). • For more than 1 Day or if she is not sure for how long, she may not be protected from pregnancy. To reduce this risk, she should apply a new patch and start a new 4-week cycle. She will now have a new Patch Change Day and MUST USE NON-HORMONAL BACKUP CONTRACEPTION (such as a condom and spermicide or diaphragm and spermicide) for the first week of her new cycle.
IF THE WOMAN FORGETS TO CHANGE HER PATCH
• at the start of any patch cycle (Week 1/Day 1): SHE MAY NOT BE PROTECTED FROM PREGNANCY. She should apply the first patch of her new cycle as soon as she remembers. There is now a new “Patch Change Day” and a new “Day 1.” The woman must use back-up contraception, such as a condom and spermicide or diaphragm and spermicide, for the first week of the new cycle. • in the middle of the patch cycle (Week 2/Day 8 or Week 3/Day 15), • for 1 or 2 days (up to 48 hours), she should apply a new patch immediately. The next patch should be applied on the usual “Patch Change Day.” No back-up contraception is needed. • for more than 2 days (48 hours or more), SHE MAY NOT BE PROTECTED FROM PREGNANCY. She should stop the current contraceptive cycle and start a new 4-week cycle immediately by putting on a new patch. There is now a new “Patch Change Day” and a new “Day 1.” The woman must use back-up contraception for one week. • at the end of the patch cycle (Week 4/Day 22), • If the woman forgets to remove her patch, she should take it off as soon as she remembers. The next cycle should be started on the usual “Patch Change Day,” which is the day after Day 28. No back-up contraception is needed.
Under no circumstances should there be more than a 7-day patch-free interval between cycles. If there are more than 7 patch-free days, THE WOMAN MAY NOT BE PROTECTED FROM PREGNANCY and back-up contraception, such as a condom and spermicide or diaphragm and spermicide, must be used for 7 days. As with combined oral contraceptives, the risk of ovulation increases with each day beyond the recommended drug-free period. If she has had intercourse during such an extended patch-free interval, consider the possibility of pregnancy.

Change Day Adjustment

If the woman wishes to change her Patch Change Day, she should complete her current cycle, removing the third Xulane patch on the correct day. During the patch-free week, she may select an earlier Patch Day Change by applying a new Xulane patch on the desired day. In no case should there be more than 7 consecutive patch-free days.

Breakthrough Bleeding or Spotting

In the event of unscheduled or breakthrough bleeding or spotting (bleeding that occurs on the days that Xulane is worn), treatment should be continued. If unscheduled bleeding persists longer than a few cycles, consider causes other than Xulane.

If the woman does not have scheduled or withdrawal bleeding (bleeding that should occur during the patch-free week), she should resume treatment on the next scheduled Change Day. If Xulane has been used correctly, the absence of withdrawal bleeding is not necessarily an indication of pregnancy. Nevertheless, consider the possibility of pregnancy, especially if absence of withdrawal bleeding occurs in 2 consecutive cycles. Discontinue Xulane if pregnancy is confirmed.

In Case of Skin Irritation

If patch use results in uncomfortable irritation, the patch may be removed and a new patch may be applied to a different location until the next Change Day. Only one patch should be worn at a time.

Additional Instructions for Dosing

Unscheduled bleeding, spotting, and amenorrhea are frequent reasons for patients discontinuing hormonal contraceptives. In case of breakthrough bleeding, as in all cases of irregular bleeding from the vagina, consider nonfunctional causes. In case of undiagnosed persistent or recurrent abnormal bleeding from the vagina, take adequate diagnostic measures to rule out pregnancy or malignancy. If pathology has been excluded, time or a change to another method of contraception may solve the problem.

Use of Hormonal Contraceptives in the Event of a Missed Menstrual Period
1. If the woman has not adhered to the prescribed schedule, consider the possibility of pregnancy at the time of the first missed period. Discontinue use of Xulane if pregnancy is confirmed. 2. If the woman has adhered to the prescribed regimen and misses one period, she should continue using her contraceptive patches. However, if she has adhered to the prescribed regimen, misses one period and has symptoms associated with pregnancy, rule out pregnancy. Discontinue Xulane use if pregnancy is confirmed. 3. If the woman has adhered to the prescribed regimen and misses two consecutive periods, rule out pregnancy. Discontinue Xulane use if pregnancy is confirmed.
Alfuzosin Hydrochloride...

Alfuzosin Hydrochloride

The recommended dosage is one 10 mg alfuzosin hydrochloride extended-release tablet once daily. The extent of absorption of alfuzosin is 50% lower under fasting conditions. Therefore, alfuzosin hydrochloride extended-release tablets should be taken with food and with the same meal each day. The tablets should not be chewed or crushed.
Tramadol Hydrochloride

Tramadol Hydrochloride

Adults (17 years of age and over)

For patients with moderate to moderately severe chronic pain not requiring rapid onset of analgesic effect, the tolerability of tramadol hydrochloride tablets can be improved by initiating therapy with a titration regimen: the total daily dose may be increased by 50 mg as tolerated every 3 days to reach 200 mg/day (50 mg q.i.d.). After titration, tramadol hydrochloride tablets 50 mg to 100 mg can be administered as needed for pain relief every 4 to 6 hours not to exceed 400 mg/day.

For the subset of patients for whom rapid onset of analgesic effect is required and for whom the benefits outweigh the risk of discontinuation due to adverse events associated with higher initial doses, tramadol hydrochloride tablets 50 mg to 100 mg can be administered as needed for pain relief every 4 to 6 hours, not to exceed 400 mg per day.

Individualization of Dose

Good pain management practice dictates that the dose be individualized according to patient need using the lowest beneficial dose. Studies with tramadol in adults have shown that starting at the lowest possible dose and titrating upward will result in fewer discontinuations and increased tolerability.
• In all patients with creatinine clearance less than 30 mL/min, it is recommended that the dosing interval of tramadol hydrochloride tablets be increased to 12 hours, with a maximum daily dose of 200 mg. Since only 7% of an administered dose is removed by hemodialysis, dialysis patients can receive their regular dose on the day of dialysis. • The recommended dose for adult patients with cirrhosis is 50 mg every 12 hours. • In general, dose selection for an elderly patient over 65 years old should be cautious, usually starting at the low end of the dosing range, reflecting the greater frequency of decreased hepatic, renal or cardiac function and of concomitant disease or other drug therapy. For elderly patients over 75 years old, total dose should not exceed 300 mg/day.
Tizanidine Hydrochlorid...

Tizanidine Hydrochloride

2.1Dosing Information

Tizanidine hydrochloride capsules may be prescribed with or without food. Once the formulation has been selected and the decision to take with or without food has been made, this regimen should not be altered.

Food has complex effects on tizanidine pharmacokinetics, which differ with the different formulations. Tizanidine hydrochloride capsules and tizanidine hydrochloride tablets are bioequivalent to each other under fasting conditions (more than 3 hours after a meal), but not under fed conditions (within 30 minutes of a meal). These pharmacokinetic differences may result in clinically significant differences when switching administration of tablet and capsules and when switching administration between the fed or fasted state. These changes may result in increased adverse events, or delayed or more rapid onset of activity, depending upon the nature of the switch. For this reason, the prescriber should be thoroughly familiar with the changes in kinetics associated with these different conditions [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

The recommended starting dose is 2 mg (base). Because the effect of tizanidine hydrochloride capsules peaks at approximately 1 to 2 hours post-dose and dissipates between 3 to 6 hours post-dose, treatment can be repeated at 6 to 8 hour intervals, as needed, to a maximum of three doses in 24 hours.

Dosage can be gradually increased by 2 mg (base) to 4 mg (base) at each dose, with 1 to 4 days between dosage increases, until a satisfactory reduction of muscle tone is achieved. The total daily dose should not exceed 36 mg (base). Single doses greater than 16 mg (base) have not been studied.

2.2Dosing in Patients with Renal Impairment

Tizanidine hydrochloride capsules should be used with caution in patients with renal insufficiency (creatinine clearance < 25 mL/min), as clearance is reduced by more than 50%. In these patients, during titration, the individual doses should be reduced. If higher doses are required, individual doses rather than dosing frequency should be increased [see Warnings and Precautions (5.7)].

2.3Dosing in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

Tizanidine hydrochloride capsules should be used with caution in patients with any hepatic impairment. In these patients, during titration, the individual doses should be reduced. If higher doses are required, individual doses rather than dosing frequency should be increased. Monitoring of aminotransferase levels is recommended for baseline and 1 month after maximum dose is achieved, or if hepatic injury is suspected [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7)].

2.4Drug Discontinuation

If therapy needs to be discontinued, particularly in patients who have been receiving high doses (20 mg (base) to 36 mg (base) daily) for long periods (9 weeks or more) or who may be on concomitant treatment with narcotics, the dose should be decreased slowly (2 mg (base) to 4 mg (base) per day) to minimize the risk of withdrawal and rebound hypertension, tachycardia, and hypertonia [see Drug Abuse and Dependence (9.3)].
Mucinex

Mucinex

The following dosages of albuterol extended-release tablets are expressed in terms of albuterol base:

Usual Dosage

Adults and Children Over 12 Years of Age

The usual recommended dosage for adults and pediatric patients over 12 years of age is 8 mg every 12 hours. In some patients, 4 mg every 12 hours may be sufficient.

Children 6 to 12 Years of Age

The usual recommended dosage for children 6 through 12 years of age is 4 mg every 12 hours.

Dosage Adjustment in Adults and Children Over 12 Years of Age

In unusual circumstances, such as adults of low body weight, it may be desirable to use a starting dosage of 4 mg every 12 hours and progress to 8 mg every 12 hours according to response.

If control of reversible airway obstruction is not achieved with the recommended doses in patients on otherwise optimized asthma therapy, the doses may be cautiously increased stepwise under the control of the supervising physician to a maximum dose of 32 mg per day in divided doses (i.e., every 12 hours).

Dosage Adjustment in Children 6 to 12 Years of Age

If control of reversible airway obstruction is not achieved with the recommended doses in patients on otherwise optimized asthma therapy, the doses may be cautiously increased stepwise under the control of the supervising physician to a maximum dose of 24 mg per day in divided doses (i.e., every 12 hours).

Switching From Oral Albuterol, USP Products

Patients currently maintained on albuterol tablets or albuterol sulfate syrup can be switched to albuterol extended-release tablets. For example, the administration of one 4 mg albuterol extended-release tablet every 12 hours is comparable to one 2 mg albuterol tablet every 6 hours. Multiples of this regimen up to the maximum recommended daily dose also apply.

Albuterol extended-release tablets must be swallowed whole with the aid of liquids. DO NOT CHEW OR CRUSH THESE TABLETS.
Anastrozole

Anastrozole

2.1 Recommended Dose

The dose of anastrozole tablets is one 1 mg tablet taken once a day. For patients with advanced breast cancer, anastrozole tablets should be continued until tumor progression. Anastrozole tablets can be taken with or without food.

For adjuvant treatment of early breast cancer in postmenopausal women, the optimal duration of therapy is unknown. In the ATAC trial, anastrozole tablets were administered for 5 years [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with renal impairment or for elderly patients [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6)].

2.2 Patients with Hepatic Impairment

No changes in dose are recommended for patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment. Anastrozole tablets have not been studied in patients with severe hepatic impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7)].
Ketoconazole

Ketoconazole

There should be laboratory as well as clinical documentation of infection prior to starting ketoconazole tablet therapy. The usual duration of therapy for systemic infection is 6 months. Treatment should be continued until active fungal infection has subsided.

Adults

The recommended starting dose of ketoconazole tablets is a single daily administration of 200 mg (one tablet). If clinical responsiveness is insufficient within the expected time, the dose of ketoconazole tablets may be increased to 400 mg (two tablets) once daily.

Children

In small numbers of children over 2 years of age, a single daily dose of 3.3 to 6.6 mg/kg has been used. Ketoconazole tablets have not been studied in children under 2 years of age.
Propranolol Hydrochlori...

Propranolol Hydrochloride

General

Because of the variable bioavailability of propranolol, the dose should be individualized based on response.

Hypertension

The usual initial dosage is 40 mg propranolol hydrochloride tablets twice daily, whether used alone or added to a diuretic. Dosage may be increased gradually until adequate blood pressure control is achieved. The usual maintenance dosage is 120 mg to 240 mg per day. In some instances a dosage of 640 mg a day may be required. The time needed for full antihypertensive response to a given dosage is variable and may range from a few days to several weeks.

While twice-daily dosing is effective and can maintain a reduction in blood pressure throughout the day, some patients, especially when lower doses are used, may experience a modest rise in blood pressure toward the end of the 12-hour dosing interval. This can be evaluated by measuring blood pressure near the end of the dosing interval to determine whether satisfactory control is being maintained throughout the day. If control is not adequate, a larger dose, or 3-times-daily therapy may achieve better control.

Angina Pectoris

Total daily doses of 80 mg to 320 mg propranolol hydrochloride tablets, when administered orally, twice a day, 3 times a day, or 4 times a day, have been shown to increase exercise tolerance and to reduce ischemic changes in the ECG. If treatment is to be discontinued, reduce dosage gradually over a period of several weeks. (See WARNINGS.)

Atrial Fibrillation

The recommended dose is 10 mg to 30 mg propranolol hydrochloride tablets 3 or 4 times daily before meals and at bedtime.

Myocardial Infarction

In the Beta-Blocker Heart Attack Trial (BHAT), the initial dose was 40 mg t.i.d., with titration after one month to 60 mg to 80 mg t.i.d. as tolerated. The recommended daily dosage is 180 mg to 240 mg propranolol hydrochloride tablets per day in divided doses. Although a t.i.d. regimen was used in BHAT and a q.i.d. regimen in the Norwegian Multicenter Trial, there is a reasonable basis for the use of either a t.i.d. or b.i.d. regimen (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). The effectiveness and safety of daily dosages greater than 240 mg for prevention of cardiac mortality have not been established. However, higher dosages may be needed to effectively treat coexisting diseases such as angina or hypertension (see above).

Migraine

The initial dose is 80 mg propranolol hydrochloride tablets daily in divided doses. The usual effective dose range is 160 mg to 240 mg per day. The dosage may be increased gradually to achieve optimum migraine prophylaxis. If a satisfactory response is not obtained within 4 to 6 weeks after reaching the maximum dose, propranolol hydrochloride tablet therapy should be discontinued. It may be advisable to withdraw the drug gradually over a period of several weeks.

Essential Tremor

The initial dosage is 40 mg propranolol hydrochloride tablets twice daily. Optimum reduction of essential tremor is usually achieved with a dose of 120 mg per day. Occasionally, it may be necessary to administer 240 mg to 320 mg per day.

Hypertrophic Subaortic Stenosis

The usual dosage is 20 mg to 40 mg propranolol hydrochloride tablets 3 or 4 times daily before meals and at bedtime.

Pheochromocytoma

The usual dosage is 60 mg propranolol hydrochloride tablets daily in divided doses for 3 days prior to surgery as adjunctive therapy to alpha-adrenergic blockade. For the management of inoperable tumors, the usual dosage is 30 mg daily in divided doses as adjunctive therapy to alpha-adrenergic blockade.
Itraconazole

Itraconazole

Itraconazole capsules should be taken with a full meal to ensure maximal absorption. Itraconazole capsules must be swallowed whole.

Itraconazole capsules are a different preparation than itraconazole oral solution and should not be used interchangeably.

Treatment of Blastomycosis and Histoplasmosis

The recommended dose is 200 mg once daily (two capsules). If there is no obvious improvement, or there is evidence of progressive fungal disease, the dose should be increased in 100 mg increments to a maximum of 400 mg daily. Doses above 200 mg/day should be given in two divided doses.

Treatment of Aspergillosis

A daily dose of 200 mg to 400 mg is recommended.

Treatment in Life-Threatening Situations

In life-threatening situations, a loading dose should be used.

Although clinical studies did not provide for a loading dose, it is recommended, based on pharmacokinetic data, that a loading dose of 200 mg (two capsules) three times daily (600 mg/day) be given for the first 3 days of treatment.

Treatment should be continued for a minimum of 3 months and until clinical parameters and laboratory tests indicate that the active fungal infection has subsided. An inadequate period of treatment may lead to recurrence of active infection.

Itraconazole capsules and itraconazole oral solution should not be used interchangeably. Only the oral solution has been demonstrated effective for oral and/or esophageal candidiasis.

Treatment of Onychomycosis

Toenails with or without Fingernail Involvement

The recommended dose is 200 mg (two capsules) once daily for 12 consecutive weeks.

Treatment of Onychomycosis:Fingernails Only

The recommended dosing regimen is two treatment courses, each consisting of 200 mg (two capsules) b.i.d. (400 mg/day) for 1 week. The courses are separated by a 3-week period without itraconazole capsules.

Use in Patients with Renal Impairment

Limited data are available on the use of oral itraconazole in patients with renal impairment. Caution should be exercised when this drug is administered in this patient population. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Special Populations and PRECAUTIONS.)

Use in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

Limited data are available on the use of oral itraconazole in patients with hepatic impairment. Caution should be exercised when this drug is administered in this patient population. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Special Populations, WARNINGS, and PRECAUTIONS.)
Estradiol Patch

Estradiol Patch

2.1 Dosage in Adults

Use the lowest dose effective for the patient, as important adverse effects of flurazepam hydrochloride capsules are dose related.

The recommended initial dose is 15 mg for women and either 15 mg or 30 mg for men. The 15 mg dose can be increased to 30 mg if necessary for efficacy.

The recommended initial doses for women and men are different because flurazepam clearance is lower in women [see Pharmacokinetics (12.3)].

2.2 Dosage in Elderly or Debilitated Patients

Elderly or debilitated patients may be especially sensitive to flurazepam. Since the risk of the development of oversedation, dizziness, confusion and/or ataxia increases substantially with larger doses in elderly or debilitated patients, it is recommended that in such patients the dosage be limited to 15 mg. Staggering and falling have also been reported, particularly in geriatric patients [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].
Tramadol Hydrochloride ...

Tramadol Hydrochloride And Acetaminophen

For the short-term (5 days or less) management of acute pain, the recommended dose of tramadol hydrochloride and acetaminophen tablets is two tablets every 4 to 6 hours as needed for pain relief, up to a maximum of eight tablets per day.

Individualization of Dose

In patients with creatinine clearances of less than 30 mL/min, it is recommended that the dosing interval of tramadol hydrochloride and acetaminophen tablets be increased not to exceed two tablets every 12 hours. Dose selection for an elderly patient should be cautious, in view of the potential for greater sensitivity to adverse events.
Krystexxa

Krystexxa

2.1 General Instructions for Use

To minimize the risk of seizure, increase the dose gradually [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)]. Bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) should be swallowed whole and not crushed, divided, or chewed. Bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) may be taken with or without food.

The usual adult target dose for bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) is 300 mg per day, given as 150 mg twice daily. Initiate dosing with 150 mg per day given as a single daily dose in the morning. After 3 days of dosing, the dose may be increased to the 300 mg per day target dose, given as 150 mg twice daily. There should be an interval of at least 8 hours between successive doses. A maximum of 400 mg per day, given as 200 mg twice daily, may be considered for patients in whom no clinical improvement is noted after several weeks of treatment at 300 mg per day. To avoid high peak concentrations of bupropion and/or its metabolites, do not exceed 200 mg in any single dose.

It is generally agreed that acute episodes of depression require several months or longer of antidepressant drug treatment beyond the response in the acute episode. It is unknown whether the dose of bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) needed for maintenance treatment is identical to the dose that provided an initial response. Periodically reassess the need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment.

2.2 Dose Adjustment in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

In patients with moderate to severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh score: 7 to 15), the maximum dose of bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) is 100 mg per day or 150 mg every other day. In patients with mild hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh score: 5 to 6), consider reducing the dose and/or frequency of dosing [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 Dose Adjustment in Patients with Renal Impairment

Consider reducing the dose and/or frequency of bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) in patients with renal impairment (Glomerular Filtration Rate < 90 mL/min) [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.4 Switching a Patient to or from a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Antidepressant

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat depression and initiation of therapy with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR). Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) before starting an MAOI antidepressant [see Contraindications (4) and Drug Interactions (7.6)].

2.5 Use of Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-release Tablets (SR) with Reversible MAOIs Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) in a patient who is being treated with a reversible MAOI such as linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. Drug interactions can increase the risk of hypertensive reactions. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, non-pharmacological interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered [see Contraindications (4) and Drug Interactions (7.6)].

In some cases, a patient already receiving therapy with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of hypertensive reactions in a particular patient, bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue.

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of a drug interaction with such use [see Contraindications (4) and Drug Interactions (7.6)].
Lamotrigine

Lamotrigine

2.1 Hypertension

Dosage must be individualized. The usual starting dose of telmisartan tablets is 40 mg once a day. Blood pressure response is dose-related over the range of 20 mg to 80 mg [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Most of the antihypertensive effect is apparent within 2 weeks and maximal reduction is generally attained after 4 weeks. When additional blood pressure reduction beyond that achieved with 80 mg telmisartan is required, a diuretic may be added.

No initial dosage adjustment is necessary for elderly patients or patients with renal impairment, including those on hemodialysis. Patients on dialysis may develop orthostatic hypotension; their blood pressure should be closely monitored.

Telmisartan tablets may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.

Telmisartan tablets may be administered with or without food.
Milk Of Magnesia

Milk Of Magnesia

The dosage must be determined by individual titration. (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE.)

Chlorthalidone is usually initiated at a dose of 25 mg once daily and may be increased to 50 mg if the response is insufficient after a suitable trial.

Clonidine hydrochloride is usually initiated at a dose of 0.1 mg twice daily. Elderly patients may benefit from a lower initial dose. Further increments of 0.1 mg/day may be made if necessary until the desired response is achieved. The therapeutic doses most commonly employed have ranged from 0.2 to 0.6 mg per day in divided doses.

One CLORPRES® (clonidine hydrochloride/chlorthalidone) Tablet administered once or twice daily can be used to administer a minimum of 0.1 mg clonidine hydrochloride and 15 mg chlorthalidone to a maximum of 0.6 mg clonidine hydrochloride and 30 mg chlorthalidone.
Azathioprine

Azathioprine

TPMT TESTING CANNOT SUBSTITUTE FOR COMPLETE BLOOD COUNT (CBC) MONITORING IN PATIENTS RECEIVING AZATHIOPRINE TABLETS. TPMT genotyping or phenotyping can be used to identify patients with absent or reduced TPMT activity. Patients with low or absent TPMT activity are at an increased risk of developing severe, life-threatening myelotoxicity from azathioprine tablets if conventional doses are given. Physicians may consider alternative therapies for patients who have low or absent TPMT activity (homozygous for non-functional alleles). Azathioprine tablets should be administered with caution to patients having one non-functional allele (heterozygous) who are at risk for reduced TPMT activity that may lead to toxicity if conventional doses are given. Dosage reduction is recommended in patients with reduced TPMT activity. Early drug discontinuation may be considered in patients with abnormal CBC results that do not respond to dose reduction.

Renal Homotransplantation

The dose of azathioprine tablets required to prevent rejection and minimize toxicity will vary with individual patients; this necessitates careful management. The initial dose is usually 3 to 5 mg/kg daily, beginning at the time of transplant. Azathioprine tablets are usually given as a single daily dose on the day of, and in a minority of cases 1 to 3 days before, transplantation. Dose reduction to maintenance levels of 1 to 3 mg/kg daily is usually possible. The dose of azathioprine tablets should not be increased to toxic levels because of threatened rejection. Discontinuation may be necessary for severe hematologic or other toxicity, even if rejection of the homograft may be a consequence of drug withdrawal.

Rheumatoid Arthritis

Azathioprine tablets are usually given on a daily basis. The initial dose should be approximately 1 mg/kg (50 mg to 100 mg) given as a single dose or on a twice-daily schedule. The dose may be increased, beginning at 6 to 8 weeks and thereafter by steps at 4-week intervals, if there are no serious toxicities and if initial response is unsatisfactory. Dose increments should be 0.5 mg/kg daily, up to a maximum dose of 2.5 mg/kg per day. Therapeutic response occurs after several weeks of treatment, usually 6 to 8; an adequate trial should be a minimum of 12 weeks. Patients not improved after 12 weeks can be considered refractory. Azathioprine tablets may be continued long-term in patients with clinical response, but patients should be monitored carefully, and gradual dosage reduction should be attempted to reduce risk of toxicities.

Maintenance therapy should be at the lowest effective dose, and the dose given can be lowered decrementally with changes of 0.5 mg/kg or approximately 25 mg daily every 4 weeks while other therapy is kept constant. The optimum duration of maintenance azathioprine tablets has not been determined. Azathioprine tablets can be discontinued abruptly, but delayed effects are possible.

Use in Renal Dysfunction

Relatively oliguric patients, especially those with tubular necrosis in the immediate postcadaveric transplant period, may have delayed clearance of azathioprine tablets or its metabolites, may be particularly sensitive to this drug, and are usually given lower doses.
Levetiracetam

Levetiracetam

2.1 Important Administration Instructions

Levetiracetam tablets are given orally with or without food. The levetiracetam dosing regimen depends on the indication, age group, dosage form (tablets or oral solution), and renal function.

Prescribe the oral solution for pediatric patients with body weight ≤ 20 kg. Prescribe the oral solution or tablets for pediatric patients with body weight above 20 kg.

When using the oral solution in pediatric patients, dosing is weight-based (mg per kg) using a calibrated measuring device (not a household teaspoon or tablespoon).

Levetiracetam tablets should be swallowed whole. Levetiracetam tablets should not be chewed or crushed.

2.2 Dosing for Partial Onset Seizures

Adults 16 Years and Older

Initiate treatment with a daily dose of 1000 mg/day, given as twice-daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). Additional dosing increments may be given (1000 mg/day additional every 2 weeks) to a maximum recommended daily dose of 3000 mg. There is no evidence that doses greater than 3000 mg/day confer additional benefit.

Pediatric Patients

1 Month to < 6 Months

Initiate treatment with a daily dose of 14 mg/kg in two divided doses (7 mg/kg twice daily). Increase the daily dose every 2 weeks by increments of 14 mg/kg to the recommended daily dose of 42 mg/kg (21 mg/kg twice daily). In the clinical trial, the mean daily dose was 35 mg/kg in this age group. The effectiveness of lower doses has not been studied.

6 Months to < 4 Years

Initiate treatment with a daily dose of 20 mg/kg in two divided doses (10 mg/kg twice daily). Increase the daily dose in 2 weeks by an increment of 20 mg/kg to the recommended daily dose of 50 mg/kg (25 mg/kg twice daily). If a patient cannot tolerate a daily dose of 50 mg/kg, the daily dose may be reduced. In the clinical trial, the mean daily dose was 47 mg/kg in this age group.

4 Years to < 16 Years

Initiate treatment with a daily dose of 20 mg/kg in two divided doses (10 mg/kg twice daily). Increase the daily dose every 2 weeks by increments of 20 mg/kg to the recommended daily dose of 60 mg/kg (30 mg/kg twice daily). If a patient cannot tolerate a daily dose of 60 mg/kg, the daily dose may be reduced. In the clinical trial, the mean daily dose was 44 mg/kg. The maximum daily dose was 3000 mg/day.

For levetiracetam tablet dosing in pediatric patients weighing 20 kg to 40 kg, initiate treatment with a daily dose of 500 mg given as twice daily dosing (250 mg twice daily). Increase the daily dose every 2 weeks by increments of 500 mg to a maximum recommended daily dose of 1500 mg (750 mg twice daily).

For levetiracetam tablet dosing in pediatric patients weighing more than 40 kg, initiate treatment with a daily dose of 1000 mg/day given as twice daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). Increase the daily dose every 2 weeks by increments of 1000 mg/day to a maximum recommended daily dose of 3000 mg (1500 mg twice daily).

Levetiracetam Oral Solution Weight-Based Dosing Calculation for Pediatric Patients

The following calculation should be used to determine the appropriate daily dose of oral solution for pediatric patients:

2.3 Dosing for Myoclonic Seizures in Patients 12 Years of Age and Older with Juvenile Myoclonic Epilepsy

Initiate treatment with a dose of 1000 mg/day, given as twice-daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). Increase the dosage by 1000 mg/day every 2 weeks to the recommended daily dose of 3000 mg. The effectiveness of doses lower than 3000 mg/day has not been studied.

2.4 Dosing for Primary Generalized Tonic-Clonic Seizures

Adults 16 Years and Older

Initiate treatment with a dose of 1000 mg/day, given as twice-daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). Increase dosage by 1000 mg/day every 2 weeks to the recommended daily dose of 3000 mg. The effectiveness of doses lower than 3000 mg/day has not been adequately studied.

Pediatric Patients Ages 6 to < 16 Years

Initiate treatment with a daily dose of 20 mg/kg in two divided doses (10 mg/kg twice daily). Increase the daily dose every 2 weeks by increments of 20 mg/kg to the recommended daily dose of 60 mg/kg (30 mg/kg twice daily). The effectiveness of doses lower than 60 mg/kg/day has not been adequately studied. Patients with body weight ≤ 20 kg should be dosed with oral solution. Patients with body weight above 20 kg can be dosed with either tablets or oral solution [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Only whole tablets should be administered.

2.5 Dosage Adjustments in Adult Patients with Renal Impairment

Levetiracetam tablet dosing must be individualized according to the patient’s renal function status. Recommended dosage adjustments for adults are shown in Table 1. In order to calculate the dose recommended for patients with renal impairment, creatinine clearance adjusted for body surface area must be calculated. To do this an estimate of the patient’s creatinine clearance (CLcr) in mL/min must first be calculated using the following formula:

Then CLcr is adjusted for body surface area (BSA) as follows:

Table 1: Dosing Adjustment Regimen for Adult Patients with Renal Impairment * Following dialysis, a 250 mg to 500 mg supplemental dose is recommended.
Group

Creatinine Clearance(mL/min/1.73m2)

Dosage (mg)

Frequency

Normal

> 80

500 to 1500

Every 12 hours

Mild

50 to 80

500 to 1000

Every 12 hours

Moderate

30 to 50

250 to 750

Every 12 hours

Severe

< 30

250 to 500

Every 12 hours

ESRD patients using dialysis

---

500 to 1000*

Every 24 hours*
Capecitabine

Capecitabine

Capecitabine tablets should be swallowed whole with water within 30 minutes after a meal. Do not crush or cut capecitabine tablets. Capecitabine dose is calculated according to body surface area.

2.1 Standard Starting Dose

Monotherapy (Metastatic Colorectal Cancer, Adjuvant Colorectal Cancer, Metastatic Breast Cancer)

The recommended dose of capecitabine is 1250 mg/m2 administered orally twice daily (morning and evening; equivalent to 2500 mg/m2 total daily dose) for 2 weeks followed by a 1 week rest period given as 3 week cycles (see Table 1).

Adjuvant treatment in patients with Dukes’ C colon cancer is recommended for a total of 6 months [i.e., capecitabine 1250 mg/m2 orally twice daily for 2 weeks followed by a 1 week rest period, given as 3 week cycles for a total of 8 cycles (24 weeks)].
Table 1. Capecitabine Dose Calculation According to Body Surface Area * Total Daily Dose divided by two to allow equal morning and evening doses
Dose Level 1250 mg/m2

Twice a Day

Number of Tablets to be Taken at

Each Dose (Morning and Evening)

Surface Area

(m2)

Total Daily Dose* (mg)

150 mg

500 mg

≤1.25

3000

0

3

1.26 to 1.37

3300

1

3

1.38 to 1.51

3600

2

3

1.52 to 1.65

4000

0

4

1.66 to 1.77

4300

1

4

1.78 to 1.91

4600

2

4

1.92 to 2.05

5000

0

5

2.06 to 2.17

5300

1

5

≥ 2.18

5600

2

5

In Combination With Docetaxel (Metastatic Breast Cancer)

In combination with docetaxel, the recommended dose of capecitabine is 1250 mg/m2 twice daily for 2 weeks followed by a 1 week rest period, combined with docetaxel at 75 mg/m2 as a 1 hour intravenous infusion every 3 weeks. Pre-medication, according to the docetaxel labeling, should be started prior to docetaxel administration for patients receiving the capecitabine tablets plus docetaxel combination. Table 1 displays the total daily dose of capecitabine by body surface area and the number of tablets to be taken at each dose.

2.2 Dose Management Guidelines

General

Capecitabine dosage may need to be individualized to optimize patient management. Patients should be carefully monitored for toxicity and doses of capecitabine should be modified as necessary to accommodate individual patient tolerance to treatment [see Clinical Studies (14)]. Toxicity due to capecitabine tablet administration may be managed by symptomatic treatment, dose interruptions and adjustment of capecitabine dose. Once the dose has been reduced, it should not be increased at a later time. Doses of capecitabine omitted for toxicity are not replaced or restored; instead the patient should resume the planned treatment cycles.

The dose of phenytoin and the dose of coumarin-derivative anticoagulants may need to be reduced when either drug is administered concomitantly with capecitabine tablets [see Drug Interactions (7.1)].

Monotherapy (Metastatic Colorectal Cancer, Adjuvant Colorectal Cancer, Metastatic Breast Cancer)

Capecitabine dose modification scheme as described below (see Table 2) is recommended for the management of adverse reactions.
Table 2. Recommended Dose Modifications of Capecitabine * National Cancer Institute of Canada Common Toxicity Criteria were used except for the hand-and-foot syndrome [see Warnings and Precautions (5)].
Toxicity

NCIC Grades*

During a Course of Therapy

Dose Adjustment for Next

Treatment (% of starting dose)

Grade 1

Maintain dose level

Maintain dose level

Grade 2

-1st appearance

Interrupt until resolved to grade 0-1

100%

-2nd appearance

75%

-3rd appearance

50%

-4th appearance

Discontinue treatment permanently

-

Grade 3

-1st appearance

Interrupt until resolved to grade 0-1

75%

-2nd appearance

50%

-3rd appearance

Discontinue treatment permanently

-

Grade 4

-1st appearance

Discontinue permanently

OR

If physician deems it to be in the

patient’s best interest to continue,

interrupt until resolved to grade 0-1

50%

In Combination with Docetaxel (Metastatic Breast Cancer)

Dose modifications of capecitabine tablets for toxicity should be made according to Table 2 above for capecitabine. At the beginning of a treatment cycle, if a treatment delay is indicated for either capecitabine or docetaxel, then administration of both agents should be delayed until the requirements for restarting both drugs are met.

The dose reduction schedule for docetaxel when used in combination with capecitabine for the treatment of metastatic breast cancer is shown in Table 3.
Table 3. Docetaxel Dose Reduction Schedule in Combination with Capecitabine * National Cancer Institute of Canada Common Toxicity Criteria were used except for hand-and-foot syndrome [see Warnings and Precautions (5)].
Toxicity NCIC Grades*

Grade 2

Grade 3

Grade 4

1st appearance

Delay treatment until resolved to grade 0-1; Resume treatment with original dose of 75 mg/m2 docetaxel

Delay treatment until resolved to grade 0-1; Resume treatment at 55 mg/m2 of docetaxel

Discontinue treatment with docetaxel

2nd appearance

Delay treatment until resolved to grade 0-1; Resume treatment at 55 mg/m2 of docetaxel

Discontinue treatment with docetaxel

-

3rd appearance

Discontinue treatment with docetaxel

-

-

2.3 Adjustment of Starting Dose in Special Populations

Renal Impairment

No adjustment to the starting dose of capecitabine is recommended in patients with mild renal impairment (creatinine clearance = 51 to 80 mL/min [Cockroft and Gault, as shown below]). In patients with moderate renal impairment (baseline creatinine clearance = 30 to 50 mL/min), a dose reduction to 75% of the capecitabine starting dose when used as monotherapy or in combination with docetaxel (from 1250 mg/m2 to 950 mg/m2 twice daily) is recommended [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Subsequent dose adjustment is recommended as outlined in Table 2 and Table 3 (depending on the regimen) if a patient develops a grade 2 to 4 adverse event [see Warnings and Precautions (5.5)]. The starting dose adjustment recommendations for patients with moderate renal impairment apply to both capecitabine monotherapy and capecitabine in combination use with docetaxel.

Cockroft and Gault Equation:

Creatinine clearance for males =

(140 – age [yrs]) (body wt [kg])

(72) (serum creatinine [mg/dL])

Creatinine clearance for females = 0.85 x male value

Geriatrics

Physicians should exercise caution in monitoring the effects of capecitabine tablets in the elderly. Insufficient data are available to provide a dosage recommendation.
Lisinopril And Hydrochl...

Lisinopril And Hydrochlorothiazide

Lisinopril monotherapy is an effective treatment of hypertension in once daily doses of 10 mg to 80 mg, while hydrochlorothiazide monotherapy is effective in doses of 12.5 mg to 50 mg per day. In clinical trials of lisinopril/hydrochlorothiazide combination therapy using lisinopril doses of 10 mg to 80 mg and hydrochlorothiazide doses of 6.25 mg to 50 mg, the antihypertensive response rates generally increased with increasing dose of either component.

The side effects (see WARNINGS) of lisinopril are generally rare and apparently independent of dose; those of hydrochlorothiazide are a mixture of dose-dependent phenomena (primarily hypokalemia) and dose-independent phenomena (e.g., pancreatitis), the former much more common than the latter. Therapy with any combination of lisinopril and hydrochlorothiazide may be associated with either or both dose-independent or dose-dependent side effects, but addition of lisinopril in clinical trials blunted the hypokalemia normally seen with diuretics.

To minimize dose-dependent side effects, it is usually appropriate to begin combination therapy only after a patient has failed to achieve the desired effect with monotherapy.

Dose Titration Guided by Clinical Effect

A patient whose blood pressure is not adequately controlled with either lisinopril or hydrochlorothiazide monotherapy may be switched to lisinopril and hydrochlorothiazide tablet 10 mg/12.5 mg or lisinopril and hydrochlorothiazide tablet 20 mg/12.5 mg, depending on current monotherapy dose. Further increases of either or both components should depend on clinical response with blood pressure measured at the interdosing interval to ensure that there is an adequate antihypertensive effect at that time. The hydrochlorothiazide dose should generally not be increased until 2 to 3 weeks have elapsed. After addition of the diuretic it may be possible to reduce the dose of lisinopril. Patients whose blood pressures are adequately controlled with 25 mg of daily hydrochlorothiazide, but who experience significant potassium loss with this regimen may achieve similar or greater blood pressure control without electrolyte disturbance if they are switched to lisinopril and hydrochlorothiazide tablet 10 mg/12.5 mg.

In patients who are currently being treated with a diuretic, symptomatic hypotension occasionally may occur following the initial dose of lisinopril. The diuretic should, if possible, be discontinued for 2 to 3 days before beginning therapy with lisinopril to reduce the likelihood of hypotension. (See WARNINGS.) If the patient’s blood pressure is not controlled with lisinopril alone, diuretic therapy may be resumed.

If the diuretic cannot be discontinued, an initial dose of 5 mg of lisinopril should be used under medical supervision for at least 2 hours and until blood pressure has stabilized for at least an additional hour. (See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions.)

Concomitant administration of lisinopril and hydrochlorothiazide tablets with potassium supplements, potassium salt substitutes or potassium-sparing diuretics may lead to increases of serum potassium. (See PRECAUTIONS.)

Replacement Therapy

The combination may be substituted for the titrated individual components.

Use in Renal Impairment

Regimens of therapy with lisinopril/HCTZ need not take account of renal function as long as the patient’s creatinine clearance is > 30 mL/min/1.7 m2 (serum creatinine roughly ≤ 3 mg/dL or 265 µmol/L). In patients with more severe renal impairment, loop diuretics are preferred to thiazides, so lisinopril and hydrochlorothiazide is not recommended. (See WARNINGS: Lisinopril: Anaphylactoid Reactions During Membrane Exposure.)
Pindolol

Pindolol

The dosage of pindolol tablets should be individualized. The recommended initial dose of pindolol tablets is 5 mg b.i.d. alone or in combination with other antihypertensive agents. An antihypertensive response usually occurs within the first week of treatment. Maximal response, however, may take as long as or occasionally longer than 2 weeks. If a satisfactory reduction in blood pressure does not occur within 3 to 4 weeks, the dose may be adjusted in increments of 10 mg/day at these intervals up to a maximum of 60 mg/day.
Potassium Chloride

Potassium Chloride

The usual dietary potassium intake by the average adult is 50 mEq to 100 mEq per day. Potassium depletion sufficient to cause hypokalemia usually requires the loss of 200 mEq or more of potassium from the total body store.

Dosage must be adjusted to the individual needs of each patient. The dose for the prevention of hypokalemia is typically in the range of 20 mEq per day. Doses of 40 mEq to 100 mEq per day or more are used for the treatment of potassium depletion. Dosage should be divided if more than 20 mEq per day is given such that no more than 20 mEq is given in a single dose.

Each potassium chloride extended-release tablet provides 8 mEq or 10 mEq of potassium chloride.

Potassium chloride extended-release tablets should be taken with meals and with a glass of water or other liquid. This product should not be taken on an empty stomach because of its potential for gastric irritation (see WARNINGS).

NOTE: Potassium chloride extended-release tablets must be swallowed whole and never crushed, chewed or sucked.
Norethindrone

Norethindrone

To achieve maximum contraceptive effectiveness, norethindrone tablets must be taken exactly as directed. One tablet is taken every day, at the same time. Administration is continuous, with no interruption between pill packs. See PATIENT LABELING for detailed instructions.
Morphine Sulfate

Morphine Sulfate

2.1 Initial Dosing

Morphine sulfate extended-release tablets should be prescribed only by healthcare professionals who are knowledgeable in the use of potent opioids for the management of chronic pain.

Initiate the dosing regimen for each patient individually, taking into account the patient's prior analgesic treatment experience and risk factors for addiction, abuse, and misuse [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)]. Monitor patients closely for respiratory depression, especially within the first 24 to 72 hours of initiating therapy with morphine sulfate extended-release tablets [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

Morphine sulfate extended-release tablets must be taken whole. Crushing, chewing, or dissolving morphine sulfate extended-release tablets will result in uncontrolled delivery of morphine and can lead to overdose or death [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].

Use of Morphine Sulfate Extended-release Tablets as the First Opioid Analgesic

Initiate treatment with morphine sulfate extended-release tablets with 15 mg tablets orally every 8 or 12 hours.

Use of Morphine Sulfate Extended-release Tablets in Patients who are not Opioid Tolerant

The starting dose for patients who are not opioid tolerant is morphine sulfate extended-release tablets 15 mg orally every 12 hours. Patients who are opioid tolerant are those receiving, for one week or longer, at least 60 mg oral morphine per day, 25 mcg transdermal fentanyl per hour, 30 mg oral oxycodone per day, 8 mg oral hydromorphone per day, 25 mg oral oxymorphone per day, or an equianalgesic dose of another opioid.

Use of higher starting doses in patients who are not opioid tolerant may cause fatal respiratory depression.

Conversion from Other Oral Morphine to Morphine Sulfate Extended-release Tablets

Patients receiving other oral morphine formulations may be converted to morphine sulfate extended-release tablets by administering one-half of the patient's 24-hour requirement as morphine sulfate extended-release tablets on an every-12-hour schedule or by administering one-third of the patient's daily requirement as morphine sulfate extended-release tablets on an every-8-hour schedule.

Conversion from Other Opioids to Morphine Sulfate Extended-release Tablets

There are no established conversion ratios for conversion from other opioids to morphine sulfate extended-release tablets defined by clinical trials. Discontinue all other around-the-clock opioid drugs when morphine sulfate extended-release tablet therapy is initiated and initiate dosing using morphine sulfate extended-release tablets 15 mg orally every 8 to 12 hours.

It is safer to underestimate a patient’s 24-hour oral morphine requirements and provide rescue medication (e.g., immediate-release morphine) than to overestimate the 24-hour oral morphine requirements and manage an adverse reaction. While useful tables of opioid equivalents are readily available, there is substantial inter-patient variability in the relative potency of different opioid drugs and products.

Conversion from Parenteral Morphine or Other Opioids (Parenteral or Oral) to Morphine Sulfate Extended-release Tablets

When converting from parenteral morphine or other non-morphine opioids (parenteral or oral) to morphine sulfate extended-release tablets, consider the following general points:

Parenteral to Oral Morphine Ratio

Between 2 mg to 6 mg of oral morphine may be required to provide analgesia equivalent to 1 mg of parenteral morphine. Typically, a dose of morphine that is approximately 3 times the previous daily parenteral morphine requirement is sufficient.

Other Parenteral or Oral Non-Morphine Opioids to Oral Morphine Sulfate

Specific recommendations are not available because of a lack of systematic evidence for these types of analgesic substitutions. Published relative potency data are available, but such ratios are approximations. In general, begin with half of the estimated daily morphine requirement as the initial dose, managing inadequate analgesia by supplementation with immediate-release morphine.

Conversion from Methadone to Morphine Sulfate Extended-release Tablets

Close monitoring is of particular importance when converting methadone to other opioid agonists. The ratio between methadone and other opioid agonists may vary widely as a function of previous dose exposure. Methadone has a long half-life and can accumulate in the plasma.

2.2 Titration and Maintenance of Therapy

Individually titrate morphine sulfate extended-release tablets to a dose that provides adequate analgesia and minimizes adverse reactions. Continually reevaluate patients receiving morphine sulfate extended-release tablets to assess the maintenance of pain control and the relative incidence of adverse reactions, as well as monitoring for the development of addiction, abuse, or misuse. Frequent communication is important among the prescriber, other members of the healthcare team, the patient, and the caregiver/family during periods of changing analgesic requirements, including initial titration. During chronic therapy periodically reassess the continued need for the use of opioid analgesics.

Patients who experience breakthrough pain may require a dose increase of morphine sulfate extended-release tablets, or may need rescue medication with an appropriate dose of an immediate-release analgesic. If the level of pain increases after dose stabilization, attempt to identify the source of increased pain before increasing the morphine sulfate extended-release tablet dose. Because steady-state plasma concentrations are approximated in one day, morphine sulfate extended-release tablet dosage adjustments may be done every 1 to 2 days.

If unacceptable opioid-related adverse reactions are observed, the subsequent doses may be reduced. Adjust the dose to obtain an appropriate balance between management of pain and opioid-related adverse reactions.

2.3 Discontinuation of Morphine Sulfate Extended-release Tablets

When the patient no longer requires therapy with morphine sulfate extended-release tablets, use a gradual downward titration of the dose to prevent signs and symptoms of withdrawal in the physically-dependent patient. Do not abruptly discontinue morphine sulfate extended-release tablets.

2.4 Administration of Morphine Sulfate Extended-release Tablets

Morphine sulfate extended-release tablets must be taken whole. Crushing, chewing, or dissolving morphine sulfate extended-release tablets will result in uncontrolled delivery of morphine and can lead to overdose or death [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].
Isovue 250

Isovue 250

The dose of prazosin hydrochloride capsules should be adjusted according to the patient’s individual blood pressure response. The following is a guide to its administration:

Initial Dose

1 mg two or three times a day (see WARNINGS).

Maintenance Dose

Dosage may be slowly increased to a total daily dose of 20 mg given in divided doses. The therapeutic dosages most commonly employed have ranged from 6 mg to 15 mg daily given in divided doses. Doses higher than 20 mg usually do not increase efficacy, however a few patients may benefit from further increases up to a daily dose of 40 mg given in divided doses. After initial titration some patients can be maintained adequately on a twice daily dosage regimen.

Use With Other Drugs

When adding a diuretic or other antihypertensive agent, the dose of prazosin hydrochloride capsules should be reduced to 1 mg or 2 mg three times a day and retitration then carried out.

Concomitant administration of prazosin hydrochloride capsules with a PDE-5 inhibitor can result in additive blood pressure lowering effects and symptomatic hypotension; therefore, PDE-5 inhibitor therapy should be initiated at the lowest dose in patients taking prazosin hydrochloride capsules.
Bicalutamide

Bicalutamide

2.1 Recommended Dose and Schedule

The recommended dose for bicalutamide tablets therapy in combination with an LHRH analog is one 50 mg tablet once daily (morning or evening), with or without food. It is recommended that bicalutamide tablets be taken at the same time each day. Treatment with bicalutamide tablets should be started at the same time as treatment with an LHRH analog. If a dose of bicalutamide tablets is missed, take the next dose at the scheduled time. Do not take the missed dose and do not double the next dose.

2.2 Dosage Adjustment in Renal Impairment

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with renal impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7)].

2.3 Dosage Adjustment in Hepatic Impairment

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment. In patients with severe liver impairment (n = 4), although there was a 76% increase in the half-life (5.9 and 10.4 days for normal and impaired patients, respectively) of the active enantiomer of bicalutamide no dosage adjustment is necessary [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6)].
Acyclovir

Acyclovir

2.1 Usual Dosage and Administration

The usual dosage and frequency of administration of doxycycline differs from that of the other tetracyclines. Exceeding the recommended dosage may result in an increased incidence of side effects.

Adults

The usual dose of oral doxycycline is 200 mg on the first day of treatment (administered 100 mg every 12 hours), followed by a maintenance dose of 100 mg daily. The maintenance dose may be administered as a single dose or as 50 mg every 12 hours. In the management of more severe infections (particularly chronic infections of the urinary tract), 100 mg every 12 hours is recommended.

For Pediatric Patients Above 8 Years of Age

The recommended dosage schedule for children weighing 45 kg or less is 4.4 mg/kg of body weight divided into two doses on the first day of treatment, followed by 2.2 mg/kg of body weight given as a single daily dose or divided into two doses on subsequent days. For more severe infections up to 4.4 mg/kg of body weight may be used. For children over 45 kg, the usual adult dose should be used.

Administration of adequate amounts of fluid along with capsule and tablet forms of drugs in the tetracycline-class is recommended to wash down the drugs and reduce the risk of esophageal irritation and ulceration [see Adverse Reactions (6)].

If gastric irritation occurs, doxycycline may be given with food or milk [see Clinical Pharmacology (12)].

When used in streptococcal infections, therapy should be continued for 10 days.

Uncomplicated Urethral, Endocervical, or Rectal Infection Caused by Chlamydia Trachomatis

100 mg by mouth twice a day for 7 days. As an alternate dosing regimen for uncomplicated urethral or endocervical infection caused by Chlamydia trachomatis, administer 200 mg by mouth once a day for 7 days.

Uncomplicated Gonococcal Infections in Adults (Except Anorectal Infections in Men)

100 mg, by mouth, twice-a-day for 7 days. As an alternate single visit dose, administer 300 mg stat followed in one hour by a second 300 mg dose.

Nongonococcal Urethritis (NGU) Caused by U. Urealyticum

100 mg by mouth twice-a-day for 7 days.

Syphilis–Early

Patients who are allergic to penicillin should be treated with doxycycline 100 mg by mouth twice-a-day for 2 weeks.

Syphilis of More Than One Year’s Duration

Patients who are allergic to penicillin should be treated with doxycycline 100 mg by mouth twice-a-day for 4 weeks.

Acute Epididymo-Orchitis Caused by C. Trachomatis

100 mg, by mouth, twice-a-day for at least 10 days.

2.2 For Prophylaxis of Malaria

For adults, the recommended dose is 100 mg daily. For children over 8 years of age, the recommended dose is 2 mg/kg given once daily up to the adult dose. Prophylaxis should begin 1 or 2 days before travel to the malarious area. Prophylaxis should be continued daily during travel in the malarious area and for 4 weeks after the traveler leaves the malarious area.

2.3 Inhalational Anthrax (Post-Exposure)

Adults

100 mg, of doxycycline, by mouth, twice-a-day for 60 days.

Children

weighing less than 45 kg, 2.2 mg/kg of body weight, by mouth, twice-a-day for 60 days. Children weighing 45 kg or more should receive the adult dose.

2.4 Sprinkling the Tablet over Applesauce

Doxycycline hyclate delayed-release tablets may also be administered by carefully breaking up the tablet and sprinkling the tablet contents (delayed-release beads) on a spoonful of applesauce. The delayed-release beads must not be crushed or damaged when breaking up the tablet. Any loss of beads in the transfer would prevent using the dose. The applesauce/doxycycline mixture should be swallowed immediately without chewing and may be followed by a glass of water if desired. The applesauce should not be hot, and it should be soft enough to be swallowed without chewing. In the event that a prepared dose of applesauce/doxycycline cannot be taken immediately, the mixture should be discarded and not stored for later use.
Anoro Ellipta

Anoro Ellipta

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of diclofenac sodium extended-release tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use diclofenac sodium extended-release tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with diclofenac sodium extended-release tablets the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient’s needs.

For the relief of osteoarthritis, the recommended dosage is 100 mg q.d.

For the relief of rheumatoid arthritis, the recommended dosage is 100 mg q.d. In the rare patient where diclofenac sodium extended-release tablets 100 mg/day is unsatisfactory, the dose may be increased to 100 mg b.i.d. if the benefits outweigh the clinical risks of increased side effects.

Different formulations of diclofenac [Voltaren®* (diclofenac sodium enteric-coated tablets); Voltaren®-XR* (diclofenac sodium extended-release tablets); Cataflam®* (diclofenac potassium immediate-release tablets)] are not necessarily bioequivalent even if the milligram strength is the same.
Bupropion Hydrochloride...

Bupropion Hydrochloride

2.1 Usual Dosage

Treatment with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) should be initiated before the patient’s planned quit day, while the patient is still smoking, because it takes approximately 1 week of treatment to achieve steady-state blood levels of bupropion. The patient should set a “target quit date” within the first 2 weeks of treatment with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR).

Dosing: To minimize the risk of seizure:
• Begin dosing with one 150 mg tablet per day for 3 days. • Increase dose to 300 mg/day given as one 150 mg tablet twice each day with an interval of at least 8 hours between each dose. • Do not exceed 300 mg/day.
Bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) should be swallowed whole and not crushed, divided, or chewed, as this may lead to an increased risk of adverse effects including seizures [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].

Bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) may be taken with or without food [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.2 Duration of Treatment

Treatment with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) should be continued for 7 to 12 weeks. If the patient has not quit smoking after 7 to 12 weeks, it is unlikely that he or she will quit during that attempt so treatment with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) should probably be discontinued and the treatment plan reassessed. The goal of therapy with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) is complete abstinence.

Discuss discontinuing treatment with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) after 12 weeks if the patient feels ready but consider whether the patient may benefit from ongoing treatment. Patients who successfully quit after 12 weeks of treatment but do not feel ready to discontinue treatment should be considered for ongoing therapy with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR); longer treatment should be guided by the relative benefits and risks for individual patients.

It is important that patients continue to receive counseling and support throughout treatment with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) and for a period of time thereafter.

2.3 Individualization of Therapy

Patients are more likely to quit smoking and remain abstinent if they are seen frequently and receive support from their physicians or other healthcare professionals. It is important to ensure that patients read the instructions provided to them and have their questions answered. Physicians should review the patient’s overall smoking cessation program that includes treatment with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR). Patients should be advised of the importance of participating in the behavioral interventions, counseling, and/or support services to be used in conjunction with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) [see Medication Guide].

Patients who fail to quit smoking during an attempt may benefit from interventions to improve their chances for success on subsequent attempts. Patients who are unsuccessful should be evaluated to determine why they failed. A new quit attempt should be encouraged when factors that contributed to failure can be eliminated or reduced, and conditions are more favorable.

2.4 Maintenance

Tobacco dependence is a chronic condition. Some patients may need on-going treatment. Whether to continue treatment with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) for periods longer than 12 weeks for smoking cessation must be determined for individual patients.

2.5 Combination Treatment with Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-release Tablets (SR) and a Nicotine Transdermal System (NTS)

Combination treatment with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) and NTS may be prescribed for smoking cessation. The prescriber should review the complete prescribing information for both bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) and NTS before using combination treatment [see Clinical Studies (14)]. Monitoring for treatment-emergent hypertension in patients treated with the combination of bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) and NTS is recommended.

2.6 Dose Adjustment in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

In patients with moderate to severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh score: 7 to 15), the maximum dose should not exceed 150 mg every other day. In patients with mild hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh score: 5 to 6), consider reducing the dose and/or frequency of dosing [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.7 Dose Adjustment in Patients with Renal Impairment

Consider reducing the dose and/or frequency of bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) in patients with renal impairment (Glomerular Filtration Rate less than 90 mL/min) [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.8 Use of Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-release Tablets (SR) with Reversible MAOIs Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) in a patient who is being treated with a reversible MAOI such as linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. Drug interactions can increase the risk of hypertensive reactions [see Contraindications (4), Drug Interactions (7.6)].

In some cases, a patient already receiving therapy with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of hypertensive reactions in a particular patient, bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue.

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of a drug interaction with such use [see Contraindications (4), Drug Interactions (7.6)].
Keytruda

Keytruda

2.1 Hyperlipidemia (Heterozygous Familial and Nonfamilial) and Mixed Dyslipidemia (Fredrickson Types IIa and IIb)

The recommended starting dose of atorvastatin calcium tablets is 10 mg or 20 mg once daily. Patients who require a large reduction in LDL-C (more than 45%) may be started at 40 mg once daily. The dosage range of atorvastatin calcium tablets is 10 mg to 80 mg once daily. Atorvastatin calcium tablets can be administered as a single dose at any time of the day, with or without food. The starting dose and maintenance doses of atorvastatin calcium tablets should be individualized according to patient characteristics such as goal of therapy and response (see current NCEP Guidelines). After initiation and/or upon titration of atorvastatin calcium tablets, lipid levels should be analyzed within 2 to 4 weeks and dosage adjusted accordingly.

2.2 Heterozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia in Pediatric Patients (10 to 17 Years of Age)

The recommended starting dose of atorvastatin calcium tablets is 10 mg/day; the maximum recommended dose is 20 mg/day (doses greater than 20 mg have not been studied in this patient population). Doses should be individualized according to the recommended goal of therapy [see current NCEP Pediatric Panel Guidelines, Clinical Pharmacology (12) and Indications and Usage (1.2)]. Adjustments should be made at intervals of 4 weeks or more.

2.3 Homozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The dosage of atorvastatin calcium tablets in patients with homozygous FH is 10 mg to 80 mg daily. Atorvastatin calcium tablets should be used as an adjunct to other lipid-lowering treatments (e.g., LDL apheresis) in these patients or if such treatments are unavailable.

2.4 Concomitant Lipid-lowering Therapy

Atorvastatin calcium tablets may be used with bile acid resins. The combination of HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors (statins) and fibrates should generally be used with caution [see Warnings and Precautions, Skeletal Muscle (5.1), Drug Interactions (7)].

2.5 Dosage in Patients with Renal Impairment

Renal disease does not affect the plasma concentrations nor LDL-C reduction of atorvastatin calcium tablets; thus, dosage adjustment in patients with renal dysfunction is not necessary [see Warnings and Precautions, Skeletal Muscle (5.1), Clinical Pharmacology, Pharmacokinetics (12.3)].

2.6 Dosage in Patients Taking Cyclosporine, Clarithromycin, Itraconazole or Certain Protease Inhibitors

In patients taking cyclosporine or the HIV protease inhibitors (tipranavir plus ritonavir) or the hepatitis C protease inhibitor (telaprevir), therapy with atorvastatin calcium tablets should be avoided. In patients with HIV taking lopinavir plus ritonavir, caution should be used when prescribing atorvastatin calcium tablets and the lowest dose necessary employed. In patients taking clarithromycin, itraconazole or in patients with HIV taking a combination of saquinavir plus ritonavir, darunavir plus ritonavir, fosamprenavir, or fosamprenavir plus ritonavir, therapy with atorvastatin calcium tablets should be limited to 20 mg, and appropriate clinical assessment is recommended to ensure that the lowest dose necessary of atorvastatin calcium tablets is employed. In patients with HIV taking nelfinavir, therapy with atorvastatin calcium tablets should be limited to 40 mg, and appropriate clinical assessment is recommended to ensure that the lowest dose necessary of atorvastatin calcium tablets is employed [see Warnings and Precautions, Skeletal Muscle (5.1), Drug Interactions (7)].
Levalbuterol Hydrochlor...

Levalbuterol Hydrochloride Solution

Levalbuterol inhalation solution (concentrate) is for oral inhalation only. Dilute with sterile normal saline before administration. Administer by nebulization using a standard jet nebulizer (with a face mask or mouthpiece) connected to an air compressor. Do not exceed recommended dose. For dosages less than 1.25 mg, the non-concentrate (i.e., levalbuterol inhalation solution, 3 mL) formulation must be used.

Children 6 to 11 Years Old: The recommended dosage of levalbuterol inhalation solution for patients 6 to 11 years old is 0.31 mg administered 3 times a day, by nebulization. Routine dosing should not exceed 0.63 mg 3 times a day.

Adults and Adolescents ≥ 12 Years Old: The recommended starting dosage of levalbuterol inhalation solution for patients 12 years of age and older is 0.63 mg administered 3 times a day, every 6 to 8 hours, by nebulization.

Patients 12 years of age and older with more severe asthma or patients who do not respond adequately to a dose of 0.63 mg of levalbuterol inhalation solution may benefit from a dosage of 1.25 mg 3 times a day.

Patients receiving the highest dose of levalbuterol inhalation solution should be monitored closely for adverse systemic effects, and the risks of such effects should be balanced against the potential for improved efficacy.

The use of levalbuterol inhalation solution can be continued as medically indicated to help control recurring bouts of bronchospasm. During this time, most patients gain optimal benefit from regular use of the inhalation solution.

If a previously effective dosage regimen fails to provide the usual response this may be a marker of destabilization of asthma and requires reevaluation of the patient and the treatment regimen, giving special consideration to the possible need for anti-inflammatory treatment, e.g., corticosteroids.

The drug compatibility (physical and chemical), efficacy, and safety of levalbuterol inhalation solution when mixed with other drugs in a nebulizer have not been established.

The safety and efficacy of levalbuterol inhalation solution have been established in clinical trials when administered using the PARI LC Jet™ and PARI LC Plus™ nebulizers, and the PARI Master® Dura-Neb® 2000 and Dura-Neb® 3000 compressors. The safety and efficacy of levalbuterol inhalation solution when administered using other nebulizer systems have not been established.
Levalbuterol Solution

Levalbuterol Solution

Levalbuterol inhalation solution is for oral inhalation only. Administer by nebulization using a standard jet nebulizer (with a face mask or mouthpiece) connected to an air compressor. Do not exceed recommended dose.

Children 6 to 11 Years Old: The recommended dosage of levalbuterol inhalation solution for patients 6 to 11 years old is 0.31 mg administered 3 times a day, by nebulization. Routine dosing should not exceed 0.63 mg 3 times a day.

Adults and Adolescents ≥ 12 Years Old: The recommended starting dosage of levalbuterol inhalation solution for patients 12 years of age and older is 0.63 mg administered 3 times a day, every 6 to 8 hours, by nebulization.

Patients 12 years of age and older with more severe asthma or patients who do not respond adequately to a dose of 0.63 mg of levalbuterol inhalation solution may benefit from a dosage of 1.25 mg 3 times a day.

Patients receiving the highest dose of levalbuterol inhalation solution should be monitored closely for adverse systemic effects, and the risks of such effects should be balanced against the potential for improved efficacy.

The use of levalbuterol inhalation solution can be continued as medically indicated to help control recurring bouts of bronchospasm. During this time, most patients gain optimal benefit from regular use of the inhalation solution.

If a previously effective dosage regimen fails to provide the usual response this may be a marker of destabilization of asthma and requires reevaluation of the patient and the treatment regimen, giving special consideration to the possible need for anti-inflammatory treatment, e.g., corticosteroids.

The drug compatibility (physical and chemical), efficacy, and safety of levalbuterol inhalation solution when mixed with other drugs in a nebulizer have not been established.

The safety and efficacy of levalbuterol inhalation solution have been established in clinical trials when administered using the PARI LC Jet™ and PARI LC Plus™ nebulizers, and the PARI Master® Dura-Neb® 2000 and Dura-Neb® 3000 compressors. The safety and efficacy of levalbuterol inhalation solution when administered using other nebulizer systems have not been established.
Atorvastatin Calcium

Atorvastatin Calcium

2.1 Hyperlipidemia (Heterozygous Familial and Nonfamilial) and Mixed Dyslipidemia (Fredrickson Types IIa and IIb)

The recommended starting dose of atorvastatin calcium tablets is 10 mg or 20 mg once daily. Patients who require a large reduction in LDL-C (more than 45%) may be started at 40 mg once daily. The dosage range of atorvastatin calcium tablets is 10 mg to 80 mg once daily. Atorvastatin calcium tablets can be administered as a single dose at any time of the day, with or without food. The starting dose and maintenance doses of atorvastatin calcium tablets should be individualized according to patient characteristics such as goal of therapy and response (see current NCEP Guidelines). After initiation and/or upon titration of atorvastatin calcium tablets, lipid levels should be analyzed within 2 to 4 weeks and dosage adjusted accordingly.

2.2 Heterozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia in Pediatric Patients (10 to 17 Years of Age)

The recommended starting dose of atorvastatin calcium tablets is 10 mg/day; the maximum recommended dose is 20 mg/day (doses greater than 20 mg have not been studied in this patient population). Doses should be individualized according to the recommended goal of therapy [see current NCEP Pediatric Panel Guidelines, Clinical Pharmacology (12), and Indications and Usage (1.2)]. Adjustments should be made at intervals of 4 weeks or more.

2.3 Homozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The dosage of atorvastatin calcium tablets in patients with homozygous FH is 10 mg to 80 mg daily. Atorvastatin calcium tablets should be used as an adjunct to other lipid-lowering treatments (e.g., LDL apheresis) in these patients or if such treatments are unavailable.

2.4 Concomitant Lipid-Lowering Therapy

Atorvastatin calcium tablets may be used with bile acid resins. The combination of HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors (statins) and fibrates should generally be used with caution [see Warnings and Precautions, Skeletal Muscle (5.1), Drug Interactions (7)].

2.5 Dosage in Patients with Renal Impairment

Renal disease does not affect the plasma concentrations nor LDL-C reduction of atorvastatin calcium tablets; thus, dosage adjustment in patients with renal dysfunction is not necessary [see Warnings and Precautions, Skeletal Muscle (5.1), Clinical Pharmacology, Pharmacokinetics (12.3)].

2.6 Dosage in Patients Taking Cyclosporine, Clarithromycin, Itraconazole, or Certain Protease Inhibitors

In patients taking cyclosporine or the HIV protease inhibitors (tipranavir plus ritonavir) or the hepatitis C protease inhibitor (telaprevir), therapy with atorvastatin calcium tablets should be avoided. In patients with HIV taking lopinavir plus ritonavir, caution should be used when prescribing atorvastatin calcium tablets and the lowest dose necessary employed. In patients taking clarithromycin, itraconazole, or in patients with HIV taking a combination of saquinavir plus ritonavir, darunavir plus ritonavir, fosamprenavir, or fosamprenavir plus ritonavir, therapy with atorvastatin calcium tablets should be limited to 20 mg, and appropriate clinical assessment is recommended to ensure that the lowest dose necessary of atorvastatin calcium tablets is employed. In patients taking the HIV protease inhibitor nelfinavir or the hepatitis C protease inhibitor boceprevir, therapy with atorvastatin calcium tablets should be limited to 40 mg, and appropriate clinical assessment is recommended to ensure that the lowest dose necessary of atorvastatin calcium tablets is employed [see Warnings and Precautions, Skeletal Muscle (5.1), Drug Interactions (7)].
Clomipramine Hydrochlor...

Clomipramine Hydrochloride

The treatment regimens described below are based on those used in controlled clinical trials of clomipramine hydrochloride capsules in 520 adults, and 91 children and adolescents with OCD. During initial titration, clomipramine hydrochloride capsules should be given in divided doses with meals to reduce gastrointestinal side effects. The goal of this initial titration phase is to minimize side effects by permitting tolerance to side effects to develop or allowing the patient time to adapt if tolerance does not develop.

Because both clomipramine and its active metabolite, desmethylclomipramine, have long elimination half-lives, the prescriber should take into consideration the fact that steady-state plasma levels may not be achieved until 2 to 3 weeks after dosage change (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). Therefore, after initial titration, it may be appropriate to wait 2 to 3 weeks between further dosage adjustments.

Initial Treatment/Dose Adjustment (Adults)

Treatment with clomipramine hydrochloride capsules should be initiated at a dosage of 25 mg daily and gradually increased, as tolerated, to approximately 100 mg during the first 2 weeks. During initial titration, clomipramine hydrochloride capsules should be given in divided doses with meals to reduce gastrointestinal side effects. Thereafter, the dosage may be increased gradually over the next several weeks, up to a maximum of 250 mg daily. After titration, the total daily dose may be given once daily at bedtime to minimize daytime sedation.

Initial Treatment/Dose Adjustment (Children and Adolescents)

As with adults, the starting dose is 25 mg daily and should be gradually increased (also given in divided doses with meals to reduce gastrointestinal side effects) during the first 2 weeks, as tolerated, up to a daily maximum of 3 mg/kg or 100 mg, whichever is smaller. Thereafter, the dosage may be increased gradually over the next several weeks up to a daily maximum of 3 mg/kg or 200 mg, whichever is smaller (see PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use). As with adults, after titration, the total daily dose may be given once daily at bedtime to minimize daytime sedation.

Maintenance/Continuation Treatment (Adults, Children, and Adolescents)

While there are no systematic studies that answer the question of how long to continue clomipramine hydrochloride capsules, OCD is a chronic condition and it is reasonable to consider continuation for a responding patient. Although the efficacy of clomipramine after 10 weeks has not been documented in controlled trials, patients have been continued in therapy under double-blind conditions for up to one year without loss of benefit. However, dosage adjustments should be made to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage, and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for treatment. During maintenance, the total daily dose may be given once daily at bedtime.

Switching a Patient to or from a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with clomipramine hydrochloride capsules. Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping clomipramine hydrochloride capsules before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Use of Clomipramine Hydrochloride Capsules with Other MAOIs, such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start clomipramine hydrochloride capsules in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

In some cases, a patient already receiving clomipramine hydrochloride capsules therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, clomipramine hydrochloride capsules should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with clomipramine hydrochloride capsules may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue (see WARNINGS).

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with clomipramine hydrochloride capsules is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use (see WARNINGS).
Pantoprazole Sodium

Pantoprazole Sodium

2.1 Recommended Dosing Schedule

Pantoprazole sodium is supplied as delayed-release tablets. The recommended dosages are outlined in Table 1.
Table 1: Recommended Dosing Schedule for Pantoprazole Sodium Delayed-release Tablets * For adult patients who have not healed after 8 weeks of treatment, an additional 8-week course of pantoprazole sodium delayed-release tablets may be considered. † Controlled studies did not extend beyond 12 months. ‡ Dosage regimens should be adjusted to individual patient needs and should continue for as long as clinically indicated. Doses up to 240 mg daily have been administered.
Indication

Dose

Frequency

Short-term Treatment of Erosive Esophagitis Associated with GERD

   Adults

40 mg

Once daily for up to 8 weeks*

   Children (5 years and older)

   ≥ 15 kg to < 40 kg

20 mg

Once daily for up to 8 weeks

   ≥ 40 kg

40 mg

Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis

   Adults

40 mg

Once daily†

Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions Including Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome

   Adults

40 mg

Twice daily‡

2.2 Administration Instructions

Directions for method of administration for the delayed-release tablet dosage form are presented in Table 2.
Table 2: Administration Instructions * Patients should be cautioned that pantoprazole sodium delayed-release tablets should not be split, chewed, or crushed.
Formulation

Route

Instructions*

Delayed-release Tablets

Oral

Swallowed whole, with or without food

Pantoprazole Sodium Delayed-release Tablets

Pantoprazole sodium delayed-release tablets should be swallowed whole, with or without food in the stomach. If patients are unable to swallow a 40 mg tablet, two 20 mg tablets may be taken. Concomitant administration of antacids does not affect the absorption of pantoprazole sodium delayed-release tablets.
Bydureon

Bydureon

2.1 Adults

The recommended dose for nevirapine tablets is one 200 mg tablet daily for the first 14 days, followed by one 200 mg tablet twice daily, in combination with other antiretroviral agents. The lead-in period has been observed to decrease the incidence of rash. For concomitantly administered antiretroviral therapy, the manufacturer’s recommended dosage and monitoring should be followed.

Nevirapine extended-release tablets (400 mg once daily) are also available for use after the lead-in period. Patients must never take more than one form of nevirapine at the same time.

2.2 Pediatric Patients

The recommended oral dose for pediatric patients 15 days and older is 150 mg/m2 once daily for 14 days followed by 150 mg/m2 twice daily thereafter. The total daily dose should not exceed 400 mg for any patient.
Table 1 Calculation of the Volume of Nevirapine Oral Suspension (50 mg/5 mL) Required for Pediatric Dosing Based on Body Surface and a Dose of 150 mg/m2
BSA range (m2)

Volume (mL)

0.06 to 0.12

1.25

0.12 to 0.25

2.5

0.25 to 0.42

5

0.42 to 0.58

7.5

0.58 to 0.75

10

0.75 to 0.92

12.5

0.92 to 1.08

15

1.08 to 1.25

17.5

1.25+

20

Nevirapine suspension should be shaken gently prior to administration. It is important to administer the entire measured dose of suspension by using an oral dosing syringe or dosing cup. An oral dosing syringe is recommended, particularly for volumes of 5 mL or less. If a dosing cup is used, it should be thoroughly rinsed with water and the rinse should also be administered to the patient.

2.3 Monitoring of Patients

Intensive clinical and laboratory monitoring, including liver enzyme tests, is essential at baseline and during the first 18 weeks of treatment with nevirapine tablets. The optimal frequency of monitoring during this period has not been established. Some experts recommend clinical and laboratory monitoring more often than once per month and in particular, would include monitoring of liver enzyme tests at baseline, prior to dose escalation and at two weeks post-dose escalation. After the initial 18-week period, frequent clinical and laboratory monitoring should continue throughout nevirapine treatment [see Warnings and Precautions (5)]. In some cases, hepatic injury has progressed despite discontinuation of treatment.

2.4 Dosage Adjustment

Patients with Rash

Discontinue nevirapine tablets if a patient experiences severe rash or any rash accompanied by constitutional findings [see Boxed Warning, Warnings and Precautions (5.2) and Patient Counseling Information (17.1)]. Do not increase nevirapine dose if a patient experiences mild to moderate rash without constitutional symptoms during the 14-day lead-in period of 200 mg/day (150 mg/m2/day in pediatric patients) until the rash has resolved [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2) and Patient Counseling Information (17.1)]. The total duration of the once daily lead-in dosing period should not exceed 28 days at which point an alternative regimen should be sought.

Patients with Hepatic Events

If a clinical (symptomatic) hepatic event occurs, permanently discontinue nevirapine tablets. Do not restart nevirapine tablets after recovery [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].

Patients with Dose Interruption

For patients who interrupt nevirapine dosing for more than 7 days, restart the recommended dosing, using one 200 mg tablet daily (150 mg/m2/day in pediatric patients) for the first 14 days (lead-in) followed by one 200 mg tablet twice daily (150 mg/m2 twice daily for pediatric patients).

Patients with Renal Impairment

Patients with CrCL greater than or equal to 20 mL/min do not require an adjustment in nevirapine dosing. An additional 200 mg dose of nevirapine tablets following each dialysis treatment is indicated in patients requiring dialysis. Nevirapine metabolites may accumulate in patients receiving dialysis; however, the clinical significance of this accumulation is not known [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Risperidone

Risperidone

Table 1. Recommended Daily Dosage by Indication

Initial Dose

Titration (Increments)

Target Dose

Effective Dose Range

Schizophrenia: adults (2.1)

2 mg

1 mg to 2 mg

4 mg to 8 mg

4 mg to 16 mg

Schizophrenia: adolescents (2.2)

0.5 mg

0.5 mg to 1 mg

3 mg

1 mg to 6 mg

Bipolar mania: adults (2.2)

2 mg to 3 mg

1 mg

1 mg to 6 mg

1 mg to 6 mg

Bipolar mania: children and adolescents (2.2)

0.5 mg

0.5 mg to 1mg

1 mg to 2.5 mg

1 mg to 6 mg

Irritability in autistic disorder (2.3)

0.25 mg

Can increase to 0.5 mg by Day 4: (body weight less than 20 kg)

0.5 mg

Can increase to 1 mg by Day 4: (body weight greater than or equal to 20 kg)

After Day 4, at intervals of > 2 weeks: 0.25 mg (body weight less than 20 kg)

0.5 mg

(body weight greater than or equal to 20 kg)

0.5 mg:

(body weight less than 20 kg)

1 mg:

(body weight greater than or equal to 20 kg)

0.5 mg to 3 mg

Severe Renal and Hepatic Impairment in Adults: use a lower starting dose of 0.5 mg twice daily. May increase to dosages above 1.5 mg twice daily at intervals of one week or longer.

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Usual Initial Dose

Risperidone tablets can be administered once or twice daily. Initial dosing is 2 mg/day. May increase the dose at intervals of 24 hours or greater, in increments of 1 to 2 mg/day, as tolerated, to a recommended dose of 4 to 8 mg/day. In some patients, slower titration may be appropriate. Efficacy has been demonstrated in a range of 4 to 16 mg/day. However, doses above 6 mg/day for twice daily dosing were not demonstrated to be more efficacious than lower doses, were associated with more extrapyramidal symptoms and other adverse effects, and are generally not recommended. In a single study supporting once daily dosing, the efficacy results were generally stronger for 8 mg than for 4 mg. The safety of doses above 16 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Adolescents

The initial dose is 0.5 mg once daily, administered as a single-daily dose in the morning or evening. The dose may be adjusted at intervals of 24 hours or greater, in increments of 0.5 mg or 1 mg/day, as tolerated, to a recommended dose of 3 mg/day. Although efficacy has been demonstrated in studies of adolescent patients with schizophrenia at doses between 1 and 6 mg/day, no additional benefit was observed above 3 mg/day, and higher doses were associated with more adverse events. Doses higher than 6 mg/day have not been studied.

Patients experiencing persistent somnolence may benefit from administering half the daily dose twice daily.

Maintenance Therapy

While it is unknown how long a patient with schizophrenia should remain on risperidone tablets, the effectiveness of risperidone 2 to 8 mg/day at delaying relapse was demonstrated in a controlled trial in adult patients who had been clinically stable for at least 4 weeks and were then followed for a period of 1 to 2 years [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. Both adult and adolescent patients who respond acutely should generally be maintained on their effective dose beyond the acute episode. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Reinitiation of Treatment in Patients Previously Discontinued

Although there are no data to specifically address reinitiation of treatment, it is recommended that after an interval off risperidone tablets, the initial titration schedule should be followed.

Switching From Other Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching schizophrenic patients from other antipsychotics to risperidone tablets, or treating patients with concomitant antipsychotics.

2.2 Bipolar Mania

Usual Dose

Adults

The initial dose range is 2 to 3 mg/day. The dose may be adjusted at intervals of 24 hours or greater, in increments of 1 mg/day. The effective dose range is 1 to 6 mg/day, as studied in the short-term, placebo-controlled trials. In these trials, short-term (3 week) anti-manic efficacy was demonstrated in a flexible dosage range of 1 to 6 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.2, 14.3)]. Risperidone tablet doses higher than 6 mg/day were not studied.

Pediatrics

The initial dose is 0.5 mg once daily, administered as a single-daily dose in the morning or evening. The dose may be adjusted at intervals of 24 hours or greater, in increments of 0.5 or 1 mg/day, as tolerated, to the recommended target dose of 1 to 2.5 mg/day. Although efficacy has been demonstrated in studies of pediatric patients with bipolar mania at doses between 0.5 and 6 mg/day, no additional benefit was observed above 2.5 mg/day, and higher doses were associated with more adverse events. Doses higher than 6 mg/day have not been studied.

Patients experiencing persistent somnolence may benefit from administering half the daily dose twice daily.

Maintenance Therapy

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to guide a clinician in the longer term management of a patient who improves during treatment of an acute manic episode with risperidone tablets. While it is generally agreed that pharmacological treatment beyond an acute response in mania is desirable, both for maintenance of the initial response and for prevention of new manic episodes, there are no systematically obtained data to support the use of risperidone tablets in such longer term treatment (i.e., beyond 3 weeks). The physician who elects to use risperidone tablets for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term risks and benefits of the drug for the individual patient.

2.3 Irritability Associated with Autistic Disorder – Pediatrics (Children and Adolescents)

The dosage of risperidone tablets should be individualized according to the response and tolerability of the patient. The total daily dose of risperidone tablets can be administered once daily, or half the total daily dose can be administered twice daily.

For patients with body weight less than 20 kg, initiate dosing at 0.25 mg/day. For patients with body weight greater than or equal to 20 kg, initiate dosing at 0.5 mg/day. After a minimum of 4 days, the dose may be increased to the recommended dose of 0.5 mg/day for patients less than 20 kg and 1 mg/day for patients greater than or equal to 20 kg. Maintain this dose for a minimum of 14 days. In patients not achieving sufficient clinical response, the dose may be increased at intervals of 2 weeks or greater, in increments of 0.25 mg/day for patients less than 20 kg, or increments of 0.5 mg/day for patients greater than or equal to 20 kg. The effective dose range is 0.5 to 3 mg/day. No dosing data are available for children who weigh less than 15 kg.

Once sufficient clinical response has been achieved and maintained, consider gradually lowering the dose to achieve the optimal balance of efficacy and safety. The physician who elects to use risperidone tablets for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term risks and benefits of the drug for the individual patient.

Patients experiencing persistent somnolence may benefit from a once-daily dose administered at bedtime or administering half the daily dose twice daily, or a reduction of the dose.

2.4 Dosing in Patients with Severe Renal or Hepatic Impairment

For patients with severe renal impairment (CLcr < 30 mL/min) or hepatic impairment (10 to 15 points on Child Pugh System), the initial starting dose is 0.5 mg twice daily. The dose may be increased in increments of 0.5 mg or less, administered twice daily. For doses above 1.5 mg twice daily, increase in intervals of one week or greater [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6 and 8.7)].

2.5 Dose Adjustments for Specific Drug Interactions

When risperidone tablets are coadministered with enzyme inducers (e.g., carbamazepine), the dose of risperidone tablets should be increased up to double the patient’s usual dose. It may be necessary to decrease the risperidone tablet dose when enzyme inducers such as carbamazepine are discontinued [see Drug Interactions (7.1)]. Similar effect may be expected with coadministration of risperidone tablets with other enzyme inducers (e.g., phenytoin, rifampin and phenobarbital).

When fluoxetine or paroxetine are coadministered with risperidone tablets, the dose of risperidone tablets should be reduced. The risperidone tablet dose should not exceed 8 mg/day in adults when coadministered with these drugs. When initiating therapy, risperidone tablets should be titrated slowly. It may be necessary to increase the risperidone tablet dose when enzyme inhibitors such as fluoxetine or paroxetine are discontinued [see Drug Interactions (7.1)].
Lamotrigine

Lamotrigine

2.1 General Dosing Considerations

Rash

There are suggestions, yet to be proven, that the risk of severe, potentially life-threatening rash may be increased by (1) coadministration of lamotrigine tablets with valproate, (2) exceeding the recommended initial dose of lamotrigine tablets, or (3) exceeding the recommended dose escalation for lamotrigine tablets. However, cases have occurred in the absence of these factors [see Boxed Warning]. Therefore, it is important that the dosing recommendations be followed closely.

The risk of nonserious rash may be increased when the recommended initial dose and/or the rate of dose escalation for lamotrigine tablets is exceeded and in patients with a history of allergy or rash to other AEDs.

It is recommended that lamotrigine tablets not be restarted in patients who discontinued due to rash associated with prior treatment with lamotrigine unless the potential benefits clearly outweigh the risks. If the decision is made to restart a patient who has discontinued lamotrigine tablets, the need to restart with the initial dosing recommendations should be assessed. The greater the interval of time since the previous dose, the greater consideration should be given to restarting with the initial dosing recommendations. If a patient has discontinued lamotrigine tablets for a period of more than 5 half-lives, it is recommended that initial dosing recommendations and guidelines be followed. The half-life of lamotrigine is affected by other concomitant medications [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Lamotrigine Tablets Added to Drugs Known to Induce or Inhibit Glucuronidation

Because lamotrigine is metabolized predominantly by glucuronic acid conjugation, drugs that are known to induce or inhibit glucuronidation may affect the apparent clearance of lamotrigine. Drugs that induce glucuronidation include carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, rifampin, estrogen-containing oral contraceptives, and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir. Valproate inhibits glucuronidation. For dosing considerations for lamotrigine tablets in patients on estrogen-containing contraceptives and atazanavir/ritonavir, see below and Table 13. For dosing considerations for lamotrigine tablets in patients on other drugs known to induce or inhibit glucuronidation, see Table 1, Table 2, Table 5, Table 6, and Table 13.

Target Plasma Levels for Patients with Epilepsy or Bipolar Disorder

A therapeutic plasma concentration range has not been established for lamotrigine. Dosing of lamotrigine tablets should be based on therapeutic response [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Women taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives

Starting Lamotrigine Tablets in Women taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives

Although estrogen-containing oral contraceptives have been shown to increase the clearance of lamotrigine [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], no adjustments to the recommended dose-escalation guidelines for lamotrigine tablets should be necessary solely based on the use of estrogen-containing oral contraceptives. Therefore, dose escalation should follow the recommended guidelines for initiating adjunctive therapy with lamotrigine tablets based on the concomitant AED or other concomitant medications (see Table 1 or Table 5). See below for adjustments to maintenance doses of lamotrigine tablets in women taking estrogen-containing oral contraceptives.

Adjustments to the Maintenance Dose of Lamotrigine Tablets in Women taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives

(1) Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives

In women not taking carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], the maintenance dose of lamotrigine tablets will in most cases need to be increased by as much as 2-fold over the recommended target maintenance dose to maintain a consistent lamotrigine plasma level.

(2) Starting Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives

In women taking a stable dose of lamotrigine tablets and not taking carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], the maintenance dose will in most cases need to be increased by as much as 2-fold to maintain a consistent lamotrigine plasma level. The dose increases should begin at the same time that the oral contraceptive is introduced and continue, based on clinical response, no more rapidly than 50 to 100 mg/day every week. Dose increases should not exceed the recommended rate (see Table 1 or Table 5) unless lamotrigine plasma levels or clinical response support larger increases. Gradual transient increases in lamotrigine plasma levels may occur during the week of inactive hormonal preparation (pill-free week), and these increases will be greater if dose increases are made in the days before or during the week of inactive hormonal preparation. Increased lamotrigine plasma levels could result in additional adverse reactions, such as dizziness, ataxia, and diplopia. If adverse reactions attributable to lamotrigine tablets consistently occur during the pill-free week, dose adjustments to the overall maintenance dose may be necessary. Dose adjustments limited to the pill-free week are not recommended. For women taking lamotrigine tablets in addition to carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], no adjustment to the dose of lamotrigine tablets should be necessary.

(3) Stopping Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives

In women not taking carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], the maintenance dose of lamotrigine tablets will in most cases need to be decreased by as much as 50% in order to maintain a consistent lamotrigine plasma level. The decrease in dose of lamotrigine tablets should not exceed 25% of the total daily dose per week over a 2-week period, unless clinical response or lamotrigine plasma levels indicate otherwise [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. In women taking lamotrigine tablets in addition to carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation[see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], no adjustment to the dose of lamotrigine tablets should be necessary.

Women and Other Hormonal Contraceptive Preparations or Hormone Replacement Therapy

The effect of other hormonal contraceptive preparations or hormone replacement therapy on the pharmacokinetics of lamotrigine has not been systematically evaluated. It has been reported that ethinylestradiol, not progestogens, increased the clearance of lamotrigine up to 2-fold, and the progestin-only pills had no effect on lamotrigine plasma levels. Therefore, adjustments to the dosage of lamotrigine tablets in the presence of progestogens alone will likely not be needed.

Patients Taking Atazanavir/Ritonavir

While atazanavir/ritonavir does reduce the lamotrigine plasma concentration, no adjustments to the recommended dose-escalation guidelines for lamotrigine tablets should be necessary solely based on the use of atazanavir/ritonavir. Dose escalation should follow the recommended guidelines for initiating adjunctive therapy with lamotrigine tablets based on concomitant AED or other concomitant medications (see Tables 1, 2, and 5). In patients already taking maintenance doses of lamotrigine tablets and not taking glucuronidation inducers, the dose of lamotrigine tablets may need to be increased if atazanavir/ritonavir is added, or decreased if atazanavir/ritonavir is discontinued [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Patients with Hepatic Impairment

Experience in patients with hepatic impairment is limited. Based on a clinical pharmacology study in 24 subjects with mild, moderate, and severe liver impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], the following general recommendations can be made. No dosage adjustment is needed in patients with mild liver impairment. Initial, escalation, and maintenance doses should generally be reduced by approximately 25% in patients with moderate and severe liver impairment without ascites and 50% in patients with severe liver impairment with ascites. Escalation and maintenance doses may be adjusted according to clinical response.

Patients with Renal Impairment

Initial doses of lamotrigine tablets should be based on patients' concomitant medications (see Tables 1 to 3 or Table 5); reduced maintenance doses may be effective for patients with significant renal impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Few patients with severe renal impairment have been evaluated during chronic treatment with lamotrigine tablets. Because there is inadequate experience in this population, lamotrigine tablets should be used with caution in these patients.

Discontinuation Strategy

Epilepsy

For patients receiving lamotrigine tablets in combination with other AEDs, a re-evaluation of all AEDs in the regimen should be considered if a change in seizure control or an appearance or worsening of adverse reactions is observed.

If a decision is made to discontinue therapy with lamotrigine tablets, a step-wise reduction of dose over at least 2 weeks (approximately 50% per week) is recommended unless safety concerns require a more rapid withdrawal [see Warnings and Precautions (5.9)].

Discontinuing carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation should prolong the half-life of lamotrigine; discontinuing valproate should shorten the half-life of lamotrigine.

Bipolar Disorder

In the controlled clinical trials, there was no increase in the incidence, type, or severity of adverse reactions following abrupt termination of lamotrigine tablets. In clinical trials in patients with bipolar disorder, two patients experienced seizures shortly after abrupt withdrawal of lamotrigine tablets. However, there were confounding factors that may have contributed to the occurrence of seizures in these patients with bipolar disorder. Discontinuation of lamotrigine tablets should involve a step-wise reduction of dose over at least 2 weeks (approximately 50% per week) unless safety concerns require a more rapid withdrawal [see Warnings and Precautions (5.9)].

2.2 Epilepsy – Adjunctive Therapy

This section provides specific dosing recommendations for patients older than 12 years and patients aged 2 to 12 years. Within each of these age-groups, specific dosing recommendations are provided depending upon concomitant AEDs or other concomitant medications (see Table 1 for patients older than 12 years and Table 2 for patients aged 2 to 12 years). A weight-based dosing guide for patients aged 2 to 12 years on concomitant valproate is provided in Table 3.

Patients Older than 12 Years

Recommended dosing guidelines are summarized in Table 1.
Table 1. Escalation Regimen for Lamotrigine Tablets in Patients Older than 12 Years with Epilepsy * Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. † Drugs that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance, other than the specified antiepileptic drugs, include estrogen-containing oral contraceptives, rifampin, and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir. Dosing recommendations for oral contraceptives and the protease inhibitor atazanavir/ritonavir can be found in General Dosing Considerations [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Patients on rifampin and the protease inhibitor lopinavir/ritonavir should follow the same dosing titration/maintenance regimen used with antiepileptic drugs that induce glucuronidation and increase clearance [see Dosage and Administration (2.1), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
In Patients TAKING Valproate*

In Patients NOT TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidone†, or Valproate*

In Patients TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidone† and NOT TAKING Valproate*

Weeks 1 and 2

25 mg every other day

25 mg every day

50 mg/day

Weeks 3 and 4

25 mg every day

50 mg/day

100 mg/day (in 2 divided doses)

Week 5 onward

to maintenance

Increase by 25 to 50 mg/day every 1 to 2 weeks.

Increase by 50 mg/day every 1 to 2 weeks.

Increase by 100 mg/day every 1 to 2 weeks.

Usual maintenancedose

100 to 200 mg/day with valproate alone 100 to 400 mg/day with valproate and other drugs that induce glucuronidation

(in 1 or 2 divided doses)

225 to 375 mg/day (in 2 divided doses)

300 to 500 mg/day (in 2 divided doses)

Patients Aged 2 to 12 Years

Recommended dosing guidelines are summarized in Table 2.

Smaller starting doses and slower dose escalations than those used in clinical trials are recommended because of the suggestion that the risk of rash may be decreased by smaller starting doses and slower dose escalations. Therefore, maintenance doses will take longer to reach in clinical practice than in clinical trials. It may take several weeks to months to achieve an individualized maintenance dose. Maintenance doses in patients weighing less than 30 kg, regardless of age or concomitant AED, may need to be increased as much as 50%, based on clinical response.
Table 2. Escalation Regimen for Lamotrigine Tablets in Patients Aged 2 to 12 Years with Epilepsy Note: Only whole tablets should be used for dosing. * Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. † Drugs that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance, other than the specified antiepileptic drugs, include estrogen-containing oral contraceptives, rifampin, and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir. Dosing recommendations for oral contraceptives and the protease inhibitor atazanavir/ritonavir can be found in General Dosing Considerations [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Patients on rifampin and the protease inhibitor lopinavir/ritonavir should follow the same dosing titration/maintenance regimen used with antiepileptic drugs that induce glucuronidation and increase clearance [see Dosage and Administration (2.1), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
In Patients TAKING

Valproate*

In Patients NOT TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidone†, or Valproate*

In Patients TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidone† and NOT TAKING Valproate*

Weeks 1 and 2

0.15 mg/kg/day in 1 or 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet (see Table 3 for weight-based dosing guide)

0.3 mg/kg/day in 1 or 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet

0.6 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet

Weeks 3 and 4

0.3 mg/kg/day

in 1 or 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet (see Table 3 for weight-based dosing guide)

0.6 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet

1.2 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet

Week 5

onward to

maintenance

The dose should be increased every 1 to 2 weeks as follows: calculate 0.3 mg/kg/day, round this amount down to the nearest whole tablet, and add this amount to the previously administered daily dose.

The dose should be increased every 1 to 2 weeks as follows: calculate 0.6 mg/kg/day, round this amount down to the nearest whole tablet, and add this amount to the previously administered daily dose.

The dose should be increased every 1 to 2 weeks as follows: calculate 1.2 mg/kg/day, round this amount down to the nearest whole tablet, and add this amount to the previously administered daily dose.

Usual

maintenance

dose

1 to 5 mg/kg/day (maximum 200 mg/day in 1 or 2 divided doses) 1 to 3 mg/kg/day with valproate alone

4.5 to 7.5 mg/kg/day (maximum 300 mg/day in 2 divided doses)

5 to 15 mg/kg/day (maximum 400 mg/day in 2 divided doses)

Maintenance

dose in

patients less

than 30 kg

May need to be increased by as much as 50%, basedon clinical response.

May need to be increased by as much as 50%, based on clinical response.

May need to be increased by as much as 50%, based on clinical response.
Table 3. The Initial Weight-Based Dosing Guide for Patients Aged 2 to 12 Years Taking Valproate (Weeks 1 to 4) with Epilepsy
If the patient’s weight is

Give this daily dose, using the most appropriate combination of lamotrigine 2 mg and 5 mg tablets

Greater than

And less than

Weeks 1 and 2

Weeks 3 and 4

6.7 kg

14 kg

2 mg every other day

2 mg every day

14.1 kg

27 kg

2 mg every day

4 mg every day

27.1 kg

34 kg

4 mg every day

8 mg every day

34.1 kg

40 kg

5 mg every day

10 mg every day

Usual Adjunctive Maintenance Dose for Epilepsy

The usual maintenance doses identified in Tables 1 and 2 are derived from dosing regimens employed in the placebo-controlled adjunctive trials in which the efficacy of lamotrigine tablets was established. In patients receiving multidrug regimens employing carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, or primidone without valproate, maintenance doses of adjunctive lamotrigine tablets as high as 700 mg/day have been used. In patients receiving valproate alone, maintenance doses of adjunctive lamotrigine tablets as high as 200 mg/day have been used. The advantage of using doses above those recommended in Tables 1 through 4 has not been established in controlled trials.

2.3 Epilepsy – Conversion from Adjunctive Therapy to Monotherapy

The goal of the transition regimen is to attempt to maintain seizure control while mitigating the risk of serious rash associated with the rapid titration of lamotrigine tablets.

The recommended maintenance dose of lamotrigine tablets as monotherapy is 500 mg/day given in two divided doses.

To avoid an increased risk of rash, the recommended initial dose and subsequent dose escalations for lamotrigine tablets should not be exceeded [see Boxed Warning].

Conversion from Adjunctive Therapy with Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidone to Monotherapy with Lamotrigine Tablets

After achieving a dose of 500 mg/day of lamotrigine tablets using the guidelines in Table 1, the concomitant enzyme-inducing AED should be withdrawn by 20% decrements each week over a 4-week period. The regimen for the withdrawal of the concomitant AED is based on experience gained in the controlled monotherapy clinical trial.

Conversion from Adjunctive Therapy with Valproate to Monotherapy with Lamotrigine Tablets

The conversion regimen involves the four steps outlined in Table 4.
Table 4. Conversion from Adjunctive Therapy with Valproate to Monotherapy with Lamotrigine Tablets in Patients Aged 16 Years and Older with Epilepsy
Lamotrigine Tablets

Valproate

Step 1

Achieve a dose of 200 mg/day according to guidelines in Table 1.

Maintain established stable dose.

Step 2

Maintain at 200 mg/day.

Decrease dose by decrements no greater than 500 mg/day/week to 500 mg/day and then maintain for one week.

Step 3

Increase to 300 mg/day and maintain for one week.

Simultaneously decrease to 250 mg/day and maintain for one week.

Step 4

Increase by 100 mg/day every week to achieve maintenance dose of 500 mg/day.

Discontinue.

Conversion from Adjunctive Therapy with Antiepileptic Drugs Other than Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidone, or Valproate to Monotherapy with Lamotrigine Tablets

No specific dosing guidelines can be provided for conversion to monotherapy with lamotrigine tablets with AEDs other than carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or valproate.

2.4 Bipolar Disorder

The goal of maintenance treatment with lamotrigine tablets is to delay the time to occurrence of mood episodes (depression, mania, hypomania, mixed episodes) in patients treated for acute mood episodes with standard therapy. The target dose of lamotrigine tablets is 200 mg/day (100 mg/day in patients taking valproate, which decreases the apparent clearance of lamotrigine, and 400 mg/day in patients not taking valproate and taking either carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin and the protease inhibitor lopinavir/ritonavir that increase the apparent clearance of lamotrigine). In the clinical trials, doses up to 400 mg/day as monotherapy were evaluated; however, no additional benefit was seen at 400 mg/day compared with 200 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. Accordingly, doses above 200 mg/day are not recommended. Treatment with lamotrigine tablets is introduced, based on concurrent medications, according to the regimen outlined in Table 5. If other psychotropic medications are withdrawn following stabilization, the dose of lamotrigine tablets should be adjusted. For patients discontinuing valproate, the dose of lamotrigine tablets should be doubled over a 2-week period in equal weekly increments (see Table 6). For patients discontinuing carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation, the dose of lamotrigine tablets should remain constant for the first week and then should be decreased by half over a 2-week period in equal weekly decrements (see Table 6). The dose of lamotrigine tablets may then be further adjusted to the target dose (200 mg) as clinically indicated.

If other drugs are subsequently introduced, the dose of lamotrigine tablets may need to be adjusted. In particular, the introduction of valproate requires reduction in the dose of lamotrigine tablets [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

To avoid an increased risk of rash, the recommended initial dose and subsequent dose escalations of lamotrigine tablets should not be exceeded [see Boxed Warning].
Table 5. Escalation Regimen for Lamotrigine Tablets in Patients with Bipolar Disorder * Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. † Drugs that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance, other than the specified antiepileptic drugs, include estrogen-containing oral contraceptives, rifampin, and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir. Dosing recommendations for oral contraceptives and the protease inhibitor atazanavir/ritonavir can be found in General Dosing Considerations [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Patients on rifampin and the protease inhibitor lopinavir/ritonavir should follow the same dosing titration/maintenance regimen used with antiepileptic drugs that induce glucuronidation and increase clearance [see Dosage and Administration (2.1), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
In Patients TAKING Valproate*

In Patients NOT TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidone†, or Valproate*

In Patients TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidone† and NOT TAKING Valproate*

Weeks 1 and 2

25 mg every other day

25 mg daily

50 mg daily

Weeks 3 and 4

25 mg daily

50 *mg daily

100 mg daily, in divided doses

Week 5

50 mg daily

100 mg daily

200 mg daily, in divided doses

Week 6

100 mg daily

200 mg daily

300 mg daily, in divided doses

Week 7

100 mg daily

200 mg daily

up to 400 mg daily, in divided doses
Table 6. Dosage Adjustments to Lamotrigine Tablets in Patients with Bipolar Disorder Following Discontinuation of Psychotropic Medications * Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. † Drugs that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance, other than the specified antiepileptic drugs, include estrogen-containing oral contraceptives, rifampin, and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir. Dosing recommendations for oral contraceptives and the protease inhibitor atazanavir/ritonavir can be found in General Dosing Considerations [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Patients on rifampin and the protease inhibitor lopinavir/ritonavir should follow the same dosing titration/maintenance regimen used with antiepileptic drugs that induce glucuronidation and increase clearance [see Dosage and Administration (2.1), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Discontinuation of Psychotropic Drugs (excluding Valproate*, Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidone†)

After Discontinuation of Valproate*

After Discontinuation of Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidone†

Current dose of lamotrigine tablets (mg/day) 100

Current dose of lamotrigine tablets (mg/day)

400

Week 1

Maintain current dose of lamotrigine tablets

150

400

Week 2

Maintain current dose of lamotrigine tablets

200

300

Week 3 onward

Maintain current dose of lamotrigine tablets

200

200

The benefit of continuing treatment in patients who had been stabilized in an 8- to 16-week open-label phase with lamotrigine tablets was established in two randomized, placebo-controlled clinical maintenance trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. However, the optimal duration of treatment with lamotrigine tablets has not been established. Thus, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.
Gabapentin

Gabapentin

2.1 Dosing Information

The recommended dose of naratriptan tablets is 1 mg or 2.5 mg.

If the migraine returns or if the patient has only partial response, the dose may be repeated once after 4 hours, for a maximum dose of 5 mg in a 24 hour period. The safety of treating an average of more than four migraine attacks in a 30 day period has not been established.

2.2 Dosage Adjustment in Patients with Renal Impairment

Naratriptan tablets are contraindicated in patients with severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance: < 15 mL/min) because of decreased clearance of the drug [see Contraindications (4), Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

In patients with mild to moderate renal impairment, the maximum daily dose should not exceed 2.5 mg over a 24 hour period and a 1 mg starting dose is recommended [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 Dosage Adjustment in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

Naratriptan tablets are contraindicated in patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh grade C) because of decreased clearance [see Contraindications (4), Use in Specific Populations (8.7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

In patients with mild or moderate hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh grade A or B), the maximum daily dose should not exceed 2.5 mg over a 24 hour period and a 1 mg starting dose is recommended [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Dronabinol

Dronabinol

Appetite Stimulation

Initially, 2.5 mg Dronabinol Capsules should be administered orally twice daily (b.i.d.), before lunch and supper. For patients unable to tolerate this 5 mg/day dosage of Dronabinol Capsules, the dosage can be reduced to 2.5 mg/day, administered as a single dose in the evening or at bedtime. If clinically indicated and in the absence of significant adverse effects, the dosage may be gradually increased to a maximum of 20 mg/day Dronabinol Capsules, administered in divided oral doses. Caution should be exercised in escalating the dosage of Dronabinol Capsules because of the increased frequency of dose-related adverse experiences at higher dosages. (See PRECAUTIONS.)

Antiemetic

Dronabinol Capsules are best administered at an initial dose of 5 mg/m2, given 1 to 3 hours prior to the administration of chemotherapy, then every 2 to 4 hours after chemotherapy is given, for a total of 4 to 6 doses/day. Should the 5 mg/m2 dose prove to be ineffective, and in the absence of significant side effects, the dose may be escalated by 2.5 mg/m2 increments to a maximum of 15 mg/m2 per dose. Caution should be exercised in dose escalation, however, as the incidence of disturbing psychiatric symptoms increases significantly at maximum dose. (See PRECAUTIONS.)
Equi-phar Coppernate

Equi-phar Coppernate

Dosage should be adjusted to the needs of the individual. The lowest effective dosage should always be used. Dosage should be increased more gradually in debilitated or emaciated patients. When maximum response is achieved, dosage may be reduced gradually to a maintenance level. Because of the inherent long action of the drug, patients may be controlled on convenient b.i.d. administration; some patients may be maintained on once a day administration.

When trifluoperazine hydrochloride is administered by intramuscular injection, equivalent oral dosage may be substituted once symptoms have been controlled.

Note: Although there is little likelihood of contact dermatitis due to the drug, persons with known sensitivity to phenothiazine drugs should avoid direct contact.

Elderly Patients

In general, dosages in the lower range are sufficient for most elderly patients. Since they appear to be more susceptible to hypotension and neuromuscular reactions, such patients should be observed closely. Dosage should be tailored to the individual, response carefully monitored, and dosage adjusted accordingly. Dosage should be increased more gradually in elderly patients.

Non-Psychotic Anxiety

Usual dosage is 1 mg or 2 mg twice daily. Do not administer at doses of more than 6 mg per day or for longer than 12 weeks.

Schizophrenia

Oral

Usual starting dosage is 2 mg to 5 mg b.i.d. (Small or emaciated patients should always be started on the lower dosage.)

Most patients will show optimum response on 15 mg or 20 mg daily, although a few may require 40 mg a day or more. Optimum therapeutic dosage levels should be reached within 2 or 3 weeks.
Dermakleen

Dermakleen

To achieve maximum contraceptive effectiveness, Desogestrel and Ethinyl Estradiol Tablets, USP and Ethinyl Estradiol Tablets, USP must be taken exactly as directed and at intervals not exceeding 24 hours. Desogestrel and Ethinyl Estradiol Tablets, USP and Ethinyl Estradiol Tablets, USP may be initiated using either a Sunday start or a Day 1 start.

NOTE: Each blister is preprinted with the days of the week, starting with Sunday, to facilitate a Sunday start regimen. Six different "day label strips" are provided with each blister in order to accommodate a Day 1 start regimen. In this case, the patient should place the self-adhesive "day label strip" that corresponds to her starting day over the preprinted days.

IMPORTANT: The possibility of ovulation and conception prior to initiation of use of Desogestrel and Ethinyl Estradiol Tablets, USP and Ethinyl Estradiol Tablets, USP should be considered.

The use of Desogestrel and Ethinyl Estradiol Tablets, USP and Ethinyl Estradiol Tablets, USP for contraception may be initiated 4 weeks postpartum in women who elect not to breast-feed. When the tablets are administered during the postpartum period, the increased risk of thromboembolic disease associated with the postpartum period must be considered (see CONTRAINDICATIONS and WARNINGS concerning thromboembolic disease. See also PRECAUTIONS for Nursing mothers).

If the patient starts on Desogestrel and Ethinyl Estradiol Tablets, USP and Ethinyl Estradiol Tablets, USP postpartum, and has not yet had a period, she should be instructed to use another method of contraception until a white tablet has been taken daily for 7 days.

SUNDAY START

When initiating a Sunday start regimen, another method of contraception should be used until after the first 7 consecutive days of administration.

Using a Sunday start, tablets are taken daily without interruption as follows: The first white tablet should be taken on the first Sunday after menstruation begins (if menstruation begins on Sunday, the first white tablet is taken on that day). One white tablet is taken daily for 21 days, followed by 1 green (inert) tablet daily for 2 days and 1 light peach (active) tablet daily for 5 days. For all subsequent cycles, the patient then begins a new 28-tablet regimen on the next day (Sunday) after taking the last light peach tablet. [If switching from a Sunday Start oral contraceptive, the first Desogestrel and Ethinyl Estradiol Tablets, USP and Ethinyl Estradiol Tablets, USP should be taken on the second Sunday after the last tablet of a 21 day regimen or should be taken on the first Sunday after the last inactive tablet of a 28 day regimen.]

If a patient misses 1 white tablet, she should take the missed tablet as soon as she remembers. If the patient misses 2 consecutive white tablets in Week 1 or Week 2, the patient should take 2 tablets the day she remembers and 2 tablets the next day; thereafter, the patient should resume taking 1 tablet daily until she finishes the cycle pack. The patient should be instructed to use a back-up method of birth control if she has intercourse in the 7 days after missing pills. If the patient misses 2 consecutive white tablets in the third week or misses 3 or more white tablets in a row at any time during the cycle, the patient should keep taking 1 white tablet daily until the next Sunday. On Sunday the patient should throw out the rest of that cycle pack and start a new cycle pack that same day. The patient should be instructed to use a back-up method of birth control if she has intercourse in the 7 days after missing pills.

DAY 1 START

Counting the first day of menstruation as "Day 1", tablets are taken without interruption as follows: One white tablet daily for 21 days, one green (inert) tablet daily for 2 days followed by 1 light peach (ethinyl estradiol) tablet daily for 5 days. For all subsequent cycles, the patient then begins a new 28-tablet regimen on the next day after taking the last light peach tablet. [If switching directly from another oral contraceptive, the first white tablet should be taken on the first day of menstruation which begins after the last ACTIVE tablet of the previous product.]

If a patient misses 1 white tablet, she should take the missed tablet as soon as she remembers. If the patient misses 2 consecutive white tablets in Week 1 or Week 2, the patient should take 2 tablets the day she remembers and 2 tablets the next day; thereafter, the patient should resume taking 1 tablet daily until she finishes the cycle pack. The patient should be instructed to use a back-up method of birth control if she has intercourse in the 7 days after missing pills. If the patient misses 2 consecutive white tablets in the third week or if the patient misses 3 or more white tablets in a row at any time during the cycle, the patient should throw out the rest of that cycle pack and start a new cycle pack that same day. The patient should be instructed to use a back-up method of birth control if she has intercourse in the 7 days after missing pills.

ALL ORAL CONTRACEPTIVES

Breakthrough bleeding, spotting, and amenorrhea are frequent reasons for patients discontinuing oral contraceptives. In breakthrough bleeding, as in all cases of irregular bleeding from the vagina, non-functional causes should be borne in mind. In undiagnosed persistent or recurrent abnormal bleeding from the vagina, adequate diagnostic measures are indicated to rule out pregnancy or malignancy. If both pregnancy and pathology have been excluded, time or a change to another preparation may solve the problem. Changing to an oral contraceptive with a higher estrogen content, while potentially useful in minimizing menstrual irregularity, should be done only if necessary since this may increase the risk of thromboembolic disease.

Use of oral contraceptives in the event of a missed menstrual period:
If the patient has not adhered to the prescribed schedule, the possibility of pregnancy should be considered at the time of the first missed period and oral contraceptive use should be discontinued until pregnancy is ruled out. If the patient has adhered to the prescribed regimen and misses two consecutive periods, pregnancy should be ruled out before continuing oral contraceptive use.
Methylphenidate Hydroch...

Methylphenidate Hydrochloride

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of diabetes mellitus with glipizide extended-release tablets or any other hypoglycemic agent. Glycemic control should be monitored with hemoglobin A1C and/or blood-glucose levels to determine the minimum effective dose for the patient; to detect primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication; and to detect secondary failure, i.e., loss of an adequate blood-glucose-lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness. Home blood-glucose monitoring may also provide useful information to the patient and physician. Short-term administration of glipizide extended-release tablets may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually controlled on diet.

In general, glipizide extended-release tablets should be given with breakfast.

Recommended Dosing

The usual starting dose of glipizide extended-release tablets as initial therapy is 5 mg per day, given with breakfast. Those patients who may be more sensitive to hypoglycemic drugs may be started at a lower dose.

Dosage adjustment should be based on laboratory measures of glycemic control. While fasting blood-glucose levels generally reach steady-state following initiation or change in glipizide extended-release tablets dosage, a single fasting glucose determination may not accurately reflect the response to therapy. In most cases, hemoglobin A1C level measured at 3 month intervals is the preferred means of monitoring response to therapy.

Hemoglobin A1C should be measured as glipizide extended-release tablet therapy is initiated and repeated approximately 3 months later. If the result of this test suggests that glycemic control over the preceding 3 months was inadequate, the glipizide extended-release tablet dose may be increased. Subsequent dosage adjustments should be made on the basis of hemoglobin A1C levels measured at 3 month intervals. If no improvement is seen after 3 months of therapy with a higher dose, the previous dose should be resumed. Decisions which utilize fasting blood glucose to adjust glipizide extended-release tablet therapy should be based on at least two or more similar, consecutive values obtained 7 days or more after the previous dose adjustment.

Most patients will be controlled with 5 mg to 10 mg taken once daily. However, some patients may require up to the maximum recommended daily dose of 20 mg. While the glycemic control of selected patients may improve with doses which exceed 10 mg, clinical studies conducted to date have not demonstrated an additional group average reduction of hemoglobin A1C beyond what was achieved with the 10 mg dose.

Based on the results of a randomized crossover study, patients receiving immediate-release glipizide may be switched safely to glipizide extended-release tablets once-a-day at the nearest equivalent total daily dose. Patients receiving immediate-release glipizide also may be titrated to the appropriate dose of glipizide extended-release tablets starting with 5 mg once daily. The decision to switch to the nearest equivalent dose or to titrate should be based on clinical judgment.

In elderly patients, debilitated or malnourished patients, and patients with impaired renal or hepatic function, the initial and maintenance dosing should be conservative to avoid hypoglycemic reactions (see PRECAUTIONS section).

Combination Use

When adding other blood-glucose-lowering agents to glipizide extended-release tablets for combination therapy, the agent should be initiated at the lowest recommended dose, and patients should be observed carefully for hypoglycemia. Refer to the product information supplied with the oral agent for additional information.

When adding glipizide extended-release tablets to other blood-glucose-lowering agents, glipizide extended-release tablets can be initiated at 5 mg. Those patients who may be more sensitive to hypoglycemic drugs may be started at a lower dose. Titration should be based on clinical judgment.

When colesevelam is coadministered with glipizide extended-release tablets, maximum plasma concentration and total exposure to glipizide is reduced. Therefore, glipizide extended-release tablets should be administered at least 4 hours prior to colesevelam.

Patients Receiving Insulin

As with other sulfonylurea-class hypoglycemics, many patients with stable type 2 diabetes receiving insulin may be transferred safely to treatment with glipizide extended-release tablets. When transferring patients from insulin to glipizide extended-release tablets, the following general guidelines should be considered:

For patients whose daily insulin requirement is 20 units or less, insulin may be discontinued and glipizide extended-release tablets therapy may begin at usual dosages. Several days should elapse between titration steps.

For patients whose daily insulin requirement is greater than 20 units, the insulin dose should be reduced by 50% and glipizide extended-release tablets therapy may begin at usual dosages. Subsequent reductions in insulin dosage should depend on individual patient response. Several days should elapse between titration steps.

During the insulin withdrawal period, the patient should test urine samples for sugar and ketone bodies at least 3 times daily. Patients should be instructed to contact the prescriber immediately if these tests are abnormal. In some cases, especially when the patient has been receiving greater than 40 units of insulin daily, it may be advisable to consider hospitalization during the transition period.

Patients Receiving Other Oral Hypoglycemic Agents

As with other sulfonylurea-class hypoglycemics, no transition period is necessary when transferring patients to glipizide extended-release tablets. Patients should be observed carefully (1 to 2 weeks) for hypoglycemia when being transferred from longer half-life sulfonylureas (e.g., chlorpropamide) to glipizide extended-release tablets due to potential overlapping of drug effect.
Zoledronic Acid

Zoledronic Acid

2.1 Asthma

Montelukast sodium should be taken once daily in the evening. The following doses are recommended:

For adults and adolescents 15 years of age and older: one 10 mg tablet.

For pediatric patients 6 to 14 years of age: one 5 mg chewable tablet.

For pediatric patients 2 to 5 years of age: one 4 mg chewable tablet or one packet of 4 mg oral granules.

For pediatric patients 12 to 23 months of age: one packet of 4 mg oral granules.

Safety and effectiveness in pediatric patients less than 12 months of age with asthma have not been established.

There have been no clinical trials in patients with asthma to evaluate the relative efficacy of morning versus evening dosing. The pharmacokinetics of montelukast are similar whether dosed in the morning or evening. Efficacy has been demonstrated for asthma when montelukast was administered in the evening without regard to time of food ingestion.

2.2 Exercise-Induced Bronchoconstriction (EIB)

For prevention of EIB, a single dose of montelukast should be taken at least 2 hours before exercise. The following doses are recommended:

For adults and adolescents 15 years of age and older: one 10 mg tablet.

For pediatric patients 6 to 14 years of age: one 5 mg chewable tablet.

An additional dose of montelukast should not be taken within 24 hours of a previous dose. Patients already taking montelukast sodium daily for another indication (including chronic asthma) should not take an additional dose to prevent EIB. All patients should have available for rescue a short-acting β-agonist. Safety and efficacy in patients younger than 6 years of age have not been established. Daily administration of montelukast sodium for the chronic treatment of asthma has not been established to prevent acute episodes of EIB.

2.3 Allergic Rhinitis

For allergic rhinitis, montelukast sodium should be taken once daily. Efficacy was demonstrated for seasonal allergic rhinitis when montelukast was administered in the morning or the evening without regard to time of food ingestion. The time of administration may be individualized to suit patient needs.

The following doses for the treatment of symptoms of seasonal allergic rhinitis are recommended:

For adults and adolescents 15 years of age and older: one 10 mg tablet.

For pediatric patients 6 to 14 years of age: one 5 mg chewable tablet.

For pediatric patients 2 to 5 years of age: one 4 mg chewable tablet or one packet of 4 mg oral granules.

Safety and effectiveness in pediatric patients younger than 2 years of age with seasonal allergic rhinitis have not been established.

The following doses for the treatment of symptoms of perennial allergic rhinitis are recommended:

For adults and adolescents 15 years of age and older: one 10 mg tablet.

For pediatric patients 6 to 14 years of age: one 5 mg chewable tablet.

For pediatric patients 2 to 5 years of age: one 4 mg chewable tablet or one packet of 4 mg oral granules.

For pediatric patients 6 to 23 months of age: one packet of 4 mg oral granules.

Safety and effectiveness in pediatric patients younger than 6 months of age with perennial allergic rhinitis have not been established.

2.4 Asthma and Allergic Rhinitis

Patients with both asthma and allergic rhinitis should take only one montelukast sodium dose daily in the evening.

2.5 Instructions for Administration of Oral Granules

Montelukast sodium 4 mg oral granules can be administered either directly in the mouth, dissolved in one teaspoonful (5 mL) of cold or room temperature baby formula or breast milk, or mixed with a spoonful of cold or room temperature soft foods; based on stability studies, only applesauce, carrots, rice, or ice cream should be used. The packet should not be opened until ready to use. After opening the packet, the full dose (with or without mixing with baby formula, breast milk, or food) must be administered within 15 minutes. If mixed with baby formula, breast milk, or food, montelukast sodium oral granules must not be stored for future use. Discard any unused portion. Montelukast sodium oral granules are not intended to be dissolved in any liquid other than baby formula or breast milk for administration. However, liquids may be taken subsequent to administration. Montelukast sodium oral granules can be administered without regard to the time of meals.
Penicillin G Procaine

Penicillin G Procaine

2.1 Usual Dosage and Administration

The usual dosage and frequency of administration of doxycycline differs from that of the other tetracyclines. Exceeding the recommended dosage may result in an increased incidence of side effects.

Adults

The usual dose of oral doxycycline is 200 mg on the first day of treatment (administered 100 mg every 12 hours), followed by a maintenance dose of 100 mg daily. The maintenance dose may be administered as a single dose or as 50 mg every 12 hours. In the management of more severe infections (particularly chronic infections of the urinary tract), 100 mg every 12 hours is recommended.

For Pediatric Patients Above 8 Years of Age

The recommended dosage schedule for children weighing 45 kg or less is 4.4 mg/kg of body weight divided into two doses on the first day of treatment, followed by 2.2 mg/kg of body weight given as a single daily dose or divided into two doses on subsequent days. For more severe infections up to 4.4 mg/kg of body weight may be used. For children over 45 kg, the usual adult dose should be used.

Administration of adequate amounts of fluid along with capsule and tablet forms of drugs in the tetracycline-class is recommended to wash down the drugs and reduce the risk of esophageal irritation and ulceration [see Adverse Reactions (6)].

If gastric irritation occurs, doxycycline may be given with food or milk [see Clinical Pharmacology (12)].

When used in streptococcal infections, therapy should be continued for 10 days.

Uncomplicated Urethral, Endocervical, or Rectal Infection Caused by Chlamydia Trachomatis

100 mg by mouth twice a day for 7 days. As an alternate dosing regimen for uncomplicated urethral or endocervical infection caused by Chlamydia trachomatis, administer 200 mg by mouth once a day for 7 days.

Uncomplicated Gonococcal Infections in Adults (Except Anorectal Infections in Men)

100 mg, by mouth, twice-a-day for 7 days. As an alternate single visit dose, administer 300 mg stat followed in one hour by a second 300 mg dose.

Nongonococcal Urethritis (NGU) Caused by U. Urealyticum

100 mg by mouth twice-a-day for 7 days.

Syphilis–Early

Patients who are allergic to penicillin should be treated with doxycycline 100 mg by mouth twice-a-day for 2 weeks.

Syphilis of More Than One Year’s Duration

Patients who are allergic to penicillin should be treated with doxycycline 100 mg by mouth twice-a-day for 4 weeks.

Acute Epididymo-Orchitis Caused by C. Trachomatis

100 mg, by mouth, twice-a-day for at least 10 days.

2.2 For Prophylaxis of Malaria

For adults, the recommended dose is 100 mg daily. For children over 8 years of age, the recommended dose is 2 mg/kg given once daily up to the adult dose. Prophylaxis should begin 1 or 2 days before travel to the malarious area. Prophylaxis should be continued daily during travel in the malarious area and for 4 weeks after the traveler leaves the malarious area.

2.3 Inhalational Anthrax (Post-Exposure)

Adults

100 mg, of doxycycline, by mouth, twice-a-day for 60 days.

Children

weighing less than 45 kg, 2.2 mg/kg of body weight, by mouth, twice-a-day for 60 days. Children weighing 45 kg or more should receive the adult dose.

2.4 Sprinkling the Tablet over Applesauce

Doxycycline hyclate delayed-release tablets may also be administered by carefully breaking up the tablet and sprinkling the tablet contents (delayed-release beads) on a spoonful of applesauce. The delayed-release beads must not be crushed or damaged when breaking up the tablet. Any loss of beads in the transfer would prevent using the dose. The applesauce/doxycycline mixture should be swallowed immediately without chewing and may be followed by a glass of water if desired. The applesauce should not be hot, and it should be soft enough to be swallowed without chewing. In the event that a prepared dose of applesauce/doxycycline cannot be taken immediately, the mixture should be discarded and not stored for later use.
Maprotiline Hydrochlori...

Maprotiline Hydrochloride

A single daily dose is an alternative to divided daily doses. Therapeutic effects are sometimes seen within 3 to 7 days, although as long as 2 to 3 weeks are usually necessary.

Initial Adult Dosage

An initial dosage of 75 mg daily is suggested for outpatients with mild to moderate depression. However, in some patients, particularly the elderly, an initial dosage of 25 mg daily may be used. Because of the long half-life of maprotiline, the initial dosage should be maintained for 2 weeks. The dosage may then be increased gradually in 25 mg increments as required and tolerated. In most outpatients a maximum dose of 150 mg daily will result in therapeutic efficacy. It is recommended that this dose not be exceeded except in the most severely depressed patients. In such patients, dosage may be gradually increased to a maximum of 225 mg.

More severely depressed, hospitalized patients should be given an initial daily dose of 100 mg to 150 mg which may be gradually increased as required and tolerated. Most hospitalized patients with moderate to severe depression respond to a daily dose of 150 mg although dosages as high as 225 mg may be required in some cases. Daily dosage of 225 mg should not be exceeded.

Elderly Patients

In general, lower dosages are recommended for patients over 60 years of age. Dosages of 50 mg to 75 mg daily are usually satisfactory as maintenance therapy for elderly patients who do not tolerate higher amounts.

Maintenance

Dosage during prolonged maintenance therapy should be kept at the lowest effective level. Dosage may be reduced to levels of 75 mg to 150 mg daily during such periods, with subsequent adjustment depending on therapeutic response.
Acamprosate Calcium

Acamprosate Calcium

The recommended dose of acamprosate calcium delayed-release tablets is two 333 mg tablets (each dose should total 666 mg) taken three times daily. A lower dose may be effective in some patients.

Although dosing may be done without regard to meals, dosing with meals was employed during clinical trials and is suggested in those patients who regularly eat three meals daily.

Treatment with acamprosate calcium delayed-release tablets should be initiated as soon as possible after the period of alcohol withdrawal, when the patient has achieved abstinence, and should be maintained if the patient relapses. Acamprosate calcium delayed-release tablets should be used as part of a comprehensive psychosocial treatment program.

2.1 Dosage in Renal Impairment

For patients with moderate renal impairment (creatinine clearance of 30 to 50 mL/min), a starting dose of one 333 mg tablet taken three times daily is recommended. Acamprosate calcium delayed-release tablets are contraindicated in patients with severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance of ≤ 30 mL/min) [see Contraindications (4.2), Warnings and Precautions (5.1), Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Norco

Norco

Enalapril and hydrochlorothiazide are effective treatments for hypertension. The usual dosage range of enalapril is 10 mg to 40 mg per day administered in a single or two divided doses; hydrochlorothiazide is effective in doses of 12.5 mg to 50 mg daily. The side effects (see WARNINGS) of enalapril are generally rare and apparently independent of dose; those of hydrochlorothiazide are a mixture of dose-dependent phenomena (primarily hypokalemia) and dose-independent phenomena (e.g., pancreatitis), the former much more common than the latter. Therapy with any combination of enalapril and hydrochlorothiazide will be associated with both sets of dose-independent side effects but the addition of enalapril in clinical trials blunted the hypokalemia normally seen with diuretics. To minimize dose-independent side effects, it is usually appropriate to begin combination therapy only after a patient has failed to achieve the desired effect with monotherapy.

Dose Titration Guided by Clinical Effect

A patient whose blood pressure is not adequately controlled with either enalapril or hydrochlorothiazide monotherapy may be given enalapril maleate and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 5 mg/12.5 mg or enalapril maleate and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 10 mg/25 mg. Further increases of enalapril, hydrochlorothiazide or both depend on clinical response. The hydrochlorothiazide dose should generally not be increased until 2 to 3 weeks have elapsed. In general, patients do not require doses in excess of 20 mg of enalapril or 50 mg of hydrochlorothiazide. The daily dosage should not exceed two tablets of enalapril maleate and hydrochlorothiazide 10 mg/25 mg.

Replacement Therapy

The combination may be substituted for the titrated components.

Use in Renal Impairment

The usual regimens of therapy with enalapril maleate and hydrochlorothiazide tablets need not be adjusted as long as the patient's creatinine clearance is > 30 mL/min/1.73m2 (serum creatinine approximately ≤ 3 mg/dL or 265 µmol/L). In patients with more severe renal impairment, loop diuretics are preferred to thiazides, so enalapril maleate-hydrochlorothiazide is not recommended. (See WARNINGS: Anaphylactoid Reactions during Membrane Exposure.)
Clonazepam

Clonazepam

Clonazepam is available as a tablet. The tablets should be administered with water by swallowing the tablet whole.

Seizure Disorders

Adults

The initial dose for adults with seizure disorders should not exceed 1.5 mg/day divided into three doses. Dosage may be increased in increments of 0.5 mg to 1 mg every 3 days until seizures are adequately controlled or until side effects preclude any further increase. Maintenance dosage must be individualized for each patient depending upon response. Maximum recommended daily dose is 20 mg.

The use of multiple anticonvulsants may result in an increase of depressant adverse effects. This should be considered before adding clonazepam tablets to an existing anticonvulsant regimen.

Pediatric Patients

Clonazepam tablets are administered orally. In order to minimize drowsiness, the initial dose for infants and children (up to 10 years of age or 30 kg of body weight) should be between 0.01 and 0.03 mg/kg/day but not to exceed 0.05 mg/kg/day given in two or three divided doses. Dosage should be increased by no more than 0.25 mg to 0.5 mg every third day until a daily maintenance dose of 0.1 to 0.2 mg/kg of body weight has been reached, unless seizures are controlled or side effects preclude further increase. Whenever possible, the daily dose should be divided into three equal doses. If doses are not equally divided, the largest dose should be given before retiring.

Geriatric Patients

There is no clinical trial experience with clonazepam tablets in seizure disorder patients 65 years of age and older. In general, elderly patients should be started on low doses of clonazepam tablets and observed closely (see PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).

Panic Disorder

Adults

The initial dose for adults with panic disorder is 0.25 mg bid. An increase to the target dose for most patients of 1 mg/day may be made after 3 days. The recommended dose of 1 mg/day is based on the results from a fixed dose study in which the optimal effect was seen at 1 mg/day. Higher doses of 2, 3 and 4 mg/day in that study were less effective than the 1 mg/day dose and were associated with more adverse effects. Nevertheless, it is possible that some individual patients may benefit from doses of up to a maximum dose of 4 mg/day, and in those instances, the dose may be increased in increments of 0.125 mg to 0.25 mg bid every 3 days until panic disorder is controlled or until side effects make further increases undesired. To reduce the inconvenience of somnolence, administration of one dose at bedtime may be desirable.

Treatment should be discontinued gradually, with a decrease of 0.125 mg bid every 3 days, until the drug is completely withdrawn.

There is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the patient treated with clonazepam tablets should remain on it. Therefore, the physician who elects to use clonazepam tablets for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

Pediatric Patients

There is no clinical trial experience with clonazepam tablets in panic disorder patients under 18 years of age.

Geriatric Patients

There is no clinical trial experience with clonazepam tablets in panic disorder patients 65 years of age and older. In general, elderly patients should be started on low doses of clonazepam tablets and observed closely (see PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).
Lamivudine And Zidovudi...

Lamivudine And Zidovudine

2.1 Adults and Adolescents Weighing ≥ 30 kg

The recommended oral dose of lamivudine and zidovudine tablets in HIV-1-infected adults and adolescents weighing greater than or equal to 30 kg is one tablet (containing 150 mg of lamivudine and 300 mg of zidovudine) twice daily.

2.2 Pediatric Patients

The recommended oral dosage of scored lamivudine and zidovudine tablets for pediatric patients who weigh greater than or equal to 30 kg and for whom a solid oral dosage form is appropriate is one tablet administered twice daily.

Before prescribing lamivudine and zidovudine tablets, children should be assessed for the ability to swallow tablets. If a child is unable to reliably swallow a lamivudine and zidovudine tablet, the liquid oral formulations should be prescribed: EPIVIR®* (lamivudine) Oral Solution and RETROVIR®* (zidovudine) Syrup.

2.3 Patients Requiring Dosage Adjustment

Because lamivudine and zidovudine is a fixed dose combination tablet, it should not be prescribed for pediatric patients weighing less than 30 kg or patients requiring dosage adjustment, such as those with reduced renal function (creatinine clearance less than 50 mL/min), patients with hepatic impairment or patients experiencing dose-limiting adverse reactions. Liquid and solid oral formulations of the individual components of lamivudine and zidovudine tablets are available for these populations.
Guaifenesin

Guaifenesin

The dosage must be determined by individual titration.

Hydrochlorothiazide can be given at doses of 12.5 to 50 mg per day when used alone. The initial dose of propranolol is 80 mg daily, and it may be increased gradually until optimal blood pressure control is achieved. The usual effective dose when used alone is 160 to 480 mg per day.

One propranolol hydrochloride and hydrochlorothiazide tablet twice daily can be used to administer up to 160 mg of propranolol and 50 mg of hydrochlorothiazide. For doses of propranolol greater than 160 mg the combination products are not appropriate, because their use would lead to an excessive dose of the thiazide component.

When necessary, another antihypertensive agent may be added gradually beginning with 50 percent of the usual recommended starting dose to avoid an excessive fall in blood pressure.
Furosemide

Furosemide

2.1 General Instructions for Use

To minimize the risk of seizure, increase the dose gradually [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].

Bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (XL) should be swallowed whole and not crushed, divided, or chewed. Bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (XL) should be administered in the morning and may be taken with or without food.

2.2 Dosage for Major Depressive Disorder (MDD)

The recommended starting dose for MDD is 150 mg once daily in the morning. After 4 days of dosing, the dose may be increased to the target dose of 300 mg once daily in the morning.

It is generally agreed that acute episodes of depression require several months or longer of antidepressant treatment beyond the response in the acute episode. It is unknown whether the bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (XL) dose needed for maintenance treatment is identical to the dose that provided an initial response. Periodically reassess the need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment.

2.3 Dosage for Seasonal Affective Disorder (SAD)

The recommended starting dose for SAD is 150 mg once daily. After 7 days of dosing, the dose may be increased to the target dose of 300 mg once daily in the morning. Doses above 300 mg of bupropion hydrochloride extended-release were not assessed in the SAD trials.

For the prevention of seasonal MDD episodes associated with SAD, initiate bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (XL) in the autumn, prior to the onset of depressive symptoms. Continue treatment through the winter season. Taper and discontinue bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (XL) in early spring. For patients treated with 300 mg per day, decrease the dose to 150 mg once daily before discontinuing bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (XL). Individualize the timing of initiation and duration of treatment should be individualized, based on the patient’s historical pattern of seasonal MDD episodes.

2.4 Switching Patients from WELLBUTRIN®* Tablets or from WELLBUTRIN SR®* Sustained-release Tablets

When switching patients from WELLBUTRIN®* Tablets to bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (XL) or from WELLBUTRIN SR®* Sustained-Release Tablets to bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (XL), give the same total daily dose when possible.

2.5 To Discontinue Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-release Tablets (XL), Taper the Dose

When discontinuing treatment in patients treated with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (XL) 300 mg once daily, decrease the dose to 150 mg once daily prior to discontinuation.

2.6 Dosage Adjustment in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

In patients with moderate to severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh score: 7 to 15), the maximum dose is 150 mg every other day. In patients with mild hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh score: 5 to 6), consider reducing the dose and/or frequency of dosing [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.7 Dose Adjustment in Patients with Renal Impairment

Consider reducing the dose and/or frequency of bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (XL) in patients with renal impairment (Glomerular Filtration Rate < 90 mL/min) [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.8 Switching a Patient to or from a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Antidepressant

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat depression and initiation of therapy with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (XL). Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (XL) before starting an MAOI antidepressant [see Contraindications (4) and Drug Interactions (7.6)].

2.9 Use of Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-release Tablets (XL) with Reversible MAOIs Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (XL) in a patient who is being treated with a reversible MAOI such as linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. Drug interactions can increase risk of hypertensive reactions. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, non-pharmacological interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered [see Contraindications (4)].

In some cases, a patient already receiving therapy with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (XL) may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of hypertensive reactions in a particular patient, bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (XL) should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (XL) may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue.

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (XL) is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of a drug interaction with such use [see Contraindications (4) and Drug Interactions (7.6)].
Nitrofurantoin Monohydr...

Nitrofurantoin Monohydratemacrocrystals

Nitrofurantoin capsules (monohydrate/macrocrystals) should be taken with food.

Adults and Pediatric Patients Over 12 Years: One 100 mg capsule every 12 hours for 7 days.
Ondansetron

Ondansetron

Instructions for Use/Handling Ondansetron Orally Disintegrating Tablets

With dry hands, remove the tablet. IMMEDIATELY place the ondansetron orally disintegrating tablet on top of the tongue where it will dissolve in seconds, then swallow with saliva. Administration with liquid is not necessary.

Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated with Highly Emetogenic Cancer Chemotherapy

The recommended adult oral dosage of ondansetron hydrochloride is 24 mg given as three 8 mg tablets administered 30 minutes before the start of single day highly emetogenic chemotherapy, including cisplatin ≥ 50 mg/m2. Multiday, single-dose administration of a 24 mg dosage has not been studied.

Pediatric Use

There is no experience with the use of a 24 mg dosage in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Use

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population.

Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated with Moderately Emetogenic Cancer Chemotherapy

The recommended adult oral dosage is one 8 mg ondansetron orally disintegrating tablet given twice a day. The first dose should be administered 30 minutes before the start of emetogenic chemotherapy, with a subsequent dose 8 hours after the first dose. One 8 mg ondansetron orally disintegrating tablet should be administered twice a day (every 12 hours) for 1 to 2 days after completion of chemotherapy.

Pediatric Use

For pediatric patients 12 years of age and older, the dosage is the same as for adults. For pediatric patients 4 through 11 years of age, the dosage is one 4 mg ondansetron orally disintegrating tablet given 3 times a day. The first dose should be administered 30 minutes before the start of emetogenic chemotherapy, with subsequent doses 4 and 8 hours after the first dose. One 4 mg ondansetron orally disintegrating tablet should be administered 3 times a day (every 8 hours) for 1 to 2 days after completion of chemotherapy.

Geriatric Use

The dosage is the same as for the general population.

Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated with Radiotherapy, Either Total Body Irradiation, or Single High-Dose Fraction or Daily Fractions to the Abdomen

The recommended oral dosage is one 8 mg ondansetron orally disintegrating tablet given 3 times a day.

For total body irradiation, one 8 mg ondansetron orally disintegrating tablet should be administered 1 to 2 hours before each fraction of radiotherapy administered each day.

For single high-dose fraction radiotherapy to the abdomen, one 8 mg ondansetron orally disintegrating tablet should be administered 1 to 2 hours before radiotherapy, with subsequent doses every 8 hours after the first dose for 1 to 2 days after completion of radiotherapy.

For daily fractionated radiotherapy to the abdomen, one 8 mg ondansetron orally disintegrating tablet should be administered 1 to 2 hours before radiotherapy, with subsequent doses every 8 hours after the first dose for each day radiotherapy is given.

Pediatric Use

There is no experience with the use of ondansetron tablets, ondansetron orally disintegrating tablets or ondansetron oral solution in the prevention of radiation-induced nausea and vomiting in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Use

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population.

Postoperative Nausea and Vomiting

The recommended dosage is 16 mg given as two 8 mg ondansetron orally disintegrating tablets one hour before induction of anesthesia.

Pediatric Use

There is no experience with the use of ondansetron tablets, ondansetron orally disintegrating tablets or ondansetron oral solution in the prevention of postoperative nausea and vomiting in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Use

The dosage is the same as for the general population.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Impaired Renal Function

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population. There is no experience beyond first day administration of ondansetron.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Impaired Hepatic Function

In patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh2 score of 10 or greater), clearance is reduced and apparent volume of distribution is increased with a resultant increase in plasma half-life. In such patients, a total daily dose of 8 mg should not be exceeded.
Quinine Sulfate

Quinine Sulfate

2.1 Treatment of Uncomplicated P. falciparum Malaria

For treatment of uncomplicated P. falciparum malaria in adults: Orally, 648 mg (two capsules) every 8 hours for 7 days [see Clinical Studies (14)].

Quinine sulfate capsules should be taken with food to minimize gastric upset [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.2 Renal Impairment

In patients with acute uncomplicated malaria and severe chronic renal impairment, the following dosage regimen is recommended: one loading dose of 648 mg quinine sulfate capsules followed 12 hours later by maintenance doses of 324 mg every 12 hours.

The effects of mild and moderate renal impairment on the safety and pharmacokinetics of quinine sulfate are not known [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 Hepatic Impairment

Adjustment of the recommended dose is not required in mild (Child-Pugh A) or moderate (Child-Pugh B) hepatic impairment, but patients should be monitored closely for adverse effects of quinine. Quinine should not be administered in patients with severe (Child-Pugh C) hepatic impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Ondansetron

Ondansetron

Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated with Highly Emetogenic Cancer Chemotherapy

The recommended adult oral dosage of ondansetron hydrochloride is 24 mg given as three 8 mg tablets administered 30 minutes before the start of single-day highly emetogenic chemotherapy, including cisplatin ≥ 50 mg/m2. Multiday, single-dose administration of a 24 mg dosage has not been studied.

Pediatric Use

There is no experience with the use of a 24 mg dosage in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Use

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population.

Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated with Moderately Emetogenic Cancer Chemotherapy

The recommended adult oral dosage is one 8 mg ondansetron tablet given twice a day. The first dose should be administered 30 minutes before the start of emetogenic chemotherapy, with a subsequent dose 8 hours after the first dose. One 8 mg ondansetron tablet should be administered twice a day (every 12 hours) for 1 to 2 days after completion of chemotherapy.

Pediatric Use

For pediatric patients 12 years of age and older, the dosage is the same as for adults. For pediatric patients 4 through 11 years of age, the dosage is one 4 mg ondansetron tablet given 3 times a day. The first dose should be administered 30 minutes before the start of emetogenic chemotherapy, with subsequent doses 4 and 8 hours after the first dose. One 4 mg ondansetron tablet should be administered 3 times a day (every 8 hours) for 1 to 2 days after completion of chemotherapy.

Geriatric Use

The dosage is the same as for the general population.

Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated with Radiotherapy, Either Total Body Irradiation, or Single High-Dose Fraction or Daily Fractions to the Abdomen

The recommended oral dosage is one 8 mg ondansetron tablet given 3 times a day.

For total body irradiation, one 8 mg ondansetron tablet should be administered 1 to 2 hours before each fraction of radiotherapy administered each day.

For single high-dose fraction radiotherapy to the abdomen, one 8 mg ondansetron tablet should be administered 1 to 2 hours before radiotherapy, with subsequent doses every 8 hours after the first dose for 1 to 2 days after completion of radiotherapy.

For daily fractionated radiotherapy to the abdomen, one 8 mg ondansetron tablet should be administered 1 to 2 hours before radiotherapy, with subsequent doses every 8 hours after the first dose for each day radiotherapy is given.

Pediatric Use

There is no experience with the use of ondansetron tablets in the prevention of radiation-induced nausea and vomiting in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Use

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population.

Postoperative Nausea and Vomiting

The recommended dosage is 16 mg given as two 8 mg ondansetron tablets one hour before induction of anesthesia.

Pediatric Use

There is no experience with the use of ondansetron tablets in the prevention of postoperative nausea and vomiting in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Use

The dosage is the same as for the general population.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Impaired Renal Function

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population. There is no experience beyond first day administration of ondansetron.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Impaired Hepatic Function

In patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh2 score of 10 or greater), clearance is reduced and apparent volume of distribution is increased with a resultant increase in plasma half-life. In such patients, a total daily dose of 8 mg should not be exceeded.
Butorphanol Tartrate Sp...

Butorphanol Tartrate Spray

Factors to be considered in determining the dose are age, body weight, physical status, underlying pathological condition, use of other drugs, type of anesthesia to be used, and surgical procedure involved. Use in the elderly and in patients with hepatic or renal disease requires extra caution (see PRECAUTIONS and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Individualization of Dosage). The following doses are for patients who do not have impaired hepatic or renal function and who are not on CNS active agents.

Use for Pain

The usual recommended dose for initial nasal administration of butorphanol tartrate nasal solution is 1 mg (1 spray in one nostril). Adherence to this dose reduces the incidence of drowsiness and dizziness. If adequate pain relief is not achieved within 60 to 90 minutes, an additional 1 mg dose may be given.

The initial dose sequence outlined above may be repeated in 3 to 4 hours as required after the second dose of the sequence.

Depending on the severity of the pain, an initial dose of 2 mg (1 spray in each nostril) may be used in patients who will be able to remain recumbent in the event drowsiness or dizziness occurs. In such patients, single additional 2 mg doses should not be given for 3 to 4 hours.

Use in Balanced Anesthesia

The use of butorphanol tartrate nasal solution is not recommended because it has not been studied in induction or maintenance of anesthesia.

Labor

The use of butorphanol tartrate nasal solution is not recommended as it has not been studied in labor.

Safety and Handling

Butorphanol tartrate nasal solution is an open delivery system with increased risk of exposure to health care workers.

In the priming process, a certain amount of butorphanol may be aerosolized; therefore, the pump sprayer should be aimed away from the patient or other people or animals.

The disposal of Schedule IV controlled substances must be consistent with State and Federal Regulations. The unit should be disposed of by unscrewing the cap, rinsing the bottle, and placing the parts in a waste container.

Mylan Pharmaceuticals Inc.

Manufacturer Details

Share This Page

Mylan Pharmaceuticals Inc. Drugs